Eaton PDF

Electrical Sector Solutions
Volume 3 Power Distribution and Control Assemblies

Volume 3:
Power
Distribution
and Control
Assemblies
Eaton Corporation
Electrical Sector
1111 Superior Ave.
Cleveland, OH 44114
United States
877-ETN-CARE (877-386-2273)
Eaton.com
© 2010 Eaton Corporation

All other trademarks are property
of their respective owners.
All Rights Reserved
Printed in USA
Publication No. CA08100004E / MSC
December 2010
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies 3
Tab 1—Medium Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T1-1
Tab 2—SPD, Power Conditioning,
PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T2-1
Tab 3—Motor Control Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T3-1
Tab 4—Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T4-1
Tab 5—Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies . . . . . .V3-T5-1
Tab 6—Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. . . . . . .V3-T6-1
Tab 7—Medium Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T7-1
Tab 8—Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T8-1
Tab 9—Metering Devices, Protective Relays,
Software and Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T9-1
Tab 10—Power System Studies, Field Services
and Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-T10-1
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-A1-1
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-A2-1
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . .V3-A3-1
Copyright
Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not
be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available
upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without
notice. Photographs are representative of production units.
Terms and Conditions

All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes
occur, they are published in Eaton’s Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders
accepted by Eaton’s Electrical Sector are subject to the general terms and conditions
as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.
Technical and Descriptive Publications

This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further
information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated
brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton
Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our website at www.eaton.com.
Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in
facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission
for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of
these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the
U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.
WARNING
The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions
of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that
are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these
codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment.
These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for
every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance.
Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered
sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products
Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior
or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire
obligation of Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties
is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or
modify the existing warranty.
Copyright ©2016 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Introduction
Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

control and automation, and monitoring products.
At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every
successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly
skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage.
In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built
on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer
service and support, we know what’s important to you.
Solutions
Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic
approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on
the following three areas in all we do:
● Reliability—maintain the ● Efficiency—minimize ● Safety—identify and
appropriate level of power energy usage, operating mitigate electrical hazards
continuity without costs, equipment footprint to protect what you value
disruption or unexpected and environmental impact most
downtime
Using the Eaton Catalog Library

As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive
catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our
products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work
in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E,
for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include:
● Volume 1—Residential ● Volume 7—Logic Control, ● Volume 12—Aftermarket,
and Light Commercial Operator Interface and Renewal Parts and Life
(CA08100002E) Connectivity Solutions Extension Solutions
● Volume 2—Commercial (CA08100008E) (CA08100014E)
Distribution (CA08100003E) ● Volume 8—Sensing ● Volume 13—Counters,
● Volume 3—Power Solutions (CA08100010E) Timers and Tachometers
Distribution and Control ● Volume 9—Original (CA08100015E)—Available
Assemblies (CA08100004E) Equipment Manufacturer in electronic format only
● Volume 4—Circuit (CA08100011E) ● Volume 14—Fuses
Protection (CA08100005E) ● Volume 10—Enclosed (CA08100016E)—Available
● Volume 5—Motor Control Control (CA08100012E) in electronic format only
and Protection ● Volume 11—Vehicle and ● Volume 15—Solar Inverters
(CA08100006E) Commercial Controls and Electrical Balance of
● Volume 6—Solid-State (CA08100013E) System (CA08100018E)
Motor Control
(CA08100007E)
These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview
of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information,
consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library.
These references include:
● The Consulting Application ● The Eaton Power Quality
Guide (CA08104001E) Product Guide (COR01FYA)
If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for,
not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the
Literature Library.
By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent
version of each volume and tab.
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—April 2014 www.eaton.com i

Introduction
Icons
Green Leaf
Eaton Green Solutions are products, systems or solutions that represent Eaton
benchmarks for environmental performance. The green leaf symbol is our
promise that the solution has been reviewed and documented as offering
exceptional, industry-leading environmental benefits to customers, consumers
and our communities. Though all of Eaton's products and solutions are
designed to meet or exceed applicable government standards related to
protecting the environment, our products with the Green Leaf designation
further provide “exceptional environmental benefit”.
Learn Online
When you see the Learn Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and search for
the product or training page. There you will find 100-level training courses,
podcasts, webcasts or games and puzzles to learn more.
Drawings Online
When you see the Drawings Online icon, go to Eaton.com/electrical and find the
products page. There you will find a tab that includes helpful product drawings
and illustrations.
Contact Us
If you need additional help, you can find contact information
under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.
ii Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—April 2014 www.eaton.com

Medium Voltage Busway
1.1 Medium Voltage Busway—Nonsegregated Phase Bus

Nonsegregated Phase 600V—
Bus Run Section
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2
1
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2 1
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
Additional Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3 1
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
1
Learn
1
Online
1
End View
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—February 2012 www.eaton.com V3-T1-1
1.1 Medium Voltage Busway
Medium Voltage Busway—Nonsegregated Phase Bus
Contents
1 Nonsegregated Phase 600V, 10 kV BIL–5 kV, 60 kV BIL–15 kV,
95 kV BIL–38 kV, 170 kV BIL
Description Page
1 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
1 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
1
1
Typical 5/15 kV Bus Run Section End View
1
1
1
1
1
1 Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
1 Eaton’s nonsegregated phase
bus runs are designed for use
Ease of Installation Construction Conductors
on circuits whose importance Because of its compact Enclosures are fabricated from All conductors are 100%
1 requires greater reliability dimensions, relative light 11-gauge aluminum, and are conductivity copper bars.
than power cables provide. weight and user-friendly welded for maximum rigidity. Bus joints are made by solidly
1 Typical of such applications design, nonsegregated phase
bus is easily installed. The
11-gauge steel and stainless
steel are options. Removable
bolting the bus bars together
with splice plates on each
are the connections from
1 transformers to switchgear
assemblies in unit
inherent rigidity of the design
permits hanging rods to be
covers are secured with bolts
for ease of access when
side. All joint surfaces are
silver-plated to ensure
spaced approximately every making joints and subsequent maximum conductivity
1 substations, connections
from switchgear assemblies 4 ft (1.2m) for indoor bus and periodic inspection. through the joint. Tin-plating
to rotating apparatus, and runs, and allows supporting is also available. After bolting,
1 tie connections between frames to be spaced
approximately every 8 ft
Enclosures are painted with
a baked-on polyester powder
each standard joint is covered
by a preformed, flame-
switchgear assemblies. coat paint system resulting
1 Nonsegregated phase (2.4m) for outdoor runs.
Standard length of bus in a very durable finish with
retardant insulating boot,
providing full insulation for
bus is an assembly of bus uniform thickness and
run sections is 100 inches bus conductors. These
1 conductors with associated
connections, joints and (2540 mm) or less. gloss. This cosmetically boots are easily removable
pleasing finish minimizes for inspection of the joints at
1 insulating supports confined
within a metal enclosure
Short-Circuit Force
Withstand Ability
the risk of problems in harsh
environments. The standard
any future time.
without interphase barriers.
1 The conductors are adequately Nonsegregated phase
bus runs in 600V, 5 kV
color is ANSI-61 light gray,
and special paint colors are
Temperature Rise
The bus will be capable
separated and insulated from available upon request.
1 each other and ground by and 15 kV are designed
to withstand three-phase Stainless steel hardware
of carrying rated current
continuously without
insulating bus supports. Each option is available.
and phase-to-ground short- exceeding a conductor
1 conductor for 2400V service
and above is insulated with a circuit current of 78 kA rms Expansion joints are supplied temperature rise of 65°C
fluidized bed epoxy coating asymmetrical (132 kA peak) in all straight bus runs at above an outside ambient
1 throughout that reduces the for 10 cycles and 50 kA rms approximately 50 ft (15.2m) temperature of 40°C, as
possibility of corona and symmetrical for 2 seconds. intervals to allow for the required by ANSI Standard
1 electrical tracking. Momentary 4-cycle withstand
ratings up to 158 kA peak
expected expansion when the C37.23.
conductors are energized and
1 (98.8 kA rms asymmetrical)
are also available. For 27 kV
are carrying rated current.
nonsegregated phase bus A variety of terminations is

1 runs, short-circuit withstand available to accommodate
ratings of 64 kA rms most termination
1 asymmetrical (108 kA peak) requirements. Bus runs can
be terminated with flexible
for 10 cycles and 40 kA rms
1 symmetrical for 2 seconds
are standard.
shunts, potheads, porcelain
bushings, or conductor stub
ends for connection to riser
1 bars in switchgear assemblies.
V3-T1-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—February 2012 www.eaton.com
1.1
Standards and Technical Data and Specifications
Certifications 1
The metal-enclosed bus
runs are designed for 600V,
Available Nonsegregated Bus Ratings per ANSI/IEEE Standard C37.23-1987
Rated Momentary
1
Rated Short-Time
5 kV, 15 kV, 27 kV and 38 kV
1
Short-Circuit Short-Circuit
service in accordance with Withstand Current Withstand Current
Rated Rated Power Impulse Rated
ANSI C37.23. 600V, 5 kV and Maximum Power Frequency Withstand Continuous (kA rms Symmetrical) 10 Cycle
15 kV bus is available with Voltage Frequency Withstand 1 Min. (1.2 x 50 microsec) Current kA rms 1
continuous current ratings of kV rms Hz Dry kV rms kV Peak Amperes 2 Sec. 1 Sec. 1 kA Peak Asym.
1200, 2000, 3000, 3200 or
4000A. 27 kV and 38 kV bus
0.635 60 2.2 10 1200 49 69 132 2 78 2 1
2000
is available in 1200 and
2000A continuous ratings.
3000
4000 1
5000
Tests 0.635 60 2.2 10 1200 63 89 170 100.8 1
The design of nonsegregated 2000
bus runs has been tested per 3000
3200 1
ANSI C37.23. Certification of
momentary current testing,
impulse testing and heat rise
4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
49 — 132 78
1
3000
are available upon request. 4000
5000
1
Seismic Application
Bus run assemblies are 4.76 60 19 60 1200
2000
63 — 170 100.8
1
designed to meet Uniform 3000
Building Code (UBC) and
California Code Title 24 for
3200 1
8.25 60 36 95 1200 41 — 111 66
Seismic Zones 4, 3, 2A, 2B,
1 and 0. Complete guidelines
2000
3000
1
for proper supports are 4000
provided on each seismic 5000 1
specified order. 8.25 60 36 95 1200 63 — 170 100.8
2000
3000
1
Additional Information
1
3200
● Technical Data: 15 60 36 95 1200 48 — 130 77
TD01702001E 2000
● Brochure: BR01702001E 3000 1
4000
1
● Final Fit Program: 5000
SA01702001E 15 60 36 95 1200 63 — 170 100.8
Consulting Application
1
● 2000
Guide, CA08104001E 3000
3200
27 60 60 125 1200 40 — 108 64 1
2000
38 60 80 170 1200
2000
40 — 104 64 1
1
3000
3200
4000
5000
1
Notes
1 This is a value calculated from 2 second short-circuit current withstand rating based on relationship l2t = constant.
2 For 600V application, 4-cycle momentary current withstand rating up to 158 kA peak (98.8 kA rms asymmetrical) is also available.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Medium Voltage Nonsegregated Phase Bus—Standard Configurations

1
W W W
1 C 1 2 3 C 1 1 2 2 3 3 C 1 2 3 1 2 3
Bus CL Bus CL Bus CL
1
H H H
1 Optional CL Optional CL Optional CL

Ground Bus Ground Bus Ground Bus
1 Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout 3
1
Bus Duct Rated 49 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds
1 Average
Phase-Phase Optional Weight
1 Wire
Voltage
(kV) 1
Ampere
Rating
Layout
Number Width Height
Conductor
Centerline
Conductor
Size
Conductor
Spacing
Bracing
Supports 2
Ground
Bus
Per Foot
Lbs (kg) 3
Standards
Listing
1 Aluminum Enclosures
3 0.635/5/15 1200 1 20.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 3 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 38 (17) CSA
0.635/5/15 3000 1 20.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 8 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 68 (31) CSA
1 0.635/5/15 3200 1 20.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 8 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 68 (31) —
1
1 4 0.635/5/15 1200 4 26.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 3 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 48 (22) CSA
0.635/5/15 3200 4 26.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 8 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 88 (40) —
1 0.635 4000 5 35.75 17.38 8.13 (2) 0.5 x 6 4.00 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 127 (58) —
1 Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

1 4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
4
4
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.5 x 3
(1) 0.375 x 6
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 2
0.25 x 2
72 (33)
84 (38)
CSA
CSA
1 0.635 4000 5 35.75 17.38 8.13 (2) 0.5 x 8 4.00 Glass polyester 0.25 x 2 188 (85) —
1 Notes
1 All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as an option.
1
2 Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.
3 Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.

1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Medium Voltage Nonsegregated Phase Bus—Standard Configurations
1
W W
C 1 2 3 N C 1 1 2 2 3 3 N N 1
Bus CL H Bus CL H
1
Optional
Ground Bus
CL Optional
Ground Bus
CL 1
Layout 4 Layout 5 1
1
Bus Duct Rated 63 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Seconds
Phase-Phase
Average
Weight
1
1
Voltage Ampere Layout Conductor Conductor Conductor Bracing Ground Per Foot Standards
Wire (kV) 1 Rating Number Width Height Centerline Size Spacing Supports 2 Bus Lbs (kg) 3 Listing
1
Aluminum Enclosures
1
0.635/5/15 3200 1 20.00 17.38 8.13 (1) 0.5 x 8 5.38 Glass polyester 0.25 x 3 78 (35) — 1
4 0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
1200
2000
4
4
26.00
26.00
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.375 x 6
(1) 0.375 x 6
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
61 (28)
61 (28)
—
—
1
0.635 4000 5 35.75 17.38 8.13 (2) 0.5 x 6 4.00 Glass polyester 0.25 x 3 128 (58) — 1
Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)
1
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
2000
3000 1
1 20.00
20.00
17.38
17.38
8.13
8.13
(1) 0.375 x 6
(1) 0.5 x 8
5.38
5.38
Glass polyester
Glass polyester
0.25 x 3
0.25 x 3
68 (31)
89 (40)
—
—
1
1
1
0.635 4000 5 35.75 17.38 8.13 (2) 0.5 x 6 4.00 Glass polyester 0.25 x 3 188 (85) — 1
1
Notes
1 All phase conductors above 635V are fully insulated with epoxy insulation for the rated maximum voltage. Epoxy insulation is available at 600V as an option.
2 Optional poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy bracing supports are available. Consult factory.
3 Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or poly/epoxy support bracing.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
27 kV/38 kV Nonsegregated Phase Bus—–Standard Configurations

1
W W W
1 C 1 2 3
1 2 3 1 2 3
Bus CL H Bus CL Bus CL
1 H H
1 Ground Bus CL
CL CL
Ground Bus Ground Bus
1 Layout 8 Layout 9 Layout 10
1 27 kV Bus Rated up to 108 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second

1 Rated Rated
Enclosure
Material
Enclosure
Size (Inches)
Number
of Bars Ph-Ph
Insulating
Supports Optional
Approx.
Average Listing
Maximum Cont. Ph and Bus Ground Weight
1 Wire
Type
Voltage
kV 1
Current
Amperes
Layout
No. Std. Opt. W H C
Size, Cu
(Inches) 1
Spacing
(Inches) Std. Opt. 2
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
per Foot
Lbs (kg) 3 CSA UL
1 3 27 1200 8 Aluminum — 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00 4 5 6 0.25 x 2 37 (17) Yes No
27 2000 8 Aluminum — 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00 4 5 6 0.25 x 2 49 (22) Yes No
1 27 1200 8 — Steel 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 7.00 4 5 6 0.25 x 2 37 (17) Yes No
1
27 2000 8 — Steel 30.00 21.13 10.00 (1) 0.50 x 4 7.00 4 5 6 0.25 x 2 49 (22) Yes No
1 38 kV Bus Rated up to 104 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second
1 Rated Rated
Enclosure
Material
Enclosure
Size (Inches)
Number
of Bars Ph-Ph
Insulating
Supports Optional
Approx.
Average Listing
Maximum Cont. Ph and Bus Ground Weight
1 Wire
Type
Voltage
kV 1
Current
Amperes
Layout
No. Std. Opt. W H C
Size, Cu
(Inches)
Spacing
(Inches) Std. Opt. 2
Bus, Cu
(Inches)
per Foot
Lbs (kg) 3 CSA UL
1 3 38 1200 9 Aluminum — 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50 Epoxy — — 0.25 x 3 61 (28) Yes No
38 2000 10 Aluminum — 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50 Epoxy — — 0.25 x 3 89 (40.4) Yes No
1 38 1200 9 — Steel 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.25 x 4 10.50 Epoxy — — 0.25 x 3 88 (40) No No
38 2000 10 — Steel 40.25 21.50 11.00 (1) 0.38 x 4 10.50 Epoxy — — 0.25 x 3 116 (53) No No
1 Notes
1
1 All bus bars for applications above 600V are fully insulated with fluidized epoxy coating for the rated maximum voltage.
2 Check with Eaton for availability.
3 Add 3 lbs to the weights shown when using poly/porcelain or epoxy insulating supports in place of glass polyester.
1 4 Glass polyester.
5 Polyester/porcelain.
1 6 Epoxy.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1.1
Nonsegregated Phase Bus Electrical Properties and Watt Loss Data
Electrical Properties
1
Rated Cont.
Wire
Max.
Voltage
Rated
Current
Conductor (Copper)
Thick Width
Enclosure
Size
μOHM/PH/FT
DC 60 Hz
μμF/PH/FT
Cap to Grd
1
1
Type kV Ampere No./Ph Inch Inch Phase Arrang. Material W x H (Inches) R 20°C R XL Z = R+jXL Cg
3 0.635/5/15 1200 1 0.50 3.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 20.00 x 17.38 5.5 7.1 49.8 50.3 2.2
0.635/5/15 2000 1 0.38 6.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 20.00 x 17.38 3.7 4.7 37.0 37.3 4.4 1
0.635/5/15 3000 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 20.00 x 17.38 2.1 2. 31.1 31.3 5.9
0.635/5/15 3200 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 20.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 31.1 31.3 5.9 1
3 0.635/5/15 4000 2 0.50 6.00 1-1-2-2-3-3 Aluminum 35.75 x 17.38 1.4 1.8 35.6 35.6 5.9
0.635/5/15 5000 2 0.50 8.00 1-1-2-2-3-3 Aluminum 35.75 x 17.38 1.0 1.3 32.9 32.9 7.8
1
0.635/5/15 1200 1 0.50 3.00 1-2-3 Steel 20.00 x 17.38 5.5 7.1 49.8 50.3 2.2
1
0.635/5/15 2000 1 0.38 6.00 1-2-3 Steel 20.00 x 17.38 3.7 4.7 37.0 37.3 4.4
3 0.635/5/15 3000 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3 Steel 20.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 31.1 31.3 5.9 1
0.635/5/15 3200 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3 Steel 20.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 31. 31. 5.9
0.635/5/15 4000 2 0.50 8.00 1-1-2-2-3-3 Steel 35.75 x 17.38 1.0 1.3 32.9 32.9 7.8 1
1
0.635/5/15 5000 2 0.50 8.00 1-2-3-1-2-3 Steel 35.75 x 17.38 1.0 1.3 14.6 14.6 7.4
4 0.635/5/15 1200 1 0.50 3.00 1-2-3-N Aluminum 26.00 x 17.38 5.5 7.1 49.8 50.3 1.5
0.635/5/15 2000 1 0.38 6.00 1-2-3-N Aluminum 26.00 x 17.38 3.7 4.7 37.0 37.3 3.1
1
0.635/5/15 3000 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3-N Aluminum 26.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 31.1 31.3 4.1
0.635/5/15 3200 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3-N Aluminum 26.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 31.1 31.3 4.1 1
0.635 4000 2 0.50 6.00 1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N Aluminum 35.75 x 17.38 1.4 1.8 35.6 35.6 4.9
4 0.635/5/15 1200 1 0.50 3.00 1-2-3-N Steel 26.00 x 17.38 5.5 7.1 49.8 50.3 1.5 1
0.635/5/15
0.635/5/15
2000
3000
1
1
0.38
0.50
6.00
8.00
1-2-3-N
1-2-3-N
Steel
Steel
26.00 x 17.38
26.00 x 17.38
3.7
2.1
4.7
2.7
37.0
41.1
37.3
41.2
3.1
4.1
1
0.635 3200 1 0.50 8.00 1-2-3-N Steel 26.00 x 17.38 2.1 2.7 41.1 41.2 4.1 1
0.635 4000 2 0.50 8.00 1-1-2-2-3-3-N-N Steel 35.75 x 17.38 1.0 1.3 32.9 32.9 6.6
3 27 1200 1 0.25 4.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 30.00 x 21.00 8.3 10.6 51.6 52.7 1.7 1
27 2000 1 0.50 4.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 30.00 x 21.00 4.1 5.3 24.8 25.4 1.7
27 1200 1 0.25 4.00 1-2-3 Steel 30.00 x 21.00 8.3 10.6 51.6 52.7 1.7
1
3
27
38
2000
1200
1
1
0.50
0.25
4.00
4.00
1-2-3
1-2-3
Steel
Aluminum
30.00 x 21.00
40.25 x 21.50
4.1
8.3
5.3
10.6
24.8
61.3
25.4
62.3
1.7
2.0
1
38 2000 2 0.38 4.00 1-2-3 Aluminum 40.25 x 21.50 4.1 5.3 59.0 59.2 2.0 1
38 1200 1 0.25 4.00 1-2-3 Steel 40.25 x 21.50 8.3 10.6 61.3 62.3 2.0
38 2000 2 0.38 4.00 1-2-3 Steel 40.25 x 21.50 4.1 5.3 59.0 59.2 2.0 1
Note
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors
and Harmonic Filters
2.1 Surge Protection and Power Conditioning
Industrial Surge Protection Products
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-5 2
SPD Series for Integration into Electrical Distribution Equipment. . . . V3-T2-7
SPD Series for Mounting External to Electrical Distribution Equipment V3-T2-11 2
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SPC Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-16
V3-T2-20
2
CVX050/100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24 2
SP1 Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27
SP2 Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-29 2
AEGIS Powerline Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 2
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46 2
2.2 Power Factor Correction and Harmonic Filtering 2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-49
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
2
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54
2
AUTOVAR 300 Automatic Power Factor Correction Capacitor Systems V3-T2-63
AUTOVAR 600 Automatic Power Factor Correction 2
Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-67
AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-74 2
Transient-Free Static Switching Power Factor Correction Units . . . . . V3-T2-81
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—August 2016 www.eaton.com V3-T2-1
2.1 SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters
Surge Protection and Power Conditioning
Contents
2 Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection
Description Page
2 Introduction
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-5
2 SPD Series for Integration into Electrical
Distribution Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-7
2 SPD Series for Mounting External to
Electrical Distribution Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-11
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-16
2 SPC Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
CVX050/100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
2 SP1 Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27
SP2 Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-29
2 AEGIS Powerline Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-40
V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46
2
2
2 Introduction
2 Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection Critical Load Protection Commercial and Light
● SPD Series for Integration SPD Series Sidemount Units Series filtering and surge Industrial Surge Protection
2 into Electrical Distribution Specification grade surge protection for critical single- The SPC Series offers robust
Equipment protective devices for phase loads. protection in a compact,
2 ● SPD Series for Mounting installation external to ● Current ratings up to 60 A
flexible design and is
configurable for a wide range
External to Electrical electrical distribution
● 120 and 240 Vac units
2 Distribution Equipment equipment.
● 24 and 48 Vdc units
of commercial and light
industrial applications.
SPD Series Integrated Units The SPC combines surge
2
● DIN mounting available on
Specification grade surge some models suppression components
protective devices installed Up to 80 kA of peak surge and the options of EMI/RFI
2
●
within Eaton’s electrical protection filtering, Form C contacts

assemblies. and an audible alarm.
● AC units are UL 1449 4th
2 Edition and UL 1283 5th Surges (also known as
Edition listed transients), due to lightning,
2 utility grid switching,
switching of external/internal
2 inductive or capacitive loads,
and other sources, travel on
2 power line conductors
throughout the electrical
distribution system, causing
2 SPD Series Sidemount Unit
system operating problems
and equipment downtime.
2
2
2
2
SPD Series Integrated Unit
2
2
SPC Series
2 AEGIS Products
2
V3-T2-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—August 2016 www.eaton.com
SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters
2.1
Surge Protection for Sub-Panel and OEM Applications
In today’s business Panelboards with Integrated
2
environment that calls for 24 Surge Protective Devices
hours a day, 7 days a week ● Available in standard and 2
uptime and reliability, Eaton’s custom configurations
CVX050 and CVX100 surge ● Ratings: 2
protective devices (SPDs) ● 120/240 Vac, single-
ensure that a customer’s
investment in equipment and
phase, three-wire 2
● 208Y/120 Vac, three-
processes is protected from
the damaging effects of phase, four-wire 2
voltage transients. Designed ● 480Y/277 Vac, three-
for installation on service phase, four-wire Surge Protective Devices can be
Integrated within a variety of Eaton
2
entrance, branch panels or ● 600Y/347 Vac, three- Electrical Assemblies
individual equipment phase, four-wire (other 2
disconnects, the CVX050/100 voltage configurations
provides enhanced surge
protection for mission-critical
are available) 2
● Copper bus
2
applications.
● 12, 18, 24, 30, 36 and
42 circuits
● Bolt-on branch breakers 2
● A full range of factory
installed modifications 2
and accessories
● Fully rated or series rated 2
2
Power Conditioning 2
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2)
The sag ride-through (SRT2)
Electronic Voltage
Regulator (EVR) 2
is a power conditioner that
corrects voltage sags to
The electronic voltage
regulator (EVR) is designed 2
maintain uptime and to meet the needs of
productivity. customers who experience 2
voltage regulation problems
due to brownout conditions 2
from their electric utilities.
2
2
2
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR)
2
2
Facility-Wide Power Protection Solutions
2
A facility-wide protection The most accepted design methodology is based on two concepts: 2
approach should be
employed to address power 1. Ensure proper grounding conditions exist. 2. Surge protection should be installed 2
quality issues. This approach All forms of power protection/conditioning at key distribution panels and
minimizes overall lifecycle
costs and optimizes facility
rely on good grounding, bonding and critical loads. 2
earthing practices.
uptime. The following is a
recommended design
2
approach for implementing
facility-wide Eaton power 2
protection solutions.
2
Application Description
2
2 Application Recommendations for Surge Products
2 Application Type Eaton’s Surge Product Features and Competitive Advantages

Light Commercial
2 Design build SPD Series integrated units Ideal package for any commercial facility
Chain stores SPD Series sidemount units Cost-effective, reliable protection using the SPD Series or SPC units
2 Small facilities SPC units
CVX units
2 SP1 units
Large Projects
2 Including: SPD Series integrated units in panelboards, switchboards, Able to meet competitors’ surge protection specifications
MCCs, switchgear, busway and automatic transfer switches
2
Commercial Increased surge protection performance by using integrated SPD Series units
Government SPD Series sidemount units Wall space savings by using integrated SPD Series units
SPD MAX units
2
Schools Quick-ship capabilities from Eaton assembly satellites and service centers
Institution AEGIS units for critical load applications Power conditioning capability for a wide variety of applications
Power conditioners (EVR and SRT2 units)
2
Military
Industrial
2 Including: SPD Series integrated units in panelboards, switchboards,

MCCs, switchgear, busway and automatic transfer switches
Increased surge protection performance by using integrated SPD Series units
Small and large facilities Wall space savings by using integrated SPD Series units
2 WWTP SPD Series sidemount units

SPD MAX units
MCCs with SPD Series units installed protect drives from damage
AEGIS products protect expensive critical loads from harmful damage
2 AEGIS units for critical load applications such as PLCs,

robotics applications, etc.
EVR units correct voltage regulation problems
SRT2 units correct voltage sag problems
Power conditioners (EVR and SRT2 units)
2 OEM
2 Any OEM customer including:

Integrators
SPD Series integrated units
SPD Series sidemount units
Years of experience in a variety of OEM applications
Application assistance and recommendations
2 Medical equipment CVX units

SPC units
Small footprint enables integration in a variety of applications
Ability to meet customized requirements
2 Automation and control SP1 units

SP2 units
2 AEGIS units for critical load applications

Telecommunications
2 Including: Panelboards and automatic transfer switches with integrated SPD Series units Ability to meet customized requirements
Cellular sites SPD Series sidemount units Application assistance and recommendations
2 Microwave CVX units
SPC units
2 PCS SP1 units
Paging systems SP2 units
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Contents
SPD Series Sidemount Units
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
Product Overview
SPD Series for Integration into Electrical
2
SPD Series for Mounting External to
Electrical Distribution Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-11 2
SPC Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20 2
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
SP1 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27 2
SP2 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-29
AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-40
V3-T2-42 2
Learn 2
Online
2
Product Overview 2
Product Description Features, Benefits and Functions 2
Eaton’s SPD series surge A complete offering of ● Uses thermally protected Safety Features
protective devices are the sidemount units designed metal oxide varistor (MOV) ● All units use thermally 2
latest and most advanced for mounting external to technology protected metal oxide
UL® 1449 4th Edition certified
surge protectors. Units are
electrical distribution
equipment is also available.
● Three feature package varistor technology (MOV) 2
options as their core surge
available integrated within
Eaton electrical assemblies,
Application of SPD Series
units throughout a facility
● True protection status
indicators report the status
suppression component.
Usage of this technology
2
including panelboards, will ensure that equipment ensures safe operation
switchboards, motor is protected with the safest
of the protection elements,
not the status of the when the unit is subjected 2
control centers, switchgear, and most reliable surge applied power to abnormal conditions
automatic transfer switches
and bus plugs.
protective devices available.
SPD Series units are available
● Available integrated such as temporary 2
within the following overvoltage or high fault
in all common voltages and
configurations and also Eaton electrical assemblies: current conditions. Under
such conditions, the self-
2
in a variety of surge current panelboards, switchboards,
capacity ratings from 50 motor control centers, protected MOVs are
removed from the circuit 2
through 400 kA. Three switchgear, automatic
quickly and safely before a
feature package options are transfer switches and
bus plugs potentially unsafe condition 2
also available to choose from, can occur
ensuring the proper unit is
available for a variety of
● 10-year warranty
(15-year warranty with
● SPD Series units contain 2
online registration) no replaceable parts such
SPD Series Integrated Units applications. as surge modules, fuses, 2
or surge counter memory
backup batteries. This
prevents potential arc flash
2
and shock hazards, as the
units require no periodic 2
service or user intervention
after installation 2
● Integrated versions of the
unit are factory installed 2
and sidemount versions
are factory sealed. These
important safety measures
2
further enhance user
safety 2
2
2
Three Feature Package Standard Feature Package Side-By-Side Comparison of the SPD Series’ Available
2 Options Available The standard feature package Feature Packages
The SPD Series provides includes all of the features
2
Standard with
users with the option of found in the basic feature Feature Package Comparison Basic Standard Surge Counter
selecting between three package, plus an audible alarm
■ ■ ■
2
Surge protection using self-protected
feature packages. These with silence button, EMI/RFI MOV technology
feature packages are the filtering, and a form ‘C’ relay
Dual-colored protection status indicators ■ ■ ■
2 basic, standard and standard
with surge counter. The
contact that can be used for
remote annunciation of the
for each phase
proper feature package SPD’s status. The audible Dual-colored protection status indicators ■ ■ ■
2 can be selected based on alarm activates and the form for the N-G protection mode
the requirements of the ‘C’ relay contact changes state Audible alarm with silence button ■ ■
2 application or specification. when any loss of protection is Form ‘C’ relay contact ■ ■
A side by side comparison of detected or a fault condition
■ ■
2
EMI/RFI filtering, providing up to 50 dB of
the individual features found exists with the unit. Should
noise attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz
in each package is below. such a condition occur, the
Surge counter with reset button ■
2 Basic Feature Package
audible alarm can be silenced
by pressing the silence button.
The basic feature package is The EMI/RFI filter provides up Standards and Certifications Technical Data
2 perfect for applications where
basic, cost-effective, safe and
to 50 dB of noise attenuation ● Integrated versions of and Specifications
over the range of 10 kHz the unit are UL 1449 20 kA nominal discharge
2
●
reliable surge protection is through 100 MHz.
required, but budgets don’t 4th Edition recognized current (In) rating
allow for extra, additional Standard with Surge components for the (maximum rating
2 features. Rather than Counter Feature Package United States and Canada, assigned by UL)
sacrifice performance or The standard with surge covered by Underwriters ● 50 through 400 kA surge
2 safety due to cost, SPD counter feature package Laboratories certification
and follow-up service
current capacity ratings
Series units with the basic includes all of the features ● 200 kA short-circuit current
2 feature package provide you
with high-performing surge
found in the standard feature
package plus a six-digit surge
● Sidemount versions are
UL 1449 4th Edition listed
rating (SCCR)
devices and are also
2 protection without sacrificing counter with a reset button.
safety or reliability. The basic The surge counter indicates CSA approved
feature package provides the ongoing count of the
2 the same level of surge number of surges the unit has
protection and safety been exposed to and stores
2 provided by the standard and them in nonvolatile memory.
Should power to the SPD
standard with surge counter
2 feature packages minus
some of the features found in
Series unit be completely
interrupted, the surge counter
will recall and display the
2
them. The package contains
dual-colored protection status surge count prior to the
LEDs that report the true interruption when power is
2 status of the protection in restored. Unlike many surge
each phase/mode. All four- protectors, the SPD Series’
2 wire plus ground units also
contain an additional set of
surge counter memory
feature does not require a
2 dual-colored protection status
LEDs that report the status
backup battery that would
require periodic replacement
of the protection in the in order to achieve its
2 neutral/ground mode. memory functionality.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Contents
SPD Series Unit Integrated within an Eaton Panelboard
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
Distribution Equipment
2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-8
V3-T2-8 2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-9
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-10 2
SPC Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-20
V3-T2-24
2
SP1 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-27
V3-T2-29 2
AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-31
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-36 2
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40
2
SPD Series for Integration into Electrical Distribution Equipment 2
Product Description Application Description 2
Eaton’s SPD Series surge The SPD Series is available as The Integrated SPD
protective devices are the an integrated device within Performance Advantage 2
latest and most advanced the following Eaton electrical Installation conductor length
UL 1449 4th Edition certified
surge protectors. SPD Series
assemblies: is the single most important
factor related to an SPD’s
2
● Panelboards
units are available in all
common voltages and ● Switchboards
performance. Performance
decreases as the connected 2
configurations, and also in ● Motor control centers conductor length increases.
a variety of surge current ● Switchgear Integrating the SPD within the 2
capacity ratings from electrical assembly provides
Automatic transfer
2
●
50 to 400 kA. the best possible surge
switches
protection by keeping
● Bus plugs installation conductor lead
lengths as short as possible.
2
Features, Benefits In this installation, the SPD Series
and Functions Integrating the SPD within
an electrical assembly can
is mounted directly to the panelboard’s
bus bars. This type of installation
2
● Uses thermally protected decrease let-through will provide the best possible surge
metal oxide varistor (MOV)
technology
voltages by hundreds of volts, protection by minimizing the
connected lead length.
2
providing you with the best
● Three feature package
options
possible surge protection for 2
sensitive electronic loads.
● 10-year warranty
(15-year with online Remote Display Mounting 2
registration) Option Available
The SPD Series offers the 2
option of mounting its display
remotely from the device. 2
This is useful for applications
where OEMs or other
integrators would like to
2
embed the unit within a piece
of equipment and still be able 2
to view its display.
2
The SPD Series is also available as an
integrated unit interfaced via a circuit
2
breaker resident in the electrical
assembly. This installation keeps
connected lead lengths short while
2
providing a means of disconnecting
power to the unit quickly and easily. 2
Standards and Certifications

2 ● UL 1449 4th Edition
recognized component
2 for the United States
and Canada, covered by
2 Underwriters Laboratories
certification and follow-up
2 service
● UL 1283 5th Edition
2 (Type 2 SPDs only)
2
2
2 Catalog Number Selection
2 SPD Series Units Mounted Internal to Electrical Distribution Equipment
2 SPD 250 480D 2 J

2 Series Application—Integrated Units 2
kA Rating
2 SPD = Surge protective device
050 = 50 kA per phase Voltage Code
A = Panelboards (PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E), direct bus mounted
B = Switchgear (includes remote display)
080 = 80 kA per phase 240S = 120/240 single split-phase C = Panelboards (PRL1a, 2a, 3a, 3E, 4), switchboards,
2 100 = 100 kA per phase
120 = 120 kA per phase
208Y = 120/208 wye (4W+G)
220Y = 127/220 wye (4W+G)
busway
J = Motor control centers
2
160 = 160 kA per phase 400Y = 230/400 wye (4W+G)
200 = 200 kA per phase 480Y = 277/480 wye (4W+G)
250 = 250 kA per phase Feature Package
600Y = 347/600 wye (4W+G)
240D = 240 delta (3W+G)
480D = 480 delta (3W+G)
1 = Basic
2 = Standard
600D = 600 delta (4W+G) 3 = Standard + surge counter
2 240H = 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) on ‘B’ phase 1
2 Notes
1 Please consult the factory for 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) applications with high leg on ‘C’ phase.
2
2 Units used in PRL1a, 2a, 3a and 3E panelboard applications are available in 50–200 kA ratings only. Use the ‘C’ option for
PRL1a, 2a, 3a and 3E panelboard applications when unit is connected through a circuit breaker.
Example: SPD250480D2J = SPD Series, 250 kA per phase, 480D voltage, standard feature package, motor control center application.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Technical Data and Specifications
2
SPD Series Specifications 2
Description
Surge capacity ratings available
Specification
50, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 250, 300, 400 kA per phase
2
Nominal discharge current (In) 20 kA (maximum rating assigned by UL) 2
Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 200 kA
SPD type Basic feature package = Type 1 (can also be used in Type 2 applications) 2
Standard and standard with surge counter feature packages = Type 2
Single split-phase voltages available 120/240 2
Three-phase wye system voltages available 120/208, 127/220, 230/400, 277/480, 347/600
Three-phase delta system voltages available 240, 480, 600
2
Input power frequency
Power consumption (basic units):
50/60 Hz
2
208Y, 220Y, 240S, 240D and 240H voltage codes 0.5 W 2
400Y, 480Y and 480D voltage codes 1.1 W
600Y and 600D voltage codes 1.3 W 2
2
Power consumption (standard and standard with surge counter units):
208Y, 220Y, 240S, 240D and 240H voltage codes 0.6 W
400Y, 480Y and 480D basic voltage codes 1.7 W
2
600Y and 600D voltage codes 2.1 W
Protection modes Single split-phase L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L 2
Three-phase wye L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
Three-phase delta L-G, L-L 2
Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV):
Three-phase high-leg delta L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
2
240S, 208Y, 220Y and 240H MCOV 150 L-N, 150 L-G, 150 N-G, 300 L-L 2
400Y and 480Y MCOV 320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G, 640 L-L
600Y MCOV 420 L-N, 420 L-G, 420 N-G, 840 L-L 2
240D MCOV 320 L-G, 320 L-L
480D MCOV 640 L-G, 640 L-L
2
600D MCOV
Ports
840 L-G, 840 L-L
1
2
Operating temperature –40 °F through 122 °F (–40 °C through 50 °C) 2
Operating humidity 5% through 95%, noncondensing
Operating altitude Up to 16,000 ft (5000 m) 2
2
Seismic withstand capability Meets or exceeds the requirements specified in IBC 2006, CBC 2007 and UBC Zone 4
Form C relay contact ratings 150 Vdc or 125 Vac, 1 A maximum
Form C relay contact logic Power ON, normal state—NO contact = open, NC contact = closed
Power OFF or fault state—NO contact = closed, NC contact = open
2
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Dimensions
2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
50–200 kA Integrated Units
2 Mounting 0.22 3x Bus Mounting
8.80
2
(5.6)
(223.5)
4.40
(111.8)
2 Bus 0.34
0.19
(4.8)
4x Mounting 0.04
(1.0)
2.02 2.02
(51.2) (51.2)
(8.6)
2 0.95 NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
(24.1) NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
2 5.40
CAUTION
Mounting
FORM “C” CONTACTS

(137.2)
2 3.42
(86.9)
SPD Series
Surge Protective Device
4.66
3.42 (118.4)
2 (86.9)
GROUND TORQUE
NEU/GND
36 IN. LBS.
SURGE SURGE GROUND
2 SURGE
GROUND
SURGE GROUND
2 2.52 3.42 0.22

0.26 4x Mounting
(64.0) (86.9) (5.6)
(6.6)
Terminals
2
3.45 4x #10–32 x 0.38 DP
(87.6) 8.74 Brass Terminals
(222.0)
2 9.50
(241.3)
2
250–400 kA Integrated Units
2 Mounting
8.80
2 4x Mounting (223.5)
2.52 3.42
2 (64.0)
GROUND
(86.9)
GROUND
2
SURGE SURGE
SPD Series
SURGE GROUND Surge Protective Device
SURGE
36 IN. LBS.
NEU/GND GROUND
3.42 Mounting
TORQUE
2 (86.9) 3.42 CAUTION 5.40

FORM “C” CONTACTS
(86.9) (137.2)
2 4.66
(118.4)
2
TORQUE
NEU/GND
36 IN. LBS.
1.71
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
(43.4)
2
NEUTRAL NEUTRAL
4.85 Terminals 0.22

4x Mounting
2 (123.2) 8.74
(222.0)
(5.6)
5.78 9.50 4x #10–32 x 0.38 DP

2 (146.8) (241.3) Brass Terminals
2 Weights
● 50–200 kA units
2 approximately 3.5 lb
(1.6 kg)
2 ● 250–400 kA units
approximately 7.0 lb
(3.2 kg)
2
2
2
2.1
Contents
Eaton SPD Series Sidemount Unit Mounted Externally to an Eaton Panelboard
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
2
Electrical Distribution Equipment 2
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-12
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-13 2
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-14
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-16 2
SPC Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-24
V3-T2-27
2
V3-T2-29
V3-T2-31 2
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-36
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 2
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46 2
2
2
2
SPD Series for Mounting External to Electrical Distribution Equipment 2
Product Description
Eaton’s sidemount versions
Features, Benefits
and Functions
● UL 1449 4th Edition
2
of the SPD Series surge Uses self-protected metal listed device
2
●
protective devices are the oxide varistor (MOV) ● Canadian Standards

latest and most advanced technology
2
Association (CSA)
UL 1449 4th Edition listed ● Three feature package ● UL 1283 5th Edition
surge protectors. Application options (Type 2 SPDs only)
of SPD Series units ● 10-year warranty 2
throughout a facility will
(15-year with registration)
ensure that equipment is
protected with the safest and
2
most reliable surge protective
devices available. Units are 2
All SPD Series sidemount units come
available in all common
2
prewired and include a factory-
voltages and configurations, installed conduit interface,
and also in a variety of surge making installation very easy.
current capacity ratings from
50 through 400 kA. Three
2
feature package options are
also available to choose from. 2
2
2
2
All SPD Series units are factory sealed,
ensuring that the user/installer has
no potential of coming into contact
with harmful voltages present
inside the unit. 2
2
2
2
Catalog Number Selection

2
2 SPD Series Units for Mounting External to Electrical Distribution Equipment
2 SPD 250 480D 2 K

2 Series Application—Sidemount Units
SPD = Surge protective device kA Rating K = NEMA 1 enclosure
2 050 = 50 kA per phase Voltage Code L = NEMA 1 flushmount enclosure 2
080 = 80 kA per phase 240S = 120/240 single split-phase M = NEMA 1 enclosure with internal disconnect
208Y = 120/208 wye (4W+G)
220Y = 127/220 wye (4W+G)
N
O
=
=
NEMA 4 enclosure
NEMA 4 enclosure with internal disconnect
160 = 160 kA per phase 400Y = 230/400 wye (4W+G) P = NEMA 4X enclosure (stainless steel)
480Y = 277/480 wye (4W+G)
600Y = 347/600 wye (4W+G)
Q = NEMA 4X enclosure with internal disconnect
(stainless steel)
2
300 = 300 kA per phase 240D = 240 delta (3W+G)
600D = 600 delta (4W+G) Feature Package
2 240H = 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) on ‘B’ phase 1 1 = Basic

2 = Standard
3 = Standard + surge counter
2
Notes
2 1 Please consult the factory for 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) applications with high leg on ‘C’ phase.
2 NEMA 1 flushmount units are available in 50–200 kA ratings only.
2 Example: SPD250480D2K = SPD Series, 250 kA per phase, 480D voltage, standard feature package, housed in NEMA 1 enclosure.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
2
SPD Series Specifications
Description Specification
2
Surge capacity ratings available 50, 80, 100, 120, 160, 200, 250, 300, 400 kA per phase 2
Nominal discharge current (In) 20 kA (maximum rating assigned by UL)
Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 200 kA 2
SPD type Basic feature package = Type 1 (can also be used in Type 2 applications)
Standard and standard with surge counter feature packages = Type 2 2
Single split-phase voltages available 120/240
Three-phase wye system voltages available 120/208, 127/220, 230/400, 277/480, 347/600 2
Three-phase delta system voltages available
Input power frequency
240, 480, 600
50/60 Hz
2
Power consumption (basic units): 2
400Y, 480Y and 480D voltage codes 1.1 W 2
600Y and 600D voltage codes 1.3 W
Power consumption (standard and standard with surge counter units):
2
2
600Y and 600D voltage codes 2.1 W 2
Protection modes Single split-phase L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
Three-phase wye L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L 2
2
Three-phase delta L-G, L-L
Three-phase high-leg delta L-N, L-G, N-G, L-L
2
240S, 208Y, 220Y and 240H MCOV 150 L-N, 150 L-G, 150 N-G, 300 L-L
400Y and 480Y MCOV 320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G, 640 L-L 2
600Y MCOV 420 L-N, 420 L-G, 420 N-G, 840 L-L
240D MCOV 320 L-G, 320 L-L 2
480D MCOV
600D MCOV
640 L-G, 640 L-L
840 L-G, 840 L-L
2
Ports 1 2
Operating temperature –40 °F to 122 °F (–40 °C to 50 °C)
Operating humidity 5% through 95%, noncondensing 2
Operating altitude Up to 16,000 ft (5000 m)
Seismic withstand capability Meets or exceeds the requirements specified in IBC 2006, CBC 2007 and UBC Zone 4
2
Enclosure dimensions and weights Refer to figures on Pages V3-T2-14–V3-T2-15 for enclosure dimensions and weights
2
Form C relay contact ratings 150 Vdc or 125 Vac, 1 A maximum
Form C relay contact logic Power ON, normal state—NO contact = open, NC contact = closed
Power OFF or fault state—NO contact = closed, NC contact = open
2
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Dimensions
2 50–200 kA Units in a NEMA 1 Rated Enclosure, 50–200 kA Units in a NEMA 1 Rated Flushmount Enclosure,
Weight = 6.8 Lb Weight = 6.8 Lb
2 7.28
7.28
(184.9) 1.00
2 5.27 Flushmount Panel (184.9) 1.00
(25.4)
(133.9) (4) #8–32 Flat Hd Screws 5.27 (25.4)
(133.9)
2
2 10.48
(266.2)
12.05
(306.1)
8.00
2 12.05
(306.1)
10.48
(266.2)
11.25
(285.8)
(203.2)
11.25
0.68
2
0.68 (285.8)
5.24 (17.3) 5.24 (17.3) 14.00
(133.1) (133.1) (355.6)
2
Ø0.20
Ø0.20 (Ø5.1)
(Ø5.1)
2
0.78
2.00 (19.8) 5.00
(50.8) 7.47 0.40 3.48 0.11 0.40
2.00 (127.0)
0.78 (189.7) (10.2) (88.4) (2.8) (10.2)
2
3.48 7.47
(19.8) (50.8) 4.41 0.98
(88.4) 1.76 (189.7)
4.41 (112.0) (24.9)
(44.7) 11.00
2 (112.0) (279.4)
2 250–400 kA Units in a NEMA 1 Rated Enclosure,

Weight = 13.5 Lb 50–400 kA Units in a NEMA 1 Rated Enclosure with Internal
Disconnect, Weight = 14.7 Lb
2 5.47
1.00
(25.4)
9.14
2
(138.9) 6.69
(169.9) (232.2)
2
12.05
2 (306.1) 10.48
(266.2)
11.25
12.30
(312.4)
0.66
(16.8)
11.50
(285.8)
2 5.24
0.67
(17.0)
2.61
(66.3)
10.73
(272.5)
(292.1)
(133.1)
2
Ø0.20
2
2.00
(Ø5.1) 7.47 2.75 Ø0.20
0.78 (50.8) 0.40
5.76 (189.7) 0.78 (69.9) (Ø5.1) 11.14
(19.8) (10.2) (19.8) (283.0)
2
(146.3) 5.76
6.69
(169.9) (146.3)
6.55
2 (166.4)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 2
50–200 kA Units in a NEMA 4 or 4X Rated Enclosure, 50–400 kA Units in a NEMA 4 or 4X Rated Enclosure with 2
Weight = 14.6 Lb Internal Disconnect, Weight = 27.5 Lb
2
13.50 SPD Series
2
SPD Series Surge Protective Device
Surge Protective Device (342.9) 12.75
12.50
(317.5) 11.75 11.98 (323.9)
2
(298.5) (304.3)
12.28
10.98 3.12 (311.9)
(278.9) 11.28 (79.2)
5.49
(286.5)
0.65
0.65
(16.5)
SPD Series 2
(139.4)
(16.5)
SPD Series
0.76 3.36 10.18 Ø0.33

2
(85.3) (258.6) (Ø8.4)
2
2.60 (19.3)
0.76 6.00 7.68 12.47
(19.3) (66.0) Ø0.33 (316.7)
(152.4) (195.1)
5.39 8.65 (Ø8.4)
(136.9) (219.7) 2
250–400 kA Units in a NEMA 4 or 4X Rated Enclosure, 2
Weight = 14.6 Lb
2
10.98
SPD Series
Surge Protective Device 2
11.28
(278.9)
12.50
(286.5)
11.75 2
(298.5)
2
(317.5)
5.49 0.65 Surge Protective Device
(139.4) (16.5) SPD Series
2
2
4.10 6.00
0.76 Ø0.33
(104.1) (152.4)
(19.3) 7.68 8.65 (8.4)
2
(195.1) (219.7)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Contents
2 SPD MAX
Description Page
2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-5
Electrical Distribution Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-11
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-16
2 Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-17
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-19
SPC Surge Protective Device
2 CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-24
V3-T2-27
2 SP2 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-29
V3-T2-31
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40
Power-Sure 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
2 Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46
2
2
2
2 SPD MAX Series Surge Protection
2 Product Description
Eaton’s SPD MAX Series
The breadth of the SPD MAX
Features
● Uses thermally protected
● UL 1449 3rd Edition
2 side-mounted surge
protective devices are the
Series’ features, options and
configurations ensures that
metal oxide varistor (MOV)
technology
●
●
UL 1283 5th Edition
Canadian Standards
latest and most advanced the correct unit is available for
2
● Lockout and tagout Association (CSA)
UL 1449 4th Edition certified all electrical applications, provisions
surge protectors. Applying including service entrances,
● Built in an ISO 9001 facility
Safety barriers
2
●
SPD MAX Series units at main switchgear, motor ● Designed and tested in
main service entrances and control centers, distribution
● 20 kA nominal discharge accordance with:
current (In) rating
2 critical loads will ensure that
equipment is protected with
switchboards, panelboards
and point-of-use applications. (maximum rating assigned
● IEEE C62.41.1
by UL)
● IEEE C62.41.2
the safest and most reliable
2 surge protective devices ● 100 kA through 800 kA
● IEEE C62.43-2005
(SPDs) available. Units are surge current capacity ● IEEE C62.45-2002
2 available in all common ratings ● IEEE C62.48-2005
voltages and configurations, ● Installation flexibility, #10 ● IEEE C62.62-2010
2 and also in a variety of surge
current capacity ratings from
to 1/0 wire may be used
● Two feature package
2 100 kA through 800 kA.
Additionally, you may choose
options
● 200 kA short-circuit current
from two feature package
2 options.
rating (SCCR) (maximum
rating assigned by UL)
2 ● Field serviceable
● 15-year warranty standard,
2 additional 5 years with
product registration
2
2
2
2
2.1
2
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection 2
SPM 250 480D 3 R 2
Series Application Suffix 2
SPM kA Rating S = 2 module, NEMA 4 enclosure with internal circuit breaker
100 = 100 kA per phase Voltage Code Options 1 T =
U =
1 module, NEMA 4 enclosure with internal terminal block
2 module, NEMA 4 enclosure with internal terminal block
2
120 = 120 kA per phase 240S = 120/240 split-phase
V = 1 module, NEMA 4X enclosure with internal circuit breaker
208Y = 120/208 wye (4W+G)
220Y = 127/220 wye (4W+G)
W= 2 module, NEMA 4X enclosure with internal circuit breaker 2
250 = 250 kA per phase X = 1 module, NEMA 4X enclosure with internal terminal block
400Y = 230/400 wye (4W+G)
600Y = 347/600 wye (4W+G)
240D = 240 delta (3W+G)
Y = 2 module, NEMA 4X enclosure with internal terminal block
2
2
480D = 480 delta (3W+G) Feature Package Options
800 = 800 kA per phase 240H = 240 delta high-leg (4W+G) on ‘B’ phase 1 = Basic
2
230L = 230 single-phase Dual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status
Dual-colored LED to indicate protection status of the
N–G mode on units with a neutral wire
3 = Standard with surge counter
Dual-colored LED per phase to indicate protection status 2
Dual-colored LED to indicate protection status of the
N–G mode on units with a neutral wire
Audible alarm with silence button
2
Form C relay contact
EMI/RFI filtering that provides up to 50 dB of noise 2
attenuation from 10 kHz to 100 MHz
Surge counter with alarm silence (reset) button
2
2
2
2
Notes
1 Please consult the factory for 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) applications with high leg on ‘C’ phase.
2
SPD250480D3R = SPD MAX Series, 250 kA per phase, 480D voltage, standard with counter features package,
NEMA 4 enclosure with internal circuit breaker.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2 SPD MAX Series Surge Protection
2 Description Specification
Surge current capacity per phase 100 kA, 120 kA, 160 kA, 200 kA, 250 kA, 300 kA, 320 kA, 400 kA, 600 kA, 800 kA ratings available
2 Nominal discharge current (In) 20 kA

Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 200 kA
2 SPD type Basic feature package = Type 1 (can also be used in Type 2 applications)
2
Standard with surge counter feature package = Type 2
Enclosure types NEMA 4, NEMA 4X enclosure
2 Circuit breaker—30 A Eaton catalog number: FDC3030L

Circuit Breaker Load and Line
2 Terminal torque specifications #10 AWG 35 lb-in; #8 AWG 40 lb-in; #6–#4 AWG 45 lb-in; #3–1/0 AWG 50 lb-in
(SPD maximum wire range #10–1/0 AWG)
2 Standard split-phase voltages available 120/240

Single-phase 230
2 Three-phase wye system voltages available 120/208, 127/220, 230/400, 277/480, 347/600
2
Three-phase delta system voltages 240, 480, 600
Three-phase high leg delta system voltages 120/240 high leg phase wire will be identified with a tag from the factory
2 Input power frequency 50/60 Hz

Power Consumption (Standard with Surge Counter Units)
2 208Y, 220Y, 230L, 240S, 240D and 240H voltage codes 0.6 W
2 600Y and 600D voltage codes 2.1 W
2 Protection modes Single split-phase L–N, L–G, N–G, L–L, single-phase L–N, L–G, N–G, three-phase delta L–G, L–L,
three-phase wye L–N, L–G, N–G, L–L, three-phase high leg delta L–N, L–G, N–G, L–L
2
Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV)
230 V single-phase 320 V L–N, 320 V L–G, 320 V N–G
2 127 V/220 V wye, 120 V/240 V single split phase 150 V L–N, 150 V L–G, 150 V N–G, 300 V L–L
120 V/240 V hi leg 150 V L–N, 150 V L–G, 150 V N–G, 300 V L–L, 320 V H–N, 320 V H–G, 470 V H–L
2 230 V/400 V wye, 277 V/480 V wye 320 V L–N, 320 V L–G, 320 V N–G, 640 V L–L
347 V/600 V wye 420 V L–N, 420 V L–G, 420 V N–G, 840 V L–L
2 240 V delta 300 V L–G, 300 V L–L
2 480 V delta
600 V delta
640 V L–G, 640 V L–L
840 V L–G, 840 V L–L
2 Ports 1 or 2
Operating temperature and humidity –20 °C through +50 °C (–4 °F through +122 °F), 5% through 95%, noncondensing
2 Storage temperature –20 °C through +50 °C (–4 °F through +122 °F)
Operating altitude Up to 16,000 ft (5000 m)
2 Weight Not to exceed 52 lb
2 Form C relay contact ratings Maximum 0.46 A, 150 Vac, 1 A, 30 Vdc

Form C terminal block ratings Rated 300 V, 16 A, 30–12 AWG solid or stranded wire. Torque range 5–7 lb-in
2 Form C relay contact logic Power on, normal state—NO contact = OPEN, NC contact = CLOSED
Power off, fault state—NO contact = CLOSED, NC contact = OPEN
2 EMI/RFI filtering attenuation (standard with surge counter) Up to 50 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz
Standards / agency certifications UL 1449 Edition 3—standard for surge protective devices
2 UL 1283 Edition 5—standard for EMI filters (Type 2 SPDs only)
CSA Electrical Notice No. 516 Edition 1—surge/transient voltage suppressor (excludes 230 L voltage code)
2 CSA 22.2 NO. 8-M1986 Edition 4—EMI filters
2 Warranty 15 years from the date of delivery to the purchaser, 20 years if the product is properly registered at www.eaton.com
RoHS compliant Yes
2
2.1
Dimensions
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection 2
2
Optional Entry
2½ NPT Maximum
1Ø AWG Maximum
2.33 2
(59.2)
6.58 2
1.13 (167.1)
1.63
(28.7) 2
(41.4)
2
¾ NPT Maximum 2
Form C Entry
2
12.00
(304.8)
Mounting Dimension 2
2
2½ NPT Maximum 2
Optimal Entry
2
16.00 1Ø Maximum
(406.4)
17.50
16.75
(425.5) 2
(444.5) Mounting
17.50
(444.5)
Dimension 2
8.00
(203.2)
2
2
Scale 1000
2
2.33
(59.2)
14.91
(378.7)
(4X) Ø0.31
(Ø7.87)
2
1/4–20 Mounting
Hardware 2
¾ NPT Maximum 2
Form C Entry
2
8.32
(211.3)
1.13
(28.7)
2
6.58
2
9.30
(236.2) (167.1)
2.33
(59.2)
2
2½ NPT Maximum
1.63
(41.4)
Optimal Entry 2
0.50 1Ø Maximum
(12.7) 13.00
(330.2)
2
14.00
(355.6) 2
2
2
Contents
2 SPC
Description Page
2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
2 SPC Surge Protective Device
Catalog Number Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-21
2 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-22
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-23
2 CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-24
V3-T2-27
2 SP2 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-29
V3-T2-31
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40
Power-Sure 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
2 Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46
2
SPC Surge Protective Device
2
Product Description Application Description Features
2 Eaton’s SPC Series surge Surge events—short-term The best way to prevent ● Thermally protected metal
protective devices are UL, transients in voltage downtime from an electrical oxide varistor (MOV)
2 1449 4th Edition, certified
surge protectors. Application
threatening critical
downstream equipment—
surge is through facility-wide
cascaded surge protection at ●
technology
Tri-colored LED protection
of SPC Series units happen for many reasons. all stages of the electrical
2 throughout a facility will The most common source, distribution system. When ●
status indicators
20 kA nominal discharge
ensure that equipment is though, is internal devices properly installed, surge current (In) rating
2 protected with the safest and powering on and off: motors, protective devices can (maximum rating in the UL
most reliable surge protective transformers, photocopiers, mitigate problems with 1449 4th Edition standard)
2 devices available. The
compact design and
fluorescent lighting ballasts,
light dimmers, fax machines
susceptible equipment,
keeping it and its related
● 50 through 200 kA per
phase peak surge current
2 NEMA 4X enclosure of the
SPC Series allows for
and more. They can also be
generated externally by
processes running reliably
without surge-related
capacity ratings
● Configure-to-order with
installation external to an events like lightning, grid disruptions.
2 electrical assembly in a switching or electrical
eight custom feature
combinations
variety of environments. equipment in adjacent Eaton’s SPC Series surge
2 SPC Series units are available
buildings. protective device (SPD) is a
key component to your
● Corrosion-resistant
NEMA 4X enclosure with
in all common voltages and While seemingly innocent, cascaded protection strategy.
2
mounting feet
configurations, and in a surge events can wreak It’s compact, flexible and ● 200 kA short-circuit current
variety of peak surge serious havoc on unprotected configurable to protect most rating (SCCR)
2 current capacity ratings from and inadequately protected electrical applications, ● Factory prewired with
50 through 200 kA per phase. facilities. They can disrupt, including service entrances, 36 inches of 10 AWG wire
2 Several feature package
options, including filtering,
damage or destroy sensitive
microprocessor-based
distribution panelboards and
point-of-use applications.
● No user-serviceable parts
or items requiring periodic
2 audible alarm and Form C
contacts, are available to
devices (computers,
programmable logic controls,
maintenance
choose from. A range of etc.), resulting in premature
● 5-year warranty that can be
2 configurable options is aging of equipment, process extended to 10 years with
available to customize the interruptions and catastrophic product registration at
2 SPC Series features for most failures. Eaton.com/spc
electrical applications,
2 including service entrances,
distribution panelboards and
2 point-of-use applications.
The SPC Series belongs to
Eaton’s complete family of
2 surge protection solutions,
providing coverage for any
2 application.
2.1
● UL 1449 4th Edition Type 1 2
and Type 2
● UL 1283 6th Edition 2
(Feature packages: 2, 6, 7
and 8) 2
● Canadian Standards
Association (CSA) Type 1 2
and Type 2
2
Catalog Number Selection 2
SPC 2
SPC 200 208Y 8 P 2
Series Enclosure
2
SPC P = NEMA 4X
2
kA Rating (Options)
050 = 50 kA per phase 120N =
Voltage Code (Options)
120 V single-phase (2 W +G)
Features
SPD
2
080 = 80 kA per phase 240N = 240 V single-phase (2 W +G) Options Application
100 = 100 kA per phase 277N = 277 V single-phase (2 W +G) 1= No options (standard configuration) Type 1 2
120 = 120 kA per phase 480N = 480 V single-phase (2 W +G) 2= Filtering, UL 1283 5th Edition Type 2
240S
240D
=
=
120/240 V split-phase (3 W +G)
240 V delta (3 W +G)
3=
4=
Audible alarm
Form C relay
Type 1
Type 1
2
200 = 200 kA per phase 480D = 480 V delta (3 W +G) 5= Audible alarm and Form C relay Type 1
600D
240H
=
=
600 V delta (3 W +G)
240 V high leg delta (4 W +G)
6=
7=
Filtering and audible alarm
Filtering and Form C relay
Type 2
Type 2
2
208Y = 120/208 V wye (4 W +G)
2
8= Filtering, audible alarm and Form C relay Type 2
415Y = 240/415 V wye (4 W +G)
480Y = 277/480 V wye (4 W +G)
600Y = 347/600 V wye (4 W +G)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
SPC
2 Description Specification
2 Peak surge current capacity ratings available

Nominal discharge current (In)
50, 80, 100, 120, 150, 160, 200 kA per phase
20 kA
2 Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 200 kA

Single-phase voltages available (2 W + G) 120, 240, 277, 480
2 Split-phase voltages available (3 W +G) 120/240
Three-phase wye system voltages available (4 W + G) 120/208, 240/415, 277/480, 347/600
2 Three-phase delta system voltages available (3 W + G) 240, 480, 600
Three-phase high leg delta system voltage available (4 W + G) 240
2 Input power frequency 50/60 Hz
2 Protection modes Single-phase: L-N, N-G, L-G

Split-phase: L-N, N-G, L-G, L-L
Wye: L-N, N-G, L-G, L-L
2 Delta: L-G, L-L
2 120N 150 L-N, 150 L-G, 150 N-G
240N, 277N 320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G
2 480N 550 L-N, 550 L-G, 550 N-G
240S, 208Y 150 L-N, 150 L-G, 150 N-G, 300 L-L
2 240H 150 L-N, 150 L-G, 150 N-G, 300 L-L, 470 H-L, 320 H-N, 320 H-G
2 415Y and 480Y

600Y
320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G, 640 L-L
320 L-N, 320 L-G, 320 N-G, 840 L-L
2 240D 320 L-G, 300 L-L

480D 550 L-G, 640 L-L
2 600D 840 L-G, 840 L-L
Ports 1
2 Operating temperature –40 °F to 140 °F (–40 °C to 60 °C)
Storage temperature –40 °F to 140 °F (–40 °C to 60 °C)
2 Operating humidity 5% through 95%, noncondensing
2 Operating altitude
Agency certification/listing
Up to 2000 m (6561 ft)
UL 1449 4th edition, UL 1283 6th edition, CSA C22.2 No. 269.1-14 for Type 1 SPD,
2
CSA C22.2 No. 269.2-13 for Type 2 SPD, CSA C22.2 no. 8-13 for EMI Filter
Durability Repetitive Strike Test Passed 15,000 strikes to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 (20 kV, 10 kA) Category C Waveform
2 SPD type
Enclosure dimensions and weights
UL 1449 4th edition and CSA Type 1 and Type 2 SPD (dependent on feature options)
Refer to Page V3-T2-23 for enclosure dimensions and weights
2 Enclosure rating NEMA 4X enclosure 1

Form C relay contact ratings 2A at 30 Vdc or 250 Vac
2 Form C relay contact logic Power ON, normal state; NO contact = open, NC contact = closed
Power OFF or fault state; NO contact = closed, NC contact = open
2 EMI/RFI filtering attenuation Up to 40 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz

RoHS compliant Yes
2 Warranty 5 years standard, 10 years with product registration on www.eaton.com/spc
2 SPC voltage configurations per enclosure size

P1 Enclosure P2 Enclosure
2 120N/240N/277N/480N = 50–200 kA 240S = 120–200 kA
2 240S = 50–100 kA 208Y/415Y/480Y/600Y = 120–200 kA

208Y/415Y/480Y/600Y = 50–100 kA 240D/480D = 120–200 kA
2 240D/480D = 50–00 kA 600D = 50–200 kA
240H = 50–100 kA 240H = 120–200 kA
2 Note
2
1 Mounting feet required to achieve NEMA 4X rating.
2.1
Dimensions
P1 2
2
3.75 6.00
(152.3)
2
(95.3)
2
Lid
36-inch
long wires
1.12 (28.5)
2
ID508
Mounting feet
(included) 5.50 (139.6)
Lid 4x #8 [m 4]
6.62 (168.1) Flathead screw
(not included)
2
Overall base
including
stabilization ribs
2
0.75 (19.1) 5.56 (141.2)
Locknut
3/4-14 NPS
2
3.19
2
external thread
(81.0)
1.00 (25.4)
7.13 (181.2) 2
0.16 (4.1)
Mounting feet
(included)
2
2
P2
2
8.50
2
2
(215.9)
3.75 Lid
(95.3)
36-inch
long wires
2
Mounting feet
(included)
2.38
(60.4) 2
7.50 (190.5) Lid
8.62 (219.0)
4x #8 (m4) 2
Flathead screw
7.56 (192.0)
overall base including
(not included)
2
0.75 (19.1) stabilization ribs
Locknut
3/4-14 NPS
2
3.19
external thread
(81.1)
2
1.00 (25.4)
9.13 (232.0) 2
0.16 (4.1)
mounting feet
(included) 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Contents
2 CVX050/100
Description Page
2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
CVX050/100
2 Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-25
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-25
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-26
2 SP2 Surge Protective Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AEGIS Powerline Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-29
V3-T2-31
2 Sag Ride-Through (SRT2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-36
V3-T2-40
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
2 Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46
2 CVX050/100
2 Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits Standards and Certifications
With over two decades of Eaton’s CVX050 and CVX100 and Functions ● UL 1449 4th Edition for
2 experience in the surge SPDs protect electronic ● Advanced surge path surge protective devices
suppression industry and equipment from damaging technology for high fault ● CE marked
2 extensive R&D initiatives,
Eaton is considered a world
transients. These units are
suitable for medium and low
current capacity, low
impedance, high frequency
● Vibration tested IEC
60255-21-1 and -2
2 leader in surge protective
device (SPD) manufacturing.
exposure level applications
that require cost-effective, ●
design
Rugged NEMA® 4X (IP65)
All of Eaton’s products are high quality system
2 manufactured in an ISO® protection including: ●
enclosure
Large diameter, self-
9001:2000 and ISO 14001 Note: CE, CSA and UL on
2
● Residential/small business protected metal oxide
certified facility. AC unit only.
● Light industrial varistors provide long life
Eaton’s CVX050/100 models and fail-safe operation
2 are rugged, cost-effective,
●
●
Light commercial
Branch panel protection
● LED monitoring of each
high-quality SPDs that feature phase
2 self-protected MOVs that ● OEM applications ● Wide range of voltage
eliminate the failure applications from
2 characteristics of standard
metal oxide varistors. This
100 to 600 Vac and
48 and 125 Vdc
2 technology results in a fail-safe
device that monitors the
● 5-year free replacement
warranty
status of the metal oxide disk
2 and disconnects itself from the
Optional Features
power system when the disk
2 External mounting feet
●
is approaching breakdown.
(catalog number
The CVX050/100 is easy MNTGFTX)
2 to install adjacent or even ● Flush mounting plate
internal to electrical (catalog number
2 equipment. When installing an FLUSHMNTPLATE12)
SPD in a retrofit environment,
2 it is important to mount the
device as close to the
2 electrical equipment as
possible. Keep the wiring (lead
length) between the electrical
2 equipment and SPD as short
as possible, and twist or wire
2 tie the conductors together
to reduce the wire’s
2 impedance factor.
2.1
2
CVX050/100 2
CVX 050 - 240S 2
Per Phase Peak Configuration and Voltage Ranges 2
Surge Current
2
230L = Single-phase—200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 277 Vac
050 = 50 kA 480L = Single-phase—480 Vac
100 = 100 kA 240S = Split-phase—100/200, 110/220, 120/240 Vac
240H
208Y
= Three-phase high leg delta—120/240 Vac
= Three-phase wye (star)—100/174, 110/190, 120/208, 127/220 Vac 2
480Y = Three-phase wye (star)—220/380, 230/400, 240/415, 277/480 Vac
600Y
240D
= Three-phase wye (star)—305/525, 347/600 Vac
= Three-phase delta—200, 208, 220, 230, 240 Vac
2
480D = Three-phase delta—380, 400, 415, 440, 480 Vac
600D = Three-phase delta—525, 600 Vac (600D available in 50 kA only) 2
048DC = Direct current—48 Vdc 1
125DC = Direct current—125 Vdc 1
2
Technical Data and Specifications 2
CVX050/100 Model Specifications 2
Description Specification
Peak kA per phase 50, 100
2
Peak kA per mode
Nominal discharge current
50
20 kA 1
2
Short-circuit current rating 100 kA 2
Single-phase voltages 200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 277, 380, 400, 440, 460, 480 Vac
Split-phase voltages 100/200, 110/220/ 120/240 Vac 2
2
High leg delta voltages 240 Vac
Wye system voltages 100/175, 110/190, 120/208, 127/220, 220/380, 230/400, 240/415, 277/480, 305/525, 347/600 Vac
Delta system voltages
2
200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 380, 400, 415, 440, 480, 525, 600 Vac
2
Direct current Voltage 48 Vdc, 125 Vdc
Input power frequency 47–420 Hz (50/60 Hz typical) 2
Protection modes Single-phase: L-N, N-G, L-G
Split-phase: L-N, N-G, L-G, L-L
High leg delta: L-N, N-G, L-G, L-L, H-N, H-G, H-L
2
2
Wye: L-N, N-G, L-G, L-L
Delta: L-G, L-L
Direct current 1 (DC): L-L, L-G
Number of ports 1 2
Specific energy 100 kJ/Ohm
Weight ≈2.0 lb (1.0 kg) 2
Operating temperature
Vibration tested
–13 °F (–25 °C) to +140 °F (+60 °C)
IEC 60255-21-1 and IEC 60255-21-2
2
Notes 2
1 480L, 600D and 600Y units rated 10 kA I .
n
2 DC models only available in 50 kA.
2
2
2
2
2
2
CVX050/100 Voltage Ratings

2
System Nominal MCOV UL 1449-3 VPR 1
2 Model Configuration System Voltage L-L L-N L-G N-G L-L L-N L-G N-G
CVX050
2 230L Single-phase two-wire + ground 200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 277 — 320 640 320 — 1200 1200 1200
480L Single-phase two-wire + ground 380, 400, 440, 460, 480 — 550 1100 550 — 1800 4000 1800
2 240S Split-phase three-wire + ground 100/200, 110/220, 120/240 300 150 300 150 1200 700 1200 800
2
208Y Three-phase wye (star) four-wire + ground 100/175, 110/190, 120/208, 127/220 300 150 300 150 1200 700 1200 800
2 600Y
240D
Three-phase wye (star) four-wire + ground
Three-phase delta three-wire + ground
305/525, 347/600
200, 208, 220, 230, 240
840
640
420
—
840
320
420
—
2500
2000
1500
—
2500
1200
1500
—
2 240H
480D
Three-phase high leg delta
240
380, 400, 415, 440, 480
300
1100
150
—
150
550
640
—
1500
3000
700
—
1200
1800
700
—
2 600D
048DC
Direct current
525, 600
48 Vdc 2
1100
130
—
—
700
65
—
—
3000
—
—
—
2500
—
—
—
2 125DC Direct current 125 Vdc 2 288 — 144 — — — — —

CVX100
2 230L Single-phase two-wire + ground 200, 208, 220, 230, 240, 277 — 320 320 320 — 1200 1200 1200
480L Single-phase two-wire + ground 380, 400, 440, 460, 480 — 550 550 550 — 1800 1800 1800
2 240S Split-phase three-wire + ground 100/200, 110/220, 120/240 300 150 150 150 1200 700 800 700
2 480Y Three-phase wye (star) four-wire + ground 220/380, 230/400, 240/415, 277/480 640 320 320 320 1800 1200 1200 1200
600Y Three-phase wye (star) four-wire + ground 305/525, 347/600 840 420 420 420 2500 1500 1500 1500
2 240D Three-phase delta three-wire + ground 200, 208, 220, 230, 240 640 — 320 — 1800 — 1200 —
240H Three-phase high leg delta 240 300 150 150 150 1200 700 700 700
2 480D Three-phase delta three-wire + ground 380, 400, 415, 440, 480 1100 — 550 — 3000 — 1800 —
2 Dimensions
CVX050/100 Standard Dimensions

2
Conduit Fitting
2
5.67 (144.0) 0.75 (19.0) Internal
4.75 (120.6) Taper Pipe Threads
4.17 (106.0)
2
2
4.75 (120.6)
3.39 (86.1)
2
2.37 (60.2)
2
A A
2 Lid Removed 1.00 (25.4)
2
3.55 (90.2)
2 0.17 (4.3)
(4) Mounting Holes
Under Lid
2
2 Section A-A
2 Mounting Hole Shafts
Dimensions are in Inches (mm)

2 Notes
2
1 UL 1449 3rd Edition VPR (voltage protection rating) test environment: All tests performed with 6-inch lead length, positive polarity.
2 DC units available in 50 kA only. Voltages shown are the maximum suggested operating voltages and are not UL certified.
2.1
Contents
SP1 Surge Protective Device
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
2
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
SP1 Surge Protective Device 2
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-28
V3-T2-28
2
V3-T2-29
V3-T2-31 2
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 2
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46 2
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications 2
Eaton‘s SP1 is a UL 1449 3rd Installation and operation of ● Type 1 SPD capable of ● UL 1449 3rd Edition-listed
Edition-listed surge protective the SP1 is simple. The unit installation on either the device 2
device that provides reliable, comes pre-wired with 24.00 line or the load side of the
cost-effective surge
protection. This Type 1 SPD
inches of 10-gauge wire and
is mounted via the half-inch
service entrance
disconnect
2
is capable of being installed
on either the line or the load
nipple that is molded into its
enclosure. Wall or DIN rail
● 20 kA nominal discharge
current rating (In) on most
2
side of the service entrance mounting can also be models
disconnect, and can be used accomplished with the ● 50 kA per phase surge 2
as a replacement for devices addition of an optional kit. current capacity
formerly known as secondary
surge arresters or lightning
When powered, the unit‘s
● Compact footprint— 2
light-emitting diode (LED)
4.80-inch L x 2.90-inch W x
arresters, which could not be
manufactured after UL 1449
indicator reports the status of
the protection elements and 2.50-inch D 2
3rd Edition went into effect is active when all of them are ● Pre-wired with 24.00
on September 29, 2009. intact and providing inches of 10-gauge wire 2
The unit is available in many protection. Any loss of ● Half-inch nipple molded
common voltages and protection is signaled when into enclosure enables 2
configurations. Multiple the LED extinguishes. quick and easy mounting
mounting options coupled
with a compact footprint
● Optional kit enables wall or 2
DIN rail mounting
enables installation of the
SP1 in a wide range of
● Two-year warranty 2
applications, including panel-
boards, loadcenters, pump 2
panels, control cabinets, and
other electrical assemblies 2
and applications.
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
SP1
2 SP1 - XXXX
2
Series Voltage Code
2 SP1 240S = 120/240 V single split-phase
208Y = 120/208 wye
2 480Y
600Y
= 277/480 wye
= 347/600Y wye
2
240D = 240 delta
SP1MNTGKIT = optional wall or DIN rail mounting kit 480D = 480 delta
(order separately—not included with SP1 unit) 600D = 600 delta
2
2 Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions
2 SP1
Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
SP1
2 Description Ratings
1.35
Surge current capacity per phase 50 kA 1/2" (12.7)
(34.3)
2 Nominal discharge current (In) 20 kA for SP1-240S, 208Y, 480Y,
240D and 480D
Straight Pipe Thread
2 Short-circuit current rating (SCCR)

10 kA for SP1-600Y and 600D
200 kA .79 (20.1)
2 SPD type Type 1 (can also be used in Type 2 applications)
System voltages available (Vac)
2 Single split-phase 120/240

Three-phase wye 120/208, 277/480, 347/600
2 Three-phase delta 240, 480, 600
3.95
Protection modes
2
(100.3)
Single split-phase and three-phase wye L-N, L-L
Three-phase delta L-G, L-L
2 Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV)
SP1-240S and SP1-208Y 150 L-N, 300 L-L
2 SP1-480Y 320 L-N, 640 L-G
SP1-600Y 420 L-N, 840 L-G 2.89 2.46
2 SP1-240D 300 L-G, 300 L-L
(73.4) (62.5)
2
SP1-480D 640 L-G, 640 L-L
SP1-600D 840 L-G, 840 L-L
2
Input power frequency 50/60 Hz
Enclosure rating NEMA 4
2 Operating temperature
Operating humidity
–20 °C to 50 °C (–4 °F to 122 °F)
5–95%, noncondensing
2 Operating altitude
Agency certification and approvals
Up to 16,000 ft (5000 m)
UL 1449 3rd Edition Listed device
2 Warranty 2 years
2 ANSI/UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protection Ratings

Protection Mode
2 Catalog Number L-N L-G L-L
SP1-240S 600 N/A 1000
2 SP1-208Y 600 N/A 1000
2
SP1-480Y 1200 N/A 2000
SP1-600Y 1500 N/A 2500
2 SP1-240D
SP1-480D
N/A
N/A
1000
2000
1000
2000
2 SP1-600D N/A 2500 2500
2.1
Contents
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
2
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-30
V3-T2-30
2
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-30
V3-T2-31 2
Surge Protection for Light Commercial and Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 2
UL 508A Panel Applications Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46 2
Product Description Features, Benefits and Standards and Certifications 2
The SP2 provides basic Functions ● UL 1449 Third Edition Type
surge protection for light ● Ease of installation— ● Voltage-specific models 1 SPD File No. E109835, 2
commercial electrical Compact design allows protect electrical systems cULus
systems and OEM equipment
requirements. The SP2 is
for easy installation on an
electrical panel or meter
and equipment, improving
performance by more than
● Built in an ISO 9001 facility 2
● Flammability rating UL 94VO
available in the most popular
voltage and system
socket, or integrated into
control cabinets
110% over “one-size-fits-
all” economy surge
● Designed and tested in 2
configurations and delivers accordance with:
arresters
Type 1 UL 1449 Third
2
●
superior surge protection ● IEEE C62.41.1

Edition listed SP2s are ● Compact enclosure takes
using MOV thermal easily selected and up less space and can be ● IEEE C62.41.2
disconnect technology
that eliminates the need
installed on the loadside installed in tight spaces ● IEEE C62.43-2005 2
or lineside of the service ● Can be used on single- ● IEEE C62.45-2002
for additional overcurrent
protection.
entrance overcurrent phase, split-phase, wye, ● IEEE C62.48-2005 2
protective device delta, and high-leg delta ● IEEE C62.62-2010
Application Description ● Thermal disconnect
technology eliminates the
systems 2
By providing surge ● All SP2 devices are
protection, the SP2 can need for additional
overcurrent protection
individually marked with a
serial number for easy
2
suppress the transients that
Compact UV-resistant tracking and identification
2
●
are prevalent throughout the
power distribution system to NEMA 4X enclosure for ● Two-year warranty
indoor or outdoor
support reliable operations in
applications including: applications 2
● LED status indicators
● HVAC systems provide surge protection 2
● Control panels status at a glance—green
● Automation cabinets when good, red to replace 2
● Pumping systems
● Lighting systems 2
● Commercial facilities
● Food processing 2
● Warehouses
● Retail facilities 2
Manufacturing operations
2
●
2
2
Product Selection
2
SP2
2 Nominal Maximum Continuous Voltage
System Operating AC Voltage System Protection Connection Catalog
2 Voltage (MCOV) Type Ratings (VPR) Points Number
120 150 Single-phase, two-wire 700 L–N 2 SP2-120
2 240 320 Single-phase, two-wire 1200 L–N 2 SP2-240
2
120/240 150 Split-phase, three-wire 700 L–N, 1200 L–L 3 SP2-240S
240 320 Three-phase delta, three-wire + ground 1200 L–G, 2500 L–L 4 SP2-240D
2 480 550 Three-phase delta, three-wire + ground 1800 L–G, 3000 L–L 4 SP2-480D
120/208 150 Three-phase wye, three-wire + ground 700 L–G, 1200 L–L 4 SP2-208Y
2 277/480 320 Three-phase wye, three-wire + ground 1200 L–G, 2500 L–L 4 SP2-480Y
347/600 420 Three-phase wye, three-wire + ground 1500 L–G, 2500 L–L 4 SP2-600Y
2
2 Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions
2 SP2
Description Specification SP2 Enclosure
2 Markets Light commercial and UL 508 A panels 1.06 (26.9)
Diameter
2 Product warranty
System types
2 years
Single, split, delta, and wye
1.69
2 Nominal system voltage 120, 208, 240, 480, 600 Vac
3.38
(42.9)
Installation Two-, three-, four-wire (85.9)
2 Maximum continuous operating AC voltage Matched to nominal voltage
1.69
(42.9)
MCOV 150–550 Vac (see table above)
2 L–N protection Yes (single-phase units)
2.06
(52.3)
2.06
(52.3)
2 L–L protection
L–G protection
Yes
Yes (three-phase units)
4.13
(104.9)
2 Protection Surges and transients 3.19

(81.0)
SCCR 200 kA
2 Nominal discharge current (8 x 20 μs) In 10 kA
4.06
(103.1)
2
Maximum discharge current (8 x 20 μs) Imax 45 kA per phase
Response time tA <25 ns ¾" NPS
2 Voltage protection ratings (VPRs) See table above 0.87

(22.1)
Overcurrent device (if required by local code) Circuit breaker or fuse sized to protect wires per
2 local codes
Frequency 50/60 Hz
2 Operating status / fault indication One bi-color LED—green (good) / red (replace)
Conductor gauge/length 10 AWG stranded copper / 18 inches
2 Mounting Chase nipple (¾” NPS)
2
Enclosure rating NEMA 4X—UL 94-5VA
Degree of protection (installed state) IP20 (finger-safe)
2 Install location Indoor/outdoor

Circuit location Lineside/loadside
2 Standards / agency information UL 1449 Third Edition Type 1 Listed SPD—
cULus, RoHS compliant
2 Operating temperature –40 °C to +65 °C

Maximum operating altitude 12,000 ft (3657.6 m)
2 Weight 17 oz (476 g)
2
2
2.1
Contents
AEGIS Solutions
Description Page
2
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 2
2
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
AEGIS Powerline Filters
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-32
2
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-33
V3-T2-33 2
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-34
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-36 2
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42 2
2
2
2
AEGIS Powerline Filters 2
Product Description
Eaton AEGIS™ Series line
By providing surge protection No matter where transients Why Should Sensitive Electronic
2
filters and surge protectors
are specifically designed to
and line filtering, AEGIS
devices can suppress the
originate, the application of
AEGIS Series devices will
Loads be Protected?
PLC manufacturers and
2
protect sensitive electronics noise and transients help protect sensitive
2
service technicians
from hazards that exist within prevalent throughout the electronic equipment recommend the use of power
a facility. The AEGIS Series power distribution system to including: line filters and surge
hybrid filter reacts instantly to support reliable operations in
● Programmable logic suppressors to prevent 2
changes in voltage regardless applications including: downtime and equipment
controllers (PLCs)
of phase angle or polarity. In
comparison to other line
● Instrumentation ● Scanning devices
damage due to surges and
electrical line noise. Studies
2
filters, this technology ● Water treatment facilities Automatic teller machines
2
●
have shown that failure to
provides a higher level of ● Pulp and paper operations (ATMs) protect sensitive electronic
suppression, reliability and Refrigeration and heating Cash registers loads costs American
2
● ●
life expectancy. plants manufacturing and

● Alarm systems
● Petrochemical and refinery commercial and service
Microprocessor-controlled
2
●
industries over $39 billion per
● Food processing ● OEM products year in lost time and revenue.
Textiles
2
● ● Robotics Preventing these losses is a
● Automotive assembly ● CAD/CAM systems major cost-saving
● Manufacturing operations ● Control equipment opportunity.
2
● Medical electronics and
devices 2
AEGIS Series devices are
available in a variety of 2
common voltages and
configurations. 2
2
2
2
Features, Benefits and Functions

2 ● Compact design with ● Five- to ten-year warranty
multiple mounting options standard dependent on
2 ● Meets new UL safety model; warranty extended
standards for surge and an additional five years if
2 filtering protection registered
● AC models available with The breadth of the AEGIS
2 up to 80 kA surge current Series’ features, options and
capacity ratings configurations ensures that The AEGIS PH Series Protects Critical The AEGIS PV Series Protects Critical
2 ● DIN rail mounting available the correct unit is available
for all critical electrical
Loads up to 20 A Loads up to 5 A
on most models
2 ● Contains no replaceable
applications, including control
panels, security systems,
parts or items that require measurement systems,
2 periodic maintenance lab equipment and other
● Alarm contact available point-of-use applications.
2
AEGIS Summary
2 Specifications PH PV CF CN
2 Voltage 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac 120/240 Vac

24/48 Vdc
120/240 Vac
24/48 Vdc
2
Current range 3–20 A 1–5 A 10–60 A 30 A
DIN mounting Yes Yes Yes 1 No
2 UL 1283 5th Edition & UL 1449 3rd Edition Yes Yes Yes 2 Yes 2
Filtering Yes Yes Yes No
2 EMI/RFI filtering attenuation at 100 kHz 75 dB 50 dB 40 dB N/A
L to G, L to N & N to G protection modes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Peak kA per phase / mode 60/30 40/20 80/40 80/40
2 UL nominal discharge current (In)

UL voltage protection rating (VPR) L–G / L–N 3
5 kA
330/400
5 kA
330/400
5 kA
500/500
5 kA
500/500
2 Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 5 kA 5 kA 10 kA 10 kA

Alarm contacts Yes No Yes 4 No
2 Standard warranty / registered warranty (years) 10/15 10/15 5/10 5/10
Communication line protection (UL 497A) No No Yes 4 No
2
2 AEGIS PH and PV Series Hybrid Powerline Filters
2 Three-Wire Design has Normal and Common Mode Protection (L-N, L-G, N-G)
Primary High Series High Secondary Status Optional
2 Surge
Protection
Frequenc
y
Blocking
Inductors
Performance
Tracking Filter
Surge
Protection
Indicator
Lights
Form C
Contacts 5
2 Power
Input Power
Output
2 L Normal Normal LED Form C L
Mode Mode
2
N N
2
2 G
Common
Mode
Common
Mode G
2 Notes
1 Optional on 10 A and 30 A models only.
2 2 120 Vac models only.

3 Ratings shown for 120 Vac models, other voltages listed in Technical Data.
2
4 Optional on 30 A and 60 A models only.
5 Available on the PH Series only.
2
2.1
● UL 1449 Fourth Edition 2
UL 1283 Fifth Edition
2
●
● Built in an ISO® 9001
●
facility
Designed and tested in
2
2
accordance with:
● IEEE® C62.41.1
AEGIS Products
IEEE C62.41.2
2
●
● IEEE C62.43-2005
● IEEE C62.45-2002
2
● IEEE C62.48-2005
● IEEE C62.62-2010 2
2
2
AEGIS
2
AG 2
Product 2
Family/OEM
AG Protection/Filtering Voltage Amperage Options 2
PH = Premium protection 120 = 120 Vac 03 = 3 A
with hybrid filtering 240 = 240 Vac 05 = 5 A
10 = 10 A
2
15 = 15 A
20 = 20 A 2
PV = Premium protection 120 = 120 Vac 01 = 1 A
with filtering 240 = 240 Vac 03 = 3 A
05 = 5 A 2
CF = Critical protection 120 = 120 Vac 10 = 10 A DIN = DIN mount 1
with filtering 230 = 230 Vac 15 = 15 A DIN2 = DIN2 mount 2 2
240 = 240 Vac 30 = 30 A CP = Compact 3
024 = 024 Vdc
048 = 048 Vdc
60 = 60 A RJ = Telcom protection
and Form C status 2
contacts 4
CN = Critical protection 120 = 120 Vac 30 = 30 A 2
without filtering 230 = 230 Vac
024 = 024 Vdc
048 = 048 Vdc 2
Notes 2
1 Not available for 10 A, 230 V or 240 V versions.
2 Only available for 10 A, 120 V or 240 V CF version.
3 Only available for 10 A, 120 V CF version.
2
2
4 Only available for 30 A and 60 A CF version.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2 AEGIS PH and PV
2 Specifications
PH 120 Vac
3, 5, 10, 15, 20 A
PH 240 Vac
3, 5, 10, 15, 20 A
PV 120 Vac
1, 3, 5 A
PV 240 Vac
1, 3, 5 A
2 DIN mounting Yes Yes Yes Yes

UL 1283 5th Edition and UL 1449 3rd Edition Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Filtering Yes Yes Yes Yes
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation at 100 kHz 75 dB 75 dB 50 dB 50 dB
2 L–G, L–N and N–G protection modes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 Peak kA per phase/mode

UL nominal discharge current (In)
60/30
5 kA
60/30
5 kA
40/20
5 kA
40/20
5 kA
2 UL voltage protection rating (VPR) L–G / L–N / N–G 330/400/330 600/700/600 330/400/330 600/700/600
MCOV 150 275 150 275
2 Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 5 kA 5 kA 5 kA 5 kA
Alarm contacts Yes Yes No No
2 Standard warranty / registered warranty (years) 10/15 10/15 10/15 10/15
2 Communication line protection (UL 497A) No No No No
2 AEGIS CF
2 CF 24 Vdc CF 48 Vdc CF 120 Vac CF 240 Vac
Specifications 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 30 A 60 A 10 A 10 A 30 A 60 A
2 DIN mounting Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes 1 Yes 1 Yes No No Yes 1

UL 1283 5th Edition and — — — — Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes — — —
2 UL 1449 3rd Edition
UL 1283 4th Edition — — — — — — — — — Yes Yes Yes
2 Filtering Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB 40 dB
at 100 kHz
L–G, L–N and N–G Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
2 protection modes
Peak kA per phase/mode 6/2 6/2 20/6 20/6 30/10 40/20 80/40 80/40 30/10 24/8 56/24 56/24
2 UL nominal discharge N/A N/A N/A N/A 3 kA 5 kA 5 kA 5 kA 3 kA N/A N/A N/A
current (In)
2 UL voltage protection rating N/A N/A N/A N/A 500/500/500 500/500/500 500/500/500 500/500/500 900/800/900 N/A N/A N/A
(VPR) L–G / L–N / N–G
2 MCOV 30 30 50 50 150 150 150 150 275 275 275 275
Short-circuit current 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA
2 rating (SCCR)
Alarm contacts No No No No No No No No No No No No
2 Standard warranty / 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10
registered warranty (years)
2 Communication line No No No No No No Yes 1 Yes 1 No No Yes 1 Yes 1
protection (UL 497A)
2 Note
1 Optional.
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
AEGIS CN
24 Vdc 48 Vdc 120 Vac 240 Vac
2
Specifications
DIN mounting
30 A
No
30 A
No
30 A
No
30 A
No
2
UL 1283 5th Edition and UL 1449 3rd Edition — — Yes — 2
UL 1283 4th Edition — — — Yes
Filtering No No No No 2
2
EMI/RFI filtering attenuation at 100 kHz N/A N/A N/A N/A
L–G, L–N and N–G protection modes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Peak kA per phase/mode 20/6 46/20 80/40 56/24
2
UL nominal discharge current (In) N/A N/A 5 kA N/A
UL voltage protection rating (VPR) L–G / L–N / N–G N/A N/A 500/500/500 N/A 2
MCOV 30 50 150 275
Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 10 kA 2
2
Alarm contacts No No No No
Standard warranty / registered warranty (years) 5/10 5/10 5/10 5/10
Communication line protection (UL 497A) No No No No
2
2
Maximum EMI/RFI Attenuation—MIL-STD-220
Maximum
Attenuation
2
2
Model 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz 10 MHz 100 MHz Frequency
AGPH120AG 30 dB 74 dB 76 dB 37 dB 36 dB 101 dB at 0.5 MHz
AGPV120AG 27 dB 56 dB 55 dB 36 dB 28 dB 66 dB at 0.085 MHz 2
AGCF12010-CP 16 dB 35 dB 62 dB 40 dB 50 dB 68 dB at 1.25 MHz
AGCF12010-DIN 16 dB 35 dB 56 dB 29 dB 51 dB 66 dB at 0.7 MHz 2
AGCF12010 17 dB 35 dB 64 dB 33 dB 51 dB 64 dB at 1.0 MHz
2
2
Let-Through Voltages Based on IEEE Std. C62.62-2010 Testing Waveforms 1
2
Test Impulse
AEGIS Series
AGPH120AG AGPV120AG AGCF12010 AGCF12010-DIN AGCF12010-CP AGCF12030AGx AGCF12060AGx AGCN12030
2
IEEE Category A
100 kHz ring wave
25 V 30 V 150 V 300 V 300 V 150 V 90 V 400 V 2
6000 V, 200 A
IEEE Category B 35 V 40 V 330 V 400 V 400 V 330 V 230 V 500 V
2
2
100 kHz ring wave
6000 V, 500 A
IEEE Category B 360 V 370 V 470 V 480 V 460 V 460 V 450 V 460 V
combination wave 2
6000 V, 3000 A
(UL 1449-3 VPR)
2
Note
1 All tests conducted on 120 Vac units.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Contents
2 Sag Ride-Through (SRT2)
Description Page
2 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
2 SPC Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
2 SP1 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27
2 AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2)
V3-T2-31
2 Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-37
V3-T2-37
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-38
Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40
2 Power-Sure 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-46
2
2 Sag Ride-Through (SRT2)
Eaton’s sag ride-through is Today’s industrial and large Depending on the proximity Regularity of Voltage Sags
2 the first of its kind. commercial electricity
customers are becoming
to the fault, which can be
hundreds of miles away,
EPRI conducted a two-year
The SRT2 power conditioner study of power quality levels
2 prevents expensive
more sensitive to power
disturbances and are
the voltage during the sag
is typically 40%–90% of
on distribution systems in the
United States. A variation
electrical downtime. The demanding better electric nominal utility voltage. The
2 SRT2 represents Eaton’s
state-of-the-art solution to
quality. However, the quality operation of circuit breakers,
event was recorded every
time the voltage dropped
of power grids is not fuses and reclosers limits below 90% of the nominal.
2 today’s power conditioning
challenges.
significantly improving. most sags to less than The results are shown below.
Customers still experience 15 cycles.
2 The Problem—Voltage Sags
power quality problems
that affect plant operations Voltage sags are experienced
A typical distribution system
customer experiences about
and Brownouts 10 to 20 times more 50 events per year when the
and profitability.
2 The ability of a plant to frequently than complete voltage drops below 90%,
ride-through voltage sags Deep, Single-Phase Sag outages. However, voltage and only about two events
2 can have a significant
impact on operations and Input A Input A Input A
sags are equally disruptive
to sensitive equipment.
per year when the voltage
600
drops below 30% of nominal.
2 competitiveness. In the
United States, voltage sags
400
200
Voltage Sags The utility study concluded
that sags represented almost
cost billions of dollars in 0
2 all of the events experienced
1. Fault occurs on
-200
lost production, interruption, -400 Generation
the transmission
at a typical facility.
or distribution
damaged materials, retooling -600 system
2 and scrap. In addition,
Definition of Voltage Sag End
Events per Year
sags can cause: increased Users
2 operating costs, the need

for product reworks, safety
A voltage sag is a sudden,
momentary decrease in
Transmission
Distribution
6
2 hazards, equipment damage supply voltage. It can last 5

and/or failure, reduced from a cycle to several 2. Creates a sag 4
product quality, increased seconds. Voltage sags are Feeder event for all
2 clean-up, additional labor most often caused by faults
Breakers
End
User
users on the
system
3
2
costs, increased scrap on the electrical transmission
2 material and costs associated
with investigations into
or distribution system. They
End User
1
can be caused by lightning

60
0
30
–7
2 the problem. strikes, animal contact, 50 0 0 5

– –2 –1 4 3
6–
2
–4
1
0
20 10 6
0
starting of large motors

10
or an internal fault within

2 a customer’s facility.
2
2.1
Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
2
Industries and Applications Sag Correction Using the SRT2 Continuous Regulation
Affected by Sags The SRT2 is a high The Sag Ride-Through is an 2
Key industries: Equipment or processes: performance, inverter- active voltage conditioner.
● Semi-conductor ● Manufacturing process
based voltage conditioning This means it will constantly 2
device developed to provide respond to voltage sags and
manufacturers controllers
● Communications ● Variable speed drives
protection to sensitive loads
against commonly occurring
swells in the +/–10% range
with a regulated output in the
2
Steel mills Robotics
2
● ●
voltage sags. +/–1% range. The SRT2 can
● Petroleum and chemical ● Motor conductor be applied to the main service
The SRT2 monitors the entrance, at branch locations
processing Telephone systems
2
●
incoming supply voltage and or in front critical loads. The
● Health care ● HID lighting when it deviates from the SRT2 provides an outstanding
Paper mills
2
●
● HVAC controls nominal voltage level, the return on investment. It
● Automotives ● Medical equipment SRT2 achieves voltage delivers operation productivity
conditioning by injecting the
●
●
Textile
Printing
● Computers
appropriate correction voltage
that is just not possible with
traditional tap switching or
2
in series with the power ferroresonant technologies.
● Plastics supply. The SRT2 provides an The SRT2 consists of a 2
● Other manufacturing extremely fast reaction time voltage source inverter,
and subcycle response to sag
events that would otherwise
bypass circuit and an injection 2
Block Diagram of the SRT2 Active Voltage Conditioner transformer connected in
cause loads to drop out. series between the incoming
utility supply and the load, as
2
The SRT2 is designed for
low voltage systems and
is also offered in medium
shown in the figure below.
For the standard sag 2
correcting model, the
3-Phase Compensating
voltage applications from
up to 50 MVA. Installation is injection transformer consists 2
Voltage of a boost component. The
simple and the SRT2 provides
3-Phase
Secondary
Injection
3-Phase customers with a new SRT2 monitors the incoming 2
Utility Load solution to improve supply voltage and when it
2
Supply Distribution Primary Transformer Voltage
Transformer productivity and reduce deviates from the nominal
downtime for sag related voltage level the SRT2 inserts
SRT2 Input
Bypass Circuit problems. an appropriate compensating
voltage using the IGBT 2
SRT2 Output The SRT2 meets the inverter and series injection
stringent requirements transformer. Energy is 2
Voltage Source of the Semi-F47 standard; sourced from the supply
Inverter a key requirement for SAG
correction in the semi-
during this time. This 2
regulates the load voltage
conductor industry. to its nominal value,
thus eliminating voltage
2
● Complete correction
disturbances from the utility
of single-phase voltage
supply affecting the load. 2
sags down to 63% for
●
30 seconds
Partial correction of three-
2
phase sags down to 50%
for 30 seconds 2
Correction of utility voltage
2
●
unbalance (from network

side of transformer)
● Attenuation of voltage 2
flicker
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
2 SRT2 1
2 Load Capacity at
Nominal Voltage Terminal Fault Capacity System System Dissipation Airflow Cabinet Dimensions H x W x D Catalog
480 V (kVA) 2 Cabinet 3 (kVA) Efficiency (%) (Worst Case) (kW) (m3/min) in Inches (mm) Number 4
2 150 No 40 97.5 3.8 18 85.00 x 32.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 812.8 x 812.8) SRT20150480AA
2
150 Yes 40 97.5 3.8 18 85.00 x 32.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 812.8 x 812.8) SRT20150480AA-TC
225 No 40 97.7 5.2 18 85.00 x 32.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 812.8 x 812.8) SRT20225480AA
2 225 Yes 40 97.7 5.2 18 85.00 x 32.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 812.8 x 812.8) SRT20225480AA-TC
300 No 40 98.0 6.1 18 85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8) SRT20300480AA
2 300 Yes 40 98.0 6.1 18 85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8) SRT20300480AA-TC
450 No 40 98.2 8.0 36 85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8) SRT20450480AA
2 450 Yes 40 98.2 8.0 36 85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8) SRT20450480AA-TC
2 600
600
No
Yes
40
40
98.4
98.4
9.8
9.8
36
36
85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8)
85.00 x 40.00 x 32.00 (2159.0 x 1016 x 812.8)
SRT20600480AA
SRT20600480AA-TC
2 750 No 40 98.4 12.2 54 85.00 x 96.00 x 48.00 (2159.0 x 2438.4 x 1219.2) SRT20750480AA
750 Yes 40 98.4 12.2 54 85.00 x 96.00 x 48.00 (2159.0 x 2438.4 x 1219.2) SRT20750480AA-TC
2 900 No 40 98.5 13.2 54 85.00 x 96.00 x 48.00 (2159.0 x 2438.4 x 1219.2) SRT20900480AA
1200 No 40 98.5 18.1 72 85.00 x 126.00 x 96.00 (2159.0 x 3200.4 x 2438.4) SRT21200480AA
2 1500 No 50 98.7 20.2 90 85.00 x 126.00 x 96.00 (2159.0 x 3200.4 x 2438.4) SRT21500480AA
2 1800 No 50 98.8 22.1 108 85.00 x 126.00 x 96.00 (2159.0 x 3200.4 x 2438.4) SRT21800480AA
2 SRT2 with External Maintenance Bypass Block Diagram

2
S3
2
2 AC Load
Supply
2 S1 S2
2
SPD SRT2
2 Note: A terminal cabinet may be needed if a bypass cabinet is not used. SRT2 units 900 kVA and
larger do not require a terminal cabinet; however, an external three-breaker mechanical bypass with
2 integrated surge protection is recommended.
2 Notes
1 For 50 Hz international applications, consult factory.
2 480 V is standard. If additional voltage is needed, consult factory.
2 3 Eaton external three-breaker maintenance bypass cabinet is recommended. If a bypass is not used, a terminal cabinet may be required. Contact factory.
4 TC in the model number denotes terminal cabinet, which is not required for units of 900 kVA and larger.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
2
SRT2 Specifications
Features Specifications
2
Load Capacity
2
Capacity 150–1800 kVA (consult factory for custom design; up to 36 kVA available)
Displacement power factor of connected load 0 lagging to 0.9 leading 2
Crest factor for rated kVA 3 at 100% of rated load
Overload capacity (>90% supply voltage) 150%, 30 seconds, once per 500 s 2
Input Supply
Nominal supply voltage (according to model) 480 V 2
Voltages up to 36 kV available as custom applications 1
Power system type Three-phase, center ground referenced 2
Supply voltage category Level III transient voltage capability
Fault capacity Refer to model tables 2
Operating Voltage Range for Regulation
Supply voltage for regulation 90–110% of nominal input voltage unit rating 2
Output Supply
Nominal voltage (V) Set to match nominal supply voltage 2
Three-phase V regulation range ±10% continuous
Three-phase V regulation accuracy ±1% 2
Three-phase balanced sag/swell correction ability:
40% model +40% / –10% at least 30 s at full load 2
Sag correction accuracy (within specified range) ±2.5%
Sag correction response: 2
Initial <250 μs
Complete
Single-phase sag correction ability:
<0.25 cycle
2
2
40% model (15% retained voltage / 85% sag) 90% nominal
Equivalent series impedance (operating) <4% typical
2
Efficiency of system 0.98 to 0.99 (refer to model tables)
Bypass
Capacity
Maximum overload capacity (in bypass):
100% model rating (kVA)
2
For 10 minutes 125%
For 1 minute 150% 2
For 1 second 500%
For 200 milliseconds
Transfer time:
2000%
2
Inverter to bypass <0.5 ms
Equivalent series impedance (in bypass) <2.5% typical 2
Interface
Access protocol Ethernet connectivity; Modbus® TCP, dry contacts 2
Environmental
Enclosure rating NEMA® 1, IP20 2
Pollution degree rating 2
Minimum operating temperature 0 °C 2
2
Maximum operating temperature 40 °C
Temperature derating Above 40 °C derate at 2% per °C to a maximum of 50 °C
Capacity elevation derating
Cooling:
–2% every 100 m above 1000 m
2
Inverter Forced ventilation
Transformer Fan assisted ventilation 2
Humidity <95%, noncondensing
EMC emissions CISPR 22 level G 2
Noise 65 dBA
Warranty 1 year 2
Note
1 480 V is standard. If additional voltage is needed, consult factory.
2
2
Contents
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) Tap Changer
Description Page
2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
CVX050/100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR)
2
2
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR)
2 Product Description Features and Benefits
Eaton’s Electronic Voltage Brownouts The Solution ● Coordinated with standard
2 Regulator (EVR) is the ideal In the United States, most Prior to installing an expensive thermal-magnetic breakers
solution for keeping your facilities have sufficient solution, Eaton encourages to allow motor starts
2 facility and equipment up and
running during brownouts,
voltage regulation. However,
in some U.S. locations and
customers to monitor
incoming voltage to
● Optional 50 kA or 100 kA
per phase surge protection
2 undervoltage conditions and
other power problems. The
many developing countries,
regulation problems occur
determine if voltage
regulation is a problem.
● Input frequency range
operation from 57–63 Hz
EVR can significantly reduce because of overstressed The local utility may also be
2 the costs of equipment utility distribution systems. able to provide information
● Integral manual rotary
maintenance bypass
damage and downtime on voltage expected at
2 when these situations occur.
The state-of-the-art design
In some cases, due to the
excessive demand on the
the facility.
switch standard on 50 to
500 kVA units and optional
on smaller units
2 provides rapid response time, utility system, voltage may Using a meter, it can quickly
high efficiency, high inrush be below 10% of nominal be determined if a voltage ● Not affected by load power
current capability, and (–10%) during the day. This regulation problem or factor. Can operate
2 operating advantages condition is called a voltage brownout condition exists. effectively in low-load
exclusive to Eaton. dip or brownout. Customers The appropriate solution applications due to “unique
2 The EVR maintains a tightly
may notice dim lights and
reduced power. During the
would be an EVR. EVRs can
be installed at the service
leakage reactance”
technology
2 regulated output voltage by
automatically activating the
evening, voltage may rise
above 10% of nominal
entrance, branch panel or
at critical loads.
● Fail-safe bypass circuit,
isolation transformer
appropriate transformer tap (+10%) because large
2 through a silicone controlled facilities and loads are shut Eaton’s EVR is a solid-state and overtemperature
protection
rectifier (SCR). Tap changer down. This shutdown tap changing power
2 Less than 1% THD
●
response time is initiated at reduces the power demand conditioner designed to
one cycle, ensuring rapid on the grid and results in a protect against brownouts ● Optional Standard and
2 and precise regulation. voltage increase. and long duration voltage Premium metering to
Switching at zero current regulation problems. monitor voltage, current,
enables noise reduction The IEEE defines voltage frequency, power, energy,
2 during tap transitions. regulation as overvoltage PF with minimum
or undervoltage. Voltage and maximum, and
2 regulation events last from
a few minutes to many
communication capabilities
2 hours with voltage varying

by ±20%. Long-term
regulation problems differ
2 from short duration sags and
dips, which are much deeper
2 voltage drops.
2
2.1
2
EVR
2
EVR XXX XXXX XXXX X X XX X
2
kVA Ratings and Dimensions Options 2
Weight BTUs/ Dimensions in Inches (mm) B = Bypass switch 1
kVA
010 440
Lb hr
1,025
Bypass
Optional
Metering
No
(H x W x D)
30.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (767.1 x 563.9 x 736.6)
M1 = Standard metering (IQ 130)
M2 = Premium metering (IQ 150) 2
Nominal Input
2
010 520 1,205 Optional Yes 44.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (1122.7 x 563.9 x 736.6)
015 520 1,540 Optional No 30.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (767.1 x 563.9 x 736.6) Voltage Surge Protection
015 600 1,540 Optional Yes 44.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (1122.7 x 563.9 x 736.6) (Delta Input:
X = No
2
025 870 2,560 Optional Yes 44.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (1122.7 x 563.9 x 736.6) L, L, L, G)
S = Yes
030 890 3,090 Optional Yes 44.20 x 22.20 x 29.00 (1122.7 x 563.9 x 736.6) 208D = 208
045 950 4,600 Optional Yes 44.30 x 45.90 x 29.00 (1125.2 x 1165.9 x 736.6) 240D = 240
050
075
1,176
1,575
7,332
9,514
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
66.00 x 29.00 x 35.50 (1676.4 x 736.6 x 901.7)
76.00 x 34.40 x 35.50 (1930.4 x 873.8 x 901.7)
400D = 400
480D = 480
Frequency
A = 60 Hz
2
2
100 2,014 11,833 Yes Yes 76.00 x 34.40 x 35.50 (1930.4 x 873.8 x 901.7) 600D = 600 B = 50 Hz
125 2,137 14,748 Yes Yes 76.00 x 34.40 x 35.50 (1930.4 x 873.8 x 901.7)
150 2,240 17,698 Yes Yes 76.00 x 34.40 x 35.50 (1930.4 x 873.8 x 901.7)
Nominal Output
225
300
3,300
4,000
23,000
30,750
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
77.40 x 56.00 x 41.50 (1966.0 x 1422.4 x 1054.1)
77.40 x 56.00 x 41.50 (1966.0 x 1422.4 x 1054.1)
Voltage
(Wye Output:
2
500 5,500 51,250 Yes Yes 77.00 x 72.40 x 48.40 (1955.8 x 1839.0 x 1229.4)
2
L, L, L, N, G)
208Y = 120/208
400Y = 230/400
480Y = 277/480
600Y = 347/600
2
2
2
EVR Specification (10 to 500 kVA)
Feature Description
2
Technology
Input voltages
Electronic tap changer
208–600 V, three-phase (three-wire)
2
Input voltage range
Output voltage
+10% to –23% of nominal rated input
±3% of nominal
2
Response time
Frequency
1/2 cycle
60 Hz, ±3%
2
Efficiency
Line regulation
97% typical
Output is ±3% of nominal for input variations of +10% to –23% of nominal
2
2
Load regulation Output is maintained within 3% of nominal from no load to full load
Correction time Output will be corrected to within ±3% of nominal in 1.5 cycles or less
2
Harmonic distortion Less than 1.0% added to the output waveform under any dynamic linear loading conditions
presented to the line regulator
Noise attenuation
Common mode
Normal mode
146 dB
3 dB down at 1000 Hz, 40 dB/decade to below 50 dB with resistive load
2
Turn-on characteristics
Overload rating
When energized, voltage overshoot will be less than 5% of nominal for 1 cycle or less
1000% for 1 cycle and 200% for 10 seconds
2
Ambient rating
Monitoring
–10 ° to 40 °C
Three green LEDs (phase power on indication), one red LED (alert indication)
2
2
Surge protection (optional) CVX 50 kA SPD device 50 kVA and below, CVX 100 kA SPD device 75 kVA and above
Input breaker MCCB rated 125% of full rated current
2
Bypass switch Normal and bypass selector
Metering (optional) Standard metering (IQ 130)—voltage and current with minimum and maximum
Premium metering (IQ 150)—voltage, current, frequency, power, energy, PF, with minimum
and maximum, communications capabilities 2
Warranty 1-year parts
Notes 2
1 Bypass is standard on 50 kVA and larger units and an option on 45 kVA and smaller units. The ‘B’ is not included in the part number for
units 50 kVA and larger. 2

All weights are approximate. Monitor option includes main input circuit breaker.
Refer to PAD for pricing and availability. 2
Contents
2 Power-Sure 800
Description Page
2 Introduction
CVX050/100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Sure 800
V3-T2-40

2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-44
Superior Power Conditioning for Industrial and Commercial Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-45
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-45
2
2
Power-Sure 800
2 Product Description Application Description Features Standards and Certifications
Eaton’s Power-Sure 800™ The Power-Sure 800 is Superior isolation UL 1012, UL 544
2
● ●
cleans up and purifies ideal for use in industrial ● Tight voltage regulation and cUL listed
fluctuating and erratic power applications, such as ● Meets ANSI standards for
2 High immunity to distortion
●
that exists in commercial and computer programmable computers with inputs as
industrial facilities so that controllers and robotics.
● Lightning and surge
low as 50% of nominal
2 sensitive electronic Use the Power-Sure 800 protection
equipment is not affected. whenever continuous, well- ● Protection against power
interruptions
2 The Power-Sure 800 is a
regulated, transient-free
power is required. ● Power factor correction
self-regulating isolation
2 Bi-directional harmonic
●
transformer. It was
developed to protect against filtering
2 K-30 rated design

●
fluctuating voltages,
brownouts, line noise, short- ● Warranty: two years
duration power outages,
2 sags, surges, spikes and Eaton’s Power-Sure 800
transients. The Power-Sure power conditioners provide
2 800 also has one of the high-quality power with
inherent surge protection,
highest K-factors—K-30—and
2 eliminates harmonic current
in the power line, which helps
noise and bi-directional
harmonic filtering, as well as
superior isolation. These units
2 prevent damage to building
wiring. range from office models to
floor- or wall-/panel-mounted
2 industrial models and provide
an excellent solution for any
2 application with noisy or poor
power quality.
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
2
Power-Sure 800
2
T800 X - XXXXX X X - X
2
Configuration
VA rating
Option/Frequency
Blank = 60 Hz
2
R = Receptacles Custom Receptacle Options
P = Hardwired wall-/panel-mount
F = Hardwired floor-mount
01000
01500
Receptacles
Quantity of: Code
No. of Output
Panels (Max. 4) NEMA® Volts Amps
5 = 50 Hz
2
01600 Blank for
02000
02100
hardwire
A
B
1
1
(1) 5-15R
(2) 5-15R
120
120
15
15 2
C 1 (1) 5-20R 120 20
2
02500
D 1 (2) 5-20R 120 20
03000
E 1.5 (1) 5-30R 120 30
03500
F 1 (1) 6-15R 208/240 15
03501
05000
G 1 (2) 6-15R 208/240 15 2
H 1 (1) 6-20R 208/240 20
07500
08000
10000
I
J
1
1.5
(2) 6-20R
(1) 6-30R
208/240
208/240
20
30 2
K 1.5 (1) 6-50R 208/240 50
2
15000
L 1 (1) 14-20R 120/240 20
20000
M 1.5 (1) 14-30R 120/240 30
25000
N 1 (1) L5-15R 120 15
P
R
1
1
(2) L5-15R
(1) L5-20R
120
120
15
20
2
2
S 1 (1) L5-30R 120 30
T 1 (1) L6-15R 208/240 15
U 1 (2) L6-15R 208/240 15
V
W
1
1
(1) L6-20R
(1) L6-30R
208/240
208/240
20
30 2
X 1 (1) L14-20R 120/240 20
Y 1 (1) L14-30R 120/240 30 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
2 Power-Sure 800 Models
2 Rating (VA/Watts) Input Voltage Output Voltage Input Interface Output Interface Part Number
Office Models (with Receptacles)
2 1000/700 120 120 5-15P (4) 5-20R T800R-01000

1600/1200 120 120 5-15P (4) 5-20R T800R-01600
2 2100/1500 120 120 5-20P (4) 5-20R T800R-02100
2
2500/1750 120 120 5-30P (4) 5-20R T800R-02500
3500/2450 120 120/240 5-50P (4) 5-20R T800R-03500
2 3500/2450 208/240 120/240 6-20P (4) 5-20R T800R-03501

5000/3500 208/240 120/240 Hardwired Custom 1 T800R-05000
2 7500/5250 208/240 120/240 Hardwired Custom 1 T800R-07500
10,000/7000 208/240 120/240 Hardwired Custom 1 T800R-10000
2 15,000/10,500 208/240 120/240 Hardwired Custom 1 T800R-15000
2 Industrial Models (Hardwired Wall-/Panel-Mount)

500/500 Range 1 24 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800P-00500
2 750/750 Range 1 24 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800P-00750


2 10,000/10,000 Range 2 34 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800P-10000

Industrial Models (Hardwired Floor-Mount)
2 5000/5000 Range 1 24 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800F-05000
2
8000/8000 Range 2 34 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800F-08000
10,000/10,000 Range 2 34 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800F-10000
2 15,000/15,000
20,000/20,000
Range 2 34
Range 2 34
Range 3 5
Range 3 5
Hardwired
Hardwired
Hardwired
Hardwired
T800F-15000
T800F-20000
2 25,000/25,000 Range 2 34 Range 3 5 Hardwired Hardwired T800F-25000
Notes
2 1 See Catalog Numbering Selection on Page V3-T2-43; 5 panels available for distribution; HW output utilizes 1 panel, other 4 panels can be used for receptacle interface or cabling.
2 Range 1: 120/208/240/480.
2 3 Range 2: 208/240/480.
4 Input and output voltage is field configurable; units will ship from the factory configured as follows: Range 1—120 V (input/output); Range 2—240 V (input/output).
2
5 Range 3: 120/208/240.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions
● Line regulation: ±3% V-out ● Galvanic isolation: NEC Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2
for +10% to -20% V-in at 250.5d, 0.001 PF
100% load ● Surge protection: 330 V 2
● Load regulation: ±3%for let-through voltage when Power-Sure 800 Models
0–75% load ±2%for 100% tested to ANSI/IEEE®
Dimensions, W x D x H Weight, Lb (kg) Part Number
2
load 62.41-Cat B3
● Immunity to distortion: at ● Common mode noise Office Models (with Receptacles) 2
40% THD V-in, 5% max. attenuation: 140 dB 8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 46 (21) T800R-01000
THD V-out at 50% load or ● Transverse mode noise 8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 62 (28) T800R-01600 2
higher attenuation: 120 dB
2
8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 65 (29) T800R-02100
● Ride-through capability: ● Reliability: 200,000 hours
1 cycle 8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 68 (31) T800R-02500
(MTBF)
● Voltage recovery: 2 cycles
to 95%, 3 cycles to 100%
● Audible noise: 52–56 dB 8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 72 (33) T800R-03500
2
measured at 1 meter, 8.50 x 12.75 x 17.50 (215.9 x 323.9 x 444.5) 73 (33) T800R-03501
● K-factor: K-30 rated A scale 15.00 x 23.75 x 22.50 (381.0 x 603.3 x 571.5) 176 (80) T800R-05000 2
● Power factor correction: ● Efficiency: approximately 15.00 x 23.75 x 22.50 (381.0 x 603.3 x 571.5) 210 (95) T800R-07500
●
input of 0.95 typical
Harmonic attenuation: ●
92% at full load
Operating temperature:
15.00 x 23.75 x 22.50 (381.0 x 603.3 x 571.5) 256 (116) T800R-10000 2
–23 dB for load-reflected
harmonics
–20 ºC to +40 ºC 15.00 x 23.75 x 22.50 (381.0 x 603.3 x 571.5)
Industrial Models (Hardwired Wall-/Panel-Mount)
314 (142) T800R-15000
2
9.00 x 14.00 x 10.00 (228.6 x 355.6 x 254.0) 52 (24) T800P-00500 2
9.00 x 14.00 x 10.00 (228.6 x 355.6 x 254.0) 60 (27) T800P-00750
9.00 x 14.00 x 10.00 (228.6 x 355.6 x 254.0) 82 (37) T800P-01000 2
13.00 x 16.50 x 14.75 (330.2 x 419.1 x 374.7) 106 (48) T800P-01500
13.00 x 16.50 x 14.75 (330.2 x 419.1 x 374.7) 125 (57) T800P-02000
2
13.00 x 16.50 x 14.75 (330.2 x 419.1 x 374.7) 157 (71) T800P-03000
2
27.00 x 22.50 x 28.50 (685.8 x 571.5 x 723.9) 437 (198) T800P-05000
27.00 x 22.50 x 28.50 (685.8 x 571.5 x 723.9) 495 (225) T800P-08000 2
27.00 x 22.50 x 28.50 (685.8 x 571.5 x 723.9) 537 (244) T800P-10000
Industrial Models (Hardwired Floor-Mount) 2
23.00 x 20.00 x 28.50 (584.2 x 508.0 x 723.9)
23.00 x 20.00 x 28.50 (584.2 x 508.0 x 723.9)
407 (185)
465 (211)
T800F-05000
T800F-08000
2
23.00 x 20.00 x 28.50 (584.2 x 508.0 x 723.9) 507 (230) T800F-10000
2
35.00 x 25.00 x 39.50 (889.0 x 635.0 x 1003.3) 830 (376) T800F-15000
35.00 x 25.00 x 39.50 (889.0 x 635.0 x 1003.3) 950 (431) T800F-20000 2
35.00 x 25.00 x 39.50 (889.0 x 635.0 x 1003.3) 1070 (485) T800F-25000
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Contents
2 Eaton Power-Suppress 100
Description Page
2 Introduction
2 SPC Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-24
2 SP1 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27
2 AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sag Ride-Through (SRT2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-31
V3-T2-36
2 Electronic Voltage Regulator (EVR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power-Sure 800. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-40
V3-T2-42
Power-Suppress 100
2 Ultra-Isolator Noise Suppressor and Isolation Provider
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-47
2 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-47
2
2
2 Power-Suppress 100
Eaton’s Power-Suppress™
Applications for the Power-
Features
● Traps unwanted harmonics
100 ultra-isolator noise Suppress 100 include audio
2 suppressors protect sensitive and video equipment,
● Removes surge voltages
and minimizes reflected
equipment from electrical computer and process
2 noise disturbances. Using equipment, telecommunications THD
exclusive double shielding systems, and virtually any ● Cleans and conditions the
techniques, the Power- sensitive electronic sine wave
2 Suppress 100 blocks all forms instruments. ● Eliminates load-generated
of electrical noise including
feedback
2 radio frequency interface
(RFI)/ electromagnetic ● Available in both hardwired
interference (EMI), over a or line cord/receptacle
2 broad range of frequencies.
Furthermore, the noise
models
● Fast and easy installation
2 suppression is achieved
without impeding normal ● Long-life operation
power flow. ● Small footprint—saves
2 Power-Suppress 100 ultra- valuable space
isolator noise suppressors can ● Two-year warranty
2 reduce a 6000-volt spike to an
insignificant 0.0030 volt.
complete unit, five-year
These high-voltage transients warranty core and coil
2 contain enough energy to
completely destroy the
2 electrical circuit components
that are vital to daily
operation.
2
2
2
2
2
2.1
● UL 1012, UL 1449, cUL 2
listed, ANSI/IEEE
C57.12.91 2
● Meets FCC Category A,
IEEE C62.41 Category A3 2
2
2
Power-Suppress 100 2
T100 - - 2
2
Connection Method Option/Frequency
R = Receptacles
H = Hardwired 0500
Size (VA)
= 500 VA
Blank = 60 Hz
5 = 50 Hz
2
2
0750 = 750 VA
1000 = 1000 VA
1800 = 1800 VA
2400
2500
= 2400 VA
= 2500 VA 2
5000 = 5000 VA
5001
7500
= 5000 VA 1
= 7500 VA
2
= 7500 VA 1
2
7501
Product Selection 2
2
Power-Suppress 100 Models
Input Voltages 2 Output Voltages 2 Output VA 3 I/O Interfaces (NEMA) Catalog Number
2
Line-Cord/Receptacle Models 2
120 120 500 5-15P/(1) 5-20R2 T100R-0500
120 120 750 5-15P/(1) 5-20R2 T100R-0750 2
120 120 1000 5-15P/(1) 5-20R2 T100R-1000
120 120 1800 L5-20P/(2) 5-20R2 T100R-1800 2
120 120 2400 L5-30P/(2) 5-20R2 T100R-2400
Terminal Style Models 2
120/240
120/240
120/240
120/240
500
750
Hardwired
Hardwired
T100H-0500
T100H-0750
2
120/240 120/240 1000 Hardwired T100H-1000
2
120/240 120/240 1800 Hardwired T100H-1800
120/240 120/240 2500 Hardwired T100H-2500 2
120/240 120/240 5000 Hardwired T100H-5000
240/480 120/240 5000 Hardwired T100H-5001 1 2
120/240 120/240 7500 Hardwired T100H-7500
240/480 120/240 7500 Hardwired T100H-7501 1 2
Notes
1 Models T100H-5001 and T100H-7501 will ship configured to 240 V input and output voltage. 2
2 Input and output voltages can be field configured for either 120 Vac or 240 Vac, 240 Vac or 480 Vac, as indicated above.
3 500 VA to 7500 VA hardwired models will ship configured to 120 V input and output voltage. 2
2
2
Technical Data and Specifications Dimensions

2 Technical Specifications
Power-Suppress 100 Models
2 Description
Input voltage/frequency
Specifications
120, 240, 480 V 1/60 Hz Dimensions, W x D x H Weight, Lb (kg) Catalog Number
2 Common-mode noise 140 dB at100 kHz Line-Cord/Receptacle Models

Normal-mode noise 65 dB at100 kHz 6.49 x 6.10 x 12.00 (164.8 x 154.9 x 304.8) 22 (10) T100R-0500
2 Overload capacity 600% for 1 cycle, 300% for 30 seconds 6.49 x 6.10 x 12.00 (164.8 x 154.9 x 304.8) 28 (13) T100R-0750
Dielectric strength 2,500 Vac minimum 6.49 x 6.10 x 12.00 (164.8 x 154.9 x 304.8) 31 (14) T100R-1000
2 Frequency 60 Hz ±5% 10.49 x 11.10 x 17.00 (266.4 x 281.9 x 431.8) 54 (24) T100R-1800
Impedance 3–6% typical 10.49 x 11.10 x 17.00 (266.4 x 281.9 x 431.8) 58 (26) T100R-2400
2 Efficiency 93–97% typical Terminal Style Models
2
Input voltage range ±10% of nominal rated voltage 6.42 x 6.10 x 12.00 (163.1 x 154.9 x 304.8) 22 (10) T100H-0500
Harmonic distortion Adds less than 1% THD, under 6.42 x 6.10 x 12.00 (163.1 x 154.9 x 304.8) 28 (13) T100H-0750
linear loading
2 Coil insulation 200 ºC
6.42 x 6.10 x 12.00 (163.1 x 154.9 x 304.8) 31 (14) T100H-1000
10.28 x 11.10 x 17.00 (261.1 x 281.9 x 431.8) 54 (24) T100H-1800
2
Temperature rise 115 ºC max rise above a 40 ºC ambient, depending on
model 10.28 x 11.10 x 17.00 (261.1 x 281.9 x 431.8) 58 (26) T100H-2500
10.28 x 11.10 x 17.00 (261.1 x 281.9 x 431.8) 86 (39) T100H-5000
Electromagnetic interference <0.2 gauss at 36 inches
2 10.49 x 11.10 x 17.00 (266.4 x 281.9 x 431.8) 92 (42) T100H-5001
Environments 10.28 x 11.10 x 17.00 (261.1 x 281.9 x 431.8) 116 (53) T100H-7500
2 Description Specifications 10.28 x 11.10 x 17.00 (261.1 x 281.9 x 431.8) 111 (50) T100H-7501
2 Audible noise Less than 50 dBA measured at 3 ft from

the noise suppressor
Line-Cord Style Terminal Style
Storage temperature
0 to 40 °C
–20 to 50 °C 5-15P Input 1.8–7.5 kVA Front View
Line Cord
2 Operating altitude Up to 12,000 ft (3657.6 m) (without derating) 8.00 (203.2)
Operating humidity 95% relative (noncondensing)
10.28
2 (261.1)
Plug and Receptacle Configuration Models 6.49
2 Rating Input Plug Output Receptacle

(164.8)
500–1000 VA 5-15P 5-20R duplex 11.10

2 1.8 kVA L5-20P 2 x 5-20R duplex Input 6.10 5-20R2
(281.9)
Fuse (154.9) Output
2.4 kVA L5-30P 2 x 5-20R duplex 500–1000 VA Rear View
2 500 VA–1 kVA
Receptacles
2 L5-20 Input
2
Line Cord
8.00 (203.2)
2
Input Fuse
2 10.49
(266.4) 1.8–7.5 kVA Rear View
2
2 Input Fuse 5-20R2 Output
Receptacles
2 1.8–2.4 kVA
0.50 (12.7)
2 Input/Output
Conduit Knockouts
2 Note
1 480 V available for 5 and 7.5 kVA models only.
2
2
Power Factor Correction and Harmonic Filtering
2.2
Contents
Capacitor Cell with Cage Clamp Terminals
Description Page
2
Product Overview 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-50
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-50 2
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
AUTOVAR 300 Automatic Power Factor Correction
Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOVAR 600 Automatic Power Factor
V3-T2-63 2
Correction Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter . . .
V3-T2-67
V3-T2-74
2
Transient-Free Static Switching Power Factor
Correction Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-81 2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83
2
2
2
Product Overview 2
Product Description 2
Eaton’s power factor There are several reasons When capacity becomes a Harmonic Filtering
correction capacitors and to correct poor power factor. problem, the choice of a As the world becomes more 2
harmonic filters are an The first is to reduce or solution will be dependent dependent on electric and
essential part of modern
electric power systems.
eliminate a power factor
penalty charged by the utility.
upon the size of the increase
needed. Like all power
electronic equipment, the 2
likelihood that the negative
Power factor correction
capacitors are the simplest
Another reason is that your
existing transformer is, or
quality solutions, there
are many factors that need
impact of harmonic distortion
increases dramatically. The
2
and most economical shortly will be, at full capacity to be considered when efficiency and productivity
means of increasing the and installing power factor determining which solution gains from these increasingly 2
capacity of any power correction capacitors can will be best to solve your sophisticated pieces of
system, minimizing energy
losses and correcting load
be a very cost-effective power factor problem. equipment have a negative 2
solution to installing a brand side effect…increased
power factor. In addition,
power factor penalties can
new service. Depending on
the amount of power factor
harmonic distortion in the
power lines. The difficult
2
be reduced and power quality correction (kvar that needs to
can be greatly enhanced. be injected into the electrical
thing about harmonic
distortion is determining the 2
system to improve the power cause. Once this has been
factor) and the dynamic determined, the solution 2
nature of the load, can be easy. Active harmonic
a fixed or switched capacitor
bank may be the best
filtering equipment will 2
mitigate specific harmonic
solution. issues, and correct poor
power factor as well.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
2
Capacitor Cell Chart Heavy-Duty Capacitor Cell Chart
Dimensions in Inches (mm) Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 Voltage kvar 1 D H
Weight in
Lb (kg)
Catalog
Number
Name-
plate
Internal
Voltage Weight in Catalog
Voltage kvar D H Rating Lb (kg) Number
2 240 1.5 3.1 (79.5) 7.9 (200.0) 1.1 (0.5) 643PCRMB
240 12.5 3.5 (89.5) 15.3 (388.0) 360 3.3 (1.5) 12X23PHRMB
240 2 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 8B43PCRMB
2 240 2.5 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 1043PCRMB
480 15.0 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 525 2.6 (1.2) 1543PHRMB
480 16.7 3.5 (89.5) 15.3 (388.0) 600 3.3 (1.5) 16S43PHRMBS
240 3 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.8 (0.8) 12X43PCRMB
2 240 4 3.1 (79.5) 7.9 (200.0) 1.1 (0.5) 423PCRMB
480 20.0 3.5 (89.5) 15.3 (388.0) 525 3.3 (1.5) 2043PHRMB
480 25.0 3.5 (89.5) 15.3 (388.0) 525 3.3 (1.5) 2543PHRMB
2 240 5 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 2043PCRMB
600 12.3 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 660 2.6 (1.2) 12A63PHRMB
240 6.3 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 6B23PCRMB
2 240 7.5 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 7X23PCRMB

600
600
14.7
16.7
3.5 (89.5)
3.5 (89.5)
15.3 (388.0) 660
15.3 (388.0) 660
3.3 (1.5)
3.3 (1.5)
14S63PHRMB
16S63PHRMB
240 8.3 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 3.3 (1.5) 8B23PCRMB
2 240 10 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 2.0 (0.9) 1023PCRMB
2
240 12.5 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 12X23PCRMB Dimensions
240 15 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 1523PCRMB Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)
2 480 1.5 2.1 (53.0) 5.0 (125.8) 0.7 (0.3) 1X43PCRMA
480 2 2.5 (63.5) 5.5 (140.8) 0.9 (0.4) 243PCRMA Capacitor Cell
2 480 2.5 2.5 (63.5) 5.5 (140.8) 0.9 (0.4) 2X43PCRMA
480 3 2.5 (63.5) 5.5 (140.8) 0.9 (0.4) 343PCRMA
2 480 4 2.5 (63.5) 6.5 (165.8) 0.9 (0.4) 443PCRMA
2 480
480
5
6
2.5 (63.5)
3.1 (79.5)
6.5 (165.8)
7.9 (200.0)
0.9 (0.4)
1.1 (0.5)
543PCRMA
643PCRMB
2 480 7.5 3.1 (79.5) 7.9 (200.0) 1.1 (0.5) 7X43PCRMB

480 8.3 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 8B43PCRMB
2 480 9 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 943PCRMB
480 10 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 1043PCRMB
2 480 12.5 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.8 (0.8) 12X43PCRMB Note
1 kvar rating standard. Standard kvar tolerance is 0% to +5%.
2 480 15 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.8 (0.8) 1543PCRMB

Part number shown is for three-phase units. Up to 5 kvar at 480 V—
480 18 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 1843PCRMB quick disconnect terminals are standard. Above 5 kvar at 480 V (and on
2 480 20 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 2043PCRMB

all other voltages)—cage clamp terminals are standard.
480 25 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 2543PCRMB

2 600 5 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 563PCRMB
2
600 7.5 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 7X63PCRMB
600 10 3.1 (79.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.3 (0.6) 1063PCRMB
2 600 12.5 3.5 (89.5) 9.4 (238.0) 1.8 (0.8) 12X63PCRMB

600 15 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 1563PCRMB
2 600 17.5 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 2.6 (1.2) 17X63PCRMB
600 20 3.5 (89.5) 12.3 (313.0) 3.3 (1.5) 2063PCRMB
2 600 25 3.5 (89.5) 15.3 (388.0) 3.3 (1.5) 2563PCRMB
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Contents
UNIPUMP
Description Page
2
Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-49 2
UNIPUMP
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-52 2
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-53
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
V3-T2-63 2
V3-T2-67
V3-T2-74
2
Correction Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-81 2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83
2
2
2
UNIPUMP 2
Product Description Features, Benefits and Functions 2
Non-fused capacitors for
outdoor irrigation and oil field Configuration ● Design: Self-healing
metallized high crystalline
● Ceramic discharge
resistors: Reduce residual
2
installations. ● Outer case: Heavy, No. 14
● Designed expressly for
gauge steel finished with
durable powder coat finish.
polypropylene with ramp
metallization film. Total
voltage to less than 50 volts
within one minute of 2
outdoor pumping Integral strap mounting losses less than 0.45 watt de-energization. Selected
applications bracket with keyhole at top per kvar. (Dielectric losses for 20-year nominal life. 2
● Pole or wall mounting for pole or wall installation. less than 0.2 watt per kvar) Exceeds NEC requirements
● Small, light-weight No knockouts ● Ramp metallization: ● Capacitor operating 2
enclosure for easy Provides thicker film at temperature: -40 °F
installation Capacitor Cells higher current density
areas, allowing for reduced
(–40 °C) to +115 °F
(+46 °C)
2
● SO-WA type flexible cable ● Terminals: Insulated
facilitates installation
(4-conductor)
finger-safe terminals rated
for 3 kVAC withstand
internal losses, lower
operating temperatures
● Case: Weatherproof
aluminum housing
2
and longer life expectancy.
● Gland-type weatherproof
bushings
● Dielectric fill: Dry-type
cells use soft organic Also prevents chain
● Warranty: The longest
in the industry—five full
2
polymer resin—Resinol reaction breakdown by
● Strong outer case
● Eliminates potential for
limiting propagation of
years of warranty on
capacitor cells 2
Application Description film vaporization
corona/partial discharge/
Outdoor irrigation and oil electrochemical oxidation
● Pressure sensitive Standards and Certifications 2
interrupter: Built-in, three- ● UL 810 and C22.2 No. 190
and gas field pumping. ● Excellent heat dissipation
● Flash point: +444 °F
phase pop-up interrupter
design. UL recognized.
listed 2
(+229 °C)
2
Removes capacitor from
● Fire point: +840 °F line before internal
(+449 °C) pressure can cause case
rupture. Bulged capacitor 2
cell top provides easy
visual indication of
interrupter operation
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
2 UNIPUMP UNIPUMP
2 kvar
Rated
Current
Case
Size
Cable
Size
Shipping Weight
in Lb (kg)
Catalog
Number
2 240 Vac
2 4.8 AA 14 10.0 (4.5) 223JMR
2 2.5 6.0 AA 14 10.0 (4.5) 2X23JMR

3 7.2 AA 14 10.0 (4.5) 323JMR
2 4 9.6 AA 14 11.0 (5.0) 423JMR
5 12.0 BB 12 11.0 (5.0) 523JMR
2 6 14.4 BB 12 15.0 (6.8) 623JMR
2 7.5 18.0 BB 12 15.0 (6.8) 7X23JMR

480 Vac
2 2 2.4 AA 14 10.4 (4.7) 243JMR

2.5 3.0 AA 14 10.4 (4.7) 2X43JMR
2 3 3.6 AA 14 10.4 (4.7) 343JMR
2
4 4.8 AA 14 10.4 (4.7) 443JMR
5 6.0 AA 14 10.4 (4.7) 543JMR
2 6 7.2 AA 14 10.6 (4.8) 643JMR

7.5 9.0 AA 14 10.6 (4.8) 7X43JMR
2 10 12.0 AA 14 10.8 (4.9) 1043JMR
12.5 15.0 BB 12 15.0 (6.8) 12X43JMR
2 15 18.0 BB 12 15.0 (6.8) 1543JMR
2 17.5
20
21.0
24.0
BB
BB
8
8
15.8 (7.2)
16.8 (7.6)
17X43JMR
2043JMR
2 25 30.0 BB 8 16.8 (7.6) 2543JMR

600 Vac
2 5 4.9 AA 14 10.8 (4.9) 563JMR
7.5 7.4 AA 14 10.8 (4.9) 7X63JMR
2 10 9.8 AA 14 10.8 (4.9) 1063JMR
2 12.5 12.3 BB 12 15.0 (6.8) 12X63JMR

15 14.7 BB 12 15.8 (7.2) 1563JMR
2 17.5 17.2 BB 8 16.8 (7.6) 17X63JMR

20 19.6 BB 8 16.8 (7.6) 2063JMR
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Dimensions
UNIPUMP UNIPUMP Dimension Chart 2
Ø 0.44
(11.2)
Size Code A B C D
2
AA 11.00 (279.4) 14.20 (360.7) 12.60 (320.0) 13.20 (335.3)
Ø 0.88
1.84
(46.7)
(22.4) BB 14.00 (355.6) 17.10 (434.3) 15.50 (393.7) 16.10 (408.9) 2
1.75 2
(44.5)
2
2
2
D C
A 2
2
2
1.45
2
2
(36.8)
0.50 0.75 Ø 0.44

(12.7) (19.1) (11.2) 2
1.50
(38.1)
5.15
2
2
(130.8)
0.07
(1.8)
1.55
(39.4)
2.56
2
2
(65.0)
1.98
(50.3)
2
2
2
B
2
2
1.75 2
(44.5)
2
5.00
(127.0)
2
2
2
2
2
Contents
2 UNIPAK
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-49
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
2 UNIPAK
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-55
2 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-55
2 Wiring Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-60
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-61
2 AUTOVAR 300 Automatic Power Factor Correction
Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
2 AUTOVAR 600 Automatic Power Factor
Correction Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-67
2 AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter. . .
V3-T2-74
Correction Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-81

2 HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83
2
2 UNIPAK
2 Product Description Application Description
Designed for power factor
2 UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed
Capacitor Banks
UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed
Detuned Filters
correction in plants
experiencing harmonics
2 Two-year warranty on Detuned filter systems for
● ●
problems due to high
capacitor cells (units with low voltage, heavy-duty amounts of nonlinear loads.
standard-duty cells) applications
2 ● Five-year warranty on ● Correct power factor in
capacitor cells (units with high harmonic
2 heavy-duty cells) environments
● Indoor/outdoor service ● Two-enclosure design
2 ● Wall-mount (up to C2) and isolates capacitors from
floor-mounted units high-temperature operating
2 available reactors and allows for
flexible installation
● Short lead-times
2 ● Slim profile allows reduced
● Five-year cell warranty/
one-year reactor warranty
footprint, conserving
2 valuable floor space ● Three-phase cell capacitor
construction
2 UNIPAK with Heavy-Duty
Capacitor Cells
2 Standard fixed capacitor

●
systems using heavy-duty

capacitor cells
2 ● For use in moderate
harmonic environments
2 where engineering
evaluation allows in place
2 of detuned filter designs
● Provides future conversion
2 capability into a detuned
filter system when required
2 by facility growth or
increased nonlinear
load levels
2
2
2
2.2
Features, Benefits and Functions Standards and Certifications
2
UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed ● Standard fusing: UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed
Capacitor Banks ● Size Code A1: Three Capacitor Banks 2
● Outer enclosure: Heavy, midget-type fuses with ● UL 810 and CSA C.22.2
No. 14 gauge steel finished
with durable baked powder
100,000 A interrupting No.190 Listed 2
capacity
coat finish. Wall-mounting
flanges and floor-mounting
● Size Code A2 and UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed
Detuned Filters 2
larger: Slotted-blade
feet. Elimination of UL 508A and CSA C22.2
2
●
type fuses with 200,000
knockouts permits indoor/ A interrupting capacity; No. 190 Listed
outdoor use. Manufactured fuses mounted on
to NEMA 1 and 3R stand-off bushings; 2
requirements solderless connectors
● Elevated floor-mounting for easy hookup of 2
feet allow access for easy incoming line
maintenance conductors 2
● Cover: “L” shaped ● Fuse indicating lights:
gasketed cover with
multiple fasteners provides
Red, neon cleared-fuse
indicating lights are
2
front opening for ease of
installation and service
protected by transparent
weatherproof guard 2
UNIPAK operating
2
●
● Options:
temperature: –40 °F to
+115 °F (–40 °C to +46 °C) ● Non-fused units
● UNIPAK storage
available, selected sizes 2
temperature: –40 °F to ● Heavy-duty capacitor
+131 °F (–40 °C to +55 °C) cells, selected sizes 2
● Power and ground
2
UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed
terminal lugs: Furnished Detuned Filters
inside enclosure ● Enclosures: Standard
● Pressure-sensitive
interrupter: All units have
NEMA 1 enclosures have 2
durable baked powder coat
built-in UL recognized
pressure-sensitive
finish 2
interrupter, and thermally
● UNIPAK detuned filter
or mechanically activated operating temperature: 2
disconnecting link removes –40 °F to +115 °F
capacitor from the supply
●
(–40 °C to +46 °C)
UNIPAK detuned filter
2
before dangerous pressure
buildup or excessive fault
current occurs. Bulged
storage temperature:
–40 °F to +131 °F 2
(–40 °C to +55 °C)
capacitor cell top provides
easy visual indication of ● Power and ground 2
interrupter operation terminal lugs: Furnished
inside enclosures 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed Capacitor Banks
2
2 UNIPAK 240 Vac UNIPAK Selection Chart
Rated Shipping
2 kvar
Current
(Amperes) Enclosure
Weight in
Lb (kg)
Catalog
Number
2 1 2.4 A1 18 (8) 123PMURF

1.5 3.6 A1 18 (8) 1X23PMURF
2 2 4.8 A1 19 (9) 223PMURF
2
2.5 6 A1 19 (9) 2X23PMURF
3 7.2 A1 19 (9) 323PMURF
2 4 9.6 A1 20 (9) 423PMURF

5 12 A2 29 (13) 523PMURF
2 6 14.4 A2 29 (13) 623PMURF
7.5 18 A2 30 (14) 7X23PMURF
2 8 19.2 A2 31 (14) 823PMURF
2
10 24 A2 31 (14) 1023PMURF
12.5 30 A2 32 (14) 12X23PMURF
2 15 36 A2 33 (15) 1523PMURF
17.5 42 B1 44 (20) 17X23PMURF
2 20 48 B1 45 (20) 2023PMURF
22.5 54 B1 46 (21) 22X23PMURF
2 25 60 B1 46 (21) 2523PMURF
2 30
32.5
72
78
B1
C1
47 (21)
47 (22)
3023PMURF
32X23PMURF
2 35 84 C1 48 (22) 3523PMURF
37.5 90 C1 60 (27) 37X23PMURF
2 40 96 C1 64 (29) 4023PMURF
2
42.5 102 C1 65 (30) 42X23PMURF
45 108 C1 66 (30) 4523PMURF
2 50 120 C1 68 (31) 5023PMURF

60 144 C1 69 (31) 6023PMURF
2 70 168 C2 99 (45) 7023PMURF
75 180 C2 100 (46) 7523PMURF
2 80 192 C2 101 (46) 8023PMURF
2
90 216 C2 103 (47) 9023PMURF
100 240 D1 104 (47) 10023PMURF
2 120 288 D1 133 (60) 12023PMURF

140 336 E1 137 (62) 14023PMURF
2 150 360 E1 140 (64) 15023PMURF
160 384 E1 175 (80) 16023PMURF
2 180 432 E1 182 (83) 18023PMURF
2 200 480 E1 189 (86) 20023PMURF
Notes
2 Multiply the 240 Vac kvar rating by 0.75 to calculate the kvar value at 208 Vac.
Fused with blown-fuse indication available standard. Non-fused and no lights also available—please consult the factory.
2 Other ratings available, consult factory.
For dimensional information, refer to Page V3-T2-61.
2 Part Numbers:
PMURF—three fuses + three lights
2 PMURN—non-fused
2.2
480 Vac UNIPAK Selection Chart 600 Vac UNIPAK Selection Chart
Rated Shipping Rated Shipping
2
Current Weight in Catalog Current Weight in Catalog
kvar (Amperes) Enclosure Lb (kg) Number kvar (Amperes) Enclosure Lb (kg) Number 2
1.5 1.8 A1 17 (8) 1X43PMURF 5 4.9 A1 19 (9) 563PMURF
2 2.4 A1 18 (8) 243PMURF 7.5 7.4 A1 19 (9) 7X63PMURF 2
2.5
3
3
3.6
A1
A1
18 (8)
19 (9)
2X43PMURF
343PMURF
10
12.5
9.8
12.3
A1
A1
20 (9)
20 (9)
1063PMURF
12X63PMURF
2
4 4.8 A1 19 (9) 443PMURF 15 14.7 A2 29 (13) 1563PMURF 2
5 6 A1 19 (9) 543PMURF 17.5 17.2 A2 29 (13) 17X63PMURF
6 7.2 A1 19 (9) 643PMURF 20 19.6 A2 30 (14) 2063PMURF 2
7.5 9 A1 20 (9) 7X43PMURF 22.5 22.1 B1 44 (20) 22X63PMURF
8 9.6 A1 20 (9) 843PMURF 25 24.5 B1 31 (14) 2563PMURF
2
9 10.8 A1 20 (9) 943PMURF 27.5 27.0 B1 44 (20) 27X63PMURF
2
10 12 A1 20 (9) 1043PMURF 30 29.4 B1 45 (20) 3063PMURF
12.5 15 A2 29 (13) 12X43PMURF 32.5 31.9 B1 45 (20) 32X63PMURF 2
15 18 A2 29 (13) 1543PMURF 35 34.3 B1 46 (21) 3563PMURF
17.5 21 A2 30 (14) 17X43PMURF 37.5 36.8 B1 46 (21) 37X63PMURF 2
2
20 24 A2 31 (14) 2043PMURF 40 39.2 B1 47 (21) 4063PMURF
22.5 27 B1 44 (20) 22X43PMURF 42.5 41.7 B1 47 (22) 42X63PMURF
25 30 A2 32 (15) 2543PMURF 45 44.1 B1 48 (22) 4563PMURF
2
27.5 33 B1 44 (20) 27X43PMURF 50 49.0 B1 48 (22) 5063PMURF
30 36 B1 44 (20) 3043PMURF 55 53.9 C1 64 (29) 5563PMURF 2
32.5 39 B1 45 (20) 32X43PMURF 60 58.8 C1 64 (29) 6063PMURF
35 42 B1 45 (20) 3543PMURF 65 63.7 C1 65 (30) 6563PMURF 2
37.5
40
45
48
B1
B1
46 (21)
46 (21)
37X43PMURF
4043PMURF
70
75
68.6
73.5
C1
C1
65 (30)
66 (30)
7063PMURF
7563PMURF
2
42.5 51 B1 47 (21) 42X43PMURF 80 78.4 C1 68 (31) 8063PMURF 2
45 54 B1 47 (22) 4543PMURF 85 83.3 C1 68 (31) 8563PMURF
50 60 B1 48 (22) 5043PMURF 90 88.2 C1 69 (31) 9063PMURF 2
55 66 C1 48 (22) 5543PMURF 100 98.0 C1 69 (31) 10063PMURF
60 72 C1 48 (22) 6043PMURF 120 117.6 C2 99 (45) 12063PMURF
2
65 78 C1 64 (29) 6543PMURF 125 122.5 C2 100 (46) 12563PMURF
2
70 84 C1 65 (30) 7043PMURF 140 137.2 C2 101 (46) 14063PMURF
75 90 C1 65 (30) 7543PMURF 150 147.0 C2 103 (47) 15063PMURF 2
80 96 C1 66 (30) 8043PMURF 160 156.8 D1 135 (61) 16063PMURF
85 102 C1 68 (31) 8543PMURF 180 176.4 D1 137 (62) 18063PMURF 2
2
90 108 C1 68 (31) 9043PMURF 200 196.0 D1 140 (64) 20063PMURF
100 120 C1 69 (31) 10043PMURF 225 220.5 D1 143 (65) 22563PMURF
120 144 C2 69 (31) 12043PMURF 250 245.0 E1 170 (77) 25063PMURF
2
125 150 C2 99 (45) 12543PMURF 300 294.0 E1 175 (80) 30063PMURF
140 168 C2 100 (46) 14043PMURF 350 343.0 E1 182 (83) 35063PMURF 2
150 180 C2 101 (46) 15043PMURF 400 392.0 E1 189 (86) 40063PMURF
160 192 D1 103 (47) 16043PMURF Notes
2
180
200
216
240
D1
D1
104 (47)
137 (62)
18043PMURF
20043PMURF
Fused with blown-fuse indication available standard.
Non-fused and no lights also available—please consult the factory.
2
2
Other ratings available, consult factory.
225 270 D1 140 (64) 22543PMURF
For dimensional information, refer to Page V3-T2-61.
250 300 E1 170 (77) 25043PMURF Part Number
300 360 E1 175 (80) 30043PMURF PMURF—three fuses + three lights
PMURN—non-fused
2
350 420 E1 182 (83) 35043PMURF
400 480 E1 189 (86) 40043PMURF
2
2
UNIPAK—with Harmonic Cells

2
2 Harmonic Cells Low Voltage Fixed Capacitor Systems with Heavy-Duty Cells
2
Rated Shipping
Current Case Weight in Catalog
kvar (Amperes) Size Lb (kg) Number
2 240 V
15 36 B1 38.4 (17) 1523HURF
2 25 60 B1 38.4 (17) 2523HURF
2 30
50
72
120
C1
C1
55.2 (25)
57.6 (26)
3023HURF
5023HURF
2 60 144 C2 100.8 (46) 6023HURF

75 180 C2 104.4 (47) 7523HURF
2 100 240 D1 136.8 (62) 10023HURF
125 300 E1 189.6 (86) 12523HURF
2 480 V
2 15 18 B1 25.2 (11) 1543HURF

25 30 B1 37.2 (17) 2543HURF
2 30 36 B1 38.4 (17) 3043HURF

50 60 C1 39.6 (18) 5043HURF
2 60 72 C1 52.8 (24) 6043HURF
2
75 90 C2 55.2 (25) 7543HURF
100 120 C2 57.6 (26) 10043HURF
2 125 150 D1 100.8 (46) 12543HURF

150 180 D1 104.4 (47) 15043HURF
2 200 240 E1 136.8 (62) 20043HURF
250 300 E1 186.0 (84) 25043HURF
2 600 V
2 15
25
14.7
24.5
B1
B1
37.2 (17)
38.4 (17)
1563HURF
2563HURF
2 30 29.4 B1 39.6 (18) 3063HURF

50 49 C1 55.2 (25) 5063HURF
2 60 58.8 C1 57.6 (26) 6063HURF
75 73.5 C2 100.8 (46) 7563HURF
2 100 98 C2 104.4 (47) 10063HURF
2 125 122.5 D1 136.8 (62) 12563HURF

150 147 D1 136.8 (62) 15063HURF
2 200 196 E1 186.0 (84) 20063HURF

250 245 E1 189.6 (86) 25063HURF
2 Notes
2 Fused with blown-fuse indication standard.

2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
UNIPAK Low Voltage Fixed Detuned Filters
2
Fixed UNIPAK Detuned Filters 2
Rated Capacitor Shipping Reactor Reactor Combined
Current Enclosure Weight Enclosure Shipping Weight Shipping Weight Catalog 2
kvar (Amperes) Size in Lb (kg) Case Size in Lb (kg) in Lb (kg) Number
240 V 2
15 36 B1 48.4 (22.0) R 90.0 (40.9) 138.4 (62.8) 15232HMURFY
25 60 B1 48.4 (22.0) R 105.0 (47.7) 153.4 (69.6) 25232HMURFY 2
30
50
72
120
C1
C1
65.2 (29.6)
67.6 (30.7)
R
R
110.0 (49.9)
130.0 (59.0)
175.2 (79.5)
197.6 (89.7)
30232HMURFY
50232HMURFY
2
60 144 C2 110.8 (50.3) R 160.0 (72.6) 270.8 (122.9) 60232HMURFY 2
75 180 C2 114.4 (51.9) R 185.0 (84.0) 299.4 (135.9) 75232HMURFY
100 240 D1 146.8 (66.6) R 240.0 (109.0) 386.8 (175.6) 100232HMURFY 2
125 300 E1 199.6 (90.6) S 280.0 (127.1) 479.6 (217.7) 125232HMURFY
150 360 E1 220.0 (99.9) S 280.0 (127.1) 500.0 (227.0) 150232HMURFY
2
480 V
2
15 18 B1 35.2 (16.0) R 90.0 (40.9) 125.2 (56.8) 15432HMURFY
25 30 B1 47.2 (21.4) R 105.0 (47.7) 152.2 (69.1) 25432HMURFY 2
30 36 B1 48.4 (22.0) R 110.0 (49.9) 158.4 (71.9) 30432HMURFY
50 60 C1 49.6 (22.5) R 130.0 (59.0) 179.6 (81.5) 50432HMURFY 2
2
60 72 C1 62.8 (28.5) R 160.0 (72.6) 222.8 (101.2) 60432HMURFY
75 90 C2 65.2 (29.6) R 185.0 (84.0) 250.2 (113.6) 75432HMURFY
100 120 C2 67.6 (30.7) R 240.0 (109.0) 307.6 (139.7) 100432HMURFY
2
125 150 D1 110.8 (50.3) R 280.0 (127.1) 390.8 (177.4) 125432HMURFY
150 180 D1 114.4 (51.9) S 280.0 (127.1) 394.4 (179.1) 150432HMURFY 2
200 240 E1 146.8 (66.6) S 330.0 (149.8) 476.8 (216.5) 200432HMURFY
250 300 E1 196.0 (89.0) T 570.0 (258.8) 766.0 (347.8) 250432HMURFY 2
600 V
15 14.7 B1 47.2 (21.4) R 90.0 (40.9) 137.2 (62.3) 15632HMURFY
2
25 24.5 B1 48.4 (22.0) R 90.0 (47.7) 153.4 (69.6) 25632HMURFY 2
30 29.4 B1 49.6 (22.5) R 105.0 (49.9) 159.6 (72.5) 30632HMURFY
50 49 C1 65.2 (29.6) R 110.0 (59.0) 195.2 (88.6) 50632HMURFY 2
60 58.8 C1 67.6 (30.7) R 130.0 (72.6) 227.6 (103.3) 60632HMURFY
75 73.5 C2 110.8 (50.3) R 160.0 (84.0) 295.8 (134.3) 75632HMURFY
2
100 98 C2 114.4 (51.9) R 185.0 (109.0) 354.4 (160.9) 100632HMURFY
2
150 147 D1 146.8 (66.6) S 280.0 (127.1) 426.8 (193.8) 150632HMURFY
200 196 E1 196.0 (89.0) T 330.0 (149.8) 526.0 (238.8) 200632HMURFY 2
250 245 E1 199.6 (90.6) T 570.0 (258.8) 769.6 (349.4) 250632HMURFY
Notes
2
2
Fused with blown-fuse indication standard.
2
2
2
2
2
2
Wiring Diagram
2
Filter Schematic with Wiring Interconnects
2
Power Lines from Disconnect
2
Lugs
2
2 Fuses
2
Reactor Enclosure
2
2 Lugs
Interconnects (Provided by Customer) 햲
2 Lugs
2 Capacitor Enclosure
2
Note
2 1 Refer to NEC.
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Dimensions
Reactor Cabinet Reactor Cabinet 2
Case Size Height Width Depth
R 24.75 (628.7) 20.00 (508.0) 18.13 (460.5) 2
S
T
25.00 (635.0)
31.00 (787.4)
24.25 (616.0)
25.00 (635.0)
20.25 (514.4)
32.75 (831.9)
2
2
2
2
Low Voltage Fixed Capacitor Banks and Fixed Harmonic Filters
Case A1, A2 Case B1 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
UNIPAK Enclosures 2
2
Case Size A B D E F H L X1 X2 X3 Y Z
A1 5.30 (134.6) 8.50 (215.9) 3.50 (88.9) 3.80 (96.5) 10.60 (269.2) 17.30 (439.4) 6.80 (172.7) 2.00 (50.8) N/A N/A 7.70 (195.6) 7.20 (182.9)
A2 6.00 (152.4) 8.50 (215.9) 5.60 (142.2) 4.50 (114.3) 13.30 (337.8) 22.30 (566.4) 6.80 (172.7) 2.30 (58.4) N/A N/A 7.70 (195.6) 7.20 (182.9)
2
B1 11.10 (281.9) 10.10 (256.5) 5.80 (147.3) 9.60 (243.8) 15.70 (398.8) 25.30 (642.6) 8.50 (215.9) 4.10 (104.1) 4.50 (114.3) N/A 9.30 (236.2) 8.80 (223.5)
Legend: 2
A = Total depth
B = Total width 2
D = Height of removable front cover
E = Depth of feet 2
F = Height of middle mounting hole in wall bracket
H = Total height 2
L = Width without feet and brackets
X = Depth between front and rear mounting holes in inches
Y = Width between floor mounting holes
2
Z = Width between wall bracket mounting holes
2

2
Case C1, C2 Case D1, E1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2 UNIPAK Enclosures
Case
2 Size A B D E F H L X1 X2 X3 Y Z
C1 10.60 (269.2) 12.10 (307.3) 7.10 (180.3) 9.10 (231.1) 16.20 (411.5) 26.30 (668.0) 10.40 (264.2) 3.40 (86.4) 1.10 (27.9) 3.60 (91.4) 11.30 (287.0) 10.70 (271.8)
2 C2 12.00 (304.8) 19.30 (490.2) 16.90 (429.3) 9.50 (241.3) 16.30 (414.0) 36.00 (914.4) 17.70 (449.6) 3.00 (76.2) 1.50 (38.1) 3.80 (96.5) 18.30 (464.8) 18.00 (457.2)
D1 16.80 (426.7) 19.30 (490.2) 16.90 (429.3) 14.60 (370.8) N/A 36.00 (914.4) 17.70 (449.6) 5.10 (129.5) 2.40 (61.0) 5.00 (127.0) 18.30 (464.8) N/A
2 E1 22.30 (566.4) 24.40 (619.8) 16.80 (426.7) 19.50 (495.3) N/A 36.00 (914.4) 22.70 (576.6) 6.50 (165.1) 4.40 (111.8) 5.00 (127.0) 22.40 (569.0) N/A
2 Legend:
A = Total depth
2 B = Total width
D = Height of removable front cover
2 E = Depth of feet
F = Height of middle mounting hole in wall bracket
2
H = Total height
L = Width without feet and brackets
X = Depth between front and rear mounting holes in inches
2 Y = Width between floor mounting holes
Z = Width between wall bracket mounting holes
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Contents
AUTOVAR 300
Description Page
2
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
Capacitor Systems
2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-64
V3-T2-66
2
2
V3-T2-74
2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83 2
2
2
AUTOVAR 300 Automatic Power Factor Correction Capacitor Systems 2
Product Description Features 2
Automatically switched
power factor correction Configuration 2
systems for low voltage ● Cabinet: Wallmounting 12 ● Door interlock: Door ● Temperature range: The
applications. gauge steel with ANSI 61
gray, NEMA 1 (gasketed)
interlock automatically
disengages capacitors.
operating temperature
range is –20 °C to +46 °C,
2
● Wallmount design is ideal Power continues to be and the storage
Power line interconnect:
2
●
for minimum space provided to the unit until temperature range is
Rugged, power distribution
requirements the disconnect is open –40 °C to +55 °C. For
block connection. Typical
● Programmable to power distribution block ● Exhaust fan: Provides optimal equipment life, 2
automatically add/subtract can accommodate phase ventilation; dust filtering the temperature should not
capacitor stages to
maintain preset target
wire sizes from 4 AWG to included exceed 35 °C annual
average, and the
2
500 kcmil; typical ground ● Safety: Ground fault
●
power factor
Heavy-duty, three-phase
lug can accommodate wire
sizes from 14 AWG to 2/0
interruption provides environment should not
exceed Pollution Degree 2 2
protection in case of
capacitor construction as defined in UL 61010-1
● Five-year warranty of cells
AWG. Consult equipment
approval drawings for
accidental contact with
control power and ground
2
against manufacturing actual lug size
defects ● Control wiring: UL type
● Conduit/cable entry:
Available in top/side cable
2
MTW/AWM, CSA TEW 105 °C entry
Application Description copper wire is standard ● Thermal sensing: Built-in 2
AUTOVAR 300 is an ideal ● Fusing: 200,000 A thermal sensing, alarming,
capacitor bank to automatically
regulate power factor where
interrupting capacity and protection feature 2
provided on all three allows the unit to operate
floor space is limited and
expansion of the facility’s
phases of each stage.
Blade-type fuses mounted
in optimal temperature 2
electrical load is not while alerting the user of
expected.
on insulator stand-offs with
cleared-fuse indicating
ambient temperature
exceeding the nominal
2
lights
● Cleared-fuse lights:
operating range. Stages
will be automatically 2
Cleared-fuse neon switched off if temperature
indicating lights for each exceeds the maximum 2
phase and stage located on specified temperature
the door 2
2
2
2

2 ● UL/CSA listed
Controller Contactor and recognized
2 ● Visual indication of ● Fully rated for capacitor ● Entire cabinet assembly is
incorrect CT polarity switching UL 508A and CSA C22.2
2 ● Digital display of power ● Integral pre-charge/pre- No. 190 Listed
factor and number of insertion module standard. ● Capacitors are UL 810
2 energized stages The contactor reduces recognized
● Automatic setting of c/k damaging switching ● Contactor is UL/CSA
2 value (sensitivity based on transients, providing safety
and durability for the
recognized and IEC 6b
CT ratio and kvar available) rated
2 ● Visual indication of system
insufficient kvar to reach ● Lessens the chance of
disrupting sensitive
2 ●
target power factor
Automatic sensing of kvar electronic equipment
● Reduced inrush current
2 ●
values per step
Optional communications extends the life of the
capacitor cells
2 capable controller (RS-485/
Modbus®)
Options
Standard metering
2
●
● Optional main molded-case
capability:
circuit breaker
● Voltage
2 ● Current (sensed phase
● NEMA 3R weather-
resistant enclosure
only)
2 ● Frequency
● Hand-Off-Auto switches
● Remote alarm relay
2
● Active power (kW) terminal block
● Reactive power (kvar) ● Communications capable
2 Apparent power (kVA)
●
controller
● Total voltage harmonic
Support and Service
2 ●
distortion (VTHD)
Individual harmonic ● Renewal parts are available
through local Eaton
2
voltage distortion (odd
orders up to the 19th distributors
harmonic) ● Factory trained service
2 ● Built-in manual mode personnel are available
allows for testing and through Eaton’s Electrical
2 manual operation of stages Services & Systems
● Multiple user-friendly alarm
2 displays. Controller
provides easy-to-understand
2 alarms for various
conditions, such as:
2 ● Undervoltage or
overvoltage
2 ● Undercurrent or
overcurrent
2 Target power factor

●
not met
2 Harmonic overload
●
● Faulty step/stages
2 ● Overtemperature alarm
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Product Selection
2
Wallmounted AUTOVAR 300 Switched Capacitor Banks— Options
Low Voltage Applications Option
2
Description Code
2
Base
Step x Rated Current Shipping Weight Catalog
Remote alarm relay terminal block—relay terminal block for a remote A
kvar kvar Amperes in Lb (kg) 1 Number
alarm to indicate controller alarm status
240 V
Communicating controller (Modbus RS-485) C
2
25 5x5 60 217 (98.5) 25MCSR2313
50 5 x 10 120 255 (115.8) 50MCSR2313
Hand-Off-Auto switch—provides manual control to connect or disconnect capacitor H
stages regardless of controller output 2 2
75 5 x 15 180 260 (118.0) 75MCSR2313 Molded-case circuit breaker (see circuit breaker section)
Weather-resistant enclosure (NEMA 3R gasketed)
M
W
2
100 5 x 20 240 270 (122.6) 100MCSR231
125 5 x 25 300 292 (132.6) 125MCSR231 2
480 V
Integrated Main Breakers—AUTOVAR 300
50 5 x 10 60 200 (90.8) 50MCSR4313
Breaker
AUTOVAR Rated Size
Breaker
Interrupting
Breaker
Weight
Standard
Wire Lug Size
2
2
75 5 x 15 90 210 (95.3) 75MCSR4313 kvar Current Amperes (Amperes) 3 Rating (kA) in Lb (kg) 4
100 5 x 20 120 210 (95.3) 100MCSR4313 240 V

125 5 x 25 150 240 (109.0) 125MCSR4313 25
50
60
120
125
250
100
100
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
(1) #3–350
(1) #3–350
2
150 5 x 30 180 240 (109.0) 150MCSR4313
175 5 x 35 210 260 (118.0) 175MCSR431 75 180 250 100 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350
2
100 240 400 100 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–250
200 5 x 40 241 270 (122.6) 200MCSR431
225 5 x 45 270 290 (131.7) 225MCSR431
125 300 600 100 25 (11.4) (2) #3/0–350 2
480 V
250
600 V
5 x 50 300 292 (132.6) 250MCSR431
50 60 125 65 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350 2
75 90 125 65 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350
50 5 x 10 48 200 (90.8) 50MCSR6313 100 120 250 65 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350 2
75 5 x 15 72 210 (95.3) 75MCSR6313 125 150 250 65 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350
100 5 x 20 96 210 (95.3) 100MCSR6313 150 180 250 65 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350 2
125 5 x 25 120 240 (109.0) 125MCSR6313 175 210 400 65 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–250
150 5 x 30 144 240 (109.0) 150MCSR6313 200 240 400 65 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–250 2
225 270 400 65 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–250
175 5 x 35 168 260 (118.0) 175MCSR631
250 300 600 65 25 (11.4) (2) #3/0–350 2
200 5 x 40 192 270 (122.6) 200MCSR631
600 V
225 5 x 45 216 290 (131.7) 225MCSR631
50 48 125 35 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350 2
250 5 x 50 240 292 (132.6) 250MCSR631
2
75 72 125 35 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350
100 96 250 35 10 (4.5) (1) #3–350
Spare Fuses
kvar Rating/Bank
125
150
120
144
250
250
35
35
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
(1) #3–350
(1) #3–350
2
240 V 480 V 600 V Amperes
Eaton Fuse
Part Number
175
200
168
192
250
400
35
35
10 (4.5)
10 (4.5)
(1) #3–350
(2) #3/0–350
2
5
—
10
15
10
20
30
50
SP030217-0029J
SP030217-0037D
225 216 400 35 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–350
2
250 240 400 35 10 (4.5) (2) #3/0–350
10 20 — 60 SP030217-0037E
Notes 2
— 25 25–30 80 SP030217-0037G 1 To calculate AUTOVAR 300 weight:
15 30 40 100 SP030217-0037J 1. Obtain base unit weight from table above.

2. Add option weights as necessary:
2
20 40 50 125 SP030217-0037K
2
A = 1 lb
25 50 — 150 SP030217-0037L C = 1 lb
H = 5 lb
Renewal Parts
W = 10 lb
M = 50 lb enclosure weight adder plus circuit breaker weight (see circuit breaker table) 2
S = Consult Eaton’s Technical Resource Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose option
Description Catalog Number #4, then option #2 2
Replacement PF controller, ACX type SP039010-0035U Heavy-duty cells, 50 Hz units, and other ratings available, please consult factory. A minimum
Replacement contactor, 72 A SP039010-0014B
of one CT is required per AUTOVAR unit. kvar output is voltage and frequency dependent.
60 Hz units are shown. For other voltages and frequencies, consult Eaton Technical Resource 2
Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose option #4, then option #2.
Replacement contactor, 32 A SP039010-0014C 2 Manual control is always available through controller menu system, even if the H option is
not selected.
2
3 Breakers are sized at a minimum of 135% of the unit rated Amperes per the NEC®.
4 See equipment drawings for actual lug sizes. 2
Dimensions
2 Enclosure J
2 Front View Side View
On/Off 0.63
2 Switch (16.0)
2 Power
Factor
Controller
2
2
Keylock
Handle
2 A
2 Blown
Fuse
Lights
2
2 29.88
(759.0)
2 36.00
(914.4)
2
0.63
(16.0)
B
2
2 Description Height A Depth B
2 J1
J2
36.00 (914.4)
60.00 (1524.0)
14.00 (355.6)
14.00 (355.6)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Contents
AUTOVAR 600
Description Page
2
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
V3-T2-63 2
Correction Capacitor Systems
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-69
V3-T2-73
2
V3-T2-74
2
2
2
AUTOVAR 600 Automatic Power Factor Correction Capacitor Systems 2
● Programmable to ● Cleared-fuse indicating ● Ease of replacement:
automatically add/subtract Configuration lights: LEDs located door- Cells can be easily 2
capacitor stages to ● Cabinet: 12 gauge steel mounted and neon at replaced individually by
maintain preset target
power factor
with ANSI 61 gray, baked
finish. Removable lift bolts
individual fuses to facilitate
tracing of cleared fuses
removing the mounting
bolt and lifting out of the
2
standard, NEMA 1 (gasketed)
● Three-phase capacitor cell
construction ● Power line interconnect:
● Push-to-test: Allows
testing of door-mounted
nest without removal of
any other components 2
Rugged, copper busbar LED cleared fuse indicating Thermal sensing: Built-in
2
●
against manufacturing connection with access lights thermal sensing, alarming,
defects provided for top entry. ● AutoLocate: When door is and protection feature
● Cool operating, 100%
Contact factory for open and bus is energized, allows the unit to operate 2
availability of bottom entry. fuse circuit automatically in optimal temperature
copper wound, thermal-
protected reactors are
Busbars are braced for 65
kA (optional 100 kA rating
checks for cleared fuses. If while alerting the user of
ambient temperature
2
sized up to 150% of rated a fuse has cleared, the light
capacitor current (AUTOVAR
available). All internal
power wiring connections
at the fuse turns on for
easy troubleshooting
operating range. Stages 2
detuned filter only)
from bus are laid out on a will be automatically
Application Description most direct basis with
● Door interlock: Door
interlock automatically switched off if temperature 2
Service entrance or minimum bends for ease exceeds the maximum
2
●
turns off control circuit
substation power factor of troubleshooting. Clear specified temperature
when engaged. Power
correction installations barrier limiting access to ● Temperature range: The
continues to be provided to
requiring precise live parts included standard
Modular tray design:
the unit until disconnect is operating temperature 2
maintenance of target ●
open range is –20 °C to +46 °C,
power factor (AUTOVAR 600) Capacitor stages arranged
in modular trays with
● Exhaust fans: Two side and the storage
temperature range is
2
● Service entrance or louver fans per cabinet
capacitors, fuses, cleared- –40 °C to +55 °C. For
substation power factor
correction installations fuse indicating lights, and
provide cooling and reduce
operator exposure to optimal equipment life, the 2
contactors grouped in a temperature should not
requiring precise
maintenance of target logical, easily understood
discharge. Replaceable
dust filtering provided. exceed 35 °C annual 2
power factor in three- layout. This permits easy average, and the
Dust filters can be replaced
phase, nonlinear, high access, quick identification
of operating problems, and
without opening cabinet environment should not
exceed Pollution Degree 2
2
harmonic environments ● Ease of expansion:
(AUTOVAR detuned filter)
●
ease of expandability
Fusing: UL recognized,
Capacitor stage nests are
as defined in UL 61010-1
2
● Typically connected at main self-contained and can be
low voltage switchgear 200,000 A interrupting
capacity provided on all
added in the field. Two 2
bolts mount the nest in the
three phases of each
stage. Blade-type fuses
field. Control wire plugs
connect to factory
2
mounted on insulator
standard wire harness on
stand-offs
the left side of the cabinet 2
Controller Contactor Additional Features

2 ● Visual indication of ● Fully rated for capacitor ● Optional molded-case main
incorrect CT polarity switching circuit breaker
2 ● Digital display of power ● Integral pre-charge/pre- ● Ground fault interruption
factor and number of insertion module standard. provides protection in case
2 energized stages The contactor reduces of accidental contact with
● Automatic setting of c/k damaging switching control power and ground
2 value (sensitivity based on transients, providing safety ● Control wiring—standard
CT ratio and kvar available) and durability for the NEC color-coded modular
2 ● Visual indication of system
● Lessens the chance of
bundles with quick
disconnect feature for ease
insufficient kvar to reach
2 target power factor disrupting sensitive
electronic equipment
of troubleshooting or ease
of expendability. UL type
● Automatic sensing of kvar
MTW/AWM, CSA TEW
2 Reduced inrush current
●
values per step
extends the life of the 105 °C copper wire is
● Optional communications standard.
capacitor cells
2 capable controller (RS-485/
Modbus)
● Optional digital metering—
Reactors IQ 250
2 ● Standard metering capability:
● Voltage
● Detuning: Standard ● Mechanical wire lugs are
reactor designs are included as standard AUTOVAR 600—Interior View
2 ● Current (sensed phase
only)
detuned to the 4.2nd
harmonic and recommended
equipment. Typical phase
lugs range from (2) 6
2 ●
●
Frequency
Active power (kW)
to protect capacitors
against harmonic resonance.
AWG–350 kcmil to (4) 3
AWG–750 MCM. Typical
Detuning to the 4.7th ground lug can accept wire
2 ● Reactive power (kvar)
harmonic is available as an from 6 AWG to 350 kcmil.
● Apparent power (kVA) option. The harmonic Lugs are compatible with
2 ● Total voltage harmonic spectrum should be copper wire 90 °C
distortion (VTHD) evaluated for applications ● Heavy-duty capacitor cells
2 ● Individual harmonic involving reactors detuned
to the 4.7th harmonic to
are standard on AUTOVAR
voltage distortion (odd detuned filter and optional
2 orders up to the 19th
harmonic)
ensure optimal equipment
life, specifically when used
on AUTOVAR 600. For 480 V
units, standard-duty cells
in conjunction with six-
2 Built-in manual mode are 525 V rated, and heavy-
●
allows for testing and pulse motor drives duty cells are 600 V rated
manual operation of stages ● Windings: 80 °C
2 ● Multiple user-friendly alarm temperature rise design Support and service
displays. Controller provides 100% copper windings for ● Renewal parts are available Modular Step Nest Assembly
2 easy-to-understand alarms minimal losses through local Eaton
for various conditions, ● Thermal overload distributors
2 such as: protection: Each reactor
includes three normally
● Factory trained service
● Undervoltage or personnel are available
2 overvoltage closed, auto reset
thermostats that open at
through Eaton’s Electrical
Services & Systems
● Undercurrent or 180 °C. When thermostats
2 overcurrent engage, the contactor
● Target power factor opens
2 not met ● Insulation: 220 °C Dust Filter Tray
● Harmonic overload insulation system
2 ● Faulty step/stages ● Warranty: One-year
● Overtemperature alarm replacement of reactors Standards and Certifications
2 ● Entire cabinet assembly is
UL 508A and CSA C22.2
2 No. 190 Listed
● Capacitors are UL 810
2 recognized
● Contactor is UL/CSA
2 recognized and
IEC 6b rated
2
2
2
2.2
Product Selection
2
Options—AUTOVAR 600 and AUTOVAR Detuned Filter
Option
2
Description Code
Remote alarm relay terminal block—relay terminal block for a remote alarm to A
2
indicate controller alarm status
Fully insulated main bus B
2
Communicating PF controller (Modbus RS-485) C
2
Hand-off-auto switch provides manual control to connect or disconnect capacitor H
stages regardless of controller output 1
Integrated main breaker M
2
Integrated main breaker with high interrupting rating (see breaker table
for more information), includes 100 kA busbar bracing
M1 2
100 kA busbar bracing N1
2
Integrated CVX series surge protection, without sine wave tracking T1
Integrated SPD series surge protection, 160 kA per phase, T2 2
with sine wave tracking
IQ 250 electronic meter 2 Q 2
Weather resistant enclosure (NEMA 3R gasketed) 3 W
Standard filter detuned to the 4.2nd harmonic 4 Y 2
Notes
1 Manual control is always available through menu controller on system, even if the H option is
2
2
not selected.
2 Not available on NEMA 3R units (W option).
3 Only available on AUTOVAR 600 with heavy-duty cells and AUTOVAR detuned filters
using ‘L + L’, ‘L + KK’, and ‘KK + KK’ enclosures.

4 Tuning to the 4.2nd harmonic is the preferred option. Other tunings available. Contact Eaton’s
2
2
Technical Resource Center (TRC) power factor application engineers at 1-800-809-2772,
choose option #4, then option #2.
To calculate AUTOVAR 600 or AUTOVAR detuned filter weight:
Obtain base unit weight from tables on Pages V3-T2-70–V3-T2-72
(as appropriate).
2
Add option weights as necessary:
A = 1 lb (0.5 kg) 2
B = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
C = 1 lb (0.5 kg)
H = 10 lb (4.5 kg) 2
M = Circuit breaker weight (see circuit breaker table)
M1 = 10 lb (4.5 kg) hardware weight adder plus circuit breaker
weight (see circuit breaker table) 2
N1 = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
2
T1 = 5 lb (2.3 kg)
T2 = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
Q = 5 lb (2.3 kg)
2
W = 10 lb (4.5 kg) per door
Y = 0 lb (0 kg)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
AUTOVAR 600 Floor-Mounted Switched Capacitor Banks AUTOVAR 600 Sizing Chart for Units with
2 Units with Standard-Duty Cells—Low Voltage Applications Standard-Duty Cells
2
Base
Rated Shipping Base Enclosure Size 2
Step x Current Weight Catalog Step x NEMA 1, without Main NEMA 1, with Main
2 kvar 1
240 Vac
kvar Amperes in Lb (kg) Number kvar
240 V
kvar Breaker, No Suffix Breaker, M Suffix
2 75
100
3 x 25
4 x 25
180
240
644 (292.4)
692 (314.2)
75TPCSR231
100TPCSR231
75
100
3 x 25
4 x 25
L
L
L
L
2 125
150
5 x 25
6 x 25
300
361
740 (336.0)
788 (357.8)
125TPCSR231
150TPCSR231
125
150
5 x 25
6 x 25
L
L
L
L
2 200 8 x 25 481 884 (401.3) 200TPCSR231 200 8 x 25 L L

250 10 x 25 600 944 (428.6) 250TPCSR231 250 10 x 25 L L
300 12 x 25 L L
2
300 12 x 25 720 1022 (464.0) 300TPCSR231
350 7 x 50 844 1616 (734.0) 350TPCSR231 350 7 x 50 KK KK
400 8 x 50 965 1704 (774.0) 400TPCSR231 400 8 x 50 KK C/F
2 480 Vac 480 V
100 2 x 50 120 588 (266.7) 100TPCSR431 100 2 x 50 L L
2 150 3 x 50 180 632 (287.0) 150TPCSR431 150 3 x 50 L L
200 4 x 50 240 676 (306.9) 200TPCSR431 200 4 x 50 L L
2 250 5 x 50 300 720 (326.9) 250TPCSR431 250 5 x 50 L L
300 6 x 50 360 764 (346.9) 300TPCSR431 300 6 x 50 L L
2 350 7 x 50 420 808 (366.8) 350TPCSR431 350 7 x 50 L L
400 8 x 50 480 852 (386.8) 400TPCSR431 400 8 x 50 L L
2 450 9 x 50 540 896 (406.8) 450TPCSR431 450 9 x 50 L L
500 10 x 50 600 944 (428.6) 500TPCSR431 500 10 x 50 L L
2 550 11 x 50 660 984 (446.7) 550TPCSR431 550

600
11 x 50
12 x 50
L
L
L
L
600 12 x 50 720 1022 (464.0) 600TPCSR431
2 660
700
11 x 60
7 x 100
792
840
1010 (458.5)
1616 (734.0)
660TPCSR431
700TPCSR431
660
700
11 x 60
14 x 50
L
KK
L
KK
2 720
800
12 x 60
8 x 100
864
960
1050 (476.7)
1704 (774.0)
720TPCSR431
800TPCSR431
720
800
12 x 60
8 x 100
L
KK
L
C/F
2 900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
1080
1200
1792 (814.0)
1888 (857.0)
900TPCSR431
1000TPCSR431
900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
2
1100 11 x 100 1320 1966 (893.0) 1100TPCSR431 1100 11 x 100 KK C/F
1200 12 x 100 1440 2044 (928.0) 1200TPCSR431 1200 12 x 100 KK C/F
600 Vac 600 V
2 100 2 x 50 46 588 (266.7) 100TPCSR631 100 2 x 50 L L
150 3 x 50 144 632 (287.0) 150TPCSR631 150 3 x 50 L L
2 200 4 x 50 192 676 (306.9) 200TPCSR631 200 4 x 50 L L
250 5 x 50 240 720 (326.9) 250TPCSR631 250 5 x 50 L L
2 300 6 x 50 288 764 (346.9) 300TPCSR631 300 6 x 50 L L
350 7 x 50 336 808 (366.8) 350TPCSR631 350 7 x 50 L L
2 400 8 x 50 384 852 (386.8) 400TPCSR631 400 8 x 50 L L
450 9 x 50 432 896 (406.8) 450TPCSR631 450 9 x 50 L L
2 500 10 x 50 480 944 (428.6) 500TPCSR631 500 10 x 50 L L
550 11 x 60 528 984 (446.7) 550TPCSR631 550 11 x 50 L L
2 600 12 x 50 576 1022 (464.0) 600TPCSR631 600

660
12 x 50
11 x 60
L
L
L
L
660 11 x 60 634 1010 (458.5) 660TPCSR631
2 700
720
7 x 100
12 x 60
672
692
1616 (734.0)
1050 (476.7)
700TPCSR631
720TPCSR631
700
720
14 x 50
12 x 60
KK
L
KK
L
2 800
900
8 x 100
9 x 100
768
864
1704 (774.0)
1792 (814.0)
800TPCSR631
900TPCSR631
800
900
8 x 100
9 x 100
KK
KK
KK
KK
2 1000
1100
10 x 100
11 x 100
960
1056
1888 (857.0)
1966 (893.0)
1000TPCSR631
1100TPCSR631
1000
1100
10 x 100
11 x 100
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
2
1200 12 x 100 1152 2044 (928.0) 1200TPCSR631 1200 12 x 100 KK C/F
Notes
2 1 Other ratings available. Please consult factory. kvar output is voltage and frequency
dependent. 60 Hz units are shown. For other voltages and frequencies, consult Eaton
Technical Resource Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose option #4, then option #2.
2 2 Enclosure sizing for units with integrated surge protection or bottom entry can vary
and may not be available on all kvar sizes. Contact Eaton’s Technical Resource Center at
2
1-800-809-2772, choose option #4, then option #2.
C/F = Consult factory
2.2
AUTOVAR 600 Floor-Mounted Switched Capacitor Banks AUTOVAR 600 Sizing Chart for Units with Heavy-Duty Cells
Units with Heavy-Duty Cells—Low Voltage Applications Enclosure Size 2
2
Rated
Base
Shipping Base
NEMA 1,
without Main
NEMA 1,
with Main
NEMA 3R,
without Main
NEMA 3R,
with Main 2
Step x Current Weight in Catalog Step x Breaker, Breaker, Breaker, Breaker,
kvar 1 kvar Amperes Lb (kg) Number kvar kvar No Suffix M Suffix W Suffix MW Suffix
2
240 Vac 240 V
75 3 x 25 180 659 (298.9) 75TPHSR231 75
100
3 x 25
4 x 25
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
2
100 4 x 25 240 712 (323.0) 100TPHSR231
125
150
5 x 25
6 x 25
300
361
765 (347.0)
818 (371.0)
125TPHSR231
150TPHSR231
125
150
5 x 25
6 x 25
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
2
200
250
8 x 25
10 x 25
481
601
924 (419.1)
994 (450.9)
200TPHSR231
250TPHSR231
200
250
8 x 25
10 x 25
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
2
300
350
12 x 25
7 x 50
720
844
1082 (490.8)
1686 (764.8)
300TPHSR231
350TPHSR231
300
350
12 x 25
7 x 50
L
L
L
KK
L
KK
L
KK
2
2
400 8 x 50 965 1784 (809.2) 400TPHSR231 400 8 x 50 KK C/F KK C/F
480 Vac 480 V
100 2 x 50 L L L L
2
100 2 x 50 120 617 (279.9) 100TPHSR431
150 3 x 50 180 677 (307.1) 150TPHSR431 150 3 x 50 L L L L
200 4 x 50 240 736 (333.8) 200TPHSR431 200 4 x 50 L L L L
250 5 x 50 300 795 (360.6) 250TPHSR431 250 5 x 50 L L L L 2
300 6 x 50 360 854 (387.4) 300TPHSR431 300 6 x 50 L L L L
350 7 x 50 420 913 (414.1) 350TPHSR431 350 7 x 50 L L L L 2
400 8 x 50 480 972 (440.9) 400TPHSR431 400 8 x 50 L L L L
450 9 x 50 540 1031 (467.7) 450TPHSR431 450 9 x 50 L L L L 2
500 10 x 50 600 1094 (496.2) 500TPHSR431 500 10 x 50 L L L L
550 11 x 50 660 1149 (521.2) 550TPHSR431 550 11 x 50 L L L L 2
600 12 x 50 720 1202 (545.2) 600TPHSR431 600 12 x 50 L L L L
700 14 x 50 792 1826 (828.3) 700TPHSR431 700 14 x 50 KK KK KK KK 2
900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
1083
1203
2062 (935.3)
2198 (997.0)
900TPHSR431
1000TPHSR431
900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
2
1100
1200
11 x 100
12 x 100
1323
1443
2296 (1041.4)
2404 (1090.4)
1100TPHSR431
1200TPHSR431
1100
1200
11 x 100
12 x 100
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
KK
KK
C/F
C/F
2
600 Vac
100 2 x 50 96 617 (279.9) 100TPHSR631
600 V
100 2 x 50 L L L L
2
2
150 3 x 50 144 677 (307.1) 150TPHSR631 150 3 x 50 L L L L
200 4 x 50 192 736 (333.8) 200TPHSR631 200 4 x 50 L L L L
2
250 5 x 50 240 795 (360.6) 250TPHSR631 250 5 x 50 L L L L
300 6 x 50 288 854 (387.4) 300TPHSR631 300 6 x 50 L L L L
350 7 x 50 336 913 (414.1) 350TPHSR631 350 7 x 50 L L L L
400 8 x 50 384 972 (440.9) 400TPHSR631 400 8 x 50 L L L L 2
450 9 x 50 432 1031 (467.7) 450TPHSR631 450 9 x 50 L L L L
500 10 x 50 480 1094 (496.2) 500TPHSR631 500 10 x 50 L L L L 2
550 11 x 60 529 1149 (521.2) 550TPHSR631 550 11 x 50 L L L L
600 12 x 50 576 1202 (545.2) 600TPHSR631 600 12 x 50 L L L L 2
700 7 x 100 672 1826 (828.3) 700TPHSR631 700 14 x 50 KK KK KK KK
800 8 x 100 768 1944 (881.8) 800TPHSR631 800 8 x 100 KK KK KK KK 2
900 9 x 100 864 2062 (935.3) 900TPHSR631 900 9 x 100 KK KK KK KK
1000 10 x 100 962 2198 (997.0) 1000TPHSR631 1000 10 x 100 KK C/F KK C/F 2
2
Notes
1 Other ratings available. Please consult factory. kvar output is voltage and frequency
2
dependent. 60 Hz units are shown. For other voltages and frequencies, consult Eaton
Technical Resource Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose option #4, then option #2.
2 Enclosure sizing for units with integrated surge protection or bottom entry can vary 2
1-800-809-2772, choose option #4, then option #2. 2
2
2
Floor-Mounted Switched Detuned Filters—Low Voltage AUTOVAR Detuned Filter Sizing Chart
2 Base Enclosure Size 2
Rated Shipping
2 kvar 1
Step x
kvar
Current
Amperes
Weight
in Lb (kg)
Base
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
without Main
NEMA 1
with Main
NEMA 3R
without Main
NEMA 3R
with Main
Step x Breaker, Breaker, Breaker, Breaker,
2 240 Vac kvar kvar No Suffix M Suffix W Suffix MW Suffix
150 6 x 25 361 1830 (830.8) 150THFSR232Y 240 V
2 200 8 x 25 481 2222 (1008.8 200THFSR232Y 150 6 x 25 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
250 10 x 25 601 2525 (1146.4) 250THFSR232Y 200 8 x 25 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
2 300 12 x 25 720 2830 (1284.8) 300THFSR232Y 250 10 x 25 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
350 7 x 50 844 3090 (1401.6) 350THFSR231Y 300 12 x 25 L+L3 KK L+L3 KK
2 400 8 x 50 965 3560 (1614.8) 400THFSR232Y 350 7 x 50 KK L + KK 3 L + KK 3 KK
480 Vac L + KK 3 L + KK 3
2
400 8 x 50 C/F C/F
100 2 x 50 120 1105 (501.2) 100THFSR431Y 480 V
2
150 3 x 50 180 1242 (564.6) 150THFSR431Y 100 2 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
200 4 x 50 240 1438 (652.9) 200THFSR431Y 150 3 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
2
250 5 x 50 300 1634 (741.8) 250THFSR431Y 200 4 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
300 6 x 50 360 1830 (830.8) 300THFSR432Y 250 5 x 50 L L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L3
2 350
400
7 x 50
8 x 50
420
480
2026 (919.8)
2222 (1008.8)
350THFSR432Y
400THFSR432Y
300
350
6 x 50
7 x 50
L+L
L+L3
3 L+L
L+L3
3 L+L
L+L3
3 L+L3
L+L3
2 450
500
9 x 50
10 x 50
540
600
2371 (1076.4)
2525 (1146.4)
450THFSR432Y
500THFSR432Y
400 8 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
450 9 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
2 550 11 x 50 660 2750 (1248.5) 550THFSR432Y 500 10 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
600 12 x 50 720 2830 (1284.8) 600THFSR432Y 550 11 x 50 L+L 3 KK L+L 3 L + KK 3
2 700 7 x 100 792 3090 (1401.6) 700THFSR431Y 600 12 x 50 L+L3 KK L+L3 L + KK 3
800 8 x 100 962 3560 (1614.8) 800THFSR432Y 700 7 x 100 KK KK L + KK 3 L + KK 3
2 900 9 x 100 1083 3900 (1769.0) 900THFSR432Y 800 8 x 100 L + KK 3 C/F L + KK 3 C/F
1000 10 x 100 1203 4240 (1923.2) 1000THFSR432Y 900 9 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
2 1100 11 x 100 1323 4500 (2041.2) 1100THFSR432Y 1000 10 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
600 Vac 1100 11 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
2 100 2 x 50 96 1105 (501.2) 100THFSR631Y 600 V
150 3 x 50 144 1242 (564.6) 150THFSR631Y 100 2 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
2 200 4 x 50 192 1438 (652.9) 200THFSR631Y 150 3 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
250 5 x 50 240 1634 (741.8) 250THFSR631Y L+L3 L+L3
2
200 4 x 50 L L
300 6 x 50 288 1830 (830.8) 300THFSR632Y 250 5 x 50 L L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L3
350 7 x 50 336 2026 (919.8) 350THFSR632Y
2
300 6 x 50 L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L3
2
2 550
600
11 x 50
12 x 50
529
576
2750 (1248.5)
2830 (1284.8)
550THFSR632Y
600THFSR632Y
500
550
10 x 50
11 x 50
L+L3
L+L 3
L+L3
KK
L+L3
L+L 3
L+L3
L + KK 3
2 700
800
7 x 100
8 x 100
672
768
3090 (1401.6)
3560 (1614.8)
700THFSR631Y
800THFSR632Y
600 12 x 50 L+L 3 KK L+L 3 L + KK 3
700 7 x 100 KK KK L + KK 3 L + KK 3
2 900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
864
962
3900 (1769.0)
4240 (1923.2)
900THFSR632Y
1000THFSR632Y
800 8 x 100 L + KK 3 L + KK 3 L + KK 3 L + KK 3
900 9 x 100 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3
2 1100 11 x 100 1058 4500 (2041.2) 1100THFSR632Y 1000 10 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
1100 11 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
2 Notes
1 kvar output is voltage and frequency dependent. 60 Hz units are shown. For other voltages
2 and frequencies, consult Eaton Technical Resource Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose
option #4, then option #2.
2
2 Enclosure sizing for units with integrated surge protection or bottom entry can vary
2 3 Dual enclosure design requires customer installation of factory supplied interconnecting
wires.
2 C/F = Consult factory
2
2.2
Dimensions
2
Enclosure L Front View
2
Standard Customer Conduit
Entry in This Area Option “W” NEMA 3R
2
Drip Shield
Power
2
2
POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
Conductor
Exhaust
69B1007G01
Lugs
1
2
R
Power Factor Controller

BLR-ACX
2 esc
Option “M”
3 PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
DANGER
Molded-Case Ground
HIGH VOLTAGE
Circuit Breaker
2
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
Lug
BEFORE SERVICING
78.00
(1981.2) 2
Copper
Busbar 2
2
A A 2
38.50
2
Dust/Air Filter Tray 25.00
(977.9) (635.0)
2
41.30 (1049.0) Legend
1. Controller
Mounting Holes 2. On/Off Switch
25.00
2
0.438-Inch Dia. Typ. 3. Cleared Fuse Indicating Lights
(635.0) 16.00
Air Filter
(406.4)
Notes:
1. 6-Inch Minimum Clearance Each Side 2
2. 45-Inch Front Clearance or per Local Code
Section A-A
2
Enclosure KK Front and Side Views 2
Option “W” NEMA 3R Drip Shield
2
Customer Conduit Entry in This Area
2
POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
69B1007G01
Power
Conductor Exhaust
1 Lugs Ground
2
R
Lug
BLR-ACX
2 esc
Option “M”
Molded-Case
Circuit Breaker
78.00
(1981.2)
2
Copper
Busbar 2
2
2
A A
Dust/Air Filter Tray

25.00 2
(635.0)
77.64 (1972.0)
2
80.40 (2042.1) Legend
Mounting Holes
1. Controller
2. On/Off Switch 2
2
25.00 16.00 Air Filter Air Filter
(635.0) (406.4) Notes:
1. 6-Inch Minimum Clearance Each Side
Section A-A
2
Contents
2 AUTOVAR Filter
Description Page
2 Product Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-49
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
2 UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54
2 Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-63
2 Correction Capacitor Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter
V3-T2-67
2
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-75
2 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T2-78

2 HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-83
2
2
2 AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter
2 Product Description Features
● Programmable to ● Cleared-fuse indicating ● Ease of replacement:
2 automatically add/subtract Configuration lights: LEDs located door- Cells can be easily
capacitor stages to ● Cabinet: 12 gauge steel mounted and neon at replaced individually by
2 maintain preset target
power factor
with ANSI 61 gray, baked
finish. Removable lift bolts
individual fuses to facilitate
tracing of cleared fuses
removing the mounting
bolt and lifting out of the
standard, NEMA 1 (gasketed)
2 ● Three-phase capacitor cell
construction ● Power line interconnect:
● Push-to-test: Allows
testing of door-mounted
nest without removal of
any other components
Rugged, copper busbar LED cleared fuse indicating Thermal sensing: Built-in
2
●
against manufacturing connection with access lights thermal sensing, alarming,
defects provided for top entry. ● AutoLocate: When door is and protection feature
2 ● Cool operating, 100%
Contact factory for open and bus is energized, allows the unit to operate
availability of bottom entry. fuse circuit automatically in optimal temperature
copper wound, thermal-
2 protected reactors are
Busbars are braced for 65
kA (optional 100 kA rating
checks for cleared fuses. If while alerting the user of
ambient temperature
sized up to 150% of rated a fuse has cleared, the light
2 capacitor current (AUTOVAR
available). All internal
power wiring connections
at the fuse turns on for
easy troubleshooting
operating range. Stages
detuned filter only)
from bus are laid out on a will be automatically
2 Application Description most direct basis with
● Door interlock: Door
interlock automatically switched off if temperature
Service entrance or minimum bends for ease exceeds the maximum
2
●
turns off control circuit
substation power factor of troubleshooting. Clear specified temperature
when engaged. Power
correction installations barrier limiting access to ● Temperature range: The
continues to be provided to
2 requiring precise live parts included standard
Modular tray design:
the unit until disconnect is operating temperature
maintenance of target ●
open range is –20 °C to +46 °C,
2 power factor (AUTOVAR 600) Capacitor stages arranged
in modular trays with
● Exhaust fans: Two side and the storage
temperature range is
● Service entrance or louver fans per cabinet
capacitors, fuses, cleared- –40 °C to +55 °C. For
2 substation power factor
correction installations fuse indicating lights, and
provide cooling and reduce
operator exposure to optimal equipment life, the
contactors grouped in a temperature should not
2 requiring precise
maintenance of target logical, easily understood
discharge. Replaceable
dust filtering provided. exceed 35 °C annual
power factor in three- layout. This permits easy average, and the
Dust filters can be replaced
2 phase, nonlinear, high access, quick identification
of operating problems, and
without opening cabinet environment should not
exceed Pollution Degree 2
harmonic environments ● Ease of expansion:
2 (AUTOVAR detuned filter)
●
ease of expandability
Fusing: UL recognized,
Capacitor stage nests are
as defined in UL 61010-1
● Typically connected at main self-contained and can be
2 low voltage switchgear 200,000 A interrupting
capacity provided on all
added in the field. Two
bolts mount the nest in the
three phases of each
2 stage. Blade-type fuses
field. Control wire plugs
connect to factory
mounted on insulator
standard wire harness on
2 stand-offs
the left side of the cabinet
2.2
Controller Contactor Additional Features
● Visual indication of ● Fully rated for capacitor ● Optional molded-case main 2
incorrect CT polarity switching circuit breaker
● Digital display of power ● Integral pre-charge/pre- ● Ground fault interruption 2
factor and number of insertion module standard. provides protection in case
energized stages The contactor reduces of accidental contact with 2
● Automatic setting of c/k damaging switching control power and ground
value (sensitivity based on transients, providing safety
and durability for the
● Control wiring—standard 2
CT ratio and kvar available) NEC color-coded modular
● Visual indication of system
● Lessens the chance of
bundles with quick
disconnect feature for ease
2
insufficient kvar to reach
target power factor disrupting sensitive
electronic equipment
of troubleshooting or ease
of expendability. UL type 2
● Automatic sensing of kvar
MTW/AWM, CSA TEW
Reduced inrush current
2
●
values per step
extends the life of the 105 °C copper wire is
● Optional communications standard.
capacitor cells
capable controller (RS-485/
Modbus)
● Optional digital metering— 2
Reactors IQ 250
Standard metering capability:
2
●
● Detuning: Standard ● Mechanical wire lugs are
● Voltage reactor designs are included as standard
● Current (sensed phase
only)
detuned to the 4.2nd
harmonic and recommended
equipment. Typical phase
lugs range from (2) 6
2
AUTOVAR Filter—Reactor Cabinet
●
●
Frequency
Active power (kW)
to protect capacitors
against harmonic resonance.
AWG–350 kcmil to (4) 3
AWG–750 MCM. Typical 2
Detuning to the 4.7th ground lug can accept wire
● Reactive power (kvar)
harmonic is available as an from 6 AWG to 350 kcmil. Standards and Certifications 2
● Apparent power (kVA) option. The harmonic Lugs are compatible with ● Entire cabinet assembly is
● Total voltage harmonic spectrum should be copper wire 90 °C UL 508A and CSA C22.2 2
distortion (VTHD) evaluated for applications ● Heavy-duty capacitor cells No. 190 Listed
● Individual harmonic
voltage distortion (odd
involving reactors detuned
to the 4.7th harmonic to
are standard on AUTOVAR ● Capacitors are UL 810 2
detuned filter and optional recognized
orders up to the 19th
harmonic)
ensure optimal equipment
life, specifically when used
on AUTOVAR 600. For 480 V
units, standard-duty cells
● Contactor is UL/CSA 2
recognized and
in conjunction with six-
Built-in manual mode are 525 V rated, and heavy-
2
●
IEC 6b rated
allows for testing and pulse motor drives duty cells are 600 V rated
manual operation of stages ● Windings: 80 °C
● Multiple user-friendly alarm temperature rise design Support and service 2
displays. Controller provides 100% copper windings for ● Renewal parts are available
easy-to-understand alarms minimal losses through local Eaton 2
for various conditions, ● Thermal overload distributors
such as: protection: Each reactor
includes three normally
● Factory trained service 2
● Undervoltage or personnel are available
overvoltage closed, auto reset
thermostats that open at
through Eaton’s Electrical
Services & Systems
2
● Undercurrent or 180 °C. When thermostats
overcurrent engage, the contactor 2
● Target power factor opens
not met ● Insulation: 220 °C 2
● Harmonic overload insulation system
● Faulty step/stages ● Warranty: One-year 2
● Overtemperature alarm replacement of reactors
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
2
Options—AUTOVAR 600 and AUTOVAR Detuned Filter
Option
2
Description Code
Remote alarm relay terminal block—relay terminal block for a remote alarm to A
indicate controller alarm status
2 Fully insulated main bus B
2 Communicating PF controller (Modbus RS-485) C

Hand-off-auto switch provides manual control to connect or disconnect capacitor H
2 stages regardless of controller output 1

Integrated main breaker M
2 Integrated main breaker with high interrupting rating (see breaker table
for more information), includes 100 kA busbar bracing
M1
2 100 kA busbar bracing N1

Integrated CVX series surge protection, without sine wave tracking T1
2 Integrated SPD series surge protection, 160 kA per phase, T2
with sine wave tracking
2 IQ 250 electronic meter 2 Q
Weather resistant enclosure (NEMA 3R gasketed) 3 W
2 Standard filter detuned to the 4.2nd harmonic 4 Y
2 Notes
1 Manual control is always available through menu controller on system, even if the H option is
2
not selected.
2 Not available on NEMA 3R units (W option).
3 Only available on AUTOVAR 600 with heavy-duty cells and AUTOVAR detuned filters
2 using ‘L + L’, ‘L + KK’, and ‘KK + KK’ enclosures.

4 Tuning to the 4.2nd harmonic is the preferred option. Other tunings available. Contact Eaton’s
2
Technical Resource Center (TRC) power factor application engineers at 1-800-809-2772,
choose option #4, then option #2.
To calculate AUTOVAR 600 or AUTOVAR detuned filter weight:
2 Obtain base unit weight from table on Page V3-T2-77 (as appropriate).
Add option weights as necessary:
2 A = 1 lb (0.5 kg)
B = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
C = 1 lb (0.5 kg)
2 H = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
M = Circuit breaker weight (see circuit breaker table)
M1 = 10 lb (4.5 kg) hardware weight adder plus circuit breaker
2 weight (see circuit breaker table)
N1 = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
T1 = 5 lb (2.3 kg)
2 T2 = 10 lb (4.5 kg)
Q = 5 lb (2.3 kg)
W = 10 lb (4.5 kg) per door
2
Y = 0 lb (0 kg)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Floor-Mounted Switched Detuned Filters—Low Voltage AUTOVAR Detuned Filter Sizing Chart
Base Enclosure Size 2
2
Rated Shipping
kvar 1
Step x
kvar
Current
Amperes
Weight
in Lb (kg)
Base
Catalog Number
NEMA 1
without Main
NEMA 1
with Main
NEMA 3R
without Main
NEMA 3R
with Main 2
Step x Breaker, Breaker, Breaker, Breaker,
240 Vac kvar kvar No Suffix M Suffix W Suffix MW Suffix 2
150 6 x 25 361 1830 (830.8) 150THFSR232Y 240 V
200 8 x 25 481 2222 (1008.8 200THFSR232Y 150 6 x 25 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 2
300 12 x 25 720 2830 (1284.8) 300THFSR232Y 250 10 x 25 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 2
350 7 x 50 844 3090 (1401.6) 350THFSR231Y 300 12 x 25 L+L3 KK L+L3 KK
400 8 x 50 965 3560 (1614.8) 400THFSR232Y 350 7 x 50 KK L + KK 3 L + KK 3 KK 2
480 Vac 3 3
2
400 8 x 50 L + KK C/F L + KK C/F
100 2 x 50 120 1105 (501.2) 100THFSR431Y 480 V
150 3 x 50 180 1242 (564.6) 150THFSR431Y
2
100 2 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
200 4 x 50 240 1438 (652.9) 200THFSR431Y 150 3 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
2
250 5 x 50 300 1634 (741.8) 250THFSR431Y 200 4 x 50 L L L+L 3 L+L 3
300 6 x 50 360 1830 (830.8) 300THFSR432Y 250 5 x 50 L L+L3 L+L3 L+L3

350
400
7 x 50
8 x 50
420
480
2026 (919.8)
2222 (1008.8)
350THFSR432Y
400THFSR432Y
300
350
6 x 50
7 x 50
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
L+L3
2
450
500
9 x 50
10 x 50
540
600
2371 (1076.4)
2525 (1146.4)
450THFSR432Y
500THFSR432Y
400 8 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
2
450 9 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
550
600
11 x 50
12 x 50
660
720
2750 (1248.5)
2830 (1284.8)
550THFSR432Y
600THFSR432Y
500 10 x 50 L+L3
3
L+L3 L+L3
3
L+L3 2
550 11 x 50 L+L KK L+L L + KK 3
700 7 x 100 792 3090 (1401.6) 700THFSR431Y 600 12 x 50 L+L3 KK L+L3 L + KK 3 2
800 8 x 100 962 3560 (1614.8) 800THFSR432Y 700 7 x 100 KK KK L + KK 3 L + KK 3
900 9 x 100 1083 3900 (1769.0) 900THFSR432Y 800 8 x 100 L + KK 3 C/F L + KK 3 C/F 2
1000 10 x 100 1203 4240 (1923.2) 1000THFSR432Y 900 9 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
1100 11 x 100 1323 4500 (2041.2) 1100THFSR432Y 1000 10 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F 2
600 Vac 1100 11 x 100 KK + KK 3 C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
100 2 x 50 96 1105 (501.2) 100THFSR631Y 600 V 2
150 3 x 50 144 1242 (564.6) 150THFSR631Y 100 2 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
200 4 x 50 192 1438 (652.9) 200THFSR631Y 150 3 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3 2
250 5 x 50 240 1634 (741.8) 250THFSR631Y 200 4 x 50 L L L+L3 L+L3
300 6 x 50 288 1830 (830.8) 300THFSR632Y 250 5 x 50 L L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 2
350 7 x 50 336 2026 (919.8) 350THFSR632Y
2
300 6 x 50 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3 L+L3
2
550 11 x 50 529 2750 (1248.5) 550THFSR632Y
2
500 10 x 50 L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L 3 L+L 3
600 12 x 50 576 2830 (1284.8) 600THFSR632Y 550 11 x 50 L+L3 KK L+L3 L + KK 3

700
800
7 x 100
8 x 100
672
768
3090 (1401.6)
3560 (1614.8)
700THFSR631Y
800THFSR632Y
600
700
12 x 50
7 x 100
L+L3
KK
KK
KK
L+L3
L + KK 3
L + KK 3
L + KK 3
2
900
1000
9 x 100
10 x 100
864
962
3900 (1769.0)
4240 (1923.2)
900THFSR632Y
1000THFSR632Y
800 8 x 100 L + KK 3 L + KK 3 L + KK 3 L + KK 3 2
900 9 x 100 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3 KK + KK 3
1100 11 x 100 1058 4500 (2041.2) 1100THFSR632Y 1000 10 x 100 KK + KK 3
3
C/F KK + KK 3 C/F 2
1100 11 x 100 KK + KK C/F KK + KK 3 C/F
Notes 2
1 kvar output is voltage and frequency dependent. 60 Hz units are shown. For other voltages
and frequencies, consult Eaton Technical Resource Center (TRC) at 1-800-809-2772, choose
option #4, then option #2.
2
2
2 Enclosure sizing for units with integrated surge protection or bottom entry can vary
3 Dual enclosure design requires customer installation of factory supplied interconnecting
wires.
2
2
2
Dimensions
2
AUTOVAR “L” (Single Door) Enclosure
2 Standard Customer Conduit
Entry in This Area Option “W” NEMA 3R
2 Drip Shield
Power
2 POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
69B1007G01
Conductor
Lugs
Exhaust
2 1
2
BLR-ACX
esc
R
Option “M”
DANGER
Molded-Case Ground
2 Circuit Breaker
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
Lug
BEFORE SERVICING
2 78.00
(1981.2)
2 Copper
Busbar
2
2 A A
2 38.50
(977.9)
Dust/Air Filter Tray 25.00
(635.0)
2 41.30 (1049.0) Legend

1. Controller
2 25.00
(635.0) 16.00
Air Filter
(406.4)
2 Notes:
2 Section A-A
2 AUTOVAR “KK” (Double Door) Enclosure
2 Customer Conduit Entry in This Area Option “W” NEMA 3R Drip Shield
2 POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
69B1007G01
Power
Conductor Exhaust
Lugs
2 1 Power Factor Controller
R
Ground
Lug
BLR-ACX
2 esc
2 Option “M”
Molded-Case 78.00
Circuit Breaker (1981.2)
2 Copper
Busbar
2
2
2 A A
25.00
Dust/Air Filter Tray
2
(635.0)
77.64 (1972.0)
2
80.40 (2042.1) Legend
1. Controller
2
25.00 16.00 Air Filter Air Filter
(635.0) (406.4) Notes:
2
Section A-A
2
2.2
2
AUTOVAR “L + L” (2 Single Door) Enclosures
2
Customer Conduit Entry in This Area
Option “W” NEMA 3R Drip Shield
2
POWER
FACTOR
CORRECTION
69B1007G01
Option “M”
Power
Exhaust
2
Conductor
2
1 Molded-Case Lugs
2 BLR-CX
Circuit Breaker
2
DANGER DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION
Ground
DISCONNECT
BEFORE SERVICING
DISCONNECT
BEFORE SERVICING Lug
78.00
Capacitor
Enclosure
Reactor
Enclosure
(1981.2)
2
Copper
Busbar 2
2
A A B B
2
Dust/Air
Filter Tray 38.50 (977.9) Factory Supplied 12-Inch Conduit and 2
Typ. Power/Control Cables. Interconnect in Field
41.26 (1048.0)
by Customer/Installing Contractor Required
Legend
2
2
1. Controller
25.00 0.438-Inch Dia. Typ. 3. Cleared Fuse Indicating Lights
16.00 Air Filter Air Filter
(635.0)
(406.4) Notes: 2
Section A-A Section B-B

3. 12-Inch Minimum Separation Between Enclosures 2
2
L + KK Enclosure (AUTOVAR Detuned Filter Only)
Customer Conduit Entry in This Area Option “W” NEMA 3R Drip Shield
2
2
Power
2
1 Conductor Exhaust
R
Lugs Ground
2
BLR-ACX
esc
Lug
3
2
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
DANGER
HIGH VOLTAGE
CAUTION
DISCONNECT
BEFORE SERVICING
78.00
2
(1981.2)
Capacitor
Enclosure
Reactor
Enclosure
Copper
Busbar
2
2
A
38.50 (977.9)
A B
77.64 (1972.0)
B 2
2
Dust/Air
Filter Tray Typ.
Factory Supplied 12-Inch Conduit and
Legend
Power/Control Cables. Interconnect in Field
1. Controller
2. On/Off Switch 2
3. Cleared Fuse Indicating Lights
41.26 (1048.1) 80.40 (2042.1)
Notes: 2
1. 6-Inch Minimum Clearance
25.00 16.00
(635.0) (406.4)
Air Filter Air Filter Air Filter Mounting Holes
Each Side
2. 45-Inch Front Clearance or per
2
0.438-Inch Dia. Typ. Local Code
Section A-A Section B-B

3. 12-Inch Minimum Separation
Between Enclosures
2
2

2
2 AUTOVAR “KK + KK” Enclosures
Option “W” NEMA 3R
2 Standard Customer Conduit Entry in This Area
Drip Shield
Exhaust
2 Power
Conductor
2
POWER POWER
FACTOR FACTOR
CORRECTION CORRECTION
69B1007G01 69B1007G01
1 Lugs
R

BLR-ACX
2 esc
2 3 PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C
Ground
Lug
2 78.00
(1981.2)
2
Copper
Busbar
Capacitor Reactor
Enclosure Enclosure
2
2
A A B B
2 77.64 (1972.1)
Dust/Air
Filter Tray
2 Factory Supplied 12-Inch Conduit and
Power/Control Cables. Interconnect in Field
2 80.40 (2042.1)
2 25.00 16.00 Air Filter Air Filter Mounting

Air Filter Air Filter
(635.0)(406.4) Holes
2 0.438-Inch
Dia. Typ.
2 Section A-A Section B-B
Legend Notes:
2 1. Controller
2. On/Off Switch
2
3. Cleared Fuse Indicating Lights 3. 12-Inch Minimum Separation Between Enclosures
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Contents
Transient-Free Power Factor Correction System
Description Page
2
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
V3-T2-63
2
AUTOVAR Filter—LV Automatic Detuned Filter . . . V3-T2-74 2
Correction Units 2
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-82
2
2
2
Transient-Free Static Switching Power Factor Correction Units 2
Product Description Application Description Standards and Certifications 2
Transient-free statically The FTA and FTE units ● Motor starting
switch capacitor units are employ a fast or real-time ● On-site generation support
Enclosure 2
available in two models. response, and include the ● EMC—EN50081-2,
● Spot welding
The FTE model is a real-time
ability to switch larger steps
without creating significant
● Wind turbines
EN50082-2, EN55011,
EN61000-4-2/3/4/5,
2
transient-free system, used ● Other dynamic loads ENV50204, ENV50141
to compensate extremely
line noise. These relatively
maintenance-free units reside ● CE Mark—73/23/EEC am. 2
rapid loads within one Three current transformers
in a smaller footprint and are 93/68, 98/37/EC art. 4(2)
cycle of operation (typically
5–20 msec).
ideal for use in applications
with a 5 ampere secondary
are required to operate this ● Safety—EN61010-1, 2
such as flicker control, large EN60439-1, EN60204
capacitor bank.
The FTA model is a fast motor starting, bus voltage
stabilization, fault ride-
● UL 508 2
transient-free system, used Rating based on Service
CSA
2
●
to compensate any loads through solutions, power Entrance Ampacity. For other
within 3–4 seconds. factor correction and ratios, please consult factory.
many more.
● Startup and 2
Commissioning by
factory trained personnel
is required for proper
2
operation and warranty
of this system 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Product Selection
2
Transient-free reactive power compensation systems
2 The transient-free systems are custom engineered to order.
2 The Eaton transient-free

statically switched capacitor
This level of performance is
needed when high-current
Please call Eaton’s Technical
Resource Center at 1-800-
systems represent the “next loads rapidly switch on and 809-2772, option #4,
2 level” of power system off and require power factor, suboption #2 to discuss your
enhancements by using voltage flicker, sag, or application. See
2 semi-conductor devices to harmonic improvement. TD02607012E for additional
switch capacitors at the same These disturbances can be technical information on
2 potential or zero potential
difference, thereby
found in many industries,
including rockcrushing, arc-
Eaton’s transient-free
reactive power compensation
2 eliminating the possible
problem of transients caused
welding, plastic injection
molding, and crane
systems. Pricing and
availability is available through
by capacitor switching and applications. Eaton’s Technical Resource
2 increasing the speed of Center. Please fill out the
capacitive var compensation. following questionnaire
2 before requesting a
quotation.
2
2 Transient-Free Reactive Power Compensation Systems Questionnaire
Type of industry (Automotive, alternative energy, lumber, etc.)
2 Type of application (Welding, wind turbine, sawmill, etc.)
2 (PF correction, voltage control, reactive power

control, damping of power oscillations, unbalance
Project objectives control, motor starting)
2 Amount of kvar required (if known) kvar (300 to 3000 kvar)
2 Nominal system voltage V
2
Nominal system frequency Hz
Integral main breaker needed (Yes/No)
2 Harmonic tuning order required (if known) (2.67, 3.8, 4.5, or other)
2
Compensation time required (if known) (3–4 seconds or 5–20 milliseconds)
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2.2
Contents
HCU2 Active Harmonic Filters
Description Page
2
UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-51
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54 2
V3-T2-63 2
V3-T2-67
V3-T2-74 2
2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-84 2
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-84
2
2
2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit 2
Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits 2
Eaton’s HCU2 active Typical applications include and Functions
harmonic filters are locations with large amounts ● Fast-acting harmonic ● Easier and less expensive 2
engineered to provide of nonlinear loads including correction installation than passive
dynamic harmonic correction
by actively injecting the
6- and 12-pulse PWM
alternating current (AC)
● NEMA 1, NEMA 2, NEMA filters, as active filter
design reduces the need
2
12, IP31, IP54 enclosures,
variable frequency drives,
required currents into an
electrical distribution system direct current (DC) drives, as
and chassis mount
versions available
for detailed engineering
studies 2
to cancel the entire spectrum well as other switch-mode HMI provides
2
●
power supply equipment.
● 60, 120, 200 and 300 A
of harmonic currents at the units available (ampere comprehensive control
point of connection. This equipment can be found through icon-driven
rating given at 380–480 V)
HMI Home Screen Shot
in water and wastewater
treatment facilities, industrial ● Touchscreen human interface 2
manufacturing and machine interface (HMI) Improvements from HCUE to HCU2
warehousing plants, military ● Communications ● Closed loop control: A 2
bases and commercial connectivity higher degree of harmonic
locations. ● Designed for use in correction is available with 2
Unlike passive filters, Eaton’s environmentally controlled closed loop control than
HCU2 can provide effective conditions open loop control 2
harmonic correction for ● Can be sized to meet ● Reduced kW losses: Lower
varying load conditions and specific levels of harmonic
correction, providing
kW losses result in lower
operating expenses and
2
harmonic spectrums by
providing dynamic correction
up to their rated capacity. The
compliance with IEEE® 519
recommended levels
reduced requirements for
equipment room HVAC 2
HCU2 also has the secondary Engineered to prevent systems. The maximum
2
●
benefit of providing power overloading heat loss for a 300 A, 480 V

factor correction with any ● Scalable design can be unit is 7.1 kW
excess capacity after expanded without ● Reduced footprint: 2
correcting all harmonic impacting performance Wall-mounted 480 V
conditions. ● Broad spectrum of NEMA® 1 units are
available in 60, 120, 200
2
cancellation for robust
protection (2nd to 51st
harmonic) ●
and 300 A ratings
Ease of maintenance and
2
service: A standard USB
● Helps improve power
factor to maximize service port is provided for 2
firmware updates
2
efficiency
● UL/CSA approved
2
2

2
2
HCU2 Harmonic Correction Unit
HCU2 060 D5 N2
2
2 Equipment Type Enclosure Type
HCU2 = Harmonic correction unit Ampere Rating Voltage IP00 = Chassis mount
2 380–480 V only
060 = 60 A
D5 = 380–480 V D7 = 3690 V
D6 = 600 V
N1
N2
=
=
NEMA 1 wall mount
NEMA 2 floor mount
N12 = NEMA 12 floor mount
2
120 = 120 A
200 = 200 A IP31 = IP31 floor mount
300 = 300 A IP54 = IP54 floor mount
2 600 V only
047 = 47 A
2 094 = 94 A
157 = 157 A
235 = 235 A
2 690 V only
040 = 40 A
2 080 = 80 A
133 = 133 A
200 = 200 A
2
2 Technical Data and Specifications
2 Typical Uncorrected 6-Pulse Rectifier (Before) Current + HCU2 Injection Current = Corrected (After) Current
2
2
2
2 + =
2
2
2 Recommended Placement
2
2 Source
2
Typical CT
Placement
2 Transformer
2
2 HCU
Load(s)
2
2
2
2
2.2
Eaton HCU2 Specifications
Specification Description Specification Description
2
Technical Specifications Technical Specifications (Continued)
2
Standard rms output 60 A, 120 A, 200 A, 300 A at 380 Vac to 480 Vac Communications capability Modbus® RTU, Modbus TCP/IP
current ratings 47 A, 94 A, 157 A, 235 A at 600 Vac
40 A, 80 A, 133 A, 200 A at 690 Vac
Discrete input/outputs 4 input and 4 output dry contacts; assignable 2
Noise level (ISO3746) <70 dB at 1 meter from unit surface
2
Nominal frequency 50/60 Hz, ±3 Hz auto sensing
Earthing (grounding) systems EMC filter ground switch for Isolated Terra, high resistance
Number of phases 3-phase
Environmental Condition
Topology
Losses
Digital harmonic FFT Digital reactive power
To 480 Vac <3%; to 690 Vac <5%
Operating temperature 0 °C to 40 °C 2
2
Relative humidity 0–95%, noncondensing
CT VA loading 1.0 VA (5 A CT secondary)
Seismic rating Complies with IBC and ASCE7
Spectrum cancellation 2nd to 51st, discrete; fully selectable per harmonic order
Control basis
(amplitude and on/off)
Closed loop (for new installations)
Operating altitude 1000 m, (derate 1%/100 m above), maximum 4800 m
Automatic rollback of output Occurs whenever heatsink temperature sensor exceeds
2
Open loop compatible for retrofit applications temperature limit
Harmonic attenuation Closed loop: <3% THD(i); max. 20:1 THD(i) reduction with load Ambient temperature Absolute shutdown if air inlet temperature reaches 51 °C 2
harmonic current above 50% of HCU2 rating protection
Open loop: <5% TDD
Requires 3% or higher inductive impedance per nonlinear load
Preset output limits (rms) Programmable set limit due to altitude or ambient 2
temperature—becomes fixed output limit
Harmonic operational
features
% THDi set point
% THDv set point
Reference Standards 2
Design CE EMC Certification IEC/EN 60439-1, EN 61000-6-4 Class A,
Harmonic avoidance Output at specific harmonic order turned off if resonance or lack-of
impedance detected; or manually turned off
EN 61000-6-2
2
Protection (enclosure) IP00, IP20, IP31, IP54, NEMA 1, NEMA 2,
Parallel operation Up to 10 units per set of CT (to 51st order), any size combination
Backward compatibility with Eaton HCUE operated in parallel
Standards compliance/
NEMA 12, UL Type Open (chassis mount)
cULus (UL 508 , CSA 22.2 No. 14)
2
Contact Eaton for applications of more than 10 units
certification CE Certified, ABS, Lloyds, other local standards
Parallel operation options Master/master Master/slave
Multi-master/multi-slave Installation 2
2
Same as Eaton HCUE for retrofits Wall mount Chassis mount (UL Type open) and NEMA 1 configurations
Parallel sequence options Lead/lag with unit rotation: one unit operates to full capacity Free-standing IP31, IP54, NEMA 2 and NEMA 12
before next unit turns on; timed rotation Load share: All operating
units function at the same ouput percentage
Circuit protection NEMA 1 and chassis mount—external means required
Free-standing enclosures—incoming circuit breaker with 2
Parallel HMI control Any unit permits viewing and changing parameter settings of mechanical door interlock
complete system or any other unit in parallel system AIC rating To 415 Vac—200 kA cULus; 125 kA IEC To 480 Vac—200 kA 2
Parallel communications Proprietary COM bus between operating units (input circuit breaker) cULus; 75 kA IEC To 600 Vac—100 kA cULus; 100 kA IEC
Power factor correction Optimized unity PF, leading (capacitive) or lagging (inductive) power
To 690 Vac—No cULus; 100 kA IEC
2
factor (Cos f) to target Cable entry Wall mount and chassis mount—bottom only
Control response time 25 μs
PCBA protection
Free-standing—top and bottom entry through gland plates
Conformal coating on all PCBs Pollution Degree 2
2
Harmonic correction time 2 cycles
Reactive correction time 1/4 cycle Cooling configuration Separate air plenums for heatsink section and PCBA section:
Heatsink (high heat plenum) input from bottom and exhaust
2
Display 144 mm QVGA TFT 64k-color touchscreen
2
out top.
Display parameters Hundreds of parameters are available. Examples include THDi, All components in high heat plenum rated IP54 or better ≥ no
THDv, oscilloscope for viewing many selected parameters, phasor filtering required
diagrams, load power, measured currents for Ih, Is, If, I neg seq, PF
(Cos f), injected currents for Ih, I reactive, I neg seq, etc.
PCBA air supply must be clean and dry (filtering may be required)
No conductive particles permitted 2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
Harmonic Correction Unit Ratings

2 Total Current Integral
Model Voltage (V) Frequency (Hz) Amperes (rms) Watt Losses (kW) HCU2 Enclosure Type Version Disconnect
2 HCU2060D5N1 380–480 50/60 60 1.3 Wall mount NEMA 1 UL/CSA No
2
HCU2120D5N1 380–480 50/60 120 2.8 Wall mount NEMA 1 UL/CSA No
HCU2200D5N1 380–480 50/60 200 5.4 Wall mount NEMA 1 UL/CSA No
2 HCU2300D5N1
HCU2060D5IP00
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
300
60
7.1
1.3
Wall mount NEMA 1
Chassis mount
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
No
No
2 HCU2120D5IP00
HCU2200D5IP00
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
120
200
2.8
5.4
Chassis mount
Chassis mount
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
No
No
2 HCU2300D5IP00
HCU2060D5IP31
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
300
60
7.1
1.3
Chassis mount
Floor mount IP31
UL/CSA
CE
No
Yes
2 HCU2120D5IP31
HCU2200D5IP31
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
120
200
2.8
5.4
Floor mount IP31
Floor mount IP31
CE
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2300D5IP31
HCU2060D5N2
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
300
60
7.1
1.3
Floor mount IP31
Floor mount NEMA 2
CE
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2120D5N2
HCU2200D5N2
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
120
200
2.8
5.4
Floor mount NEMA 2
Floor mount NEMA 2
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2300D5N2
HCU2060D5N12
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
300
60
7.1
1.3
Floor mount NEMA 2
Floor mount NEMA 12
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2120D5N12
HCU2200D5N12
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
120
200
2.8
5.4
Floor mount NEMA 12
Floor mount NEMA 12
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2300D5N12
HCU2060D5IP54
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
300
60
7.1
1.3
Floor mount NEMA 12
Floor mount IP54
UL/CSA
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2120D5IP54
HCU2200D5IP54
380–480
380–480
50/60
50/60
120
200
2.8
5.4
Floor mount IP54
Floor mount IP54
CE
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2300D5IP54
HCU2047D6IP31
380–480
600
50/60
50/60
300
47
7.1
1.8
Floor mount IP54
Floor mount IP31
CE
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2094D6IP31
HCU2157D6IP31
600
600
50/60
50/60
94
157
3.9
7.2
Floor mount IP31
Floor mount IP31
CE
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2235D6IP31
HCU2047D6N2
600
600
50/60
50/60
235
47
9.9
1.8
Floor mount IP31
Floor mount NEMA 2
CE
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2094D6N2
HCU2157D6N2
600
600
50/60
50/60
94
157
3.9
7.2
Floor mount NEMA 2
Floor mount NEMA 2
UL/CSA
UL/CSA
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2235D6N2
HCU2047D6IP54
600
600
50/60
50/60
235
47
9.9
1.8
Floor mount NEMA 2
Floor mount IP54
UL/CSA
CE
Yes
Yes
2 HCU2094D6IP54 600 50/60 94 3.9 Floor mount IP54 CE Yes

HCU2157D6IP54 600 50/60 157 7.2 Floor mount IP54 CE Yes

HCU2047D6N12 600 50/60 47 1.8 Floor mount NEMA 12 UL/CSA Yes
2 HCU2094D6N12 600 50/60 94 3.9 Floor mount NEMA 12 UL/CSA Yes


Motor Control Centers
3.1 MCC Product Offering

Freedom
3
Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3 3
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4 3
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T3-4
V3-T3-4
3
Accessories and Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7 3
3.2 Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant and Freedom FlashGard®
3
Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-8
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-9 3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-10
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-10 3
3.3 Freedom and Freedom FlashGard Check Sheets 3
Check Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
V3-T3-20
3.4 Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC Check Sheets

Check Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-24 3
3
Learn
Online 3
Freedom FlashGard
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—December 2015 www.eaton.com V3-T3-1
3.1 Motor Control Centers
Contents
3 Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant and Freedom FlashGard
Description Page
3 Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4
3 Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4
3 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-4
Accessories and Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Product Overview
3 MCC Operation Customer Manufacturing Seismic Qualification Bid Manager™
Eaton’s motor control center Solution Centers The Freedom and XT MCC One of the most exciting
3 (MCC) product line is One of the most unique families have been qualified new tools developed for
headquartered in Fayetteville, aspects of the Eaton MCC to meet the seismic the MCC product line is
3 NC. At Fayetteville, the most
progressive engineering team
operation is the ability to
provide customized product to
requirements of both the
Uniform Building Code®
the Bid Manager program.
Bid Manager is a PC-based
3 in the industry can custom
design motor control centers
meet delivery requirements
through a Customer
(UBC) and the California
Building Code (CBC) for
pricing program that is
capable of providing complete
for the most demanding Manufacturing Solution equipment operation after bills of material, front views
3 applications. Most MCCs can Center (CMSC). There are seismic activity. This and prices for MCCs. This
be shipped six to eight weeks nine of these facilities located equipment, along with Eaton’s program can configure an
3 after receipt of a released
order.
throughout the U.S. serving low and medium voltage
switchgear assemblies,
MCC to meet a multitude
of specific applications and
key geographic markets.
3 The MCC product line also
Each CMSC has the ability to
provide standard NEMA® 1B
medium voltage starter
assemblies and low voltage
provide accurate bills of
material and front view
offers a FAST motor control switchboards, which meet drawings in a matter of
3 center (MCC) quick shipment
wired product in as little as
one to three days. Please seismic requirements, moments. The program
program. The program provide the user with a operates on a user-friendly,
contact the facility in your
3 includes integration of a
number of commonly used
area to discuss customer complete seismic qualified Windows®-based format that
opportunities and MCC assemblies package offers the most extensive
3 components and assemblies
in MCC applications as well
support for your specific that meet CBC and IBC
requirements. Please contact
product selection found in
the industry. A complete
marketplace.
as configuration options for
3 each. The FAST program also
Customer Manufacturing
your Eaton sales engineer for
more details.
line of adjustable frequency
drives and reduced voltage
includes expedited delivery of solid-state control, along
3 customer approval drawings
when predefined pilot/control
Solution Centers
Location Telephone
with insulated case breakers,
high ampacity molded case
3 device configurations for unit
assemblies are selected.
Atlanta 678-309-4270 breakers and automatic
Chicago 630-260-6304
transfer switches are featured
MCCs meeting the FAST
3 criteria are shipped within Denver 303-366-9949
in the program. Control and
distribution product can be
4 weeks after receipt of a
3 packaged in a multitude of
Hartford 860-683-4221
released order. variations. Please contact
Houston 713-939-9696
your Eaton sales engineer
3 Los Angeles 562-944-6413
for more details.
Portland 503-582-2700
3
3
3
V3-T3-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—December 2015 www.eaton.com
3.1
Aftermarket Products
Series 2100/ Freedom
3
XT Freedom IT. Advantage 5 Star Unitrol F10 Unitrol Type W 9800 Unitrol 11-300
3
3
3
Motor Control Center Production Years
2012–Present 1995–present 2002–2011 1992–2010 1987–1995/ 1988–1994 1972–1989 1965–1975 1956–1974 1935–1965 3
1975–1987
3
Background Aftermarket Service Product Availability
Replacement units for They are located in:
3
Over 50 years ago, Cutler- Eaton’s MCCs are
Hammer® and Westinghouse®
low voltage motor control
manufactured with high
quality structural parts
the 5-Star, Series 2100,
Advantage, 11-300, 9800, Customer Manufacturing
3
centers were introduced, designed to provide many Type W, F-10, F2100,
enabling the group mounting years of service. Freedom FlashGard,
Solution Centers
Location Telephone
3
of low voltage (600 V class) Freedom, Freedom arc-
electrical controls. This Eaton is dedicated to
providing replacement units
resistant IT., IT. FlashGard, Atlanta 678-309-4270 3
allowed for supervision XT and XT FlashGard motor Chicago 630-260-6304
and safe operation of motor
starter units, feeder tap
or add-on units to handle
additional loads for motor
control center lines may be
obtained from the Fayetteville Denver 303-366-9949 3
control centers manufactured manufacturing plant or any
3
units and auxiliary equipment Hartford 860-683-4221
in a flexible structure since 1935 for both the of the regionally located Houston 713-939-9696
arrangement at a Westinghouse and Cutler- Customer Manufacturing and
centralized location. Hammer product lines. Solution Centers (CMSCs).
Los Angeles 562-944-6413
3
Portland 503-582-2700
The following descriptions
The foundation for today’s
MCCs is a modular plug-in and needed order entry
Competitive MCC units
can be obtained from the 3
combination motor controller information will be useful in Fayetteville manufacturing
assembly with components identifying and processing a plant or CMSCs. 3
of proven electrical and vintage MCC aftermarket
mechanical integrity. These unit.
3
assemblies are enclosed 1. Motor control center \MCC Renewal Parts
in metal structures that
prevent accidental contact
type: (11-300, Type W, MCC Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer 3
5-Star, Advantage, 9800, Type Dates Renewal Parts Publication
with live electrical parts. F-10, Freedom FlashGard,
Freedom, Freedom arc-
XT 2012–present — 3
The MCC structure consists
resistant IT., XT and
3
XT FlashGard 2012–present —
of structural steel, horizontal
and vertical wireways for XT FlashGard) IT. 2002–2011 —
conduit and load cable entry
and exit, and vertical and
2. Class of unit
(Non-reversing,
IT. FlashGard 2007–2011 —
3
Freedom 1995–present RP04304001E
horizontal bus systems for
distributing power throughout
Reversing, Two Speed)
Freedom FlashGard 2008–present — 3
the MCC. The starter unit 3. Service voltage Advantage 1992–2011 RP04304002E
consists of a rugged steel
4. Control voltage Series 2100 1987–1995 RP04304003E 3
shell (wrapper) for mounting
the unit components, a
combination motor starter
5. Starter size or
5 Star
Freedom Unitrol
1975–1987
1988–1994
RP04304003E
RP04304004E
3
horsepower rating
with factory wired control, a
handle mechanism for ON/ 6. Disconnect type
F10 Unitrol 1972–1989 RP04304005E 3
OFF operation, and a rigid (HMCP, Fusible) Type W 1965–1975 RP04304006E
unit door. 7. Clip size and type
9800 Unitrol 1956–1974 RP04304007E 3
(if Fusible) 11-300 1935–1965 RP04304008E
3
8. Unit modifications
(Lights, Pushbuttons,
etc.)
3
9. Catalog Number 3
(if available)
3
3
Product Description Features, Benefits and

3 Eaton’s offering of motor Functions
3 control centers (MCCs)
features the Freedom,
Structure Design Flexibility Industrial Communications
Freedom arc-resistant, Eaton’s MCCs are Modular, framed design Eaton MCCs come with the
3 Freedom FlashGard, XT and 20.00 inches (508.0 mm) permits structure arrangement most advanced and flexible
XT FlashGard. These MCCs wide and 90.00 inches to be tailored to exactly meet industrial factory installed and
3 incorporate the newest (2286.0 mm) high with
vertical compartments having
any control requirements
with a minimum of unusable
tested communication
connectivity in the
NEMA electromechanical
3 starters in the industry along
with the most complete,
72.00 inches (1828.8 mm)
of unit mounting space in
space. Vertical compartments
are incremented for
marketplace with protocols
that include DeviceNet,
6.00-inch (152.4 mm) maximum space utilization Modbus and Modbus TCP,
3 NEMA rated package of
distribution and control increments. and unit interchangeability. EtherNet/IP and PROFIBUS.
equipment. The FlashGard Compact starter and feeder Eaton smart MCCs facilitate
3 MCCs are the industry’s first
Structure depth is
16.00 inches (406.4 mm)
units provide users with the faster startup, safer working
MCCs designed for ability to solve demanding conditions and enhanced
or 21.00 inches (533.4 mm)
3 comprehensive arc flash
prevention.
deep front-mounted only
space requirements and still
meet all NEMA and UL®
diagnostics and monitoring.
and 21.00 inches (533.4 mm) standards. Intelligent Products
3 deep for back-to-back Eaton MCCs include
Application Description mounted units. Safety intelligent starters, soft
3 Eaton’s MCCs are custom- The unique framed design Design tested at Eaton’s starters, VFDs, meters and
made assemblies of permits the highest flexibility power laboratory to ensure feeder breakers that can
3 conveniently grouped control
equipment primarily used for
in component and structure maximum protection for
control equipment. The
all be connected to an
embedded PLC and
configuration.
3 control of motors and for
distribution of power. MCCs Accessibility
FlashGard option ensures
maximum safety for
operator interface.
are designed for three-phase, personnel working on or

3 230 V applications up to
All parts and wiring are front
accessible. Terminal blocks around the equipment.
Standards and
300 hp, or three-phase, are side mounted in each
Certifications
3 480 V applications up to 600 hp. unit. 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) or
Hardwired Control
UL Listing
The Freedom FlashGard and 8.00-inch (203.2 mm) vertical With choices for 1A to 2C
Standard structures and units
3 XT FlashGard MCCs are
equipped with a state-of-
wireways separate from wiring schemes, the Eaton
MCC offers many options for are provided with UL label.
control units provide safe and
traditional or supervisory
3 the-art stab racking
mechanism (RotoTract™) that
convenient access to wiring
and conduits without de- control schemes.
Contact Eaton for details
and part numbers for CSA
provides bus isolation, stab
3
energizing any equipment. approved units.
indication and lockout
features that proactively
3 prevent the initiation of
arc flash.
3
3
3
3
Comparison of Key MCC Features and Attributes by MCC Type/Family
3 Tested and
Compact Compact Certified FlashGard
3 MCC Type/
Serves
Applications
Serves
600 V
Unit
Offering
Unit
Offering
120 Vac
Control
24 Vdc
Control
Per Arc-
Resistant FlashGard
Technology
with Test
Optional
Communications
Family 480 V and Below Applications Standard 1 Optional 1 Power Power Guidelines Technology 2 Position 23 Capability
3 Freedom ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant ■
Freedom FlashGard ■
■
■
■ ■
■
■
■
■
■
3 Notes
1 Compact offering has size 1 and 2 FVNR starter units in 1X and size 3 and 4 in 2X. Add 1X to each for FVR versions.
3 2 FlashGard technology enables stabs to be retracted from and engaged onto the vertical bus while the unit's door is closed.
3 FlashGard test position enables control power to be delivered to the unit while its stabs are removed from the vertical bus
3
(no line power present within unit).
3
3.1
3
Aftermarket MCC Starter Buckets 3
FZ 206E E A S C12 P57 3
MCC Type Modification Codes 3
Catalog Codes Starter Type Service CPT See tables on Page V3-T3-6
F = Free-standing NEMA 1
FZ = Freedom
See tables on Page V3-T3-6 Voltage Space
Option Code
C10 = Separate source
control fuse
3
A = 120 V Control
3
FK = Advantage B = 208 V Voltage S = Standard C12 = 100 VA for sz. 1–2
FS = Series 2100/5 Star C = 240 V A = 120 V height C13 = 150 VA for sz. 3–4
FD = Freedom Unitrol D = 380 V B = 208 V C = Compact
FR = F10 Unitrol
FT = Type W
E = 480 V
F = 575 V
C = 240 V
D = 380 V
X = Oversized 3
FN = 9800 Unitrol
3
E = 480 V
FJ = 11-300 F = 575 V
FM = IT.
3
SZ = FlashGard
GD = ITE 5600
GE = GE 7700/8000
AB = Allen-Bradley Centerline
SQ = Square D Model 6 3
SS = Furnas 89
3
Aftermarket MCC Feeder Buckets/Units 3
FZ F 1 D S 12 3
MCC Type Unit Size 3
Catalog Codes Device Type Trip or Clip 12 = 12”
FZ = Freedom
FK = Advantage
F = HFD Unit Type Trip or Clip
Rating (Left
Rating (Right
Feeder) Dual
14
18
= 14”
= 18” or 18-2/3”
3
J = HJD 1 = Single
3
FS = Series 2100/5 Star K = HKD Disconnect Feeder) Unit Only 24 = 24”
FD = Freedom Unitrol L = HLD 2 = Dual Disconnect A = 15 M= 125 28 = 28”
FR = F10 Unitrol Z = Fusible B = 20 N = 150 30 = 30”
FT = Type W
FN = 9800 Unitrol
Switch C = 25
D = 30 1
P = 175
Q = 200 1
36
48
= 36”
= 48” 3
FJ = 11-300 R = 225
3
E = 40
FM = IT. F = 50 S = 250
SZ = FlashGard G = 60 1 T = 300 1
3
GD = ITE 5600 H = 70 W= 350
GE = GE 7700/8000 J = 80 X = 400
AB = Allen-Bradley Centerline K = 90 Y = 500
SQ = Square D Model 6
SS = Furnas 89
L = 100 1 Z = 600 1 3
3
Aftermarket Service
Eaton’s MCCs are The following descriptions 3. Service voltage Note 3
manufactured with high and needed order entry 1 Fusible disconnect sizes.
quality structural parts information will be useful in 4. Control voltage

3
designed to provide many identifying and processing a 5. Starter size or
years of service. vintage MCC aftermarket
unit.
horsepower rating 3
Eaton is dedicated to 6. Disconnect type
providing replacement units 1. Motor control center (HMCP, Fusible) 3
or add-on units to handle type (refer to MCC types
additional loads for motor
control centers manufactured
listed above for both
starter and feeder units)
7. Clip size and type
(if fusible)
3
since1935 for both the
Westinghouse and Cutler- 2. Class of unit (non- 8. Unit modifications (lights, 3
reversing, reversing, pushbuttons, etc.)
Hammer product lines.
two speed)
9. Catalog number 3
(if available)
3
3
Aftermarket MCC Starter types Common Modifications

3 Abbreviated list of common modification codes
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Combination Starter—
3 HMCP Disconnect Note: Please contact your local Service Center for all available
modifications and to learn which modifications will work for your
Maximum Horsepower HMCP Starter aftermarket needs.
3 NEMA
Size 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
Ampere
Size
Class
Code
Modification Option
3 1 0.50 0.33 1 1 1.50 3 206A Codes Description
1 1 1 2 3 3 7 206B B10 Breaker shunt trip—120 V
3 1 3 3 5 7.50 7.50 15 206C B11 Breaker auxiliary switch—1NO/1NC
3
1 7.50 7.50 10 10 15 30 206D B19 Breaker auxiliary switch—2NO/2NC
2 10 15 25 25 30 50 206E C10 Control fuse wired for separate source in lieu of CPT
3 3 25 30 50 50 50 100 206H C11 Control fuse/disconnect for separate source in lieu of CPT
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 206L C12 CPT 100 VA for size 1 and 2 starters, fused
3 C13 CPT 150 VA for size 3 and 4 starters, fused
Full-Voltage Reversing Combination Starter— C18 Full capacity CPT for size 5 starters, fused
3 HMCP Disconnect
M12 Mini elapsed time meter
Maximum Horsepower HMCP Starter
3 NEMA
Size 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
Ampere
Size
Class
Code
M16 IQ 200 Meter with three CTs
O19 Overload relay heater/heater pack
3 1 0.50 0.33 1 1 1.50 3 216A O20 Standard solid-state overload relay

1 1 1 2 3 3 7 216B P10 Red ‘RUN’ light
3 1 3 3 5 7.50 7.50 15 216C P11 Green ‘STOPPED’ light
1 7.50 7.50 10 10 15 30 216D
3
P15 Red ‘RUN’ Push-to-Test light
2 10 15 25 25 30 50 216E P16 Green ‘STOPPED’ Push-to-Test light
3 3
4
25
40
30
50
50
75
50
100
50
100
100
150
216H
216L
P20 Special function light
P32 ‘START/STOP’ pushbutton
3 P35 ‘ON/OFF’ pushbutton
Full-Voltage Non-Reversing Combination Starter—
P36 ‘FORWARD/REVERSE/STOP’ pushbutton
3 Fusible Disconnect
Maximum Horsepower Fuse Starter
P38 ‘FAST/OFF/SLOW’ pushbutton
3 NEMA
Size 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
Ampere
Size
Class
Code
P41
P50
Special function pushbutton
‘ON-OFF’ selector switch
3 1
2
7.50
10
7.50
15
10
25
10
25
15
30
30
50
204D
204E
P53 ‘START-STOP’ selector switch
P55 ‘FORWARD-REVERSE’ selector switch
3 3 25 30 50 50 50 100 204H P56 Special function 2-position selector switch
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 204L
P57 ‘HAND-OFF-AUTO’ selector switch
3 P58 ‘LOCAL-OFF-REMOTE’ selector switch
Full-Voltage Reversing Combination Starter—
3 Fusible Disconnect P59 ‘FAST-OFF-SLOW’ selector switch
Maximum Horsepower Fuse Starter P60 ‘HIGH-OFF-LOW’ selector switch
3 NEMA
Size 208 V 240 V 380 V 480 V 600 V
Ampere
Size
Class
Code
P61 Special function 3-position selector switch
R24 D15 four-pole control relay
3 1 7.50 7.50 10 10 15 30 214D
S11 1NO-1NC starter auxiliary contacts
2 10 15 25 25 30 50 214E
3
S22 2NO-2NC starter auxiliary contacts
3 25 30 50 50 50 100 214H
T10 Pull-apart type terminal blocks (standard on all vintages except Type W
4 40 50 75 100 100 150 214L and 11-300)
3 U10 Surge suppressor on coil
3 U11 Type SIS control wire

U14 Wiremarkers—sleeve type on all control wire
3 U17 Wiring diagram inside starter unit door
3
3
3
3.1
Accessories and Options
3
Control and Distribution FlashGard Remote FlashGard Locking
Equipment Packaging Racking Accessory Accessory 3
Eaton’s MCCs provide the
best packaged solutions for 3
the control needs of today’s
users. Structural characteristics
allow the user to select a
3
complete package of control
and distribution equipment in 3
a minimum amount of space.
The ability to package a wide 3
range of solid-state products,
including SVX9000 drives,
S811+ soft starters and PLCs
3
Remote Racking Accessory FlashGard Locking Accessory
meet the most demanding
user process needs. The
● Performs RotoTract racking ● Locks out RotoTract 3
option to provide high safely behind NFPA arc operation during
ampacity molded case flash boundaries maintenance 3
breakers gives the user ● 120 Vac motor driven ● Allows operation of
the flexibility to minimize ● Mounts to RotoTract FlashGard units by
authorized personnel only
3
switchboard or switchgear mechanism
structures and thereby saves
valuable space and reduces
● Wired pendant station ● Heavy-gauge steel
construction
3
for “rack-in”/”rack-out”
design costs. Additional
safety accessories are
operation
3
● Momentary jog Automatic Insulation
available such as Motorguard
(automatic insulation tester),
● Mounting offset bracket
to clear device panel
Tester (Motorguard) 3
Voltage Vision (voltage
presence indicator),
Voltage Presence Indicator 3
FlashGard remote racking
(VoltageVision™)
accessory and FlashGard
locking accessory. Other
3
packaged products, including
automatic transfer switches 3
and panelboards, again
reduce space requirements 3
and save time and money on
equipment and installation
costs. A motor load terminal
3
block that enables quick
connect/disconnect of 480 V Automatic Insulation Tester 3
(Motorguard)
power is available as standard
on the Freedom FlashGard as
Voltage Presence Indicator
(VoltageVision) ● “Meggers” equipment 3
well as the XT and XT ● Hardwired voltage detector motor insulation to
FlashGard MCCs. This connected to load side continuously monitor
integrity of insulation for
3
feature is optional on the of disconnect
Freedom and Freedom arc-
resistant MCCs.
● Enables operator to
the period that the
equipment is de-energized
3
“pre-verify” voltage
Applies 500 Vdc potential
3
●
presence with unit
door closed at current-limited, operator-
safe maximum amperage
● Installable in a 30 mm
pilot device knockout
of 200 microamperes 3
● Alarms upon detection
● Dual redundant circuitry
for reliability
of a threshold leakage 3
to ground current
● Phase insensitive ● Visual alarm indication and 3
lockout; Form C contact
available for remote
alarm status
3
3
3
3
Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant and Freedom FlashGard Technical Data and Specifications
Contents
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant Motor Control Center
Description Page
3 Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-9
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-10
3 Application Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-18
Product Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-19
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant Motor Control Center
An arc flash is a dangerous Temperatures can reach In continuation with the
3 condition associated with the 35,000 °F, which is three legacy of Eaton’s leadership
explosive release of energy times hotter than the in arc flash safety products,
3 caused by an electrical arc
due to either a phase-to-
temperature of the sun.
These excessive
the Freedom arc-resistant
motor control center (MCC)
3 ground or a phase-to-phase
fault. This fault can result
temperatures cause the air
and metal in the path of the
is designed to provide
personnel with increased
from many factors, including arc to expand and explode, protection from the dangers
3 dropped tools, accidental creating an arc blast. of arc flash hazards. This
contact with electrical Throughout the world, arc enhanced version of Eaton’s
3 systems, buildup of
conductive dust, corrosion
flash threatens personnel flagship Freedom MCC
safety, and companies face includes additional features
3 and improper work
procedure. An arc-flash event
lost man-hours, lawsuits,
fines, equipment damage,
specifically designed to
contain the arc blast energy
releases a tremendous facility downtime and lost should an arc flash event
3 amount of energy in the form production. be triggered within the
of thermal heat, toxic fumes, assembly. The Freedom arc-
3 pressure waves, blinding resistant MCC has a Type 2
light, sound waves and accessibility rating, meaning
3 explosions that can result in
serious injury, including
that arc-resistant designs or
features are present on the
3 critical burns, collapsed lungs,
loss of vision, ruptured
front, back and sides of the
assembly. This Type 2 rating
eardrums, puncture wounds translates to enhanced safety
3 and even death. around the entire perimeter
of the MCC should an arc
3 flash event occur.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Features and Benefits
3
No Exhaust Plenums or Roof Flaps Required
Eaton’s arc-resistant Freedom MCC requires no exhaust 3
plenums or roof flaps. This aids in the ease of installation, as
additional clearance or venting ductwork is not required above 3
the assembly.
12 Gauge Steel Doors, Side Sheets and Back Sheets

3
Usage of 12 gauge steel on all MCC doors, side sheets and back
sheets serve to increase the structural integrity of the MCC and
3
aid in the containment of arc blast energy, further enhancing
personnel safety should an arc flash event occur. 3
3
4 Inch Sections
A four-inch section is added to the first and last structures of the 3
MCC lineup, regardless of the number of structures. These
sections increase the structural integrity of the MCC lineup, 3
further ensuring it can withstand the arc blast energy.
Front View of Structure 3
3
Enhanced Door Hinges and Latches
3
Hinges and door latches play a vital role in the containment of
arc blast energy during an arc flash event. The design and
implementation of enhanced door hinges and latches on the
3
Freedom arc-resistant MCC serves to keep doors closed and
latched securely during an arc flash event, further preventing the 3
propagation of arc blast energy toward personnel. As an
additional measure, the quantity of door hinges and latches 3
applied to the MCC unit doors has also been increased.
3
3
Insulated Horizontal and Vertical Buses
Insulation of the horizontal and vertical buses aids in the
3
prevention of arc flash incidents. When an arc flash incident
does occur, the insulation serves to prevent further propagation 3
of the arc fault throughout the entire MCC. Automatic vertical
bus shutters are included. 3
3
3
Isolation Barriers Between Adjacent Structures
Isolation barriers placed between adjacent structures serve to 3
isolate the arc blast energy to a single area within the MCC.
3
3
3
3
Rear View of Structure with
Back and Side Sheets Removed 3
3
3
Standards and Certifications Technical Data and Specifications

3 Eaton’s Freedom arc-
resistant MCC has been
3 tested and verified per the Specifications
criteria found in the Institute
3 of Electrical and Electronics
Item Description
Engineers (IEEE) guideline Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC

3 C37.20.7 titled “IEEE Guide
for Testing Metal-Enclosed
Applicable guidelines and standards Tested and verified per IEEE guideline C37.20.7 and CSA standard 22.2 No. 0.22-11
Agency approvals UL and cUL per UL 845
3 Switchgear Rated Up to 38 kV
for Internal Arcing Faults.” Voltage rating 600 V maximum
3
Interrupting rating Maximum 65 kA at 480 V and 600 V
The MCC also meets the
criteria found in Canadian Arc duration rating 100 mS at 480 V, 50 ms at 600 V
3 Standards Association (CSA)

standard C22.2 No. 0.22-11,
Accessibility type 1 Type 2 (contains arc-resistant protection designs or features on the front, sides, and rear of the equipment)
Main incoming breaker (required) 2500 A frame
titled “Evaluation Methods
3 for Arc Resistance Ratings of
1200 A–2500 A trip range), 80% rated
1200 A frame
Enclosed Electrical (400 A–1200 A trip range), 80% rated
3 Equipment.” This standard Structure environmental ratings NEMA 1, 2
was originally published in
3 2012 and is currently the only
official North American
Structure depth
Horizontal bus
21 inches
Minimum 800 A, maximum 2500 A 2
3 standard or guideline that

contains low voltage MCCs
Vertical bus Maximum 1200 A
Bus insulation Horizontal and vertical buses both insulated
within the scope of coverage.
3 CSA C22.2 No. 0.22-11 was Available Units, Assemblies and Options
based in large part on the Interrupting devices 3 Thermal-magnetic circuit breakers and motor circuit protectors
3 guidelines and testing criteria
Main breakers 4 2500 A frame (800 A–2500 A range)
found in IEEE C37.20.7. 1200 A frame (320 A–1200 A range)
3 Starters NEMA size 1–5 full voltage non-reversing (FVNR), full voltage reversing (FVR) and multi-speed
All overload options available, including bimetallic and solid-state
3 Feeders Maximum 600 A, 80% rated
Maximum 150 hp 5
3
Variable frequency drives (VFDs)
Soft starters Maximum 200 hp
3 Other units and

assemblies available
Relay panels
Relay structures
Meters
3 Transformers
Panelboards
3
Surge protective devices
Power factor correction capacitors
Active harmonic correction units
3 Communications Communications on all major fieldbus protocols, including Modbus, Modbus TCP, EtherNet/IP, DeviceNet,
and PROFIBUS
3 Notes
1 Freedom arc-resistant MCCs containing clean power drives carry a Type 1 accessibility type (contains arc-resistant protection designs
3 on the front).
2 2500 A maximum with 65 °C temperature rise bus, 2000 A maximum with 50 °C temperature rise bus.
3
3 Fused switches and air circuit breakers not available.
4 An incoming main breaker is required to be configured in the lineup. Incoming main lugs, fused switches and air circuit breakers not available
as main devices.
3 5 FR8 min size enclosure only up to 150 hp.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Incoming Line
3
Incoming Line—
Main Lugs Only 12 Incoming Line—Main Circuit Breaker 14 3
Dimensions in Inches (mm)
3
Bus
Rating X-Space Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant
Frame Size Circuit and Freedom FlashGard Enclosure
3
600 2 (Amperes) Breaker Type Unit Size Width
3
150 HFD 2 18.00 (457.2) 20.00 (508.0)
4
FDC 2 18.00 (457.2) 20.00 (508.0) 3
800 3 225 HFD 2 18.00 (457.2) 20.00 (508.0)
4 FDC 2 18.00 (457.2) 20.00 (508.0) 3
6 2
3
250 HJD 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0)
1000 4 JDC 2 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0)
6
8
400 HKD 2
KDC 2
30.00 (762.0)
30.00 (762.0)
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
3
1200 5 CHKD 25 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0)
3
6 CKDC 25 30.00 (762.0) 20.00 (508.0)
1600 12 600 HLD 2 24.00 (609.6) 9jk 20.00 (508.0) 3
2000 12 LDC 2 24.00 (609.6) 9jk 20.00 (508.0)
2500 12 CHLD 235 24.00 (609.6) 9jk 20.00 (508.0) 3

CLDC 235 24.00 (609.6) 9jk 20.00 (508.0)
3200 3 12
800 HMDL 2 30.00 (762.0) 9k 20.00 (508.0) 3
CHMDL 235
NGH 467
48.00 (1219.2) 9k
42.00 (1066.8) 9k
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
3
NGC 267 42.00 (1066.8) 9k 20.00 (508.0)
3
NGH-C 3678 72.00 (1828.8) 9 20.00 (508.0)
NGC-C 267 72.00 (1828.8) 9 20.00 (508.0) 3
1200 NGH 467 42.00 (1066.8) 9k 20.00 (508.0)
NGC 267 42.00 (1066.8) 9k 20.00 (508.0) 3
NGH-C 234678 72.00 (1828.8) 9 20.00 (508.0)
NGC-C 2367 72.00 (1828.8) 9 20.00 (508.0) 3
3
1600 RGH 467 72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0)
RGC 267 72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0)
RGH-C 24678
RGC-C 2678
72.00 (1828.8) 9l
72.00 (1828.8) 9l
20.00 (508.0)
20.00 (508.0)
3
2000 RGH 467
267
72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0) 3
RGC 72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0)
RGH-C 24678 72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0) 3
RGC-C 2678 72.00 (1828.8) 9l 20.00 (508.0)
2500 RGH 467 72.00 (1828.8) 9kl 24.00 (609.6) 3
RGC 267 72.00 (1828.8) 9kl 24.00 (609.6)
Notes
3
1 Table common to Freedom, Freedom arc-resistant and Freedom FlashGard.
2 Not available in Freedom arc-resistant MCC. 3
3 NEMA 1 gasketed only.
4 An NGH or RGH main breaker is required in the Freedom arc-resistant MCC. The NGH requires a complete vertical section (72 inches) in the 3
Freedom arc-resistant MCC only.
5 100% rated when 90° cable applied at 75° ampacity for 100% rating. Digitrip™ 310 LS is required and included in the price.
6 Digitrip 310+ LSI is standard and included in the pricing.
3
3
7 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System (ARMS) available. Requires Digitrip 310+ ALSI or ALSIG.
8 100% rated when 90° cable applied at 75° ampacity for 100% rating.
9 Fixed assembly. Not available with FlashGard RotoTract assembly.
j Add 6.00 inches (152.4 mm) for top entry of incoming cables.
k Install at top for cable top entry or at bottom for bottom cable entry.
3
3
l The main breaker requires the complete vertical section. The rear is unusable.
3
Structure Modifications
3
3
Structure Modifications Neutral Bus (Bottom) Incoming Line Metering Surge Protective Device—
Description Ampere Rating X-Space
Units with Circuit Breaker
Disconnect
3 Enclosure 300 Freedom,
Freedom Three feature packages are
NEMA 1 gasketed 600 or 800 Arc-Resistant available to choose from.
3 NEMA 12—dust-tight 1 1000
Meter
and Freedom
FlashGard
Individual features vary by
package.
NEMA 3R front-mounted only 1 1200
3 NEMA 3R front and rear 1 1600
IQ 130/140/150 2 X-Space
IQ 250/260 2 Freedom,
3 NEMA 3R walk-in 1 2000
IQ DP-4130 2
Freedom
Arc-Resistant
NEMA 3R tunnel 1 2500
IQ Analyzer 2 Surge Current and Freedom
3 Space heater 3200 13
Power Xpert 2
Per Phase FlashGard
Thermostat 2250/2260/2270 100 kA 3
3 Bottom plate Power Xpert 3
Model SPD 4
4000/6000/8000 120 kA 3
3
Channel sills
Model SPD 45
12.00-inch (304.8 mm) pull box
160 kA 3
3 100 kA bus bracing 1 Model SPD 4
Vertical Bus 200 kA 3
3 600 A
Model SPD 4
250 kA 3
800 A
3 1200 A
Model SPD 6
300 kA 3
3 Horizontal Ground Bus

300 A copper
Model SPD
400 kA 3
3
Model SPD
600 A copper
800 A copper Notes
3 Standard Structures
1 Not available in Freedom arc-resistant
MCC.
16.00-inch (406.4 mm) front-mounted only 1 2 Labyrinth barrier with automatic shutter
3 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) front-mounted only

is standard on the Freedom arc-resistant
MCC.
3 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) front and rear 1 3 Available NEMA 1 gasketed
enclosures only.
Main Horizontal Bus—65°C Rise 1 4 Optional integral IQ 200 Meter in 3X unit
3 600 A copper 1 for 100 kA–200 kA.

5 Recommended for branch entrance.
800 A copper
3 1200 A copper
6 Recommended for service entrance.
3
1600 A copper
2000 A copper
3 2500 A copper
3200 A copper 1
3 Vertical Bus Barrier
Labyrinth barrier with shutters 2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Combination Starters
3
Circuit Breaker Starters 1 Fusible Disconnect Starters 1 Contactor Only Units
Circuit Breaker Starters
(HMCP) Non-Reversing X-Space X-Space X-Space 3
(F206) 1 Freedom and Freedom and Freedom and
X-Space
Size
Freedom Arc- Freedom
Resistant FlashGard Size
Resistant FlashGard Size
Resistant FlashGard
3
Freedom and
Size
Resistant FlashGard
Full Voltage Reversing (F216) Full Voltage
Non-Reversing (F204)
Circuit Breaker (F208) 3
1 3 3 1 2 2
1 2 2 2 3 3
1 2 3
2 2 2 3
2 2 2 2 2 3
3 4 4 3 3 3
3 3 3 4 5 5
3 4 4
4 3 4
3
4 6 6
3
4 3 4 2S1W (F946) 5 6 7
5 6 7 5 10 11
1 4 4 6 9 9
3
6 9 9 Full Voltage Reversing (F214)
2 4 5 Fusible (F209) 5
1 4 4
3 6 7 1 2 3
Compact Circuit Breaker
Starters (HMCP) 4 6 8
2 4 4
2 2 3 3
3 5 5
Non-Reversing (F206)
3
2S2W (F956) 3 4 4
4 8 10
X-Space 1 4 4 4 6 6
Fusible Non-Reversing
Size
Freedom and
Freedom Arc-Resistant
2 4 4 2S 1W (F944) 5 10 11
3
3 5 5 1 4 4 Notes
1 1
4 5 7 2 4 5 1 All starter configurations use the 3
2 1 Freedom contactor as standard.
Reduce Voltage Auto
3
3 6 6 It is possible to order the starter
3 2 Transformer (F606) 2
4 10 10 configuration with the A200 contactor,
4 2 3 8 9 which may affect X space.
4 8 9
Fusible Non-Reversing
2S 2W (F954)
2 Must be located at bottom.
3 24.00 inches (609.6 mm) wide.
3
Compact Circuit Breaker 3
3
5 12 12 1 4 4 4 28.00 inches (711.2 mm) wide.
Starters (HMCP) Reversing 5 Not available in Freedom arc-
64 12 12 2 4 5
(F216) resistant MCC.
X-Space
Vacuum Starters (V206)
Non-Reversing
3 5 6 3
Freedom and 4 8 10
Size Freedom Arc-Resistant 4
5
3
6
4
7
3
1 2
2 2
6 8 9
3
3 3
4 3 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Starter Modifications
3
3
Control Options Industrial Communications 3
Description Networked-enabled The industrial network is
components in MCCs prewired throughout the
3 Selector switch 2/3—Pos.
eliminate up to 90% of the MCC and factory tested for
Push-to-test light 6 V transformer control wiring versus conformance.
3 Tx indicating light—standard traditional hardwired designs.
Auxiliary switch—in breaker
3 Mini meters
Motor Control Communication Options
AMM Device DeviceNet Modbus PROFIBUS EtherNet/IP Modbus TCP
3 VMM
ETM
C306 Over Load C441KS C441N C441SS C441R C441R
3 Relay surge suppressor

C440 Over Load
C441 Over Load
C441K
C441K
C441NS
C441N
C441SS
C441S
C441R
C441R
C441R
C441R
Timer—pneumatic
3 Timer—solid-state
SVX Drives OPTC7 OPTC2 OPTC3 OPTCIQ OPTCI
Feeders C441KS C441N C441SS C441R C441R
Relay—AR—600 V two-pole
3 Relay—general purpose 300 V
S811+ Soft Starter C441KS Resident in S811+ Via gateway C441V C441V
3 Standard solid-state overload relay 12

NEMA size 1–3
S811+ Soft Starters with Integral Bypass
3 NEMA size 4–6
X-Space X-Space
Freedom Freedom Freedom
3 Maximum hp and Freedom Arc-Resistant FlashGard Maximum hp Freedom FlashGard
1.15 Service Factor—Standard Duty 1.15 Service Factor—Severe Duty
3 20 2 3 10 2 3
3 40
60
2
3
3
4
25
40
2
3
3
4
3 75 3 4 50 3 4
125 6 7 75 6 7
3 150 6 7 100 6 7
3
200 6 7 125 6 9
300 4 9 9 150 9 10
3 350 4 9 9 200 9 10
450 4 12 12 250 4 9 10
3 500 4 12 12 300 4 9 10
600 4 12 12 350 4 9 10
3 700 4 12 5 12 450 4 12 5 12
3
S811+ Control Options 6 S811+ Power Options 6 Notes
3 Description NEMA Bypass Contactor
1 Feature Overload provides same features
as standard model plus ground fault,

3 Pump control Size 1 stall/jam protection, selectable trip class
—10, 15 and 20.
MOV protection Size 2 2 Size 4 units require additional 6-inch
3 Size 3 (152.4 mm) (1X) space.

3 This table is common for Freedom,
Size 4
3 Size 5
Freedom arc-resistant and Freedom
FlashGard MCCs.
3 Size 6
Size 7
MCC.
5 Requires 24.00-inch (609.6 mm) wide,
3
rear is unusable, bottom exit only.
6 Options apply to both HMCP and
breaker models.
3
3
3
3.2
Motor Isolation Contactors SVX9000 Adjustable SVX9000 Adjustable SVX9000 Options
Sizes
Frequency Drives— Frequency Drives— Description
3
Plug-in Units NEMA 1 Non-Plug-in Units NEMA 1
1 (480 V Maximum) Constant/
Variable Torque Rated 1
(480 V Maximum) Constant/
Variable Torque Rated
DeviceNet communications
3
2 PROFIBUS communications
3 X-Space X-Space Modbus RTU 3
Freedom and Freedom and Modbus TCP
4
5 hp
Resistant FlashGard hp
Resistant FlashGard EtherNet/IP 3
2000-foot (609.6m) dV/dT filter
6
7
3
5
3
4
6
7
40
50
9
9
9
9
(40–75 VT hp) 3
MMX Adjustable
7.5 4 7 60 9 9 (100–150 VT hp) 3
10 4 7 75 2 9 9 2000-foot (609.6m) dV/dT filter
Frequency Drives—NEMA 1
(480 V Maximum) 15 4 7 100 12 12
(200–250 VT hp)
3
X-Space 20 6 10 125 12 12
Freedom, Freedom Arc- 25 6 10 150 12 12
(300–400 VT hp) 3
3
Resistant and Freedom (500–600 VT hp) 3
hp FlashGard 30 6 10 200 12 12
Input line fuses (40–150 VT hp) 3
3
1 2 250 3 12 12
2 2
SVX9000 Options 300 3 12 12
Input line fuses (200–250 hp) 3
Input line fuses (300–400 hp) 3
3
Description 400 3 12 12
3 3
5 3
DeviceNet communications 500 3 12 12 Active Harmonic Correction 3
PROFIBUS communications for AC Drives
3
600 3 12 12
7.5 3
Modbus RTU 700 3 12 12 X-Space
10 3
3
Modbus TCP Freedom and
Note: Consult Eaton’s Consulting Freedom Arc- Freedom
MMX Drive Options EtherNet/IP Application Guide for complete Description Resistant FlashGard
Description 2000-foot (609.6m) dV/dT filter (3 hp) details on Drive/ Option Assembly
Dimensions. 50 A harmonic 12 4 12 4 3
3% load reactor 2000-foot (609.6m) dV/dT filter correction
5% load reactor
(5–15 hp)
Note: SVX9000 Non-Plug-in Units
with HMCP disconnect, 3% input 100 A harmonic 12 4
correction
12 4 3
2000-foot (609.6m) dV/dT filter line reactor, 3% output line
Three contactor bypass
(20–30 hp) reactor, door mounted Keypad,
CPT. 18-Pulse Clean Power
3
Input line fuses (3–30 hp)
Drives—NEMA 1, (480 V
RFI filter (3–30 hp)
Note: VT—Variable Torque drives
are capable of producing 200% Maximum) Variable Torque 3
starting torque for 10 seconds Rated 5
and are rated for 10 seconds, X-Space 3
and are rated 110% overload hp Inches (mm) Wide 6
for 1 minute.
Note: CT—Variable Torque drives
100 12, 40.00 (1016.0) 3
3
are capable of producing 200% 150 12, 40.00 (1016.0)
starting torque for 10 seconds 200 12, 60.00 (1524.0)
and are rated for 10 seconds,
and are rated 150% overload
for 1 minute.
250 3 12, 60.00 (1524.0)
3
300 37 12, 60.00 (1524.0) 7
400 3 12, 60.00 (1524.0) 7 3
500 37 12, 106.00 (2692.4) 7
Notes
3
3
1 SVX9000 plug-in units with HMCP
disconnect, 3% input line reactor,

3% output line reactor, door-mounted
keypad, CPT.
2 X-space for 75 hp CT rated drive is 12X.
3
3
MCC.
4 Requires 24.00-inch (609.6 mm)
wide structure.
5 Includes 5% input line reactor, 18-pulse
3
rectifier, delta differential transformer.
6 X-space shown is common for both 3
Freedom and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
7 Extra space required for bypass
contactor, consult factory. 3

3
Feeders
3 Note: FlashGard RotoTract
assembly available on circuit
3
Fusible Disconnect— Fusible Disconnect—
breakers 400 A and below. Fusible Switch 5 Dual Fusible Switch 45
3
X-Space Amperes Freedom X-Space
Circuit Breaker Freedom
30 2
X-Space Amperes Freedom FlashGard
3 Freedom and 30 or 60 2 3 60 3
Freedom Arc- Freedom 30 2
100 3 3
3 Amperes Resistant FlashGard
200 6 5 Notes
Standard Circuit Breakers
1 HFDE breakers with RMS 310+ electronic
3 HFD 50 1 2 2
400
600
6
8
7
8
trip unit available in 80 AF and 225 AF in
HFD 100 1 2 2 2X space.
3 HFD 150 1 2 2
2 Fixed assembly, no RotoTract.
3 NGH breaker requires a full structure
(12X) in the Freedom arc-resistant MCC.

3 HJD 250
HKD 400
3
4
3
5
4 Not available in Freedom FlashGard.
3 HLD 600 4 42 MCC.
NGH 1200 7 3 72
3 6.00-Inch (152.4 mm)
Circuit Breakers
3 EG125 1 N/A
JG250 1 N/A
3 Dual HFD Circuit Breakers
3
50/50 2 4
50/100 2 4
3 100/100 2 4
4
100/150 2
3 150/150 2 4
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
NEMA 3R Drives 1 Panelboards
3
Constant/Variable Torque Panelboards Panelboards
Rated (480 V Maximum) (240 V Maximum) 25 (480 V Maximum) 25 3
3
Horsepower X-Space, Width 2 Circuits X-Space Circuits X-Space
1.5 5X, 24.00 (609.6) 18 4 14 6
2 5X, 24.00 (609.6) 30 5 26 8 3
3 5X, 24.00 (609.6) 42 6 32 8
5 5X, 24.00 (609.6) 42 10 3
7.5 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
10 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
3
15 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
Automatic Transfer Switches 1
3
20 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
25 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
Open Transition Three-Pole Only
3
30 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
40 12X, 24.00 (609.6)
Ampere Rating Unit Width Inches (mm) X-Space 2 3
100 6 20.00 (508.0) 6
3
50 12X, 32.00 (812.8)
60 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 150 6 20.00 (508.0) 6
3
75 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 100 20.00 (508.0) 8
100 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 150 20.00 (508.0) 8
125 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 225 20.00 (508.0) 8

3
150 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 300 20.00 (508.0) 8
200 12X, 32.00 (812.8) 3 400 24.00 (609.6) 7 12 3

600 24.00 (609.6) 7 12
800 24.00 (609.6) 7 12 3
Transformers
1000
1000
24.00 (609.6) 7
44.00 (1117.6) 8
12
12
3
Transformers 24
Primary and
1200 44.00 (1117.6) 8 12 3
Primary Secondary 1600 44.00 (1117.6) 9 12
kVA
Breaker Only Breakers
X-Space X-Space 2000 44.00 (1117.6) 9 12 3
Single-Phase Notes
1 Not available in Freedom arc-resistant.
3
3 4 4
2 X-space shown is common for Freedom, Freedom arc-resistant and Freedom FlashGard MCCs.
5 4 4 3 Extra space required for bypass section. Consult factory. 3
4 Must have primary breaker. Must be located at bottom of structure.
7.5 4 4
10 4 4
5 Space for MLO. Branch breakers included.
6 Manually operated switch:
3
15 7
3
6 6 NTVS = Electronically operated non-automatic.
MTVX = Single handle manual operation.
20 7 6 6 7 Requires 21.00-inch (533.4 mm) deep structure.
25 7 6 6 8 Requires 37.00-inch (939.8 mm) deep structure, flush at the rear. 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler required.
9 Requires 42.00-inch (1066.8 mm) deep structure. 4.00-inch (101.6 mm) filler required.
3
30 7 6 6
45 7 7 8 3
Three-Phase
97 6 6 3
15 7
25 7
6
6
6
6
3
30 7 6 6 3
45 7 6 6
3
3
3
3
Application Guide
3
3
Motor Circuit Protector Selection Guide 1 Circuit Breaker Application Chart 2
Maximum Horsepower Interrupting Rating (kA Symmetrical Amperes)
3 NEMA 200 V 208 V 230 V 380 V 460 V 575 V HMCP Frame Frame Rating (Amperes) 208/240 V 480 V 600 V
1 — — — 3/4 3/4 1 3 Standard Rating Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3 3/4 1 1 2 2 3 7 HFD 150 65 65 25
2 2 2 3 5 7-1/2 15 HJD 250 65 65 25
3 5 5 5 10 10 10 30 HKD 400 65 65 35
3
7-1/2 7-1/2 7-1/2 — — — 50 HLD 600 65 65 35
2 — — — — — 15 30 NGH 1200 65 65 35
3 10 10 10 15 20 25 50 RGH 2500 65 65 50
— — 15 25 25 — 70 High Interrupting Rating Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3 3 — — — — — 30 50 FDC 150 100 100 35
15 20 20 30 40 50 100 JDC 250 100 100 35
3 25 25 30 50 50 — 150 KDC 400 100 100 50
3 4 40
—
40
—
40
50
60
75
100
—
100
—
150
250
LDC
NGC
600
1200
100
100
100
100
50
50
3 5 50 50 60 — 125 150 250 RGC 2500 100 100 65

75 75 75 150 200 200 400 Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers
3 — — 100 — — — 600 HFD/CL 150 100 100 100
3
6 150 150 200 300 350 400 600 HFD/CL 225 100 100 100
— — — — 400 — 1200 NBTRIPAC 300–800 100 100 100
3 Magnum DS Air Circuit Breakers

MDS-608 800 65 65 65
3 MDS-C08 800 100 100 100
MDS-616 1600 65 65 65
3 MDS-C16 1600 100 100 100
3
MDS-620 2000 65 65 65
MDS-C20 2000 100 100 100
3 MDS-632 3200 65 65 65
MDS-C32 3200 100 100 100
3 Notes
1 Suitable for use with NEMA Design B and D (high efficiency) motors.
3 2 Refer back to charts for main breakers and feeder breakers for available product families.
Circuit breakers can be supplied with optional CPT and optional shunt trip.
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3.2
Individual CPT Sizes
Starter Size Standard Transformer (VA) Maximum Size in Standard Unit (VA)
3
FVNR, FVR, 2S2W
3
1, 2 100 150
1, 2–6 100 100 3
3, 4 150 250
5, 6 500 500 3
4 150 250
5 150 250 3
6 250 350
RVAT 3
3, 4 150 250
5, 6 500 500 3
2S1W
1, 2, 3, 4 200 250 3
5, 6 500 500
Vacuum 3
3
4 150 250
5 150 250
6 250 350
3
Product Specifications 3
Structure
● NEMA 1, 2, 3R or
Units
● Freedom Motor Starters: ● Motor load terminal block ● 10250T 30.5 mm heavy-
3
●
12 enclosure
Copper horizontal bus
● NEMA size 1–7 4 is standard on FlashGard
MCC and optional on ●
duty oiltight pushbuttons
Surge protection:
3
● Bimetallic overload relay
Freedom and Freedom
●
600–3200 A 1
Fully rated copper vertical
● Single-phase protection arc-resistant
● SPD Series
(100–400 kA)
3
● Class 10 and 20 ● Compact units available
●
bus 600–1200 A
Isolated vertical bus barrier
protection ● Soft Starters:
● Energy monitoring: 3
● Widest heater range ● IQ 100 (amperes, volts)
3
standard on Freedom with fewest styles in
● S811+ (20–800 hp) 6
MCCs ● IQ 250 (adds, Hz,
the industry ● Adjustable Frequency watts, PF)
Optional insulated
3
●
● Optional solid-state Drives: ● IQ 260 (adds THD,
horizontal bus and/or overload relays
insulated labyrinth
● MMX (1–10 hp) Contact I/O)
vertical bus on Freedom ● HMCP with combination ● SVX9000 (2–700 hp) 7 ● IQ Analyzer (adds 3
MCCs starter ratings of 65 kAIC trending, waveform
● K-Switch visible blade
● Optional isolating barriers and 100 kAIC at 480 V 5 fused disconnect: 8 display) 3
between structures 2 ● Plug-in units up to 400 A ● Power Xpert (adds high-
● 30–800 A
● Insulated horizontal bus ● Handle mechanism with ● 100 kAIC at 600 V
end metering, power
quality analysis, open
3
and insulated labyrinth positive trip indication
vertical bus is standard on
Freedom arc-resistant and
● Side-mounted positive communications and
Web server gateway) 3
latch terminal block
3
Freedom FlashGard MCCs Notes
● Heavy-duty spring 1 800–2500 A copper horizontal bus
operated quarter-turn
3
available in Freedom arc-resistant MCC.
door latches 2 Isolating barriers standard in Freedom
arc-resistant MCC.
● 65 kA and 100 kA bus
bracing 3
3 65 kA bus bracing available in Freedom
arc-resistant MCC. 100 kA not available.

3
3
4 NEMA size 1–5 motor starters available
in Freedom arc-resistant MCC.

5 Starter combination ratings 65 kAIC
maximum in Freedom arc-resistant MCC.

6 20–200 hp S811+ soft starters available
3
in Freedom arc-resistant MCC.
7 2–200 hp SVX9000 drives available in 3
Freedom arc-resistant MCC.
8 Fused disconnects not available in
Freedom arc-resistant MCC

3
3
Freedom and Freedom FlashGard Check Sheets
Contents
3 Freedom and Freedom FlashGard
Description
3 Freedom and Freedom FlashGard Check Sheets
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Motor Control Center Takeoff Check Sheet
3 Customer/Job Name Neg No. Bus Rating and Options
3 Horizontal bus 600/800/1200/1600

MCC Model 21-inch deep structure only 2000/2500/3200
3 Freedom Freedom FlashGard Bus plating Silver (AG)/tin (SN)

Service 60 Hz 208 V/230 V/480 V/575 V Bus temp rise 50 °C/65 °C
3 Service 50 Hz 380 V/415 V Insulated horizontal bus
3
DC 125 V/250 V Vertical bus 600/800/1200
Three-wire/four-wire Ground bus 300/600/800
3 Structure Configuration Location Top/bottom

16-inch front mount 21-inch front mount Vertical ground bus Lugs: incoming/each end
3 21-inch front and rear mount Neutral bus (4 W only) Half/full/lug pad
42-inch front mount back-to-back Bus bracing 42K/65K/100K
3 32-inch front mount back-to-back Vertical bus barrier STD Glastic sheet
3 NEMA 1A/2DP/12/3RNWI/3R aisle/3R tunnel

Enclosure Modifications Incoming Line Metering
Labyrinth with/without shutter
3 Space heaters (150 W) 120 V/240 V IQ 130/140/150

Channel sills CBC/IBC seismic qualified IQ 250/260
3 Thermostat Split proof IQ DP-4130
Bottom plates Split rear cover IQ Analyzer
3 Corner structure Vertical section barrier Power Xpert 2250/2260/2270
3 8-inch vertical wireway Special paint color (adder) Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000
ABS Certification Incoming Protection
3 Handle extensions (“two meter rule”) SPD Series surge protective device
Top hat (certain sections) 12-inch/18-inch/24-inch Incoming Line MLO/Breaker/Switch
3 Top hat (all sections) 12-inch/18-inch/24-inch Cable—top/bottom/bus duct
3
Main trip: LS/LSI/LSG/LSIG/other
Crimp lugs Screw type lugs
3 Main tie main (MTM) Auto throw over

Kirk key Service entrance (SUSE)
3
3
3.3
MCC Spec Review Checklist, continued
3
Breaker Options
Aux. contacts (1NO 1NC) (2NO 2NC)
Control Power
Size 1 100 VA (Std)/150 VA max.
3
LS/LSI/LSIG/LSG trip units Size 2 100 VA (Std)/150 VA max.
3
Under voltage release Shunt trip Size 3 150 VA (Std)/250 VA max.
Panelboards Size 4 150 VA (Std)/250 VA max. 3
14/18/26/30/32/42 count 1-pole/2-pole/3-pole Size 5 250 VA (Std)/300 VA max.
Starter Disconnect Type Size 6 250 VA (Std)/300 VA max. 3
HMCP/TM. bkr./fusible
NEMA wiring class
Separate source power
Auxiliary Starter Contacts
3
1A/1B/2B/1C/2C/1S/2S NO 1/2/3/4 NC 1/2/3/4 3
If any type “C” choose MTB location: Control Devices
Master terminal blocks (MTBs) top/bottom/relay structure
Pushbutton 1 unit/2 unit/reset VoltageVision 3
Terminal Blocks
3
Selector switch 2pos/3pos/4pos Motorguard
Side latch pull apart (Std) (2x7-point)
Light—Std Xfmr/PTT/LED bulb Motor load block
Spare points = ______% (call DSE) Front utility (call DSE)
Nameplates: Black with White Letters / White with Black Letters
On/off run/stop
3
Mini ETM Panel ETM
Starter OL Types
Bimetallic (C306) Advanced solid-state (C441)
AMM (mini/panel) VM (mini/panel) 3
Riley transducer (Loop/Self Pwr)
Solid-state (C440)
CTs for remote metering 3
Plug-In Starter Bucket Unit Features
3
Ground fault
# 16 MTW wire Coil surge suppression
IP relay—size 1/2/3/4/5/6 Voltage
3
# 14 SIS wire Blown fuse indicators
Relays 300 V or 600 V Timers
# 14 MTW Ground fault relays
Communications
Wiremarkers each end
DeviceNet direct Modbus RTU 3
Ring wire lugs control Riley current sensor
EtherNet/IP Power Xpert Gateway
Spade wire lugs Heater packs
Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP 3
Ring power wire lugs
Wiring diagram on door
S811+ Soft Starters
Isolation contactor MOVs
3
3
SIS power wire Vacuum contactors
Pump control software Bypass starter
VFDs SVX/MMX/CPX
EMI/RFI Line fuses 3
3
dV/dT filter 600 ft or 1000 ft 3-contactor bypass
Harmonic Correction Unit
50 A/100 A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Component Count Sheet

3 FVNR Starters FVR Starters Two Speed, One Winding Two Speed, Two Winding
3 Size
1
Quantity Size
1
Quantity Size
1
Quantity Size
1
Quantity
3 2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
3 4 4 4 4
3
5 5
6 6
Fusible Feeders
3 7 Single Quantity Dual Quantity
30 A 30/30
3 Feeder Breakers 60 A 60/60
3
Single Quantity Dual Quantity 100 A
50 A 50/50 200 A
3 100 A 100/50 400 A

150 A 100/100 600 A
3 225 A 150/100 800 A
250 A 150/150 1200 A
3 400 A
3 600 A
800 A
Future Space
Starter Circuit Protection Size Quantity
3 1200 A
HMCP Thermal Magnetic 2X
1600 A
3 2000 A
HMCPE 3X
Fusible 4X
2500 A
3 3200 A
3 Relay Panels
Size Quantity
VFDs
3 HP Quantity Type
2X
3X
3
1.5 CT/VT
4X
2 CT/VT
5X
3 3
5
CT/VT
CT/VT 6X
3 7.5 CT/VT 7X
8X
10 CT/VT
3 20 CT/VT 9X
25 CT/VT 10X
3 30 CT/VT 11X
40 CT/VT 12X
3 50 CT/VT
3 60
75
CT/VT
CT/VT
3 100 CT/VT
125 CT/VT
3 150 CT/VT
200 CT/VT
3 250 CT/VT
300 CT/VT
3 400 CT/VT
3
500 CT/VT
600 CT/VT
3 700 CT/VT
3.3
Component Count Sheet, continued
3
Soft Starters
HP Quantity Duty Cable Exit
3
20 Std/severe
40 Std/severe 3
60 Std/severe
75 Std/severe
3
125 Std/severe
3
200 Std/severe
300 Std/severe Top/bottom 3
350 Std/severe Top/bottom
450 Std/severe Top/bottom 3
3
3
Transformers 3
3
Single-Phase Quantity Three-Phase Quantity
3 kVA 9 kVA
5 kVA 15 kVA 3
7.5 kVA 25 kVA
10 kVA 30 kVA 3
15 kVA 45 kVA
20 kVA 3
25 kVA
30 kVA
3
45 kVA 3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC Check Sheets
Contents
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC
Description
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant MCC Check Sheets
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3 Motor Control Center Takeoff Check Sheet
3 Customer/Job Name Neg No. Bus Rating and Options
3 Horizontal bus 800/1200/1600/2000/2500

MCC Model Bus plating Silver (AG)/tin (SN)
3 Freedom Arc-Resistant Bus temp rise 50 °C/65 °C

Service 60 Hz 208 V/230 V/480 V/575 V Insulated horizontal bus
3 Service 50 Hz 380 V/415 V Vertical bus 600/800/1200
3
Three-wire/four-wire Ground bus 300/600/800
Structure Configuration Location Top/bottom
3 42-inch front mount back-to-back 21-inch front mount Vertical ground bus Lugs: incoming/each end
NEMA 1A/2DP Neutral bus (4W only) Half/full/lug pad
3 Enclosure Modifications Bus bracing 65K
Space heaters (150 W) 120 V/240 V Vertical bus barrier Labyrinth with shutter
3 Channel sills CBC/IBC seismic qualified Incoming Line Metering
3 Thermostat
Bottom plates
Split proof
Split rear cover
IQ 130/140/150
IQ 250/260
3 Corner structure Vertical section barrier IQ DP-4130

8-inch vertical wireway Special paint color (adder) IQ Analyzer
3 ABS Certification Power Xpert 2250/2260/2270
Handle extensions (“two meter rule”) Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000
3 Incoming Protection
3 SPD Series surge protective device

Incoming Line
3 Breaker
Cable—top/bottom
3 Main trip: LS/LSI/LSG/LSIG/other
3
Crimp lugs Screw type lugs
Main tie main (MTM) Auto throw over
3 Kirk key Service entrance (SUSE)
3
3
3.4
MCC Spec Review Checklist, continued
3
Breaker Options
Aux. contacts (1NO 1NC) (2NO 2NC)
Control Power
Size 1 100 VA (Std)/150 VA max.
3
LS/LSI/LSIG/LSG trip units Size 2 100 VA (Std)/150 VA max.
3
Under voltage release Shunt trip Size 3 150 VA (Std)/250 VA max.
Panelboards Size 4 150 VA (Std)/250 VA max. 3
14/18/26/30/32/42 count 1-pole/2-pole/3-pole Size 5 250 VA (Std)/300 VA max.
Starter Disconnect Type Separate source power 3
HMCP/TM. bkr.
NEMA wiring class
Auxiliary Starter Contacts
NO 1/2/3/4 NC 1/2/3/4
3
1A/1B/2B/1C/2C/1S/2S Control Devices 3
If any type “C” choose MTB location: Pushbutton 1 unit/2 unit/reset VoltageVision
Master terminal blocks (MTBs) top/bottom/relay structure
Selector switch 2pos/3pos/4pos Motorguard 3
Terminal Blocks
3
Light—Std Xfmr/PTT/LED bulb Motor load block
Side latch pull apart (Std) (2x7-point)
On/off run/stop
Spare points = ______% (call DSE) Front utility (call DSE)
Nameplates: Black with White Letters / White with Black Letters
Mini ETM Panel ETM
3
AMM (mini/panel) VM (mini/panel)
Starter OL Types
Bimetallic (C306) Advanced solid-state (C441)
Riley transducer (Loop/Self Pwr) 3
CTs for remote metering
Solid-state (C440)
Ground fault 3
Plug-In Starter Bucket Unit Features
3
IP relay—size 1/2/3/4/5/6 Voltage
# 16 MTW wire Coil surge suppression
Relays 300 V or 600 V Timers
3
# 14 SIS wire Blown fuse indicators
Communications
# 14 MTW Ground fault relays
DeviceNet direct Modbus RTU
Wiremarkers each end
EtherNet/IP Power Xpert Gateway 3
Ring wire lugs control Riley current sensor
Modbus TCP PROFIBUS DP
Spade wire lugs Heater packs
S811+ Soft Starters 3
Ring power wire lugs
Wiring diagram on door
Isolation contactor
Pump control software
MOVs
Bypass starter
3
3
SIS power wire Vacuum contactors
VFDs SVX/MMX/CPX
EMI/RFI
dV/dT filter 600 ft or 1000 ft 3-contactor bypass 3
3
Harmonic Correction Unit
50 A/100 A
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Component Count Sheet

3 FVNR Starters FVR Starters Future Space
3 Size
1
Quantity Size
1
Quantity Starter Circuit Protection Size Quantity
HMCP Thermal Magnetic 2X
3 2 2
HMCPE 3X
3 3
3
4X
4 4
3
5 5
Relay Panels
Size Quantity
3 Feeder Breakers 2X
Single Quantity Dual Quantity
3 50 A 50/50
3X
4X
3
100 A 100/50
5X
150 A 100/100
6X
3 225 A 150/100
7X
250 A 150/150
8X
3 400 A
9X
600 A
3 800 A
10X
11X
3 1200 A
1600 A
12X
3 2000 A
2500 A
3
3 VFDs
HP Quantity Type
3 1.5 CT/VT
2 CT/VT
3 3 CT/VT
5 CT/VT
3 7.5 CT/VT
3
10 CT/VT
20 CT/VT
3 25
30
CT/VT
CT/VT
3 40 CT/VT
50 CT/VT
3 60 CT/VT
75 CT/VT
3 100 CT/VT
125 CT/VT
3 150 CT/VT
3 200 CT/VT
3 Two Speed, One Winding Two Speed, Two Winding
3
Size Quantity Size Quantity
1 1
3 2 2
3 3
3 4 4
3
3.4
Component Count Sheet, continued
3
Soft Starters
HP Quantity Duty Cable Exit
3
20 Std/severe
40 Std/severe 3
60 Std/severe
75 Std/severe
3
125 Std/severe
3
200 Std/severe
3
Transformers
Single-Phase Quantity Three-Phase Quantity
3
3 kVA 9 kVA
3
5 kVA 15 kVA
7.5 kVA 25 kVA 3
10 kVA 30 kVA
15 kVA 45 kVA 3
20 kVA
25 kVA
3
30 kVA 3
45 kVA
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
Low Voltage Switchgear
Magnum DS Switchgear 4.1 Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed

Cross-Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2
4
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2 4
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2
Product Offering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2 4
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5
4
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5 4
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5
4.2 Primary and Secondary Unit Substations 4
Product Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-7
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—March 2016 www.eaton.com V3-T4-1
4.1 Low Voltage Switchgear
Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed
Contents
4 Magnum DS Switchgear with Power Circuit Breaker
Description Page
4 Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-3
4 Features—Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-3
Features—Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-3
4 Features—Breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-4
Magnum DS Switchgear—Trip Units . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5
4 Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5
4
Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-5
4 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-6
4
4
4
4 Cross-Reference Product Description Application Description Product Offering
4 Aftermarket Eaton’s Magnum DS
switchgear has a 50-year
Switchgear is used for
protection, control and
●
●
Indoor NEMA 1
Rear access
Eaton’s Low Voltage history of power circuit monitoring of low voltage
4 Assembly supports vintage breaker and switchgear distribution systems in all
● Front access
and current switchgear development that has set types of industrial, commercial
● Arc resistant (2B)
4 breakers and parts that date
as far back as the 1950s,
industry standards for quality, and utility environments ● Integrated switchboard,
reliability, maintainability and requiring up to 600 V MCC and ATS
4 including the Magnum® DS,
DSII and SPB families.
extended operating life.
Magnum DS switchgear is an
distribution between 1600 A
and 10,000 A continuous
● Unit substation
transformer integration
4 For more information,
refer to the following Eaton
assembled metal enclosure
that houses drawout power
loads, and between 42,000 A
and 200,000 A interrupting
● Outdoor NEMA 3R rear
access
circuit breakers and typically current.
4 catalogs: CA08100014E,
RP01301001E or call includes control and metering
● Outdoor NEMA 3R front
access
1-800-BKR-FAST (257-3278). devices. Low voltage
4 For technical details of
switchgear is applied at
600 V and less.
4 current product configurations,
reference Eaton’s Consulting
Application Guide
4 CA08104001E.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
V3-T4-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—July 2015 www.eaton.com
4.1
Standard Finish—The light Breaker Inspection— Bus Joints—All joints are
4
gray paint finish (ANSI 61)
uses a modern, completely
When withdrawn on the
rails, breaker is completely
bolted and secured with
Belleville-type spring washers 4
automated and continuously accessible for visual for maximum joint integrity.
monitored electrostatic inspection; tilting is not These washers reduce the 4
powder coating. This necessary. The rails are potential of joint hardware
continuously monitored permanent parts of every loosening during the 4
system includes spray breaker compartment. change of joint temperature
de-grease and clean, spray
rinse, iron phosphate spray Interference interlocks are
associated with variations
of the loads. As an option,
4
coating spray rinse, non- supplied on breakers and maintenance-free hardware
chemical seal, oven drying, in compartments where the can be provided. 4
electrostatic powder spray compartments are of the
paint coating and oven curing. same physical size to ensure
that an incorrect breaker
Full Neutral—For four-wire
applications, the neutral bus
4
Integral Base—The rugged
formed base greatly increases
Through-the-Door Design cannot be inserted. is rated 100% of main bus
rating as standard. 4
the rigidity of the structure Front Accessible—When Features—Bus
and reduces the possibility the door is open or removed, Buses and Connections— Ground—A ground bus is
furnished for the full length of
4
of damage during the each breaker compartment Vertical and cross bus ratings
installation of the equipment provides front access to
isolated, vertical wireways,
in Magnum DS Switchgear
are based on a UL® and ANSI
the switchgear assembly and
is fitted with terminals for 4
and is suitable for rolling,
purchaser’s connections.
jacking and handling. A lifting
angle is permanently welded
primary disconnects, cell
current transformers and
standard temperature rise
of 65°C above a maximum 4
Glass-Reinforced Polyester
into the bus compartment other breaker compartment ambient air temperature
structure for increased accessories for ease of field of 40°C.
Stand-Off Insulation
System—Glass-reinforced
4
strength. wiring and troubleshooting polyester has been used on
Heavy-Duty Door Hinges—
field connections. Bus Ampacities—Vertical
and cross bus ratings in both low and medium voltage 4
Four-Position Drawout— switchgear for decades.
4
Each breaker door is mounted Magnum DS are 2000,
with hinge pins. Removal of Breakers can be in connected, 3200, 4000, 5000 and By combining this industry-
the door is easily test, disconnected or 6000 amperes. In addition, proven material with our
accomplished by just lifting removed position. The 8000 and 10,000 amperes other insulation materials,
a total system providing
4
the hinge pin. This allows breaker compartment continuous cross bus ratings
easy access to the breaker door can be closed in
the connected, test and
are also available. exceptional mechanical and
dielectric withstand strength, 4
internal compartment for
Bus Bracing—Unique as well as high resistance to
inspection and maintenance. disconnected positions.
vertical bus configuration heat, flame and moisture, is 4
Rear Cover/Doors— Closing Spring Automatic provides an optional short- produced. Substantial testing
In Magnum DS Switchgear, Discharge—Mechanical
interlocking automatically
circuit withstand rating of to demonstrate accelerated 4
standard rear covers with 150,000 amperes without the effects of heating and cooling
captive hardware are the
bolt-on type. They are split
discharges the closing springs
when the breaker is removed
need for preceding current
limiting fuses. Standard
on the mechanical and
dielectric properties of this
4
from its compartment.
4
into two sections to facilitate bracing is 100,000 amperes. system prove it to provide
handling during removal and The U-shaped bar is the heart superior performance for
installation. Optional rear of the Magnum DS vertical decades of trouble-free
doors are also available. bus. This configuration operation. 4
provides a much higher
Through-the-Door Design—
The following functions may
mechanical strength. To
further demonstrate the
Features—Wiring
Cable Compartment—
4
be performed without the
need to open the circuit
strength and rigidity of this
bus system, it has been
The cable compartment gives
ample room for terminating 4
breaker door: levering the verified through testing to the power cables. Removable
breaker between positions, withstand 85,000 amperes top roof sheets allow for easy 4
operate manual charging short-circuit for a full conduit hub installation. The
system and view the spring
charge status flag, close
60 cycles. floor of the cable compartment 4
is open to allow cable entry
Silver Plating—Bolted,
and open breaker, view and
adjust trip unit, and read the silver-plated copper main
from underground duct
banks. Optional floor plates
4
Breaker Cell
breaker rating nameplate. buses are standard. The
plating is over the entire
are available.
4
length of the bar, not just at
the joints. Optional tin-plated
copper buses are available.
4
4
4
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—July 2015 www.eaton.com V3-T4-3
Lug Pad—The lugs are Control Wire Marking— Features—Breaker Arc Chute—There are three
4 located on the breaker run- Each wire is imprinted with Contacts—The Magnum DS basic means of extinguishing
backs to accommodate lug ink cured under ultraviolet has silver tungsten moving an arc: lengthening the arc
4 orientations at a 45° angle light for durability and for contacts and silver graphite path; cooling by gas blast or
to reduce the bending radius easy identification by the stationary contacts. The contraction; and deionizing or
4 of the cable needed for
making the connections,
user. The enhanced solvent
resistance and durability
contacts provide a long- physically removing the
conduction particles from
wearing, low-resistance joint.
4 thus reducing installation
and maintenance time.
of the aerospace-grade UV
cure ink has been tested
The contacts are protected
from arcing damage even
the arc path.
Mechanical setscrew for severe environments. The DE-ION® principle is

4 type lugs are standard. The imprinting is made
after repeated interruptions
by the “heel-toe” action that
incorporated in all Magnum
DS circuit breakers. This
Optional NEMA two-hole periodically along the length causes the integral arcing
4 compression lugs are of the wire, with the ends contacts to mate before the
makes possible faster arc
extinction for a given contact
available as an option. being imprinted more main contacts part. The travel, and ensures positive
4 Control Wireway—
frequently. The point of
origin, wire designation
arcing contacts then part last, interruption and minimum
An isolated vertical wireway striking the arc away from contact burning.
4
and point of destination are the main contacts.
is provided for routing of imprinted in the following
factory and field wiring in Levering Mechanism—
format: <origin zone/wire The main contacts are of the The worm gear levering
4 each switchgear section.
Breaker secondary terminal
name/destination zone>. butt type and are composed mechanism is self-contained
Each device has a uniquely of a multiplicity of fingers to on the breaker drawout
4 blocks are mounted as
standard above each circuit
designated zone. “<”
indicates the direction of
give many points of contact
without alignment being
element and engages slots
breaker. The terminal blocks in the breaker compartment.
4 are rated 30 amperes and
the wire origination and “>”
indicates the direction of
critical. A removable crank is used to
lever the breaker between
will accept bare wire, ring the wire destination. As an
4 or spade terminals for wire option, wire marking can be
the connected, test and
disconnected positions.
size ranges of #22 to #10. made using sleeve type or
4 Extruded loops are punched
in side sheets of the vertical
heat shrink sleeve type. Mechanical interlocking is
arranged so that levering
wireway to allow securing
4 of customer control wiring
cannot be accomplished
unless the breaker is in
without the use of adhesive the opened position.
4 wire anchors. Control Wire Marking
Protection During Levering
4 Secondary Terminal
Compartment Door—
Operation—When levering
the breaker between
The customer’s secondary Magnum DS Breaker Contacts
4 terminal connections are (Arc Chutes Removed) the connected, test and
disconnected positions, the
located behind a separate Stored-Energy Mechanism— operator is protected from
4 door providing access to A cam-type closing mechanism contact with live parts by
these connections without closes the breaker. It receives the breaker door.
4 the need to open the breaker
compartment door.
its energy from a spring that
can be charged by a manual
4 Shipping Split Connection— handle on the front of the
breaker or by a universal
At each shipping split, the
4 control connections are made electric motor.
with plug-in terminal blocks Release of the stored energy
4 Control Wireway
rated 600 volts, 40 amperes.
The terminal blocks interlock
is accomplished by manually
depressing a button on
Control Wire—Standard mechanically without
4 wire is Type SIS insulated removing the line or load
the front of the breaker or
electrically energizing a
stranded copper, extra connections. This method releasing solenoid.
4 flexible No. 14 AWG of making the shipping split
control connections increases
minimum.
4 the speed of installation and
reduces the potential of
incorrect connections.
4
4 Levering Magnum DS Breaker
4
4
4
4.1
True Two-Step Stored Electrically Operated Trip Functions—Magnum Standards and
Energy Closing— Breakers—Electrically DS trip units provide the Certifications 4
This sequence is required to operated breakers are maximum in flexibility and
charge and close the breaker. equipped with a spring are available in the following Magnum DS Switchgear
assemblies have undergone
4
charging motor and configurations: LSI, LSIG
The breaker closing springs an extensive seismic
are charged either through
electrically operated spring
release and shunt trip coils.
and LSIA (ground fault alarm
only). In each case, either qualification program. The 4
the manual-charging handle test program utilized ANSI
or by the optional charging
The breaker manual charging
handle can be used to charge
the short delay or the
instantaneous function (not standard C37.81, the Uniform 4
motor. The breaker is the closing springs when both) may be defeated. This Building Code® (UBC) and
mechanically interlocked to
prevent closing of the breaker
power is not available to the reduces the need for spare the California Building Code
(CBC) as a basis for the test
4
charging motor. breaker inventories and
until the closing springs are
fully charged. Provisions for Padlocking—
provides maximum utilization program. The assemblies
have been tested and 4
of interchangeable breakers.
All breakers include provision qualified to exceed these
With the closing springs fully for padlocking open to requirements. 4
charged, the breaker can then prevent electrical or manual Accessories
be closed by pressing the
manual close pushbutton on
closing. This padlocking Magnum DS Switchgear
conforms to the following
4
can secure the breaker
the breaker, or by the optional standards: CSA®, ANSI
spring release coil through a
in the connected, test or
disconnected position C37.20.1, C37.51, and UL 4
remote electrical signal. Standard 1558, and is built
This means that the energy
by preventing levering of
the breaker. in an ISO® certified facility. 4
required to open the breaker
is always prestored following
Ease of Inspection and
Maintenance—Magnum DS
American Bureau of Shipping
(ABS) certification is also 4
a closing operation. available.
“Stored energy” is energy
breakers are designed for
maximum accessibility and Contact Eaton for details
4
the utmost ease of inspection
held in waiting, ready to open
or close the breaker within and maintenance.
and part numbers for
CSA-approved units. 4
five cycles or less. The
unique cam and spring design
Magnum DS Switchgear—
Trip Units
Magnum Remote Racking Device 4
provides necessary energy (MRR1000)
for a single close-open Digitrip® RMS Trip Unit—
The Digitrip RMS trip units The MRR1000 permits the 4
sequence, as well as the operator to remotely open
energy for multiple charge-
close operations such as
feature a dependent curve
that is depicted in the and close a breaker from up
Product Selection 4
to 25 feet away during the Refer to TB1901001E
nameplate by a blue shaded
this possible sequence:
charge-close-recharge-open- area of the trip curve. The rack-in or rack-out process,
a distance well beyond the
for application data.
4
close-open. dependent curve affords Contact Eaton for
The closing springs are

better protection flexibility. arc flash boundary for
traditional LV switchgear.
configurations, pricing 4
Additionally, all of the trip and availability.
interlocked with the breaker
racking mechanism to ensure
units have, as standard,
thermal memory, 50/60 Hz
For more information, refer to 4
product documentation
that the closing springs
4
operation and thermal PA01900008E.
are discharged before the self-protection at 90°C.
breaker can be removed
from the compartment. Digitrip RMS Integral
Microprocessor-Based
4
Manually Operated
Breakers—Manually operated
Breaker Overcurrent Trip
Systems—These systems 4
breakers are equipped with a provide maximum reliability
manual charging handle to with true rms sensing as 4
charge the closing springs. standard, gives excellent
Manual closing and tripping
pushbuttons are utilized to
repeatability, and requires 4
minimum maintenance.
operate the breaker. Remote
closing and tripping can be
No external control source
is required for its protective
4
accomplished by installing functions.
optional electric spring Digitrip Test Kit (MTK2000) 4
release and shunt trip coils.
4
The MTK2000 Trip Unit Test
The breaker closing springs Kit is used to test and verify
must be charged manually, the pickup levels and time
then remote closing and
tripping signals can be sent
delay settings of a breaker’s 4
trip unit.
to the breaker.
For more information, refer to 4
technical documentation
IL01906008E. 4

4
Product Specifications
4 Refer to Section 16426A of the
Product Specification Guide.
4
4 Available Bus Ratings
Cross Bus Bus Bracing Vertical Bus
4 Ampacity kA Ampacity
2000 100, 150, 200 2000
4 3200 100, 150, 200 3200
4
4000 100, 150, 200 4000
5000 100, 150, 200 5000
4 6000 100, 150, 200 1
8000 100, 150, 200 —

4 10,000 100, 150, 200 —
4 Vertical section bus is sized Note: In addition to the available

per main cross bus maximum bus bracings shown above, the
rating or by ANSI C37.20.1 bus has been tested for short-
4 Section 7.4.13 Table 11 to a circuit values of 85,000 amperes
for a full 60 cycles.
maximum of 5000 amperes.
4
4 Magnum DS Breaker Ratings
For Magnum breaker ratings,
4 refer to the power circuit
breaker section of Eaton’s
4 Consulting Application Guide
CA08104001E.
4
Note
4 1 6000 amp riser available in true 44-inch sections.
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Primary and Secondary Unit Substations
4.2
Contents
MVS Primary Switch and Low Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switchgear
Description Page
4
Primary and Secondary Unit Substations 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Unit Substations Advantages of 4
Most switchgear assemblies Eaton’s unit substations Unit Substations
are configured as unit follow the system concept ● Complete coordination, 4
substations. of locating transformers as both mechanical and
A unit substation, as referred
close as practicable to areas of
load concentration at usage
electrical 4
to in this publication, is
● Extreme flexibility with wide
defined as a coordinated
voltages, thus minimizing
the lengths of secondary
choice of components and
ratings to meet exact
4
assembly consisting of
distribution cables and buses.
three-phase transformers
with high-voltage incoming
This concept provides several ●
application requirements
Optimum safety to
4
basic advantages, such as:
4
line sections and an assembly operators
of low voltage distribution ● Reduced power losses ● Modern design
sections. Improved voltage Meets all applicable ANSI,
4
● ●
Unit substations may be regulation IEEE®, NEMA and UL

standards
Improved service
4
●
indoor or outdoor, with a
selection of high voltage continuity
incoming sections, a choice Reduced likelihood of
4
●
of transformer types and an faults

arrangement of switchgear to Increased flexibility
4
●
suit the application. ● Minimized installation

expense
● Elimination of the need for 4
vaults due to availability of
non-flammable types of 4
transformers
● Efficient space utilization 4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Primary and Secondary Unit Substations
Product Selection
4 Unit substations are
4 engineered to order and
have multiple configurations.
Contact Eaton for
4 configurations, pricing
and availability.
4
4 Unit Substations
Description Industry Applications Standards
4 Dry-Type Transformers Dry-Type Transformers
4 ■
■
VPI, VPE, RESIBLOC®, Cast
113 kVA–25 MVA
■ Commercial and institutional
■ Industrial users (petrochemical, oil & gas,
■ ANSI C57.12.01/C57.12.91
■ UL available
■ Up to 46 kV, 150 kV BIL primary pulp & paper/forest) ■ Seismic Zone 4 certification
4 ■ Up to 15 kV secondary ■ Utilities
4
4 Liquid-Filled Liquid-Filled Transformers
Transformers
4 ■ Primary and secondary unit substations,
power substations
■ Commercial and institutional
■ Industrial users (petrochemical, oil & gas,
■ Complies with ANSI C57.12.00 and C57.12.90,
CSA–C88
■ 112.5 kVA–20 MVA pulp & paper/forest) ■ UL, FM available
4 ■ Up to 69 kV primary ■ Utilities ■ Seismic Zone 4 certification
■ Up to 34.5 kV secondary
4 ■ Mineral oil, R-Temp®, silicone or BIOTEMP™
4
Pad-Mounted Pad-Mounted Transformers
4 Transformers
■ Small 75–3000 kVA ■ Commercial and institutional ■ Complies with ANSI C57.12.00 and C57.12.90,
■ Large 3000–7500 kVA ■ Industrial users (petrochemical, oil & gas, CSA–C88
4 ■
■
Up to 34.5 kV high voltage
Up to 5 kV low voltage
pulp & paper/forest)
■ Utilities
■ UL, FM available
■ Seismic Zone 4 certification
4 ■
■
Underground cable fed
Mineral oil, R-Temp, silicone or BIOTEMP
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies
5.1 AMPGARD Motor Control

Arc Resistant AMPGARD
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-2
5
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-2 5
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-4 5
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T5-5
V3-T5-6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5.1 Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies
AMPGARD Motor Control
Contents
5 AMPGARD Motor Control Assembly with Main Breaker, SC 9000 AFD,
RVSS and Two-High FVNR
Description Page
5 Features, Benefits and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-4
5 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-5
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-6
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5 Eaton’s AMPGARD® medium
voltage starter family provides
AMPGARD starters are
equipped with current limiting
SC 9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive (AFD)
This newest member of Eaton SVX9000 line of low
flexibility never before power fuses to interrupt the
5 available. Rated at 2200– short-circuit faults shown
the AMPGARD family was
designed for maximum
voltage drives for a reliable,
easy-to-use system that
15,000 volts up to 8000 hp, below. The contactor and flexibility in the control of does not require time spent
5 they are the first starters fuses are completely medium voltage motors. in learning new software.
designed as integrated, coordinated. The SC 9000™ combines In addition, the SC 9000
5 complete units precisely
matched to motor ratings, Squirrel Cage Motor Starters: innovative technology with can interface with many
the reliable design and control systems, such
Starters for squirrel cage
5 and engineered to provide
component-to-component motors are available in full or
construction the industry
has come to expect of the
as Modbus®, Ethernet,
DeviceNet™, CANbus®
circuitry and front accessi- reduced voltage designs in all
and PROFIBUS® DP.
5
AMPGARD products. Rated
bility of all components ratings. Full voltage starters
at 2400 volts up to 2500 hp
and terminals. AMPGARD are available one-high or two- In an industry first, the
and 4160 volts up to 4500 hp,
5 starters are used in a variety of high in a factory-assembled
structure. Electromechanical
the SC 9000 delivers the SC 9000 can be placed in a
lineup with other AMPGARD
industrial process applications, smallest footprint in the
reduced voltage starters are
5 such as pulp and paper,
petrochemical, HVAC (chillers), available in either reactor or
industry. The standard
24-pulse phase shifting
and Eaton motor control
products on a common bus
autotransformer type. Both known as AMPGARD
5 where proper control and
protection of the motor and provide closed transition
isolating transformer and
rectifier minimizes any Medium Voltage Integrated
system are critical to the from reduced to full voltage. harmonic noise sent back Control Gear. Now, all types
5 user. AMPGARD has been See table on Page V3-T5-6
for application data.
on to the supply. of motor starters, load break
the industry leader in medium switches, integrated AFDs,
5 voltage motor control for over The SC 9000 is a fully
integrated, three-line-in—
AFD synchronous transfer
control, AFD bypasses, and
60 years in these applications,
three-line-out, plug-and-play main and feeder breakers can
5 and our starters have been
designed with that experience product that includes highly be integrated into a single line.
behind them. reliable AMPGARD medium The Integrated Control Gear
5 voltage components on capabilities and reliable
the input (isolation switch, design make the SC 9000
5 power fuses and SL vacuum
contactor), isolating
the perfect choice for speed
control in industries such as
transformer, rectifier, inverter
5 and controls. The SC 9000
petrochemical, water/waste
water, utility, HVAC, pulp and
uses the same keypad and paper, and many more.
5 programming software as the
5
5
5
5.1
Reduced Voltage Solid-State The MBA comprises a metal- ● All new low voltage 2200–7200 volts at ratings
Starters: Offered as an enclosed drawout vacuum wireway. Low voltage of 400 and 800 amperes, 5
alternative to traditional circuit breaker section that is wire is isolated from and 15 kV at 250 amperes.
reactor or auto-transformer integrally connected via main the medium voltage
The 400 ampere contactor
5
type reduced voltage starter, bus to the balance of the compartment, and
interrupting rating is the
the AMPGARD RVSS allows
the user to fine-tune starting
AMPGARD starter assembly
it protects.
customer terminal blocks
are accessible through the highest in the industry at 5
8500 amperes, allowing for
parameters to meet a wide
variety of unique load The main bus configuration ●
low voltage control panel
Easily accessible low
higher levels of coordination 5
conditions. The onboard is in the same top-mounted with power fuses. The
voltage panel completely
user-friendly microprocessor location as on all AMPGARD
assemblies, allowing for ease isolated from the medium
800 ampere contactor has
an interrupting rating of
5
provides the ability to select voltage compartment that
the proper combination of of installation with adjacent
sections and addition for offers generous device
12,500 amperes, also the
highest in the industry. 5
initial current, maximum mounting space
future sections.
current and ramp time,
resulting in smooth, stepless
● Standard viewing window Note: For full starter/contactor
horsepower ratings and other
5
Front aligned, rear aligned, for visual verification of
load acceleration while
5
or front and rear aligned with technical data (including power
isolation switch operation
minimizing mechanical shock fuse coordination), refer to Tab 13,
back-to-back starters are ● Optional remote operator
to system components. Medium Voltage Power
available.
The AMPGARD RVSS is
for isolation switch allows
user to open and close
Contactors.
5
The main breaker is the
Motor Protective Relay:
available as a standalone
starter or can be incorporated
industry-leading Type VCP-W
drawout vacuum circuit
switch while remaining
outside the equipment When a motor protective 5
into a lineup with other flash boundary relay is required, the
AMPGARD starters. Adding
breaker, which provides the
performance our customers Ease of Installation: Current
AMPGARD starters are 5
to an existing AMPGARD expect. provided with the MP-3000
installation is easy via a
Lead-time is dramatically
limiting fuses, contactor
assembly and isolating switch
or MP-4000 microprocessor-
based motor protective relay
5
simple splice kit. Starters are
assembly are easily removed
available in 400 ampere and
720 ampere frame sizes.
reduced, typically 50% less
than the industry norm. from the enclosure; line and
as standard. This package
offers benefits like a 20-cycle 5
Our single-source approach load terminals are completely voltage sag ride-through,
Arc-Resistant AMPGARD: has cut delivery time from accessible from the front. UL 1053 certification for 5
When specified, AMPGARD months to weeks. The Standard structures are 36.00 ground fault sensing that is
is available in special arc-
resistant construction. Two
extended waiting period W x 92.00 H x 30.00 in D
(914.4 W x 2336.8 H x 762.0
internal to the relay, arm/ 5
between order placement disarm capability, a drawout
ratings are available: 30 kA
and 50 kA. Both designs have
and delivery has been
eliminated.
mm D) including a 12.00 in
(304.8 mm) top-mounted
case option, Intel-I-Trip
overload protection for
5
been tested and verified to main bus compartment. The
meet the requirements of Other Motor Starters: main bus compartment is
custom curve setting to
precisely match your motor’s 5
IEEE® C37.20.7 for Type 2B Starters for wound rotor top, side and front accessible, requirements, and optional
construction. Type 2B
construction is defined as
and multispeed motors are
available. However, each
making maintenance and PowerNet™ or Modbus 5
lineup extensions easy. communications capability.
arc-resistant at front, back
and sides of the enclosure
application must be reviewed
for proper motor protection Ease of Maintenance: 15 kV Starter: A 15 kV rated 5
with the low voltage and operation. Refer to All components are front AMPGARD starter is available
compartment door open. the factory for pricing and accessible, facilitating with the same features and 5
All types of 400 ampere and equipment details. routine inspection or parts capabilities as described
800 ampere starters, as well replacement. Isolation switch
life is 10,000 operations.
for the 7.2 kV rated starter. 5
as 24-inch wide incoming The starter is supplied with
Features, Benefits
cable sections are available
in arc-resistant construction. and Functions Vacuum Contactor: a 250 ampere vacuum
contactor and three power
5
The Type SL vacuum
5
Main Breaker AMPGARD, Personnel Safety: A positive contactors were designed fuses (maximum 250E)
SC 9000 AFD, LBS Load mechanical isolating switch and engineered specifically for for motors rated to 5000
Break Switches are not with visible disconnect horsepower. These starters
available in arc-resistant completely grounds and
use in AMPGARD starters.
They are self-supporting, may be supplied with the 5
construction. Consult Eaton isolates the starter from compact, bolt-in or stab-in Eaton InsulGard™ relay for
for more details. the line connectors with a
mechanically driven isolating
three-pole contactors. The partial discharge detection. 5
Main Breaker AMPGARD contactors utilize a solid-state
(MBA): The MBA is the
shutter, leaving no exposed
high voltage. Additional
control board, allowing the 5
industry’s first truly user maximum flexibility to
safety features include:
integrated medium voltage change control voltages and
dropout times in the field,
5
metal-enclosed main breaker ● Isolated cable entry for
and starter assembly
combination.
added safety. The starters
and cables are completely
simply by adjusting DIP
switch settings. To permit 5
application matching of the
5
isolated from each other
by steel barriers starter to the motor rating,
contactors are available for
5
Low Voltage and High Voltage Compartments Standards and

5 Certifications
5 1/4-Turn Door Latch UL and CSA Certification
Top and Bottom AMPGARD starters are
5 Indicating Lights Start/Stop Pushbutton designed, assembled and
(when specified) tested to meet all applicable
5 standards. AMPGARD meets
ANSI, NEMA® and IEC
5 standards, and is UL, CSA,
MP-3000
(when specified) cUL® and KEMA third-party
certified. The major
5 Low Voltage
Access Door
components, i.e., contactor,
isolating switch, fuses,
5 MP-3000, MP-4000,
IQ DP-4000 and IQ Analyzer,
5 DP-4000 Meter
(when specified)
are UL recognized.
UL or CSA labeling of a
5 specific starter requires
review to ensure that all
5 requested modifications and
auxiliary devices meet the
5 Isolated Low Voltage Control Panel appropriate standards. Refer
to factory when specified.
5 Contact Eaton for details

and part numbers for
5 Isolation Switch
CSA-approved units.
5
Viewing Window
5
Note: Isolation Switch Mechanism
Locks Medium Voltage Door
Closed in ON Position Seismic Certification
5 AMPGARD starters are
seismically tested and
seismically qualified, and
5 exceed requirements of both
the International Building
5 Code (IBC) and California
Building Code Title 24.
5 Reference Information
5 AMPGARD Brochure
●
BR02003002E
5 AMPGARD RVSS Brochure

●
Optional Stab-In Contactor, Bolted Main Fuses
and Optional Blown Fuse Indicator BR02003001E
Technical Data
5
●
TD02003001E
Renewal Parts
5
●
RP.48J.01.T.E
● AMPGARD Main Breaker
5 PA48D01SE
● 15 kV AMPGARD
5 Technical Data
TD02003002E
5 ● Remote Operator
PA02003002E
5 ● Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
SA02003003E
5 ● 720A RVSS
PA02000001E
5
5
5.1
Product Selection
5
AMPGARD RVSS AMPGARD RVSS 5
Description
Catalog
Number 5
400 ampere RVSS
720 ampere RVSS
SP10B4B
SP10B8S
5
5
5
5
5
5
Main Breaker Main Breaker AMPGARD 5
AMPGARD Catalog
Description Number
5
1200A, 250 MVA Main Breaker BLR12
2000A, 350 MVA Main Breaker BLR23 5
3000A, 350 MVA Main Breaker BLR33
5
5
5
5
15 kV Starter with 15 kV Starter 5
InsulGard
5
Catalog
Description Number
5
13.8 kV FVNR Starter S210B2SBB
13.8 kV Autotransformer Starter S610B2SBB
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5

5
5 Main Breaker AMPGARD
5 Description
Ratings
Amperes Volts Horsepower
5 Main breaker 1200, 2000 and 3000 2200 to 7200 —

Starters 400 and 800 2200 to 7200 Up to 8000
5 Starters 250 10,000–15,000 Up to 5000
5
Starting Characteristics
5 Starter % Motor % Motor % Line
Type Voltage Current Current % Torque
5 Reactor Reduced Voltage
5
80% tap 80 80 80 64
65% tap ➀ 65 65 65 42
5 50% tap 50 50 50 25
Autotransformer Reduced Voltage
5 80% tap 80 80 67 64
65% tap 1 65 65 45 42
5 50% tap 50 50 28 25
5
Interrupting Capacity—kVA
5 NEMA Class E2
5 Starter Maximum
Horsepower 2300 Volt 4600 Volt 6600 Volt
5 3000
5000
200,000
1,190,000
—
—
—
—
5 5500 — 400,000 —
8000 — — 570,000
5 Note
1 Factory set on 65% tap.
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches
6.1 Introduction
Outdoor Medium Voltage Switch
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-2
6
6.2 Medium Voltage Switch—MVS 6
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-3
6
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4 6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4 6
6
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4
6.3 Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB

6
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-5 6
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6
V3-T6-6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-6
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-6 6
6
6.4 Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB
6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-8
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-8 6
6
6.5 Unitized Power Centers—UPC
6
6.6 OEM Medium Voltage Switch Components—MVS-C 6
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-11
6
6
6
6
6
6.1 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches
Introduction
Contents
6 Outdoor Medium Voltage Switch
Description
6 Introduction
An Eaton
6 Green Solution
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6 Introduction
6 Product Selection Guide
6 Product Offering Chart—Metal-Enclosed 1

Description MVS MEB MSB UPC Mini-MVS
6 Voltage 5, 15, 27, 38 kV 5, 15 kV 5, 15 kV 5, 15 kV 5 kV only
6 Operation duty cycle

Enclosure
Low
Indoor, outdoor aisleless
High
High
Low
Indoor only
Low
6 Listed UL®, CSA® — — — UL, CSA

Assembly standards ANSI/IEEE®, C37.30.3, C37.20.4, ANSI/IEEE, C37.30.3, C37.20.4, ANSI/IEEE, C37.30.3, C37.20.4, — ANSI/IEEE, C37.30.3, C37.20.4,
6 C37.22, C37.57, C37.58,
CSA 22.2 #31 2
C37.22, C37.57, C37.58,
CSA 22.2 #31
C37.22, C37.57, C37.58,
CSA 22.2 #31
C37.22, C37.57, C37.58,
CSA 22.2 #31 2
6 Circuit breaker type N/A VCP-W VCP-TR (5, 15 kV), VCP-W 27 kV N/A N/A
Circuit breaker mounted N/A Drawout Fixed N/A N/A
6 Seismically rated Zone 4 to
California Building Code Title 24
Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
6 BIL ratings 60 kV (5 kV) 60 kV (5 kV) 60 kV (5 kV) 60 kV (5 kV) 60 kV (5 kV)

95 kV (15 kV) 95 kV (15 kV) 95 kV (15 kV) 95 kV (15 kV)
6 125 kV (27 kV) 125 kV (27 kV)
6
150 kV (38 kV)
Main bus ratings 800, 1200A (5/15/27/38 kV) 800, 1200A (5/15 kV) 800, 1200A (5/15/27 kV) N/A N/A, cable in, cable out application
6 Breaker ratings N/A 1200A (5/15 kV) 600, 800, 1200A (5/15/27 kV) N/A N/A
Overcurrent protective device Yes (fused) Yes Yes Yes (fused) Yes (fused)
6 Short-circuit
interrupting capacity
Per fuse IC 29, 41, 63 kA (5 kV) 16, 20, 25, 40 kA (5/15 kV) Per fuse IC Per fuse IC
18, 28, 37, 63 kA (15 kV) 25 kA (27 kV)
6 Conduit entry Top or bottom Top or bottom Top or bottom Top or bottom Top or bottom
6 Notes
1 Additional products not shown include medium voltage transfer, high resistance ground and low profile switchgear.
6
2 Listings are voltage dependant. See individual product sheets for detail.
6
6
6
V3-T6-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—March 2016 www.eaton.com
Medium Voltage Switch—MVS
6.2
Contents
Indoor Medium Voltage Switch—MVS Bus Connection to
Dry-Type Transformer
Description Page
6
Medium Voltage Switch—MVS 6
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-3
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4 6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4 6
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-4 6
An Eaton
Green Solution
6
6
6
6
6
Eaton’s MVS load interrupter
switchgear is a metal-
MVS Arc-Resistant
Eaton’s 5/15 kV MVS metal-
MVS switchgear provides
safe, reliable switching and
6
enclosed assembly consisting fault protection for medium
of a switch, bus and fuses.
enclosed load interrupter
switchgear is now available voltage circuits where high 6
with arc-resistant duty cycle operation is
MVS switchgear is available
in one or more vertical construction with not needed. 6
accessibility Type 2B in
section assemblies. The Single switch and
6
●
three-pole switch will accordance with IEEE transformer primary

interrupt its rated load current C37.20.7. MVS arc-resistant
Duplex switch
6
●
with its quick-make, quick- switchgear is designed for

indoor use. It can also be ● Selector switch
break mechanism. Optional
used outdoor with space Automatic transfer control
6
●
fuses ensure short-circuit
protection at all times. heaters. It can be configured
for a variety of applications.
Switches can be supplied 6
with manual or electrical
operating mechanisms and 6
with or without primary
fuses. Per IEEE C37.20.7, the
Type 2B accessibility rating
6
provides arc-resistant
features and protection at the 6
freely accessible exterior
(front, back and sides) of the 6
equipment as well as in front
of the instrument/control
compartment with the
6
instrument/control
compartment door opened 6
while the equipment is
energized and operating 6
normally.
6
6
6
6
6
Features, Benefits and Functions Standards and Reference Information

6 Quick-make, quick-break Interlocked for safety: Certifications See Consulting Application
6 mechanism: A reliable heavy-
duty coil spring mechanism
Mechanical interlocks prevent
closing the switch when the
MVS switchgear meets or
exceeds IEEE® C37.20.3 as it
Guide for detailed list of ratings
and options. For renewal parts,
drives the switch blades at compartment door is open, or applies to metal-enclosed see CA08105001E.
6 high speed into either the the opening of the door when switchgear.
open or the closed position. the switch is closed.
Product Selection
6 The speed of operation is
Safety under fault
Either Underwriters
Laboratories® (UL) or Contact Eaton for pricing.
independent of the person
conditions: The switch,
6 operating the switch.
depending upon the rated
Canadian Standards
Association® (CSA) listing is
Direct drive mechanism: voltage, is available with available for MVS switchgear in Technical Data
6 A metal-to-metal direct drive three or four fault-closing many configurations, with a and Specifications
mechanism eliminates chains operations with ratings number of options. ● Rated maximum voltage
6 or cables that may break or
need adjusting.
up to 61,000 amperes rms
asymmetrical, exceeding MVS switchgear is available
classes of 5, 15, 27 and
38 kV
seismically qualified to meet
6 DE-ION® arc interruption:
the industry standards one
time operation. the requirements of the
● Rated impulse levels, kV
DE-ION arc chambers and Uniform Building Code® BIL: 60, 95, 125, 150
6 spring-loaded auxiliary blades
ensure fast load current
Safety barrier: A hinged
solid metal barrier with a
(UBC), California Title 24 and ● Continuous and load-break
ratings: 600 amperes
BOCA® requirements in many
6 interruption and eliminate
arcing damage to the
perforated metal viewing area
shields the disconnect switch
configurations with a number
of options.
available at all voltage
classes; 1200 amperes
main contacts. when the compartment door available at 5 and 15 kV
6 is opened. ● Designs available in indoor
Positive switch position
and outdoor non-walk-in
6 indication: Red and green
multilingual (English/Spanish/
Short-circuit protection:
A full range of Eaton fusing configurations
● Manual or motor operated
6
French) labels located directly options is available for short-
on the switch operating circuit protection.
mechanism give visual
6 indication of switch position. Eaton's SF6-free
switchgear: Eaton medium
6 voltage switchgear use
vacuum switches combined
with solid insulation material.
6 This environmentally-friendly
technology avoids the use of
6 SF6 as an insulation gas.
6
6 Indoor Medium Voltage Switch—MVS Bus Connection to
Dry-Type Transformer
6
6 Hinged Internal
Switch Barrier
6 DE-ION Arc
Inspection Interrupters
6 Window Located Behind
Switch Barrier
Operating
6 Handle
(Mounted in Switch Drive
Access Door) Mechanism
6 Interlock
6
Fuses
6 High Dielectric
6
Insulation Used
Between Switch
Phases and
6 Ground on
15 kV Only
6
Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB
6.3
Contents
Indoor Medium Voltage Switch and Fixed Breaker—MSB
Description Page
6
Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB 6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-6 6
An Eaton
Green Solution 6
6
6
6
6
6
and Functions
Eaton’s MSB switchgear
is an integrated assembly
Applications include ground
fault protection, primary and/ ● Visible isolation
6
of a visible load-break or secondary switching, and
disconnect switch, fixed- protection on unit substations,
● Fully rated fixed vacuum
circuit breaker
6
mounted vacuum circuit automatic transfer switching
breaker, and control devices at medium voltage levels,
●
●
Electrical operation
No fuses
6
that are integrated electrically capacitor switching, high
and mechanically for
circuit protection. All
duty cycle and tight system
coordination protection.
● Improved coordination
capability
6
major components are
manufactured by Eaton, MSB switchgear can also be
● Improved transformer
protection
6
establishing one source an economic benefit in single-
of responsibility for the ended substations because
it may allow the customer
●
●
Ground fault protection
Capacitor switching
6
equipment and ensuring
high standards in quality, to eliminate the secondary
main protection and
● High switching duty cycle 6
coordination, reliability and ● Integral overcurrent
switching device.
service. MSB switchgear
would typically be used
protection 6
● Low resistance ground Eaton's SF6-free
where both cost and
protection are important
schemes switchgear: Eaton medium 6
● Single-ended substation voltage switchgear use
design parameters.
●
designs
Overcurrent protection
vacuum switches combined
with solid insulation material.
6
This environmentally-friendly
technology avoids the use of 6
SF6 as an insulation gas.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB
Standards and Product Selection

6 Certifications Contact Eaton for pricing.
6 MSB switchgear meets or
exceeds IEEE C37.20.3 as it Technical Data
applies to metal-enclosed
6 switchgear.
and Specifications
● Rated maximum voltages
6 CSA listing is available for
MSB switchgear in many
of 4.76–15 kV
● Continuous current ratings
6 configurations with a number
of options.
up to 1200 amperes
● 25 and 40 kA rms
6 MSB switchgear is available
symmetrical short-circuit
interrupting capacity
6 the requirements of the
Uniform Building Code,
● Designs available in indoor
California Title 24 and
6 BOCA requirements in ●
configurations
Single vertical section and
many configurations with
6 a number of options.
transformer primary
configurations
Lineups consisting of MSB
6
●
and MVS vertical sections
6
Reference Information
6 See Consulting Application
6 and options. For renewal parts,
see CA08105001E.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB
6.4
Contents
Indoor Metal-Enclosed Drawout Vacuum Breaker—MEB
Used as Main for Two Fused Switches
Description Page
6
Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB 6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-8 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
and Functions
Eaton’s MEB switchgear is
a metal-enclosed assembly
MEB can be applied as the
primary main device and ● Fully rated drawout
6
of single high drawout VCP-W integrated with fused feeder
vacuum circuit breakers and switches in a lineup of fused ●
vacuum circuit breaker
Electrical operation
6
control devices that are MVS switchgear.
integrated electrically for
Applications include ground
● Improved coordination
capability
6
circuit protection. (For
fault protection, primary Improved transformer
6
●
drawout vacuum breaker
metal-clad switchgear, and/or secondary switching, protection
and protection on unit
type VacClad-W, see Ground fault protection
6
●
Volume 3, Tab 7) All substations, automatic

transfer switching at medium
● Capacitor switching
major components are
manufactured by Eaton, voltage levels, capacitor
switching, high duty
●
●
High switching duty cycle
Integral overcurrent
6
establishing one source
of responsibility for the cycle and tight system
coordination protection.
protection
6
equipment and ensuring
high standards in quality,
coordination, reliability and
MEB switchgear can also 6
be an economic benefit in
service. single-ended substations
because it may allow the
6
customer to eliminate the
secondary main protection 6
and switching device.
● Low resistance ground
6
●
schemes
Single-ended substation
6
●
designs
Overcurrent protection
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB

6 MEB switchgear meets or
exceeds IEEE C37.20.3 as it Technical Data
applies to metal-enclosed
6 switchgear.
and Specifications
● Rated maximum voltages
6 CSA listing is available for
MEB switchgear in many
of 4.76 and 15 kV
● Continuous current rating
6 configurations with a number
of options.
of 1200 or 2000 amperes
● Short-circuit current
6 MEB switchgear is available
ratings up to 38 kA rms
symmetrical
6 the requirements of the
Uniform Building Code,
● Designs available in indoor
California Title 24 and
6 BOCA requirements in ●
configurations
Single vertical section and
many configurations with
6 a number of options.
transformer primary
configurations
Lineups consisting of
6
●
MEB vertical sections and

MVS vertical sections
6
6 See Consulting Application
6 and options. For renewal parts,
see CA08105001E.
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Unitized Power Centers—UPC
6.5
Contents
Indoor Unitized Power Centers
Description Page
6
Unitized Power Centers—UPC 6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Bottom Cable Entry and Top Cable Entry
Product Description Features, Benefits Standards and 6

and Functions Certifications
Eaton’s Unitized Power
Centers combine an MVS The primary disconnect Power transformer core and
6
primary disconnect switch,
a ventilated dry-type
switch is a manually
operated, two-position,
coil assemblies meet all
applicable IEEE/ANSI/NEMA® 6
transformer and Pow-R-Line 4 quick-make, quick-break standards.
secondary distribution type MVS. Distribution class 6
devices in a compact, surge arresters protect the
factory-assembled integral
unit. These self-contained
transformer from surge
See Consulting Application
6
voltages, and current limiting
units provide maximum kVA
in minimum space, and
fuses protect against fault
currents. Insulated cable
and options. 6
their unitized construction
6
passes through a steel
simplifies installation. barrier to connect the switch Product Selection
to the transformer.
Other advantages include:
The power transformer is of a
Contact Eaton for pricing. 6
● Front accessibility
● Against-the-wall mounting
ventilated, dry-type, core-
form construction. Standard 6
● Dimensions consistent Class 220°C insulation allows
with standard doorways normal operation at 150°C 6
● Liberal space for primary temperature rise above a
and secondary cables 30°C nominal ambient and 6
● Molded case circuit a 40°C peak ambient.
breaker or fusible switch The secondary distribution 6
secondary distribution section consists of group
mounted Series C® molded 6
case circuit breakers or FDP-
W fusible switches separated
from the transformer by steel
6
barriers. Additional vertical
sections may be added for 6
additional low voltage
distribution. 6
6
6
6
6

6 ● Indoor enclosure only ● Insulation:
6 ● Maximum primary
voltages:
● Class H 220°C rise
(standard)
6 ●
●
3 kV through 15 kV
Three-phase, 60 Hz,
● 150°C, 115ºC and 80°C
rise available
6 ●
delta primary
Primary BIL:
● Fan cooling available
to increase kVA rating
by 331/3%
6 ● Voltages not exceeding
2.5 kV maximum— ● Taps: ±(2) 2.5% FCAN
and FCBN
6 ●
20 kV BIL
Voltages above 2.5 kV ● Secondary voltages:
6
up to 7.2 kV maximum— ● 208Y/120 volts—
30 kV BIL four-wire
Voltages above 7.2 kV up 240 volts—three-wire
6
● ●
to 15 kV maximum— ● 480Y/277 volts—

60 kV BIL four-wire
6 ● Transformer: ● 575 volts—four-wire
● 12.5–1000 kVA
6 Secondary BIL: 10 kV BIL
●
● Winding material,
copper type,
6 ventilated dry
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
OEM Medium Voltage Switch Components—MVS-C
6.6
Contents
OEM Fusible Switches
Description Page
6
OEM Medium Voltage Switch Components—MVS-C 6
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-12 6
6
6
6
6
6
MVS-C Switch
6
Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions 6
MVS-C switches are open
frame switches that must
MVS-C switches can be
applied in suitable enclosures
Plug & Play™: The switch
and operating mechanism
Safety under fault
conditions: The switch,
6
be mounted in a suitable for many switching duties install as a single entity. No depending upon the rated
enclosure for the OEM whether manual or automatic handle and chains or cables to voltage, is available with 6
market. Eaton’s MVS-C load operation is specified: mount and adjust. Improves three or four fault-closing
interrupter switches are
● Transformer primary
productivity in assembly operations with ratings up 6
available in many ratings. reducing overall cost. to 61,000 amperes rms
When properly applied, they
will provide safe, low-cost ●
switching
Transformer secondary Quick-make, quick-break
asymmetrical, exceeding
the industry standards
6
switching mechanism: A reliable heavy-
switching where occasional
or infrequent disconnecting ● Power distribution duty coil spring mechanism
one-time operation.
6
means is desired. The switching drives the switch blades at Fuse mountings: Complete
three-pole switch, with its high speed into either the open
or the closed position.
three-phase fuse mounting 6
quick-make, quick-break assemblies or fuse live
mechanism, will interrupt DE-ION arc interruption:
parts are available that
are fully compatible with
6
its rated load current. DE-ION arc chambers and MVS-C switches. The fuse
spring-loaded auxiliary blades mountings are intended for 6
ensure safe, fast load current use with Eaton’s fuses.
interruption and eliminate
arcing damage to the
6
main contacts.
6
Positive switch position
indication: Red and Green
multilingual (English/Spanish/
6
French) labels located directly
on the switch operating 6
mechanism give visual
indication of switch position. 6
Interlocked for safety:
When properly installed to 6
MVS-C Fuse Mounting
utilize the built-in design
feature, mechanical interlocks Direct drive mechanism: 6
prevent closing the switch A metal-to-metal direct drive
when the enclosure door is mechanism eliminates chains
or cables that need adjusting
6
open, or opening the door
when the switch is closed.
As an alternate interlock
or break.
6
method, key interlock
provisions are included. 6
6

6 ● MVS-C switches meet or
exceed ANSI C37.22 Technical Data
ratings
6 ● UL and CSA recognized
and Specifications
component listing services
● Rated maximum voltage
6 are available for 5 and classes of 5, 15, 27 and
15 kV manual and motor 38 kV
6 operated MVS-C switches ● Rated impulse levels, kV
BIL: 60, 95, 125, 150
6 ● Continuous and load-break
ratings: 600 amperes
6 available at all voltage
classes; 1200 amperes
Reference Information available at 5 and 15 kV
6 For renewal parts, see
● Rated momentary and fault
close currents, 40 and
6 CA08105001E.
61 kA rms asymmetrical;
40 kA available at all voltage
6 classes; 61 kA available at
5, 15 and 27 kV
6 ● Manual, motor or shunt-trip
operated
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
6
Medium Voltage Switchgear
Indoor Type VCP-W Metal-Clad 7.1 Introduction

Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV shown)
7
7.2 Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear 7
Product Overview
7
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-4
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-4 7
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-5
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6 7
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
7
26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-7 7
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-7
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-7 7
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-7
7
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-8
7.3 High Resistance Grounding System

7
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-21
7
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-25
7
7
7
7
Learn 7
Online
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.1 Medium Voltage Switchgear
Introduction
Indoor Type VCP-W Metal-Clad Switchgear Assembly (5/15 kV shown) Contents

7 Description
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7 Product Offering Chart—Metal-Clad 1
Description MVA Standard Narrow Design MVA Arc Resistant
7
Voltage 5, 15, 27, 38 kV 5 kV 5, 15, 27, 38 kV
7 Operation duty cycle High High High
Enclosure Indoor (5–38 kV) Indoor only Indoor only
7 Outdoor aisleless (5–38 kV)
Outdoor aisle (5–15 kV)
7 Outdoor common aisle (5–15 kV)
7 Listed UL, CSA UL, CSA CSA only

Assembly standards ANSI/IEEE, C37.04, C37.06, C37.54, ANSI/IEEE, C37.04, C37.06, C37.54, ANSI/IEEE, C37.04, C37.06, C37.54,
7 C37.20.2, C37.55, CSA 22.2 #31 2 C37.20.2, C37.55, CSA 22.2 #31 2 C37.20.2, C37.20.7, C37.55, CSA 22.2 #31 2
Circuit breaker type VCP-W VCP-W ND VCP-W
7 Circuit breaker mounted 5 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option Drawout 5 kV only 5 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option
15 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option 15 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option
7 27 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option 27 kV drawout, direct roll-in breaker option
38 kV direct roll-in breakers 38 kV direct roll-in breakers
7 Seismically rated Zone 4 to Yes Yes Yes
California Building Code Title 24
7 BIL ratings 60 kV (5 kV) 60 kV (5 kV only) 60 kV (5 kV)
7 95 kV (15 kV) 95 kV (15 kV)

125 kV (27 kV) 125 kV (27 kV)
7 170 kV (38 kV) 170 kV (38 kV)
Main bus ratings 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000A (5 kV) 1200A (5 kV only) 1200, 2000, 3000A (5 kV)
7 1200, 2000, 3000, 4000A (15 kV) 2000A, 3000A 1200, 2000, 3000A (15 kV)
1200, 2000A (27 kV) 1200, 2000A (27 kV)
7 1200, 2000, 3000A depending on kA rating (38 kV) 1200, 2000, 3000A (38 kV)
7 Notes
1 Additional products not shown include medium voltage transfer, high resistance ground and low profile switchgear.
7 2 Listings are voltage dependant. See individual product sheets for detail.
7
7
Introduction
7.1
Product Offering Chart—Metal-Clad, continued 1
Description MVA Standard Narrow Design MVA Arc Resistant
7
Breaker ratings 1200, 2000, 3000A (5 kV) 1200A (5 kV only) 1200, 2000, 3000A (5 kV)
7
1200, 2000, 3000A (15 kV) 1200, 2000, 3000A (15 kV)
1200, 2000A (27 kV) 1200, 2000A (27 kV) 7
1200, 1600, 2500A depending on kA rating (38 kV) 1200A (38 kV)
Overcurrent protective device Yes Yes Yes 7
Short-circuit interrupting capacity 29, 41, 63 kA (5 kV) 29 kA (5 kV) 37 kA (5 kV) 2
33 kA (8.25 kV) —
7
18, 28, 37, 63 kA (15 kV) 37 kA (15 kV) 2 7
16, 22, 25, 40 kA (27 kV) 25 kA (27 kV) 2
16, 21, 25, 32, 40 kA (38 kV) 25 kA (38 kV) 2 7
40, 50, 63 kA (5 kV) 2
40, 50, 63 kA (15 kV) 2
7
25, 40 kA (27 kV) 2
7
25, 40 kA (38 kV) 2
Conduit Entry Top or bottom Top or bottom Top or bottom 7
Notes
1 Additional products not shown include medium voltage transfer, high resistance ground and low profile switchgear. 7
2 Ratings are arc ratings, not interrupting capacity.
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear
VCP-W Breaker Contents

7 Description Page
7 Product Overview
7 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
7 26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear V3-T7-7
7 An Eaton
Green Solution
7
7
7
7
7
7 Product Overview
Eaton has been manufacturing To ensure reliability and Eaton’s VCP-W metal-clad
7 metal-clad switchgear for over quality, the testing of VCP-W switchgear with type VCP-W
50 years, and vacuum circuit switchgears has been vacuum breakers provides
breakers for over 30 years. extensive. UL and CSA listed centralized control and
7 Tens of thousands of Eaton switchgear is available for protection of medium voltage
vacuum circuit breakers, 5 and 15 kV. CSA is available power equipment and circuits
7 used in a wide variety of for 27 and 38 kV. in industrial, commercial and
applications, have been utility installations involving
7 setting industry performance MVA Arc-Resistant generators, motors, feeder
standards for years. Eaton has been circuits, and transmission
7 With reliability as a
manufacturing arc-resistant and distribution lines.
metal-clad switchgear since
fundamental goal, Eaton’s VCP-W switchgear is
7 engineers have simplified the
1990. We now offer Type 2
and 2B arc-resistant
available in maximum voltage
VCP-W switchgear design to ratings from 4.76 kV through
switchgear assemblies,
7 minimize problems and gain
designed and tested in
38 kV, and interrupting ratings
trouble-free performance. as shown on Page V3-T7-10.
accordance with the IEEE
Special attention was given to VCP-W offers a total design
7 material quality and
C37.20.7 with VCP-W
concept of cell, breaker and
drawout vacuum circuit
maximum possible use auxiliary equipment, which
7 was made of components
breakers. The NEC calls for
can be assembled in various
an arc flash boundary of zero
proven over the years in combinations to satisfy user
around medium voltage
7 Eaton switchgear.
switchgear if it has been
application requirements.
Two-high breaker
Maintenance requirements successfully certified as arc-
7 are minimized by the use resistant switchgear per IEEE
arrangements are standard
up to 15 kV. One-high
of enclosed long-life C37.20.7. Eaton’s switchgear
arrangements can be
7 vacuum interrupters. When is available in Type 2B; arc
furnished when required.
maintenance or inspection flash boundaries are
7 is required, the component eliminated even when the
control compartment doors
arrangements and drawers
allow easy access. The are open (for Eaton
7 VCP-W’s light weight switchgear, this includes the
simplifies handling and control compartment door in
7 relocation of the breakers. front of the circuit breaker).
Eaton offers a wide variety of
7 The VCP-W meets or
exceeds all applicable ANSI,
tested switchgear
configurations and bus
NEMA® and IEEE design
7 standards, and additionally
transitions certified by UL to
protect personnel from arcing
offers many outstanding faults of up to 63,000A rms
7 safety features. for a duration of 0.5 seconds.
7.2
7
Endurance Front Accessible Mechanism
High power laboratory tests Front accessible mechanism 7
prove VCP-W breakers are is standard on all VCP-W
capable of 50 to 200 full fault breakers. 7
current interruptions.
Front Accessible CTs (5–38 kV)
Vacuum Interrupter,
7
Up to 12 CTs per breaker can
Current Transfer Conductor be mounted for easy access.
Eaton’s stiff-flexible design 7
eliminates sliding/rolling Drawout Auxiliary
contacts in the main Compartments 7
conductor, which provides Up to four drawers per
excellent electrical and vertical section can be 7
thermal transfer, and long equipped with CPTs or VTs
vacuum interrupter life. up to 15 kV. Primary isolation
shutters are standard.
7
Grounded Steel Safety Shutters
Prevents accidental contact Fluidized Bed Epoxy 7
with live primary voltage Bus Insulation
connections when breaker Excellent track resistant and 7
is withdrawn. flame retardant properties.
7
Breaker Rails Standardized
Functional Designs
On 5–27 kV units, the breaker
Shortens order cycle time.
7
can be withdrawn on rails for
inspection and maintenance
without the need for a Protective Relays 7
separate lifting device. Eaton’s E-Series
microprocessor-based 7
Direct Roll-In Beakers protective relays offer
5–38 kV switchgear is reliable, secure and complete 7
available with direct roll-in protection and control of
breakers. Direct roll-in power generation and 7
breakers can be supplied distribution systems. The
in two-high configurations hardware and software
with fully interchangeable commonality across the E-
7
breakers. Rails or a special Series family platform makes
direct roll-in lift pan can it easy for users to program 7
be used if desired to simple to complex settings or
withdraw upper breakers schemes for each of their 7
for inspection. unique applications. The
Reduced Breaker Maintenance

powerful multi-core
processors and intuitive user
7
interface provide for flexible
Vacuum interrupter requires
only periodic check for configurations and simple 7
contact erosion. Integral wear alarming and notifications.
indicator provided. No contact Please refer to Volume 3, Tab 9 7
adjustments are required. or www.eaton.com/pr for
additional information. 7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Options and Accessories Technical Data

7 and Specifications
Supplemental Devices Ground and Test Device Standard Accessories ● Maximum voltages:
7 The ground and test device is ● One test jumper ● 4.76 kV, 8.25 kV, 15 kV,
a drawout element that may ● One levering crank 27 kV, 38 kV
7 be inserted into a metal-clad ● One maintenance tool
switchgear housing in place ● Interrupting ratings:
● One lifting yoke (5–38 kV)
7 of a circuit breaker to provide
access to the primary circuits ● Two sets of rails (5–27 kV)
● 4.76 kV:
250 MVA (29 kA)
to permit the temporary ● One turning handle 350 MVA (41 kA)
7 connection of grounds or (5th wheel, 38 kV) 500 MVA (63 kA)
testing equipment to the ● 8.25 kV:
7 high voltage circuits. High Optional Accessories 500 MVA (33 kA)
potential testing of cable or ● One transport dolly ● 15 kV:
7 phase checking of circuits (5–27 kV) 500 MVA (18 kA)
are typical tests that may be ● One portable lifter
performed. The devices are 750 MVA (28 kA)
7 insulated to suit the voltage
(5–27 kV) 1000 MVA (37 kA)
rating of the switchgear and
● One test cabinet 1500 MVA (63 kA)
7 World-Class VCP-W Vacuum Circuit
Breakers are Designed with a V-Flex will carry required levels of ● One electrical levering ● 27 kV:
Nonsliding Current Transfer System short-circuit current. device (5–27 kV) 16 kA, 22 kA,
7 Before using ground and test
● One ramp for lower 25 kA, 40 kA
breaker (5–27 kV) ● 38 kV:
devices, it is recommended
7 that each user develop
● One manual or electrical 16 kA, 25 kA,
31.5 kA, 40 kA
detailed operating procedures ground and test device.
2300 MVA (35 kA)
7 consistent with safe Electrical ground up to
15 kV only
operating practices. Only ● Continuous current:
7 qualified personnel should ● One hi-pot tester circuit breakers
be authorized to use ground ● One offset manual ● 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
and test devices. racking device
7 (5 and 15 kV)
Manual and electrical ground ● 4000A forced cooled
7 and test devices are available. (5 and 15 kV)
These devices include six ● 1200A, 2000A, (27 kV)
7 studs for connection to
primary circuits. On the
● 600A, 1200A, 1600A,
200A, 2500A (38 kV)
manual device, selection and
7 grounding is accomplished
● 3000A forced cooled
(38 kV)
by cable connection. On
7 the electrical-type device, ● Continuous current:
grounding is accomplished main bus
7 by an electrically operated ● 1200A, 2000A, 3000A,
grounding switch. 4000A (5 and 15 kV)
7 ● 1200A, 2000A, (27 kV)
● 1200A, 2000A, 2500A,
7 3000A (38 kV)
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.2
Typical Indoor Assembly with a Breaker Withdrawn on Rails Contents
Description Page
7
26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear 7
Product Description Features, Benefits Standards and Certifications 7
26-inch wide VCP-W and Functions At the heart of the new
switchgear was designed for Functionality is the name For installations requiring switchgear line is Eaton’s 7
use in instances where floor of the game. Available 2000A main breakers with world-class VCPW-ND
space requirements would “Narrow Design” vacuum
not allow the industry
configurations include
breaker over breaker,
1200A feeders, lineups can be
built with standard 36-inch circuit breaker. The 26-inch
7
standard 36-inch (914.4 mm) one or two auxiliaries over (914.4 mm) wide main breaker (660.4 mm) wide offering
wide switchgear. breaker, breaker over one cubicles and 26-inch (660.4 includes breakers and gear 7
or two auxiliaries, or up mm) wide feeders. that are rated for use on 5 kV,
Application Description to four auxiliaries in one The main bus connections 250 MVA, 1200A, 60 kV BIL 7
Typical applications include vertical section. are 100% compatible with maximum systems. Main
not only new construction,
but also replacement In addition to the tremendous
standard 36-inch (914.4 mm) bus ratings of up to 2000A
are available.
7
wide vertical sections. As a
switchgear for installations floor space saving offered by result, add-ons to existing
previously equipped with the 26-inch (660.4 mm) wide installations can be simply and
The 26-inch (660.4 mm) wide 7
26-inch (660.4 mm) wide design, a savings in the VCP-W switchgear meets or
rapidly performed without
airbreak devices. This new height of the switchgear is costly system modifications
exceeds ANSI, NEMA and 7
line of switchgear has also also available. Where height IEEE design standards. UL
and transition sections.
and CSA listed switchgear is
proven very popular is an issue, such as an
outdoor powerhouse or in a also available.
7
among Generator Control
mobile power container, the
manufacturers where 5 kV,
250 MVA, 1200A applications standard 95-inch (2413 mm) 7
are commonplace. height can be reduced to an
80-inch (2032 mm) tall model 7
with a single-high breaker
with one auxiliary and/or 7
control cubical. In addition,
the low-profile structure is 7
designed to accommodate
Voltage Transformers that
are front mounted. Shallow- 7
depth versions are also
available for applications 7
where depth is an issue.
Contact your local Eaton 7
representative for more
information on special
dimensional requirements.
7
7
7

7
Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1)
7 Drawout Circuit Breaker Type
50 VCP-W 50 VCP-W 50 VCP-W 50 VCP-W 75 VCP-W
7 Rated Values 25 40 50 63 40
Maximum voltage (V) (kV rms) 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25
7 Power frequency (Hz) 1 60 60 60 60 60
7 Insulation level
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.) (kV rms) 19 19 19 19 36
7 Lightning impulse withstand voltage (1.2 x 50 ms) (kV peak) 60 60 60 60 95

Continuous current (A rms) 2 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
7 2000
3000
2000
3000
2000
3000
2000
3000
2000
3000
Short-circuit ratings (reference C37.04-1999 and C37.06-2009
7 except as noted 3)
Symmetrical interrupting circuit (l) (kA rms sym) 4 25 40 50 63 40
7 DC component (%DC) (%) 5 50 50 44 55 50
Asymmetrical interrupting current (lt) (kA rms asym total) 6 31 49 59 80 49
7 Closing and latching current (2.6 x l) (kA peak) 65 104 130 164 104
7 Short-time withstand current (rms) 7 25 40 50 63 40

Transient recovery voltage parameters are based on TD-4
Peak voltage (E2) = (uc) (kV peak) 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2 14
7 Time to peak (T2 = t3 x 1.137) (msec) 50 50 50 50 59
7 TRV rise time (t3) (msec) 44 44 44 44 52

RRRV = uc/t3 (kV/msec) 8 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.19 0.27
7 Interrupting time (ms, cycles (60 Hz)) 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3
Operating duty (duty cycle) O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO
7 Mechanical endurance (no-load operations) 9j 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
7 Capacitance current switching capability

(reference C47.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005)
Cable-charging current (class, A rms) C2, 3–10 C2, 3–10 C2, 3–10 C2, 7.5–25 C2, 7.5–25
7 Isolated shunt capacitor bank current (class, A rms) C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630
75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000
7 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600
Back-to-back capacitor switching
7 Capacitor bank current (class, A rms) C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630
75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000 75–1000
75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600 75–1600
7
Inrush current (kA peak) 6 6 6 6 6
7 Inrush frequency (kHz) 0.8

0.5
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.8
0.5
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
7 Out-of-phase switching
Voltage = 1.44 x V (kV rms) 7 7 7 7 12
7 Current = 0.25 x l (kA rms) 6.3 10 12.5 15.8 10
7 Notes
1 All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz, however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no 6 The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (It) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA
de-rating. rms asym total.
7 2 4000A fan cooled rating is available for 3000A circuit breakers. 7 Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both two seconds
3 These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000. for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and
7 4 Because the voltage range factor K=1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum
8
C37.06-2009.
RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E2/T2.
symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated symmetrical interrupting current.
5 Based on the standard DC TIME constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and 9 Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.
7 the minimum contact parting time as determined from the minimum opening time plus the j All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit
assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz). breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
7
7
7
7.2
Available Type VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breakers Rated on Symmetrical Current Basis, Per ANSI Standards (Rated K=1), continued
Drawout Circuit Breaker Type
7
Rated Values 50 25 40 50 63 7
Maximum voltage (V) (kV rms) 8.25 15 15 15 15
Power frequency (Hz) 1 60 60 60 60 60
7
Insulation level
Power frequency withstand voltage (1 min.) (kV rms) 36 36 36 36 36
7
Lightning impulse withstand voltage (1.2 x 50 ms) (kV peak) 95 95 95 95 95
7
Continuous current (A rms) 2 1200 1200 3 1200 1200 1200 3
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 3
3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3 7
Short-circuit ratings (reference C37.04-1999 and
C37.06-2009 except as noted 3) 7
Symmetrical interrupting circuit (l) (kA rms sym) 4 50 25 40 50 63
DC component (%DC) (%) 5 44 50 50 44 55 7
Asymmetrical interrupting current (lt) (kA rms asym total) 6 59 31 49 59 80
Closing and latching current (2.6 x l) (kA peak) 130 65 104 130 164 7
Short-time withstand current (rms) 7 50 25 40 50 63
Transient recovery voltage parameters are based on TD-4
7
Peak voltage (E2) = (uc) (kV peak) 14 28 3 25.7 25.7 28 3
25.7 7
Time to peak (T2 = t3 x 1.137) (msec) 59 75 75 75 75
TRV rise time (t3) (msec) 52 66 66 66 66
7
RRRV = uc/t3 (kV/msec) 8 0.27 0.42
0.39
0.39 0.39 0.42
7
Interrupting time (ms, cycles (60 Hz)) 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3 50, 3
Operating duty (duty cycle) O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO O-0.3s-CO-3m-CO
7
Mechanical endurance (no-load operations) 9j 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 7
Capacitance current switching capability
(reference C47.04a-2003, C37.06-2009 and C37.09a-2005)
Cable-charging current (class, A rms) C2, 7.5–25 C2, 7.5–25 C2, 7.5–25 C2, 7.5–25 C2, 7.5–25
7
Isolated shunt capacitor bank current (class, A rms) C2, 75–630
75–1000
C2, 75–630
C2, 75–1000
C2, 75–630
C2, 75–1000
C2, 75–630
C2, 75–1000
C2, 75–630
75–1000
7
75–1600 C1, 75–1000 C1, 75–1600 C1, 75–1600 75–1600
Back-to-back capacitor switching 7
Capacitor bank current (class, A rms) C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630 C2, 75–630
75–1000 C2, 75–1000 C2, 75–1000 C2, 75–1000 75–1000 7
75–1600 C1, 75–1000 C1, 75–1600 C1, 75–1600 75–1600
Inrush current (kA peak) 6 6 6 6 6 7
Inrush frequency (kHz) 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8 0.8
0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 7
0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3
Out-of-phase switching
Voltage = 1.44 x V (kV rms) 12 22 22 22 22
7
Current = 0.25 x l (kA rms) 12.5 6.3 10 12.5 15.8 7
Notes
1 All circuit breakers are tested at 60 Hz, however, they can also be applied at 50 Hz with no 6 The asymmetrical interrupting current, I total, is given by (It) = I x Sqrt (1 + 2 x %DC x %DC) kA 7
de-rating. rms asym total.
2 4000A fan cooled rating is available for 3000A circuit breakers.
3 These circuit breakers were tested to the preferred TRV ratings specified in C37.06-2000.
7 Duration of short-time current and maximum permissible tripping delay are both two seconds
for all circuit breakers listed in this table, as required in C37.04-1999, C37.06-2000 and
7
4 Because the voltage range factor K=1, the short-time withstand current and the maximum C37.06-2009.
symmetrical interrupting current are equal to the rated symmetrical interrupting current. 8
9
RRRV can also be calculated as = 1.137 x E2/T2. 7
5 Based on the standard DC time constant of 45 ms (corresponding to X/R of 17 for 60 Hz) and Each operation consists of one closing plus one opening.
the minimum contact parting time as determined from the minimum opening time plus the
assumed minimum relay time of 1/2 cycle (8.33 ms for 60 Hz).
j All 40 and 50 kA circuit breakers exceed required 5000 no-load operations; all 63 kA circuit
breakers exceed the required 2000 no-load ANSI operations.
7
7
7
7
Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards 12
7 Circuit Breaker Type
50 VCP-WND 50 VCP-W 50 VCP-W 50 VCP-W 75 VCP-W 150 VCP-W 150 VCP-W 150 VCP-W
7 250 250 350 63 500 500 750 1000
Identification
7 Nominal voltage class kV 4.16 4.16 4.16 4.16 7.2 13.8 13.8 13.8
7 Nominal three-phase MVA class 250 250 350 — 500 500 750 1000
Rated Values
7 Voltage
Rated maximum voltage V kV rms 4.76 4.76 4.76 4.76 8.25 15 15 15
7 Rated voltage range factor K 3 1.24 1.24 1.19 1.0 1.25 1.30 1.30 1.30
Insulation level—rated withstand test voltage
7 Normal frequency kV rms 19 19 19 19 36 36 36 36
1.2 x 50 μsec. impulse kV crest 60 60 60 60 95 95 95 95
7 Current
Rated continuous current at 60 Hz amp 4 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200
7 — 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
— 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000 3000
7 Rated short-circuit current (at rated maximum kV)—I kA rms 3 29 29 41 63 33 18 28 37
Rated transient recovery voltage
7 Rated crest voltage —E2 kV crest 8.9 8.9 8.9 8.9 15.5 28 28 28
Rated time to crest—T2 μs 50 50 50 50 60 75 75 75
7 Rate of rise of recovery voltage kV/μs 5 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.29 0.42 0.42 0.42
7 Rated interrupting time cycles 6 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Rated permissible tripping delay—Y sec. 7 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
7 Rated reclosing time ms 8 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300
Related Required Capabilities
7 Rated maximum voltage divided by K—V/K kV rms 3.85 3.85 4.0 4.76 6.6 11.5 11.5 11.5
Current values
7 K times rated short-circuit current 3
Maximum sym. interrupting capability—KI kA rms 36 36 49 63 41 23 36 48
7 Three-second short-time current carrying capability—KI kA rms 36 36 49 63 41 23 36 48
Closing and latching capability (momentary) 9
7 2.7K times rated short-circuit current—2.7 KI kA crest 97 97 132 170 111 62 97 130
1.6K times rated short-circuit current—1.6 KI kA rms asym. j 58 58 78 101 66 37 58 77
7 Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers (S) k 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.27 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
7 Notes
E
1 For capacitor switching, refer to Page V3-T7-13. 5 RRRV = 1.137 ------2
2 5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed. 27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed.
T2
7 3 For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an 6 Three-cycle rating available, refer to Page V3-T7-13.
operating voltage 7 Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of
7 Isc =
V
(Rated Short-Circuit Current)
current in accordance with the following formula:
2
7
Vo
But not to exceed KI.
T (seconds) = Y ( (K Times Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker )
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed
7 Isc = 1.15
V
(Rated Short-Circuit Current) 8
the time obtained from the above formula.
For reclosing service, there is No De-Rating necessary Eaton’s VCP-W family of circuit
Vo
breakers. R = 100%. Type VCP-W breaker can perform the O-C-O per ANSI C37.09; O-0.3s-
7 But not to exceed KI.
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with
CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO;
all with no derating. Contact Eaton for special reclosing requirements.
normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage. 9 For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Page V3-T7-13.
7 4 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous rating is j Included for reference only.
available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details. k Asymmetrical interrupting capability = “S” times symmetrical interrupting capability,
7 both at specified operating voltage.
7
7
7
7.2
Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards, continued 12
Circuit Breaker Type
7
63 750 1000 1250 40 7
Identification
Nominal voltage class kV 13.8 27 27 27 27
7
Nominal three-phase MVA class — — — — —
7
Rated Values
Voltage 7
Rated maximum voltage kV rms 15 27 27 27 27
Rated voltage range factor K 3 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 7
Normal frequency kV rms 36 60 60 60 60 7
1.2 x 50 μsec. impulse kV crest 95 125 125 125 125
Current 7
Rated continuous current at 60 Hz amp 4 1200 600 600 600 1200
2000 1200 1200 1200 2000 7
3000 2000 2000 2000 —
Rated short-circuit current (at rated maximum kV)—I kA rms 3 63 16 22 25 40 7
Rated transient recovery voltage
Rated crest voltage —E2 kV crest 28 51 51 51 51 7
Rated time to crest—T2 μs 75 105 105 105 105
Rate of rise of recovery voltage kV/μs 5 0.42 0.55 0.55 0.55 0.55
7
Rated interrupting time cycles 6 5 5 5 5 5
7
Rated permissible tripping delay—Y sec. 7 2 2 2 2 2
Rated reclosing time ms 8 300 300 300 300 300 7
Related Required Capabilities
Rated maximum voltage divided by K—V/K kV rms 15 27 27 27 27 7
Current values
K times rated short-circuit current 3 7
Maximum sym. interrupting capability—KI kA rms 63 16 22 25 40
Three-second short-time current carrying capability—KI kA rms 63 16 22 25 40 7
Closing and latching capability (momentary) 9
2.7K times rated short-circuit current—2.7 KI kA crest 170 43 60 68 108 7
1.6K times rated short-circuit current—1.6 KI kA rms asym. j 100 26 35 40 64
Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers (S) k 1.27 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 7
Notes
1 For capacitor switching, refer to Page V3-T7-13. 6
7
Three-cycle rating available, refer to Page V3-T7-13.
2 5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed. 27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed. 7 Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of
3 For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an current in accordance with the following formula: 7
operating voltage 2
Isc =
V
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker ) 7
Vo The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed
8
the time obtained from the above formula. 7
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage For reclosing service, there is No De-Rating necessary for Eaton’s VCP-W family of circuit
Isc = 1.15
V
CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO; 7
Vo
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with
9
j
For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Page V3-T7-13. 7
Included for reference only.
normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage. k Asymmetrical interrupting capability = “S” times symmetrical interrupting capability,
4 4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous rating is both at specified operating voltage. 7
available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details.
5
E
RRRV = 1.137 ------2
7
T2
7
7
7
Available VCP-W Vacuum Circuit Breaker Types Rated on Symmetrical Current Rating Basis, Per ANSI Standards, continued 12
7 16 21 25 32 40
Identification
7 Nominal voltage class kV 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5 34.5
7 Nominal three-phase MVA class — — — — —

Rated Values
7 Voltage
Rated maximum voltage kV rms 38 38 38 38 38
7 Rated voltage range factor K 3 1.0 1.65 1.0 1.0 1.0

7 Normal frequency kV rms 80 80 80 80 80
1.2 x 50 μsec. impulse kV crest l 170 l 170 l 170 l 170 l 170 l
7 Current
Rated continuous current at 60 Hz amp 4 600 1200 600 600 600
7 1200 2000 1200 1200 1200
1600 — 1600 1600 1600
7 2000 — 2000 2000 2000
— — — 2500 2500
7 Rated short-circuit current (at rated maximum kV)—I kA rms 3 16 21 25 31.5 40
7 Rated transient recovery voltage

Rated crest voltage —E2 kV crest 71 71 71 71 71
7 Rated time to crest—T2 μs 125 125 125 125 125
Rate of rise of recovery voltage kV/μs 5 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64 0.64
7 Rated interrupting time cycles 6 5 5 5 5 5
Rated permissible tripping delay—Y sec. 7 2 2 2 2 2
7 Rated reclosing time ms 8 300 300 300 300 m
7 Related Required Capabilities

Rated maximum voltage divided by K—V/K kV rms 38 23 38 38 38
7 Current values
K times rated short-circuit current 3
Maximum sym. interrupting capability—KI kA rms 16 35 25 31.5 40
7 Three-second short-time current carrying capability—KI kA rms 16 35 25 31.5 40
7 Closing and latching capability (momentary) 9

2.7K times rated short-circuit current—2.7 KI kA crest 43 95 68 85 108
7 1.6K times rated short-circuit current—1.6 KI kA rms asym. j 26 56 40 51 64

Asymmetry Factor for VCP-W Breakers (S) k 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2
7 Notes
1 For capacitor switching, refer to Page V3-T7-13. 6 Three-cycle rating available, refer to Page V3-T7-13.
7 2 5 and 15 kV circuit breakers are UL listed. 27 and 38 kV breakers are not UL listed. 7 Tripping may be delayed beyond the rated permissible tripping delay at lower values of
3 For three-phase and line-to-line faults, the symmetrical interrupting capability at an current in accordance with the following formula:
7 operating voltage
Short-Circuit Current Through Breaker )
2
V
Isc = (Rated Short-Circuit Current)
Vo
7 But not to exceed KI.
The aggregate tripping delay on all operations within any 30-minute period must not exceed
the time obtained from the above formula.
Single line-to-ground fault capability at an operating voltage 8 For reclosing service, there is No De-Rating necessary for Eaton’s VCP-W family of circuit
7 V
Isc = 1.15 (Rated Short-Circuit Current) CO-15s-CO per IEC 56; and some VCP-Ws have performed O-0.3s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO-15s-CO;
Vo
7 But not to exceed KI. 9 For higher close and latch ratings, refer to Page V3-T7-13.
The above apply on predominately inductive or resistive three-phase circuits with j Included for reference only.
7 4
normal-frequency line-to-line recovery voltage equal to the operating voltage.
4000A continuous rating is available for 5/15 kV. 3000A continuous rating is
k Asymmetrical interrupting capability = “S” times symmetrical interrupting capability,
both at specified operating voltage.
available for 38 kV. Contact Eaton for details. l
7 E2 m
ANSI standard requires 150 kV BIL. All 38 kV ratings are tested to 170 kV BIL.
Type 380 VCP-2 40 circuit breaker is not rated for rapid reclosing.
5 RRRV = 1.137 ------
T2
7
7
7.2
Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis)
7
50 VCP-W 25C 50 VCP-W 40C 50 VCP-W 50C 50 VCP-W 63C 75 VCP-W 50C
Rated Values
7
Voltage
Maximum voltage V kV rms 5.95 5.95 5.95 5.95 10.3
7
Voltage range factor K 1 1 1 1 1
7
Insulation level—withstand test
Power frequency (1 min.) kA rms total 24 24 24 24 42
7
Lighting impulse 1.2 x 50 μs kV peak 75 75 75 75 95
Continuous current at 60 Hz A rms 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 7
2000 2000 2000 2000 2000
3000 4 3000 4 3000 4 3000 4 3000 4 7
Short-circuit current
Sym. interrupting at voltage (Isc) kA rms total 25 40 50 63 50 7
% DC component (Idc) 50 75 57 62 57
75 — 57 — 57
7
75 — 52 — 52
7
Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms 31 58 64 83 64
36 — 64 — 64 7
36 — 62 — 62
Closing and latching capability kA peak 97 139 139 175 139 7
Short-time current for 3 seconds kA rms 1 25 40 50 63 50
Interrupting time ms 2 50 50 50 50 50
7
Maximum permissible tripping delay sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
7
Rate of rise of recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs 3 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 0.9
0.9 0.9 0.9 — 0.9 7
0.8 0.8 0.8 — 0.8
Capacitor switching ratings 7
General purpose—isolated shunt capacitor bank current A rms 400 and 630 630 5 630 5 250 630 5
1000 5 1000 5 1000 5 — 1000 5 7
250 250 250 — 250
Definite purpose—back-to-back capacitor switching
7
Capacitor bank current A rms 400 and 630 630 6 630 6 200, 1600 7 630 6
1000 6 1000 6 1000 6 200, 1600 7 1000 6
7
— — — 200, 1600 7 —
7
Inrush current kA peak 20 and 20 15 15 7.7 15
18 18 18 7.7 18 7
— — — 7.7 —
Inrush frequency kHz 6.5 and 5.5 3.5 3.5 465 3.5 7
2.7 2.7 2.7 465 2.7
— — — 465 —
7
Mechanical Endurance—No-Load Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
7
10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 7
Notes
1 Except as noted. 6 Breaker tested to 1270A back-to-back switching for momentary load
7
2 Three cycles. (thermal de-rating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).
3 Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information. 7 C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV. 7
4 4000A FC rating available.
38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
5 Breaker tested to 2700A single bank switching for momentary load
(thermal de-rating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).

7
7
7
Extra Capability Type VCP-WC Ratings (Symmetrical Current Basis), continued

150 VCP-W 25C 150 VCP-W 40C 150 VCP-W 50C 150 VCP-W 63C 270 VCP-W 25C
7 Rated Values
7 Voltage
Maximum voltage V kV rms 17.5 17.5 17.5 15 27
7 Voltage range factor K 1 1 1 1 1

Power frequency (1 min.) kA rms total 42 42 42 42 60
7 Lighting impulse 1.2 x 50 μs kV peak 95 96 95 95 125
7 Continuous current at 60 Hz A rms 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200

2000 2000 2000 2000 1600
7 3000 4 3000 4 3000 4 3000 4 —
7 Sym. interrupting at voltage (Isc) kA rms total 25 40 50 63 25
% DC component (Idc) 50 75 57 62 75
7 75 — 57 — —
75 — 52 — —
7 Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms 31 58 64 83 36
36 — 64 — —
7 36 — 62 — —
7 Closing and latching capability kA peak 97 5 139 139 175 85

Short-time current for 3 seconds kA rms 1 25 40 50 63 25 6
7 Interrupting time ms 2 50 50 50 50 50
Maximum permissible tripping delay sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
7 Rate of rise of recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs 3 0.9 0.9 0.9 1.1 1.1
0.9 0.9 0.9 — —
7 0.8 0.8 0.8 — —
7 Capacitor switching ratings

General purpose—isolated shunt capacitor bank current A rms 400A and 630 7 630 78 630 78 250 400
1000 78 1000 78 1000 78 — —
7 250 7 250 7 250 7 — —
7 Definite purpose—back-to-back capacitor switching

Capacitor bank current A rms 400 and 600 7 630 79 630 79 200, 1600 j 400
7 1000 79 1000 79 1000 79 200, 1600 j —

— — — 200, 1600 j —
7 Inrush current kA peak 20 and 20 15 15 7.7 20
18 18 18 7.7 —
7 — — — 7.7 —
Inrush frequency kHz 6.5 and 5.5 3.5 3.5 465 4.2
7 2.7 2.7 2.7 465 —
7 — — — 465 —
Mechanical Endurance—No-Load Operations 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 5000
7 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000 —

5000 5000 5000 5000 —
7 Notes
1 Except as noted. 7 Capacitor switching ratings are proven at 15 kV. For sealed interrupters at high altitudes,
7 2 Three cycles.
8
switching voltage is not de-rated.
3 Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for more information. Breaker tested to 2700A single bank switching for momentary load
(thermal de-rating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).
7 4 4000A FC rating available.
5 Close and latch current for 1200A Type 150 VCP-W 25C is proven at 15 kV. 9 Breaker tested to 1270A back-to-back switching for momentary load
For sealed interrupters at high altitudes, switching voltage is not de-rated. (thermal de-rating must consider harmonic content of current waveform).
7 6 2.5 seconds. j C37.04.a-2003 Class C2 at 15 kV.
38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are not rated for rapid reclosing.
7
7
7.2
7
270 VCP-W 32C 270 VCP-W 40C 380 VCP-W 16C 380 VCP-W 25C 380 VCP-W 32C 380 VCP-W 40C
Rated Values
7
Voltage
Maximum voltage V kV rms 27 27 38 38 38 38
7
Voltage range factor K 1 1 1 1 1 1
7
Power frequency (1 min.) kA rms total 60 60 80 80 80 80
7
Lighting impulse 1.2 x 50 μs kV peak 125 125 170 170 170 170
Continuous current at 60 Hz A rms 1200 1200 600 600 600 1200 7
1600 1600 1200 1200 1200 2000
— — 1600 1600 1600 2500 7
— — 2000 2000 2000 3000FC 4
— — — — 2500 —
7
— — — — 3000FC 5 —
7
Sym. interrupting at voltage (Isc) kA rms total 31.5 40 16 25 33.1 40
7
% DC component (Idc) 55 50 75 65 57 63
Asym. interrupting (It) kA rms 40 49 23.3 34.0 42.5 53.5 7
Closing and latching capability kA peak 100 112 50 75 91 107
Short-time current for 3 seconds kA rms 1 31.5 f 40 g 16 25 31.5 8 40 7
Interrupting time rms 2 50 50 50 50 50 50
Maximum permissible tripping delay sec. 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
7
Rate of rise of recovery voltage (RRRV) kV/μs 3 1.1 1.1 0.7 0.7 0.7 0.7
7
— — 0.7 0.7 0.7 —
— — 1.3 1.3 0.7 — 7
— — — — 1.3 —
— — — — 0.7 — 7
— — — — 1.3 —
7
Notes
1 Except as noted.
2 Three cycles.
7
3 Contact Eaton for higher RRRV or for
more information. 7
4 2500A FC to 3000A.
5 2000A FC to 3000A.
f 1.6 seconds.
7
g 1 second.
8 2.5 seconds. 7
38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are
not rated for rapid reclosing. 7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

270 VCP-W 32C 270 VCP-W 40C 380 VCP-W 16C 380 VCP-W 25C 380 VCP-W 32C 380 VCP-W 40C
7 Rated Values, continued
7 Capacitor switching ratings

General purpose—isolated shunt capacitor bank current A rms 400 400 250 250 250 —
7 — — 250 250 250 —

— — 250 250 250 —
7 — — 250 and 1000 250 and 1000 250 and 1000 —
— — — — — —
7 — — — — 250 and 1000 —
Definite purpose—back-to-back capacitor switching
7 Capacitor bank current A rms 400 400 250 250 250 —
— — 250 250 250 —
7 — — 250 250 250 —
7 — — 250 and 1000 250 and 1000 250 and 1000 —

— — — — — —
7 — — — — 250 and 1000 —
Inrush current kA peak 20 20 20 20 20 —
7 — — 20 20 20 —
— — 20 and 20 20 and 20 20 and 20 —
7 — — — — — —
7 — — — — 20 and 20 —
Inrush frequency kHz 4.2 4.2 4.4 4.4 4.4 —
7 — — 4.4 4.4 4.4 —
— — 4.4 4.4 4.4 —
7 — — 5 and 5 5 and 5 5 and 5 —
7 — — — — — —
— — — — 5 and 5 —
7 Mechanical Endurance—No-Load Operations 5000 5000 10,000 10,000 10,000 10,000
Note
7 38 kV, 2500A and 3000A WC breakers are
not rated for rapid reclosing.
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
High Resistance Grounding System
7.3
C-HRG Free-Standing NEMA 1 Unit Contents
Description Page
7
High Resistance Grounding System 7
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-20
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-21
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-25
7
7
7
7
7
7
Where continuity of service is This member of Eaton’s MV
4200V (Maximum) 4200V (Maximum)
a high priority, high resistance metal-clad switchgear family Delta Systems Wye Systems 7
grounding can add the safety has actually been around To add high resistance To add high resistance
of a grounded system while for many years. The free- grounding to an ungrounded grounding to a wye- 7
minimizing the risk of service standing C-HRG provides delta-connected system, connected system, resistors
interruptions due to grounds. a standalone unit that a neutral point must be are placed across the 7
The concept is a simple one: can be added to existing created. Three single- secondary of a grounding
phase transformers can be transformer whose primary
provide a path for ground
current via a grounding
installations. The C-HRG is
used to protect an electrical interconnected in a wye- is placed in series with the
7
transformer (with adjustable distribution system from broken delta configuration neutral-to-ground connection
resistance across its damaging transient to provide such a neutral of the power source. The 7
secondary) that limits the overvoltages caused by point. The transformers resistors are chosen to limit
current magnitude and a ground faults. It also provides and grounding resistors are the current to a maximum 7
monitor to determine when a means to locate the ground chosen to limit the ground value of 6A.
an abnormal condition exists. fault, therefore extending the current to a maximum value
of 6A. Note: Per 1993 NEC® 250.5b, 7
life of the distribution system. exception No. 5, line-to-neutral
The ground current path is
provided at the point where Ratings and Configurations Note: The neutral point may not loads may not be connected to
a system in which the neutral
7
the service begins, by placing be used to serve phase-to-neutral
The C-HRG MV is offered is resistance grounded. Also, if
a predominantly resistive at the 5 kV class rating. It
loads. Also, this technique may
be applied on wye-connected the system has two switchable 7
impedance in the connection can be applied to delta or sources when the neutral point is sources not permanently
from system neutral to
ground. Control equipment
wye ungrouped three-wire not conveniently accessible from connected to the bus, two
wye-type grounding systems
7
distribution systems. the service entrance location.
continuously measures This method is shown in the are required as shown on
ground current; a relay detects illustration shown on Page V3-T7- Page V3-T7-23. 7
when the current exceeds a 23. One delta high resistance
predetermined level. An alarm grounding would ground the 5 kV 7
alerts building personnel that a system.
ground exists. The system 7
has built-in fault tracing means
to assist in finding the source
of the ground. A 120 Vac
7
supply (remote) is required for
control power for the system. 7
7
7
7
7
Ground Current Detection Indication and Alarm Circuits Test Circuit Locating a Ground Fault
7 Any time a system is When a fault is detected, A test circuit is provided to The current pulses can be
energized, a small ground an adjustable time delay is allow the user to quickly noted with a clamp-on
7 current called the “capacitive provided to override determine that the system ammeter when the ammeter
charging current” will be transients. When the time is working properly. The test is placed around the cables or
7 observed. For medium delay has been exceeded, circuit will operate only under conduit feeding the fault. The
voltage (4200V and below) the green “normal” light will normal conditions—it will not operator tests each conduit or
7 systems, this naturally
occurring current is typically
turn off, the red “ground
fault” light will turn on, and
allow testing if the system is
sensing a fault. The test
set of cables until the pulsing
current is noted. By moving
3A or less. the ground alarm contacts operation does not simulate the ammeter along the
7 will transfer. If equipped an actual system ground conduit, or checking the
When one phase becomes with the optional alarm horn, fault. It does, however, test conduit periodically along its
7 grounded, additional current it will sound. the complete controls of the length, the fault can be traced
above the charging level will fault indication and pulsing to its origin. The fault may be
flow. As all ground current The grounding transformer
7 must flow through the secondary breaker must be
circuitry. The system then located at the point where
reacts as it would under the pulsing current drops off
grounding resistor/grounding closed for the system to be actual system ground or stops.
7 transformer assembly, an operational. Should this conditions —lights transfer,
ammeter in this circuit will breaker be opened at any alarm contacts transfer and If little or no change in the
7 read the total amount of time, the system will signal the (optional) horn sounds. pulsing current is noted along
ground current. By placing a ground fault condition as a the entire length of a conduit,
7 a current-sensing relay in
series with the ammeter, the
fail-safe feature. The breaker
must be closed to clear the
Pulser Circuit then the fault may be in the
connected load. If the load is
The pulser circuit offers a
current relay can be adjusted alarm signal. a panelboard, distribution
7 to pick up at a level in excess
convenient means to locate
the faulted feeder and trace switchboard or motor control
of the capacitive charging When the fault is cleared, center, repeat the process of
the fault to its origin. The
7 current, thus indicating the the current/voltage relay will
reset. If the reset control is pulser is available any time checking all outgoing cable
abnormal condition. a fault has been detected. groups and conduits to find
set on “auto,” the lights will
7 Alternatively, an optional return to “normal” on, The pulse intervals are the faulted feeder. If the fault
controlled by an adjustable is not found in an outgoing
voltmeter-relay can be “ground fault” off, and the feeder, the fault may be
7 connected across the ground alarm contacts will recycle timer. The “pulse”
internal to that equipment.
grounding resistors. The re-transfer. If the reset light flashes on and off,
7 voltage across the resistors control is set on “manual,” corresponding to the
on-off cycles of the pulser
Note: It may not be possible to
precisely locate faults within a
is proportional to the amount the lights and relay contacts
contactor. The pulser conduit. The ground current may
7 of ground current. The
voltmeter-relay’s pickup
will remain latched until the
operator turns the reset contactor switches a bank divide into many components,
of resistors on and off, depending on the number of
adjustment is set above the control to “reset.” The lights
7 capacitive charging current, and ground alarm contacts thus allowing a momentary cables per phase, number of
conduits per feeder, and the
to the desired detection level. will then return to normal. increase in the ground current
number and resistance of each
7 In both current and voltage
The system can be reset only (approximately a 4A current ground point along the conduits.
if the fault has been cleared. pulse above the ground The resulting currents may be too
detection methods, the current).
7 ground current ammeter During a fault, the optional
small to allow detection or may
take a path that the ammeter
provides a direct reading of alarm horn can be silenced at cannot trace. An important note
7 the total actual ground any time by using the “alarm to keep in mind is that while the
current present in the system silence” pushbutton. It will pulser can greatly aid in locating
7 at that time. It will be helpful not re-sound until either the a fault, there may be certain
conditions under which the
to periodically note the system is reset, or the re-
pulses cannot be readily traced,
7 ammeter’s reading: a trend
toward higher values may
alarm timer expires. The re-
alarm timer is activated by
and other test procedures
(megohm, high-potential, etc.)
indicate the need for the “alarm silence” control. If
7 equipment maintenance, and the horn has been silenced
may be needed.
hence reduce the occurrence but the fault has not been
7 of unplanned shutdowns. cleared, the timer will run.
It has a range of 2–48 hours.
7 When the timer times out,
the horn will re-sound,
alerting maintenance
7 personnel that the fault
has not been cleared.
7
7
7
7
7.3
Sequence of Operations
7
Normal Test Ground Fault
● Green “normal” light on Turn and hold the system When the sensing circuit 7
● Red “ground fault” light off control switch in the “test” detects a fault, the green
● White “pulse” light off position. This mode will test “normal” light will turn off 7
the control circuitry only. and the red “ground fault”
● System control switch in It will bypass the sensing light will turn on. The ground
“normal” position circuit and cause the green current ammeter will indicate
7
● Reset control switch in “normal” light to turn off and the total ground current.
either “auto” or “manual” the red “ground fault” light To use the pulser, turn the 7
to turn on. The pulser will be system control switch to
activated as well. The white “pulse.” The pulser contactor 7
“pulse” light will turn on and will cycle on and off as
off as the pulser contactor controlled by the recycle 7
closes and opens. However, timer relay. Use the clamp-on
the ground current ammeter ammeter to locate the faulted
will not display the total feeder. Open the feeder and
7
ground current, including the clear the fault. If the reset
incremental pulse current. control switch is in the 7
When ready, return the “manual” position, turn it to
system control switch to “reset” to reset the sensing 7
“normal.” The pulser will circuit. (If reset control is in
stop. If the reset control is in
the “manual” position, turn it
“auto,” it will reset itself.)
When ready to restore service
7
to “reset” to reset the fault to the load, close the feeder.
sensing circuit. The red Return the system control 7
“ground fault” light will turn to “normal.”
off, and the green “normal” 7
light will turn on. Test mode
is not available if the system 7
is detecting a ground. The
sensing circuit will disable 7
the test circuit.
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Features, Benefits and Functions Standards and

7 When a ground fault occurs When the ground current Certifications
on an ungrounded system, exceeds a predetermined level, The system shall be
7 high transient voltages can the built-in alarm relay alerts completely assembled, wired
occur, which may cause more building personnel that a and tested at the factory in
7 frequent equipment failures ground fault exists. In accordance with NEMA and
than if the equipment were addition, the C-HRG MV UL requirements. A certified
7 grounded. These transient “safe ground” system has production test report shall be
overvoltages, as high as four a built-in fault pulsing as a shipped with the unit.
times the normal voltage, means to assist in finding the
7 reduce the life of the system’s source of the ground fault
insulation resulting in: without interrupting service.
7 ● Motor failure ● Current sensing
7 ● Transformer failure ground fault detection
(2–10A pickup/
● Coil failure
0.5–20 second delay)
7 ● Electronic equipment ● Ground current
failure
transformer (10/10 ratio)
7 ● Cable insulation failure ● Control circuit pull
By using a high resistance fuseblock
7 ground system, many ● Ground current ammeter
facilities can gain the benefit (0–10A, 1% accuracy)
7 of a grounded system ● Indicating lights:
without impairing the ● Red (ground fault)
7 continuity of service to their
equipment. The concept ● Green (normal)
behind high resistance ● White (pulse)
7 grounding is to provide a path ● Adjustable pulsing timer
for the ground current to flow (0–10 seconds)
7 while limiting its magnitude ● Tapped resistors
by using a resistor. The (limits primary current
7 ground current path is to 3–6A)
provided at the point where
● Three-position selector
7 service begins. Control
equipment continuously switch (normal, pulse, test)
monitors the magnitude ● Control switch for manual
7 of the ground current. or automatic reset
● Ground fault contacts
7 (1NO/1NC)
● Shorting terminal block
7 for ground current CT
● UL label
7 ● Wiremarkers
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7.3
A C-HRG High Resistance Grounding Assembly can be completely described by an 8-digit catalog number: MVRG-_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
7
7
High Resistance Grounding Systems
7
MVRG F X D D N L T S
7
Enclosure Type Wiremarkers
Free-standing enclosure for mounting Marks all internal wiring for ease 7
grounding transformer and resistors of maintenance.
internally.
F = Free-standing NEMA 1
Fault Sensing S = Standard wrap-on
T = Tube/heat shrink type
7
Current sensing
R = Free-standing NEMA 3R outdoor Voltage sensing
Voltage sensing Indicating Lamps 7
Service Voltage C = Overcurrent relay Standard lights are industrial, oil-tight,
W = 4200V, 60 Hz V = Single set point voltmeter relay
D = Indicating voltmeter only
transformer type. Optional are the same 7
X = 2400V, 60 Hz type lights except with a push-to-test
Y = 3300V, 60 Hz feature.
Audible Alarm T = Transformer type incandescent lamps
7
System Neutral Point Alarm contacts are standard X = Push-to-test transformer type
Choose wye when the neutral point of on all assemblies. 7
the power source is accessible for direct N = No audible alarm Loss of Control
connection to grounding transformer.
Choose delta when there is no neutral or
L = Alarm horn with
re-alarm timer
Power Alarm
A relay is connected across
7
when neutral is not accessible. the customer’s 120 Vac
W = Wye supply. 7
D = D (wye broken delta N = No relay
grounding transformer) L = Alarm relay with
1NO and 1NC
7
Example: MVRG-FWWCLLTS defines a free-standing NEMA 1 enclosure, 4200V/60 Hz, wye-connected system,
7
current-sensing control scheme, alarm horn with re-alarm timer, alarm relay with 1NO and 1NC, transformer type
incandescent lights, wrap-on wiremarkers. 7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7

7
General System Ratings and Features
7 Provide a high resistance ● Top and bottom cable Provide a UL-labeled high- ● Tapped resistors
grounding system as a means entry areas resistance grounding system (across neutral forming
7 to provide a path
for ground current via a
● Phase and neutral equal to Eaton catalog
number _________ for use on
transformer secondary,
limiting primary current
terminals accept #4 AWG
resistance that limits the a system with a short-circuit to 3–6A)
7 current magnitude. While
to 500 kcmil
capacity of __kA at ____ volts. ● Three-position selector
● Ground terminal accepts
monitoring the ground The structure shall be a [free- switch (normal, pulse, test)
7 current, the system must be
wire sizes from #4 AWG
to 500 kcmil. Ground bus is standing NEMA 1] [free- ● Indicating lights:
able to determine when an 1/4-inch (6.35 mm) x 2-inch standing NEMA 3R]. The Red (ground fault)
7 abnormal condition exists. (50.8 mm) copper system neutral point shall Green (normal)
Once the abnormality is be provided by [the power White (pulse)
● The powder paint is applied
7 detected, the system shall
alert building personnel that to the parts
transformer’s wye neutral
point] [wye-broken delta Components and
a ground exists. The system electrostatically. Metal grounding transformers].
7 surfaces are prepared by Connections
shall be suitable for 5000V The ground current shall be
spray cleaning and Phase and neutral terminals
maximum service, and detected with [an overcurrent
shall accept #4 AWG to 500
7 designed and tested for that phosphatizing. The powder
paint is a polyester
relay] [a single set point
kcmil wire. Ground terminals
voltage class in accordance voltmeter relay]. [An alarm
urethane. The standard shall accept wire sizes from
7 with the latest standards of
color is ANSI 61, light gray.
horn with re-alarm timer is
#8 AWG to 500 kcmil. Ground
NEMA and UL. required.] [An alarm to
The paint is applied to a bus shall be 1/4-inch (6.35 mm)
indicate the loss of control
7 ● Tapped resistors supply thickness of 1.5 mil power is required.] The
x 2-inch (50.8 mm) copper.
primary ground current ● Appropriate current limit #4 AWG wire shall be used for
indicating lights shall
7 between 3 and 6A in drawout type fuses are be [transformer-type
all internal connections from
the neutral point to ground.
1A increments provided. The chassis is incandescent lamps] [push-to-
Control connections shall be
7 ● Pulse current is an mechanically interlocked test transformer type lamps].
a minimum of #14 gauge. All
additional 4A. (pulse with a secondary circuit Control wiring shall be
currents of a lower breaker to prevent its control wire insulation shall
7 magnitude may be difficult withdrawal under
marked using [wrap-on type]
[heat-shrink sleeve type]
be type SIS. All control wiring
to detect) load conditions shall be labeled at each end.
wiremarkers. [A portable
7 ● Pulse timer is adjustable ● Resistors are grid type to clamp on detector with 1/2/5/
Wiring within the resistor
assembly shall be rated for
from 3 to 60 pulses provide the maximum area 10/20A scales, a shorting
7 per minute for heat dissipation switch and a storage case is
200°C service.
● Time delay for current ● No. 4 AWG wire is used for required]. Structure
7 sensing relay is 0.5 to internal connections from In addition to the components The unit shall be free-
20 seconds with a 2 to the neutral point to ground. specified, the following shall standing and house the
7 10A pickup. Time delay Control connections are a be supplied with each resistor bank within an
for voltage sensing relay is minimum of #14 gauge. system: isolated section of the
7 1 to 60 seconds All control wires insulation
is type SIS ● Ground current
structure. Access to the
● “Pull-type” fuse resistor shall be via a bolted-
disconnects are supplied Recommended spare transformer (10/10 ratio) on cover. The rear cover shall
7 for control equipment
●
parts list ● Control circuit disconnect be removable. The structure

protection ● Steel pocket on the inside switch (fused) shall provide top and bottom
7 ● All exterior nameplates are of the door is provided to ● Ground current ammeter cable entry points. Lifting
fastened with stainless hold drawings and manuals (0–10A, 1% accuracy) angles shall be provided to
7 steel screws ● Control switch for manual
facilitate the installation of the
Note: The C-HRG units can unit. The structure shall be
● Nameplates are 2-ply be applied on any three-wire or automatic reset
7 with 3/16-inch (4.8 mm) distribution system, regardless ● Ground fault contacts
suitable for moving on rollers
and shall be skidded for
lettering. The nameplate of the manufacturer of the (1NO/1NC) for shipment in a manner
7 size is 1-inch (25.4 mm) distribution equipment or
source power transformer.
customer use suitable for handling by
x 2-1/2-inch (63.5 mm). ● Shorting terminal block a forklift.
7 White background with
black lettering is standard
for ground current CT
All steel parts (except for
● Adjustable pulsing timer
plated parts) shall be
7 (0–10 seconds)
thoroughly cleaned and
phosphatized prior to the
7 application of the light gray
ANSI No. 61 finish. A pocket
7 is required on the inside of
the control compartment
7 door to store drawings
and manuals.
7
7.3
Wiring Diagram
7
HRG—High Resistance Grounding System 7
Wye HRG
7
51N
7
7
59
7
7
Utility
Delta HRG 7
59
7
Wye HRG 7
Generator
7
59
Bus Bus
7
Duct Duct 51
51N
7
7
5 kV Switchgear 7
7
7
Conduit
Cable
Bus
Duct
7
7
To MCC To Power
Circuit
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
Circuit Diagrams
7
Ungrounded Wye System (with standard current and Ungrounded Delta System (with standard current and
7 optional voltage relay fault detectors) optional voltage relay fault detectors)
H3 X3 X0 H3 X3
7 H1
X1 H1
X1
H2 X2 H2 X2
7 Ungrounded To
Ungrounded
To
Wye Distribution Delta Distribution
7 Circuits Circuits
X0
7
5 kV - CLE
7 Fuses 5 kV - CLE
Fuses
7
[1]
Control
Mechanical
Mechanical
7 Power
Interlock
Interlock
Transformer
3-Auxiliary
7 Control
Power
7 Secondary
Secondary
Transformers
Circuit Short
B B B Circuit B Short-Circuit
7 Breaker Circuit
T.B. Breaker T.B.
Option
CT 10/10A
CT 10/10A
7 59 59
7 C
4
C
4
3A 3A
7
Grounding Resistor
Grounding Resistor
4A 4A AM
AM
Pulsing Resistor
Pulsing Contactor
Pulsing Contactor
Pulsing Resistor
5A 5A
7 6A 6A
7 5IN 5IN
7 Ground Ground
Current Current
7 Adjustment Adjustment
Optional
Optional
Detector
Detector
Voltage
Voltage
T.B. T.B.
7 Current
Detector
Current
Detector
7 20A 20A
7 To
Remote Control
Fuses
120V
To
Remote Control Fuses
120V
Alarm Circuit 60 Hz Alarm Circuit 60 Hz
20A 20A
7 Supply Supply
7 Optional Optional
7 G R W G R W
Normal Alarm Pulsing Audible Normal Alarm Pulsing Audible

7 Alarm Alarm
7
7
7
7
7.3
Dimensions
7
7
NEMA 1 Free-Standing
36.00
7
(914.4)
7
7
7
7
40.00
Vent
(1016) 7
3.50
7
(88.9)
7
Primary Conduit
Entrance
7
3.62
2.00 (50.8) Diameter (91.9)
8.50 Knockout 7
(215.9) for Secondary
Conduit Entrance
7
1.50
(38.1)
3.76 3.25
7
(95.6) (82.6)
7
Plan View
92.00
(2336.8)
7
0.81
(20.6) 7
0.81
0.562 (14.3) Diameter (4)
(20.6)
7
7
2.75
(69.9)
2.75
(69.9)
7
7
7.12
(180.9) 7
3.75
(95.3) 7
3.50 Primary Conduit
(88.9) Conduit Entrance 7
3.75
1.75
(44.5)
(95.3) 7
36.00
(914.4) 2.75
9.38 (69.9) 7
Front View
3.75 (238.3)
(95.3) 7
3.00
(76.2)
Secondary Conduit
Entrance
7
2.75
(69.9)
Floor Plan
7
7
Network Protectors
8.1 Drawout Air Circuit Breaker Design

CM52 Network Protector
Network Protectors—CM52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2
8
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2 8
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2
Features, Benefits and Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2 8
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T8-3
V3-T8-3
8
8.2 Network Relay 8
Network Relay—MPCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4
8
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4 8
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4
8
8.3 Network Protector Aftermarket
Network Protector Rebuild and Parts Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5 8
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8
V3-T8-5
Rebuild Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5
Quick Ship . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5 8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8.1 Network Protectors
Drawout Air Circuit Breaker Design
Contents
8 CM52 Network Protector
Description Page
8 Network Protectors—CM52
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-3
8 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-3
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8 Network Protectors—CM52
8 Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
Network protectors are Network protectors are Eaton’s Type CM52 is or submersible enclosures,
8 special self-contained air mainly used by utilities designed for improved safety, completely cover the
power breaker units having around the world. They are higher quality, ease of needs of the network
8 a full complement of current,
potential and control
configured in either a spot
or grid network. Most
maintenance and inventory
reduction.
protector industry
● Deadfront 4-position
8 transformers, as well as
relay functions to protect the
installations of network
protectors are in under-
drawout breaker helps
protect the user from
integrity of the low voltage ground vaults and require accidental contact with live
8 network bus. The network a submersible enclosure. circuits and makes
protector can be in NEMA® Commercial applications maintenance and
8 housing, submersible
housing, or suitable for
also exist for customers that
require highly reliable, stable
troubleshooting easier
8 mounting within a low

voltage switchgear assembly.
power. These applications
typically use a NEMA
Several network protector enclosure and are configured
8 models exist including the in a spot network. Some
CM52, CMD and CM-22. examples of commercial
8 The most recent model, the users are government
CM52 network protector, is buildings, hospitals,
8 highlighted in the following
paragraphs.
universities and industrial
plants.
CM52—Highlight of Relay Module
8 ● Standardized breaker
Deadfront, Drawout Breaker
elements throughout
8 entire electrical ratings ● More diagnostics through
allow for the use of the Indicating Diagnostic
8 common parts and
accessories
Module (IDM)
8 ● Smaller breaker element is

less than half the weight of
8 ●
existing network designs
The CM52 is the first
8 network protector to pass
10 kV BIL, giving an
additional measure of
8 safety and performance
● Ratings of 800–6200A,
8 216–600V, internal or
external fuses and NEMA Indicating Diagnostic Module (IDM)
8
Network Protectors
Drawout Air Circuit Breaker Design
8.1
● Front-mounted test points Options This device is internal to the energized bus work while
give easy access and quick Network Protector and can be the door is still closed to the 8
test cable connection Arc Flash remotely activated usually “test” position either through
● Color-coded Teflon® wiring through a switch mounted at an external pendant or 8
for easier troubleshooting the vault entrance or through through communications.
communications. This will
enable the “ARMS” device
8
on all CM52s in a spot
network. Once activated, 8
the NPARMs places the
protectors in a sensitive 8
mode, sensing both forward
and reverse current 8
directions. This device will
actuate in 3–4 ms and call for
all CM52 breakers to trip if a
8
fault is sensed on an adjacent Remote Racking System
Color-Coded Wiring
network protector or collector 8
● The CM52 breakers are all bus. It has been shown that Standards and Certifications
wired the same regardless this device limits the total ● Meets or exceeds the 8
of system voltage (216V, incident energy to less than standards in IEEE®
480V and 600V) 8 cal/cm2. C57.12.44 8
● 3NO and 3NC dry contacts ● The CM52 Network
are standard as spare VaultGard™ Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System™ Indicating
Remote Racking System
The CM52 Network Protector
Protector is UL labeled and
approved in the NEMA
8
Diagnostic Module
The CM52 Network Protector
is also available with an
integral remote racking
housing at all ratings
8
is available with the NPARMs system. The system remotely
module (Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System).
racks the breaker off the 8
8
8
CM52 Ratings Comparison Table—Ratings Tested at 600V
8
Continuous Current Breaker Element CM52 Interrupting CM52 Close and IEEE/ANSI Interrupting IEEE/ANSI 1 Close and
Rating (Amperes) Width in Inches (mm) Rating (kA) Latch Rating (kA) Rating (kA) Latch Rating (kA)
8
800 17.00 (431.8) 42 35 30 25
1200 17.00 (431.8) 42 35 30 25 8
1600/1875 17.00 (431.8) 42 35 30 25
2000 17.00 (431.8) 42 35 35 35 8
8
2500/2825 22.00 (558.8) 65 45 60 40
3000 22.00 (558.8) 65 45 60 40
3500 35.00 (889.0) 85 65 60 40
8
4500 35.00 (889.0) 85 65 60 40
6200 2 35.00 (889.0) 85 65 Product not defined Product not defined 8
Notes
1 Close and latch ratings apply only to spring close and stored energy mechanisms. The CM22 does not have a close and latch rating. 8
2 Open frame only, tested at 500V.
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8.2 Network Protectors
Network Relay
Contents
8 MPCV Communications Relay
Description
8 Network Relay—MPCV
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8 Network Relay—MPCV
8 Product Description Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions
8 Type MPCV Network Protector

Communications Relays for
Factory or Field Installation Communications Capability
Eaton can factory mount Each MPCV relay has the ● Through auxiliary inputs on
216V and 480V Systems
8 ● Eaton’s programmable
MPCV relays on new network
protectors...or personnel can
capability of communicating
information and allowing
the MPCV relay, operators
can monitor other vault
MPCV network relay brings easily field mount them on control over a shielded twisted environment parameters
8 the proven performance these existing network pair communications wire. such as transformer top oil
of microprocessor-based protectors: Communications can be temperature, water in the
8 technology to new network
● Eaton Types CM52, CMD,
provided by a Web-enabled network vault, fire alarm or
protectors...or those interface or direct DNP 3.O network enclosure pressure
8 already in service
regardless of age ●
CM-22 or CMR-8
General Electric® Types
to SCADA systems. Eaton
has multiple choices for
● Event trending, threshold
alarms and e-mail
or manufacturer MG-8, MG-9 or MG-14
8 ● The MPCV contains
communication interfaces
such as VaultGard for total
forwarding
Field installation is ● Multiple MPCVs can
industry exclusive features vault communications,
8 such as:
accomplished without breaker
modification or any rewiring of
NPView- simple Web server
be connected together
either as a daisy chain,
● Gull Wing Trip or DNPMINT.
8 Characteristic
the breaker control harness.
MPCV relays operate on 216V For localized access, the
T-configuration or a
combination.
● Remote Protective and 480V systems. Relay MPCV relay has the capability
8 Close potential transformers are of wireless communication,
● Anti-Pumping Algorithm required for 480V applications. monitoring and control with
8 ● With the MPCV, you can the Eaton wireless products.
select the characteristic
8 The MPCV is built for the
●
curves to monitor and harshest environments,
control the network with an operation
8 protector through Eaton
products such as the
temperature of –40°F
(–40°C) up to 257°F
8 VaultGard, DNPMINT
and NPView
(125°C). The MPCV is MPCV Communications Relay
for Eaton Network Protectors
housed in a 0.25-inch
8 (6.35 mm) thick solid cast
brass can
8 Access and display

●
information from the MPCV

such as: voltage, current,
8 power, power factor,
date and time stamped
8 trip events, internal
temperature and operations
8 counter of breaker MPCV Communications Relay for
General Electric Network Protectors
Network Protectors
Network Protector Aftermarket
8.3
Contents
Rebuild Program
Description
8
Network Protector Rebuild and Parts Program 8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Network Protector Rebuild and Parts Program 8
Parts Rebuild Services Quick Ship 8
● Renewal parts for all Eaton’s Electrical Sector Eaton can build and ship
network protector models: is setting the standard of brand new CM-22 or CMD 8
● Eaton, Westinghouse®: reliability with a reconditioning network protectors in 4 to
CM-22, CMD, CM52 and process that involves total
breaker and enclosure
6 weeks.
8
CMR-8
● General Electric: MG-8,
MG-9 and MG-14
disassembly, material
specific component cleaning, 8
detailed inspection and state-
● 24-hour shipment when
required for parts in stock
of-the-art testing, all done to 8
uniform documented
specifications. 8
Eaton offers a CM52 retrofit
breaker for legacy CMD and 8
GE Network Protectors. The Retrobuild Before Retrobuild After
breaker can be installed in 8
existing network protector
enclosures without having to
remove the enclosure from
8
the vault or having to remove
the secondary cable 8
connections, saving both
time and money. Parts 8
8
Parts
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Metering Devices, Protective Relays,
Software and Connectivity
9.1 Monitoring Software
Power Xpert Insight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-2
9
9.2 Metering Devices 9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-15 9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-34
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-45 9
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-51
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-56 9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-61
V3-T9-64
9
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72 9
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85 9
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106 9
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121 9
9.3 Protective Relays 9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149 9
EDR-3000 Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-168 9
FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181
MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-189 9
MP-4000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-199
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-205
9
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMR-5000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-217
V3-T9-230
9
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-242 9
ETR-5000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-254
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-267 9
Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-280
Universal RTD Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283 9
9.4 Connectivity Options
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287
9
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-296
V3-T9-300
9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302 9
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304 9
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-307 9
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309
9
9
9
9
9
9.1 Metering Devices, Protective Relays, Software and Connectivity
Energy and Power Monitoring Software
Contents
9 Power Xpert Insight
Description Page
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-3
9 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-4
9 An Eaton
Green Solution
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Power Xpert Insight® is a A Web-based software, Power Xpert Insight provides
9 power and energy monitoring
system that is amazingly
Power Xpert Insight is
designed to be quick to install
the energy and power
information you need to:
simple—simple to install, and configure so that
9 simple to use, simple to add systems can be up and
● Keep the lights on with
real-time, actionable
new devices and simple to running quickly. Developed
9 obtain the information after extensive study and alarms across desktop
and mobile
needed to make important testing with users, the
9 Save money and energy
●
operating decisions every software allows customers
day. Power Xpert Insight to view only the device with easy-to-use and share
provides the insight into your information that they want energy reports
9 customers’ electrical system to see, simplify alarm ● Stay up to speed on your
and takes the complexity out management, view energy most critical devices with
9 of power and energy usage and demand data, adjustable dashboards
management. compare and trend data, ● Drill into problems quickly
9 and view a one-line
representation of their
with powerful graphics and
detailed data
9 electrical system. ● Understand current issues
and plan for future
9 investments using trends
and visualizations
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices, Protective Relays, Software and Connectivity
9.1
Features
9
Energy Alarms
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
● View energy usage and demand ● View color-coded alarms on one page (Black = Normal, 9
● Select the desired devices and time range, 24 hours to a Red = Alarm, Orange = Loss of Communication)
custom range ● Sort alarms by Time, Device or Priority for a specified time 9
● Choose the type of graph that best suits; line or stacked bar range, view by Alarm Status
chart ● Acknowledge Alarms by individual device or group together 9
● Move the cursor over the graph to view detailed data ● Open the Alarm Pop Out to view additional data and add notes
● Export data to a CSV-format file ● Export alarm history to a CSV-format file 9
● Expand to the Trend Viewer for additional information
● Energy usage is automatically summed for the devices shown
Favorites Dashboard 9
in the table
9
Capacity
9
9
9
9
9
9
● Each user can create a unique dashboard to focus on the
devices or systems that they are interested in 9
● Devices are displayed by device type (Main, Meter, Protection)
● Benchmark capacity usage in real-time to determine tripping
●
and populate the top 4 channels for that device
Alarm color-coding is automatically propagated across pages
9
points and avoid downtime
● Custom trigger thresholds for cautionary and critical levels ● A quick Trend Graph and Energy Graph are also displayed for a
selected device and channel over a time range up to 24 hours
9
support all types of electrical environments and changing
needs ● Quickly add or remove devices from the Favorites dashboard 9
● Simulate and trend with line graphics load additions prior to
device installation to avoid tripping and downtime 9
● Forecast, budget and plan capacity requirements
● Proactively predict overall electrical system performance by
modeling capabilities
9
9
9
9
9
Product Selection
9
One-lines
9 Description
Catalog
Number
9 PXI for up to 10 device connections

PXI for up to 25 device connections
PXI-A
PXI-B
9 PXI for up to 50 device connections PXI-C

PXI for up to 100 device connections PXI-D
9 PXI for up to 200 device connections PXI-E
9
PXI Device Count Upgrades
9 Catalog
Description Number
9 ● Build an electrical one-line representation of the system with PXI 10 to 25 upgrade PXI-A2B
device widgets and the symbols library
9 ● Drag-and-drop devices, lines, symbols where needed, add
PXI 10 to 50 upgrade
PXI-A2C
PXI-A2D
text boxes. Easily updated when devices are removed or
9 added to service PXI 10 to 200 upgrade PXI-A2E
● The top 4 device channels are automatically populated on the PXI 25 to 50 upgrade PXI-B2C
9 device widgets and alarm color-coding carries through on the
one-lines
PXI 25 to 100 upgrade PXI-B2D
PXI 25 to 200 upgrade PXI-B2E
9 ● Upload a unique background image
PXI 50 to 100 upgrade PXI-C2D
● Use the Device Tree to set up the one-line structure
9 Offline Configuration
PXI-C2E
PXI-D2E
9 ● Power Xpert Insight provides the ability to completely

configure a system in advance. The more you know about
the final system, the more complete the offline configuration
9 process will be
Service Packs
Catalog
● Configure Power Xpert Insight in advance using an Excel®
9 spreadsheet (template available at Eaton.com/pxi)
Description Number
Power Xpert 1-day startup service pack PX-1S
● Upload the spreadsheet to an offline Power Xpert Insight
9 system Power Xpert 2-day startup service pack PX-2S
● Set up one-line graphics in the offline Power Xpert Insight Power Xpert 5-day startup service pack PX-5S
9 system
● Extract the entire system configuration
9 ● Upload the configuration into the target system when ready
and connect when the devices are online
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9.1
9
Hardware Requirements Software Requirements
Power Xpert Insight requires a server-class machine with the Supported Operating Systems 9
following minimum hardware specifications:
9
Software Specification
Hardware Specification
Processor Quad core
Server Windows® Server 2008 R2, Standard and Enterprise, SP1 9
Windows Sever 2012 Standard and Datacenter
Memory
Disk space required for application
16 GB
100 GB—5 years estimated data storage
Client Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate or Enterprise, x64, SP1 9
Disk space required for database A typical database will grow to 2 GB within a
year. If you have a large number of devices,
Windows 8 Professional and Enterprise, x64
Supported versions of Microsoft® SQL Server
9
reserve additional storage space
Video resolution 1920 by 1080 pixels
SQL Server 2008 R2 Standard (and Standard for Small Business) SP2 9
SQL Server 2008 R2 Enterprise
SQL Server 2012 Express with Advanced Services, Standard, Enterprise, 9
Enterprise Core and Business Intelligence
Note: If you do not have one of the above versions installed, Power Xpert 9
Insight will install SQL Server 2012 Express with Advanced Services.
9
Supported Web Browsers
● Microsoft Internet Explorer® (IE) 9, 10 or 11 9
● Google Chrome™
● Firefox® 9
● Other browsers (such as Opera and Safari®) that support
Silverlight® may also work, but are not officially supported 9
by Eaton
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 Metering Products Family
Description Page
9 Metering Products Family
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters . . . . . . V3-T9-45
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters. . . V3-T9-51
9 IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters . . . V3-T9-56
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
9 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-64
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85
9 IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9 Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9
9 Product Overview Features and Benefits
9 Eaton’s metering products
provide solutions needed
Greater Reliability Reduced Energy and
Eaton’s metering products Operating Costs
to monitor and manage all
9 aspects of an electrical give the ability to receive an When we think about meters When an Eaton meter is used
distribution system. early warning of potential and power quality, the with Eaton trip units and
9 When greater reliability,
problems, eliminate
unnecessary trips, isolate
common thread throughout
the basket of solutions is
relays incorporating built-in
metering capabilities, the
9 increased productivity and
significant cost savings
faults to ensure minimum
downtime and shed or
information. Collecting,
monitoring and managing data
entire electrical distribution
system can be cost-
are called for to remain equalize loads while a from the electrical distribution effectively managed.
9 competitive in today’s problem is being corrected. system can help reduce costs
market, Eaton’s metering for those facilities prepared to Eaton is an industry
9 products fit the bill. These
innovative meters and
Increased Productivity
Equipment downtime
define and analyze present leader offering a complete
integrated solution to oversee
electrical energy usage levels
your entire electrical
9 communications systems,
along with Power
resulting from voltage or
frequency variations can be
and patterns. Data provided by
Eaton’s metering products distribution system. As a
Management software, make very costly to an operation. global manufacturer of
9 it possible to successfully Monitoring power quality
comprise the data for verifying
utility bills for energy low and medium voltage
take control of the electrical with Eaton’s metering management and lowering electrical distribution system
9 distribution system. products throughout the operating costs. Deregulation equipment and components,
Eaton is an experienced
electrical distribution system in some geographical
9 Power Xpert Meters
Power Xpert Meters are
provides data to identify,
isolate and correct problems
locations permits energy innovator of metering
products that incorporate
users to select a utility
cutting-edge technology.
9 the benchmark for intelligent
Web-enabled top-quality
quickly and efficiently. provider and negotiate rate
structures. For large users These innovations result
metering devices for the with heavy utility bills, this from our scientific and
9 power system. Power Xpert may be an incentive to verify engineering expertise,
Meters provide measurement the utility bill, identify an physical resources and the
9 of the critical elements found opportunity for savings, ongoing R&D programs at
our technology centers.
in the power system, whether negotiate a better utility rate
9 that be voltage, power,
current, transients, harmonics
and apply the savings directly
to the bottom line. Users are
or even time. Power Xpert
9 Meters provide Web-enabled
also empowered to decrease
energy consumption, thereby
communications for use with lowering peak demand
9 the Power Xpert Insight. charges and decreasing
All Power Xpert Meters operating costs.
9 provide a standard
communications protocol
9 for easy integration into
other systems.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Product Selection Guide
9
Metering Selection Chart
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series IQ 250/260 Series
9
9
Device Name 9
Accessories
See Page V3-T9-116 9
Section Page Number V3-T9-15 V3-T9-34 V3-T9-45
Electrical Parameters 9
Volts
Amperes
0.1% of RV + 0.02% FS
0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
0.1% of RV
9
Current range (% of nominal) 0.005–20A (400%) 0.1–200% 0.1–200% 9
Watts 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
VARs 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV 9
VA 0.1% of RV + 0.0025% FS 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
PF-apparent 0.1% 0.2% of RV 0.2% of RV
9
PF-displacement 0.1% — —
9
Frequency ±0.01 Hz ±0.03 Hz ±0.03 Hz
THD-voltage 127th 40th 2345 40th 6 9
THD-current 127th 40th 2345 40th 6
Watthours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 9
9
VAR-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
VA-hours ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
Ampere-demand 0.05% of RV + 0.01% FS ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
9
Watt-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
VAR-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 9
VA-demand ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1
Revenue accuracy ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 1 ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) 9
Individual ampere harmonics
Individual voltage harmonics
85th 7
85th 7
40th 345
40th 345
—
—
9
Interharmonics Yes — — 9
Minimum and/or Maximum Values
Volts L-L, L-N, N-G, VAUX L-L L-L, L-N L-L, L-N 9
Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C, N A, B, C
Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA
9
Power Factor Apparent/displacement Apparent Apparent
9
Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz
THD Amperes/volts (L-L, L-N, AUX L-L) Amperes/volts 2345 Amperes/volts 6 9
Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes
Trend analysis 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 256 / 512 2 / 768 345 MB 128 KB j 9
k
9
Event logging 2/4 8/ 8 9 GB 100,000 alarms/events with timestamp
Disturbance recording 2 / 4 8 / 8 9 GB 768 MB 45 —
60 cycles per event up to 64 cycles per event 45
Notes Legend: PG = Programmable

9
9
1 Under typical operating conditions. 7 Individual values reported to 85th FS = Full scale
2 PXM 2260 only. harmonic; anti-alias filtering prevents RV = Read value
3 PXM 2270 only. higher frequencies from distorting Auxiliary voltage
4 PXM 2280 only.
8
readings (see IEC 61000-4-7).
PMX 6000 only.
(optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2. 9
5 PXM 2290 only.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.
9
9 PXM 8000 only.
6 IQ 260 only.
j Optional.
k At computer only.
9
Metering Devices
Metering Selection Chart, continued

9 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series IQ 250/260 Series
9
9 Device Name
Accessories
9 See Page V3-T9-116
9 Other Features
9
Storage 2 / 4 1 / 8 2 GB 256 / 512 3 / 768 4 MB Standard 128 KB for logging, up to 8 parameters every 15
minutes for 30 days
PG output relays 5 maximum Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA Optional (2) Form C, 5A or (4) Form A, 120 mA
9 PG analog outputs — Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA Optional (4) 4–20 mA or (4) 0–1 mA
9 Discrete contact inputs 8 Optional (2) or (4) Optional (2) or (4)

Analog inputs — — —
9 Synch-input kW utility Via status input Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs Via end of interval pulse with optional digital inputs
Auxiliary voltage 5 Yes — —
9 kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes Yes
9
Waveform display Local/computer 6 —
Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 512 (4096 oversampling) Yes, up to 64 7, up to 512 8 —
9 Frequency distribution display — — —

Display type LCD 9 Red LED Red LED
9 Display lines/character Graphic (320 x 240 pixels) 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters
Display character height 5.5 mm H x 4 mm W 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H
9 Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0 Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
9 Network: Modbus TCP, Ethernet TCP/IP, Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP, Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway
9 HTTP, SNMP, SMTP, FTP, DNP 3.0 HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, 78 Waveform FTP
Setup configuration Via Web browser/display Via Web browser/display Via configuration software/display
9 Dimensions Refer to TD02601007E Refer to TD02601017E Refer to TD02601016E
Operating temperature range –20° to 60°C display unit –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C
9 –20° to 70°C meter base unit
Reference literature TD02601007E TD02601017E TD02601016E
9 Notes Legend: PG = Programmable
FS = Full scale
9
1 PXM 6000 only.
2 PXM 8000 only. RV = Read value
3 PXM 2260 only. Auxiliary voltage
9 4 PXM 2270 only.
5 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage
(optional) = Provides three additional voltage inputs to the
meter: Va2, Vb2, Vc2.
Interharmonics = Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000 supported.
9 input channels to Power Xpert Meters.
6 At computer only.
7 PXM 2280 only.
9 8 PXM 2290 only.

9 Optional
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series IQ 35M Series
9
9
Device Name 9
Accessories
See Page V3-T9-116
9
Volts ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% +0.015% per °C deviation from 25°C
Amperes ±0.25% of RV 0.1% of RV 0.4% (5–100%), 0.8% (1–5%) +0.015% per °C from 25°C 9
Current range (% of nominal)
Watts
0.1–200%
0.5% of RV 1
0.1–200%
0.2% of RV
1–120%
0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
9
VARs 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 9
VA 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs
PF-apparent 0.5% of RV 1 0.2% of RV Calculated: Watts / VAs 9
PF-displacement — — —
Frequency ±0.03% Hz 1 ±0.03 Hz ±0.02 Hz 9
THD-voltage
THD-current
—
—
—
—
—
—
9
Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S 9
Varhours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class ±2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2
VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class — 9
±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2
9
Ampere-demand ±0.1% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class —
Watt-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22
Class 0.5S
VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class 2.0% per IEC 62053-23 Class 2 9
9
VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 Class 2 ±0.2% per ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class Calculated: vector sum of watts and VARs
Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) ANSI C12.20 (0.2%) 0.5% per ANSI C12.20 and IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S
Individual ampere harmonics — — — 9
Individual voltage harmonics — — —
Interharmonics — — — 9
9
Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N —
Current A, B, C A, B, C —
9
Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA —
Power factor Apparent 1 Apparent Apparent (low alert) 9
Frequency Hertz 1 Hertz Hertz (out of range alert)
THD Ampere/Volts — — 9
9
Demand values kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes 1 kW, kVAR, kVA, amperes kW, kVAR, kVA; Maximum kW, kVAR, kVA
3
Trend analysis 2 MB 5 —
Event logging 3 2 MB 5 Logging on demand interval or Modbus command 4
9
Disturbance recording — — —
Notes Legend: PG = Programmable 9

1 IQ 140 and IQ 150. FS = Full scale
2 IQ 150 only.
3 At computer only.
RV = Read value 9
4 Optional.
5 IQ 250S only.
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9 IQ 130/140/150 Series IQ 150S/250S Series IQ 35M Series
9
9 Device Name
Accessories
9 Other Features
Storage — 2 MB 2 10 registers (16 bit) by 5760 entries each (115 KB) 1
9 PG output relays — — —
9 PG analog outputs
Discrete contact inputs
—
—
—
—
—
2 pulse inputs with BACnet
9 Analog inputs — — —
Synch-input kW Utility — — Optional demand synchronization via Modbus
9 Auxiliary voltage 3 — — —
1
9
kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes
Waveform display — — —
9 Waveform capture — — —
Frequency distribution display — — —
9 Display type Red LED Red LED Backlit LCD
Display lines/character 3 lines, 4 characters 3 lines, 4 characters 2 lines by 5 characters ea (full alphanumeric top row)
9 Display character height 0.56 (14.2) H 0.56 (14.2) H 7.5 mm
9 Communications Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII 1

Network: Modbus TCP 1
Serial: Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, DNP 3.0
Network: Modbus TCP, wired or wireless
Serial: Modbus RTU 1, BACnet MS/TP 1
Network: Modbus TCP via Power Xpert Gateway
9
Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via display/configuration software
Dimensions 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 4.97 (126.2) D 7.90 (200.7) H x 7.50 (190.5) W x 3.10 (78.7) D 3.60 (91.4) H x 4.20 (106.7) W x 2.30 (58.4) D
9 Operating temperature range –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C –20 to 70°C

Reference literature TD02601015E TD02601019E TD02601015E
1 Optional. FS = Full scale
9 2 IQ 250S only.
3 The auxiliary voltage option adds three additional voltage input channels to
RV = Read value
9 Power Xpert Meters.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series
9
9
Device Name 9
Accessories
See Page V3-T9-116
9
Volts ±0.2% FS 1 ±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS
Amperes ±0.2% FS 1 ±0.3% FS ±0.5% FS 9
Watts
3–800%
0.4% FS, 6 RV 2
10–250%
±0.6% FS
1–200%
±1.0% FS
9
VARs 0.4% FS, 6 RV 3 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS 9
VA 0.4% FS, 6 RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% FS
PF-apparent 0.8% FS 1 ±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS 9
PF-displacement 0.8% FS 1 ±1.0% FS ±2.0% FS
Frequency 0.04% 1 or 0.01 Hz ±0.17% FS ±0.1% Hz 9
THD-voltage
THD-current
50th
50th
31st
31st
—
—
9
Watthours 0.5% RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12 9
Varhours 1% RV 3 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12
VA-hours 0.5% RV 2 ±0.6% FS ±1.0% per ANSI C12 9
±0.2% FS 1
9
Ampere-demand ±0.3% ±0.5% per ANSI C12
Watt-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12
VAR-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12
9
VA-demand ±0.4% FS 1 ±0.6% ±1.0% per ANSI C12
Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) — ANSI C12.1 (1%) 9
Individual ampere harmonics 50th — —
Individual voltage harmonics 50th — — 9
9
Interharmonics — — —
Volts L-L, L-N L-L, L-N L-L, L-N
9
Current A, B, C, N, G A, B, C A, B, C
Power Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA Watt, VAR, VA 9
Power factor Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement Apparent/displacement
Frequency Hertz Hertz Hertz 9
THD
Demand values
Amperes/volts
All
Amperes/volts
All
—
All
9
Trend analysis Time/date 2 alarms 4
9
Event logging 504 events w/timestamp 4 4
Disturbance recording 10 waveform events — — 9

Notes
1 From 3–300% of FS.
Legend: PG
FS
= Programmable
= Full scale 9
2 At unity power factory and 5–300% of FS. RV = Read value
3 At a power factor <±0.5 and 5–300% of FS. 9
4 At computer only.
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9 IQ Analyzer 6000 Series IQ DP-4000 Series IQ 230 Series
9
9 Device Name
Accessories
9 Other Features
Storage 90 KB 15 parameters —
9 PG output relays (4) 10A Form C 1 (3) 10A Form C 2 (2) 100 mA Form A
9 PG analog outputs
Discrete contact inputs
(4) 0–10/4–20 mA
(3) + 30 Vdc differential
—
(1) kW Demand 2
—
(2) +30 Vdc differential
9 Analog inputs (1) 0–20/4–20 mA — (1) 4–20 mA

Synch-input kW Utility At device or via communications At device or via communications 2 Via communications only
9 Auxiliary voltage — — —
Yes 2
9
kWh pulse initiator Yes Yes
Waveform display Local 2/computer — —
9 Waveform capture, samples/cycle Yes, 128 — —

Frequency distribution display Local 2/computer — —
9 Display type Graphic LCD with LED backlight 7 Segment LED Backlit LCD
Display lines/character 7 lines, 147 characters 1 line, 7 characters 4 lines, 20 characters
9 Display character height Up to 7 lines 1 line 1.60 (40.6) H x.09 (2.3) W
9 Communications Serial: INCOM 3

Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3
Serial: INCOM 3
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway 3
Serial: INCOM, Modbus RTU 4
Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
9
Setup configuration Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display Via configuration software/display
Dimensions Refer to TD1702BTE Refer to TD1703ATE Refer to TD1706ATE
9 Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –20° to 70°C 0° to 50°C

Reference literature — — —
1 Relays programmable to operate on any measured function. FS = Full scale
9 2 Optional.
3 An IPONI is required.
RV = Read value
9 4 IQ 230M only.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert IQ Energy
9
Multi-Point Meter Sentinel
9
Device Name 9
Accessories
See Page V3-T9-116
9
Section Page Number V3-T9-85 V3-T9-97
Volts ±0.2% RV —
Amperes ±0.2% RV —
9
Watts
—
±0.5% RV
—
±1.0% FS
9
VARs ±0.5% RV — 9
VA ±0.5% RV —
PF-apparent ±0.5% RV — 9
9
PF-displacement — —
Frequency ±0.1 Hz —
THD-voltage — —
9
THD-current — —
Watthours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class ±1.0% FS 9
VAR-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —
VA-hours ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — 9
Ampere-demand
Watt-demand
—
±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class
—
±1.0% FS
9
VAR-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class — 9
VA-demand ±0.5% per ANSI C12.20 0.5 class —
Revenue accuracy ANSI C12.20 (0.5%) — 9
Individual ampere harmonics — —
Individual voltage harmonics — —
9
Interharmonics
— —
9
Volts L-L, L-N — 9
Current A, B, C —
Power Watts, VAR, VA — 9
9
Power factor Apparent —
Frequency Hertz —
THD — —
9
Demand values Watts (Delivered & Received), Watts (Q1–Q4), VA (Q1, —
Trend analysis
Q4), VA (Q2, Q3)
Interval data 1
9
Event logging 20 latest events and historical 1
9
Disturbance recording — —
Note Legend: PG = Programmable

9
1 At computer only. FS = Full scale
RV = Read value 9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9 Power Xpert IQ Energy
Multi-Point Meter Sentinel
9
9 Device Name
Accessories
Section Page Number V3-T9-85 V3-T9-97
9 Other Features
9
Storage 256 MB standard, 2 GB optional —
PG output relays 1 standard, 8 each module 1 —
9 Discrete contact inputs 3 standard, 8 each module 1 —

Analog inputs — —
9 Synch-input kW utility Via communications and digital input Via communications only
Auxiliary voltage — —
9 kWh pulse initiator Aggregate or main-digital output, LED output on meter —
modules (accuracy check)
9 Waveform display — —
9
Waveform capture — —
Frequency distribution display — —
9 Display type LCD color touchscreen 1 —

Display lines/character 6-inch diagonal —
9 Display character height Graphics —
Communications Serial: Modbus RTU Serial: INCOM
9 1 Network: Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP, Ethernet TCP/IP, Network: via Power Xpert Gateway
HTTP, HTTPS, SNMP, SMTP, SFTP
9 Setup configuration Via PXMP configuration software Via configuration software

Dimensions Refer to TD150006EN (see Page V3-T9-110) Refer to TD1707TE
9 Operating temperature range –20° to 70°C –25° to 70°C
Reference literature TD150006EN —
9 Note Legend: PG = Programmable
9
1 Optional. FS = Full scale
RV = Read value
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series Display and Meter
Description Page
9
Metering Products Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series
V3-T9-6
9
V3-T9-34
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters . . . V3-T9-51
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters . . . . V3-T9-56 9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-64 9
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85
IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9
Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp-On Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120 9
An Eaton 9
Green Solution
9
9
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series 9
Product Description Standards and Certifications
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/ Both the local graphic display The Web server provides the ● Safety: EN61010-1, 9
energy and demand readings UL/cUL 61010-1
9
6000/8000 Series monitors and the embedded Web
the critical aspects of an server present real time, required to help manage ● Accuracy: IEC/EN60687
electrical distribution system. historical and event the cost of energy. It also 0.2 Class, ANSI C12.20
This premier power quality information in a browser-style provides critical information 0.2 Class 9
metering instrument is graphical format to help the regarding power quality, ● EMC: FCC Part 15
simple to use, powerful, user interpret key circuit
information, such as:
such as harmonic distortion,
flicker, crest factor, K-factor
Subpart B Class A EN55011 9
scalable and highly flexible. Class A
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/ ● Current loading
and more.
● Measurement Canada 9
6000/8000 offers a new level Note: Features and functionality Approval No. AE-1898
● Voltage and power levels
of intuitive user interface ● Power factor
may vary depending on the meter
model and options being used.
(4000/6000 meters) 9
design, presenting critical Review the Features and Benefits
● Immunity IEC 61326
● Energy usage
electrical distribution system
information in simple-to- ● I/O status
chart on Page V3-T9-20 for ● CE Mark 9
details.
navigate and easy-to- Power quality
9
●
understand information measurements

architecture. The Power Harmonic plots
9
●
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 ● Disturbance and transient

graphic display visualizes waveforms
the information from up
● ITIC disturbance summary 9
to 16 meter modules. The
screen
embedded Web server
displays complex power The Power Xpert Meter 4000/
9
quality data using standard
Internet browsers and allows
6000/8000 graphic display
uses a simple “twist and
9
for device configuration from click” navigation control dial
the browser. to easily navigate the menus 9
and drill down into increasing
levels of important detail. 9
A “back” key enhances the
browser-like navigation of the
graphic display.
9
9
Metering Devices
9 Identify Power Quality ● Minimum and maximum For Optional Graphic Display Display/Meter
Problems to Help: values Mounting Options
9 ● Harmonics
Note: Display ports provide access
to up to 16 Power Xpert 4000/6000/
● Identify harmonics, sags, 8000 Meter modules located on
● Display remotely mounted
9 Flicker
●
swells and transients the display RS-485 network. up to 2000 ft (1219m) away
damaging or disrupting ● Individual harmonics from up to 16 Power Xpert
● RS-485 meter display
9 sensitive, mission-critical
IT equipment
●
●
Interharmonics
% TDD
network port
●
Meter modules
Display and Power Xpert
Boost IT equipment’s
● RJ-45 10/100Base-T for Meter modules mounted
9
●
● ITIC events plot, duration, access to Local Display
service life to the magnitude together on opposite sides
maximum Power Xpert network of a panel (15 additional
9 ● Analyze sequence of
● Energy comparisons
Communication Protocols
meter modules can still
events up to 1 millisecond
● Demand comparisons be remotely mounted).
Supported
9 time resolution ● Event calendar ● Modbus RTU Meter Base Unit Characteristics
● Protect motors from ● Event timeline and
Modbus TCP
9
●
damage sequence ● NEMA rating: NEMA 1,
● Number of 9s of availability
● Ethernet TCP/IP IP30
● Preserve the integrity of
9 HTML
●
processes and batches ● Phasors
● NTP (Network Time Display Unit Characteristics
● Prevent blown capacitor ● Sequence components ● NEMA rating: NEMA 12,
9 bank fuses ● Crest factor ●
Protocol)
FTP (File Transfer Protocol) IP42 front of panel rating
● Protect transformers and ● K-factor
9 conductors from
overheating
● PQ Index
● SMTP (Simple Mail
Transfer Protocol)
Ease of Use—Power Xpert
Meter 4000/6000/8000 Graphic
9 SNMP (Simple Network Display (Option)
●
Detect and Record High- Accuracy
Management Protocol) The Power Xpert Meter 4000/
Speed Transients to Help: ● Currents: 0.05% RV
9 COMTRADE (IEEE 6000/8000 display features
●
+ 0.025%FS
● Avoid equipment damage C37.111-1999) a large easy-to-read white
and disruption
● Voltage: 0.1% RV backlit graphic LCD. The
9 DNP 3.0 over Ethernet
●
+ 0.025% FS information presented by
● Identify equipment (Distributed Network
malfunction
● Energy and demand Protocol) the display is organized into
9 Monitor Circuit Loading
power: 0.2% in accordance
with ANSI C12.20
an information architecture
Physical Characteristics that is easy-to-navigate and
9 to Help: ●
●
Frequency: ±0.01 Hertz
Power factor:
Two-Piece Design organized for simplicity.
Screen navigation is
● Avoid overloads and
accomplished using a
9 0.10% at Unity PF
● Power Xpert 4000/6000/
nuisance overload trips ●
8000 Meter modules navigation control dial and
● Maximize equipment ● 0.30% at 0.5 PF a “back” button. The user
Power Xpert Meter 4000/
9
●
utilization simply twists the knob on
Communications 6000/8000 Graphic Display
● Manage emergency 320 x 240 pixel backlight the navigation control dial
Multiple communications
9 overloads
ports including: LCD remote graphics to move between menu
selections and drill down
Manage Energy Utilization display (supports up to 16
9 to Help:
Standard
● RS-485 remote display port
Power Xpert 4000/6000/
8000 Meter modules)
links on the screen. When
the selection is highlighted,
pressing the dial makes the
9 Reduce peak demand
● ● RS-485 Modbus RTU
charges and power slave port selection. Information is
factor penalties displayed from a single meter
9 ● Identify excessive energy
● RJ-45 10/100Base-T local
configuration port (local
or an RS-485 daisychain of
consumption up to 16 meters. The display
Web server connection)
9 ● HTTP (local), FTP,
features a rich set of screens
including real-time data, trend
Metered/Monitored Parameters
COMTRADE
9 Note: See Page V3-T9-20.
plots, waveform views and an
ITIC Plot. The graphic display
● Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, Optional
allows basic device setup and
9 Avg. L-N, N-G ● Communications
Expansion Card (CEC
password protected resets.
● Phase neutral and An audible alarm is available
9 ground currents ● Selectable 100FX or
10/100Base-T Ethernet
to annunciate alarm
● Power: real, reactive conditions.
9 and apparent
●
network port
RS-485 Modbus RTU
● Frequency
9 ● Power factor: apparent
selectable master/
slave port
and displacement
RS-232 Modbus RTU
9
●
● Energy
slave port
● Demand
9 ● % THD
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/ Sag/Swell/Transient Capture Storage capacity for standard With the optional LAN/WAN
8000 Embedded Web Server and Recording trend plots includes all of the Ethernet Communication 9
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/ 60 cycles of waveform are following intervals: Expansion Card (CEC), users
6000/8000 embedded Web oversampled at 4096 samples ● Every 5 minutes for
can easily configure the 9
server offers Eaton per cycle (Power Xpert Meter meters to send periodic
48 hours (2 days)
customers a new level of
accessibility to the critical
4000/6000), filtered through
anti-aliasing and recorded at ● Every 15 minutes for
e-mails at user-defined
intervals of energy
9
192 hours (4 days)
information required to
manage their electrical
512 samples per cycle and
post event data. The Power ● Every hour for 28 days
consumption and power
demand. E-mails contain 9
distribution system. The Web Xpert Meter 8000 samples at (4 weeks) a summary of readings per
server includes real-time a rate of 100,000 samples per ● Every 8 hours for rate structures and also have 9
circuit information in both cycle. Embedded Web server 56 weeks the actual measurements
numeric and graphical visual supports viewing of triggered ● Every week for 44 months
attached to the E-mail’s 9
formats to help monitor waveforms one channel at a body as a CSV file in a
circuit parameters such as
current loading, voltage and
time and includes the ability to
zoom and to scroll horizontally
Note: Trend plot data can be
easily exported to third-party
ZIP container.
9
applications, such as Microsoft In addition, metered
power levels, power factor,
THD, Flicker and more. The
using a slider bar.
Excel in csv-file format. parameters are automatically 9
The Power Xpert Meter stored on the built-in FTP
Web server also provides
energy and demand readings 6000/8000 Series have
preconfigured (600 volts and
In addition, metered
parameters are automatically
Server, where they can be
easily copied and imported
9
with graphic usage plots to
help analyze energy usage below) trigger settings for
sags, swells and transients,
stored on the built-in FTP
Servers, where they can be
into third-party applications
for benchmarking and 9
patterns. Energy readings
and do not require additional easily copied and imported analysis. Logs on the FTP
include kWh, kVARh,
delivered and received and setup by the user. Waveforms into third-party applications Server include energy 9
are stored in non-volatile flash for benchmarking and consumption logs, one
kVAh with time of use and
RTP displays. The interval memory using an industry analysis. Logs on the FTP for every month in CSV 9
standard COMTRADE Server include the min./max. file format, trended
energy usage plot includes
the ability to do week-to- format. Waveforms can be
automatically sent out as
and average for 145 standard
metering parameters at
measurement logs also
in CSV file format and
9
week and month-to-month
5-minute intervals. waveform captures in
energy consumption
graphical comparisons for
COMTRADE attachments to
an e-mail following an event, COMTRADE file format. 9
Storage capacity for
or can be retrieved from an
benchmarking purposes. The
embedded Web server will FTP (File Transfer Protocol)
trend data: Storage capacity for energy
profile data:
9
also display in simplified directory structure in ● 6 days of 5-minute
Chinese if connected to a the Power Xpert meter interval trend data ● 62 days of 15 minute 9
computer configured for module’s memory. ● Capacity=18,144 intervals interval energy and pulse
Chinese language.
Historical Trend Logging
interval data. 9
Energy Profile Data ● Fixed interval capacity
Both the Power Xpert Meter
4000/6000/8000 embedded
The Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 records historical
6000/8000 records Real and
= 5952 intervals.
Configurable intervals
9
Web server and the local data for graphical viewing
graphic display support from the Local display or
Reactive energy forward,
reverse, net and absolute ●
from 1 to 60 min
372 days of 1 day
9
graphical trend charts of key the embedded Web server. sum, as well as Apparent accumulated energy and
circuit measurements such
as current, voltage, power
Graphical views of historical energy (kVAH). Up to 8 status pulse interval data 9
data support pan and zoom. inputs can be configured as 208 weeks of 1 week
9
●
and energy. The trend chart 145 standard metering energy accumulators for accumulated energy
supports a zoom feature that parameters are logged as counting KYZ pulse inputs and pulse interval data
allows the user to view data
over a short period of 16
part of the standard meter
functionality including min./
(option). These readings are
stored over a configurable
9
hours up to 4 years. The trend max. and average for each Energy and Demand
chart includes zoom in/out parameter. The averages are
interval from 1 to 60 minutes,
as well as in daily and
Comparisons
Energy and demand usage
9
buttons and a horizontal slider calculated over the interval weekly totals.
bar control to manage
scrolling forward and backward
period. The minimum and patterns can be analyzed with
the month-to-month, week- 9
maximum readings are based
to-week comparison chart
through the data. Trend charts
of basic readings include
on 200 ms calculations.
built into the meter. Raw 9
minimum, maximum and data can be exported with
average readings. Trend the “Save Table” option to 9
charts of interval by interval other applications, such as
energy data also display Excel, for further analysis
and graphing.
9
peak demand.
Note: For remote access and 9
networking capabilities such as
connecting to a LAN/WAN, use
the optional Communications
9
Expansion Card (CEC).
9
Metering Devices
Power Xpert Meter Profiler—Free Download E-mail Notification

9 The Power Xpert Meter areas of concern. It is also a With the optional LAN/WAN
Profiler software allows you predictor. It can predict what Ethernet Communication
9 to compare “expected” energy consumption would Expansion Card (CEC)
energy consumption patterns be expected later in a day. attached to the Power Xpert
9 to present usage and flag Meter 4000/6000/8000’s, the
users can easily configure
9 the meters to send periodic
emails at user-defined
9 intervals for energy
consumption and power
demand. Emails contain a
9 summary of readings per
rate structures and also have
9 the actual measurements
attached to the email’s
9 body as a CSV file in a ZIP
container. Prompt alarm
emails can also be sent for
9 any event condition either
standard in the meter or ones
9 set up by the user based on
Event Triggers Event Logging thresholds, dV/dt triggers or
9 The Power Xpert Meter The optional Power Xpert
Meter 4000/6000/8000
IO status changes with the
optional IO Card. Alarm
4000/6000/8000 supports
9 five types of configurable
event triggers:
Local graphic display or the
embedded Web server both
emails can be configured
to have the COMTRADE
allow the user to view a list of waveform capture attached
9 ● Out of limits (4000/6000/ triggered events along with to the e-mail’s body.
8000) any captured parameters,
9 ● Demand overload (4000/ event details and triggered
6000/8000) waveforms. In addition, a
9 ● Sub-cycle disturbance
(4000/6000/8000)
separate event log includes a
variety of activities including
9 ● ITIC (6000/8000) acknowledged triggers, new
min. and max. events, and
● Fast transient (8000)
system operations such as
9 These triggers permit pickup, resets. The size of the event
reset and pickup delay to log is virtually unlimited based
9 be configured by the user. only on the memory option
When a trigger occurs, selected.
9 actions include Performance
Monitoring (#9’s analysis),
9 Capturing Waveform, Capture
Parameters, Send Email and
Operate a Relay Output. The
9 Graphic Display flashes an
LED to annunciate the alarm
9 condition. An audible alarm is
Periodic Email Message
also available.
9 Trigger options include:
9 ● Out of limits: over

100 triggers
9 ● Demand overload:
10 triggers
9 ITIC: 8 triggers
●
● Fast transient: dV/dT and

9 ●
absolute per phase
Sub-cycle disturbance—
9 dV/dt and absolute
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
ITIC Analysis Plot
The Power Xpert Meter This makes it simple to view ● Three relay outputs— displayed graphically. Outputs 9
graphic display (option) and disturbance waveforms 5A max. continuous, can be used for KYZ, or alarm
Web server include a graphic associated with the ITIC plot. 240 Vac max., 30 Vdc max. annunciation. 9
representation of the ITIC plot ● Two solid-state outputs—
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/ A separate ITIC graph is
available to review individual 80 mA max. continuous, Ratings 9
8000) with counts of 30 Vdc max. ● Application to 500 kV,
ITIC events. This graph will
disturbances and transients
that have occurred. The ITIC show the user the event Each of the 8 inputs are
no PTs to 600V 9
hit position on the graph ● CT ratios selectable from
interrupt driven, allowing
9
plot organizes events into standard 120/600 Vac line
8 distinct disturbance zones and the event duration for 1 ms accuracy of digital
corresponding to severity and and magnitude. events time stamps (1 ms ● CT inputs accept 5A
a 9th zone for transients. A
Inputs and Outputs
accuracy requires local NTP secondary
9
pass/fail count is displayed TimeServer). Inputs can also ● Power supply:
to indicate how many events
are outside the ITIC limits.
Power Xpert Meter 4000/
6000/8000 is available with
be configured for demand
synch and pulse counting.
● Standard 120/240 Vac
or 110/250 Vdc
9
an optional digital I/O card,
Clicking on any counter in the
ITIC Web page will link the which includes:
Inputs selected for pulse
counting can be scaled. 9
user to the event view and Interval by interval pulse
display all triggered events
● Eight digital inputs—
self sourced 24 Vdc
recordings are maintained in 9
in the selected zone. profile memory and can be
9
Storage Capacity
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Estimated Memory and Storage Capacity with 2/4/8 GB Memory Capacity
9
Occurrence Per Month 1 Memory Usage (MB) Months of Capacity 2 9
Model Memory Event File Size (KB) Typical Severe Typical Severe Typical Severe
PXM 4000 2 GB Subcycle Disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 166 28 9
PXM 6000 4 GB ITIC Event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 666 166
Subcycle Disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 333 55
9
ITIC + Subcycle Disturbance Total---> 15 80 18.5 98.4 222 42
9
PXM 8000 8 GB ITIC Event 1260 5 20 6.2 24.6 1332 333
Subcycle Disturbance 1260 10 60 12.3 73.8 666 111 9
Transients 2048 3 30 6.0 60.0 1365 137
ITIC + Subcycle Disturbance + Transients Total---> 18 110 24.5 158.4 335 52 9
Notes
1 The typical and server power quality event occurrences are estimates and may vary depending on the electrical environment.
9
9
2 Memory is not allocated by event category; memory is used first come, first served.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9
Power Xpert Meter 4000 Power Xpert Meter 6000 Power Xpert Meter 8000
9 ● Harmonics, including ● Interharmonics ● Impulsive transient
individual harmonics ● Flicker calculations capture at 6 MHz
9 ● Disturbance capture ● ITIC performance curve ● 100,000 samples
● Low frequency transient Event calendar view per cycle
9
●
detection and capture ● Events timeline view

● Premium power
● Standard power quality index
9 Sequence of events
●
quality index waveform plot
9 Enhanced power
●
quality index
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
9 Power Xpert Meter
Feature 4000 6000 8000 Benefit
9 General
9 Embedded Web server

TOU metering support
■
■
■
■
■
■
Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network, Internet
Time of usage can be set up to support 4 different schedules
9 Firmware flash update support ■ ■ ■ Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware updates
Self-learning capability (characterizes “normal” per circuit) ■ ■ ■ The meter can automatically adjust to the environment and alarm only when
9 “real” events occur
Power, Energy and Demand
9 Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph analysis, ■
export, print
■ ■ Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the meter
or external software
9 Energy and demand plot comparisons month-to-month, week-to-week ■ ■ ■ Plot two months or two weeks for vivid energy or demand comparison
Power: power factor, apparent, real, reactive, frequency ■ ■ ■ Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties
9 Energy, demand: forward, reverse, net, sum, tou, profile, previous month ■ ■ ■ Keep track of your energy usage, compare time of usage and usage against previous month,
comparison, graph analysis, export, print identify peaks to conserve energy usage
9 Power Quality Analysis
Statistical analysis (min., max., average) ■ ■ ■ Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas
9 Sag and swell monitoring, management and recording ■ ■ ■ Capture electrical sags and swells and analyze the waveforms
9 Symmetrical Components: Zero, Negative, Positive

Low frequency transient detection and capture
■
■
■
■
■
■
Analyze possibly unbalanced three-phase power systems
Capture lower frequency transient waveforms for retrospective analysis or e-mailing
9 Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 4096 1 4096 1 100,000 Extremely high sampling rate will effectively capture impulsive transients
“Number of Nines” uptime data (e.g., 6 nines = 99.9999%) ■ ■ ■ Review uptime availability per cent
9 K-factor ■ ■ ■ Review the ratio of eddy current losses, e.g., when driving nonlinear and linear loads
Crest factor ■ ■ ■ Review the peak-to-average ratio of the waveform
9 Security
9 Secure 5 level user access privileges ■ ■ ■ Define appropriate security access level per user
Communications and I/O
9 Modbus TCP ■ ■ ■ Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software
Modbus RTU ■ ■ ■ Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (1–16) meters together
9 HTML ■ ■ ■ Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser
■ ■ ■
9
SNMP (simple network management protocol) Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system
SMTP (simple mail transfer protocol) ■ ■ ■ Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
9 FTP (file transfer protocol) ■ ■ ■ Access, copy, paste, cut waveform capture files on the meter with an FTP Client
NTP (network time protocol) ■ ■ ■ Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up
9 COMTRADE, open IEEE Standard file format for ■ ■ ■
to the 1 millisecond resolution
Import waveform captures in standard IEEE (C37.111-1999) COMTRADE file format to third-
9
Waveform capture export party software
DNP 3.0 over Ethernet (Distributed Network Protocol) ■ ■ ■ Communicate with the meter via DNP 3.0 over Ethernet; hook to existing utility systems
9 Notes
These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality
9 may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications.
1 Delta-Sigma A/D oversampling rate.
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, continued
Power Xpert Meter
9
Feature 4000 6000 8000 Benefit
9
Communications and I/O, continued)
Trend measurements CSV file export ■ ■ ■ Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, e.g., Microsoft Excel in
standard CSV file format
9
I/O (8 digital inputs, 3 relay outputs, 2 solid-state KYZ outputs) ■ ■ ■ The Power Xpert I/O Card is extremely flexible and can be used in a large variety of
different applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to interact
9
during various conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as
alarm, pulse meters, trip units, sensors can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert
Meter. Triggers and events can be tied to the meters standard functions such as e-mail,
9
9
logs and trends
Time Synchronization
NTP time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy ■ ■ ■ Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network up
to the 1 millisecond resolution 9
GPS time synchronization up to 1 millisecond accuracy ■1 ■1 ■1 The GPS option allows the meter to synchronize time over the GPS satellite positioning
system up to the 1 millisecond resolution 9
9
Logs
Trend logging ■ ■ ■ Log trend information for easy statistical analysis
Load profile ■ ■ ■ Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of your electrical load
versus time
9
Event logging ■ ■ ■ Log events for retrospective event analysis
9
Memory and Storage
Standard memory, GB 2 4 8 Store large amounts of waveform captures and events for historical analysis 9
Harmonics
Harmonic levels 127 127 127 Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion 9
■ ■ ■
9
Total harmonic distortion (THD) Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter
Delta-Sigma D/A conversion technology ■ ■ ■ Provides extremely fast, high resolution D/A conversion
Harmonics over-sampling (4096 samples per cycle) ■ ■ ■ Over-sampling enables the usage of Anti-Aliasing technology, increasing accuracy
9
Anti-alias filtering ■ ■ ■ Technology to remove out-of-band signal components resulting in more accurate data
Individual harmonics ■ ■ ■ Review individual harmonic levels directly on the meter 9
Total demand distortion (TDD) ■ ■ ■ Identify harmful harmonics in e.g. lightly loaded variable-speed drive environments where
THD may be high but not relative 9
Interharmonics ■ ■ Interharmonics allow you to see what is going on between the integer multiples of the
fundamental. Zoom in on the harmonics trend graph and review frequency content every
5 Hz instead of every 60 Hz
9
Highlights
9
Sub-cycle disturbance capturing ■ ■ ■ Capture fast voltage changes/low frequency transient (e.g. capacitor switching transient)
dV/dt triggers for sub-cycle oscillatory transients ■ ■ ■ Detect and record a large magnitude oscillation transient resulting in equipment damage 9
Absolute threshold and dV/dt triggering ■ ■ ■ Detect and record if a surge suppressor is necessary
Power quality index—standard (includes dv/dt count, %TDDi and %THDv) ■ ■ ■ Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format 9
Power quality index—enhanced (includes Standard Index plus Sag level, ■ ■ Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format (includes ITIC events
Swell level and Flicker) and flicker calculations) 9
Flicker calculations ■ ■ Detect and quantify low frequency rms voltage variations causing incandescent
lighting flicker 9
Automatic trigger setting ■ ■ Trigger thresholds are automatically set according to ITIC (CBEMA) standard, no need to
figure this out by yourself
9
Automatic event severity analysis ■ ■ Automatically analyze the severity of the event with the ITIC (CBEMA) performance curve
plot, see where the event actually hit
9
Notes
may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications.
9
9
1 When used with third-party device and I/O option.
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, continued

9 Power Xpert Meter
9 Feature 4000 6000 8000 Benefit

Highlights, continued
9 Event severity counters ■ ■ An ITIC (CBEMA) event counter keeps track of the number of all sags, swells and
transients
9 ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously CBEMA
performance curve
■ ■ ITIC (Information Technology Industry Council), previously CBEMA performance curve for
easy power problem evaluation
9 Custom ITIC (CBEMA) plot with individual event magnitude and duration ■ ■ Review custom ITIC (CBEMA) plots of individual events showing you the actual
magnitude, duration and hit are in a simple graphical representation
9 Event calendar view ■ ■ The Events Timeline calendar view provides instant insight to the frequency of power
events and helps detect reoccurring problems
9 Events timeline view ■ ■ View and understand the sequence of events that have occurred during a period of time
Sequence of events and events plot on waveform ■ ■ Plot color-coded events on a captured waveform to gain insight into the sequence of
9 Power quality index—premium (at-a-glance “thermometer” view of ■
events cycle per cycle
Complex power quality data put into simple graphic format (includes ITIC events and
9 power quality)
High-Speed Transient Capture and Detection
flicker calculations)
9 6 MHz capture of impulsive transients ■ Capture impulsive transients by taking 6 samples every millionth of a second
Transient Capture Duration: ~20 ms/6 MHz ~120 ms/1 MHz ■ Record and analyze transients during a longer timeframe
9 Waveform recorded at 100,000 samples per cycle ■ High-speed ensures impulsive transients are correctly captured (fast rise time)
Three-phase voltage and neutral-to-ground fast transient capture ■ Capture impulsive transients on all 4 channels
9 Notes
9 These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features and functionality
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Graphic Display (Option) Features
A menu-driven graphical Highlighting an individual 9
display with information reading on the detail
organized into a user-friendly summary level screen and 9
information architecture. selecting it drills down to a
The homepage (see below)
level including links to min./ 9
max., historical trend plots,
offers: triggers, harmonic spectral
data and waveform viewing.
9
● Graphical level indicator
9
based on a statistical Selecting the trend plot for
analysis for three-phase a given parameter displays Harmonic Spectrum
line-to-line and line-to- a historical graph of the
neutral voltage and per selected parameter over The harmonic spectral plot
displays both harmonics and
9
phase currents to quickly the last 16 hours. The zoom
indicate out of normal buttons change the time
scale to one of several data
interharmonics up to the
85th order. A detailed table 9
readings also includes individual
● Large easy-to-read average
views based on historical
averages with min./max. The magnitudes and angles 9
L-L voltage average phase of current and voltage
Pan button allows scrolling
currents and system
frequency can be
within the selected view. harmonics, as well as a 9
harmonic power calculation
highlighted and selected
using the navigation
at each frequency.
9
control dial to drill down
for additional detail 9
● Menu selections for meter,
power, quality, events and 9
setup are shown for ease
of navigation into display
for more detail, or basic
9
device setup
9
Trend Plot
Waveforms can be displayed Ethernet Settings 9
for currents and voltages.
The waveforms can be
viewed on demand for
Ethernet and other settings
can be input or verified via 9
the Power Xpert Meter
steady-state conditions.
Triggered waveforms can LCD display. 9
also be displayed to view
sag/swell or transient data.
Note: Some of the other settings
are specific only to the Web 9
Browser GUI.
Homepage 9
Highlighting a field such as
the avg. current value and
9
pressing the navigation control
dial brings up a detail screen 9
like the one below.
9
9
Waveform Viewer
ITIC Plot (Power Xpert 6000/8000) 9
The Power Xpert Meter
classifies disturbances and 9
summarizes the results
graphically using the ITIC plot.
The number of ITIC sags and
9
Current Summary swells are indicated for each
of nine severity levels. 9
A pass/fail summary is
shown to indicate how many 9
events are outside the ITIC
pass zone. 9
9
Metering Devices
Power Xpert Graphic Display Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Web Browser Views
9 (Option) Screens
Meter Top Level Screen
9 V-LL avg, V-LN avg, IA, IB, IC,
9 Iavg, freq.
Meter Detail Screens
9 Per phase detail L-L, L-N,
Symmetrical Comp, Aux.
9 Channels, Min./Max. with
date/time of occurrence,
9
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Web Harmonic Spectral Plot
Trend Plots, Triggers, Browser Homepage (Note: 4000 does Steady-State Waveform
Phasors. not include flicker, ITIC) The harmonic spectral plot
The Web server allows the
9 Power Top Level Screen Power Xpert Meter 4000/ user to view waveforms of
displays both harmonics and
interharmonics up to the
6000/8000’s embedded the voltage and current to 85th order. A detailed table
9 Three-Phase Power Factor,
kWHr, kWd, Real-Time kW,
Web server offers Eaton
customers a new level of
spot power quality problems also includes individual
such as notching. magnitudes and angles of
kVAR, kVA, Load Profile Link.
9 accessibility to the critical
current and voltage
Power Detail Screens harmonics, as well as a
manage the electrical
9 Per phase detail, kVA, kVAR, distribution system. The
harmonic power calculation
at each frequency. Even, odd
kW, Min./Max. with date/ embedded Web server
and total THD are displayed
9 time of occurrence, Trend includes real-time circuit
information in both numeric
for diagnostic purposes. In
Plots, Triggers. addition, the Power Xpert
9 Quality Top Level Screen
and graphical formats to help
monitor circuit parameters
6000/8000 provides
interharmonics, which allow
such as current loading,
9 10 min. and 24 hr. PQIndex,
THDI, THDV, K-factor, Crest
voltage and power levels,
users to see what is going
on between the integer
power factor. Events Timeline
9 Factor, Flicker Pst,%9’s of
Reliability. The Web server also provides
(Power Xpert 6000/8000) multiples of the fundamental.
View and understand the
9 Quality Detail Screens
the energy and demand
readings required to help sequence of events that have
manage the cost of energy. occurred during a period
Per phase detail L-L,
9 L-N,V aux, Odd, Even, Readings include kWh, of time. Plot color-coded
events on captured
Interharmonics, Present, kVARh, delivered and
9 Min/Max, Trend Plots, received and kVAh with
time-of-use and separate
waveforms to gain insight
into the sequence of events
Harmonic spectrum plots,
from one single cycle to the
9 waveform plots. status input controlled energy
accumulation to account for next one. This provides the
Events Top Level Screen energy during special times user an excellent vantage
9 Active/Acknowledged Event such as rate alert periods point to review and compare Historical Trend Plot
or stand-by generator times multiple events at an
Graphical Trending of Data
9 list, Trigger List, System Log,
ITIC Curve Link. of operation. unprecedented resolution.
9 Event Detail Screens The Web server also includes
critical information regarding
6000/8000 embedded Web
server supports graphical
Event List, Condition, Power Quality such as trend charts of key circuit
9 Acknowledge Button, harmonic distortion, flicker measurements such as
Trigger Date/Time, Trigger (Power Xpert Meter 6000/ current, voltage, power and
9 description. 8000), crest factor, K-Factor
and more.
energy. The trend chart
supports a zoom feature
Setup Top Level Screen
9 View setup, Edit setup,
that allows the user to view
data over a short period of
9 Login, Logout. 16 hours or a longer period of
48 months. The trend chart
Setup Detail Screens has a horizontal slider bar
9 Quick Setup, Trigger setup, control to manage scrolling
Detail setting. forward and backward
9 through the data. Trend
charts of basic readings
9 include minimum, maximum
and average readings. Trend
9
charts of energy data also
display demand values.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Relay Outputs
The optional PXIO-B card 9
includes three 5A form C
relay outputs rated for 9
240 Vac or 30 Vdc. These
outputs can be used for 9
applications such as:
● Alarm annunciation 9
● KYZ pulse output
Energy Comparison Disturbance Recording Events Calendar
Alarm outputs can be driven
9
(Power Xpert 6000/8000)
Energy usage patterns can be
effortlessly analyzed with the
Sag/Swell Recording The Events Timeline calendar
from triggers based on
metering values. Output 9
month-to-month, week-to- 60 cycles of waveform are view provides instant insight modes include:
week comparison chart. Raw recorded at 256 samples per
cycle including 30 cycles of
to the frequency of power 9
data can be easily exported events and helps detect ● Normal—relay energized
with the “Save Table” option pre- and post-trigger data.
reoccurring problems. Color-
coded events can be filtered ●
during alarm condition
Latched—relay energized
9
to other applications such as
6000/8000 embedded Web
Excel for further analysis or
graphing (firmware version server supports viewing of
to detect specific issues. by event trigger,
de-energized by
9
triggered waveforms one acknowledgement
12.x.x and higher only).
channel at a time including ● Timed—relay energized by 9
Note: All data logging for the ability to zoom and to
event trigger, maintained
trend plotting is automatically
preconfigured in all of the Power
scroll horizontally using a
slider bar. Waveforms are
for a programmed interval. 9
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
meters. In addition, the 6000
stored in Power Xpert
Meter’s 4000/6000/8000
Communications Expansion
Card (CEC)
9
and 8000 Series meters have
non-volatile flash memory
sag, swell and transient triggers
built-in according to the ITIC using an industry standard
The optional CEC Card offers
two Ethernet connection
9
(CBEMA) standard. Comtrade format.
Waveforms can be Configuration Page options, 10/100Base-T and
a fiber-optic port that can 9
automatically sent out by
Web Server Device be used for the following
e-mail following an event,
or can be retrieved from an
Configuration applications: 9
Special software is not
FTP directory structure in the
meter module’s memory. required to configure a Power
● Monitoring, managing and
configuring the meter 9
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000.
remotely using a standard
The embedded Web server
includes comprehensive
Web browser interface like 9
Microsoft Internet Explorer
device set-up capability.
● Alarm notifications via 9
Discrete Contact Inputs e-mail, SMTP
Demand Comparison
The optional PXIO-B ● Enabling access to the 9
Demand comparison expansion card offers 8 digital meter’s FTP server
compares power inputs that are useful for a (energy, trend and 9
consumption day-to-day, variety of applications such as: waveform logs)
month-to-month or week-to-
week. Power Xpert Meters ● Status indication with time
● Providing Modbus TCP/IP
or RTU communications
9
ITIC Analysis Plot
can set to measure demand stamping of transitions
9
(Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000) to BMS systems
at 1 to 60 minute intervals. (1 ms precision).
The ITIC Web page includes ● Providing DNP 3.0 over
Both sliding and fixed interval ● Pulse counting of KYZ or
windows are supported for
counters to track the
occurrence of disturbances other utility pulses such ●
Ethernet to utility systems
Providing SNMP
9
maximum flexibility. and a pass/fail summary. as air, water or gas.
In addition, selecting any ● High-speed triggering of
communications to
NMS systems 9
disturbance counter links to waveforms based on
Synchronizing with an
9
●
a detailed event view of the events such as breaker
trips or static transfers NTP server for 1ms
disturbances in that ITIC timestamping resolution
category. Disturbance
waveforms can be viewed
● Demand interval timing
taken from a master utility
● Asset management 9
via SNMP to Network
from the browser. meter end of interval pulse
Management Systems 9
Status inputs are self sourced ● Updating firmware on
providing a nominal 24 Vdc
(20–30 Vdc) across the circuit.
the meter 9
Names can be configured for 9
each input for ease of use.
9
Metering Devices
Flicker (EN61000-4-15; Power Xpert Meter 6000/8000) Easily Upgrade Your Power
9 Xpert Meter 4000 to a 6000
Flicker values for Eaton understands that our
9 perceptibility, PST and PLT customers’ needs change
are calculated based on over time. That’s why we’ve
9 EN61000-4-15 guidelines. developed meters that can
grow with you. Once a Power
9 Xpert Meter is purchased,
you have the ability to
upgrade to a Power Xpert
9 Power at a Glance Meter 6000, with no
intervention from Eaton,
9 when needed. All the
features of the Power Xpert
9 Meter 4000 that you have
been using and depend on
9 remain, however, once
updated, all the additional
features of the Power Xpert
9 Meter 6000 are available. The
self-upgrade is available on
9 Eaton’s website. You’ll need
a credit card, your Power
9 Xpert Meter 4000 serial
number and data code (you
9
will be presented with this
information if you are using
the upgrade link directly from
9 your Power Xpert Meter)
and your e-mail address.
9 Once you have completed
the purchase, we will send
9 you your new license key
information via e-mail that
will allow you to complete
9 the upgrade.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module Layout
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
I/O Card 9
a Digital inputs 1–8 (option)
b Solid-state outputs 1–2 (option) 9
c Relay outputs 1–3 (option)
CT and Voltage Connections 9
d CT input connections
e Standard three-phase voltage phase inputs 9
f Aux. channel voltage inputs (option)
Communication Expansion Card (LAN/WAN Ethernet Networking) 9
g 100FX ST-type Ethernet (multi-mode) (option)
h 10/100Base-T Ethernet (option) 9
i RS-485 (two-wire w/shield)—24V accessory power (com 2)
Standard Features
9
j Local RJ-45 config. port (non-networkable Ethernet)
k RS-485 (two-wire w/shield) Modbus RTU (com 1)
9
l Meter mounting brackets
9
m Sealable mode switch cover
n Control power (100–240 Vac and 110–250 Vdc) (±20%) 9
o Display RS-485 Network port (up to 15 meters)—24V accessory power (com 0)
p RS-232 (Tx Rx) Modbus RTU (com (3) (option) 9
q Meter base address
r Com Reset Button 9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9 To order a Power Xpert factory. Option cards are 6000/8000 modules over a Example 1: PXM8251A1BB
Meter 4000/6000/8000, the also field installable for distance of up to 1000 ft. (PXM 8000 Meter, w/ VAUX,
9 catalog number should be field upgrades. Power Xpert Meter modules Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. &
determined using the chart include panel mounting I/O Cards)
9 shown below. The chart If a display is required, it
should be ordered separately.
brackets. The multi-meter
Example 2: PXM6251A1BA
illustrates how to include the graphic display is designed to
9 desired factory options as
part of a catalog number.
The multi-meter graphic
display is capable of
mount separately. If back-to-
back meter to display panel
(PXM 6000 Meter, w/ VAUX,
Std. Pwr, Com. Exp. Card)
displaying data from an
9 Option cards that are
selected at time of order RS-485 daisychain of up to
mounting is desired, a
mounting bracket kit is
entry will be installed at the 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/ available (PX-PMBA).
9
9
PXM 8 0 5 1 A 1 B B
9
9
9 Model Series Card Slot 3 Configuration
4 = 4000 (Standard A = No card option
9 power quality, 2 GB)
6 = 6000 (Enhanced
B = I/O option card
(8 digital inputs, 2 solid-state
power quality, 4 GB) outputs, 3 relay outputs)
9 8 = 8000 (Premium PQ
w/ transient capture, 8 GB)
Card Slot 2 Configuration
9 Voltage Input Configuration
A = No card option
B = Communication expansion card
9 0 = Standard (V1, V2, V3, V4)
2 = Standard plus auxiliary
for LAN/WAN Ethernet
networking w/10/100Base-T,
(V6, V7, V8) 100F, RS-485, RS-232 ports
9
Card Slot 1 Configuration
9 Power Supply Configuration
1 = Standard 100–240 Vac or
1 = Standard Communications Module with RS-485
110–250 Vdc power supply
9
Example 1: PXM8251A5BB (PXM 8000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp. and I/O cards)
9 Example 2: PXM6251A6BA (PXM 6000 meter, w/ VAUX, std. pwr., com. exp.card)
9
Accessories
9
9 Catalog
Description Number
9 Graphic display module PXD-MMG
9
Communication expansion card for LAN/WAN Ethernet networking: 100FX fiber-optic, 10/100T, RS-485, RS-232 PXMCE-B 1
Digital I/O card: eight digital input, two solid-state output, three relay output PXMIO-B 1
9 Panel mounting bracket assembly for back-to-back meter to graphic display mounting PX-PMBA
Panel mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a graphic display to an IQ Analyzer cutout PX-PMBB
9 Panel mounting bracket assembly for reduced graphic display rear clearance PX-PMBC
Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 license upgrade key PXM-4KUPG
9 Notes
9
1 These items can be ordered separately or preinstalled in the meter by selecting option B in the model number.
Communication cable (standard Modbus RTU) is not included in the package for meter module connection.
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Environmental Conditions Voltage Inputs (Each Channel) Solid-State Outputs
9
Operating temperature: Conversion: 4096 rms Maximum load:
9
● ● ●
● Meter: –20 to +70°C samples per cycle delta- 100 milliamps

sigma converter digitally
Display: –20 to +60°C Maximum voltage: 30V
9
● ●
operating filtered down to 512 (externally sourced)

● Storage temperature: samples per cycle for
–40 to +85°C anti-aliasing Control Power Input
● Input range AC:
9
● Operating humidity: ● PT input: 120V–500,000V
●
5% to 95% condensing
Device weight: 7.1 lbs—
primary
●
100–240 Vac (±20%)
Frequency range:
9
● Input range: 600V L-L,
●
meter 2.1 lbs—display
Meter and back of
347 L-N direct connect
●
47–63 Hz
Input range DC:
9
display are pollution
● Nominal full scale:
degree 2 1000V rms
●
110–250 Vdc ±20%
Burden 50 VA
9
● Elevation to 6562 ft ● Input impedance:
Ride-through: 1–5s
9
●
(2000m) 2 megohms
Current Inputs (Each Channel) Frequency Range
● Conversion: 4096 samples ● 47–63 Hz 9
per cycle delta-sigma
converter digitally filtered
down to 512 samples
Harmonic Response
(Voltage, Current) 9
● 127th harmonic
9
per cycle
● CT Input: 4096 rms Accuracy
samples per cycle delta- ANSI C12.20 0.2 Class
9
●
sigma converter digitally ● IEC 687 0.2 Class

filtered down to 512
samples per cycle for Discrete Inputs 9
anti-aliasing ● Self sourced: 24 Vdc
● Burden: less than Relay Output Contacts 9
10 milliohms ● 5A maximum, 240 Vac
● Overload withstand: maximum, 30 Vdc 9
500A for 1 second, maximum
●
non-repeating
Range: 0.005–20A
● Lifetime: 1,000,000 no 9
load operations
●
continuous
Accuracy: 0.05% or
● 100,000 under rated 9
voltage and load
reading plus 0.01%
of full scale (from 9
50 milliamps to 20A)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Delta (Up to 600 Volts)
9 Control
Power
Voltage Inputs Current Inputs
V1 V2 V3 V4 VR 5 4 3 2 1
3
9 (–) N 52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
PSI-
2
(+) L
9
1
Protective
Earth /
Chassis
9 Disconnect
Switch
Ground
9 Breaker Shorting
Disconnect Block
9 Switch
9
L3
9
9
L2
Load
Line
9 L1
9
9 Three-Phase, Three-Wire Delta (Above 600 Volts)
Control
9 Voltage Inputs Current Inputs
Power
V1 V2 V3 V4 VR 5 4 3 2 1
3
9 (–) N 52 51 42 41 32 31 22 21 12 11
PSI-
2
(+) L
1
9 Protective
Earth /
Chassis
9 Disconnect
Switch
Ground
9 Breaker Shorting
Block
Disconnect
9 Switch
9
L3
9
L2
9
Load
Line
9
L1
9
Note
9 Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples
Display Link Accessories—I/O Card (Option)
9
Up to 16 Meters can be Daisy-Chained to a Single
Power Xpert Meter LCD Display
9
9
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count) 9
…Up to 16
Rack Monitoring—
Open Door/Tamper Switch
9
Display Link (RS-485) 9
Modbus RTU (RS-485)—Non-Web Enabled
9
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
Master Alarm
Trip and Sequence
of Events 9
• Eight Programmable Digital Inputs
• Two Solid-State Programmable Outputs
• Three Relay Programmable Outputs 9
IT Configuration Examples—Accessories—I/O Card (Option
9
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
…Up to 16
9
9
Water Leak and
Vibration Sensors
Display Link (RS-485)

Rack Monitoring
— Open Door/
9
Web Enabled—Browser and Modbus TCP Tamper Switch
Modbus RTU (RS-485)

Web Modbus TCP
9
Browser Master
9
Master
Alarm
Smoke Alarm 9
• 8 Programmable Digital Inputs
• 2 Solid-State Programmable Outputs
• 3 Relay Programmable Outputs
9
Modbus RTU (RS-485) 9
…Up to 16 9
9
Web Enabled—Advanced System Functionality 9
9
Modbus RTU (RS-485) Power Xpert Web Modbus TCP
Master Insight Browser Master
9
9
9
Modbus RTU (RS-485)
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Multimeter Graphic Display (PXD-MMG)—Sold Separately,
9 Supports up to 16 Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Modules
9
7.22
(183.5)
9 1.50 1.45
CW
Factory Sealed
(38.1) (36.8)
9 5X #8 – 32 Thread
Thread Depth 0.31
9 7.80 0.57 3.00 Ref. 3.00 Ref.
(198.0) (14.5) (76.2) (76.2)
9
9 Health Events
9
9
Model#: PX8000 Rev: 1
Catalog#: PX8054A1CB Date Code: C050131
9.02 7.22 7.76 Ref. Style#: 65D8054G010

Serial#: 000042
G.O.#: XXXXXXXXXX
Power Supply: 24 VDC (+/ -20%)
(229.0) (183.5) (197.1) SELV, 8W MAX.

Oper Temp: -20 TO 60°C
9 Push to Select • Hold for Help

MADE IN CANADA
Turn to Highlight
9
Customer Satisfaction for Techni cal Support
BACK
www.EatonElectrical or
htt //
1 -800 -809-
E t 2772
El t or
i 1-
l 414-
E18555 24VDC Input Display Link
9 Power Com 0
DG3 - DG2- DG1-
10/100 T 4 3 2 1 3 2 1
TXR Li C 24
O + SH SH D D
9
CW DX nk
B A
9 1.04 4.00 Ref.

(26.3) (101.6)
9 0.46
(11.6)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Module
9
9
9.56 (242.8)
9
9
9
4x Ø 0.20
(Ø 5.2) 9
4x R0.11
(R2.8) 9
6.72 (208.3) 9
8.88 (255.6)
6.33 (160.8)
9
9
9
8.32
(211.3)
9
5.00
7.36
(127.0)
9
9
(186.9)
9
1.60
(40.6)
0.42 (10.7) 8.20 (208.3) 0.34

(8.6)
9
9
Meter Base Unit 9
Width Height Depth
9.56 (242.8) 8.88 (225.6) 6.72 (170.8) 1 9
Display Unit 9
Height Width Depth
9
Projection In Front of Panel Surface
9.02 (229.0) 7.80 (198.1) 1.04 (26.3) 9
Behind Panel Surface
9.02 (229.0) 7.80 (198.1) 1.45 (36.8) 9
Note
1 Including optional wall mounting brackets.
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
Description Page
9 Metering Products Family. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . .
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters. . . . . . . V3-T9-45
9 IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters . . . . V3-T9-56
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9 Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9 An Eaton
Green Solution
9
9
9
9 Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 The embedded Web server
Identify Power Quality Problems
9 Series power quality
instrument monitors the
displays comprehensive
power quality data using to Help:
most critical aspects of an standard Internet browsers ● Protect motors from
9 electrical distribution system. and allows for device damage
This premier power quality configuration from the ● Preserve the integrity of
9 metering instrument uses the browser. The embedded processes and batches
latest in advanced technology Web server presents real ● Prevent blown capacitor
9 to make it simple to use,
powerful, scalable and highly
time, historical and event
information in a browser-style
bank fuses
● Protect transformers and
flexible. The Power Xpert graphical format to help the
9 Meter 2000 offers the user interpret information
conductors from
overheating
same level of intuitive user such as current loading,
9 interface design as the Power voltage and power levels, Monitor Circuit Loading
Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000, power factor, energy usage, to Help:
9 presenting critical electrical
distribution system
I/O status, power quality
measurements, as well
● Avoid overloads and
nuisance overload trips
9 information in a simple
to navigate and easy-to-
as harmonic plots. The
embedded Web server also ● Maximize equipment
understand information allows for waveform capture utilization
9 architecture. and for visualizing steady- ● Manage emergency
state harmonic content that is overloads
9 critical for power quality
analysis. Manage Energy Utilization
9 The Web server provides the
to Help:
● Reduce peak demand
energy and demand readings
9 required to help manage the
cost of energy.
charges and power
factor penalties
9
● Identify excessive energy
consumption
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Features, Benefits and Physical Characteristics waveforms in any standard The on-board gateway limits
Functions Format free-of-charge or commercial can trigger an alarm off of any 9
COMTRADE file viewer. measured parameter on any
Metered/Monitored Parameters
● Power Xpert Meter 2000
with integral display
of the PXM 2000 model 9
Note: See Table on Historical Trend Logging series. These triggers permit
Page V3-T9-38. ● Power Xpert Meter 2000
transducer only (no display)
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 pickup, reset and pickup
delay to be configured by
9
● Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, records historical data for
Avg. L-N
●
meter module
NEMA rating: NEMA 12,
graphical viewing from the
embedded Web server.
the user.
9
● Phase and neutral currents Event Logging
Graphical views of historical
● Power: real, reactive
IP42 front of panel rating
data support pan and zoom. The Power Xpert Meter 9
and apparent Power Xpert 2000 Embedded Over 100 standard metering 2000 embedded Web server
● Frequency Web Server parameters are logged as allows the user to view a 9
● Power factor: apparent The Power Xpert Meter 2000 part of the standard meter list of triggered events. In
● Energy: real, forward, embedded Web server offers functionality including min./
max. and average for each
addition, a separate system
log records system operations
9
reverse, sum Eaton customers a new level
● Demand: peak with date of accessibility to the critical
parameter. The averages
are calculated over the
such as resets.
9
and time interval period. E-mail
9
manage their electrical
● % THD distribution system. The The Power Xpert Meter 2000
● Minimum and maximum Web server includes real-time Energy Profile Data contains the ability to send
values information in both numeric The Power Xpert Meter 2000 e-mails based on an event 9
● Harmonics and graphical visual formats records Real and Reactive that has been triggered or
● Individual harmonics to help monitor parameters
such as current loading,
energy forward, reverse, net
and absolute sum, as well
cleared along with the option
to send an event or data log
9
● Demand comparisons
● Phasors
voltage and power levels,
power factor, THD and more.
as apparent energy (kVAH).
These readings are stored
file. The Power Xpert Meter
2000 also has the ability to 9
The Web server also provides on a fixed 5 minute interval. send a configurable periodic
Accuracy energy and demand readings Up to 4 status inputs can e-mail with meter 9
Note: Under typical operating with graphic usage plots to be configured as energy information.
conditions. help analyze energy usage accumulators for counting 9
● Currents: 0.1% RV patterns. Energy readings KYZ pulse inputs. Inputs and Outputs
● Voltage: 0.1% RV include kWh, kVARh, delivered
and received and kVAh Demand Comparisons
Power Xpert Meter 2000 is 9
● Energy and demand available with a standard KYZ
power: 0.2% in accordance
with ANSI C12.20
with time. Demand usage patterns can
be analyzed with the month-
output and optional digital I/O
cards that includes:
9
The Power Xpert Meter 2000
9
Frequency: ±0.03 Hz to-month, week-to-week
●
embedded Web server ● Two relay outputs/two
comparison chart built into
● Power factor: 0.2% RV supports graphical trend charts status inputs
the meter. Raw data can be
Communications
of key measurements such as
current, voltage, power and
exported as a.csv file with the ● Four KYZ pulses/four 9
“Save Table” option to other status inputs
energy. The trend chart
Multiple communications
ports including: supports a zoom feature that
applications for further
analysis and graphing.
● Four analog outputs
0–1 mA
9
allows the user to view data
Standard over predefined ranges from
Event Triggers
● Four analog outputs
4–20 mA
9
■ RS-485 Modbus RTU as little as 16 hours to as much
slave port as 4 years. The trend chart
includes zoom in/out buttons
The Power Xpert Meter 2000
has two levels of configurable Inputs can also be configured 9
● 10/100Base-T Ethernet event triggers: for demand synch and pulse
network port
and a horizontal slider bar
control to manage scrolling ● On-board meter limits
counting. Inputs selected for 9
pulse counting can be scaled.
forward and backward through
Communication Protocols
Supported the data. Trend charts of basic
(PXM 2260/2270/2280/
2290)
Accumulated pulse recordings
are maintained in profile
9
readings include minimum, memory. Outputs can be
Modbus RTU On-board gateway
9
● ●
maximum and average used for alarm annunciation.
● Modbus TCP card limits
readings. Trend charts of
●
●
BACnet/IP
Ethernet TCP/IP
interval by interval energy data
also display peak demand.
The on-board meter limits
can be set for any measured
Ratings 9
● Application to any PT ratio,
● HTTP, HTTPS
Waveform Display
parameter, for up to 16 limits.
If either of the 16 limits are
no PTs required to 600 Vac 9
● NTP (Network Time ● CT ratios to any CT ratio
The Power Xpert Meter 2000 exceeded, an alarm condition
Protocol)
can record waveforms at up to will be present and illuminate ● CT inputs available as 5 or 9
● SMTP (Simple Mail 512 samples per cycle. one of the LEDs on the meter 1A secondary
●
Transfer Protocol)
SNMP (Simple Network
Waveform captures are faceplate. The on-board ● Separate source control 9
automatically stored on the meter out of limits can also power input:
Management Protocol)
v1, v3
FTP server in the IEEE
standard COMTRADE file
be used to energize a relay
output, if so equipped.
● 90–265 Vac or 9
100–370 Vdc
DNP 3.0 format. This allows users to
9
●
● Low voltage 18–60 Vdc
view and analyze the
Metering Devices
Displayed Information
9 ● Monitored information is ● True rms values through
available locally through the 40th harmonic
9 display, the Web browser ● ANSI C12.20 Class.2%
or system power revenue metering
9 management software specification
9
Power Xpert 2000 Web Browser Views
9
9
9
9
9
Real-Time Visualization of Harmonic Historical Trend Plot Energy Demand Profile
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Web Browser
Content
Power Xpert Meter 2000’s Energy managers can view
The Web server offers a Graphical Trending of Data
embedded Web server offers load profile data compared
9 Eaton customers a new level
waveform view to visualize The Power Xpert Meter 2000 against the peak demand.
steady-state harmonic embedded Web server The plot allows comparison
of accessibility to the critical
9 information required to
content of the voltage
and current to spot power
supports graphical trend
charts of key circuit
of present and past months’
manage the electrical usage.
measurements such as
9 distribution system. The quality problems.
current, voltage, power and Web Server Device
embedded Web server
energy. The trend chart Configuration
9 includes real time circuit
information in both numeric
supports a zoom feature Special software is not
that allows the user to view required to configure a
and graphical formats to help
9 monitor parameters such as
data over a short period of
16 hours or a longer period of
Power Xpert Meter 2000.
current loading, voltage and The embedded Web server
9 power levels and power
48 months. The trend chart
has a horizontal slider bar
includes a comprehensive
factor. The Web server also device configuration engine.
control to manage scrolling
9 provides the energy and
demand readings required to
forward and backward Discrete Contact Inputs
through the data. Trend
9 help manage the cost of
energy. Readings include
Harmonic Spectral Plot charts of basic readings
The optional I/O expansion
cards offers two or four
The harmonic spectral plot include minimum, maximum
kWh, kVARh, delivered and digital inputs that are useful
9 received and kVAh. The Web displays harmonics up to the
40th order. A detailed table
and average readings. Trend
charts of energy data also
for a variety of applications
server also includes critical such as:
9 information regarding power also includes individual
magnitudes and angles of
display demand values.
● Pulse counting of KYZ or
quality such as harmonic
current and voltage other utility pulses such as
9 distortion.
harmonics, at each air, water or gas
frequency. Individual and ● Demand interval timing
9 total THD are displayed for taken from a master utility
diagnostic purposes. meter end of interval pulse
9 Names can be configured for
each input for ease of use.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Relay Outputs PXM 2000 Rear View
The optional I/O card 9
includes two 5A Form C relay
outputs rated for 240 Vac or 9
30 Vdc or four Form A solid-
state outputs. These outputs 9
can be used for applications
such as:
9
● Alarm annunciation
c
● KYZ pulse output 9
Alarm outputs can be driven
from triggers based on 9
metering values.
a
9
Analog Outputs
The optional IO card includes d 9
either four 4–20 mA outputs
or 0–1 mA outputs. These 9
outputs can be used for
applications such as:
e 9
● Input to BMS or PLC
b
systems for tracking a 9
measured meter
parameter 9
f
9
Standard Communications Card
The standard communications
card provides one Ethernet
connection and 10/100Base- g 9
T port (copper only) that can
be used for the following
a Power supply inputs 9
applications:
● Monitoring, managing and
b
c
System voltage inputs
NEMA 12 gasket
9
configuring the meter
remotely using a standard
d
e
RS-485
KYZ out
9
Web browser interface
● Alarm notifications via f Meter gateway card 9
email, SMTP g I/O slot
● Providing Modbus TCP/IP, 9
RTU and BACnet/IP
communications to
BMS systems
9
● Providing SNMP
communications to
9
●
NMS systems
Synchronizing with an
9
NTP server
● Asset management 9
Updating firmware on
9
●
the meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Power Xpert Meter 2250 Power Xpert Meter 2270 Power Xpert Meter 2290
9 ● Measures basic meter Features of PXM 2260 plus: Features of PXM 2280 plus:
parameters
9 Harmonics, including Records waveforms at up
● ●
● 256 MB for data logging individual to 512 samples per cycles

Ethernet Waveform view to visualize
9
● ●
● On-board gateway card steady-state harmonic

limits/alarms content
9 ● 768 MB for data logging
Power Xpert Meter 2260
9 Features of PXM 2250 plus: The Power Xpert Meter 2280
● Harmonics Features of PXM 2270 plus:
9 ● On-board meter hardware ● Records waveforms at up
limits to activate optional to 64 samples per cycles
9 relay outputs ● Configures the total, pre-
● Visual indication of limits and post-event cycles
9 exceeded at meter face
● 512 MB for data logging
9
9 Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270/2280/2290
Power Xpert Meter
9 Feature 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 Benefit
9 General
Embedded Web server ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Use a standard Web browser to monitor and manage the meter over the network
9 Firmware flash upgrade support ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enables you to flash the meter with the latest firmware upgrades
9 Voltage, current: per phase minimum, maximum, average, trend graph ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Review voltage and current trends, export, print and analyze parameters right on the
analysis, export, print meter or external software
9 Demand: forward, reverse, net sum, profile, export, print, plot comparisons ■
month-to-month, week-to-week
■ ■ ■ ■ Plot two months or two weeks for vivid demand comparison, receive e-mails with
trend logs
9 Power, apparent, real, reactive, power factor ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Review power usage and power factor and avoid potential PF penalties
Energy: forward, reverse, net, sum ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Keep track of your energy usage, identify peaks to conserve energy usage, receive e-mails
9 with trend logs
Power Quality Analysis
9 Statistical analysis (min., max., average) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Review statistical trends, identify past and future problem areas
Sampling rate, maximum samples/cycle 400 400 400 400 400 High sampling rate resulting in high accuracy
9 Security
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Secure two level user access privileges Define appropriate security access level per user
Communications
9 Modbus TCP ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Easy integration with standard protocol to power management and other software
Modbus RTU ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Integrate meters to existing Modbus networks, daisy chain several (1–32)
9 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
meters together
BACnet/IP Easily integrate into existing building management systems without the need for external
9 HTTP, HTTPS ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
protocol adapters
Communicate to the meter over the Internet via standard Web browser
9 SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Communicate with the meter via Simple Network Protocol; hook to existing NMS system
SMTP (Simple Mail Transfer Protocol) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Send e-mail messages via standard Simple Mail Transfer Protocol
9 NTP (Network Time Protocol) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Network Time Protocol support enables the meter to synchronize time over the network
DNP 3.0 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Easy integration with DNP networks (serial)
9 Trend measurements CSV file export ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Easily export trend measurements to third-party applications, in standard CSV file format
9 Note
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meters 2250/2260/2270, continued
Power Xpert Meter
9
Feature 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 Benefit
9
Logs
Trend logging ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Log trend information for easy statistical analysis 9
Load profile ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Review the load profile graph to get a better understanding of your electrical load
versus time 9
Event logging ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Log events for retrospective event analysis
Memory and Storage 9
9
Memory, MB 256 512 768 768 768 Store trend data and events for historical analysis
Harmonics
Harmonic levels 40th 40th 40th 40th Allows you to identify potential harmful harmonics
9
Total harmonic distortion (THD) ■ ■ ■ ■ Review the total harmonic distortion level directly on the meter
Individual harmonics ■ ■ ■ Provides simple metric for power quality viewable from the embedded Web server 9
Waveform
Waveform display ■ ■ ■ A single-cycle waveform view on a PC, through embedded Web server, to visualize steady- 9
state harmonic content to identify power quality issues
Waveform recording 64 512 Ability to record waveforms up to specified samples/cycle 9
9
I/O
I/O (two relay outputs/two status inputs, Opt Opt Opt Opt Opt The Power Xpert meter 2000 I/O Cards are extremely flexible and can be used in a large
four KYZ pulses/four status inputs, variety of different applications. Digital inputs and relay outputs can be programmed to
four analog outputs 0–1 mA,
four analog outputs 4–20 mA)
interact during various conditions defined by the user. Various third-party devices, such as
alarms, pulse meters, trip units and sensors, can be easily integrated to the Power Xpert
9
9
Meter 2000. Triggers and events can be tied to the meter’s standard functions such as
e-mail, logs and trends. Analog outputs can be programmed to output meter parameters
to BMS or PLC systems
Note 9
9
Standards and Certifications 9
● UL/cUL Electrical and
Electronic Measuring and 9
Test Equipment 22CZ
● Accuracy: IEC/EN60687 9
0.2 Class, ANSI C12.20
0.2 Class 9
● ANSI C62.41 Burst
● CE Mark 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000
PXM 2250 M A 6 5 1 0 5
9
9 Model Series 1
2250 = Energy meter I/O Slot 2
9 2260 = Power quality meter

2270 = Power quality plus meter
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system
5 = Gateway card
2280 = Power quality plus with up to 64 6 = 60 Hz system Power Supply

9 samples/cycle waveform recording
meter
1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc
I/O Slot 1
4 = 24–60 Vdc 0 = None
2290 = Power quality plus with up to 512
9 samples/cycle recording meter
1 = 2 Relay outputs/2 status inputs
2 = 4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs
Current Input 3 = 4 Analog outputs: 0–1 mA
9 Meter Type 1 = 1 amp secondary 4 = 4 Analog outputs: 4–20 mA
M = Meter (with integral 5 = 5 amp secondary
9 display)
T = Transducer only
(no display)
9
Example 1:PXM2270MA65145 (PXM 2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO)
9 Example 2:PXM2250MA65105 (PXM 2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A, 90–265 Vac/Vdc)
Note
9 1 Refer to Page V3-T9-39 for model-specific features.
9 To order a Power Xpert Meter Power Xpert meter modules

2000, the catalog number include panel mounting
9 should be determined using brackets.
the chart shown above.
9 The chart illustrates how to Example 1:
PXM2270MA65145 (PXM
include the desired factory
9 options as part of a catalog
number. Option cards that are
2270 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90–265 Vac/Vdc W/4AO).
9 selected at time of order

entry will be installed at the
Example 2:
PXM2250MA65105 (PXM
factory. Option cards are
9 also field installable for
2250 Meter/Display 60 Hz, 5A,
90–265 Vac/Vdc).
future upgrades.
9
Accessories
9
9 Power Xpert Meter 2000
Description Catalog Number
9 Panel mounting bracket assembly for retrofitting a PXM 2000 to an IQ analyzer/IQ DP4000/IQ data cutout IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK
9
Power Xpert Meter 2000 I/O Cards
9 Description Catalog Number
9 PXM 2000 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 KYZ Pulses/4 status inputs
IQ250/260-IO1
IQ250/260-IO2
9 PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3

PXM 2000 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
PXM 2250/2260/2270 Electronic Power Meter Technical Information 9
Current Inputs Isolation Serial Communications Format 9
● Class 10: 5 amp nominal, ● All inputs and outputs are ● Connection type: RS-485
10 amp maximum galvanically isolated to (through back plate) 9
● Class 2: 1 amp nominal, 2500 volts ● Com port baud rate:
2 amp maximum
Environmental Ratings
9600–57,600 bauds 9
● Fault current withstand: ● Com port address: 01–247
● 100 amps for
● Operating temperature:
–20ºC to +70°C
● Data format: 8-bit, no parity 9
10 seconds ● Protocols: Modbus ASCII,
● 300 amps for 3 seconds
● Storage temperature:
–20ºC to +70°C
RTU or DNP 3.0 9
● 500 amps for 1 second
● Continuous current
● Operating humidity: to
95% RH noncondensing
Network Communications
Format
9
withstand: 20 amps for
screw terminated or pass-
● Faceplate rating:
● NEMA 12
● Connection type: RJ-45
10/100Base-T Ethernet
9
through connections
● Programmable current: ● Mounting gasket
included ●
network port
Protocols: Ethernet TCP/IP,
9
full scale to any CT ratio
Modbus TCP, BACnet/IP,
● Burden: 0.005 VA per
Sensing Method HTTP, HTTPS, NTP, SMTP, 9
phase maximum at SNMP
Voltage, current: true rms
9
●
11 amps
● Pickup current: 0.1% of
● Power: sampling at over
KYZ Pulse
400 samples per cycle on
nominal
● Class 10: 5 mA
all channels
● Contacts: one Form A 9
● Harmonics resolution:
● On resistance, maximum:
● Class 2: 1 mA
40th order 35 ohms 9
● Connections: ● Peak switching voltage:
● Pass-through wire gauge Update Rate 350 Vdc 9
dimension: 0.177 inches ● Watts, VAR and VA: ● Continuous load current:
●
(4.5 mm)
Quick connect: 0.25-inch
100 msec at 60 Hz 120 mA 9
● All other parameters: ● Peak load current: 350 mA
(6.35 mm) male tab 1 second at 60 Hz (10 ms) 9
● Off-state leakage current at
Voltage Inputs
● Range:
Power Supply
● AC/DC voltage option:
350 Vdc: 1 uA
9
● Opto-isolation: 3750 Vac
9
● Line-to-neutral 90–265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
20–576 Vac 100–370 Vdc, universal AC/
Line-to-Line 0–721 Vac DC supply
9
●
● Programmable voltage ● DC voltage option:

range: full scale to any 18–60 Vdc
PT ratio ● Burden: 10 VA maximum 9
● Supported systems:
● Three element wye, 9
2.5 element wye
● Two element delta, four- 9
wire delta systems
● Input impedance: 9
1 megohm/phase.
● Burden: 0.36 VA/phase 9
maximum at 600V;
0.014 VA at 120V 9
● Connection: 7-pin
0.400-inch pluggable 9
terminal block, AWG
#12–26 (0.129–3.31 mm2)
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
Service: Wye or Delta, Four-Wire with No PTs, Two or Three CTs
9 N A B C N A B C
9
9
9
GND GND
9 HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply
VRef
9 Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
A
Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
VRef
A
B B
9 C x
9
9
9
9 C C
9 N A B C
A
9
N A B C
B A B
9
9 Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs
A B C
9
9
9
9
GND
9 HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply
VRef
9
Ic Ib Ia
LO LO LO
A
B
9 C
C C
9 or
9
B A B A
9
9 Not Connected to Meter
9 A B C
9 Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Meters Configuration and Wiring Examples
IT Configuration Examples—Accessories—I/O Cards
9
PXM 2000 Display Front View (Option)
9
Building
9
Modbus RTU Power Xpert Web Modbus TCP Automation
(RS-485) Master Insight Browser Master System
Water Leak and

Vibration Sensors 9
Rack Monitoring 9
— Open Door/
Tamper Switch
9
9
Modbus RTU
(RS-485)
9
9
Smoke Alarm
Alarm
• Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs

• Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs 9
• Four programmable analog outputs
Accessories—I/O Cards (Option)

9
9
9
Flow Meter
(Pulse Count)
9
Rack Monitoring
9
— Open Door/
Tamper Switch 9
9
9
9
Alarm Trip and Sequence
of Events
9
• Two relay programmable outputs/two programmable inputs
• Four KYZ pulses/four programmable inputs
• Four programmable analog outputs
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9 PXM 2000 Display Front View PXM 2000 Transducer Only Side View
9 4.85
(123.2)
9
9 4.85
(123.2)
9 4.85
(123.2)
9
9 0.77
(19.6)
9 0.91
(23.1)
3.25
(82.6)
9 PXM 2000 Rear View ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout
9 3.38
(85.9)
9 4 x .02
(0.5)
9 4.00
(101.6)
9
3.54
(89.9)
9
9
9 3.54 1.69
(42.9)
(89.9)
9 PXM 2000 Meter/Display Side View DIN Mounting Cutout
9 0.08
(2.0)
3.62
(92.0)
9
9
9 3.62
(92.0)
5.02
9 (127.5)
9
9
Description Specifications
9 0.95
(24.0)
3.25 0.77 Weight 2 lbs (0.9 kg)
(82.6) (19.6) Basic unit 5.00 (127.0) H x 4.90 (124.5) W x 5.00 (127.0) L
9 PXM 2250/2260/2270 Mounts in 3.62-inch (92.0) mm DIN and ANSI C39.1
round cut-outs
9 Shipping container dimensions 6-inch cube
9 Tolerance
Projection in front of panel surface
±0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 1.01 (25.6) L
9 Projection behind panel surface 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 1.01 (25.6) L
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
IQ 250 and 260 Electronic Power Meters
Description Page
9
Metering Products Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . .
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-46
Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47 9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-50
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters . . . V3-T9-51 9
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters. . . . V3-T9-56
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-61
V3-T9-64
9
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-72
V3-T9-78 9
IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97 9
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107 9
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119 9
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121 9
9
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters 9
Product Description
The IQ 250 and IQ 260 When space is at a premium,
● Utility and commercial
● Measure and display real-
9
Meters provide capabilities
you would not normally
yet you need ANSI C12.20
accuracy, the IQ 250/ 260 ●
metering
Substations, industrial
time information about
critical power parameters 9
expect in affordable, ultra- series fit the bill. These with a sampling rate of 400
9
facilities, power generation
compact meters, such as fast meters are ideal for electrical sites and campuses samples per cycle
sampling rate and accurate equipment assemblies, Sub-metering ● Monitor power utilization
9
●
metering for a full range of machine control panels, and quality with ANSI
power attributes. Providing such as panelboard and
● Load studies and voltage
recording C12.20 accuracy
the first line of defense
against costly power
switchboard mains and
feeders, low voltage metal- ● Analog meter replacement
(0.2 percent) 9
● Optional 128 KB for data
problems, Eaton’s IQ 250 enclosed switchgear feeders
and IQ 260 electronic power and motor control centers.
logging, which guards
against loss of historical
9
meters can perform the work Requiring far less space than
of an entire wall of legacy other meters with similar
●
data
Verify meter accuracy
9
metering equipment using functionality, IQ 250/260
today’s technology. series fit into a standard ANSI
or IEC cutout on a panelboard
with KYZ test pulse self-
certification capabilities 9
Standard Modbus RTU
9
●
or other electrical equipment,
and therefore fit easily into communications
retrofit applications. Available as transducer
9
●
only or with display

● Designed to accommodate
upgrades 9
● Integrate into Eaton’s
Power Xpert architecture 9
for a holistic system-
level view 9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Additional Features
9
Features of IQ 250 and IQ 260 Electronic Power Meters
9 Features IQ 250 IQ 260
9 Instrumentation
Current, per phase ■ ■
9 Current demand ■ ■
Calculated neutral current ■ ■
9 Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) ■ ■
■ ■
9
Frequency
9 Real, reactive and apparent power, total and per phase (kW, kVAR, kVA) ■ ■
Real, reactive and apparent energy, total and per phase (kWh, kVARh, kVAh) ■ ■
9 Real, reactive and apparent power demand ■ ■

Power factor, total and per phase ■ ■
9 Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, THD (IQ 260), kW, kVAR, kVA ■ ■
9 Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, fixed) ■ ■
9 Communications
RS-485 ■ ■
9 KYZ output ■ ■
■ ■
9
Modbus RTU
Modbus ASCII ■ ■
9 DNP 3.0 ■ ■
Data Logging
9 128 KB for data logging Opt. Opt.
I/O
9 Two digital in /two digital out 1 Opt. Opt.
9
Four digital in/four KYZ out Opt. Opt.
Four analog output (4–20 mA) 2 Opt. Opt.
9 Four analog output (0–1 mA) Opt. Opt.

Power Quality Analysis
9 Total harmonic distortion (THD) voltage and current per phase ■
Alarming
9 Set point driven alarm ■
9 Notes
1 Digital out with IQ 250 requires external command.
9
2 Requires external power supply.

9 ● IEC 687: 0.2% accuracy
● ANSI C12.20: 0.2% accuracy
9 ● ANSI C62.41: Burst
UL/cUL: Electrical and
9
●
electronic measuring and

test equipment 22CZ
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
IQ 250/260 Meter 9
IQ 250 M A 6 5 1 1 0 9
9
Model Series
250 = Energy
Data Logging
A = None 0 = None
I/O Slot 1
0 = None
I/O Slot 2
9
Current Input
9
260 = Power quality L = Data logging 1 = Two relay outputs/ 1 = Two relay outputs/
1 = 1 amp secondary
two status inputs two status inputs
5 = 5 amp secondary
2 = Four KYZ pulses/ 2 = Four KYZ pulses/
Meter Type
M = Meter (with
Frequency
5 = 50 Hz system Power Supply
four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs:
four status inputs
3 = Four analog outputs: 9
integral display) 6 = 60 Hz system 0–1 mA 0–1 mA
T = Transducer only
(no display)
1 = 90–265 Vac/Vdc
4 = 24–48 Vdc
4–20 mA
4–20 mA
9
9
Accessories
IQ 250/260 Meter
9
9
Panel mounting adapter for retrofitting an IQ 250/260 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ data cutout IQ250-PMAK
PXM 2000 Gateway card kit to upgrade an IQ 250/260 to a PXM 2000 PXM2000-GCK 9
IQ 250/260 Meter I/O Cards 9
9
IQ 250/260 I/O card—2 relay outputs/2 status inputs IQ250/260-IO1
IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 KYZ pulses/4 status inputs IQ250/260-IO2 9
IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—0–1 mA IQ250/260-IO3
IQ 250/260 I/O card—4 analog outputs—4–20 mA IQ250/260-IO4 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9
9
IQ 250/260 Electronic Power Meter
Description Specifications Description Specifications
9 Current Inputs Sensing Method

Class 10 5 amp nominal, 10 amp max. Voltage, current True rms
9 Class 2 1 amp nominal, 2 amp max. Power Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on
all channels
Fault current withstand
9 100 amps for: 10 seconds Harmonics resolution 40th order
300 amps for: 3 seconds
Update Rate
9 500 amps for:
Continuous current withstand
1 second
20 amps for screw terminated or pass-
Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
9
through connections All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio Power Supply
9 Burden 0.005 VA per phase max. at 11 amps AC/DC voltage option 90–265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 100–370 Vdc,
universal AC/DC supply
Pickup current 0.1% of nominal
9 Class 10
Class 2
5 mA
1 mA
DC voltage option 18–60 Vdc
Burden 10 VA max.
9 Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension 0.177 inches (4.5 mm) Standard Communications Format
Quick connect 0.25-inch male tab Connection type RS-485 (through back plate)
9 Voltage Inputs Com port baud rate 9600–57,600 bauds
9
Range Com port address 01–247
Line-to-neutral 20–576 Vac
Line-to-line 0–721 Vac Data format 8-bit, no parity
9 Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU or DNP 3.0
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, KYZ Pulse

9 2 element delta, four-wire delta systems Contacts 1 Form A
Input impedance 1 meg ohm/phase On resistance, max. 35 ohms
9 Burden 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V; Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc
0.014 VA at 120V
9 Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable terminal block,
Continuous load current 120 mA
AWG #12–26 (0.129–3.31 mm2) Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
9 Isolation Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA

All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 volts. Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
9 Environmental Ratings
Storage temperature
–20ºC to +70°C
–20ºC to +70°C
9 Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing

Faceplate rating NEMA 12
9 Water-resistant
Mounting gasket included
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Wiring Diagrams
9
N A B C N A B C
9
9
9
9
GND GND
HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply
9
VRef
9
Ic Ib Ia Ic Ib Ia VRef
LO LO LO
A A
LO LO LO
B B
C x 9
9
9
9
C C
9
N A B C
A
9
9
N A B C
B A B
9
Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs
9
A B C
9
9
9
9
GND
HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply 9
VRef
9
Ic Ib Ia
LO LO LO
A
B
C
C C
9
or
9
B A B A
9
9
Not Connected to Meter
9
A B C
9
Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9 IQ 250/260 Meter—Face and Side Views
9 4.85 (123.2) 4.97 (126.2) 4.93 (125.2)

4.20 (106.7) 4.16 (105.7)
9
9
9 4.85 5.02 3.54
(123.2) (127.5) (89.9)
9
9 3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
9 IQ 250/260 Face IQ 250/260M Side IQ 250/260T Side Expandable I\Q Componentry
9 ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout
3.38
9 (85.9)
4 x .02
9 (0.5)
4.00
9 (101.6)
9
9
9
1.69
9 (42.9)
DIN Mounting Cutout

9
3.62
9 (92.0)
9
9 3.62
(92.0)
9
9
9
9 Description Specifications
9 Weight
Basic unit
2 lbs (0.9 kg)
5.00 (127.0) H x 4.90 (124.5) W x 5.00 (127.0) L
9 IQ 250/260 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs

Shipping container dimensions 6-inch cube
9 Tolerance ±0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
9
PXM 2250/2260/2270 Mounts in 3.62-inch (92.0) mm DIN and ANSI C39.1
round cut-outs
Projection in front of panel surface 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 1.01 (25.6) L
9 Projection behind panel surface 4.85 (123.2) H x 4.85 (123.2) W x 1.01 (25.6) L
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
IQ 100
Description Page
9
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-52 9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-52 9
Technical Data and Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-53
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-55 9
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters. . . . V3-T9-56
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-61
V3-T9-64
9
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-72
V3-T9-78 9
IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97 9
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119 9
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121 9
9
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters 9
Product Description Application Description Features and Benefits
The IQ 100 Meter family
● Utility and commercial ● Measure and display real- 9
metering time information about
provides capabilities you
would not normally expect in ● Substations, industrial critical power parameters 9
affordable, compact meters, facilities, power generation with a sampling rate of 400
such as fast sampling rate sites and campuses samples per cycle 9
and accurate metering for a ● Sub-metering ● Monitor power utilization
full range of power attributes. ● Load studies and voltage and quality with ANSI
C12.20 accuracy (0.5%)
9
Providing the first line of recording
defense against costly power
problems, Eaton’s IQ 100
● Analog meter replacement
● Verify meter accuracy with
KYZ test pulse self-
9
series electronic power
meters can perform the work ●
certification capabilities
Optional Modbus RTU or
9
of an entire wall of legacy
9
TCP communications
metering equipment utilizing ● Available as transducer
today’s technology. only or with display
When space is at a premium, ● Designed to accommodate 9
yet you need ANSI C12.20 upgrades
accuracy, the IQ 100 series fit ● Integrate into Eaton’s 9
the bill. These meters are Power Xpert Architecture
ideal for electrical equipment for a holistic system- 9
assemblies, machine control level view
panels, such as panelboard
and switchboard mains and
9
feeders, low voltage metal-
enclosed switchgear feeders 9
and motor control centers.
Requiring far less space than 9
other meters with similar
functionality, IQ 100 series fit 9
into a standard ANSI or IEC
cutout on a panelboard or
other electrical equipment,
9
and therefore fit easily into
retrofit applications. 9
Metering Devices
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters

9 Features IQ 130 IQ 140 IQ 150
9 Instrumentation
Current, per phase ■ ■ ■
9 Current demand ■ ■ ■
Calculated neutral current ■ ■ ■
9 Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) ■ ■ ■
9 Min/max. readings, I, V ■ ■ ■
Min./max. readings, I, V, PF, F, W, VAR, VA ■ ■
9 Frequency ■ ■
Power
9 Real, reactive and apparent power, total (W, VAR, VA) ■ ■
9 Power factor, total ■ ■

Real, reactive and apparent power demand ■ ■
9 Demand Methods
Block interval (sliding, fixed) ■ ■
9 Energy
■
9 Real, reactive and apparent energy, total (Wh, VAR, VAh)
Communications
9 RS-485, Modbus RTU, Modbus ASCII, KYZ output Opt. Opt. Opt.
RJ45, Modbus TCP, KYZ output Opt. Opt. Opt.
9
9 Standards and Certifications
● IEC 687: 0.5% accuracy ● UL/cUL: Electrical and
9 ● ANSI C12.20: Electronic Measuring and
0.5% accuracy Test Equipment 22CZ
9 ● ANSI C62.41: Burst
● CE
9
9
9
IQ 100 Meter
9
IQ 150 M A 6 5 1 1
9
9
Model Series
130 = Volts/amps
140 = Power Frequency
9 150 = Energy 5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system Power Supply
Communications
9 1 = 90–265 Vac/dc
4 = 24–48 Vdc 0 = None
Meter Type 1 = Modbus RTU and KYZ pulse
9 M = Meter (with integral
display) Current Input
2 = Modbus TCP and KYZ output (RJ45)
T = Transducer only
9 (no display)
1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
9
9 Accessories
9 IQ 100 Meter
9 Panel Mounting Adapter for retrofitting an IQ 100 to an IQ Analyzer/IQ DP-4000/IQ Data Cutout IQ250-PMAK
Metering Devices
9.2
9
IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters IQ 100 Electronic Power Meters, continued 9
Description Specifications Description Specifications
9
Current Inputs Sensing Method
Class 10 5A nominal, 10A max. Voltage, current True RMS 9
Class 2 1A nominal, 2A max. Power Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all
Fault current withstand
channels 9
100A for: 10 seconds Update Rate
300A for:
500A for:
3 seconds
1 second Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz 9
9
Continuous current withstand 20A for screw terminated or pass-through All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
connections Power Supply
Programmable current
Burden
Full scale to any CT ratio
0.005 VA per phase max. at 11A
AC/DC voltage option 90–265 Vac at 50/60 Hz or
100–370 Vdc, Universal AC/DC supply
9
Pickup current
Class 10
0.1% of nominal
5 mA
DC voltage option 18–60 Vdc
9
Burden 10 VA max.
9
Class 2 1 mA
Optional Communications Format
Connections
Pass-through wire gauge dimension 0.177-inch (4.5 mm) Connection type RS-485 or RJ45 (through back plate)
Quick connect 0.25-inch male tab
Com port baud rate 9600–57,600 bauds 9
Voltage Inputs
Range
Com port address
Data format
01–247
8-bit, no parity
9
Line-to-neutral 20–416 Vac
Line-to-line 20–721 Vac Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU, TCP 9
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio Optional KYZ Pulse
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, Contacts 1 Form A 9
2 element delta, four-wire delta systems
Input impedance 1 megohm/phase
On resistance, max.
Peak switching voltage
35 ohms
350 Vdc
9
Burden 0.36 VA/phase max. at 600V;
0.014 VA at 120 volts Continuous load current 350 mA (10 ms) 9
Connection 7-pin 0.400-inch pluggable terminal block, Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
AWG #12–26 (0.129–3.31 mm2) Opto-isolation 3750 Vac 9
Isolation
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500 volts.
Note
These specifications are subject to change without notice and represent the maximum
9
capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not a complete feature list. Features
Environmental Ratings
Operating temperature –20°C to +70°C
and functionality may vary depending on selected options, firmware version and product model.
Please refer to the technical data sheet and User Manual for detailed specifications.
9
Storage temperature –40°C to +85°C 9
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing
Faceplate rating NEMA 12 water-resistant mounting gasket 9
included
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 N A B C N A B C
9
9
9
GND GND
9 HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply
VRef
9 Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
A
Ic
LO
Ib
LO
Ia
LO
VRef
A
B B
9 C x
9
9
9
9 C C
9 N A B C
A
9
N A B C
B A B
9
9 Service: Delta, Three-Wire with No PTs, 2 CTs
A B C
9
9
9
9
GND
9 HI HI HI
L (+)
N (–)
Power
Supply
VRef
9
Ic Ib Ia
LO LO LO
A
B
9 C
C C
9 or
9
B A B A
9
9 Not Connected to Meter
9 A B C
9 Note: Based upon the voltage rating, you may need a control power transformer for the control power.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Dimensions
IQ 100 Meter—Face and Side Views 9
4.85 (123.2) 4.97 (126.2) 4.93 (125.2) 9
4.20 (106.7) 4.16 (105.7)
9
9
4.85
(123.2)
5.02
(127.5)
3.54
(89.9)
9
9
9
3.25 (82.6) 3.25 (82.6)
9
IQ 100 Face IQ 100 Side IQ 100 Side
9
ANSI Mounting Panel Cutout
3.38
9
(85.9)
4 x .02 9
(0.5)
4.00 9
(101.6)
9
9
9
1.69
9
(42.9)
DIN Mounting Cutout

9
3.62 9
(92.0)
9
9
3.62
(92.0)
9
9
9
9
9
Weight 2 lbs (0.9 kg)
Basic unit 5.00 (127.0) H x 4.90 (124.5) W x 5.00 (127.0) L 9
IQ 100 Mounts in 92 mm DIN and ANSI C39.1 round cut-outs
Shipping container dimensions 6-inch cube
9
Tolerance ±0.1 inches (2.54 mm)
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters
Description Page
9 Metering Products Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
Wiring Diagrams. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-60
9 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-60
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
9 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-64
V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-78
V3-T9-85
IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97
9 PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
9 Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9
9
With energy costs ● Industrial and commercial ● Integrate into Eaton’s the extra benefit of also
9 skyrocketing, you need the
ability to verify the accuracy
buildings, metering and
submetering
Power Xpert® Architecture
for a holistic system-level
monitoring and recording the
changes in the characteristics
9 of utility billing and allocation
of energy costs among
● Government facilities and
military
view of your power.
business units, different Wireless and High-End Eaton’s IQ 150S/250S

9 manufacturing areas or
●
●
Universities and airports
Load studies and voltage
Capabilities you would not meters provide direct-reading
metered values for the most
facilities, and tenants. Expect from a Self-Enclosed,
9 Production equipment and IT recording Compact Meter
Providing the first line of
critical power aspects, such
as watts, watt demand,
systems are vulnerable to Features and Benefits watthours, voltage amperes
9 power anomalies; therefore,
you must ensure that power
● Self-enclosed, these
defense against costly power
problems, Eaton’s IQ 150S/ (VA), VA-hours, VARs, VAR-
meters are an ideal 250S electronic self-enclosed hours and power factor. They
9 is always up to specifications.
If your infrastructure is an solution for surface meters can perform the work have high sampling speed
established facility, you may mounting next to a of an entire wall of legacy and accuracy.
9 not currently have metering selected piece of
equipment for energy
metering equipment using These meters are self-
or may have addressed these today’s secure wireless enclosed in a NEMA 12
9 concerns by deploying a
variety of analog gauges and ●
monitoring
NEMA 12 enclosure with a
technology. Eaton’s IQ 150S/
250S meters use 24-bit AD
enclosure with “knockouts”
on the bottom for
large, easy-to-read faceplate,
9 meters—one for volts, one
for amperes and so on, with consistent with other
converters that sample at
more than 400 samples per
communication and power,
providing for an easy
separate meters for each Eaton meter models, cycle and meet IEC 687
9 measurement. designed with “knockouts” (0.2% accuracy) and ANSI
installation.
for easy installation C12.20 (0.2% accuracy) Perhaps you don’t have
9 If you’re planning an upgrade
or a new power infrastructure,
● Ethernet communications standards. With such high- network drops in all the
option for either wired or performance measurement right places. The IQ 150S/
9 no doubt you would like to
capitalize on the latest
wireless setup, allowing for
additional ease of
capability, these meters can
be confidently used for
250S offers a wireless
communications option.
technology to improve upon primary revenue metering
9 installation and integration The transmissions are
that cumbersome into existing networks and submetering applications. encrypted using 128-bit
architecture and its Wired Equivalent Privacy
9 Available data and alarm
●
patchwork view. Either model will help you (WEP) for security.
recording for historical monitor energy demand,
records/trending
9 while the IQ 250S provides
Metering Devices
9.2
Industry-Standard KYZ Pulse When used in this Designed for the User
Communication Protocols For applications in which a architecture, either with a When space is at a premium, 9
Standard Modbus RS-485 pulse is needed, the unit also Power Xpert Gateway or yet you need ANSI C12.20
Communication provides a KYZ output that directly via Ethernet, the accuracy, Eaton IQ 150S/ 9
Standard communication pulses proportional to the meters with the Modbus RTU 250S meters fit the bill.
includes an RS-485 output
speaking Modbus protocol.
amount of energy consumed.
This feature is used for pulse
option can provide Web-
based graphics of current
These ultra-compact meters
are ideal for surface mounting
9
This allows the unit to be
connected to any serial RS-
counting applications into
building management
power conditions. Simply
connect your meter to a
next to a selected piece of
equipment for energy 9
485 bus using the Modbus systems where serial or Power Xpert Gateway to monitoring. Requiring far less
interface. The unit Ethernet protocol is not translate Modbus-based space than other meters with 9
communicates easily with available. information from the meter similar functionality, and
most building automation,
Verify Energy Bills
into HTML-based Web pages offering a NEMA 12 9
Power Xpert Insight or other that are accessible from any enclosure and a large, easy-
The IQ 150S/250S models
software systems. Baud
rates are up to 57.6K baud to
provide a traceable watthour
standard Web browser. If you
select a model with the
to-read faceplate, consistent
with other Eaton meter
9
test pulse (used with a
9
provide fast update times. Ethernet option, the meter models, these meters are
watthour pulse recorder or can easily be monitored designed with “knockouts”
Wi-Fi or Land-Based totalizer), so you can verify remotely via Power Xpert for easy retrofit installation.
Ethernet
The unit offers an Ethernet
the accuracy of your meter
and in turn, the accuracy of
Insight or another third-party
Most meters in this class
9
monitoring system. With
option—configured either as
an RJ45 or Wi-Fi connection.
billing from your utility
company and to internal
access to accurate, real-time
information from IQ 150S/
have small or dark displays
that can be hard to see, 9
The Wi-Fi configuration customers. especially from a distance.
allows the 150S/250S to be
Integrated with Eaton’s
250S meters, Power Xpert
Architecture can transform Eaton’s IQ 150S/250S meters 9
used on standard Wi-Fi base your power system into an have a large, bright red, three-
stations. The unit is assigned
Power Xpert Architecture
IQ 150S/250S meters integrated, agile system, and line LED display, each line 9
an IP address; it communicates an easily managed entity more than a half-inch tall. This
integrate into Eaton’s Power
Modbus protocol over
Ethernet TCP/IP. Wireless
Xpert Architecture, where that performs better and display is very easy to read,
even if the meter is installed at
9
meters, gateways and costs less.
Ethernet is reliable and easy
to integrate, making it the
monitoring devices
a height or distance. Using the
keypad and menus on the 9
collaborate to create a local display, users can
superior solution for mass
meter deployment.
unified, centralized view of
the end-to-end power and
display a variety of electrical 9
system values or program
facility infrastructure. the meter. 9
Installation Diagram
9
IQ 150S/250S Installation 9
9
9
9
Closed O 9
9
Lockable 9
Revenue Seal
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Features of IQ 150S/250S Electronic Power Meters

9 Features IQ 150S IQ 250S
9 Instrumentation
Current, per phase ■ ■
9 Calculated neutral current ■ ■
Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) ■ ■
9 Frequency ■ ■
9 Minimum/maximum readings, I 1, V 1, PF, F, W, VAR, VA

Power
Total Total and per phase
9 Real, reactive and apparent power (W, VAR, VA) Total Total and per phase
Power factor Average Average and per phase
9 Demand Methods
■ ■
9
Block interval (fixed, sliding)
Current demand ■ ■
9 Real, reactive and apparent power demand Total Total and per phase
Energy
9 Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Total Total and per phase
Real and reactive, net and positive and negative (Wh, VARh) Total Total and per phase
9 I/O
■ ■
9
Pulse output
Communications
9 RS-485, Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0 ■ ■

RJ45 or 802.11b, Modbus TCP 2 Optional Optional
9 Data Logging
2 MB for data logging ■
9 Alarming
9 Set point driven alarm ■
Notes
9 1 Per phase only.
2 If configured for Ethernet, RS-485 not available.
9
9 IQ 150S/250S Meter
9 IQ 150 S A 6 5 1 1
9 Model Series Communication
9 150 = Energy
250 = Energy plus
Meter Type
S = Self-enclosed meter Frequency
Power Supply
1 = 90–400 Vac/Vdc
1 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
2 = Modbus RTU (RS-485)
or TCP—(RJ45)
9
5 = 50 Hz system
6 = 60 Hz system or 802.11b (Wi-Fi)
Current Input
9 1 = 1A secondary
5 = 5A secondary
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter Technical Information
Description Specifications Description Specifications 9
9
Current Inputs Update Rate
Class 10 5A nominal, 10A maximum Watts, VAR and VA 100 msec at 60 Hz
Class 2 1A nominal, 2A maximum All other parameters 1 second at 60 Hz
9
Fault Current Withstand Power Supply
20A for:
60A for:
10 seconds
3 seconds
AC/DC voltage option 90–400 Vac at 50/60 Hz or 9
100–370 Vdc, universal AC/DC supply
100A for: 1 second
Programmable current Full scale to any CT ratio
Burden 16 VA maximum 9
Standard Serial Communications Format
Burden
Pickup Current
0.005 VA per phase maximum at 11A
0.1% of nominal
Connection type RS-485 9
9
Class 10 5 mA Communications port baud rate 9600–57,600 Bauds
Class 2 1 mA
Communications port address 01–247
Connections
Screw terminal #6–32 screws Data format 8-bit, no parity
9
Voltage Inputs Protocols Modbus ASCII, RTU, DNP 3.0
Range Optional Ethernet Communications Format 9

Line-to-neutral 20–416 Vac (IQ150S), 20–576 Vac (IQ250S) Connection type RJ45 or 802.11b (wireless)
Line-to-line 20–721 Vac Protocols Modbus TCP 9
9
Programmable voltage range Full scale to any PT ratio KYZ Pulse
Supported systems 3 element wye, 2.5 element wye, 2 element delta, Contacts 1 Form A
four-wire delta systems
Input impedance 1 megohm/phase
On resistance, maximum 35 Ohms 9
Peak switching voltage 350 Vdc
Burden
Connection
0.36 VA/phase maximum at 600V; 0.014 VA at 120V
7-pin, 0.400-inch screw
Continuous load current 120 mA 9
9
terminal block, AWG #12–26 (0.129–3.31 mm2) Peak load current 350 mA (10 ms)
Isolation Off-state leakage current at 350 Vdc 1 uA
All inputs and outputs are galvanically isolated to 2500V Opto-isolation 3750 Vac
9
Environmental Ratings Dimensions and Shipping
Operating temperature –20º to +70°C Weight 4 lbs 9

Storage temperature –20º to +70°C Basic unit H 7.90 x W 7.50 x D 3.10 inches
Operating humidity To 95% RH noncondensing Compliance 9

9
Faceplate rating NEMA 12 IEC 687 0.2% accuracy
Sensing Method ANSI C12.20 0.2% accuracy
Voltage, current rms ANSI C62.41 Burst

9
Power Sampling at over 400 samples per cycle on all ANSI (IEEE) C37.90.1 Surge withstand
channels UL/cUL Electrical and electronic 9
measuring and test equipment 22CZ
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and represent 9

the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is not
a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending on
selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to
9
9
User Manual for detailed specifications.
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE Direct Three-Phase Four-Wire WYE with PTS
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct Three-Phase Three-Wire DELTA Direct
9
Dimensions
9 IQ 150S/250S Electronic Meter
9 7.53
(191.3)
9 3.70
9
(94.0)
9 5.60
Mounting 7.90 7.90
(142.2)
9 Plate (200.7) (200.7)
9 0.50
5.95 Antenna Length: 3.11
(12.7)
9 (151.1) 4.40 (111.8) (79.0)
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
IQ 35M
Description Page
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series. . . . . . .
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-62 9
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-62
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-62 9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-63
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-64
V3-T9-72
9
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-78
V3-T9-85 9
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106 9
Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
Clamp-On Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9
9
IQ 35M 9
Product Description Application Description
The Eaton IQ 35M Meter is a ● Commercial submetering
9
DIN rail meter that combines
exceptional performance and
●
●
Energy management
Industrial monitoring
IQ 35M Meter 9
easy installation to deliver a
cost-effective solution for
● Cost allocation IQ35M A 1 1 9
energy and power monitoring Features
applications, as well as sub- ● Economical and compact
Meter Series
9
metering applications. Most watthour meter with
models include pulse output,
alarm contact and phase alarms
demand Energy Type
9
● Backlit LCD display for local 1 = Standard energy
for true versatility. The BACnet
version offers two digital inputs
reading 2 = Four quadrant energy
9
for accumulating other meter
● Compatible with the Power
Output Option
pulses in place of the digital Xpert Gateway for remote
monitoring 1 = Pulse output only 9
output and alarm contact. 2 = Pulse output + Modbus
Monitors
9
●
The Modbus output options 3 = Pulse output + Modbus + data logging
offer added flexibility for ● Voltage, current, power 5 = Pulse inputs + BACnet + data logging
configuration and data analysis.
The IQ 35M allows you to: ●
factor, frequency
Power and energy: real,
9
reactive and apparent
● Verify energy bills
● Optional data logging 9
● Make informed load
capability
shifting and shedding
decisions ● Optional serial 9
communications (Modbus-
Fairly and accurately
9
●
allocate energy costs to RTU or BACnet)

users ● Revenue grade, ANSI
● Identify wasteful practices C12.20 0.5% accuracy, IEC 9
62053-22 Class 0.5S
Decrease unnecessary
9
●
usage
● Compatible with economical
solid-core and split-core CTs
● Produce an energy profile
● Secure the optimum utility
● User-enabled password
protection
9
rate structure ● On-board diagnostics 9
Metering Devices
Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications

9 ● Voltage input
UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
9
IQ 35M Current Transformers
Catalog
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
● Current input
9
Description Number
Solid Core
Scaling: 5–32,767A
Input range: 0–0.333V or
9 IQ35M CT, solid core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-5 0–1V (selectable)
IQ35M CT, solid core, 20A:0.33 Vac, 0.30 inch IQ35M-SO-030-20 ● Control power
9 IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.50 inch IQ35M-SO-050-50 UL: 90V (L-N) to 600V (L-L)
CE: 90V (L-N) to 300V (L-L)
IQ35M CT, solid core, 50A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SO-075-50
9 IQ35M CT, solid core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-100 Accuracy
9 IQ35M CT, solid core, 200A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-200 Real power and energy
●
IQ35M CT, solid core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-250 0.5% (ANSI C12.20, IEC 62053-22 Class 0.5S)
9 IQ35M CT, solid core, 300A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-300 Outputs
IQ35M CT, solid core, 400A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SO-125-400 ● IQ35MAx1 thru 3:
9 Split Core Real energy pulse: NO static; alarm contacts: NC static
IQ35M CT, split core, 5A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-5 ● IQ35MA11
9 IQ35M CT, split core, 30A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-30
Reactive energy pulse 30 Vac/Vdc
● IQ35MAx2, IQ35MAx3
RS-485 two-wire Modbus RTU
IQ35M CT, split core, 100A:0.33 Vac, 0.75 inch IQ35M-SP-075-100 ● IQ35MA15 RS-485 two-wire BACnet MS/TP
IQ35M CT, split core, 250A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-250
Inputs
● IQ35MA15
Two pulse accumulators
9
IQ35M CT, split core, 600A:0.33 Vac, 1.25 inch IQ35M-SP-125-600 Mechanical
9 Mounting
●
DIN rail or 3-point screwmount
9 IQ35M CT, split core, 1200A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1200 Environmental
IQ35M CT, split core, 1600A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-1600 ● Operating temperature range
Meter: –30° to 70°C (–22° to 158°F)
Display: –10° to 50°C (14° to 122°F)
9 IQ35M CT, split core, 2400A:0.33 Vac, 2.50 inch IQ35M-SP-255-2400 ● Storage temperature range
Meter: –40° to 85°C (–40° to 185°F)
9 Accessories
Display: –10° to 60°C (14° to 140°F)
● Humidity range
9 IQ 35M Accessories
<95% RH noncondensing
Data Outputs
9 Description
Catalog
Number ● kW, kWh: Total
9 Current: Three-phase average and per phase

●
IQ35M enclosure, NEMA 4X IQ35M-ENC
IQ35M fuse pack, single, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP1
● Voltage: Three-phase average, per phase, and line-line and
9 IQ35M fuse pack, double, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP2
●
line-neutral
Power: Real, reactive and apparent;
IQ35M fuse pack, triple, 1/2A slow-blow IQ35M-FP3 Three-phase total and per phase
9 IQ35M replacement mounting clips IQ35M-RMC ● Power factor: Three-phase average and per phase
9 IQ35M DIN rail IQ35M-DR Frequency

●
IQ35M DIN rail stop clips (10 pack) IQ35M-DRSC ● Power demand: most recent and peak
9 Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and represent
● Demand configuration: fixed, rolling block and external sync
the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is ● Data logging (IQ35MAx3)
9 not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary
depending on selected options, firmware version and product model.
10 configurable data buffers;
configurable demand subinterval (when set at a 15-minute
Please refer to User Manual for detailed specifications. interval, buffers store data for 60 days)
9 ● Data logging (IQ35MA15)
6 configurable data buffers;
9 configurable demand subinterval (when set at a 15-minute
interval, buffers store data for 60 days)
9 ● Trending requires communication network to retrieve data
Metering Devices
9.2
Dimensions
IQ 35M Dimensional Drawing IQ 35M Wall Mount Configuration 9
9
2.40
(60.1)
1.80 (45.7)
1.20
1.90
(30.5)
0.30 9
(7.61)
9
(48.3)
2.30
(58.4) 3.90 9
(99.1)
1.50
(38.1)
4.30
(109.2)
9
4.20 3.60
9
(106.7) (91.4)
9
0.40
(10.2) 9
IQ 35M DIN Mount Configuration 9
4.20
(106.7) 9
9
9
3.60
(91.4) 9
9
9
0.20
(5.1)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-67
9 IQ Analyzer— Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68
Comprehensive Electrical Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68
9
Distribution Monitoring
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-70
9 IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-72
V3-T9-78
9 IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106
9 Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
9 IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
9 Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9
9 Product Description Features, Benefits and Functions
Eaton’s IQ Analyzer is a The unique operator
9 Metered and Monitored Minimum and maximum
●
complete solution for users interface, which includes a
who want to monitor and reverse mode LCD display, Parameters values
rms sensing
9
●
manage all aspects of their easy to use Meter Menu ● Event logging/disturbance
electrical distribution system. screens and detailed Analysis ● Phase neutral, and recording
Based on input from screens, is designed to allow ground currents
9
● ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%
customers and consultants, a wealth of real-time and ● Volts: L-L, L-N, Avg. L-L, revenue metering accuracy,
it provides extensive recorded information to be Avg. L-N, N-G IEC687 Class 0.5%
9 metering, power quality accessed easily by an ● Power: real, reactive, ● Industry Canada 0.5%
analysis, remote input operator. All programming revenue accuracy
apparent (system and
9 monitoring, control relaying,
analog input/outputs and
can be accomplished through
the faceplate or the
per phase)
● Frequency Communications
9 communications capability. communications port. The
comprehensive on-line Help ● Power factor: apparent and
● Optional interface
Its high performance displacement (system and capability to computer
feature provides useful
9 metering exceeds ANSI
C12.16 (1%) specification for
information on device per phase) network for data collection,
storage and/or printout
operation, programming and ● Energy and demand
9 revenue meters and meets via Eaton’s Power
troubleshooting. (forward, reverse, net) real,
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%, Management Software
reactive apparent at four
provides quality true rms Application Description
9 readings through the 50th ● Monitoring of over 150
different utility rates Physical Characteristics
harmonic, accurately
● Individual current and ● Graphical reverse mode
electrical parameters
9 measures nonsinusoidal ● Power quality management
voltage harmonics:
magnitude, phase angle
LCD display with LED
waveforms up to a 3.0 crest backlight
9 factor, and displays even ● Energy management ● % THD: current and ● Up to seven lines of
and odd multiples of the voltage information
9 fundamental current and Waveform capture
●
● Membrane faceplate
voltage through the 50th
NEMA 3R and 12 rated
harmonic. Both magnitude
9 and phase angle of the
harmonics are displayed.
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Disturbance Information 32 schedules and 10 time system watts, VARs and Extensive I/O and
With the communications periods per schedule. The IQ VA, minimum and Communications Capability 9
option and Eaton’s Power Analyzer will keep track of the maximum apparent and One analog and three digital
Management Software and following parameters for four displacement PF). Using inputs are provided to 9
Waveform Display software, different utility rates: this feature, minimum interface with sensors and
a Waveform Analysis will ● Watthours
and maximums reached
during each trend interval
transducers. Three analog
outputs and four relay
9
construct waveforms of up to
● VAR hours
56 cycles of all currents and
voltages (including neutral ● VA hours
are recorded. contacts are furnished to
share data with PLCs and
9
CBEMA Trend Logging control systems and to
9
and ground) to help ● Current demand
troubleshoot undervoltage/ ● Watt demand The IQ Analyzer can be actuate alarms and control
sag and overvoltage/swell configured to store the relays. Terminals are captive
conditions. (See CBEMA
●
●
VA demand
VAR demand
necessary data so that the clamp type and finger safe. 9
Trend Logging section.) software can display a sag or With the communications
By programming a reset
threshold, the duration of the
Historical Trend Logging swell voltage event on the
industry standard CBEMA
option, the device can be
remotely monitored,
9
voltage disturbance can also
be indicated.
The IQ Analyzer is equipped
with onboard logging
(now ITIC) curve for
predictive maintenance
controlled and programmed.
9
capability, which includes and troubleshooting. This Ratings
The IQ Analyzer 6600 series the ability to log a total of application utilizes the IQ ● Application to 500 kV, 9
with Graphic Waveform 24 parameters with intervals Analyzer waveform capture no PTs to 600 volts
Display offers the ability to
view the captured waveform
ranging from 0.13 seconds for high-0speed events along ● CT ratios selectable from 9
(every eight cycles) to twice with historical trend logging 5:5A to 10,000:5A
right at the device. The 6600
series also offers the ability to
a week (5040 minutes). The
trending function can begin
for longer term voltage
disturbances. Once this data
● Standard 120/600 Vac line 9
detect and capture sub-cycle ● Three-phase power supply
voltage disturbances.
immediately or can be
triggered upon receipt of a
is uploaded to a PC running
the Power Management module, 100–600 Vac. 9
discrete input into the IQ Software’s Event Viewer Separate source power
Extensive Harmonic
Distortion Analysis
Analyzer. Onboard logging the information is analyzed, supply module available, 9
provides a cost-effective displayed and stored. 100–240 Vac or
Current and voltage distortion
data are displayed at the
means of distributed data
storage where real-time
Automatic uploading of 100–250 Vdc
DC only separate source
9
CBEMA events can be ●
device and accessible

through the communications
communications may not be
feasible or for applications
selected in the software.
A three-phase event will be
power module also
available, 24–48 Vdc 9
port. This includes % THD, where data storage correctly displayed as a single
K-Factor, Crest Factor, redundancy is desired. Four point on the CBEMA curve. Displayed Information Features 9
CBEMA factor, and both trend data logs are stored in ● All information accessible
magnitudes and phase angles
of all harmonics through the
non-volatile memory aboard Event Logging at device or through 9
the IQ Analyzer and can be The IQ Analyzer will store communications port
50th. A snapshot sample
of this information may
retrieved at the display or
via communications for
in non-volatile memory the via Eaton’s Power 9
time and reason for last 504 Management Software
be activated by user
commands, discrete inputs
viewing using Eaton’s Power
Management Software.
events. These events can be
viewed from the graphical
● Quality true rms readings
through 50th harmonic
9
or programmable thresholds
to capture distortion data ● Up to 24 parameters with
storage capacity for up to
display or accessed via
communications. In addition
● Complies with the
accuracy portion of
9
during conditions of real
to all of the meter events
interest. To help eliminate
nuisance alarms, harmonic ●
90,000 data points
Up to 234 days of data
listed in the Event Conditions
ANSI C12.20 Class 0.5%
revenue metering 9
section (Page V3-T9-66), the specification
distortion information can be
captured and relay outputs
can be stored when
recording a parameter
following events are entered ● Accurate readings for 9
into the event log:
activated when THD exceeds every 15 minutes nonsinusoidal waveforms
a programmable percentage ● Trends 1, 2 and 3 can Time and date of: with up to 3.0 crest factor 9
of fundamental or a save data on a discrete ● Screens display auto
programmable magnitude contact input
●
●
Alarms
Meter power up
ranging units, kilo units, 9
(e.g., amperes) threshold. mega units as needed
● Trend 4 can save data
Time-of-Use Metering on a power quality or
● All resets ● 10-digit energy readings 9
meter event ● All setting changes ● Displays multiple
The IQ Analyzer offers
the ability to store energy
● Minimum and maximum ● Communications parameters at the 9
recording (minimum and established or lost same time
usage data for time of use
revenue metering. It can maximum three-phase
average current, maximum
Event logging is another
● Programmable custom 9
be programmed for any powerful troubleshooting tool screens
combination of weekday, IG, minimum and
maximum three-phase
within the IQ Analyzer. 9
Saturday, Sunday,
average VLL and VLN,
22 holidays, 8 seasons,
maximum VNG, maximum 9
9
Metering Devices
Meter Menu Screens ● Energy (forward, reverse ● Power

9 and net) ● Real (Watts)
● Real (kWh)
9 Reactive (VARs)
●
● Reactive (kVARh) ● Apparent (VA)

Apparent (kVAh)—no
9
●
● Phases A, B, C and
reverse or net System
9 ● Frequency, time and date ● Power factor Waveform Screen Available with
Model 6600
● Demand ● Apparent and
Meter Menu
9 ● System current Displacement (three- Pressing the F2 function key
accesses the Event Analysis
(amperes) phase and system)
9 ● Systems real power
(kW)
● Frequency
screens. These display the
following data for up to ten
● THD (amperes, volts event/alarm conditions:
9 ● System reactive power
(kVAR)
and %):
● Description, date and
● Current (Phases A, B, C, N)
9 ● System apparent power
(kVA)
● Voltage (Phases A-B, B-
time of event/alarm with 10
millisecond resolution
C, C-A, A-N, B-N, C-N)
9 Current, voltages, power
Examples of Meter Menu ●
● Power factor (Phases A, B,
All minimum/maximum readings, demand
C and system)
readings, frequency and %
9 ● Displacement
values may be reset via reset
pushbutton on faceplate, THD at time of event/alarm
● Apparent discrete input or ● Current and voltage
9 ● %THD current communications command. distortion information
Values are updated at least available on Harmonic
9 Phases A, B, C, N
●
once every 16 line cycles. Analysis screens
● %THD voltage The F3 function key accesses Event data is stored in non-
9 Custom Screen ● Phases A-B, B-C, C-A the Harmonic Analysis volatile memory. If a reset
● Phases A-N, B-N, C-N screens. Two cycles of data threshold is programmed,
9 ● K-factor
sampled at 128 samples/ the duration of the event
cycle are simultaneously (e.g., undervoltage) is also
9 CBEMA (ITIC) derating
●
recorded for: displayed. With Eaton’s
factor (displayed as “Z”) communications option and
● Current
9 Crest Factor software, waveforms and
●
● Phases A, B, C, N, G harmonic profiles may be
● Discrete input and
displayed on a PC.
9 Custom Screen
●
output status
Analog input reading
● Voltage
● Phases A-B, B-C, C-A
The IQ Analyzer allows a user Event Conditions
9 to view commonly used
● Custom—user may
program four screens to
● Phases A-N, B-N, C-N Events may be triggered by
parameters by scrolling ● Neutral to Ground up to seven of any of the
show any combination of
9 through its LED indicator seven Meter Menu Magnitudes (or % of
following conditions:
Meter Menu. parameters per screen fundamental) of odd and
9 Meter Menu Displayed
even multiples of the
Voltage Disturbances
● Undervoltage/sag—
Harmonic Analysis Screens fundamental from 2nd–50th
Information
9 ● Current
are displayed. The phase
angle associated with each
any VL-L, VL-N (40–100%)
Note: 60% minimum for self-
9
● Phases A, B, C, average multiple of the fundamental powered unit.
● Neutral is also displayed.
● Overvoltage/swell—
9 Ground (separate CT)
●
Event/Alarm Analysis Screens any VL-L, VL-N (100–750%)
● Voltage
9 ● Phases A-B, B-C, C-A,
Harmonic Spectrum Available with
average
9
Model 6600
● Phases A-N, B-N, C-N,
average Minimum and Maximum Values
9 ● Neutral-ground ● Current
Power
● Phases A, B, C, N, G
9
●
Example of Event Analysis Screens
● Real (watts) ● Voltage
9 Reactive (VARs) Phases A-B, B-C, C-A

● ●
● Apparent (VA) ● Phases A-N, B-N,

9 ● Phases A, B, C and
system
C-N, N-G
9
Metering Devices
9.2
If zero time delay is All trigger conditions have External 120-volt secondary Analog Input and Outputs
programmed, any disturbance programmable time delays PTs are required above One analog input and four 9
lasting two cycles (less if from 0.1–60 seconds in 600 Vac, optional from analog outputs may be
magnitude is sufficient to 0.1 second increments 120–600 Vac. configured as 0–20 or 9
effect rms readings) will (except Voltage Disturbances 4–20 mA. The analog input is
trigger a voltage disturbance
event/alarm.
—programmable from
2–3600 cycles in two-cycle
Discrete Contact Inputs
Three dry contact discrete
displayed at the device as a 9
percentage and is accessible
● Sub-cycle transient
increments, and Eaton’s
Power Management
inputs may be programmed
by the user to:
through the communications
port. The analog input
9
capture/excess dv/dt on Software commands—no
9
VA-N, VB-N, VC-N provides an interface with gas
programmable delay). ● Trigger Event Analysis— flow meters, temperature
Note: 6600 series only. the information described transducers or other analog
● Sub-cycle voltage
Demand Recording in “Event Analysis
Screens,” including
devices. 9
interruption on VA-N, Peak Demands are date and
VB-N, VC-N time stamped for: Harmonic Analysis
information, can be
The analog outputs may be
programmed to reflect any of 9
Note: 6600 series only. ● Current Phases A, B, C recorded when external the following:
Maximum Threshold Exceeded
and Average devices trip or change state
● Current—Phases A, B, C,
9
● System Power: by wiring their auxiliary
● Currents—phases A, B, C,
Neutral and Ground
● Real (watts) contacts into these inputs
●
Average, N, G
Voltage—L-L, L-N, N-G
9
● Reactive (VARs)
● Act as a synch.-pulse
Voltage—Neutral to
9
●
input to synchronize ● Power:
Ground ● Apparent (VA) power demand windows ● Real (watts)
System Power—Watts, with utility provided
9
●
Input/Output ● Reactive (VARs)
VA, VARs synch. pulse
Extensive input/output ● Apparent (VA)
System Power Factor— Actuate a relay output
9
● ●
Displacement and capability is standard on the ● Phases A, B, C and

IQ Analyzer. In addition to
● Reset relay output, peak System
Apparent
9
monitoring three-phase demands, Trend Analysis
● Demand currents and voltages, records and Event ● % THD:
● Currents—Phase A, B, C Analysis records ● Current (Phases A, B, C, N)
and AVG
separate inputs are provided
for both ground and neutral ● With communications ● Voltage (L-L, L-N) 9
● System Power—Watts, currents. Voltage of neutral- option, provide remote
VARs, VA to-ground is also monitored to status indication on Eaton’s ● Frequency–System 9
● Frequency indicate the presence of communication network ● Power Factor:
● Percent Total Harmonic harmonics and potential ● Status of input contacts is ● System Displacement PF 9
Distortion or Magnitude downstream grounding displayed in the Meter ● System Apparent PF
Total Harmonic Distortion: problems. Analog and digital
I/O provide interfaces for
Menu Custom screen
9
● Currents—Phases A, B,
9
transducers, relays, PLCs Relay Output Contacts ● UL listed, File E62791,
C, Neutral and control systems. Four Form-C (NO/NC) NKCR File E185559
● Voltage—VA-N, VB-N, relay contacts may (CE versions)
VC-N, VA-B, VB-C, VC-A Current Inputs be independently ● cUL listed #1010.1 C22.2 9
Five ampere secondary CT programmed to: CE mark EN61010-1 (1993)
9
●
Minimum Threshold Exceeded connections for:
● Currents—Phases A, B, C ● Act as a kWh, kVARh or EN50082-2 (1994)
Phases A, B, C kVAh pulse initiator output Measurement Canada
9
● ●
● System Power—Watts,
Vars, VA ● Ground ● Actuate on one or more Electricity Meter AE-0782
event conditions—including CSA approved
9
●
● System Power Factor— ● Neutral
Displacement and ● Separate ground and discrete input software
commands (through
●
Apparent
Frequency ●
neutral CT inputs
CT range 5:5–10,000: 5
communications port) 9
● Reverse sequence alarm
9
(any integer)
Voltage Phase Unbalance Each relay may be set for
● Voltage L-L, L-N Voltage Inputs Auto or Manual Reset with
● Phases A, B, C (from 0–30 minute release delay 9
Current Phase Unbalance 120 Vac–500 kV AC) (one second increments).
● Current—Phases A, B, C ● 120/240 Vac control power Relays are Form-C NO/NC. 9
input standard—not Relay(s) programmed to
Discrete Input Energized required with optional line actuate on undervoltage
also have a programmable
9
● Input 1, 2, 3 power module
● Remote command through ● Separate ground-to-neutral 0–30 minute delay on power-
up for transfer applications. 9
communications port or voltage reference
front panel ● PT range 120:120–
500,000:120 (any integer)
9
9
Metering Devices
Product Selection
9
9 IQ Analyzer IQ Analyzer
9 Description
Catalog
Number
9 IQ Analyzer, separate source power module

IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module
IQA6410
IQA6420
9 IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module IQA6430

IQ Analyzer, separate source power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQA6610
9 IQ Analyzer, 24–48 Vdc power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQA6620
IQ Analyzer, three-phase power module with waveform display and sub-cycle voltage disturbance capture IQA6630
9 IQ Flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting IQFLANGE
9 45-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module IQA45CABLE
24–48 Vdc separate source power module IQMDCPM
9 100–240 Vac and 100–250 Vdc separate source power module IQMSSPM
Three-phase, self-powered power module IQM3PPM
9 INCOM communication module IPONI
9
RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol MPONI
9 Accessories
9 IQ Analyzer Auxiliary
Power Supply
9 The optional IQ Analyzer
Auxiliary Power Supply allows
9 set point programming of the
IQ meter while the monitored
9 line power is turned off and
locked out, thus eliminating
the presence of dangerous
9 line voltages. The Auxiliary
Power Supply is easy to
9 install and has been
specifically designed to
9 connect to the power supply
connector on the IQ meter
and then plug into a standard
9 electrical wall outlet.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series Voltage Inputs Specific Current Accuracies ● Withstand rating: 1000 Vac,
Fuses (Each Channel)
● ±0.20% of full scale to
1 minute across contacts 9
5000 Vac (contacts to coil,
9
● Self-powered units ● Conversion: True rms, 32 200% of full scale and 1 minute) 10,000 Vac
with IQMSSPM have sample/cycle (all samples 150% crest factor (contacts to coil, surge
3/4 ampere, 600 volts used in all rms calculations) ±0.20% of full scale to
9
●
voltage)
Bus Type KTK-R-3/4 fuses ● PT input: direct or any 150% of full scale and
(three required). integer 120:120– 200% crest factor Relay Response Time
● Separate source dual- 500,000:120 ● ±0.20% of full scale to (Excluding programmed 9
voltage units with ● Range: 30–660 Vac 100% of full scale and time delays):
IQMSSPM have a single (separate source and 300% crest factor
● Two line cycles for Discrete
9
5 x 20 mm 1/4 ampere fuse DC source) ● ±0.40% of reading for
● Separate source DC units ● Nominal full scale: currents to 800% of full Input, Eaton’s software
commands 9
with IQMDCPM do not 100–600 Vac scale
(communications port)
have user replaceable
fuses
● Burden: 21 VA (self-
powered only)
● Power and energy: Start
recording with an average
● Four to five line cycles for 9
Voltage Disturbance,
Environmental Conditions ● Overload withstand:
635 Vac, continuous
of 3 mA secondary current
Voltage Unbalance 9
Operating temperature: Discrete Inputs ● Nine to 10 line cycles for
9
●
700 Vac, 1 second (Dry Contact)
–20°–70°C all others
● Input impedance:
Storage temperature: +30 Vdc differential across
9
● ●
1 megohm IQ Analyzer Auxiliary
–30°–85°C each discrete input pair of Power Supply
● Operating humidity: Frequency Range terminals. Minimum pulse
5–95% relative humidity ● 20–66 Hz fundamental width: 1.6 msec
● Input voltage: 100–250 Vac
9
● Optically isolated inputs
● Input frequency: 50/60 Hz
(up to 50th harmonic)
Current Inputs
(Each Channel) Harmonic Response
to protect IQ Analyzer ● Output voltage/current:
+24 Vdc at 0–0.45A
9
circuitry
● Conversion: true rms, 32 (Voltages, Currents)
Analog Outputs (4)
● Output ripple: 100 mV
maximum (peak to peak)
9
sample/cycle (all samples ● 50th harmonic
used in all rms calculations)
Accuracy (in Percent
● 0–20 mA/4–20 mA into
maximum 750 ohm load.
● Rated output power:
10.8 watts
9
● CT input: 5 ampere
Full Scale)
secondary (any integer
5:5 to10,000:5)
Accuracy: 1% ● Turn on/turn off overshoot
5% maximum
9
Accuracy from 3–300% of Full Analog Input (1)
Burden: 0.05 VA Scale and from –0.5. to 1.00 Turn on delay: 0.5 second
9
● ●
● Overload withstand: to 0.5 power factor ● 0–20 mA/4–20 mA into maximum

200 ohm load.
40 amperes AC continuous, Operating temperature:
9
●
● Current and voltage: Accuracy: 1%
300 amperes AC 1 second 0°–40°C
±0.20%
Range: 8 x CT continuous Relay Output Contacts (4) Storage temperature:
9
● ●
● Power, energy and
● Accuracy: 0.1% of CT –40°–80°C
demand: 0.40% ● Form C Dry Contact:
primary rating, 0.2% of
reading above 150% of
● Frequency: 0.04% 10 amperes at 120/240 Vac
(Resistive) 10A at 30 Vdc
9
rating, sinusoidal (see
● Power factor: 0.80%
accuracy below for non- ● THD: 1.00% (Resistive) 30A make
(50 mS) at 240 Vac/240 Vdc
9
sinusoidal specifications)
Minimum pulse width:
9
●
● Input impedance:
4 cycles (68 mS)
0.002 ohm
9
Control Power Input
9
Description Separate Source Self Powered 1 DC Source
Input range, AC 110–240 Vac ±10% 110–600 Vac ±10% N/A 9
Frequency range 45–66 Hz 45–66 Hz N/A
Input range, DC
Burden
110–250 Vdc ±10%
21 VA
N/A
21 VA
24–48 Vdc ±20%
21 VA
9
Note 9
1 When directly wired to 480 Vac, IQ Analyzer can ride through a continuous sag that is 20% of rated voltage.
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagram
9
9 Field Wiring Connections—Separate Source Power Supply Shown Here
(For Three-Phase Power Supply, No Separate Control Power is Required)
9 Three-Phase Three-Wire (Above 600 Volts)
External Potential Transformers and Current Transformers
9 C 3CT
L3
9
B 2CT
Line L2 Load
A 1CT
L1
9
Open Delta Fuse
9 PT Connection
Note: External PTs
Optional Under 600 V
9 Control Power
IQ Analyzer
9 Fuse H1G H1N H1C H1B H1A
Relay No. 1 Relay No. 2 Relay No. 3 Relay No. 4
1 2 3 4 A B C H2G H2N H2C H2B H2A
9 (See Label for Neutral

Vac/dc Connections) Term. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Separate Source Power Supply Module
9 Discrete Contact Inputs

Outputs
Analog I/O
1 2 3 1 2 3 4 Analog Earth
9 (+)
13
(-)
14
(+)
15
(-)
16
(+)
17
(-)
18 19 20 21 22
GND
23
Input Ground
24 25
9
9
9 Dimensions
9 IQ Analyzer 6000 Series
9 With Communication Module

5.83
(148.1)
9 6.72
(170.7)
0.50
(12.7)
4.70
(119.4)
9
Faceplate Without Communication
Module
Normal
9 IQ Analyzer
Event
Relay
Program
RES
Reset
9
9 J2
POWER
MODULE
9 Previous
Level
F1 F2 F3 F4 Home
9 1
RELAY NO. 1
10.25
2
(260.4
Current Demand 3
9
Voltage Power Factor
Power Supply
Up 1
RELAY NO. 2
Power (Watts) Frequency

PONI
2
Power (Vars) % THD
Down
Power (VA) Distortion Factor 3
9 Energy Custom 1
RELAY NO. 3
2
3
9 1
RELAY NO. 4
Progra Help 2
9
3
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
IQ Analyzer Auxiliary Power Supply Drilling Pattern
Shipping Weight
9
Width Height Depth Lbs (kg) 5.38
2.40 (61.0) 4.00 (101.6) 1.11 (28.2) 5.8 (3.6) 2.69

(136.7)
9
(68.3)
IQ Analyzer 6000 Series

9
Height Width Depth 8.90
(226.1) 9
Without PONI 9.38
10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 4.70 (119.4)
6.68
(238.3)
9
With PONI
10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 5.83 (148.1)
(169.7)
9
4.45
(113.0)
4.69
(119.1)
9
.06
(1.5) RAD 9
2.23 4 Places
(56.7)
9
2.53
.218
9
(64.3) DIA 10 Places
(5.5)
9
5.06
(128.5)
Drilling Pattern for Flange Mounting 9

8.11
(206.0)
9
4.06
(103.1) 9
9
.213 9
(5.4)
Typ. for 8 11.03
(280.2)
9
9
10.41 CL
(264.4)
10.09
CL
(256.3)
9
9
5.52
.94
(140.2)
(23.9)
9
7.41
(188.2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 IQ DP-4000
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series
9 Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-73
Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-73
9 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-74
V3-T9-74
9 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-75
V3-T9-77
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
9 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85
9 PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106
9 Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-120
V3-T9-121
9
9 IQ DP-4000 Series
Eaton’s IQ DP-4000 is a
● Monitoring of all common
9 microprocessor-based
monitoring and protective ●
electrical parameters
Optional protective
device that provides
9
alarm functions
complete electrical metering
and system voltage Retrofit Opportunities
9 protection. In one compact, ● Retrofit of existing
standard package, the IQ electrical distribution
9 DP-4000 will provide an
alternative to individually
systems with the IQ
DP-4000 for power, quality,
mounted and wired
9 conventional meters and
load and energy monitoring
switches. The DP-4000 also
● Mounting flange option
9 monitors Apparent Power for application where
additional door mounting
(VA), Reactive Energy
9 (VAR-hours), Apparent space is required; see
Energy (VA-hours) and Page V3-T9-119
9 percent THD to provide the

user with basic power quality
information. The IQ DP-4000
9 meets and surpasses
UL/CSA/CE standards.
9 The IQ DP-4000’s rugged
construction is designed to
9 withstand harsh conditions
such as temperature
9 variations, outdoor
applications and industrial
9 environments. The membrane
faceplate pushbuttons are
9 easy to use and both the
parameter LED and window
displays are easily visible.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Delay
9
Historical Values Communications Listings and Certifications
● Present demand current ● Optional interface Allows a delay before an alarm ● UL/cUL/CSA listed 9
(per phase) 5, 10, 15, 20, capability to computer occurs. (Range 1–20 seconds ● CE mark EN61010-1,
25, 30, 45 or 60 minute network for data collection, in 1 second increments.)
EN50082-2 9
windows storage and/or printout Note: Unit must be powered for
● Present demand watts, via Eaton’s Power
Management Software
this to occur. 9
VARs and VA 5, 10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45 or 60 minute
windows: Physical Characteristics
Inputs and Outputs
(4100 Model) 9
Large visible LED display
9
●
● Sliding or fixed window ● Three Form C relay outputs
for power Sync pulse ● Membrane Faceplate selectable: Trip, Alarm,
input (Model 4100) NEMA 3R and 12 rated
Eaton’s PowerNet ●
kWh pulse initiator
One synch input for kW
9
broadcast demand sync Alarm and Protective Functions
● Minimum and maximum ● Alarm/Protective functions
utility demand sync
9
values current (per phase): (all models) include:
● Voltage (per phase, ● Overvoltage 9
L-L, L-N) ● Undervoltage
● Watts, VARs and VA ● Current phase loss 9
● Power factor ● Voltage phase loss
(displacement and ● Phase unbalance 9
apparent) ● Phase reversal
● Frequency 9
● User-programmable alarm
Peak values:
9
●
and reset threshold levels
● Percent THD parameters and delay intervals
Demand parameters
9
● ● Optional current and power
demand threshold
Protective and Event Alarming
● Undervoltage Description of Protection 9
Overvoltage Functions
9
●
● Current phase loss Overvoltage

Voltage phase loss Range 105–140%
9
●
● Phase reversal (5% increments).

●
●
Phase unbalance
Optional current and
Undervoltage 9
Range 60–95%
powerdemand threshold
(5% increments). 9
Metered and Monitored
Parameters
Phase Unbalance
9
● rms sensing Deviation between any
● Phase currents two phases percentage of 9
nominal line voltage preset by
● Volts: L-L, L-N
● Power: real, reactive,
DIP switches. Range 5–40%
(5% increments).
9
apparent
● Energy: real, reactive, Phase Reversal 9
apparent Any two phases become
● Frequency reversed for the selected 9
● Power factor delay.
● % THD: current and Voltage Phase Loss
9
voltage
● Minimum and maximum Less than 50% of the 9
values nominal line voltage
● Fixed or sliding demand
detected. 9
windows Current Phase Loss
Smallest phase current is
9
less than1/16 of the largest
phase current. 9
9
Metering Devices
Product Selection
9
9 IQ DP-4000 IQ DP-4000
Catalog
9
Description Number
4 indicates an IQ DP-4000 model IQDP4XY0
9 x = 0 indicates no I/O; x = 1 indicates I/O

y = 1 indicates separate source supply, 110–240 Vac and 110–250 Vdc
y = 2 indicates 24–48 Vdc power supply,
9 y = 3 indicates three-phase power supply, 110–600 Vac
Separate source control power without I/O IQDP4010
9 Separate source control power without I/O, DC supply IQDP4020
Three-phase power supply without I/O IQDP4030
9 Separate source control power with three Form C relay output contacts and one sync pulse input IQDP4110
9 Separate source control power with three Form C relay output contacts and one sync pulse input, DC supply
Three-phase power supply with three Form C relay output contacts and one sync pulse input
IQDP4120
IQDP4130
9 2 Form C relay outputs for protective alarming functions, 1 Form C relay output selectable for KYZ pulse output or load shedding,
1 demand sync pulse input
DP4IOMOD
9 IQ flange, to provide extra clearance when mounting IQFLANGE

45-inch (1143.0 mm) extension cable for remote mounting of power module IQA45CABLE
9 24–48 Vdc separate source power module IQMDCPM
100–240 Vac and 100–250 Vdc separate source power module IQMSSPM
9 Three-phase, self-powered power module IQM3PPM
9 INCOM communication module

RS-485 communication module with Modbus protocol
IPONI
MPONI
9
9 Accessories
IQ DP-4000 I/O Module
9 For applications where field ● Power requirements:
modification to add or change 10 VA
9 Input/Output (I/O) capability ● Frequency: 50/60 Hz
to the IQ DP-4000 is required,
9 Operating temperature:
●
Eaton offers I/O cards. These 25°–70°C
field-installable modules can
Operating humidity:
9
●
be easily inserted into an
existing IQ DP-4000 where 0–95% noncondensing
Dry contact input: 24 Vdc
9
●
input/output application
needs change. differential across input pair
of terminals; minimum
9 pulse width, 50 mS
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
Accuracy Voltage Inputs (Each Channel) Compatible with the
● Maintained from 10–250% ● Voltage range (nominal): Following Systems 9
of CT primary rating 90–600 Vac ● Three-phase, three-wire
● Nominal full scale voltage: ● Three-phase, four-wire 9
Current Inputs (Each Channel) 120–600 Vac
● Nominal full scale current:
5 amperes AC
● Overload withstand: Ratings 9
660 Vac continuous 4 kV ● Application to 500 kV,
● Current range for rated
accuracy: 0–15 amperes AC
1.2/50 μs no PTs to 600 volts 9
● Burden: three-phase power ● CT ratios selectable from
● Overload withstand:
15 amperes ac continuous
module 10 VA
●
5:5 A to 12800: 5A
Standard 120/600 Vac line
9
●
300 amperes AC 1 second
Burden: 0.003 VA
Fuses
Supplied with three-phase
three-phase power supply
module. Two separate 9
source power supply
9
power module only. 3/4
ampere, 600 volt bus type modules available. One
KTK-R-3/4 (three required). module from 110– 240 Vac
and 110–250 Vdc; the other 9
Contact Rating (Model 4100) module 24–48 Vdc only
● 10 amperes at 120/240 Vac 9
(resistive)
● 10 amperes at 30 Vdc 9
(resistive)
9
Model 4100 Input and Output 9
Model Input Output
4000 0 0 9
9
4100 1 digital (dry contact) 3 relays
Control Power Input

Description Separate Source Self Powered DC Source
9
Input range, AC
Frequency range
110–240 Vac ±10%
45–66 Hz
110–600 Vac ±10%
45–66 Hz
N/A
N/A
9
Input range, DC
Burden
110–250 Vac ±10%
10 VA
N/A
10 VA
24–48 Vdc ±20%
10 VA
9
Displayed Values
9
Description
Displayed Through Eaton’s
PowerNet System Local Display
9
AC amperes, phases A, B, C ±0.3% ±0.3% ±1 digit
9
AC voltage, phase A-B, B-C, C-A ±0.3% ±0.3% ±1 digit
Phase A-N, B-N, C-N ±0.3% ±0.3% ±1 digit 9
Watts ±0.6% ±0.6% ±1 digit
Vars ±0.6% ±0.6% ±1 digit 9
VA
Watt-hours
±0.6%
±0.6%
±0.6% ±1 digit
±0.6% ±1 digit
9
VAR-hours ±0.6% ±0.6% ±1 digit 9
VA-hours ±0.6% ±0.6% ±1 digit
Power factor ±1% ±1% 9
Frequency ±0.1 Hz ±0.1 Hz
% THD Through 31st harmonic Through 31st harmonic
9
Note 9
All accuracy is measured as a percentage of full scale.
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Field Wiring Connections
Three-Phase Three-Wire (Up to 600 Volts) Three-Phase Four-Wire (Up to 600 Volts)
9 Direct Voltage Connection and External Current Transformers Direct Voltage Connection and External Current Transformers
C 3CT N
9
L3 C 3CT
B 2CT L3
Line L2 Load B 2CT
A 1CT Line L2 Load
L1 A
9 L1 1CT
(99 – 275 Vdc)

9 (99 – 264 Vac)
(24 – 48 Vdc)
(99 – 275 Vdc)
(99 – 264 Vac)
Control Power (24 – 48 Vdc)
9 IQ DP-4000
Control Power
IQ DP-4000
9 1 2 3 4
Fuse
A B C
HIC HIB HIA
H2C H2B H2A
Fuse
HIC HIB HIA
Neutral 1 2 3 4 A B C H2C H2B H2A
9
Term. Neutral
Term.
9
Three-Phase Three-Wire (Above 600 Volts) Three-Phase Four-Wire (Above 600 Volts)
9 External Voltage Transformers and Current Transformers
C 3CT N
External Voltage Transformers and Current Transformers
L3 C 3CT
9 Line L2
L1
A
B 2CT
1CT
Load Line
L3
L2
B 2CT Load
A 1CT
L1
9 Fuse
Fuse
9 Open Delta
VT Connection WYE
Connection
9 IQ DP-4000
IQ DP-4000
Fuse
9 A B C
Neutral
HIC HIB HIA
H2C H2B H2A
Fuse
A B C
HIC HIB HIA
H2C H2B H2A
Term. Neutral
9
Term.
Self-Powered Power Supply Module
Self-Powered Power Supply Module
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Dimensions
9
Drilling Pattern IQ DP-4000 Side View
9
5.38 With Communication Module
2.69
(136.7)
0.50
(12.7)
5.40
(137.1) 9
(68.3)
4.42
9
Faceplate
(112.3)
Without Communication
8.90 Module
(226.1)
9.38
9
(238.3)
6.68
(169.7) Power
9
Module
P3
9
4.45 4.69
(113.0)
.06
(119.1)
9
(1.5) RAD
GND
2.23 4 Places 1
9
Power Module
Pulse
Sync.
(56.7) 2
1/2 Hp @ 240 Vac 1/3 Hp @ 120 Vac

3
Alarm 1
4
5
2.53
.218
PONI
6
(64.3) DIA 10 Places
9
Alarm 2
5.06 (5.5) 7
8
(128.5)
9
MWH Pulse
10
11 9
9
LED Display
9
Height Width Depth
Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
9
PONI
9
10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 5.40 (137.2) 6.50 (3.0)
Without PONI 9
9.02 (229.0) 7.80 (198.1) 4.42 (112.3) 12.5 (5.7)
9
IQ DP-4000 Auxiliary Power Supply
Width Height Depth 9
2.40 (61.0) 4.00 (101.6) 1.11 (28.2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 IQ 230 Digital Meter
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters
Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-79
9 Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-79
V3-T9-80
9 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-81
V3-T9-84
9 IQ Energy Sentinel™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97
9 Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
9 IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9
9 IQ 230 Meters
The IQ 230 is a
The IQ 230 is ideal for
9 microprocessor-based
metering and monitoring
individual load monitoring
or provides an alternative
device. Its compact size and to multiple ammeters,
9 flexible mounting capabilities voltmeters, ammeter and
make it suitable for machine voltmeter switches,
9 control panels such as wattmeters, varmeters,
panelboard and switchboard power factor meters,
9 mains and feeders, low
voltage metal-enclosed
frequency meters, watthour
and demand meters. ANSI
switchgear feeders and C12 Class 10 revenue
9 motor control centers. The IQ metering accuracy makes the
230 series meter includes a IQ 230 ideal for sub-metering
9 base module and a display and sub-billing applications.
module. The IQ 230 base
9 module has the flexibility to
be directly mounted to the
9 display or separately panel
mounted. The display is
integrally designed to fit a
9 standard 1/4 DIN or a
100 mm ANSI cutout for
9 new retrofit applications.
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Features Standards and Certifications
The IQ 230 can be easily ● Five different mounting Monitored Values ● UL and cUL listed 9
programmed from the display options UL file number E185559
9
●
● Phase currents
keypad, which features a ● 1/4 DIN standard ● CSA certified (not ANSI
● Voltage, L-L, L-N
4 line x 20 character LED 3.60 inches (91.4 mm) x
backlit LCD display. This 3.60 inches (91.4 mm)
● System and per-phase
power including watthours,
revenue certified as a
single-phase meter) 9
menu driven device displays a cutout that meets global
9
variety of selectable electrical varhours and VA-hours ● CE mark for applications
standards where European
system values and may be ● System demand including
● One meter style with compliance is required
programmed for password
protection.
multiple mounting
watt demand, VA demand
and VAR demand ● IEC 1010-1 (1990) incl. 9
choices—mount on panel, amend. 1 and 2 (1995)
Apparent and
9
●
The IQ 230 series includes DIN rail or back of meter
displacement power factor ● EN61010-1 (1993)
two variations all containing ● Autoranging power supply;
● Frequency ● CSA C22.2 #1010.1 (1992)
the same display module.
The IQ 230 has built-in
one style for any voltage
up to 600 Vac ● KYZ pulse output is ● UL 3111 9
INCOM communications, available for use with a
Direct connection up to
9
●
KYZ pulse output, digital 600 Vac. PTs are not watthour pulse recorder
inputs, digital outputs and an required or totalizer
analog input. The IQ 230M ● AC or DC powered ● Recorded minimums and 9
includes all the benefits of maximums of most values
Polarity sensing for errors
9
●
the IQ 230 but replaces
INCOM communication with such as improper wiring
or forward and reverse
Modbus®
power flow 9
● Membrane faceplate
designed and tested to 9
meet NEMA® 12 and IP52
● Nonvolatile storage of all 9
set points and recorded
peaks and minimums 9
● Built-in INCOM or Modbus
●
communications capability
Digital and analog I/O
9
● Utility seal provision 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Product Selection
9
9 IQ 230 Meters IQ 230 Meters
9 Description
Catalog
Number
9 IQ 230 complete meter

Includes base, display and 14-inch cable with INCOM Communications, KYZ output, digital inputs,
IQ230
digital outputs, analog input and utility seal provision

9 IQ 230M complete meter IQ230M
Includes base, display and 14-inch cable with Modbus communications, KYZ output, digital inputs,
9 digital outputs, analog input and utility seal provision
IQ 230 base module IQ230TRAN
9 IQ 230M base module IQ230MTRAN

IQ 200D IQ 210/220 display module IQ200D
9 3-foot (0.9 m) category 5 cable IQ23CABLE
9
6-foot (1.8 m) category 5 cable IQ26CABLE
10-foot (3.0 m) category 5 cable IQ210CABLE
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
Compatible with the Following Systems: EMC
● Three-phase, three-wire ● Emissions 9
● Three-phase, four-wire FCC Part 15 Class A
● Single-phase, two-wire CISPR 11 (1990)/EN55011 (1991) Group 1 Class A 9
Single-phase, three-wire
● Immunity
9
●
Electrostatic discharge
Current Input (Each Channel) EN61000-4-2 (1995)/EN50082-2 (1995)
● Current range: 2 times
4 kV contact discharge
8 kV air discharge
9
● Nominal full scale current: 5 amperes AC Electrical fast transient
● Overload withstand:10 amperes AC continuous EN61000-4-4 (1995)/EN50082-2 (1995) 9
150 amperes AC, 1 second 2 kV power lines
● Input impedance: 0.01 ohms 2 kV signal lines 9
● Burden: 0.025 VA Radiated immunity
EN61000-4-3 (1997)/EN50082-2 (1995)
10V/m
9
Voltage Input (Each Channel)
● Voltage range (nominal): 90–600/347 Vac
Conducted immunity
EN61000-4-6 (1996)/EN50082-2 (1995) 9
● Nominal full scale voltage: 120–600/347 Vac 10V rms
● Overload withstand: 660 Vac continuous, Power frequency magnetic field 9
800 Vac 1 second EN61000-4-8 (1995)
● Input impedance: 2 megohm 30 A/m 9
CT (Primary) Settings Metered Values and Accuracies at Full Scale 9
Select from 256 values ranging from 5–8000 amperes Accuracy
● PT Primary 256 values with ratios up to 200 kV AC ampere Phase A ±0.5% 9
Phase B
Environmental Conditions
Phase C 9
AC voltage
Base Display
Phase A-B Phase A ±0.5% 9
Operating temperature –20°C to 50°C 0°C to 50°C Phase B-C Phase B
Storage temperature –30°C to 85°C –20°C to 60°C Phase C-A Phase C
9
Operating humidity 0.0% to 95% noncondensing — Watts ±1.0%
Maximum relative humidity 80% up to 31°C — VARs ±1.0% 9

VA ±1.0%
Frequency Range Watthours ±1.0% 9
50/60 Hz
9
VAR-hours ±1.0%
VA-hours ±1.0%
Control Power Input
Vac Vdc
Power factor ±2.0%
9
IQ 230 100–600 ±10% 48–250 ±10% Frequency ±0.1%
Frequency range 50–60 Hz ±10% —

Communications
9
Burden 180 mA 700W INCOM compatible 1200/9600 baud 9
● (IQ 230 only—does not require IPONI)
Modbus compatible 9600/19200 baud
9
● (IQ 230M only—does not require PONI) 9
Input/Output 9
KYZ solid-state relay output
● 96 mA at 240 Vac/300 Vdc 9
Digital input 96 mA at 12–48 Vdc
9
●
● Digital output 96 mA at 125 Vac/176 Vdc

Analog input 4–20 mA
9
●
9
9
Metering Devices
Mounting the IQ 230 Base Module

9 to the IQ 230 Display Module
9
9
IQ 230 Display
Module—
Mounted in
9 a Panel
9
9 IQ 230
Base Module
IN 1
R I
IN2
R I
A N1
R I
H
1
A
H
2
A
H
1
B
H
2
B
H
1
C
H
2
C
9
DISPL AY
A 1 A 2 PU LSE INC OM MO D
TX 1 2 1 2 K Y Z 1 2 3 1 2
VA VB VC N EU PS1 PS2
9 Lock Washer
#10 Screw
9
Display Mounting Options
9
IQ 230 Display Module
9
9 Gasket
Panel
9
9 Locking Washer
9 Hex Nut
9 Mounting Bracket
9 3.9 Inches (100 mm) .25 Inches (6.4 mm)

or
ANSI Cutout Diameter Cutout
9
9 IQ 230 Base Connections
9 IN1 IN2 AN1

H H H H H H
1 2 1 2 1 2
R I R I R I A A B B C C
9
9 Connect to
IQ 230 Display DISPLAY
System Current
Transformer Input
A1 A2 PULSE INCOM MOD
9
Module 1 2 1 2 K Y Z 1 2 3 1 2
TX
INCOM™ Port
INCOM™
9 Transmit LED
K-Y-Z Pulse
Output
9
9 VA VB VC NEU PS1 PS2
9 Ground Lug
9 System
Voltage Input
Neutral IQ 230
Power Supply
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Wiring Diagrams
9
Typical Field Wiring Connections 9
Three-Phase Three-Wire (up to 600 Volts) Three-Phase Four-Wire (up to 600 Volts)
Proper CT polarity is critical to the proper operation of the meter (Line Powered) Proper CT polarity is critical to the proper operation of the meter 9
Line Load Line Load
L3
L2
N
L3
9
L2
L1
L1 9
H1A
H2A
H1B
H2B
H1C
H2C
H2A H2B H2C 9
H1A H1B H1C
9
Case Case
IQ 230 Ground Ground
must be IQ 230 must be
connected connected
VA VB VC NEU PS1 PS2 for proper
operation
VA VB VC NEU PS1 PS2 for proper
operation 9
Fuse Fuse
9
Control Power Control Power
IQ 230
90–600 Vac
IQ 230
90–600 Vac
9
9
48–250 Vdc 48–250 Vdc
Three-Phase Three-Wire (above 600 Volts) Three-Phase Four-Wire (above 600 Volts)
Line
Proper CT polarity is critical to the proper operation of the meter
Load Line
Proper CT polarity is critical to the proper operation of the meter
Load
9
N
9
L3
L3
L2
L2
L1
Fuse
L1
9
9
H2A H2B H2C
H2A H2B H2C
Open
H1A H1B H1C
Delta Case WYE H1A H1B H1C Case
9
PT Ground Ground
IQ 230 Connection
Connec- must be IQ 230 must be
tion connected connected
VA VB VC NEU PS1 PS2 for proper for proper
VA VB VC NEU PS1 PS2
operation operation
9
Fuse Fuse
Control Power
9
Control Power
IQ 230
90–600 Vac
IQ 230
90–600 Vac
9
48–250 Vdc 48–250 Vdc
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9
IQ 230
9
9 IQ 200
9 Menu Enter
4.33
(110.0)
3.62
(92.0)
3.62
(92.0)
9
Scroll
9 4.33 0.97 6.06

(110.0) 0.50 (24.6) 0.06 (154)
(12.7) (1.5)
9
1.84 6.74
(46.7) (171.2)
9 Mounting Hole Pattern for the IQ 230 Base Module

9 3.55
(90.2)
9 .78 2.00 .25
(19.8) (50.8) (6.35)
9
9 Slot Size
.125 (3.2) Radius
(4 places)
9 5.05
(128.3)
9
9 4.55
(115.6)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
Description Page
9
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 150S/250S Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters. . . . V3-T9-56 9
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9
9
9
9
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter 9
Product Overview
Eaton’s Power Xpert™ Multi- The Eaton Power Xpert Multi-
Product Description
The Power Xpert Multi-Point The Power Xpert Multi-Point
9
Point Meter is an ANSI
C12.20 revenue class Web-
Point Meter (PXMP Meter)
offers a highly modular
Meter can measure up to any
of the following number of
Meter can be used with three
different ratings of current 9
enabled electronic approach to high-density circuits: sensors: 100 mA, 10 mA or
submetering device that can metering applications in
● Sixty single-phase,
333 mV. Switchboard/ 9
be mounted in panelboards electrical power distribution panelboard applications will
switchboards or enclosures. systems. The PXMP Meter is
●
two-wire (single-pole)
Thirty single-phase,
use the 100 mA current 9
When mounted in a compatible with most three- sensors, which are highly
panelboard or a switchboard,
the Power Xpert Multi-Point
phase industrial, commercial
and single-phase residential ●
three-wire (two-pole)
Twenty three-phase,
accurate, self-protecting in the
event of an open circuit
9
Meter provides customers low voltage electrical power condition under load and are
with an integrated power systems. The PXMP is
four-wire (three-pole)
supplied with an integral plug- 9
distribution and energy equipped with two Modbus® The circuits listed above can in connector. The PXMP
metering solution that saves RTU communication ports for be mixed provided that the
total number of current
automatically detects the 9
space, reduces installation local display and remote serial rating of the current sensor
labor and lowers total cost. communications. The PXMP
also has optional pulse input
sensors does not exceed 60.
The meter provides current;
that is connected. 9
voltage; power factor; The PXMP can also use 10 mA
and digital output modules
along with one standard demand and active, reactive, current sensors that were 9
digital output and three digital and real power (VA, VAR, kW); previously installed for
inputs. The PXMP Energy and active, reactive, and real IQMESII retrofit applications. 9
Portal Module is Web energy (VA, VAR, kWh) Additionally, the PXMP can
enabled, making it suitable for measurements for each load.
The unit also provides up to
use 333 mV split core current
sensors for retrofit
9
use with Ethernet networks
applications where metering
and modems. two years at 15-minute
intervals or eight years at one- has not previously existed. 9
hour intervals of demand data The 10 mA and 333 mV
logging storage in non-volatile current sensors are also self- 9
memory for up to 60 protecting in the event of an
submeters. open circuit condition under
load.
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Application Description Features

9 The Power Xpert Multi-Point ● Monitors power and ● Can be directly mounted in Configuration
Meter is ideally suited to energy for up to 60 current a UL Listed panelboard,
9 The Power Xpert Multi-
●
handle submetering in low sensors; space-saving switchboard or enclosure Point Meter is fully
voltage power distribution modular design allows ● 256 MB of memory in configurable using Power
9 equipment applications such measurement from 1 to 60 meter base for up to two Xpert Multi-Point
as distribution boards in circuits years of 15-minute interval configuration software that
9 multi-tenant buildings,
comprehensive main and
● Built-in communication data (eight years of one- can be down-loaded free
interfaces hour interval data) for eight from the Eaton website at
9 feeder metering in
commercial/industrial
● Monitors single-phase and demand values up to
60 submeters
www.eaton.com/meters
three-phase loads from 120 ● Each Power Xpert Multi-
switchboards or medium
9 voltage distribution
●
to 600 Vac
Monitors current, voltage,
Communication Capabilities
Point Meter module can be
configured for up to six
equipment with the use of With the Power Xpert Multi-
9 power factor, frequency, metering points in any
voltage and current Point Meter’s built-in combination of single-
transformers. power and energy
communication capabilities, phase and three-phase
9 Stores extensive energy
●
The Power Xpert Multi-Point remote meter reading and metering points
profile data for each
Meter provides a cost- monitoring functions can be corresponding to the
metering point; can be
9 effective solution for used to identify
integrated into both new and
retrofit applications.
voltage wiring of the meter
base
residential or commercial coincidental peak
9 metering installations. Typical
installations include:
demand contribution ● Standard Modbus RTU
● Power Xpert Multi-Point
configuration software
● LEDs provide status of unit ● Optional Modbus TCP /
9 ● High-rise buildings communication activity and BACnet/IP / SNMP / HTTP /
simplifies system
commissioning and
● Government institutions verify sensor connections SMTP / NTP /SFTP startup; PXMP
9 ● K–12, universities and
● Meets rigid ANSI C12.20
accuracy specifications for
communications configuration software
campuses supports both online and
9 ● Office buildings ●
revenue meters
Three standard digital
Software Compatibility
The Power Xpert Multi-Point
offline configurations
● Medical facilities
9 ● Apartment and
inputs and eight pulse
inputs per optional module
Meter: Easy to Install
● UL Listed for mounting
condominium complexes
● Can be used as part of
to monitor WAGES (water,
9 ● Airports air, gas, electric, or steam)
an electrical energy
monitoring and cost
inside panelboards (e.g.,
PRL4), switchboards, and
● Shopping malls ● One standard digital output NEMA 12 enclosures
9 ● Industrial sites and eight digital outputs ●
allocation system
Can be remotely monitored ● Quick connect terminals
per optional module for for current sensors,
9
● Mixed-use facilities via onboard Web pages
alarm indication Modbus communications,
with Eaton’s optional
● Three types of meter Energy Portal Module and bus voltages make
9 modules to support 10 mA,
100 mA or 333 mV sensors
● Is compatible with third- wiring the unit quick
party software platforms and easy
9 and interface devices
9 Features
Description Main/Aggregate Channel Data Tenant
9 Instrumentation
Current, per phase ■ 1 ■ —
9 Voltage, per phase (L-L, L-N) ■ ■ —
Frequency — ■ ■
9 Minimum/maximum readings, V
Minimum/maximum readings, W, VAR, VA
Per phase
Total and per phase
—
—
—
—
9 Minimum/maximum readings, PF, F

Power
Total — —
9 Real, reactive, and apparent power (W, VAR, VA)

Power factor
Total and per phase
—
Total and per phase
Average
Total
Average
9
Demand
Block interval (fixed, sliding) ■ — —
Real, reactive and apparent power demand Total and per phase — —
9 Minimum/maximum readings, PF, W, VAR, VA Total and per phase Total —
Energy
9 Real, reactive and apparent energy (Wh, VARh, VAh) Total — Total
Real, forward and reverse, and total (Wh) ■ — ■
9 Note
1 Main only.
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Standards and Certifications Product Selection
The Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter, current sensors, and other
9
Environmental accessories can be ordered from Eaton distributors. Refer to the
The PXMP Meter and current sensors must be housed in a following catalog numbers when ordering. 9
NEMA or UL enclosure that keeps the internal environment
within the PXMP’s environmental specification ranges and Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Products 9
provides suitable fire and mechanical protection in the end
9
product installation. Product Description Catalog Number
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABCN Voltage Inputs
● Temperature range: –20 to +70°C (–4 to +158°F)
● Storage temperature range: –40 to 85°C PXMP meter base—three-phase with ABCN voltage inputs PXMP-MB 9
● Humidity: 5–95% noncondensing environment PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs PXMP-MM100MA
● Pollution degree: II
for use with PXMP current sensors
9
PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs PXMP-MM10MA
Elevation: 0 to 9843 ft
9
●
for use with IQMESII current sensors
(0 to 3000m)
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs PXMP-MM333MV
● Housing: IP20
● CE Mark
for use with 333 mV current sensors
Meter Bases and Meter Modules with ABN Voltage Inputs
9
EMC EN61326
9
●
PXMP meter base—single-phase, three-wire PXMP-MB-AB
with ABN voltage inputs
Emissions Conducted and Radiated
● FCC part 15 Class B
PXMP meter module with six 100 mA inputs
for use with PXMP current sensors
PXMP-MM100MA-AB
9
● CISPR 11 Class B PXMP meter module with six 10 mA inputs for use with IQMESII
current sensors
PXMP-MM10MA-AB
9
Electromagnetic Immunity
Standard Description Level
PXMP meter module with six 333 mV inputs for use with
333 mV current sensors
PXMP-MM333MV-AB
9
9
EN61000-4-2 ESD 3 IO Modules
EN61000-4-3 RF radiated 3 PXMP meter pulse input module with eight inputs PXMP-PIM
EN61000-4-4 Electrical fast transient 3 PXMP meter digital output module with eight outputs PXMP-DOM
9
EN61000-4-5 Surge 31 Communication Module
EN61000-4-6 RF conducted 3 PXMP meter energy portal module PXMP-EPM 9

Current Sensor Kits
EN61000-4-11 Volt sag/swell/variation —
KIT, PXMP CS125 sensor, quantity of 3 PXMP-CS125-3 9
Product Safety
● IEC/EN61010-1
KIT, PXMP CS250 sensor, quantity of 3
KIT, PXMP CS400 sensor, quantity of 3
PXMP-CS250-3
PXMP-CS400-3
9
9
● UL 61010-1 File E185559
Current Sensor Cable Kits
● CNL evaluation to CAN/C22.2 No 1010.1.92
KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 4 ft (1.2m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC4-3
Accuracy KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 6 ft (1.8m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC6-3 9
● ANSI C12.20—Accuracy Class 0.5% with either CSXXX or KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC8-3
PXMP-CSXXX sensors KIT, PXMP sensor cable, 12 ft (3.7m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SC12-3
9
● Measurement Canada Approval Pending
Current Sensor Extension Cable Kits
9
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 8 ft (2.4m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-8-3
KIT, PXMP sensor extension cable, 16 ft (4.9m), quantity of 3 PXMP-SCE-16-3 9
Interface Modules
PXMP current sensor interface module for 333 mV, kit X 3 PXMP-IM333MV-3 9
Note
Total sensor lead length must not exceed 28 ft (8.5m).
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
The Pulse Input Module (PXMP-PIM) can be used to totalize

9 pulse outputs from water meters, gas meters, steam meters or
even old electrical meters with KZ pulse outputs. The PXMP-PIM
9 can also be used for status monitoring in applications where
status indication updates of 6 seconds over Modbus satisfies
9 the application requirement.
Support products for the Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter include
9 the HMI display, IMPCABLE and power supplies as described in
the table below.
9
9 Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Support Products
Product Description Catalog Number
9 Communication cable, 1000 ft (305m), 600V insulation IMPCABLE
9
PXMP meter display—6-inch color touchscreen (with cable) PXMP-DISP-6
Power supply—single-phase 90–264 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60E
9 Power supply—three-phase 360–575 Vac, 24 Vdc at 2.5A PSG60F

Power supply—three-phase 600 Vac, 24 Vdc PSS55D
9
9 Meter Selection
Meter Base Typical Applications
9 New Switchboards Retrofit Existing Enclosed PXMP
PXMP Current IQMESII 333MV
9 Three-Phase
Application or Single-Phase
Sensors,
Solid Core,
Sensors,
Solid Core,
Sensors,
Split Core, Enclosed PXMP
Single-Phase Application PXMP-CSXXX, Ampere CS-XXX, CS-SP-X-XXXX-333MV, Interface
9 Meter Module with ABCN with ABN Ratings Ampere Ratings Ampere Ratings Modules
PXMP-MM100MA PXMP-MB — 125, 250, 400 — — —
9 PXMP-MM333MV PXMP-MB — — — 100, 200, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, PXMP-IM333MV
1600, 2000 1
9 PXMP-MM10MA
PXMP-MM100MA-AB
PXMP-MB
—
—
PXMP-MB-AB
—
125, 250, 400
5, 50, 70, 125, 200, 400
—
—
—
—
—
9 PXMP-MM333MV-AB — PXMP-MB-AB — — 100, 200, 300, 400, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, PXMP-IM333MV
1600, 2000 1
9 PXMP-MM10MA-AB — PXMP-MB-AB — 5, 50, 70, 125, 200, 400 — —
Note
9 1 For applications requiring more than 2000A current sensors, use a CS005 with 5A CT in conjunction with PXMP-MM10MA.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Technical data and Specifications
9
External Circuit Group Specifications ● End of Line Termination resistance should match cable
impedance (typ. 100–120 ohms) 9
PXMP-MB (-AB) Meter base ● Four-position removable terminal plug 18–22 AWG (0.82–0.33
Discrete Output mm2) typical, wire ferrules recommended 9
● Quantity 1—solid-state relay Form A NO Bidirectional FET ● COM1
● Polarity of external source is not important – T7—Shield 9
Isolation circuit to ground 2 kV/1 min. – T8—RS-485 common
9
●
● Maximum external source voltage 28 Vdc – T9—Data –

– T10—Data +
Line-to-line TVS clamp across switching element at 32 Vdc
9
●
● COM2
● Solid-state relay on resistance 35 ohms maximum
– T11—Shield
●
●
Maximum load current 80 mA
Minimum pulse width 20 milliseconds
– T12—RS-485 common 9
– T13—Data –
● Fixed 25 milliseconds for pulse initiator function
– T14—Data + 9
● Maximum pulse rate 25 Hz
● Wiring to two-position removable terminal plug PXMP-MB Power Supply Input 9
● 12–18 AWG (3.31–0.82 mm2), wire ferrules recommended ● 24 Vdc ±20%
● T1 (polarity not important)
● 15W maximum load 9
● 1 kV isolation barrier internal to PXMP-MB
● T2 (polarity not important) ● Externally fuse circuit to protect wire 9
Discrete Inputs ● Green power OK LED
● Quantity 3, common circuits inputs 1–3
● Three-position terminal block 16–12 AWG (1.31–3.31 mm2), 9
wire ferrules recommended
● Group isolation 2 kV
● T15—24 Vdc – (common) 9
● No input-to-input circuit isolation
T16—24 Vdc + (Hot)
9
●
● All inputs per module share a common external
24V (±10%) supply
● T17—Shield (optional) capacitively referenced to chassis
ground for enhanced EMC performance
● 24V externally sourced between common and inputs 9
● Design to interface with external dry contact Meter Voltage Inputs
● Input impedance ~2.2K ohms ● Overvoltage CAT III 9
● Input current draw ~10 mA per input ● Maximum voltage rating
● Minimum pulse width 10 milliseconds ● 480VL:G (corner grounded delta) 9
● Maximum pulse rate 20 Hz ● 347VL:N
● Wiring to four-position removable terminal plug ● 600VL:L 9
● 12–18 AWG (3.31–0.82 mm2), wire ferrules recommended
9
● Frequency rating 47–63 Hz
● T3—Common (connect ext. 24 common here) ● Metering range (temporary transitions)
T4—Input 1 (dry contact to 24V hot)
9
● ● 30–700VL:N
● T5—Input 2 (dry contact to 24V hot) ● 30–700VL:L
T6—Input 3 (dry contact to 24V hot)
9
● ● Abuse withstand rating 1000V sustained
COM1 and COM2 RS-485 Serial Ports ● High pot withstand rating 2500V/1min
● No D+/D– biasing reliance on fail-safe driver and biasing at
● Input impedance 4M ohms 9
● Fuse inputs rated to protect wiring to mains. External fuses
Master
● Baud rate configurable between 9600–115K baud (default)
● must be installed between the meter voltage terminal and the 9
mains disconnect switch to the main lines to protect the lines.
9
● Use cable designed for RS-485 communications 600V 1 A BUSS type KTK-R-1 Fast Acting or equivalent fuses
● Low L:L capacitance ● are recommended.
Impedance of ~100–120 ohms
9
●
● Wiring to removable terminal plug 10–18 AWG (5.26–0.82
● Shield—Mylar for high frequency; Braid for low frequency mm2), wire ferrules recommended
● Separate common and shield for best noise immunity ● T18—N (VR) 9
● Maximum cable length is 4000 ft (1219.2m) with 32 nodes ● T19—C (V3)
at 19.2K baud increased data rates will reduce maximum
cable distance
● T20—B (V2) 9
● T21—A (V1)
2000 ft (609.6m) with 32 total nodes at 115.2K baud
9
●
● Isolation 300V to ground due to TVS diode clamps

● Modbus RTU slave protocol, address defined by rotary switch 9
● Green Rx and Red Tx LEDs per channel
● Data + > Data—during idle marked, logic 1 state 9
Metering Devices
PXMP meter modules (PXMP-MMs) PXMP pulse input modules (PXMP-PIMs)

9 Compatible with all PXMP Meter Base slots 1–10 LED ● Compatible with all PXMP-MB slots 1–10
indicators:
9 LED indicators
●
● Health and status green, blink to show activity ● Health and status green, blink to show activity
9 ● Pulse energy output one red per group of three loads
●
● Input On/Off status one green per pulse input
Eight pulse inputs to external dry contacts
● Load energy direction red/green pair per load
9 All variations support six load inputs. ● Maximum pulse rate is 20 Hz
● Minimum pulse width is 20 milliseconds
Current sensor connection is one 2 x 2 connector per load.
9 ● External circuit groups rated for 24 Vdc (±20%)
Compatible with PXMP-SCXX sensor cables, total cable length ● All circuits share the same electrical common
9 to the sensor should not exceed 28 ft (8.5m). ● External supply connects to the module with a two-position
Note that -AB suffix only affects what voltage channels the loads removable terminal plug
9 are paired with for metering purposes. ● The supply is internally fanned out to all circuits
● Group isolation limited to 300V to ground due to TVS diode
9
PXMP-MM10MA supports the CSXXX series of 10 mA
clamp
maximum secondary output current transformers.
● Input impedance ~2.2K causing a 10 mA load per input when
9 PXMP-MM100MA supports the PXMP-CSXXX series of 100 mA
maximum secondary output current transformers.
energized
● External circuit groups connect with a 16-position removable
9 PXMP-MM333MV supports 333 mV maximum secondary terminal plug
output current transformers with the use of the PXMP- ● Terminals support 12–18 AWG (3.31–0.82 mm2), wire
9 IM333MV interface module. ferrules recommended
9 PXMP digital output module (PXMP-DOM) PXMP energy portal module (PXMP-EPM)
● Compatible with all PXMP-MB slots 1–10 ● Only functionally compatible with PXMP-MB slot 10
9 LED indicators
●
● LED indicators
● Health and status green, blink to show activity ● Top health and status green, blink to show activity
9 ● Output On/Off status one green per output ● Com. reset button—reset to defaults
● Eight individual solid-state relay outputs ● Local IP 192/10
9 ● Each circuit rated for 24 Vdc (±20%) with an 80 mA load ● RJ45 front-facing Ethernet configuration port LEDs
maximum – Link (Tx/Rx blink)
9 ● 24 Vdc is externally sourced – 10/100 speed
● Group isolation to ground 2 kV ● LED four-stack for bottom LAN/WAN Ethernet port
9 ● Each circuit has its own separate common, circuit-to-circuit ● Link (Tx/Rx blink)
isolation 120V ● 10/100 speed
9 ● 16-position removable terminal plug ● DHCP/Fixed
● 12–18 AWG (3.31–0.82 mm2), wire ferrules recommended ● TX active
9 ● Config. Ethernet RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP
● 10Base-T/100Base-Tx
9 ● Auto crossover capability supported
9
● Java Web browser interface
● Bottom facing LAN/WAN Ethernet port
9 RJ45 Cat5 STP/UTP 10Base-T/100Base-Tx

●
● STP required for full electromagnetic immunity

9 ● Auto crossover capability supported
● Supports Modbus TCP and Java Web browser interface
9 ● Bottom-facing telephone modem interface
● Modem type V92/56K baud
9 ● RJ11 field interface
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter System—Hardware Specifications
Field Power Rated Rated Circuit
9
Components Circuit Source Voltage Current Impedance Isolation Note 1 Note 2
PXMP-MB Digital output External 24 ±20% 1 0.080A 35 ohms 2.0 kV — — 9
PXMP-MB-AB maximum maximum
Digital input External 24 ±20% 1 0.01A 2.22K 2.0 kV Opto drops supply by 2V Group are electrically common 9
COM1 RS-485 Internal 5V 1 — 50–60 ohms 300V TVS diode clamped to PE —
COM2 RS-485 Internal 5V 1 — 50–60 ohms 300V TVS diode clamped to PE — 9
Power supply External 24 ±20% 1 0.7A N/A 1.0 kV Installation Class II input 15W maximum
input
Voltage inputs External 480V L:G 2
maximum
0.12 mA 4M ohms N/A Installation Class III High pot 2500V/1 minimum
9
A (V1)/ B (V2)/
C (V3)/ N (VR)
mains 347V L:N 2
600V L:L 2
0.09 mA
0.09 mA
4M ohms
4M ohms
N/A
N/A
Installation Class III
Installation Class III
High pot 2500V/1 minimum
High pot 2500V/1 minimum
9
PXMP-MM100MA
PXMP-MM10MA
CT secondary
CT secondary
External
External
N/A
N/A
100 mA
10 mA
14.6 ohms
67 ohms
N/A
N/A
20% over-range
20% over-range
See sensor for primary isolation
See sensor for primary isolation
9
9
PXMP-MM333MV CT secondary External 0.333V 2 N/A 50,000 ohms N/A 20% over-range See sensor for primary isolation
PXMP-DOM Digital output External 24 ±20% 1 0.080A 10 ohms 2 kV group 120V isolation Isolation dependent on
maximum maximum circuit-to-circuit external source
PXMP-PIM Pulse input External 24 ±20% 1 0.01A 2.22K ohms 300V to ground TVS diode clamped to PE; Note: Opto creates 2.2V drop 9
group isolated, all circuits common sourced by 2.2K ohms; isolation
PXMP-EPM Ethernet 100 Bt Internal — N/A N/A 1 kV

to 24V external source
—
dependent on external source
—
9
POT modem Internal — N/A N/A — — —
9
Notes
1 DC.
2 AC RMS.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
Wiring for PXMB-MB
9 Note: For all voltage connections—fuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
9 Four-Wire Wye Voltage Connection Inputs
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Three-Phase, Four-Wire Service (Ten Single-Phase, Single-Pole) Current Sensor Connections
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Network 120/208 Three-Wire Apartment Service Current Sensor Connections

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring for PXMB-MB-AB

9 Note: For all voltage connections—fuses should be sized in accordance with best practices to protect the instrumentation wire.
9 Single-Phase, Three-Wire 120/240 Voltage Connection Inputs

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 120/240 Single-Phase, Three-Wire Service Current Sensor Connections
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Dimensions
9
Single Unit—Front View
10.67 9
(271.0)
0.20
(5.1) 9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Mode
24Vdc 80mA Output

9
9
1
Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Meter Pulse In Output Portal Meter 2
Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Base
Com Com Com Com Com Com Com Com Com 24Vdc Inputs
Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Health Config. Port Common 3
Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Slave Address Input 1 4
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PI1 O1 Status 0 0 Input 2 5
9
9 1 9 1
PI2 O2 8 2 8 2 Input 3 6
Com
- - - - - - - PI3 O3
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Reset 7 3 7 3
+ + + + + + + PI4 O4 6
5
4 6
5
4
- - - - - - - PI5 O5 Shield 7
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX Health
+ + + + + + + PI6 O6 Common 8
- - - - - - - PI7 O7 TX RS-485 D 9
XX XX XX XX XX XX XX
9
+ + + + + + + PI8 O8 (Com 1) D 10
RX
Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse Pulse
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Power
Status Shield 11
- - - - - - - Common 12
+
XX +
XX +
XX +
XX +
XX +
XX +
XX TX RS-485 D 13
(Com 2)
- - - - - - - RX D 14
9
+
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1 +
B1
- - - - - - -
+
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1 +
100mA
A1
24Vdc 24Vdc
Cat. No. PXMP-MB-XX
Style No. 66D2261GXX Rev. X 12.00
11.67 CT
Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor Sensor 80mA Max
SN: XXXXXX
Date Code: WYYMMDD
FW Version X.X
Made in USA (304.8)
Inputs
(296.4) Local IP
9
1
1
PI1 PI2 PI3 PI4 PI5 PI6 PI7 PI8
O1
192/10
XX
2
2
3
O2
PS Input
4
XX Rating -Vdc 15
5
O3
Link
Local
WARNING 24Vdc +Vdc 16
6
9
REMOVE POWER BEFORE SERVICING 15W Max Shld 17
7
O4
MORE THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE DIAGRAM.

XX AVERTISSEMENT: CET EQUIPEMENT RENFERME PLUSIEURS
8
CIRCUITS SOUS TENSION. VOIR LE SCHEMA.

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
O5
DO NOT HIPOT / DIELECTRIC TEST

N (VR) 18
10/100
O6
Meter nc
XX
10/100
DHCP
Link
TX ST
C Voltage Inputs
C (V3) 19
9
O7
480V~ L:G Max.

LAN Delta B 347V~ L:N Max. nc
B1 Wye 600V~ L:L Max.
O8
A CAT III
/1PH B (V2) 20
Freq. 47-63 Hz
LAN
+ See manual for complete ratings nc
24V
A1 - Modem
b
A (V1) 21
Power Xpert
Multipoint Meter 9
9
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
8.74
(222.0) 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Single Unit—Side View Current Sensor Dimensions

9
9
9
9
9 ID
H
12.50
9 (317.5)
Multipoint Meter
http://www.Eaton.com Made in USA

FW X.XX
Power Xpert
Technical Support 1-800-809-2772

Rev. X
Style No. 66D2250G0X
Cat. No. PXMP-EPM-X
9
Serial No. XXXXXX
WYYMMDD
9
9
9 3.27
(83.1)
W
9 Single Unit—Top View

Current Sensor Dimensions
9 15.63 Sensor H W D
(397.0)
9 PXMP-CS125
PXMP-CS250
2.66 (67.6)
2.96 (75.2)
1.66 (42.1)
2.42 (61.5)
0.53 (13.5)
1.12 (28.4)
9 PXMP-CS400 3.64 (92.5) 3.03 (73.2) 1.74 (44.2)
9 Open Interface Module (PXMP-IM333MV)
9 PXMP Color Touchscreen Display Blue Locator LED Terminal Block
9 1.54
(39.0)
0.06~0.12
9 (1.6~3.0) 6.10
(0.24) 0.12 (3.0) R Typ.
7.25 6.79
9 (184.1) (172.4)
9 Outer
5.67 5.21
(144.1) (132.4)
9 PXMP-SCX Cable Strain Relief

333 mV
Sensor
Connection Strap Holes Secondary
9 Cut-Out Dimensions Leads
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
IQ Energy Sentinel
Description Page
9
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
IQ Energy Sentinel™
Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-98
9
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-99
V3-T9-100 9
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-104
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106 9
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-107
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-120
V3-T9-121
9
9
IQ Energy Sentinel™ 9
Product Description
9
IQ Sentinels Key advantages include The ability to monitor power Note: For customer billing
IQ Sentinels are unmatched savings in distribution systems down to applications, consult local utility 9
space, lower installation the machine or process level at for metering requirements.
microprocessor-based
submeters, designed to costs and the capability to an industrial facility has
Commercial applications 9
monitor power and energy. communicate data readings become essential to provide
include energy cost allocation
They represent an alternative
to installing separate
in a variety of ways. key benefits such as to verify
the accuracy of the utility bill, within convention halls, office 9
IQ Sentinels with built-in CTs identify and track energy usage buildings, shopping malls,
wattmeters, watthour meters
and watt demand meters.
and communications have to the loads that consume it, hospitals, warehouses and 9
the added benefit of greater develop a facility energy profile storage facilities.
The Energy Sentinel monitors overall system accuracy.
Conventional metering often
to establish a baseline, allocate Industrial applications include 9
watts, watthour and watt energy costs to create departmental billing and
demand. is less accurate since external
CTs and separate transducers
accountability, etc. process/assembly line energy 9
may each have inaccuracies An optional door-mounted cost analysis. IQ Energy
of 1% or more. interface, the Subnetwork Sentinels may be substituted
for watt transducers when
9
Master Local Display, is
Eaton’s IQ Sentinels provide a
unique cost-effective method
available to display the energy monitoring machine tool and
equipment performance 9
parameters monitored by the
to implement energy within plants.
submetering at lower levels
IQ Sentinels.
9
in the distribution system. Submetering application Recreational facilities include
examples for the IQ Sentinels sports arenas, camping
grounds, trailer parks and
9
include energy demand
marinas.
monitoring, product cost
analysis, process machine
9
The IQ Sentinel may be
tool efficiency and
productivity improvement,
applied on three-phase
(three- or four-wire), as well
9
and energy cost allocation or
tenant billing for commercial,
as single-phase (three-wire)
systems. 9
industrial, recreational and
residential facilities. IQ Sentinels may be
applied on either 50 or
9
60 Hz systems.
9
Metering Devices
9 The IQ Energy Sentinel is Breaker Mount Applications Universal Mount Applications
available in three different New Equipment
9 package versions: breaker
mounted, universal breaker
9 with internal CTs, and
universal breaker with
9 external CTs.
Designed for mounting on
9 Eaton’s Series C® Circuit
Breakers utilized in Eaton Universal Mount with Internal CTs
9 assemblies such as: The universal mount IQ Energy

Sentinel with internal CTs
● Pow-R-Line four
9 panelboards—feeder
includes integral 400A CTs and
may be applied on loads up to
circuits
9 ● Pow-R-Line C™
400A. The universal mount IQ
Energy Sentinels with internal
switchboards—feeder CTs may be utilized wherever
9 circuits
F-Frame Breaker with IQ Sentinel
breaker mounting is not
● Motor control centers and feasible or possible.
9 enclosed control with
circuit breaker
Retrofitting The universal mount IQ Energy
The space-saving design Sentinel with provisions for
9 disconnects—starter or
feeder circuits characteristics of the breaker external CTs may be applied on
mount IQ Energy Sentinels loads up to 4000A. They are
9 Enclosed Motor Control
●
allow them to be added to usually utilized for monitoring
● Enclosed circuit breakers existing Eaton circuit breakers loads larger than 400 amperes,
9 ● Pow-R-Way III® bus plugs
with circuit breaker
at any time, often with no
additional space or
on power cable sizes larger
than 500 kcmil or on circuits
disconnects
9 modifications required. containing more than one
conductor per phase.
Or they may be installed
9 when upgrading from older
circuit breakers, often with
9 no additional space or
modifications required.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Features
9
IQ Energy Sentinel Features
Features Benefits 9
■ Monitors (accuracy stated full scale)
Kilowatts ±1.0%
■
■
One device replaces multiple meters and/or transducers
Improved system accuracy 9
Kilowatts demand ±1.0% ■ Savings in product cost
■
Kilowatt Hour ±1.0%
Built-in CTs version up to 400A or external CTs version up to 4000A
■ Savings in space 9
■ Savings in installation cost
■
9
Breaker, panel or DIN rail mounted ■ No external power source is needed
■ Powered directly off the line ■ Permits remote monitoring and interconnection with programmable logic controllers
■ Built-in communication capability and building management systems. For further information see section on Power
Address set by DIP switches
Communication at 9600 baud
Management Software Systems 9
■ Designed to interface directly with Power Management Software Energy Billing software
Noise immune INCOM protocol
■ Choice of operator interfaces
■ Flexibility—displays what is needed where it is needed
■ Power Management Software
9
Subnetwork Master Local Display
Breaker Interface Module (BIM)
Power Management Energy Billing software 9
Power Management Software
.
9
Eaton’s Breaker Mount 9
Eaton’s breaker mount
IQ Energy Sentinel installs 9
in less than 10 minutes on
the load side of an Eaton
F-Frame (150A),
9
J-Frame (250A), or
K-Frame (400A) circuit 9
breaker.
9
Voltage
Tangs Transmit
LED
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Ground/Neutral
Connection
9
DIP Switch
Address
Communications
Connections 9
Energy Sentinel Features 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Universal Mount with The location of the ground/ Universal Mount for well as another terminal block
9 Internal CTs—(UI) neutral connection differs on External CTs—(UE) for connection to the user’s
The Universal Mount IQ Breaker Mount IQ Energy The Universal Mount IQ existing 5-ampere secondary
9 Energy Sentinel with internal Sentinels from the location of Energy Sentinel for external CTs that may range in
CTs may be panel-mounted the ground/neutral CTs may be panel-mounted standard ratios from 25:5 up
9 or DIN rail mounted on
disconnects or other circuits
connection on Universal
Mount IQ Sentinels. Incorrect
or DIN rail mounted on
circuits up to 4000 amperes.
to 4000:5.
Note: If the device will be
9 up to 400 amperes. A pull-
apart terminal block is
wiring to the ground/neutral
and communications A pull-apart terminal block is disconnected without interruption
of the monitored load, the use of
provided on the device for connections may result in provided on the device for
9 connection of the system accuracy and communication connection of the system
a CT shorting block is advised.
voltage reference wiring. errors. voltage reference wiring as

9
Communications Communications Communications Communications
9 Connections Shield
Connection
Connections Shield
Connection
9
9
9 CT
Terminal
9 Block
9
9 Ground/Neutral
Connection
Ground/Neutral
Connection
9 Voltage Terminal Block Voltage Terminal Block
Energy Sentinel Features

9 Standards and Certifications
9 UL listed, File E64983
●
● CSA approved, File

9 LR106359-1
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Product Selection
9
IQ Energy Sentinels
9
IQ Energy Sentinels
Current Rating Catalog
Description Voltage Rating—Vac Maximum Amperes Number
For F-Frame breakers 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 150 IQESF208 9
9
For F-Frame breakers 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 150 IQESF400
For F-Frame breakers 480, 480Y/277 150 IQESF480
For F-Frame breakers 600, 600Y/347 150 IQESF600
9
For J-Frame breakers 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 250 IQESJ208
For J-Frame breakers 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 250 IQESJ400 9
For J-Frame breakers 480, 480Y/277 250 IQESJ480
For J-Frame breakers 600, 600Y/347 250 IQESJ600 9
For K-Frame breakers
For K-Frame breakers
120/240, 240, 208Y/120
220/380, 230/400, 240/415
400
400
IQESK208
IQESK400
9
For K-Frame breakers 480, 480Y/277 400 IQESK480 9
For K-Frame breakers 600, 600Y/347 400 IQESK600
Universal with internal CTs 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 400 IQESUI208 9
Universal with internal CTs 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 400 IQESUI400
Universal with internal CTs 480, 480Y/277 400 IQESUI480
9
Universal with internal CTs 600, 600Y/347 400 IQESUI600
9
Universal for external CTs 120/240, 240, 208Y/120 4000 IQESUE208
Universal for external CTs 220/380, 230/400, 240/415 4000 IQESUE400 9
Universal for external CTs 480, 480Y/277 4000 IQESUE480
Universal for external CTs 600, 600Y/347 4000 IQESUE600 9
9
9
Terminal, Cable and Wiring Guidelines
Eaton’s Wire Size Wire
9
Sentinel Series C Terminal (Single Conductor) Types
F-Frame 624B100G02, G17, G18, G19 #14–1/0, #4–4/0, #4–4/01, #14–1/0 AWG THW, THHN, XHHW
9
J-Frame
K-Frame
T250KB, TA250KB
T350K, TA350KB
#4–350 kcmil
#250–500 kcmil
THW, THHN, XHHW
THW, THHN, XHHW
9
Universal Energy Sentinel with internal CTs T350K, TA350KB #250–500 kcmil THW, THHN, XHHW 9
System Voltage Reference Wiring
Energy Sentinel with internal or external CTs #24–#10 AWG 9
9
Current Transformer Wiring
Universal with external CTs #12 AWG (maximum)
Ground Reference Wiring
9
Energy Sentinel with internal or external CTs #22–#12 AWG (minimum 600 volt rated)
Communications Wiring 9
Energy Sentinel with internal or external CTs Eaton’s IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
F-Frame Eaton’s IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family 9
J-Frame
K-Frame
Eaton’s IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
Eaton’s IMPCABLE or Belden 9463 family
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Energy Sentinel
9 Current Input
9 Current range: 1% to 125% of current rating

Burden: 1 VA
9 Voltage Input
Voltage Range: ±20% of voltage rating
9 Frequency
9 50 or 60 Hz
Power Factor Range
9 All (–1 to +1)
9 Communications
Protocol: INCOM
9
Speed: 9600 baud
Compatibility: Power Management Software compatible
9 Environmental Conditions
Operating temperature: –25°C to 70°C 1
9 (–13°F to 158°F)
Storage temperature: –40°C to 85°C 1
9
(–40°F to 185°F)
Operating humidity: 5% to 95% relative humidity noncondensing
9 System Voltage Considerations (Application Note)

The Ground (GND) terminal of the IQ Energy Sentinel should
9 be connected to the ground bus or other non-current carrying
ground with 600V rated wire to ensure accuracy.
9 Note
1 40°C (standard) maximum for Series C circuit breakers.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Wiring Diagrams
9
Field Wiring—IQ Universal Energy Sentinel with Internal CTs 9
Single-Phase Three-Wire Two-Phase Three-Wire
N N 9
L2
9
L2
Line Line
L1 L1
9
Fuses Fuses 9
9
Reference
9
Reference
VA VB VC Ground IA IB IC VA VB VC Ground IA IB IC
9
IQ Universal Energy Sentinel IQ Universal Energy Sentinel
with Internal CTs
Load
with Internal CTs
Load
9
Three-Phase Three-Wire Three-Phase Four-Wire 9
N
Line
L3
Line
L3 9
L2 L2
L1 L1
9
Fuses
9
Fuses
9
Reference Reference 9
VA VB VC Ground IA IB IC VA VB VC Ground IA IB IC
9
IQ Universal Energy Sentinel
with Internal CTs
IQ Universal Energy Sentinel
with Internal CTs
9
Load Load
9
Acceptable System Configurations
9
Phase A
9
Phase A
Neutral
Phase C
9
Phase C
Single-Phase, Three- Two-Phase Star, Three- 9
Three-Phase Star, Four- Three-Phase Star, Four- Wire, Earthed Mid-Point Wire, Earthed Neutral
Wire, Earthed Neutral. Wire, Non-Earthed
Neutral.
(Connect to A and C
Phases).
(Connect to A and C
Phases).
9
9
9
9
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire
Three-Phase Star,
Three-Wire, Earthed
Three-Phase Delta,
Three-Wire
Three-Phase Open
Delta, Four-Wire, 9
Neutral Point. Earthed Junction.
Note: Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only. 9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9 Energy Sentinel
Weight
9 Frame Type D W H CT Window Size 1 Hole Clearance Lbs (kg)
F 3.20 (81.3) 4.12 (104.6) 1.30 (33.0) 0.59 (15.0) — 0.65 (0.3)
9 J 4.04 (102.6) 4.12 (104.6) 1.28 (32.5) 0.77 (19.6) — 0.69 (0.3)
K 4.04 (102.6) 5.31 (134.9) 1.25 (31.8) 0.96 (24.4) — 0.87 (0.4)
9 UI 4.36 (110.7) 5.31 (134.9) 3.00 (76.2) — 1.17 (29.7) 1.10 (0.5)
9
UE 4.36 (110.7) 5.31 (134.9) 3.00 (76.2) — — 1.10 (0.5)
Note
9 1 Acceptable for Universal IQ Energy Sentinels only.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
IQ Sentinel
9
F-Frame Energy Sentinels J-Frame Energy Sentinels K-Frame Energy Sentinels
0.25
Typical
0.25
Typical
0.25
Typical
9
(6.4) (6.4) (6.4)
0.75 1.25 1.10

9
(19.1) (31.8) (27.9)
9
1.30 1.28
9
1.25
(33.0) (32.5) (31.8)
9
9
1.17
4.04
(102.6) 0.90
Typical 4.04
(29.7)
Typical
9
1.17 (22.9)
9
Typical (102.6)
3.20 (29.7) 0.96
(81.3) 0.77 (24.4)
0.59
9
(19.6)
(15.0)
1.38
(34.9)
9
1.38 1.38 1.38 1.38 1.72 1.72
(34.9) (34.9) (34.9) (34.9) (43.7) (43.7) 9
2.06 2.06 2.66
4.12
(52.3)
4.12
(52.3)
5.31
(67.5)
9
(104.6) (104.6) (134.9)
Universal with Internal CTs Universal with External CTs

9
9
Energy Sentinels Energy Sentinels
1.80 1.71 1.80 1.80 1.71 1.80
9
(45.7) (43.4) (45.7) (45.7) (43.4) (45.7)
0.14 0.14
(3.6) (3.6)
Radius
3.00
Radius
3.00
9
(76.2) (76.2)
2.50
(63.5)
2.50
(63.5)
9
9
9
1.36 2.60 1.36 1.36 2.60 1.36
(34.5) (66.0) (34.5) (34.5) (66.0) (34.5)
5.31
(134.9)
5.31
(134.9) 9
9
1.17
(29.7) 9
Diameter 4.36 4.36
(110.7) (110.7) 9
9
9
1.72 1.72
(43.7) (43.7) 9
2.66
(67.5)
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 PM3 Modules
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
V3-T9-97

V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Power Monitoring and Metering with Modbus RTU Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9
9 PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module
For information on our PM3
9 product, please refer to
Volume 4, Tab 2.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
Current Transformers (CTs)
Description Page
9
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9
Dimensions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-111
Clamp-On Current Transformers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9
9
9
Current Transformers (CTs) 9
Product Description
Eaton’s low voltage current Split core CTs are specifically
For new construction and
9
transformers are available in
both solid core and split core
designed to be installed
around primary conductors
retrofit applications where
no current transformer exists, 9
designs. Engineered for without disconnecting wires Eaton offers a complete
electronic metering or breaking the circuit to be selection of low voltage 9
applications, all solid core monitored. These current (up to 600V) current
designs and selected split transformers are perfect transformers. These current 9
core designs offer ANSI solutions for energy transformers can be used
metering quality accuracy.
The solid core designs also
management applications
and are manufactured for
in commercial-grade
applications, such as control
9
meet ANSI C57.13 relay installation ease. panels and panelboards.
accuracy requirements Additionally, they can be used 9
including over-ranging for most industrial metering
capabilities. The current and relaying applications in 9
transformer offering has a switchboards, switchgear and
5 ampere secondary at the
rated primary current.
motor control centers. These
CTs are intended for use with
9
the Power Xpert Meter 2000/
4000/6000/8000, IQ 250/260, 9
IQ 130/140/150, IQ Analyzer
6400/6600, IQ DP-4000 and 9
IQ 230 series.
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Product Selection
9
9
Solid Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
Primary ANSI B0.1 Window Size Mounting Bracket
9
Current Metering Class at 60 Hz in Inches (mm) Catalog Catalog
Rating (Accuracy in %) Diameter Number Number
S060 1.25 (31.8) Window
9 50 1.2 1.25 (31.8) S060-500 1
X1
100 0.6 1.25 (31.8) S060-101 1
9 150 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-151 1
9
200 0.3 1.25 (31.8) S060-201 1
H1
9
S050 1.56 (39.6) Window
9 300 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-301 S050BRAC
400 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-401 S050BRAC
9 BE
L
X1
500 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-501 S050BRAC
LA
600 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-601 S050BRAC
9 750 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-751 S050BRAC
H1
800 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-801 S050BRAC
9 1000 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-102 S050BRAC
1200 0.3 1.56 (39.6) S050-122 S050BRAC
9 S080 3.25 (82.6) Window
400 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-401 S080BRAC
9 500 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-501 S080BRAC
X1
9 LA
BE
L
600 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-601 S080BRAC
750 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-751 S080BRAC
9
800 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-801 S080BRAC
H1
1000 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-102 S080BRAC
9 1200 0.3 3.25 (82.6) S080-122 S080BRAC
9 S090 4.25 (108.0) Window

500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-501 S090BRAC
9 AB
E L
X1
0
600
750
0.3
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
4.25 (108.0)
S090-601
S090-751
S090BRAC
S090BRAC
L
9 800
1000
0.3
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
4.25 (108.0)
S090-801
S090-102
S090BRAC
S090BRAC
9 H1 1200
1500
0.3
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
4.25 (108.0)
S090-122
S090-152
S090BRAC
S090BRAC
9 1600
2000
0.3
0.3
4.25 (108.0)
4.25 (108.0)
S090-162
S090-202
S090BRAC
S090BRAC
9 2500 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-252 S090BRAC

3000 0.3 4.25 (108.0) S090-302 S090BRAC
9 S025 6.31 (160.3) Window

600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-601 S025BRAC
9 X10
750 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-751 S025BRAC
BE
L 800 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-801 S025BRAC
9
LA
1000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-102 S025BRAC

1200 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-122 S025BRAC
9 H1
1500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-152 S025BRAC
1600 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-162 S025BRAC
9 2000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-202 S025BRAC
2500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-252 S025BRAC
9 3000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-302 S025BRAC
3500 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-352 S025BRAC
9 4000 0.3 6.31 (160.3) S025-402 S025BRAC
9 Note
1 Contact Eaton for further information.
Metering Devices
9.2
Split Core ANSI Metering Accuracy
ANSI B0.1
9
Primary Metering Class at 60 Hz Window Size Catalog
Current Rating (Accuracy in %) in Inches (mm) Number 9
W190 Wound and Primary CTs
25 0.3 Wound W190-025 9
50 0.3 Primary W190-050
9
X1
X2
H1
B EL
LA
9
9
9
M000 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)
X1
400 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-401 9
X2
500 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-501
H1
600 2.4 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-601 9
800
1000
1.2
1.2
2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)
2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7)
M000-801
M000-102
9
1200 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-122
9
1500 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-152
1600 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-162 9
2000 0.6 2.00 x 5.50 (50.8 x 139.7) M000-202
Re
m
En
d
is ble
Th ova 9
9
M050 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)
600 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-601 9
750 4.8 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-751
9
H1
LA
BE
L
800 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-801

1000 2.4 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-102
9
1200 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-122
1500 1.2 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-152 9
2000 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-202
2500 0.6 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-252 9
Th
is
En
3000
3500
0.6
0.6
4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)
4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3)
M050-302
M050-352
9
dR
em
9
ov
ab
le
4000 0.3 4.10 x 7.10 (104.1 x 180.3) M050-402
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Split Core Current Transformers

9 Primary Accuracy Window Size Catalog
Current Rating at 60 Hz (in %) in Inches (mm) Number
9 M030 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5)
9 100 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-101

150 5.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-151
9 200 4.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-201
300 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-301
9 400 2.0 0.80 x 1.95 (20.3 x 49.5) M030-401
9
9 M040 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)
9 100
150
5.0
4.0
1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)
1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9)
M040-101
M040-151
9 X2
H1
200 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-201
300 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-301
9
LABEL
400 1.5 1.42 x 1.53 (36.1 x 38.9) M040-401
9
M060 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9)
9 200 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-201
9
L
LA
BE 300 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-301
H1
400 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-401
9 500 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-501

600 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-601
9 H1
750 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-751
800 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-801
9 1000 1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-102
9 M080
1200
2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8)
1.0 2.60 x 2.75 (66.0 x 69.9) M060-122
9 500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-501

600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-601
9 800 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-801
1000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-102
9 1200 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-122
9 1500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-152

1600 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-162
9 2000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-202

2500 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-252
9 3000 1.0 2.60 x 6.25 (66.0 x 158.8) M080-302
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Dimensions
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm) 9
S050 9
(4) Open Slots 0.22 x 0.34
(5.6 x 8.6)
2.75
(69.9) 9
9
S050BRAC
2.23
(56.6) 1.10
9
(27.9)
9
1.67
(42.4)
X1 9
L
LA
BE
0.44 3.53 9
(90.0)
9
(11.2)
3.00
(76.2)
H1 9
X1
9
3.70
(94.0) 9
H1
1.56 Dia.
(39.6) 9
1.88
0.31
(7.9)
9
(47.8)
9
2.25 9
(2) Holes 0.20 (5.1) Diameter (57.2)
9
S060
5.25
9
9
(133.4)
4.00
(101.6)
3.10
9
(78.7)
2.88
(73.2)
9
X1
(2) Slots
0.28 x 0.50 9
(7.1 x 12.7) (2) 0.28 x 0.50 Slots
(7.1 x 12.7)
9
3.62
(91.9)
0.88
9
H1 (22.4)
0.44 (11.2)
9
X1
H1
4.00
(101.6) 9
See Tables
1.95 9
(49.5)
9
9
Metering Devices
Approximate dimensions in inches (mm)

9
S080
9 (8) Open Slots
0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
9 5.73 (145.5)
4.85 (123.2)
9 3.81 (96.8) S080BRAC
9 2.19 1.15 2.91
9 X1
(55.6) (29.2) (73.9)
9
EL
LAB
0.44
1.09
9 (4) Holes (11.2)
0.42 (10.7) Dia. 0.55 (27.7)
(14.0)
9 H1 X1
9 5.73
9
(145.5)
H1 3.25 (82.6) Dia.
9 2.84
(72.1)
9
9 0.51 4.70
(13.0) (119.4)
9
S090
9
5.92 (150.4)
9 4.85 (123.2)
3.81 (96.8)
S090BRAC
9 2.91
0 1.15 2.19 (73.9)
X1
9 BE
L
(29.2) (55.6)
LA
9 (8) Open Slots 0.47 x 0.22 (11.9 x 5.6)
9 3.50
(88.9)
9 X1
H1
9 6.17
(156.7)
9 H1 4.25 (108.0) Dia.
9 0.42 2.97
(10.7) (75.4)
9
9 4.86 (123.4)
9 (4) 0.28 x 0.63 (7.1 x 16.0) Slots
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
S025
S025BRAC 9
9
4.10
9
2.98 1.28
(75.7) (32.5) (104.1)
X1
0 9
6.37
LA
BE
L 0.56
(14.2)
(161.8) (4) Slots 0.44 x 1.00
(11.2 x 25.4) 9
8.50
(215.9)
9
0.75
(19.1)
9
0.44
H1
(11.2) 9
8.50 9
(215.9)
6.75
(171.5)
H1
6.31
(160.3) 9
4.25 9
(108.0)
9
6.75 (171.5) (4) 0.56 (14.2)
9
0.88 (22.4) Diameter Holes
9
W190
9
(4) Closed Slots
2.75 (69.9) 0.21 x 0.50 (5.3 x 12.7)
9
9
4.69
4.12
2.19
(55.6)
(119.1) 9
X1 (104.6)
X2
H2 H1 X2 X1 3.25
(82.6) 9
H2
H1
BE
L 9
LA
3.50
(88.9)
(4) Open Slots
0.44 x 0.50 (11.2 x 12.7)
9
9
4.50
(114.3) 0.38
(9.7)
0.75
(19.1) 9
LABEL 0.44 9
(11.2)
4.88
9
9
(124.0)
0.50
(12.7) 9
9
3.48 (88.4)
9
(2) Mounting Holes
0.38 (9.7) Diameter
Metering Devices

9
M000 M050
9
H1
X1
is ble
9
d
X2
En
Th ova
X1
ble
va
m
mo
Re
9
L
BE
Re
LA
End
is
9
Th
H1
9 4.25 (108.0)
2.00
0.44
(11.2)
0.75
(50.8)
9 This End
Removable
(19.1)
X1
9
LABEL
H1
7.75
(196.9)
9 7.10
LABEL
5.50 (180.3)
(139.7) 4.10 10.90
9
10.00
(104.1) (276.9)
(254.0)
9 H1
9 X1 X2 This End Removable
0.38
9
6.40 1.63
3.50 (88.9) (9.7) (162.6) (41.4)
(2) 0.19 (4.8) Diameter Holes 1.13 7.30 (4) 0.31 (7.9) Dia. Holes
9
(28.7) (185.4)
9 M030
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
M040
9
9
2.50
(63.5) 9
9
Terminal Arrangement for
9
H1 3.38 (85.9)
Ratios 250:5 through 400:5
1.20
(30.5)
X2 9
4.78
X2
9
LABEL
(121.4)
9
LABEL
3.52 1.53 4.12
(89.4) H1 (104.6)
(38.9)
X1
9
X1
9
9
Terminal Arrangement for 1.42
Ratios 100:5 through 200:5 (36.1) 9
M060 M080 9
9
LA
B EL
9
H1
9
9
9
9
H1
9
9
9
H1 H1
9
9
2.70 (68.6) 6.25 (158.8)
9
5.80 (147.3)
X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK
9.25 (235.0) X1 - WHITE
X2 - BLACK 9
H1 H1
9
2.75 (69.9)
1.75
2.60 (66.0)
1.75 9
6.05 (153.7) (44.5) 6.05 (153.7) (44.5)
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 IQ Accessories—Clamp-On CTs
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9 Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp-On Current Transformers
V3-T9-107

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-118
9 IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Enclosed Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
9
9
9 Clamp-On Current Transformers
Eaton’s optional Clamp-on
● There are two models that
Features, Benefits
and Functions
● Meets IEC 1010-1
Category III
9 Current Transformers (CTs) cover current ranges from Each clamp-on CT comes
●
are designed to be used in 150 to 1500 amperes with a 12-foot (3.7m) cable ● CE mark for applications
cases where there are no and twist lock connector
9
● These clamp-on CTs are where European
existing CTs or the existing designed to fit around ● All models have a compliance is required
CTs cannot be accessed, 600 volt insulated cable 5 ampere output at
9 these clamp-on CTs can and bus bar three different primary
be used. current ratings
9 These clamp-on CTs are
packaged individually. Most
9 applications will require at
least three clamp-on CTs,
9 one for each phase.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Product Selection Technical Data and Specifications
● Operating temperature: 14ºF to 122ºF (–10ºC to 50ºC)
9
Operating humidity: 5 to 90% maximum noncondensing
9
●
Ordering Information ● Altitude: 10,000 ft (3048m)

Current
Ranges
Catalog
Number
● Environment: indoor use only 9
● Operating voltage: 600 Vac maximum
150–300–600A 150–300–600A IQAPORT0600CT ● Isolation test: 5.55 kV for 1 minute 9
● Current over range: 200% for 3 minutes
● Connector: twist-lock 9
Current Ranges
Each of the two models of clamp-on CTs has three primary
9
500–1000–1500A 500–1000–1500A IQAPORT1500CT

current ranges. The primary current range is selected at the
clamp-on by connecting to the indicated terminals.
9
150A/300A/600A Clamp-On CT Specifications 9
● Current ratings:
● 150 to 5 amperes 9
300 to 5 amperes
9
●
● 600 to 5 amperes
500A/1000A/1500A Clamp-On CT Specifications 9

● Current ratings:
● 500 to 5 amperes 9
1000 to 5 amperes
9
●
● 1500 to 5 amperes
Electrical Characteristics 9
Current
Ranges
Load
(Ohms)
Phase Shift
(Degree)
Frequency
Range (3%)
Frequency
Range (–3 db) 9
150–600A
500–1500A
0.10–1.0
0.01–4.0
0.5–1.0
0.5–1.0
40–5000
40–2000
30–10,000
30–5000
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9 150A/300A/600A Clamp-On CT
150A/300A/600A Clamp-On CT
9 1.58
(40.1)
● Maximum cable size:
● 2.00 inches (50.8 mm)
9
4.01 0.79
(101.9) (20.1) ● Maximum bus bar size:
● 2.00 x 0.47 inches (50.8 x 12.0 mm)
9 ● 1.60 x 1.40 inches (40.6 x 35.6 mm)
● Dimensions (without cable):
9 ● 4.00 x 8.50 x 1.60 inches (101.6 x 215.9 x 40.6 mm)
● Weight (with cable):
9 ● 2.0 lbs (0.9 kg)
9 8.50
(215.9)
9
9
9
9
9 1.26
(32.0)
9 500A/1000A/1500A Clamp-On CT
500A/1000A/1500A Clamp-On CT
9 2.04 ● Maximum cable size:
(51.8) ● 2.68 inches (68.1 mm)
9 5.24
(133.1)
1.40
(35.6)
● Maximum bus bar size:
● 4.84 x 1.40 (122.9 x 35.6 mm)
9 ● 4.00 x 1.70 inches (101.6 x 43.2 mm)
1.10
9 Dimensions (without cable):
●
(27.9) ● 5.20 x 13.20 x 2.00 inches (132.1 x 335.3 x 50.8 mm)

9 Weight (with cable):
●
● 6.0 lbs (2.7 kg)

9
9 8.50
(215.9)
9
9
9
9
9 1.30
(33.0)
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
IQ Accessories—IQ Flange
Description Page
9
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9
Current Transformers (CTs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange
9
IQ Flange 9
Product Description Application Description Product Selection 9
Eaton’s IQ Flange is intended
for use with the IQ Data, Retrofit Applications
IQ Flange IQ Flange 9
IQ Generator, IQ Data Plus II, For applications where extra Description Catalog Number
IQ Analyzer and any other
such device sharing the same
door mounting space is
required, a flange-mounting IQ Flange IQFLANGE 9
unit is available. The IQ
mounting dimensions.
Flange provides an extra 9
The door mounting flange 2.5 inches (63.5 mm) of
provides extra depth behind a
panel if there is not enough
clearance for the device. 9
The IQ Flange can be used
clearance to accommodate
the device.
with any IQ device with
a 5.38-inch (136.7 mm) x
9
9.38-inch (238.0 mm) cutout.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Contents
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and PXM 2000 Meters
Description Page
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
9 IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module. . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
9
9
9
9
9 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series
and PXM 2000 Meters
9
Product Description Product Selection
9 The flange adapter plate can 3. Drill six holes in the panel
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit
be installed as follows: or the door to mount the Panel Mounting
9 flange adapter plate. Adapter Kit Description Catalog Number

1. Remove the old meter Follow the typical IQ
from the panel or door. Panel mounting adapter kit IQ250-PMAK
9
drilling pattern. You need IQ 100/200 and PXM 2000 Series
Many IQ metering only the top, center and adapter kit to IQ Analyzer/
products use the typical bottom sets of holes IQ DP-4000/IQ Data
9 IQ drilling pattern shown
at right for mounting 4. Install the new IQ 100/
9 2. Install the flange adapter
200 Series or PXM 2000
meter in the flange
plate. Mount it from the adapter plate. Secure it
9 rear using the six screws
provided in the kit. The
from behind with four flat Dimensions
washers, lock washers
9 flange adapter plate
screw hole pattern
and nuts provided with Flange Adapter Plate Screw Hole Pattern
the meter
shown at right should 6.72
9 match the typical IQ (170.7)
5.38
drilling pattern. If not,
9
(136.7)
perform the next step
9
4.45
9 (113.0)
9 10.25
(260.4)
9 4.45
(113.0)
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Contents
NEMA 12 Single- and Multi-Unit Enclosed Meters
Description Page
9
Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Series. . . . . . .
V3-T9-6
V3-T9-15
9
V3-T9-34
9
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61
IQ DP-4000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72
IQ 230 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 9
V3-T9-97
V3-T9-106
9
Current Transformers (CTs). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clamp-On Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-107
V3-T9-116 9
IQ Flange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119
Enclosed Meters
Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-122 9
Wiring Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-126
V3-T9-136
9
9
Enclosed Meters 9
The Eaton enclosed meter The enclosed meter line has Factory designed and wired The multi-unit offering
9
9
line provides a complete two standard offerings: to fit various Eaton power and consolidates energy-related
energy metering and data single-, prewired unit (specific energy meters at varying data available from the
acquisition solution in a single IQ 150, IQ 250/260, PXM price points, Eaton’s meters in the enclosure, but
enclosure. Designed for 2000, PXM 4000/6000/8000 enclosed meter line offers also allows for external 9
Eaton’s IQ 35M, IQ 150, IQ or PXMP) and a multi-unit savings in labor and meters to be added to the
250/260, and Power Xpert® (specific IQ 150, IQ 250/260 installation costs because
input current and voltage
embedded Power Xpert
Gateway 200E. Through the
9
2000/4000/6000/8000 and or IQ 35M models). Because
Multi-Point Meters, Eaton’s
enclosed meter line offers
the multi-unit automatically
includes Eaton’s Power Xpert
wiring, as well as I/O wiring,
is prewired to terminal blocks
Power Xpert Gateway 200E’s
embedded Web server,
9
mounting and installation Gateway 200E, it facilitates inside the enclosure. information can be presented
flexibility, especially in retrofit measurement and verification Standalone, enclosed meters in a variety of ways; a 9
applications where no of the energy usage on are ideal for new metering standard Web browser being
metering compartment or processes and in buildings. applications where no the most widely used 9
mounting space is available in This provides a convenient metering existed previously, method.
the existing electrical
distribution equipment or
way to monitor energy usage
from multiple points, collect
for retrofit installations where
energy monitoring is a must The enclosed product is a 9
standalone solution that is
where installation time is a
premium. Factory designed
and log specific energy use
parameters, and display and
or where ease of installation
is required. ideal for many infrastructure 9
and wired, Eaton’s enclosed generate logs for historical designs. Further, as needs
meter line offers savings in energy usage reports. Simply
● Health care facilities change and grow, the
enclosed product can be
9
labor and installation costs put, Eaton’s multi-unit ● Educational facilities and
because input current and enclosed meter solution campuses integrated through Power
Xpert Insight into a broader 9
voltage wiring as well as I/O helps meet any ● Industrial facilities
solution that encompasses
wiring is prewired to terminal
blocks inside the enclosure.
measurement and verification
requirement to show energy
● Commercial facilities other intelligent hardware and 9
● Government facilities can integrate with third-party
efficiency improvements and
results. In addition to the network management 9
standard offering, Eaton can systems (NMS) or building
also provide an enclosed management systems (BMS)
for system-wide monitoring
9
metering solution tailored
around your project needs. and reporting of energy
and power. 9
9
Metering Devices

9 ● Saves installation time Factory-wired products also NEMA 12 Front View, Door Open, Prewired and Tested
and cost save on installation time and
9 ● One part number to order; costs. The meters are flush
no need to worry that any mounted on the enclosure
9 part has been left out door with all inputs/outputs
Fused
● Pick the meter or meters factory wired to the terminal Disconnect
9 you need as it is designed blocks.
Neutral, Ground
to fit various Eaton power A meter subpanel assembly and Input/Output
9 and energy meters, at is also available, which Control
(not shown)
Terminal Blocks
varying price points includes all the internal Power,
9 Factory Wired
components of the single-unit Voltage
and CT
CT Shorting
Terminal
enclosed meter for the IQ
Inputs
9 Most electrical contractors 150/250/260 and PXM 2000 Block
are very familiar with wiring Meters wired and mounted
Prewired Control
meters. However, it does on a subpanel to be installed
9 take time to place the into an existing electrical
Power Transformer
disconnect, the CT shorting structure. It comes with a 48-

9 blocks, the terminal blocks, inch lead for flexibility in
Meter Fusing
the control power mounting the meters at
9 transformer and so on, and
the associated wiring. It is not
various distances.
NEMA 12 Multi-Unit View, Door Open, Prewired and Tested
9 uncommon for errors to be
introduced during the
NEMA Rated
NEMA 12 enclosure prevents
installation of multiple
9 meters; it’s just inherent in
dust and other materials from
entering the equipment.
Gateway Power
Supply
wiring. With Eaton’s enclosed Internal gaskets also prevent
9 meter line, everything is air irritants from harming the
Fused Disconnect
wired at the factory—the vital equipment inside. This Meter Fusing
9 shorting block, the terminal
blocks and so on—assuring
quality enclosure meets most
indoor application needs. Control power, PX Gateway
that it’s done right. Further, to voltage, CT and
9 ensure safety, Eaton’s NEMA 3R enclosure is Communications
Inputs
Fused Control
Power Transformer
enclosed meter line includes constructed for either indoor
9 a primary fusible disconnect or outdoor use. It helps to
for line voltage, which can be protect personnel from Ground
9 turned off during meter
maintenance.
access to hazardous parts
and provides a degree of CT Shorting Blocks
9 For applications with line

protection for equipment
inside the enclosure against
voltages above the rated ingress of solid foreign
9 power supply of the meter, objects (falling dirt), harmful
an optional control power effects of water (rain, sleet,
9 transformer is supplied in the
enclosure. Control voltage
snow) and external formation
of ice on the enclosure.
NEMA 12 Single-Unit Enclosed Meter Inside View,
PXM 4000/6000/8000 Series
can also be supplied via a
9 separate source that is wired NEMA 4X enclosure provides Fused Meter
to the field installation the same degree of Disconnect Fusing
9 terminal block. CT inputs for protection as the NEMA 3R
the meter are wired directly with the additional protection
9 to the shorting terminal
blocks for easy field
against windblown dust,
splashing and hose-directed Prewired
Control
9 installation. water, and corrosion. Power
Transformer
9
Display
Meter
9 Control
Power,
9 Voltage
and CT
Inputs
9
9 CT Shorting Terminal Blocks
9
Metering Devices
9.2
NEMA 3R Single-Unit Closed and Open, IQ 150/250/260 Multi-Unit Enclosed Meter, Inside View of IQ 35M
and PXM 2000 Series 9
Meter
Fusing 9
Fused
Disconnect 9
Gateway
9
Power
Supply 9
9
PX Gateway
9
9
9
Control Power, 9
Voltage Current
NEMA 4X Single-Unit Closed and Open, IQ 150/250/260

Sensor and
Communications
9
Inputs
9
and PXM 2000 Series
9
9
Current Sensor
Terminal Strip
9
9
Prewired Meter Backpan, Single Unit
9
48-Inch Meter
Harness
9
9
Meter
Fusing
9
Enclosed Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter Fused
Disconnect 9
9
Fused Fuses PXMP
Disconnect Power
Supply
PXMP
9
Meter
6-Inch Base
Connections
9
Color Optional CT Shorting
Touchscreen CPT Block 9
● Prewired panel to save installation time and cost for retrofits
into existing equipment 9
● Designed for Eaton’s:
● IQ 100 Meter Series 9
PXMP Meter Base ● IQ 250/260
PXMP Meter Modules ● Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series 9
(not shown—sold separately)
9
● With or without CPT, depending on voltage
NEMA 12
● Order meters separately
Enclosure
(30H x 24W x 12D Inches) 9
Metering Devices

9
Single Unit Enclosed Meter Enclosed PXMP Meter
9 PXM2250MA65105 - 2 B PXMP - 2 B D
9
Meter Type
9 Meter Type NEMA Rating CPT Option PXMP-MB
Display
PXM4051A1BA 2 = NEMA 12 A = 120/240 Vac (no CPT) PXMP-MB-AB CPT Option A = None
9 PXM4051A1BB
PXM6051A1BA
3 = NEMA 3R
4 = NEMA 4X
B = 480 Vac (CPT) A
B
= None
= 120/240 Vac
D = 6-inch color
touchscreen
PXM6051A1BB
9
C = 480 Vac
PXM8051A1BA D = 600 Vac
PXM8051A1BB NEMA Rating
9
PXM2250MA65105 2 = NEMA 12
PXM2250MA65115 3 = NEMA 3R
PXM2250MA65145 4 = NEMA 4X
9 PXM2260MA65105
PXM2260MA65115
PXM2260MA65145 Multi Unit Enclosed Meter
9 PXM2270MA65105
PXM2270MA65115
PXM2270MA65145 IQ150MA6511 - 2 B 4 C
9 PXM2280MA65105
PXM2280MA65115
9 PXM2280MA65145
PXM2290MA65105
Meter Type
IQ35MA12
Communications
PXM2290MA65115 IQ150MA6511 CPT Option C = Includes
9 PXM2290MA65145
IQ250MA65100
IQ250MA65100 A = 120/240 Vac
PXG-200E
IQ260MA65100 No CPT
IQ250MA65110
9 IQ250MA65114
IQ260MA65100
B = 480 Vac
CPT 1
Number of
Meters
NEMA Rating
9 IQ260MA65110 4 = 4 meters
2 = NEMA 12 1
IQ260MA65114 3 = NEMA 3R
IQ150MA6511 4 = NEMA 4X
9 IQ150MA6512
9 Product Selection
9 Meter Subpanel Assembly
9 Description Catalog Number
Meter subpanel assembly for PXM 2000 PXM2K-MSPA-A
9 and IQ 150/250/260 Meters
Meter subpanel assembly with CPT for PXM 2000 PXM2K-MSPA-B
9 and IQ 150/250/260 Meters
Notes
9 1 Not available with IQ 35M.
Other meter models available upon request in single- and multi-unit enclosed versions.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
Enclosed Meters
9
Description Specification 9
Enclosure rating NEMA 12, 3R, 4X
Enclosure operating temperature –20°C to +40°C 9
Note: Temperature range of meter is
–20°C to +70°C. If applied outside, proper
precautions should be taken to avoid exceeding
9
the maximum and minimum temperature ratings
of the meter. 9
Dimensions Single unit (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000):
NEMA 12 (8.00W x 16.30H x 10.40D inches),
NEMA 3R/4X (8.00W x 16.30H x 9.60D inches)
9
9
Single unit (PXMP):
NEMA 12/3R/4X (24.00W x 30.00H x 12.00D inches)
Single unit (PXM 4000/6000/8000):
NEMA 12 (20.00W x 24.00H x 14.10D inches)
NEMA 3R/4X (20.20W x 24.00H x 13.90D inches) 9
Multi unit:
NEMA 12 (13.00W x 30.00H x 15.20D inches)
NEMA 3R (13.20W x 30.10H x 14.60D inches)
9
NEMA 4X (13.00W x 30.00H x 14.00D inches)
Meters Single unit: IQ 150, IQ 250/260, PXM 2000/4000/6000/8000
9
and PXMP models
Multi unit: IQ 35M, IQ 150 and IQ 250/260 9
Communications (multi unit only) Power Xpert Gateway
Control voltage 120V–600V (PXMP)—power supply required 9
Up to 240V (IQ 35M/150/250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/
6000/8000)—no CPT required
Greater than 240V (IQ 150/250/260 and
9
PXM 2000)—CPT required
Separate source control—no CPT required 9
Basic model Fusible disconnect—primary voltage
Shorting block(s)—not required for IQ 35M or PXMP
Ground terminal block
9
Neutral terminal block
Eight-point terminal block(s) for input/output 9
modules for IQ 250/260 and PXM 2000
Wiring Wired for three-phase, four-wire applications. Three-phase,
three-wire applications—
9
9
will need to change the wiring for both the voltage and the
current per the wiring diagram in the meter instruction
manual.
Certifications UL® 508A and cUL® 9
Source control No separate source control voltage required for applications
below 240 Vac (except PXMP) 9
Prewired Prewired current transformer, shorting terminal block(s),
neutral, ground, voltage, control
power, fusible disconnect and input/output
9
9
terminal block(s)
Latch Padlocking latch provision
Optional features Control power transformer—single unit: 50 VA (IQ 150/250/
260) and 150 VA (PXM 4000/6000/8000); multi unit: 250 VA 9
control power supply for meter where monitored voltage is
480 Vac (IQ 150/250/260 and PXM 2000/4000/6000/8000) 9
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice and represent
the maximum capabilities of the product with all options installed. This is 9
not a complete feature list. Features and functionality may vary depending
on selected options, firmware version and product model. Please refer to
the technical data sheet and the user manual for detailed specifications.
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Single Unit Enclosure—200/240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Single Unit Enclosure—480 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with IQ 150/250/260 or PXM 2000 Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Multi Unit Enclosure—200–240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with IQ 35M Meters
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Multi Unit Enclosure—200–240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with IQ 150/250/260 Meters
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Multi Unit Enclosure—480 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with IQ 150/250/260 Meters
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Single Unit Enclosure—120–240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Wire System with PXMP Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Single Unit Enclosure—120–240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with PXMP Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Single Unit Enclosure—480–600 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire Wye System with PXMP Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Single Unit Enclosure—200–240 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
Single Unit Enclosure—480 Vac 50/60 Hz, Three-Phase, Four-Wire System with PXM 4000/6000/8000 Meter
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
Dimensions
9
NEMA 12 Single Unit Enclosure
9
9
9
9 Top
View
9 10.39 8.00
(263.9) (203.2)
9 9.60
5.00
(127.0)
(243.8)
9
9
9 16.30
(414.0)
14.99
(380.7)
9
9
9 Right Side View Front View Left Side View Rear View
9 NEMA 12 Multi Unit Enclosure
9 13.00
(330.2)
9
9
Top 15.19
9 15.19
(385.8)
View
(385.8)
9 14.07
ø0
11.50
(292.1)
(357.4) .4
4
9
6.97
9 (177.0)
Typ.
9
9 30.00
(762.0)
28.50
(723.9)
9
9
9
Right Side View Front View Rear View
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
NEMA 12 PXM 4000/6000/8000 Enclosure
9
20.00
(508.0) 9
12.00
(304.8)
9
9
9
1/4-Turn 4xø0.44 18.50 (469.9)
Top View Padlocking Latch 16.94 (430.3)
Subpanel Width Mounting Width
0.75 9
(19.1)
21.00 22.50 0.75

9
24.00 (533.4) (571.5) (19.1)
(609.6) Subpanel
Height
Mounting
Height
9
9
Left Side View Front View Right Side View Front View (Door Removed) External Rear View 9
9
9
9
Bottom View
9
NEMA 12 PXMP Enclosure
9
24.00
(609.6) 9
12.00
(304.8)
9
9
Top View
9
9
29.50 5.25 HMI
(749.3)
Door
(133.4) Cutout
9
6.79
30.00
(762.0)
(172.4) 9
9
Left Side View Front View Right Side Front View 9
View (Door Removed)
23.63 (600.2)
Door 9
9
9
Bottom View
9
9
Metering Devices

9
9 NEMA 3R/4X Single Unit Enclosure
9
9
Top
9 View
9
9
9 9.58
(243.3)
5.00
(127.0)
This Drip Cap is
9 on NEMA 3R Only
9
16.30 14.99
9 (414.0) (380.7)
9
9
9 Right Side View Front View Front View Rear View
9 NEMA 3R/4X Multi Unit Enclosure

13.20
9 (335.3)
(NEMA 3R)
9 13.00
(330.2)
9 (NEMA 4X)
9 14.64
Top
ø0
ø0 .34 10.50
(371.9) .4 (N (266.7)
9 (NEMA 3R) View 1
(N EM
EM A
(NEMA 3R)
14.03 A 3R 11.50
4X )
9 (356.4)
(NEMA 4X)
) (292.1)
(NEMA 4X)
This Drip Cap is
9 on NEMA 3R Only
9
30.07 27.00
9 (763.8)
(NEMA 3R)
(685.8)
(NEMA 3R)
9 30.00
(762.0)
28.50
(723.9)
9
(NEMA 4X) (NEMA 4X)
9
9 Right Side View Front View Front View Rear View
(no door)
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
NEMA 3R PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
9
20.20 (513.1)
Top Width
20.00 (508.0)
9
9
Enclosure Width
13.70
(348.0)
Top
9
Depth
9
12.00 (304.8)
9
Top View 17.50 (444.5)
Enclosure 4xø0.34 Mounting Width 1.25
Depth
(31.8)
9
21.00 9
24.00 1/4-Turn (533.4) Front View (Door Removed)
(609.6) Padlocking
Latch
Mounting
Height 9
9
Left Side View Front View Right Side View External Rear View
9
1.50
19.63 (498.6)
(38.1)
9
9
Door
Front View (Subpanel Only)

9
9
Bottom View
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9
9 NEMA 4X PXM 4000/6000/8000 Unit Enclosure
20.00
9 (508.0)
9 12.00
(304.8)
9
9 Top View
18.50 (469.9)
Mounting Width
9 0.75
(19.1) 0.75
9 22.50
(19.1) Front View (Door Removed)
24.00 1/4-Turn
9 Padlocking (571.5)
(609.6) Mounting
Latch
Height
9 4xø0.44
9 Left Side View Front View Right Side View External Rear View
9
9 Front View (Subpanel Only)
9
9
Bottom View
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices
9.2
9
NEMA 3R PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure
9
9
24.00 9
(609.6)
9
12.00
(304.8)
9
6.79 9
Top View (172.5)
9
9
30.00 30.80
5.25
(133.4)
HMI
Cutout 9
9
(762.0) (782.3)
Enclosure Overall
9
9
Left Side View Front View
23.63 (600.2)
Right Side View Front View
(Door Removed) 9
Door
9
9
9
Bottom View
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Metering Devices

9
9 NEMA 4X PXMP Multi Unit Enclosure
9 24.00
(609.6)
9 12.00
(304.8)
9
9 Top View
6.79
(172.5)
9
9 5.25 HMI
9 30.00
(762.0)
30.00
(762.0)
(133.4) Cutout
Enclosure Overall
9
9
9 Left Side View Front View Right Side View Front View
9
(Door Removed)
23.63 (600.2)
Door
9
13.07
9 (332.0)
Overall
9 Bottom View
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
Description Page
9
Product Selection Guide 9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
EDR-3000 Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159 9
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay . . . . . . . . V3-T9-168
FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181 9
MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-189
MP-4000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-199 9
9
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-205
EMR-5000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . .
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
ETR-5000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . V3-T9-254 9
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay . . . . . . . . V3-T9-267
Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-280 9
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283
9
9
9
9
Product Selection Guide 9
Protective Relay Selection Chart
9
Protection Functions
Transformer Generator 9
Feeder Protection Motor Protection Protection Protection
IEEE Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000 9
Description Number V3-T9-149 V3-T9-159 V3-T9-168 V3-T9-181 V3-T9-189 V3-T9-199 V3-T9-205 V3-T9-217 V3-T9-230 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-267
Phase inst. OC 50 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Phase TOC 51
Ground inst. OC 50G ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
(measured)
Ground TOC 51G ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
(measured)
Ground inst. OC 50R ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
(calculated)
Ground TOC 51R ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
(calculated)
No. of curves 11 11 11 10 11 11 11 11 11 11 9
(ANSI/IEC/thermal)
Zone selective ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
interlocking
Phase directional
control 1
67 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Ground directional
control 1
67N ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Phase voltage
restrained OC
51VR ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Undervoltage 27 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Current unbalance 46 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Note 9
1 Directional elements are controlled by reverse, forward, or both directions.
9
Protective Relays
Protection Functions, continued

9 Transformer Generator
9 IEEE Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
9 Voltage unbalance 47 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Power factor
Overvoltage
55
59
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■ ■
■
■
9 Frequency (over/under) 81 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Rate of change of 81R ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 frequency
Vector surge 78V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Forward/reverse power 32 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Forward/reverse VARs 32V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Sync check 25 ■ ■ ■
9 Reclosing
Ground overvoltage
79
59N
■
■
■ ■
■
9 Thermal overload 1 49 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Underload 37 ■ ■ ■
9 Locked rotor 49S/51 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Jam/stall 51R ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Incomplete sequence 48 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Number of starts limit ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Starts per hour 66 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Time between starts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Long acceleration time ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Emergency override ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■
9
Broken rotor bar
detection
Loss of potential 60LOP ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Current transformer ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
supervision
9 Cold load pickup ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Switch on to fault
Breaker failure 50BF
■
■
■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
9 2nd harmonic restraint ■ ■

4th harmonic restraint ■ ■
9 5th harmonic restraint ■ ■
Differential 87 ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Ground differential 87GD ■ ■ ■
9 Trip lock out 86 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Negative sequence 51Q ■ ■ ■
9 current
External protection ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Overexcitation (Volts/Hz) 24 ■ ■
Loss of field 40 ■
9 Low voltage ride-through 27T ■ ■ ■
Reactive power and 27Q ■ ■ ■
9 undervoltage
Inadvertent energization 50/27 ■
9 Note
9
1 When communicating to an external URTD device.
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Control Functions
Transformer Generator
9
Remote open/close ■ ■ ■ ■ Open only Open only ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Programmable I/O
Digital inputs
■
1
■
4 or 8
■
8
■
8
■
2
■
2
■
4
■
8
■
8 or 16
■
8
■
8
■
8 or 16
9
Relay outputs 2 3 or 5 10 6 4 4 3 4 8 8 8 8 9
Supervisory/alarm 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
output
9
Programmable logic ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
control
9
Multiple settings 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4
groups
Adaptive parameters ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Reduced voltage
starting
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Analog outputs 1 1 4 Option
for 2
Option
for 2
Option
for 2
9
Analog inputs Option
for 2
Option
for 2
Option
for 2 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Metering Functions
9 IEEE Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
9 Amperes ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Ampere demand
Voltage (L-N and L-L)
■ ■ ■
■
■
■
■
■
■ ■
■
■
■
■ ■
■
■
■
9 Phase angle ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Pos., neg. and zero ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 sequence
Watts ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Watt demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Watthour ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 VARs ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 VAR demand
VAR-hour
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 VA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
VA Demand ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 VA-hour ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Frequency ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Minimum/maximum ■ ■ ■ Max. only Max. only ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
recording
9 Current unbalance ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Voltage unbalance
Power factor
■
■ ■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 Sync values ■ ■
Differential currents ■ ■ ■ ■
9 2nd, 4th, 5th harmonic ■ ■
currents
9 3rd harmonic voltage ■
THD current ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 THD voltage ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Volt/Hertz
Thermal capacity ■
■
■
■
■
■ ■
■
9 Generator hours of
operation
■
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Monitoring Functions
9
Trip circuit monitor 74 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Breaker wear
Fault recorder
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9
Waveform recorder ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Sequence of events ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
recorder
9
Trend recorder (load ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
profile)
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Clock
Time synchronization ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
RTD temperature 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Hottest RTD 1 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Communications 9
Feeder Protection Motor Protection
Transformer
Protection
Generator
Protection 9
IEEE Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
Description Number V3-T9-149 V3-T9-159 V3-T9-168 V3-T9-181 V3-T9-189 V3-T9-199 V3-T9-205 V3-T9-217 V3-T9-230 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-267 9
9
Front access interface
Local human machine ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
interface
RS-232 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
9
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
USB
Rear communication
port interface
RS-485 ■ Option Option ■ Option Option Option Option Option Option
9
Ethernet copper (RJ45) Option
2
Option
2
Option
2
Option
2 2
Option Option
2
Option
2
Option
2
9
Fiber optic ST (note)
Fiber optic LC (note) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9
Protocol
INCOM ■ Option Option Option
9
Modbus-RTU ■ Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option
9
Modbus-TCP Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option
IEC 61850 Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option 9
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
DNP 3.0 (note)
PROFIBUS (note) 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 9
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
IRIG-B Option
SNTP Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option
Notes
1 When communicating to an external URTD device.
9
2 Option available beginning in late 2015.
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Construction
9 IEEE
Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
9 Panel mount ■ Semi-flush or Semi-flush or ■ ■ ■ Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or Semi-flush or
case projected projected projected projected projected projected projected projected
9 Drawout Option Removable Removable Option Option Option Removable Removable Removable Removable Removable Removable
case terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals terminals
9 Self-shorting ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
CT terminals
9 Operating
temperature
–30 to +55 –40 to
°C +60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to +60 –20 to
°C +60 °C
–20 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
–40 to
+60 °C
9
range
Power supply 120–240 40– 40– 48– 90– 90– 40– 40– 40– 40– 40– 40–
range (Vac) Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 125 Vdc 264 Vac 264 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac 250 Vac
9 Power supply 24–250 19– 19– 48– 19– 19– 19– 19– 19– 19–
range (Vdc) Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc 125 Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc 300 Vdc
9 AC current ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
inputs
9 AC voltage ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
inputs
9 Wye VT
configuration
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Open delta VT
configuration
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Sensitive
ground
50/51G Option Option Option Option Option Option Option Option
9 Local display /
HMI
■ Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
■ ■ ■ Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
Backlit LCD
w/8
pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons pushbuttons
9 LEDs (local ■ Programmable Programmable ■ ■ ■ Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable Programmable
targets)
9
9 Standards
9 Feeder Protection Motor Protection Protection Protection
IEEE Device DT-3000 EDR-3000 EDR-5000 FP-5000 MP-3000 MP-4000 EMR-3000 EMR-4000 EMR-5000 ETR-4000 ETR-5000 EGR-5000
9 Description Number V3-T9-149 V3-T9-159 V3-T9-168 V3-T9-181 V3-T9-189 V3-T9-199 V3-T9-205 V3-T9-217 V3-T9-230 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-149 V3-T9-267
ANSI ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 IEC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
UL ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 CE DT-3030 only ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 CSA ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
DT-3000
Description Page
9
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143 9
Digitrip 3000
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
Digitrip 3000 9
Product Description
● Microprocessor-based, any application where The Digitrip 3000 may be Residual Ground
9
three-phase and ground
overcurrent relay
instantaneous and/or time
overcurrent protection
connected to the secondary
side of a delta-wye grounded
Connection
9
a A1 A2
Independent phase and is required. It is most transformer with the ground
9
●
b B1 B2
ground measuring circuits commonly used as primary element connected to a c C1 C2
and operation feeder circuit protection, separate CT in the neutral
● Inverse time (51), short see figure below. connection of the 50N/51N
GND G1 G2 9
delay (50, 2) and Primary Feeder transformer. With this
9
Digitrip
instantaneous (50) Circuit Protection connection, a lower CT ratio CB-52 3000
protection and a pickup setting can
be used to provide more
● Eleven time overcurrent
characters including ANSI, 50 51 sensitive ground fault Separate Zero Sequence 9
protection especially for Ground CT Connection
IEC and thermal protection
curves resistance grounded
a A1 A2
9
50G 51G systems, see figure below.
Phase and ground
9
●
CB
b B1 B2
ampmeter and peak 52 Digitrip Transformer Secondary c C1 C2
3000
demand functions Protection with Neutral
9
50/51
● INCOM communication CT Connection
Load
port
9
CB-52
The Digitrip 3000 may be
● Fixed mount or optional Resistor 50G/51G
applied as the transformer
quick release drawout GND G1 G2
primary protection or as
case design
backup to the differential
50G 51G
Digitrip
9
● Dual-source power supply protection, see figure below. 50 51 3000
option for AC control
power applications Transformer Overcurrent
Digitrip
3000
9
CB
Protection
Application Description 9
Eaton’s Digitrip 3000 The Digitrip 3000 ground
9
50 51
microprocessor-based relay overcurrent element can be
provides reliable three-phase connected in the residual
and ground overcurrent
protection for all voltage CB
50G 51G circuit of the phase CTs as
shown in the top figure or
9
to a separate ground CT as
9
Digitrip
levels. It can be used for 3000
shown in last figure.
Protective Relays
Zone Selective Interlocking (Phase and Ground)

9 Note: For the phase time zone selective interlocking If a fault occurs at a point in As a result, the Digitrip 3000
overcurrent element, the current to initiate an immediate trip Zone 3, the Digitrip 3000 of of Downstream Breaker C
9 sensed by the Digitrip 3000 must
exceed 300% (3 x In) for the zone
signal when the fault is in the Downstream Breaker C does not send a restraining
breaker’s zone of protection. senses the fault and sends signal to the Digitrip 3000 of
9 selective interlocking to initiate an
immediate trip signal. Upstream Digitrip 3000
a restraining signal to the Feeder Breaker B.
upstream Digitrip 3000 of
protected breakers are Because there is no
9 Zone Selective interlocking restrained from tripping
Feeder Breaker B.
restraining signal from the
is a protection function to immediately by an Having received this signal, Digitrip 3000 of Downstream
9 minimize equipment damage
resulting from a phase or a
interlocking signal from the the Digitrip 3000 of Feeder Breaker C, the Digitrip 3000 of
downstream Digitrip 3000 Breaker B begins timing for Feeder Breaker B identifies
9 ground fault in an area where
long-time and/or short-time
relay. This interlocking signal
requires only a pair of wires
normal final delay tripping. As
a result, only Downstream
that the fault is in Zone 2
and immediately trips Feeder
delay is in use.
9 When the “Ground Zone
from the downstream breaker
to the upstream breaker.
Breaker C is tripped. Breaker B, regardless of its
time setting.
The Upstream Digitrip 3000 Fault Location Zone 2
9 Interlocking” feature is
utilized, an immediate trip provides time delayed Note: For the phase time
Fault Location Zone 1
is initiated when the fault standard coordinated overcurrent element, the current Note: For the phase time
9 is in the breaker’s zone of tripping when the fault is sensed by the Digitrip 3000 must
overcurrent element, the current
protection, regardless of its located outside the zone sensed by the Digitrip 3000 must
9 preset time delay. When the of protection. selective interlocking to initiate an
immediate trip signal.
selective interlocking to initiate an
“Phase Zone Interlocking” In the sample zone immediate trip signal.
9 feature is utilized, the time
overcurrent and short delay
interlocking system shown If a fault occurs at a point in
below, circuit breakers A, B Zone 2, the Digitrip 3000 of If a fault occurs in Zone 1, no
9 phase elements work as
follows. The short delay
and C are equipped with
Digitrip 3000 overcurrent
Feeder Breaker B senses the
fault and sends a restraining
restraining signal is received
by the Digitrip of Main
phase element will initiate an
9 immediate trip when the fault
relays. signal to the upstream
Digitrip 3000 of Main
Breaker A. As a result, Main
Breaker A is immediately
is in the breaker’s zone of Fault Location Zone 3 Breaker A. tripped by its Digitrip
9 protection, regardless of its
Note: For the phase time The Digitrip 3000 of the
overcurrent relay, regardless
preset time delay. For the overcurrent element, the current of its time setting.
9 time overcurrent phase
element, the current sensed
sensed by the Digitrip 3000 must
Downstream Breaker C does
not see this fault since it is
by the Digitrip 3000 must situated on the downstream
9 exceed 300% (3 x In) for the
selective interlocking to initiate an
immediate trip signal. side of the fault.
9 Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
9
9
9
Main
Breaker
“A”
9
Zone 1
9
9 Feeder
Breaker Interlocking
Wire
“B”
9
Zone 2
9
9
Downstream
Breaker
“C”
9
Zone 3 LOAD
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
● Complete current ● Integral ampmeter and ● UL recognized
9
protection and metering display replaces separate UL 1053 recognized
9
●
in a single compact case meter and switch, saving ● ANSI C37.90

reduces panel space, wiring panel space, wiring and
and cost money
● ANSI C37.90.1 (1989) 9
● Selectable trip ● Zone selective interlocking
● ANSI C37.90.2 (1995)
characteristics simplify improves coordination and Note: Fixed case versions meet 9
ordering and reduces tripping times and can save 35 V/m. Drawout case versions
inventory money by using in place of
traditional bus differential
meet 28 V/m.
9
● Optional drawout case ● IEC 255
provides easy and quick
removal and replacement
● Integral test function and
microprocessor design can
● CE (DT3030/3031 9
of the relay reduce maintenance time version only)
● Optional dual-source and expense 9
power supply provides
reliable protection when 9
applied with ac control
power, eliminating the 9
need for batteries or UPS
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Product Selection
9
9 DT-3000 DT-3000
Catalog
9 Description Number
DT-3000 protective relay DT3000
9 DT-3000 protective relay Chicago version DT3100
DT-3030 protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version) DT3030
9 DT-3000 drawout case protective relay DT3001
9 DT-3000 Chicago version drawout case protective relay

DT-3030 drawout case protective relay (24–48 Vdc CE Mark version)
DT3101
DT3031
9 DT-3000 protective relay with 120 Vac dual-source power supply DT3010
DT-3000 protective relay with 240 Vac dual-source power supply DT3020
9
9 Options and Accessories
Additional Products by Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Series
9
Dual-Source Power Because this voltage is Burden Data Digitrip 3000 Optional
9 Supply Option
The Digitrip 3000 with Dual-
usually obtained from the
system containing the circuit
In normal operating Drawout Case
The Digitrip 3000 overcurrent
conditions, the burden is
9 Source Power Supply (DSPS)
is available in two versions,
that the relay is protecting, a
fault on the protected line
<0.08 ohms with three-phase
1 A CT current, or 0.2 per
protective relay is available
in a new drawout case for
DT-3010 and DT-3020. They could cause the AC voltage quick release, removal and
9
unit, and drops to less than
include an integral power to drop below an acceptable 0.04 ohms at high current replacement of the unit
supply module that: operating level. Below levels. Present CT burden without disruption of the
9 ● Powers the relay from
approximately 70 volts for data in ohms and volt- wiring. The CT circuits are
DT-3010 or 140 volts for amperes, see Page V3-T9-154. self-shortening to prevent
nominal 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz
9 (DT-3010 model) or 240
DT-3020, the DSPS switches
over to current powering.
In these cases, the burden
shown is the total CT terminal
damaging voltages from
existing across-the-current
Vac, 50/60 Hz (DT-3020
9 model) auxiliary power, All three current transformer value, which is the DSPS plus
the relay measuring circuits,
transformer windings. All
voltage inputs, discrete
which is normally secondaries are connected in
for the indicated operating inputs and contact inputs
9 connected and available. series to supply this power.
The DSPS will supply enough condition. are disconnected while
● Operates solely from the maintaining security against
9 main current transformers
(CTs) during a fault if
power to operate the Digitrip
3000 overcurrent relay in the
The trip curve on Page V3-
T9-154, right, shows burden
false tripping.
tripped state with currents impedance magnitude in The terminal blocks feature
9 the normally connected
auxiliary ac voltage is greater than 1.8 per unit rated ohms. The two lower curves a two-stage disconnect
not available, like an secondary current, or 9 A, in a are the values with AC power operation. Removal of the
9 electromechanical relay single-phase. The DSPS will applied; the upper two are DT-3000 Inner Chassis will
or an electronic “self- operate with three-phase with CT powering only. For disconnect the trip circuits
9 powered” relay currents in a tripped state
with currents greater than
each of these pairs, one
curve shows the burden
and short the CT secondaries
before the unit control power
1.2 per unit or 6 A rated
9 Functional Description
The integral Dual-Source
secondary current.
for a single-phase current
(representing a single-phase-
is disconnected. Upon
insertion of the Inner
to-ground fault) and the other Chassis, the control power
9 Power Supply (DSPS)
contains one AC voltage
Note: There will be no effect
to the DT-3000 relay trip time for three balanced phases connections are made before
transformer and three AC accuracy when the Dual-Source with normally arrayed the trip circuits are activated.
9 current transformers. The AC Power Supply switches from 120-degree phase angle This feature provides
voltage transformer is used to normal ac voltage to fault- increments. There is no added security against
9 supply nominal ac control
current power. phase sequence sensitivity. false tripping.
power to the unit. The current Page V3-T9-154, trip curve,
9 transformers are used to
power the unit from the line
upper left, shows the burden
in volt-amperes for the same
9 current. Normally, the unit
will operate from the AC
four cases.
auxiliary voltage.
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Current Inputs Output Trip Contacts ● IEC (Per IEC 255-3, 1989): Timing Accuracy
● CTs: 5 A secondary (Trip OC/Comm., Trip Inst.
and Comm. Close)
● IEC-A (Moderately ● Inverse Time Overcurrent: 9
● CT Burden: Inverse) ±10% at >1.5 x Pickup
● <0.004 ohm at rated
● Momentary: ● IEC-B (Very Inverse) ● Short Delay Time: ±50 ms 9
current (5 A)
● Make 30 A AC/DC for ● IEC-C (Extremely
● <0.1 VA at rated
0.25 seconds Inverse) Communications 9
current (5 A)
● Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc ● IEC-D (Definite Time) ● Eaton’s PowerNet
● In: 5 A (Secondary) or
● Break 5 A at 120/240 Vac Compatible 9
CT (Primary) ● Continuous: Overcurrent Functions ● Built-in INCOM
● Saturation: 30 x In ● 5 A at 120/240 Vac and Pickup Ranges
Note: Consult factory for
● Data rate is 1200 or 9
● 5 A at 30 Vdc 9600 baud
● CT thermal ratings:
9
sensitive ground fault.
● 10 A continuous ● Meets ANSI C37.90,
Drawout Case
● 500 A for 1 second Paragraph 6.7 ● Long Delay or Inverse
Refer to Page V3-T9-157
9
●
Time Overcurrent:
Environmental Conditions for Drawout Case
CT (Primary) Settings Available ● Phase: (0.2–2.2) x In Dimensions
● Phase and ground:
–22 ºF to +131 ºF
(29 settings) 9
5/10/25/50/75/100/150/200/ ● Ground: (0.1–2.0) x In, Terminal Block
250/300/400/500/600/630/
●
(–30 ºC to +55 °C)
Operating humidity:
None (26 settings) ● Make/Break rating: 9
800/1000/1200/1250/1500/ ● Short Delay: ● 10 A at 240 Vac nominal
1600/2000/2400 2500/
3000/3200/4000/5000
0–95% relative humidity
(noncondensing)
● Phase: (1–11) x In, ● 0.25 A at 280 Vdc 9
None (25 settings) maximum
Storage temperature:
9
●
Input Voltage DT-3000 –40 ºF to +185 ºF

● Ground: (0.1–11) x In, ● Terminal wire gauge:
(–40 °C to +70 °C) None (45 settings) No. 14 to No. 10 AWG
● Nominal:
● 48–250 Vdc
● Instantaneous: ● Screw torque 9
Auxiliary Alarm Contacts ● Phase: (1–25) x In, requirements: 18-inch-
9
● 120–240 Vac 50/60 Hz ● 5 A continuous at None (30 settings) pounds
● Operating range: 120/240 Vac, 30 Vdc ● Ground: (0.5–11) x In,
● 28–280 Vdc ● 5 A break at 120/240 Vac, None (33 settings)
Reference Information 9
● 90–254 Vac 50/60 Hz 30 Vdc
Tests
Time Delay Settings
● Inverse Time Overcurrent Cross-Reference 9
Power Consumption There are several products
Dielectric strength, Time Multiplier:
9
●
24 48 125 250 120 240 current inputs: ● Thermal: 0.2–40 that are equivalent to the
(47 settings) Digitrip 3000. The following
3000 Vac for 1 minute
9
Vdc Vdc Vdc Vdc Vac Vac ●
10 W 10 W 10 W 10 W 10 VA 18 VA lists the competitor’s name and

● Phase-to-phase ● FLAT: 0.2–2 (21 settings) equivalent product to the
ANSI (all): 0.1–5.0
9
●
● Seismic test: Meets Digitrip 3000. In general, the
Input Voltage Digitrip 3030/ requirements for UBC® and (50 settings) Digitrip 3000 can be used in
3031 California Building Code IEC (all): 0.05–1.00 place of the competitive
9
●
Description DT-3010 DT-3020 Zone 4. ZPA = 3.5 (20 settings) product.

Short Delay Time: 0.05–
9
●
Nominal 120 Vac 240 Vac ● ABB® MMCO, 51
Phase and Ground 1.5 seconds (22 settings)
Operating 70–132 Vac 140–264 Vac Time-Current Curves ● Basler Electric® BEI-51
9
Range ● Thermal: Current Monitoring ● GE Multilin MDP, 735, 737
Power 15 VA 15 VA
Consumption
● It (Moderately Inverse) Note: Consult factory for ● Siemens® 7SJ 511, 7SJ 60
● I2t (Very Inverse) sensitive ground fault. 9
● I4t (Extremely lnverse)
True rms sensing: three-
9
●
● FLAT (Definite Time) phase and ground
Display accuracy:
9
●
● ANSI (Per ANSI C37.112,
1996): ● ±1% of Full Scale [ln]
from 0.04 x ln to 1 x In
Moderately Inverse
9
●
● Very Inverse ● ±2% of Full Scale [ln]

from 1 x ln to 2 x In
Extremely Inverse
9
●
● Ampere demand: Average

demand over 5 minute
sampling window 9
● High load (with selectable
output): 85% of Inverse 9
Time Overcurrent setting
9
Protective Relays
Trip Curve Charts

9
Digitrip 3000 With Dual-Source Power Supply Digitrip 3000 With Dual-Source Power Supply CT Power
9 Burden Curves Volt-Ampere Curves
9 80
0.18
9 0.16
70
CT Power in Volt-Amperes
9 0.14
60
CT Burden — Z, Ohms
9
50
0.12
40
9
0.1
0.08 30
9 0.06 20
9 0.04
10
9 0.02
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50
0
9 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 CT Current — Amperes
CT Current — Amperes CT Power in VA, With Vac, 3-Phase I CT Power in VA, With Vac, 1-Phase I
9 Total Burden, With Vac, 3-Phase I Total Burden, With Vac, 1-Phase I CT Power in VA, No Vac, 3-Phase I CT Power in VA, No Vac, 1-Phase I
9 Wiring Diagrams
9 Digitrip 3001
Typical wiring diagram for the fixed mount version.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Digitrip 3000 Typical Wiring System
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Digitrip 3000 Typical Wiring Diagram

9
A H
9
ØA
ØB TB2 TB2
9
14 12
CS Trip OC Trip
ØC TB2 T /Comm. Inst.
4 TB2 TB2
AC/DC
9
CS Comm. 15 13
Supply C Close
C1 B1 A1 TB2 52a
5
9
TC
H Close CKT 52a
C2 B2 A2 G1 G2
9 Digitrip 3000
TB1 TB2
F A = CTs can be located on either
side of the circuit breaker.
3-Phase 3-Wire Residual Ground Connection
9 1 INCOM CT polarities can be toward or
4
View ”A“ A 2 Network away from the circuit breaker.
3 INCOM Shield Tie Point C
B 5 B = The 52b contact is required for
9 C 6 4 Communication proper operation of the Digitrip

B 9 5 Close or High Load Alarm D 3000 Protective Relay.
52 52b 10 C = TB2 terminal 3 is not connected
9 Ground Out 11 to ground or any electrical

6
See View ”A“ E G Zone In 12 7
circuit in the Digitrip 3000.
13
Trip Alarm
For Residual E G Phase
Zone
Out
In 14
8 D = Configurable contact, refer to DIP
9
CT Connection Zone Common 15
switch settings.
9 Protection E = Remove jumpers if Zone Interlocking
10 OFF is required.
A 11 Alarm
9 CT
G1
C1 B1
A1 12 Trip Inst.
F = Use Eaton Cable CAT # IMPCABLE,
Style # 2A95705G01; Belden 9463 cable
family; or equivalent Commscope or
13 or Ground D Quabbin cables.
9
Other
A B C Devices 14 Trip OC or Phase/ G = Wire spec: 600 V 90ºC,
Zero 15 UL 1039 rated wire.
G2 C2 B2 A2 Communications D
9 Sequence H = For the DT3030 to be ”CE Compliant,“

CT the power supply input fuse must be
rated at a maximum of 0.25 amperes.
9
9 Dimensions
9 Drilling Pattern
9 5.38
(136.7)
2.69
9 (68.3)
9 8.90
(226.1)
9 9.38
(238.3)
9 6.68
(169.7)
9 4.69
4.45
9 (113.0)
.06
(119.1)
(1.5) RAD
9 2.23
(56.7)
4 Places
9
2.53
.218
9 (64.3)
5.06 (5.5)
DIA 10 Places
(128.5)
9 Note
Panel cutout dimensions for all versions of the Digitrip 3000 relay.
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Digitrip 3010/3020
6.03
9
(153.2)
6.72 5.45 3.74 9
(170.7) .51 (138.4) (95.0)
(13.0)
9
S/N000217
Digitrip 3000
P971210
4D13125G01
9
Terminal
Block
9
AC Input
100-120 Vac, 50/60Hz
9
10.25 9.31 Digitrip 8010 Protective Relay
9
with Dual-Source Power Supply
260.3) (236.5)
9
9
9
9
.50 9
(12.7)
1.05
.62
(26.7)
5.74
9
(15.7) (145.8)
9
Digitrip 3000
9
6.72 2.67 3.74
3.36
(170.7)
0.39
(67.8)
1.87
(95.0)
9
(85.3) (9.9) (47.5)
9
9
5.12 4.65
9
(130.0) (118.1)
0.37
(9.4) 9
1.48 9
(37.6)
9
10.25 9.31
(260.4) (236.5)
5.25
9
9
(133.4)
9
9
1.05 0.29
9
(26.7) (7.4)
0.50
(12.7)
0.62
9
(15.7)
9
Protective Relays

9
Rear View of Digitrip 3001 Drawout Outer Case Terminal Layout
9 5.23 Hole for Viewing INCOM
(132.8) Communications Activity LED.
9
9 11 12 INCOM 41 42 INCOM
Breaker “b” Input Breaker “b” Input
Network Network
9 Gnd Zone Out
13 14
Gnd Zone In Unused 43 44 Shield Tie Point
9 Ph Zone Out
15 16 Ph Zone In
45 46
Protection
9 ac/dc Input
(+) 17 18 Zone Common Trip
Alarn
47 48 Off
Alarm
19 20 49 50
9
(–) Unused 11 12 41 42
120 – 240 Vac
43 44
50/60 HZ 9.51
9 48 – 250 Vdc
Current Input 17 18
45 46
47 48
(241.6)
9 21 22 19 20 49 50 Communication 51 52 Communication
A2 A1 Close Close
23 24 Trip Inst 53 54 Trip Inst
9 B2 B1
21 22 51 52 or Ground or Ground
25 26 23 24 53 54 Trip OC or 55 56 Trip OC or
C2 C1
9 27 28
25 26 55 56
Phase /Comm
57 58
Phase /Comm
G1 G2 27 28 57 58 Unused Unused
9 Unused
29 30
Unused
29 30
Unused
59 60 Equip Gnd
9
66C2025H01 66C2025H02
9
9 Digitrip 3000 Feeder Protection Relay (Fixed Case)
Shipping Weight
9 Height Width Depth Lbs (kg)
10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 2.96 (75.2) 0.0 (0.0)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
EDR-3000
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
EDR-3000 Feeder Protection 9
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
EDR-3000 Feeder Protection 9
Product Description
The EDR-3000 Protective communicated to a host The EDR-3000 may be Transformer Secondary 9
Relay is a multifunction, computer equipped applied as the transformer Protection with Neutral CT
microprocessor-based with PowerPort-E™. primary protection or as Connection 9
overcurrent relay designed A “Communication Trip” and backup to the differential
for both ANSI and IEC
applications. It is a panel-
“Communication Close”
control command can also be
protection, see below. Resistor 9
mounted, self-contained unit initiated by a host computer Transformer Overcurrent
9
50G 51G
that operates from either AC with an authorized access Protection
or DC control power. The code for remote breaker 50 51
EDR-3000 design provides

true rms and fundamental
operation.
50 51
EDR-3000 9
sensing of each phase and Application Description CB
ground current. Only one unit The EDR-3000

50G 51G The EDR-3000 relay has
9
is required for each three- microprocessor-based relay special provisions for
9
CB
phase circuit. provides reliable three-phase EDR-3000 connection in a Zone
Current monitoring and and ground overcurrent Interlocking scheme that can
operator selectable protective
functions are integral to each
protection for all voltage
levels. It can be used for The EDR-3000 may be
be used for bus protection
or to improve protection
9
any application where
relay. The EDR-3000 relay
operates from the 5 A or 1 A instantaneous and/or time
side of a delta-wye grounded
coordination in a tight or close
system. Zone Interlocking 9
secondary output of standard overcurrent protection is is described in following
transformer with the ground
current transformers. Current
transformer ratio information
required. It is most commonly
used as primary feeder circuit element connected to a sections. In addition the 9
separate CT in the neutral EDR-3000 has multiple
protection, shown below.
is quickly programmed into
the unit via settings. This Primary Feeder Circuit
connection of the setting groups that can be
used to reduce arc flash
9
enables the relay to display transformer. With this
hazard with instantaneous
metered current in primary
amperes, secondary amperes
Protection connection, a lower CT
ratio and a pickup setting
elements. 9
or per unit values. The EDR-
3000 features a user-friendly
50 51 can be used to provide
more sensitive ground fault
Residual Ground Connection
9
operations panel to monitor a 2 3
protection especially for
and program the relay. 50G 51G resistance grounded
b
c
5
6
8
9
9
Operating parameters and CB systems, shown below. 50/51
9
52
troubleshooting information EDR-3000
50N/51N
are displayed in the 128 x 64 GND 12 11
LCD. In addition, all data and
9
Load
EDR-3000
information can be CB-52
Protective Relays
Overcurrent Protection Zone Selective interlocking coordinated tripping when If a fault occurs at a point in
9 The EDR-3000 provides is a protection function to the fault is located outside Zone 2, the EDR-3000 of
complete three-phase and minimize equipment damage the zone of protection. feeder breaker B senses the
9 ground protection with resulting from a phase or a
ground fault in an area where In the sample zone
fault and sends a restraining
signal to the upstream EDR-
separate elements and interlocking system shown
9 settings. The relay can be
long time and/or short time
delay is in use. below, circuit breakers A,
3000 of main breaker A. The
EDR-3000 of the downstream
used with CTs from 1 to B and C are equipped with breaker C does not see this
9 50,000 A of primary current
and 1 or 5 A of secondary
When the “Ground Zone
Interlocking” feature is
EDR-3000 overcurrent relays. fault since it is situated on the
downstream side of the fault.
utilized, an immediate trip is Fault Location Zone 3
9 current. The CT ratio can be
set independently for phase initiated when the fault is in Note: For the time overcurrent
As a result, the EDR-3000 of
downstream breaker C does
and ground, allowing the the breaker’s zone of phase element, the current not send a restraining signal
9 ground element to be protection, regardless of its
preset time delay. When the
sensed by the EDR-3000 must to the EDR-3000 of feeder
connected in either the exceed 1.5 times the pickup breaker B. Since it did not
9 residual or the separate
ground CT configuration,
“Phase Zone Interlocking”
feature is utilized, the time
setting for the zone selective
interlocking to initiate an
receive a restraining signal
from the EDR-3000 of
overcurrent elements work immediate trip signal when
9 shown on below.
as follows. The instantaneous the fault is in the breaker's zone
of protection.
downstream breaker C, the
EDR-3000 of feeder breaker
Separate Zero Sequence phase element will initiate an B identifies that the fault is in
9 Ground CT Connection immediate trip when the fault
is in the breaker's zone of If a fault occurs at a point Zone 2 and immediately trips
in Zone 3, the EDR-3000 feeder breaker B, regardless
protection, regardless of its
9
a 2 3 of its time setting.
b 5 6 preset time delay. For the of downstream breaker C
c 8 9 time overcurrent phase senses the fault and sends
Fault Location Zone 1
9 50/51 element, the current sensed a restraining signal to the
upstream EDR-3000 of Note: For the time overcurrent
by the EDR-3000 must
feeder breaker B. Having phase element, the current
9 CB-52
exceed 1.5 times the pickup
setting for the zone selective received this signal, the sensed by the EDR-3000 must
50G/51G
interlocking to initiate an EDR-3000 of feeder breaker
9 GND 11 12
immediate trip signal when B withholds its trip command.
As a result, only downstream
setting for the zone selective
interlocking to initiate an
the fault is in the breaker’s immediate trip signal when the
9 EDR-3000
zone of protection. breaker C is tripped. fault is in the breaker's zone of
protection.
Upstream EDR-3000 Fault Location Zone 2
9 Zone Selective Interlocking protected breakers are Note: For the time overcurrent If a fault occurs in Zone 1,
restrained from tripping phase element, the current
(Phase and Ground) no restraining signal is
9 Note: Refer to the Ordering
immediately by an
interlocking signal from the
sensed by the EDR-3000 must
received by the Digitrip
downstream EDR-3000 relay. of main breaker A. As a
9
Information and (Catalog Ordering setting for the zone selective
Information) for optional features, This interlocking signal interlocking to initiate an result, main breaker A is
see Page V3-T9-162. requires only a pair of immediate trip signal when the immediately tripped by its
9 wires from the downstream
breaker to the upstream
fault is in the breaker’s zone
of protection.
EDR-3000 overcurrent relay,
regardless of its time setting.
9 breaker. It provides standard
9 Sample Zone Selective Interlocking System
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Applications Metered Values PowerPort-E
● Provides reliable three- ● rms and fundamental PowerPort-E is the software 9
phase and ground phase currents program used to configure
overcurrent protection ● rms and fundamental off-line protection setting files 9
for all voltage levels ground currents for all E-Series relay models.
● Primary feeder circuit ● Maximum, minimum PowerPort-E is also used for
viewing measured values of
9
protection and average rms and
● Primary transformer
protection
fundamental phase
currents
the relays in real-time,
uploading/downloading 9
setting files, and retrieving
● Backup to differential
protection
● Maximum, minimum
and average rms and
event log and waveform 9
records.
● May be used where
instantaneous and/or time
fundamental ground
currents 9
overcurrent protection is
required Monitored and Data 9
Recording Values
9
● Ground element capable
of residual, zero sequence
● Trip circuit monitoring
or external source Note: Refer to the Ordering
connections Information and Page V3-T9-162 9
(Catalog Ordering Information)
Protection Functions for optional features.
9
● Breaker failure (50BF) ● Breaker wear (accumulated
● Phase overcurrent
●
interrupted current)
Fault data logs (up to
9
protection per time-current
●
curve (51-1, 51-2, 51-3)
Calculated ground fault ●
20 events)
Sequence of event
9
protection per time-current
curve (51R-1, 51R-2)
recorder (1 ms time
stamp, last 300 events) 9
Waveform capture
9
●
● Independent measured
ground or neutral fault (7200 cycles total) Waveform Capture record is 600 cycles. The
protection per time-current Trip Cause displays fault (Quality Manager) waveform capture is initiated
9
●
curve (51X-1, 51X-2) recorder data on HMI The EDR-3000 relay provides by up to 8 different triggers
● Phase instantaneous after fault event oscillographic recording (i.e., trip/alarm events) or
overcurrent (50-1, 50-2, ● CT supervision capabilities. The relay will manually via communications 9
50-3) record all measured signals or the HMI. PowerPort-E
● Calculated ground or Control Functions along with the binary signals
of pickup, trip, internal logic,
setting software is used to
retrieve the records. Quality
9
neutral instantaneous ● Remote open/close
Manager is a separate
overcurrent (50R-1, 50R-2) ● Programmable I/O
and contact inputs. The EDR-
3000 can record up to 7200 software program downloaded 9
● Independent measured ● Programmable LEDs cycles of data. The number of with PowerPort-E used for
ground or neutral
instantaneous overcurrent
● Multiple setting groups records is proportional to the analyzing the waveform and 9
(up to four) programmed size of each trending files retrieved from
●
(50X-1, 50X-2)
Curve shapes: ANSI,
record; the maximum size per the relay. 9
Communication Software
IEC, or thermal curves
(11 thermal curves)
● Local HMI 9
● Front RS-232 port
9
● Instantaneous or time
delay reset
● Rear RS-485 port
True rms or fundamental
● Protocols
9
●
sensing of each phase ● Modbus RTU

and ground current ● Modbus TCP (option)
● Zone selective interlocking ● IEC 61850 (option) 9
(phase and ground) or ● IRIG-B (option)
reverse blocking for ● SNTP (option) 9
bus protection
Note: Refer to the Ordering 9
Information and Page V3-T9-162
(Catalog Ordering Information)
for optional features.
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9 ● Generic standard:
9 EN 61000-6-2
●
● EN 61000-6-3
9 ● Product standard:
● EC 60255-6
9 ● EN 50178
● UL 508 (Industrial Control
9 Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
9 (Industrial Control
Equipment)
9 ●
●
ANSI C37.90
UL, CSA, CE
9
9
9
9 The catalog number
identification chart defines
EDR-3000
the electrical characteristics (A)–Four digital inputs, (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485)

9 and operation features four output relays
(A)–Without conformal
included in the EDR-3000. For (0)–Phase current 5 A / 1 A, coating
9 example, if the catalog number Ground Current 5 A / 1 A,
(1)–Projection panel mount
is EDR-3000-2A0BA1, Power supply: 19–300 Vdc,
9 the device would have
the following:
40–250 Vac
9
Relay Removable Terminals
9
EDR-3000-2A 0 B A 1
9
9 Hardware Option 1
A = 4 digital inputs, 4 outputs,
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
removable terminals 1 = Projection panel mount
9 B = 8 digital inputs, 6 outputs, removable Communication Options
B = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485
Conformal Coating
Options
terminals, trip coil monitor
9 C = 4 digital inputs, 4 outputs, removable C = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45 A = None
terminals, zone interlocking D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST B = Conformal coated
and IRIG-B E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485 circuit boards
9 F = Modbus RTU or DNP3 RTU over fiber optic ST
G = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over D-Sub / RS-485
Hardware Option 2 H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
9 0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, ground current 5 A / 1 A,
power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
over Ethernet RJ-45
9
1 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, sensitive ground current K = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic
0.5 A / 0.1 A, power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, Ethernet
40–250 Vac L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Climatic Environmental Housing Voltage Supply Digital Inputs
Conditions ● Material, housing: ● Aux. voltage: 19–300 Vdc/ ● Max. input voltage: 9
● Storage temperature: aluminum extruded section 40–250 Vac 300 Vdc/270 Vac
–13 °F to 158 °F (–25 °C up
to +70 °C)
● Material, front panel: ● Buffer time in case of ● Input current: <4 mA 9
aluminum/foil front supply failure: ≥50 ms ● Reaction time: <20 ms
–4 °F to 140 °F (–20 °C up
● Mounting position: at minimal aux. voltage ● Fallback time: <30 ms (safe 9
horizontal (±45° around the communication is state of the digital inputs)
●
to +60 °C)
Permissible humidity at
X-axis must be permitted)
●
permitted to be interrupted
Max. permissible making
● Four switching thresholds: 9
Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
ann. average: <75% rel.
(on 56d up to 95% rel.)
Plug-in Connector with
Integrated Short-Circuiter
current:
● 18 A peak value for
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/Vdc, 9
(Conventional Current Inputs) 230 Vac/Vdc Un = 24 Vdc
Permissible Installation
9
●
<0.25 ms ● Switching threshold
altitude: ● Nominal current: ● 12 A peak value for 1 ON
<2000 m (6561.67 ft) 1 A and 5 A
9
●
<1 ms – Switching threshold 1
above sea level ● Continuous loading ● The voltage supply must OFF
● If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft) capacity: 4 x In/
9
be protected by a fuse of: – Min. 19.2 Vdc
altitude apply, a changed continuously
● 2.5 A time-lag miniature – Max. 9.6 Vdc
classification of the ● Overcurrent withstand:
fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx.
operating and test 30 x In/10 s
1/5 in x 0.8 in) according
– Un = 48 V/60 Vdc 9
voltages may be ● 100 x In/1 s to IEC 60127 ● Switching threshold
necessary ● 250 x In/10 ms ● 3.5 A time-lag miniature 2 ON 9
(1 half-wave) fuse 6. 3 x 32 mm – Switching threshold 2
Degree of Protection EN 60529
● HMI front panel with
● Screws: M4, captive type (approx. 1/4 in x OFF 9
according to VDEW 1 1/4 in) according – Min. 42.6 Vdc
seal: IP54
● Rear side terminals: IP30
● Connection cross-sections: to UL 248-14 – Max. 21.3 Vdc 9
● 2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG – Un = 110/120 Vac/Vdc
9
14) with wire end ferrule Power Consumption
Routine Test ● Power supply range: Power ● Switching threshold
● Insulation test according to
● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm2
consumption in idle mode 3 ON
IEC 60255-5: All tests to be (2 x AWG 12) with
ring cable sleeve or ● Max. power consumption – Switching threshold 3
9
carried out against ground OFF
cable sleeve 19–300 Vdc: 6 W 8.5 W
9
●
and other input and output
circuits ● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm2 ● 40–250 Vac – Min. 88.0 Vdc/
88.0 Vac
● Aux. voltage supply, digital
inputs, current measuring
(2 x AWG 10) with
ring cable sleeve or
● For frequencies of
40–70 Hz: 6 W 8.5 W – Max. 44.0 Vdc/ 9
cable sleeve 44.0 Vac
inputs, signal relay outputs:
2.5 kV (eff)/50 Hz Real-Time Clock – Un = 230/240 Vac/Vdc 9
● Running reserve of the
Voltage measuring inputs:
9
● ● Switching threshold
3.0 kV (eff)/50 Hz real-time clock: 1 year min. 4 ON
All wire-bound
9
●
Display – Switching threshold 4
communication interfaces: OFF
1.5 kV DC
● Display type: LCD with
LED background
illumination
– Min. 184 Vdc/
184 Vac 9
– Max. 92 Vdc/92 Vac
● Resolution graphics
display: 128 x 64 pixel
9
● Terminals: screw-type
● LED-type: two colored,
red/green
terminal
9
● Number of LEDs, housing
B1: 8
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9
Current and Ground Binary Output Relays Measuring Accuracy
9 Current Measurement ● Continuous current: ● Max. measuring range: up
● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A 5 A AC/DC to 40 x In (phase currents)
9 ● Max. measuring range: ● Switch-on current: up to 25 x In (ground
● up to 40 x In (phase 25 A AC/DC for 4 s current standard)
9 currents) ● Max. breaking current: ● Frequency range: 50 Hz/
● up to 25 x In (ground 5 A AC up to 125 Vac 60 Hz ± 10%
9 current standard) ● 5 A DC up to 50 V ● Accuracy: Class 0.5
● up to 2.5 x In (ground (resistive) ● Amplitude error if I < In:
9 current sensitive) ● 0.2A DC at 300 V ±0.5% of the rated value
● Continuous loading ● Max. switching voltage: ● Amplitude error if I > In:
9 capacity: 4 x In/
continuously
250 Vac/300 Vdc ±0.5% of the measured
value
● Switching capacity:
9 ● Overcurrent proof: 2000 VA ● Amplitude error if I > 2 In:
±1.0% of the measured
● 30 x In/10 s ● Contact type:
9 ● 100 x In/1 s 1 changeover contact
●
value
Resolution: 0.01 A
● 250 x In/10 ms ● Terminals: Screw-type
9 Harmonics up to 20% 3rd
●
(1 half-wave) terminals
harmonic ±2% up to 20%
● Power consumption:
5th harmonic ±2%
9 Phase current inputs Front Interface RS-232
● Baud rates: 115,200 baud ● Frequency influence
● at In = 1 A S = 0.15 MVA
< ±2%/Hz in the range of
9 ● at In = 5 A S = 0.15 MVA
●
●
Handshake: RTS and CT
Connection: 9-pole
±5 Hz of the parameterized
● Ground current input nominal frequency
9 ● at In = 1 A S = 0.35 MVA
D-Sub plug
● Temperature influence
● at In = 5 A S = 0.35 MVA RS-485 <±1% within the range
9 ● Frequency range: 50 Hz/ ● Master/slave: slave
of 0 °C up to +60 °C
60 Hz ±10% Connection: 6 screw-
9
●
● Terminals: Screw-type clamping terminals RM

terminals with integrated 3.5 mm (138 MIL)
9 short-circuiters (contacts) (terminating resistors
internal)
9 Tolerances of the
9
Real-Time Clock
● Resolution: 1 ms
9 Tolerance: <1 minute/

●
month (+20 °C)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Wiring Diagrams
9
EDR-3000 9
Connection Example Clockwise Rotating Field
EDR3000 => Terminal Markings X3. 9
9
A B C 9
X3. 9
1A
1
5A
9
2 1A
IA
3
N 9
1A
IA’
4
5A 9
5 1B
IB’
6
N 9
IA 1A
IB’
7
5A
9
8 1C
IC’
9 N 9
1A
IB IC’
10
5A 9
11 1X
12
N
9
IX’ 9
IC
9
9
9
9
Three-Phase Current Measurement; Inom Secondary = 5 A
Ground Current Measuring via Residual Connection; IGnom Secondary = 5 A
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9 Drilling Pattern
9 5.38
(136.7)
“B” Holes for
4.94
9
Projection
(125.5) Panel Mount
3.94
9 (100.0)
CL
“A” Holes for
Standard
Panel Mount
9 B B
9 3.62
A A
(91.8) 4.88
9 Cutout (124.0)
CL
9
6.30
9
3.05 (160.0)
(77.6)
A A
9 B B
9 4x ø0.19 4x ø0.19
(ø4.8) (ø4.8)
9
9 Projection Mounting
3.82
9 (97.0)
9
9
9
9
9 5.56
(141.1)
6.82 5.38
9 (173.2) 4.80
(121.9)
(136.7)
9
9 8.62 6.67
6.14
9
(218.9) (169.4)
(156.0)
9
9
2.50
9 (63.5)
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Standard Mounting
3.82 9
(97.0)
9
9
9
9
9
7.49
6.82
(190.4)
4.94 9
(173.2) 6.74 (125.5)
(171.2) 9
9
8.62
(218.9)
6.14 4.88
9
(156.0) (124.0)
9
9
0.56 9
(14.2)
9
EDR-3000 9
Width Height Depth
6.82 (173.2) 8.62 (218.9) 7.49 (190.2) 1 9
9
EDR-3000 Housing B1
Shipping Weight 9
Width Height Depth Lbs (kg)
5.57 (141.5) 7.21 (183.0) 8.19 (208.0) 2 5.3 (2.4) 9
Notes
1 Depth behind panel with projection mounted enclosure.
9
9
2 Includes terminals.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Contents
9 EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
Description Page
9 Product Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143
Digitrip 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9 EDR-3000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159
EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
9 FP-5000 Feeder Protection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181
9 MP-4000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-199
9
9 EMR-5000 Motor Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . . . .

V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9 ETR-5000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . V3-T9-254
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-267
9 Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-280
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283
9
9
9
9
9 EDR-5000 Distribution Protection Relay
Eaton’s EDR-5000 The EDR-5000 distribution An integral keypad and The relay allows for four
9 distribution protection
relay is a multi-functional,
protection relay provides
complete current, voltage,
display is provided for direct
user programming and
preprogrammed setting
groups which can be
microprocessor-based relay and frequency protection and retrieval of data without the activated through software or
9 for feeder circuits of all metering in a single, compact need of a computer. 14 contact input.
voltage levels. It may be used case. The relay has four programmable LEDs provide
9 as a primary protection on current inputs rated for either quick indication of relay Flash memory is used for the
programming and all settings
feeders, mains and tie circuit 5 amperes or 1 ampere and status.
are stored in nonvolatile
9 breaker applications; or as
backup protection for
four voltage inputs. Three of
the voltage inputs are to be A front port is provided for memory. The relay allows for
transformers, high voltage connected to the three-phase direct computer connection. four preprogrammed setting
9 lines and differential power voltage for voltage An RS-485 communication groups which can be
protection. The relay is most protection and for metering. port on the back is standard activated through software,
9 commonly used on medium They can be connected in for local area networking
using Modbus-RTU. An
the display or a contact input.
voltage switchgear wye-ground or open delta The EDR-5000 distribution
9 applications. configuration. The fourth
voltage is for independent
optional Ethernet port and
protocols are available. protection relay has mass
memory for data storage and
9 single-phase undervoltage/
overvoltage protection, sync-
The EDR-5000 distribution
protection relay includes
a real-time clock with 1 ms
time resolution. The relay will
check or ground protection
9 for an ungrounded system.
programmable logic
functions. Logic gates and
log 300 sequence of event
records, 20 detailed trip logs,
timers may be defined and minimum/maximum values,
9 The maintenance mode
password protected soft key arranged for customized load profiles, breaker wear
can be used for arc flash applications. Programmable information and oscillography
9 mitigation to change to an logic control functions make data.
alternate settings group, set the EDR-5000 relay ideally
The EDR-5000 has eight
9 to have instantaneous suited for main-tie-main and
main 1/main 2 transfer programmable binary inputs,
elements only. The multiple 2 normally opened and 8
9 setting groups can also be
changed, via communications
schemes. Flash memory is
used for the programming Form C heavy-duty outputs
and all settings are stored in and one form C signal alarm
9 or a digital input.
nonvolatile memory. relay. It can be powered from
19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac
9 to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Protective Relays
9.3
The Eaton’s EDR-5000 Applications include 9
distribution protection relay distribution feeder protection,
has been designed for primary or backup protection 9
maximum user flexibility and for transformers and
simplicity. The base relay generators, utility 9
includes all the standard interconnections and
current and voltage
protection and metering
transfer schemes. 9
functions.
9
Features, Benefits and Functions 9
Directional Overcurrent
Protection
Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
Voltage restraint reduces the
Inverse-Time Characteristics
There are 11 user-selectable
Ground Voltage Protection
In high impedance grounded
9
overcurrent pickup level
(51P[3]). This modification of
inverse-time overcurrent
curve characteristics. The
systems, ground fault
protection is provided by the 9
complete three-phase and the pickup overcurrent level is user can select from the detection of zero sequence
ground directional compared to the corresponding ANSI, IEC or thermal curve voltage (3Vo) voltage in the 9
overcurrent protection. There phase input voltage. The families and can select neutral of the transformer by
are 8 independent ground
overcurrent elements. The
EDR-5000 uses the simple instantaneous or time delay an overvoltage element (59N) 9
linear model below to reset characteristics. connected to the secondary
ground elements “X” use the
independently measured
determine the effective
pickup value. Breaker Failure
of the distribution grounding
transformer, or in the
9
ground (or neutral) current
from a separate current- Sync Check
protection relay includes a
secondary of a Wye-Broken
Delta transformer used when 9
sensing input. The ground The sync check function is breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) the neutral is not accessible
elements “R” uses a provided for double-ended function that can be initiated or in Delta system. In the 9
calculated 3Io residual current power source applications. from either an internal or EDR-5000 we can measure
obtained from the sum of the
three-phase currents. This
The sync check monitors external trip signal. This is an this zero sequence voltage
through the 4th voltage input;
9
voltage magnitude, phase independent element that
calculated current could be
used for either the neutral or
angle and slip frequency
between the bus and line.
can be used to operate a
lockout relay or trip an
the 59N element has to be
desensitized for 3rd harmonic
9
ground current in a three- voltages that can be present
phase, four-wire system.
It also incorporates breaker
close time, dead bus dead
upstream breaker. The timer
must be longer than the in the system under normal 9
Each of the phase and ground line, dead bus live line and breaker operating time and operation.
overcurrent elements can be live bus live line features. the protective function reset 9
selected to operate based on times. Flexible Phase Rotation
fundamental or RMS current. Reverse Power
Voltage Protection
The EDR-5000 distribution 9
Phase direction is a function Reverse power provides protection relay can be
used to supervise all phase control for power flowing
through a feeder. There are
protection relay has four
applied on either an A-B-C or
A-C-B phase rotation. A user
9
current elements (50, 51). A
9
quadrature voltage is three elements to be voltage-input circuits. There is setting permits correct
compared to a corresponding configured: Operate in a three-phase set designated operation and indication of
forward or reverse; or, under as Main Voltage (M) and a the actual system
phase current to establish the
direction of the fault. This or over power conditions. single-phase voltage circuit configuration. 9
function is selectable to Reverse power is typically designated as Auxiliary
operate in the forward, applied to generator or motor Voltage (A). Both include Frequency Protection 9
reverse or both directions. applications while under undervoltage (27) and The EDR-5000 relay provides
Ground direction is used to power is generally applied to
load or generation loss.
overvoltage (59) protection.
The three-phase voltage
6 frequency elements than
can be used to detect under/
9
supervise ground current
elements and is
accomplished by using Reverse VARs
protection can be set to
operate on a single-phase,
over frequency, rate of
change, and a vector surge 9
ground, negative sequence or Reverse vars can be used to two out of three phases, or all (decoupling of two systems)
residual currents supervised detect loss of excitation in three-phase logic. The Main protection on the Main VT 9
by zero, negative or positive synchronous machines. VTs also provide phase inputs. Each element has an
sequence voltages or ground There are three elements to voltage unbalance/reversal independent threshold set 9
current. This function is be configured: operate in (47 negative sequence) point and adjustable time
selectable to operate in
forward, reverse or both
forward or reverse; or, under
or over vars conditions.
protection. Each element has
an independent threshold set
delay.
9
point and adjustable time
directions.
delay. 9
9
9
Protective Relays
Autoreclosing Logic ● Ground overcurrent Metering Features Control Functions

9 The EDR-5000 provides a 6 elements: ● Amperes: Positive, ● Breaker open/close
shot-recloser scheme. ● Two instantaneous negative and zero
9 Remote open/close
●
Autoreclosing is normally measured elements sequence ● Programmable I/O

used by the utilities in their with timers (50X[1] and ● Ampere demand
9 distribution and transmission 50X[2]) ● Volts: Positive, negative
●
●
Programmable Logic
Programmable LEDs
lines, but it can be used in ● Two instantaneous and zero sequence
9 commercial and industrial
applications with long
calculated elements ● Phase angles
● Multiple setting groups
with timers (50R[1] and ● Cold load pickup
● Volt-amperes and VA
9 overhead lines. Nearly 85%
of the faults that occur on ●
50R[2])
Two inverse time
demand
● CT supervision
overhead lines are transient in ● Watts and kW demand
9 nature. Tripping of a circuit
overcurrent measured
elements (51X[1] and ● kWh (forward, reverse,
Communication Features
● Local HMI
breaker normally clears a 51X[2]) net)
9 transient fault and reclosing
of the circuit breaker restores
● Two inverse time ● VARs and kVAR demand
● Password protected
● Addressable
overcurrent calculated ● kVARh (lead, leg and net)
9 power back to the circuit.
elements (51R[1] and ● Power factor
● IRIG-B
51R[2]) ● Local communication port:
Maintenance Mode
9 Frequency
●
● 11 standard curves ● RS-232
The Maintenance Mode can ● % THD V and I
improve safety by providing a ● Instantaneous or time Remote communication
9
●
● Magnitude THD V and I
simple and reliable method to delay reset port:
reduce fault clearing time and
● Minimum/maximum
● Directional control (all ● RS-485
9 lower incident energy levels elements)
●
recording.
Sync Values ● Ethernet RJ-45
at energized panels. The
9 Maintenance Mode allows ● Breaker failure (50BF) ● Trending (load profile ● Protocols:
the user to switch to more ● Phase unbalance negative over time) ● Modbus-RTU
sequence overcurrent
9
sensitive settings via a
password protected soft key, (46[1], 46[2]) Monitoring Features
● Modbus-TCP (optional)
communication or via a digital ● Phase voltage unbalance ● Trip coil monitor
● IEC-61850 (optional)
9 Input while maintenance and sequence protection ● Breaker wear primary and ● Configuration software
work is being performed at an (47[1], 47[2]) secondary (accumulated
9 energized panel or device.
The more sensitive settings
● Main three-phase under/ interrupted current)
overvoltage (27M[1], ● Oscillography (7200 cycles
9 provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and
27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) total)
helps reduce the possibility of
● Auxiliary single-phase ● Fault data logs (up to 20
9 injury. under/overvoltage (27A[1],
27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])
events)
● Sequence of events report
9 Protection Features ● Ground fault overvoltage
relay (59N[1], 59N[2])
(up to 300 events)
● Phase overcurrent ● Clock (1 ms time stamping)
9 elements: ● 6 Frequency elements that
can be assigned to: over
● Trip cause displays fault
● Three instantaneous reorder data on HMI after
9 elements with timers
(50P[1], 50P[2] and
frequency, under
frequency, rate of change,
fault event
or vector surge (81[1],
9 ●
50P[3])
Three inverse time
81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5],
81[6])
9 overcurrent elements
(51P[1], 51P[2] and
● Apparent and
51P[3]) displacement power factor
9 ● 11 standard curves
(55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1],
55D[2])
Instantaneous or time
9
●
● Forward and Reverse
delay reset Watts (32[1], 32[2], 32[3])
Voltage Restraint (51P[2]
9
●
● Forward and Reverse VARs
and 51P[3]) (32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3])
● Directional Control (All
9 Elements)
● Sync check (25)
● Autoreclosing (79)
9 ● Zone interlocking for bus
protection (87B)
9 ● Switch onto fault
protection
9 ● Cold load pickup
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Monitoring and Metering
9
Sequence of Events Records viewing measured values of
The EDR-5000 protection the relays in real-time, 9
relay records a maximum of uploading/downloading
300 events associated with
the relay. An event is
event log and waveform
9
9
classified as a change of state records.
as detected by the relay.
These include relay pickups, Waveform Capture (Quality
dropouts, trips, contact Manager) 9
closure, alarms, setting The EDR-5000 relay provides
changes and self-diagnostic oscillographic recording 9
failures. Each event is date capabilities. The relay will
and time stamped to a 1 ms
resolution. The events are
record all measured signals
along with the binary signals
9
of pickup, trip, internal logic
stored in a FIFO in
chronological order. and contact inputs. The EDR- 9
5000 can record up to 7200
Trip Log cycles of data. The number of 9
The EDR-5000 protection records is proportional to the
relay will store a maximum of programmed size of each
record; the maximum size per
9
20 trip records in a FIFO trip
log. Each trip record will be
date and time stamped to a 1
record is 600 cycles. Waveform Capture (Quality Manager)
9
The waveform capture is Integral User Interface There are eight user-
ms resolution. The trip log
record will include
initiated by up to 8 different
The front panel user interface configurable discrete inputs 9
triggers (i.e., trip/alarm that accept a wet contact and
information on the type of has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD
fault, protection elements
events) or manually via
communications or the HMI. display with background can operate through a wide 9
that operated, fault location illumination for wide angle range of power. Each input
PowerPort-E setting software
and currents and voltages at is used to retrieve the viewing in all light conditions. and output is user-
programmable for maximum
9
the time of the fault. records. Quality Manager is a 17 programmable LEDs
PowerPort-E
separate software program provide quick and easy visual
display of power on, mode of
application flexibility.
9
downloaded with PowerPort- Programmable Logic
operation, alarm and trip
PowerPort-E is the software
program used to configure
E used for analyzing the
waveform and trending files indication. Soft keys are The EDR-5000 distribution 9
off-line protection setting files provided for operation mode protection relay provides logic
for all E-Series relay models.
retrieved from the relay.
selection, scrolling through gates and timers that the 9
PowerPort-E is also used for data and settings. In addition, user can customize for
the relay settings and test
functions are password
special or unique applications.
Each gate can be assigned a
9
protected. logic function of either AND,
OR, NAND or NOR. Each 9
Load Profiling/Trending gate can have a maximum of
The EDR-5000 relay four input signals and each 9
automatically records input signal can be required
selected quantities into non- to be a NOT. Input signals can 9
volatile memory every 5, 10, be external inputs received
15, 30 or 60 minutes, via the binary inputs or
internal values associated
9
depending on the trending
report setting. with the protection, alarm or
metering set points. Each 9
Programmable I/O gate has a unique output
The EDR-5000 distribution assignment and designation 9
protection relay provides that can be used as the input
heavy-duty, triprated, 2 to another gate. There are 24
independent timers that have
9
normally open and 8 Form C
contacts. Two isolated inputs adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
9
can be used for monitoring
PowerPort-E
the trip circuit. One Form C
contact is dedicated to the
9
relay failure alarm function
and is operated in a normally 9
energized (failsafe) mode.
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Design Standards EMC Immunity Tests Environmental Tests Mechanical Tests
9 ● Generic Standard: ● Fast transient disturbance Classification Test Fc: Vibration Response Test
● EN 61000-6-2 immunity test (burst):
9 ● EN 61000-6-3 ● IEC 60255-22-4: Power
● IEC 60068-1: Climatic—
0/055/56
● IEC 60068-2-6,
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 1:
Product Standard: supply, mains inputs—
9
●
±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
● IEC 60721-3-1: ● Displacement: (10 Hz–
● IEC 60255-6 ● Classification of ambient 59 Hz)—0.0014 in
● IEC 61000-4-4 Class 4: (0.035 mm)
9 EN 50178 conditions (storage)—
●
Other inputs and
● UL 508 (Industrial outputs— 1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2 ● Acceleration: (59 Hz–
but min. –13 °F (–25 °C) 150 Hz)—0.5 gn
9 ●
Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
±2 kV, 5 kHz (coupling
network) ● IEC 60721-3-2: ● Number of cycles in
Classification of ambient each axis: 1
9
(Industrial Control ● ANSI C37.90.1: ±4 kV,
Equipment) 2.5 kHz (coupling clamp) conditions (transportation)
—2K3/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2 Test Fc: Vibration Endurance
ANSI C37.90
9
● ● Surge Immunity Test: Test
● UL-listed file: e217753
● IEC 60721-3-3:
● IEC 61000-4-5 Class 4 Classification of ambient ● IEC 60068-2-6,
9 – Within one circuit—
2 kV
conditions (Stationary use
at weather protected
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 1:
● Acceleration: (10 Hz–
9 – Circuit to ground—
4 kV
locations)—3K6/3B1/3C1/
3S1/3M2 but min. 32 °F ●
150 Hz)—1.0 gn
Number of cycles in
(0 °C) and 3K8H for 2 h
9 Standards ● Electrical discharge each axis: 20
immunity test:
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6) Test ad: Cold
IEC 60255-22-2: Air Test Ea: Shock Test
9
●
● High frequency discharge—8 kV ● IEC 60068-2-1: ● IEC 60068-2-27,

interference test: ● IEC 61000-4-2 Class 3: ● Temperature— IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
9 ● IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3 Contact discharge—6 kV –4 °F (–20 °C) ● Shock response test:
– Within one circuit— ● Radiated radio frequency ● Test duration—16 h 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses
9 1 kV/2 s electromagnetic field
Test Bd: Dry heat
in each direction
– Circuit to ground— immunity test ● Shock resistance test:
9 2.5 kV/2 s ● IEC 61000-4-3: 26 MHz – ● IEC 60068-2-2: 15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses
– Circuit to circuit— 80 MHz—10 V/m ● Temperature— in each direction
9 2.5 kV/2 s ● Class X: 80 MHz– 131 °F (55 °C)
Test Eb: Shock Endurance Test
● Insulation voltage test: 1 GHz—35 V/m ● Relative humidity—
9 ● IEC 60255-5, EN 50178 ● ANSI C37.90.2: 1 GHz– <50%
● IEC 60068-2-29,
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
– All circuits to other 3 GHz—10 V/m ● Test duration—72 h
9 circuits and exposed ● Immunity to conducted
Test cab: Damp heat
● Shock endurance test:
10 gn, 16 ms, 1000
conductive parts: disturbances induced by
(steady state) impulses in each
9 2.5 kV (eff.)/50 Hz,
1 min.
radio frequency fields:
direction
● IEC 61000-4-6 Class 3: ● IEC 60068-2-78:
9 – Except interfaces:
1.5 kV DC, 1 min.
10 V
Power frequency magnetic
● Temperature— Test Fe: Earthquake Test
●
104 °F (40 °C) ● IEC 60068-3-3, KTA 3503,
9 – Voltage measuring
input: 3 kV (eff.)/
field immunity test:
● IEC 61000-4-8:
● Relative humidity—93% IEC 60255-21-3, Class 2
50 Hz, 1 min.
● Test duration—56 d ● Single axis earthquake
9 ● Impulse voltage test: ●
Continuous—30 A/m
Class 4: 3 sec—300 A/m Test Db: Damp heat (cyclic)
vibration test:
● IEC 60255-5: 5 kV/0.5J, – 3–7 Hz: Horizontal
9 1.2/50 μs EMC Emission Tests
● IEC 60068-2-30: 0.394 in (10 mm),
1 cycle each axis
● Temperature—
Radio interference
9
●
131 °F (55 °C) – 7–35 Hz Horizontal:
suppression test: 2 gn, 1 cycle each axis
● Relative humidity—95%
● IEC/CISPR11—
9 Limit value class B
● Cycles (12 + 12-hour)—2
● Radio interference
9 radiation test:
● IEC/CISPR11—
9 Limit value class B
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
The catalog number EDR-5000 9
the electrical characteristics (A)–8 digital inputs, (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485) 9
and operation features 11 output relays
included in the EDR-5000. For (0)–5 A / 1 A phase and coating 9
example, if the catalog number ground CTs, power supply
is EDR-5000-2A0BA1,
the device would have
range: (1)–Projection panel mount
9
19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
the following:
9
Relay Removable Terminals 9
EDR-5000-2A 0 B A 1 9
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options
9
A = 8 digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable
terminals, zone interlocking
0 = Standard mount
1 = Projection panel mount 9
B = 8 digital inputs, 11 outputs, removable Communication Options Conformal Coating
terminals, zone interlocking
and large display
C = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45 A = None
Options
9
D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST B = Conformal coated
Hardware Option 2
E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485
F = Modbus RTU or DNP3 RTU over fiber optic ST
circuit boards 9
9
0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, ground current 5 A / 1 A, G = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over D-Sub / RS-485
power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
1 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, sensitive ground current I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
0.5 A / 0.1 A, power supply range: 19–300 Vdc,
40–250 Vac
over Ethernet RJ-45
K = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic 9
Ethernet
L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Climatic Environmental Current and Ground Plug-in Connector with Voltage and Residual Voltage
9 Conditions Current Measurement Integrated Short-Circuiter
(Conventional Current Inputs)
Measurement
● Storage temperature: ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A ● Nominal voltages: 100 V/
9 –22 °F to 158 °F (–30 °C ● Max. measuring range:
● Nominal current: 1 A and
5A
110 V/ 230 V/ 400 V (can be
to +70 °C) ● Up to 40 x In (phase configured)
9 ● Operating temperature:
–4 °F to 140 °F (–20 °C
currents)
● Continuous loading
capacity: 4 x In/
● Max. measuring range:
2 x nominal voltage
● Up to 25 x In (ground
9 ●
to +60 °C)
current standard)
●
continuously
Overcurrent withstand:
capacity: 2 x nominal
● Up to 2.5 x In (ground
9 ann. average: <75% rel.
current sensitive)
●
●
30 x In/10 s
100 x In/1 s ●
voltage (800 Vac)
Power consumption:
9 Permissible installation
●
capacity: 4 x In/ ● 250 x In/10 ms ● at Vn = 100 V
altitude: continuously (1 half-wave) S = 0.1 MVA
6,561.67 ft (<2000 m)
9
●
● Overcurrent proof: ● Screws: M4, captive type ● at Vn = 110 V
above sea level acc. to VDEW S = 0.1 MVA
● 30 x In/10 s
If 13,123.35 ft (4000 m)
9
●
● 100 x In/1 s
● Connection cross sections: ● at Vn = 230 V
altitude applies, a S = 0.4 MVA
● 250 x In/10 ms
● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x
changed classification
9 at Vn = 400 V
●
(1 half-wave) AWG 14) with wire end
of the operating and test S = 1.0 MVA
ferrule
voltages may be ● Power consumption:
9 necessary ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x ● Frequency range: 50 Hz or
● Phase current inputs 60 Hz ±10%
AWG 12) with ring cable
– At In = 1 A sleeve or cable sleeve Terminals: screw-type
9
●
S = 0.15 MVA terminals
● HMI front panel with ● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x
– At In = 5 A AWG 10) with ring cable
9
seal: IP54
S = 0.15 MVA sleeve or cable sleeve Frequency Measurement
● Rear side terminals: IP20 ● Ground current input ● The current measuring ● Nominal frequencies:
9 Routine Test – At In = 1 A board´s terminal blocks 50 Hz / 60 Hz
S = 0.35 MVA may be used as with 2
● Insulation test according to
9 IEC 60255-5: All tests to be – At In = 5 A
S = 0.35 MVA
(double) conductors
AWG 10,12,14
Voltage Supply
● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc/
carried out against ground
9 and other input and output ● Frequency range: 50 Hz/
60 Hz ±10%
otherwise with single
conductors only ●
48–230 Vac (–20/+10%)
Buffer time in case of
circuits
9 ● Aux. voltage supply, digital
inputs: 2.5 kV (eff.)/50 Hz
● Terminals: Screw-type
terminals with integrated Control Power Supply
supply failure: ≥50 ms
at minimal aux. voltage
● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc/ communication is
9 ● Current measuring inputs, short-circuiters (contacts)
● Connection cross sections: 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%) permitted to be interrupted
signal relay outputs: 2.5 kV ● Buffer time in case of ● Max. permissible making
9 (eff.)/50 Hz 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x
●
AWG 14) with wire end supply failure: ≥50 ms current:

● Voltage measuring inputs: at minimal aux. voltage
ferrule ● 18 A peak value for
9 ●
3.0 kV (eff.)/50 Hz
All wire-bound ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x
interrupted communication
is permitted
<0.25 ms
AWG 12) with ring cable ● 12 A peak value for
9
communication interfaces: ● Maximum permissible
1.5 kV DC sleeve or cable sleeve <1 ms
making current:
● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x ● The voltage supply must
9 Housing AWG 10) with ring cable
<0.25 ms
be protected by a fuse of:
● Housing B2: Height / Width sleeve or cable sleeve ● 2.5 A time-lag miniature
9 7.205 in (183 mm)/ 8.374 in ● The current measuring
<1 ms
(212.7 mm) board´s terminal blocks 0.2 in x 0.8 in) according
9 ● Housing Depth (Incl. may be used as with 2
(double) conductors
● The voltage supply must
be protected by a fuse of: ●
to IEC 60127
3.5 A time-lag miniature
Terminals): 8.189 in
9 AWG 10,12,14 2.5 A time-lag miniature fuse 6.3 x 32 mm
●
(208 mm)
● Material, housing: otherwise with single fuse approx. 0.2 x 0.8 in (approx. 0.25 in x
conductors only (5 x 20 mm) according to 1.25 in) according
9 Aluminum extruded
section IEC 60127 to UL 248-14
● 3.5 A time-lag miniature
9 Material, front panel:
●
Aluminum/foil front fuse approx. 0.25 x

1.25 in (6.3 x 32 mm)
9 Mounting position:
●
according to UL 248-14
Horizontal (±45° around
the X-axis must be
9 permitted)
● Weight: Approx. 9.259 lb
9 (4.2 kg)
Protective Relays
9.3
Power Consumption Digital Inputs Relay Outputs Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X
● Power supply range: ● Maximum input voltage: ● Continuous current: ● Nominal input voltage: 5 V 9
24–270 Vdc 300 Vdc/259 Vac 5 A AC/DC Connection: Screw-type
9
●
● Power consumption ● Input current: <4 mA ● Maximum make current: terminals (twisted pair)
in idle mode—7 W Reaction time: <20 ms 25 A AC / 25 A DC up to
9
● ●
Zone Interlocking
● Maximum power ● Fallback time: <30 ms 30 V for 4s
consumption—13 W ● 30 A/230 Vac according ● Zone Out:
● Power supply range: (Safe state of the to ANSI IEEE Std. ● Output voltage (High) 9
48–230 Vac (for digital inputs) C37.90-2005 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
frequencies of 40–70 Hz) ● Four switching thresholds: ● 30 A/250 Vdc according ● Output voltage (Low) 0.0 9
● Power consumption Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, to ANSI IEEE Std. to +0.5 Vdc
in idle mode—7 VA 60 Vdc, 110 Vac/Vdc, C37.90-2005 ● Zone In: 9
● Maximum power 230 Vac/Vdc ● Maximum breaking ● Nominal input voltage
consumption—13 VA ● Un = 24 Vdc current: +5 Vdc 9
– Switching threshold ● 5 A AC up to 250 Vac ● Max. input voltage
Display
1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc ● 5 A DC up to 30 V +5.5 Vdc 9
– Switching threshold (resistive) ● Switching threshold ON
LED background
illumination
1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc ● 0.3 A DC at 300 V min. 4.0 Vdc 9
● Un = 48 V / 60 Vdc ● Maximum switching ● Switching threshold OFF
Resolution graphics
9
●
– Switching threshold voltage: 250 Vac/250 Vdc max. 1.5 Vdc
display: 128 x 64 pixel 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc ● Switching capacity: ● Galvanic isolation 2.5 kV
LED-type: two colored,
9
●
– Switching threshold 1250 VA AC (to ground and other IO)
red/green 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc ● Contact type: Form C or ● Connection: Screw-type
B2: 15
● Un = 110 / 120 Vac/Vdc
– Switching threshold
normally open contact terminals (twisted pair) 9
Front Interface 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc /
88.0 Vac
terminals RS-485
● Master/slave: slave
9
● Baud rates: 115,200 Baud
9
– Switching threshold Supervision Contact (SC) ● Connection: 6 screw-
● Handshake: RTS and CTS 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc ● Continuous current: clamping terminals RM 138
● Connection: 9-pole / 44.0 Vac 5 A AC/DC MIL (3.5 mm) (terminating
D-sub plug ● Un = 48–60 Vdc ● Maximum switch-on resistors internal) 9
– Switching threshold current: 15 A AC / 15 A DC
Real-Time Clock
4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc / up to 30 V for 4 s 9
● Running reserve of the 184 Vac ● Maximum breaking
real-time clock: 1 year min.
– Switching threshold current: 9
4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc / ● 5 A Vac up to 250 Vac
92 Vac ● 5 A Vdc up to 30 Vdc 9
● Terminals: screw-type ● 0.4 A at 125 Vdc
terminal
● Contact type: 9
1 Form C contact
● Terminals: screw-type 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
Typical AC Connections—Wye VTs, 5 A CTs and Ground Current Measured by Residual Connection
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Typical One-Line Diagram
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Typical Control Diagram

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Dimensions
Drilling Plan 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Projection Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Standard Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
Feeder Protection FP-5000
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
FP-5000 Feeder Protection 9
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . V3-T9-267
Universal RTD Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283
9
9
9
9
FP-5000 Feeder Protection 9
● Microprocessor-based Eaton’s FP-5000 Feeder Programmable logic control Open and close pushbuttons
9
protection with monitoring
and control for medium
Protection relay provides
complete three-phase and
functions make the FP-5000
relay ideally suited for main-
are conveniently located on
the front of the relay for local 9
voltage main and feeder ground overcurrent and tie-main and main 1/main 2 breaker operation.
applications voltage protection plus transfer schemes.
Loss-of-vacuum monitoring is
9
● Current, voltage, frequency metering in a single, compact
and power protection for drawout case. It may be The Zone Interlocking feature
can be utilized for bus
activated when the breaker
is open. Residual current is 9
electric power distribution used as primary protection
protection instead of an monitored and alarmed
systems on feeders, mains and tie
circuit breaker applications, expensive and complicated if detected. 9
● Complete metering of bus differential (87B)
and as backup protection
voltage, currents, power,
energy, minimum/ for transformers, high scheme. The FP-5000 works When an electrical fault
or disturbance occurs, the
9
voltage lines and differential directly with Eaton’s Digitrip
FP-5000 begins to store the
maximum and
demand functions protection. The relay is most 3000 and Digitrip MV relays.
New breaker failure logic following in non-volatile 9
commonly used on medium memory:
Programmable logic control provides faster remote
9
●
voltage switchgear
functions for main-tie-main applications. backup clearing times for ● Voltage and current
transfer schemes stuck breaker operation. sampled data
● Trip logs, event logs and The FP-5000 takes
The multiple settings
● Calculated values 9
waveform capture for full advantage of its
Status of internal protection
9
●
microprocessor technology groups can be utilized for
better fault analysis and functions, logic, contact
providing the user new arc flash mitigation when
system restoration inputs and outputs
an alternative setting group,
● Data Logger to provide freedoms and a wealth of
data-gathering features. The set to have instantaneous Retrieval and viewing of the
9
energy usage profiles for elements only is activated
relay performs self-checking data is easy, aiding in the quick
better planning, utilization
and energy usage of all major hardware and using a selector switch and analysis and restoration of your 9
firmware protection elements the programmable I/O in the electric power system.
● Compact, drawout
case design
to ensure their operation in FP-5000. 9
the event of a system or The FP-5000 provides trip
●
●
Multiple settings groups
ANSI, IEC and thermal
component electrical failure
or fault. Protection functions
and close circuit monitoring 9
and alarming features. It
protection curves for
greater flexibility
are well suited for main and
distribution feeder circuit
continually monitors the
complete trip and close
9
applications. circuits for continuity and
readiness to trip. 9
Protective Relays

9 When the FP-5000 isn’t ● Programmable logic control Phase Overcurrent (Forward, ● Auxiliary single-phase
responding to disturbances features that can replace Reverse or Both) under/over-voltage (27A-1,
9 in the power system, it’s and eliminate external ● Two-stage instantaneous 27A-2, 59A-1, 59A-2)
providing valuable metering auxiliary relays, timers with timers (50P-1 and ● Under/over frequency
9 information at the relay and and wiring 50P-2) (81U-1, 81U-2, 81O-1,
remotely. It provides energy ● Zone-selective interlocking ● Two inverse time 81O-2)
9 usage and demand reading,
and can alarm when usage
improves coordination and overcurrent (51P-1 and ● Reverse/forward power
tripping times and saves 51P-2) (32-1, 32-2)
9 reaches a set value. Power
factor measurements can be
money compared to a
traditional bus differential
● Directional control ● Sync check (25)
used for cap bank switching ● 10 standard curves ● Power factor (55)
9 to control kVAR demand. ●
scheme
Trip and event recording
● Instantaneous or time ● Zone interlocking for bus
Onboard data trending can delay reset protection (87B). The
9
in non-volatile memory
provide load profiles for up provides detailed ● Voltage restrained time FP-5000 feeder relay
to 40 days. information for analysis and overcurrent (51VR) includes a zone selective
9 The protection functions are system restoration ● Two independent ground interlocking feature that
can be used with other
listed below and shown on ● 256 cycles of waveform directional overcurrent
9 Page V3-T9-186. capture aids in post fault elements, one measured
(IX) and one calculated (IR)
Eaton devices like the
Digitrip 3000 overcurrent
analysis relay
● Complete protection,
9 metering and control in a ● Front RS-232 port and ● Two-Stage
instantaneous with
single compact case to PowerPort software
9 reduce panel space, wiring provides local computer
access and a user-friendly,
timers (50X-1 and 50X-2)
(50R-1 and 50R-2)
and costs
9 Windows®-based interface ● Inverse time overcurrent
● Flexible current, voltage
for relay settings, and (51X and 51R)
and frequency protection
configuration and data Ground directional
9
●
and programmability to
retrieval polarizing (67N) –3vo, Ipol,
cover a broad range of
applications while ● Drawout case design for negative sequence
9 simplifying relay ordering quick and easy relay ● 10 standard curves
and reducing inventory removal and replacement ● Instantaneous or time
9 ● Integral test function ● Breaker open/close control delay reset
reduces maintenance time from relay faceplate or ● Voltage restrained time
9 and expense remotely via
communications
overcurrent (51VR)
● Relay self-diagnostics and
9 Breaker failure (50BF)
●
reporting improves uptime ● Remote communications
and troubleshooting to Eaton’s PowerNet ● Phase unbalance negative
9 ● Breaker trip circuit
●
monitoring system or PC
Free PowerPort utility
(46-1, 46-2)
monitoring improves the
software for local PC Phase voltage unbalance
9
●
reliability of the breaker
operation interface to the FP-5000 for and sequence protection
relay settings, monitoring (47-1, 47-2)
9 and control ● Main three-phase under/
overvoltage (27M-1,
9 27M-2, 59M-1, 59M-2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
The FP-5000 provides the ● Waveform capture Communication Software The second package is
following metering functions: (256 cycles total, up to Eaton provides two types of PowerNet. PowerNet is a 9
16 events) communication software. The power management software
● Amperes (rms, phasor and
sequence)
● Fault data logs (up to first is PowerPort. It runs on a package that is designed for 9
16 events) PC or laptop for easy access to continuous, remote monitoring
Amperes demand and
9
●
● Sequence of events report a single relay to change set of many devices. It provides all
peak demand points or configuration and to the functionality of PowerPort
(up to 100 events)
Volts (rms, phasor and view metered values and plus additional functions such
9
●
sequence)
● Clock stored data. PowerPort is free as billing, trending and
and can be downloaded from graphics. Contact your local
VA and VA demand The FP-5000 provides
9
●
standard control functions www.eaton.com; search for Eaton representative for more
● Watts and kW demand and
plus user-configurable ‘PowerPort,’ then click the information on PowerNet
peak demand
● Forward/reverse/net kWh custom control capabilities. download search result. software. 9
This logic can be used for
VARs and kVAR demand
9
●
applications such as main-tie-
and peak demand main transfer schemes.
Lead/lag/net kVARh
9
●
● Power factor
● Remote open/close
● Programmable I/O
●
●
Frequency
Voltage and current
● Programmable logic gates 9
and timers
● %THD and magnitude THD ● Multiple setting groups 9
● Minimum/maximum (up to four)
recording with date/
time stamp
● Bus transfer logic 9
● Cold load pickup
● Trending (load profile
over time) ● Loss of potential 9
(PT blown fuses)
The FP-5000 provides the
The FP-5000 supports the
9
following monitoring and data
recording functions that
enhance the security of the
following communication
options: 9
protection system and
provides useful information
● Local HMI 9
for scheduling maintenance:
● Password protected
● Trip circuit monitoring

● Addressable 9
● Local communication port
● Close circuit monitoring ● Remote communication PowerPort and PowerNet Protection Overview Screen 9
● Loss-of-vacuum monitoring port:
● Breaker wear (accumulated
● FSK 9
● RS-232
● RS-485 9
● Protocols:
● INCOM 9
Modbus
9
●
● Configuration software
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9 ● Meets ANSI, CE and Immunity Tests ● EN 61000-4-6 (1996)—
CSA standards Conducted RF at 10V/m
9 ANSI C37.90.1 (1989)—
●
Surge Withstand Capability ● EN 61000-4-11 (1994)—

Compliance Voltage Dips and Variations
9 ANSI C37.90.2 (1995)—
●
● UL Recognized, EMI Immunity to 35V/m ● EN 61000-4-8—Power
File # E154862 Frequency Magnetic
9 EN 61000-4-2 (1995)—
●
● UL 1053 (1994) recognized ESD Rating of 8 kV Field Immunity
● ANSI C37.90 (1989) EN 61000-4-3 (1997)—
9
●
● EN 55011 (1991) Radiated EM Field at

● EN 61000-6-2 (1999) 10V/m
9 ● EN 61000-4-4 (1995)—Fast
Emission Tests Transient Burst at 2 kV
9 ● EN 55011 (1991)—Group 1 ● EN 61000-4-5 (1995)—
Class A (CISPR-11, Surge Immunity Test
9 Class A)
● FCC 47 CFR Chapter 1—
9 Part 15 Subpart b Class A
9
9
FP-5000 Feeder Protection
9 FP5 2 00 - 0 1
9
9 Current Range Packaging Control Voltage Communications Protocol
2 = 5 Amperes 0 = Drawout 0 = 48–125 Vac/Vdc 0 = INCOM
9 3 = 1 Ampere 1 = Fixed case 1 = 100–240 Vac/Vdc 1 = Modbus
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Control Power ● Input signal frequency Under/Over Frequency Logic and Control Functions
● Control voltage: necessary for accurate
operation:
Protection
● Pickup range: 45–65 Hz in
● Six programmable logic
gates for AND, OR, NAND,
9
● 48–125 Vac/Vdc
60 Hz nominal, 57–63 Hz 0.01 Hz steps NOR operation
9
●
● 100–240 Vac/Vdc
(±5%) ● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles ● Two latching (flip/flop)
● Operating voltage:
9
● 50 Hz nominal, 47–53 Hz in 1 cycle steps gates
● 55–264 Vac (±5%) ● Six timer gates provide
● 38–300 Vdc Breaker Failure Protection
● Interruption ride-through
● Clock accuracy: ● Pickup range: 0.1–5.0 per
on/off delays
9
time: 20 cycle interruption ● Free running ±1 minute/ unit in 0.01 steps INCOM Communications
of nominal ac supply month at 25 ºC ● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles ● Baud rate: 9600 fixed 9
● Power consumption: 20 VA ● Clock automatically in 1 cycle steps ● Maximum distance:
maximum updated by PowerNet
host when present
10,000 feet (3048 m) 9
Power Protection (32) ● Protocol: INCOM
Current Inputs
● Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A
Protective Functions
● Forward/reverse:
over/under
9
RS-485 Communications,
● CT rating: Phase and Ground
Overcurrent Protection
● Pickup accuracy: ±1.0% Rear Panel 9
● 2 x In continuous ● Trip time accuracy: ● Baud rate: 19.2 K, 9.6 K
● 80 x In for 1 second ● Inverse characteristics:
Mod, Very, Extremely,
0 to 12 cycles or 0.1%,
whichever is greater
● Protocol: Modbus RTU 9
● CT burdens: IECA, IECB, IECC, It, I2t,
● < 0.25 VA at 5 A I4t, Flat Sync Check (25)
RS-232 Communications,
Front Panel 9
(nominal) TOC (51) pickup range: ● Phase angle: 1 to 60 °C Baud rate: 38.4 K, 19.2 K,
9
● ●
● < 0.05 VA at 1 A 0.1–4.0 per unit in 0.01 ● Slip frequency: 0.1 to 2 Hz 9.6 K
(nominal) steps Connector standard 9-pin
9
●
● Voltage differential: 1 to
● Time multipliers: 0.05–10.0 100 volts subminiature, three-wire
Voltage Transformer Inputs in 0.01 steps ● Protocol: INCOM
9
● Breaker close time: 0 to
● Nominal: 120 Vac ● IOC (50) pickup range: 0.1– 9999 cycles
● Operating range: 20.0 per unit in 0.01 steps Environmental Ratings
69–150 Vac ● Pickup accuracy: ±1% Power Factor ● Operating temperature: 9
● Burden: (at 0.1–2 per unit) ● Trigger/reset threshold: 0.5 –0 ºF to +140 ºF (–40 ºC to
● <0.015 at 120 Vac ● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles lag to 0.5 lead in 0.01 steps +60 ºC) Product tested to 9
● 1 megaohm in 1 cycle steps ● Time delay: 0–1000 +185 ºF (+85 ºC)
● Time accuracy: ±3% or seconds in 1 second steps ● Storage temperature:
–40 ºF to +185 ºF (–40 ºC to
9
Metering Accuracy ±30 ms
● Phase current: ● Directional (67, 67N, 67G): Discrete Inputs
● Number of contact ●
+85 ºC)
Humidity: 5–95% relative
9
● ±0.5% or ±0.025 A from forward, reverse or both
0.02–20 per unit fully
offset current waveform Voltage Unbalance (47) ●
inputs: 8
Rating: 48 Vdc wetting ●
humidity (noncondensing)
Altitude: 0–6350 feet
9
● Ground current:
● Threshold (minimum
voltage) 1–100 volts in
voltage provided with
internal ground only
(0–1935 m) above Mean Sea
Level 9
● ±0.5% of full scale (In) 1 volt steps
from 0.02–2.0 per unit ● % V2/V1: 4–40% in Output Contacts 9
fully offset current 1% steps ● Number of output
waveform ● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles contacts: Five Form A and 9
● Phase voltage: ±0.5% or in 1 cycle steps two Form C
±0.2V from 0–160 Vac
Rating of Output Contacts
9
● Frequency measurement Current Unbalance
accuracy: ±0.02 Hz ● Threshold (minimum
● Momentary: 9
● Phase angle: ±1 ºC current) 0.1–20.0 per unit ● Make 30 A AC/DC for
● Power metering accuracy: in 0.01 steps 0.25 seconds
Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc
9
±1.5% ● % I2/I1: 4–40% in ●
● Metering accuracy
temperature range: 32 ºF to
1% steps
●
(resistive)
Break 5 A at 120/240
9
● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles
●
122 ºF (0 ºC to 50 ºC)
Temperature range: ±5%
in 1 cycle steps
●
Vac
Continuous:
9
Under/Overvoltage Protection
for operation below 32 ºF
(0 ºC) and above 122 ºF ● Pickup range: 10–150 volts
● 5 A at 120/240 Vac
9
● 5 A at 30 Vdc
(50 ºC) in 1 volt steps
● Relay outputs: ● Time delay: 0–9999 cycles 9
2 Form C, NO and NC in 1 cycle steps
9
●
● 5 Form A, NO only
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
FP-5000 One-Line Drawing
9
9
9
Metering
9
V, I, F, PF,
W, VARS, VA
Energy
Demand
9 Min./Max.
% THD
Phasors
Data Logger
9 Waveform
SER
Fault Records
9
9
9
9
FP-5000
9 Load
9
FP-5000 Rear View and Terminal Designations
9
9 TB1 TB2 Factory Connection Only TB3 TB3
TB1 TB2
9 101 Power Supply
Input (+) 201 C In 1 J1-1 PowerNet
Power Supply 101 201 J1-2 PowerNet
102 Input (–) 202 C In 2
9 103 RLY Healthy
Com. 203 C In 3
102
103
202
203
J1-3 PowerNet Shield
104 RLY Healthy 204 C In 4 104 204 J2-1 Accessory Bus

9 105
N.O.
RLY Healthy 205 C In Source 1
105 205 J2-2 Accessory Bus
N.C. 206
106
J2-3 Accessory Bus
9 106 Alarm Com. 206 C In 5 107 207 Shield
107 Alarm N.O. 207 C In 6 108 208 J3-1 Zone Out
9 108 Alarm N.C. 208 C In 7
109
110
209
210
J3-2 Zone Com.
109 RLY 5 Com. 209 C In 8 J3-3 Zone Shield
9 110 RLY 5 N.O. 210 C In Source 2
111
112
Red 211
White 212 J3-4 Zone In
113 213
9 111 RLY 4 Com. 211 Not Used
114 214
J3-5 Zone Com.
112 RLY 4 N.O. 212 Not Used 115 215 J4-1
9 113 RLY 3 Com. 213 VA(+) Main 116 216
J4-2
117 217
114 RLY 3 N.O. 214 VB(+) Main
9 115 Trip 2 Com. 215 VC(+) Main
118 218 J4-3
J5-1 RS485(+)
9 116
117
Trip 2 N.O.
Trip 1 Com.
216 Vx1 Aux
217 Vx2 Aux
J5-2 RS485(-)
J5-3 RS485com
9
TB4
118 Trip 1 N.O. 218 Vg Main
J5-4 RS485shield
9
9
A1 B1 C1 X1 N.C. 1
9 A2 B2 C2 X2 N.C. 2
9
Protective Relays
9.3
FP-5000 Typical Connection Drawing Using Wye PTs
9
ac/dc C B A
(+)
Power Supply
9
48 – 125 Vac/dc or
(–) 100 – 240 Vac/dc
9
FP-5000 9
TB1 TB2
1 52A
9
101 Power Supply C In 1 201
Input
Power Supply
102 Input
(+)
C In 2 202
52B 9
(–)
103 RLY Healthy
Com. C In 3 203
52B TOC
9
104 RLY Healthy C In 4 204
2 Relay
Failure 105
N.O.
RLY Healthy C In Source 1 205
9
Alarm N.C.
106 Alarm Com. C In 5 206 9
Breaker C In 6 207
107 Alarm N.O.
Alarm
108 Alarm N.C. C In 7 208
9
109 RLY 5 Com. C In 8 209 9
Breaker
110 RLY 5 N.O. C In Source 2 210
3
Close
111 RLY 4 Com. Not Used 211
9
112 RLY 4 N.O. Not Used 212
5 9
113 RLY 3 Com. VA(+) Main 213
114 RLY 3 N.O. VB(+) Main 214
9
115 Trip 2 Com. VC(+) Main 215 9
116 Trip 2 N.O. VX1 Aux 216
117 Trip 1 Com. VX2 Aux 217

9
52A 52A
52
TC
118 Trip 1 N.O. Vg Main 218
9
9
Ground
9
X2 X1 A2 A1 B2 B1 C2 C1
9
9
4
9
Load 52
9
1 For maximum breaker diagnostics use both 52A and 52B contacts.
Some diagnostics are not available if only one of the two is used.
9
C B A
2 A relay failure alarm should provide immediate attention as circuit 9
is no longer protected. Relay failure output is normally energized.
3 FP-5000 can initiate a breaker close via the front panel interface
9
and/or remote activation through communication or discrete input.
9
4 Residual connection may be used in place of zero sequence CT.
9
5 Delta or open delta PT connection may be used in place of wye-ground connection.
9
9
Protective Relays
FP-5000 Front View and Drawout Case Side View

9
9
9 Operational
Feeder Protection Breaker Closed Reset
9
FP-5000 Breaker Open
9
9 Monitor View Setting Log Status/Control
9 Previous Enter
Phase Trip Ground Trip Other Trip
9 Alarm Pickup Auxiliary
9 Set Test
9 Close
Breaker
Open
9
9
9 Dimensions
9
FP-5000 Feeder Protection Relay
9 Shipping Weight
Height Width Depth Lbs (kg)
9 In Front of Panel
9 11.34 (288.0) 7.72 (196.1) 0.80 (20.3) 12.5 (5.7)

Behind Panel
9 6.70 (170.2) 5.30 (134.6) 6.90 (175.3) 12.5 (5.7)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
MP-3000
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
MP-3000 Motor Protection
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
Universal RTD Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283
9
9
9
9
MP-3000 Motor Protection 9
● Microprocessor-based, Eaton’s MP-3000 motor It can also be used to provide The MP-3000 motor relay is
9
multi-function motor
protection
protection relay is a
multifunctional
protection for a load jam or
loss of load condition. Please
generally used on a motor
starter or a breaker used for 9
Current only device— microprocessor-based refer to Page V3-T9-193. a motor load. The MP-3000
9
●
no need to add PTs protective relay for the motor relay provides the
protection of three-phase AC The MP-3000 motor relay intelligence to protect and
● Intel-I-Trip™ overload
protection based on motors. The MP-3000 motor provides start control logic
to protect the motor against
control the motor against 9
motor data relay may be applied to any abnormal operating
excessive starts or starting
● Event recording and
size motor at any voltage
level. It is most commonly the motor before it has had
conditions. It monitors the
currents from either a 5 A
9
operational logging used on large, medium sufficient time to cool down. or 1 A secondary of a CT
● Motor Start Profile™ voltage three-phase induction The MP-3000 motor relay circuit. Ground current may 9
● Optional Quick Release motors. It has also been may be applied to either be obtained from either a
Drawout Case widely used on important across the line starters or
reduced voltage starters. On
ground CT or from the 9
● Used on AMPGARD® low voltage (480 volt) residual connection of the
and medium voltage motor applications and
synchronous motors.
reduced voltage starters, the
MP-3000 relay can control the
phase CTs. It provides a
Form C contact output for
9
assemblies switch from reduced voltage
● “Help” menu provides The MP-3000 motor relay is to full voltage based on time
controlling the starter contacts
or breaker operation. 9
user operational assistance a current only device that and/or motor transition. The
monitors three-phase and MP-3000 can protect the 9
ground currents. It provides starter against failure to
motor overload, stall, short
circuit, phase unbalance,
transition to full voltage
through contact feedback and
9
single phasing and ground an incomplete sequence
fault motor protection. function. 9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9 ● Complete motor protection ● Event log provides motor The protection functions are The MP-3000 motor
and control in a single operating records for the listed below. protection was designed to
9 compact case reduces most recent 20 Trip or meet the industry standards
panel space requirements Alarm events with date
● I2t overload protection for protective relays. It is
9 and wiring costs and time stamping. This (49/51) recognized under UL 1053
● Microprocessor design information can improve ● Locked rotor (49S/51) Ground Fault Protection
9 with self diagnostics troubleshooting and
reduce downtime
● Ultimate trip current (51) Standard.
eliminates calibration ● Negative sequence phase ● UL recognized
9 and reduces installation,
commissioning and
● Log book records the most
recent 100 events such as
unbalance (46) (File No. E154862)
● Instantaneous ● UL 1053 recognized
9 ●
maintenance
Programmable stop
motor START/STOP and
set point changes to
overcurrent (50) ● UL 508 recognized
● Ground fault
provide a log of motor ● ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1
9
2–20% of PCT protection (50G)
● Intel-I-Trip overload operation with date and ● cUL
time stamping
● RTD trip and alarm with
protection develops CSA
9
●
URTD module (49/38)
customized curve from ● RTD diagnostics reduces
unnecessary tripping
● Underload trip (37)
manufacturer’s supplied
9 motor data caused by faulty RTD, RTD
wiring or communications
● Starts per time (66)
● Intel-I-Trip overload
● Jam or stall (51R)
9 protection provides ● Arm/Disarm feature
improves security for
● Auto or manual reset (86)
adaptive trip characteristics ● Fail-safe or non-fail-safe
9 based on motor
temperature when motor ●
critical motor applications
Motor Start profile verifies
trip modes
The metering functions are:
9 RTDs are connected
through an optional
protection and motor
starting coordination. This ● Motor currents:
URTD module feature can be used to
9 ● Meets UL 1053 ground develop protection settings
● Average current (Iave)
fault protection standards on old motors where data ● Individual phase and
9 that eliminates the need is not available ground current in
primary amperes
for a separate ground relay ● Optional communication
9 saving cost, space, wiring
and time
module and Eaton’s
software simplifies setting,
●
●
Percent of full load
Percent of phase
9 ● Voltage dip/loss ride
through capability reduces
configuration, monitoring,
commissioning and data ●
unbalance
RTD temperatures:
retrieval either locally or
9 unnecessary trips caused
by poor power quality remotely
● Individual winding
● Motor bearing
● Optional Quick Release
9 Motor currents,
●
Drawout Case construction

● Load
temperatures and
conditions are monitored simplifies relay removal ● Auxiliary temperatures
9 and displayed either locally and replacement ● Motor conditions:
or remotely
Percent of I2t thermal
9
●
bucket
● Time before start
9 ● Remaining starts
allowed
9 ● Oldest start time
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Product Selection
9
MP-3000
MP-3000
Catalog
9
Description Number
MP-3000 Drawout, 5 A with RS-232 MP3011
9
MP-3000 Drawout, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP3012
9
MP-3000 Drawout, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP3013
MP-3000 Drawout, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP3014 9
MP-3000 Drawout, 1 A with RS-232 MP3111
MP-3000 Drawout, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP3112 9
MP-3000 Drawout, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232
MP-3000 Drawout, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232
MP3113
MP3114
9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010 9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010-INCOM
MP-3000 Fixed Case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010MODBUS 9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP3010DEVICEN
MP-3000 Fixed Case, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110
9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110-INCOM
9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110MODBUS
MP-3000 Fixed Case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP3110DEVICEN 9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPI
MP-3000 Fixed Case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPM 9
9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP3010VPD
MP-3000 Fixed Case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP3110VPI
MP-3000 Fixed Case, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP3110VPM
9
MP-3000 Fixed Case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP3110VPD
9
Options and Accessories 9
Additional Related Products
by Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer®
The Universal RTD module
(URTD) is required when the
The MP-3000 motor
protection is designed to 9
Series motor is equipped with RTDs operate from 120 Vac or
The MP-3000 is available in that you wish to monitor and 240 Vac auxiliary control 9
either a fixed mount or Quick use for protection. The URTD power. The MP-3000 motor
Release Drawout Case. Both can be mounted near the relay can be used with DC 9
mountings use the same motor to reduce RTD wiring control power with the
panel cutout. Page V3-T9-196
shows cutout dimensions.
and costs. Page V3-T9-195
shows MP-3000 and URTD
addition of the IQDCPS.
The IQDCPS is an inverter
9
Page V3-T9-193 shows a
typical fixed mountwiring
inter-connection wiring.
Please refer to the URTD
from DC to AC.
9
diagram for a medium voltage information described
motor starter application. elsewhere in this catalog. 9
Page V3-T9-194 shows the
fixed mount terminal 9
designation. Page V3-T9-196
shows the drawout case
panel mounting, and shows
9
the drawout case terminal
designation. 9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Control Power Analog Output Alarm Setting Range IPONI Communications
9 ● Nominal rating: ● Rating: ± 4–20 mA ● Ground fault: Off, 2–55% ● Type: two-wire, FSK
● 120 Vac or 240 Vac programmable CT ratio ● Baud rate: 1200 or
9 ● +10%, –25% ● Maximum load: 1K ohm ● Overload I2t: Off, 9600 baud
Operating range: ● Accuracy: 1% 60–99% I2t ● Protocol: INCOM
9
●
● 120 Vac: 90 132 Vac

● JAM: Off, 100–1200% FLA ● Functions:
Motor Overload Protection (I2t) ● Underload: Off, ● Read/write set points
9 240 Vac:180 264 Vac
●
● Full load amperes: 1–90% FLA
● Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz ● Read metered values
10–3000 A ● Phase unbalance: Off,
9 Read trip/alarms
●
● Power use: ● Locked rotor current: 4–40% Ineg/Ipos
● 20 VA maximum 300–1200% FLA
● Read events/history
● Run delay timers:
9 ● URTD: 6 VA maximum ● Locked rotor time: 0–240 seconds
● View starting profile
● IPONI: 1 VA maximum 1–120 seconds
MPONI Communications
9 ● Ride-through time: ● Ultimate trip current:
85–150% FLA
Start Control Functions
● Type: 5-wire, 485
30 cycles from nominal Vac ● Starts per time: 1–10 starts
9 Baud rate: 1200 or
●
● Phase CT ratio: ● Time for starts per time:
Current Inputs 10–4000 (In) 9600 baud
Off, 1–240 minutes
Protocol: Modbus RTU
9
●
● Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A ● Ground CT ratio: ● Time between starts: Off,
● CT rating: 10–4000 (In) 1–240 minutes
● Functions:
9 Read/write set points

●
● 2 x In continuous ● Timing accuracy: ± 2.5% or ● Number of cold starts:
● 50 x In for 1 second ±30 ms for I > 1.1x U.T.C 1–5 starts ● Read metered values
9 ● Burdens:
Trip Setting Range
● Motor transition current:
10–300% FLA
●
●
Read trip/alarms
Read events/history
● < 0.25 VA at 5 A ● Ground fault (GF): Off,
9 ● < 0.05 VA at 1 A 2–55% CT ratio
● Time for transition:
0–1200 seconds
● View starting profile
● GF start time delay:
9 Metering Accuracy
2–60 cycles
● Inc. sequence timer: Off,
1–240 seconds
DPONI Communications
● Type: J-wire
● Phase current: ±1% of In ● GF run time delay:
9 ●
(5–100%)
Ground current: ±1.5% of In
0–60 cycles
● Long acceleration timer:
Off, 1–1200 seconds
● Baud rate: 500 k, 250 k,
125 k
● Timer accuracy: ± 20 ms
9 (0–55%) Anti-Backspin timer: Off, Protocol: DeviceNet
● ●
● Instantaneous O.C.: Off, 1–3600 minutes ● Functions:
Discrete Inputs 300–1600% FLA
9 ● Number of inputs: two ● IOC start time delay: RTD Inputs (Requires
● Read metered values
2–60 cycles URTD module) ● Read trip/alarms
programmable
9 ● Ratings: ● Timer accuracy: ±20 ms ● Sensor types:
Logging
1.2 VA at 120 Vac ● JAM trip: Off, ● 10 ohm copper
9
●
● Log book: 100 events
● Maximum off = 36 Vac 100–1200% FLA ● 100 ohm nickel ● Log event: 20 trips and
● Underload trip: Off, ● 120 ohm nickel
9 Minimum on = 86 Vac alarms
●
1–90% FLA ● 100 ohm platinum ● Log start: last four starts
Output Contacts ● Phase unbalance trip: Off,
9 ● Number of outputs: four 4–40% Ineg/Ipos URTD Module Communications
● Start profile: last four starts
(communication only)
Form C, programmable ● Start delay timers: ● Interface:
9 History records: motor,
●
● Momentary: ● 0–120 seconds ● Electrical (three-wire) trips, alarms and total
● Make 30 A AC/DC for (underload and phase ● Fiber optic (preferred) records
9 0.25 seconds unbalance)
● Fiber optic cable: Type
● Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc ● 0–1200 seconds (jam) Environmental Conditions
9 (resistive) ● Run delay timers: 0–240
HBFR-ERS or EUS
● Break 5 A at 120 240 Vac seconds Clock –4 ºF to 140 ºF
9 ● Continuous: ● Timer accuracy: ±0.5% ● Accuracy: ±1 minute/
(–20 ºC to +60 ºC)
● 5 A at 120/240 Vac +100 ms month at 77 ºF (25 °C) ● Storage temperature:
9 ● 5 A at 30 Vdc
–49 ºF to +185 ºF
(–45 °C to +85 °C)
9 ● Humidity: 0–95%
noncondensing
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Wiring Diagrams
9
MP-3000 Motor Relay Protection Functions
9
MP-3000
Protection Functions
49/51 Overload I2T
9
49S/51 Locked Rotor
51R Jam/Stall
37 Loss of Load/
9
9
Underload
46 Phase Loss/
Unbalance
9
50 Phase Inst. OC
URT 50G Ground Inst. OC
66 Starts per time
Motor 11 RTDs
period
9
9
MP-3000 Fixed Mount Typical

9
Main CTs 9
Fuse M GFCT
L3 L3 C T3
9
9
L2 L2 B M T2 To Motor or
Load Device
Under Control
L1 L1 A M T1 9
9
X1 X2
Ground Gnd.
Primary
9
Fuses
Non-Current
9
CPT
Carrying Ground
Secondary 5
9
Fuses Ground
H H H G
1
A
H
1
B
H
1
C
H
1
MP-3000
4
9
ac Supply 7 2
A
2
B
2
C
G
2
Back View
to MP-3000 with Jumper
Trip Contacts Connection
START
STOP Additional
Control
M
11 12
9
M
Alarm
9
Alarm Contacts
18 19
9
Auxiliary
Auxiliary Trip Contacts
Trip
9
9
15 16
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
MP-3000 Terminal Identification

9
CT Connections
9
9
9 H
1
H
1
H
1
G
1
A B C
9 H
2
H
2
H
2 G
URTD Optical Fiber
A B C 2
9 Communications
(Preferred Method)
or
9 URTD Wired
Communication
9 MP-3000
23 Shield
9 22 Common
21 Data
9 20 Strobe
9 +4/20 mA Output 25
19 Alarm N/O
9 -4/20 mA Output 24
18 Alarm Com.
17 Alarm N/C
9
Aux. 2 N/C 1
16 Aux. 1 N/O
Aux. 2 Com. 2
9 Aux. 2 N/O 3
15 Aux. 1 Com.
14 Aux. 1 N/C
9 120 V or 240 V 4
13 Trip N/O
Earth Ground 5
9 iscrete Source 6
12 Trip Com.
11 Trip N/C
9 Neutral 7
Discrete In 1 8
9 Discrete Com. 9
9 Discrete In 2 10
9
9
9
Note
1 Caution: Do not connect terminals 6 and 9 together.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
MP-3000 Control and URTD Wiring
9
Universal
Control Power
Transformer
9
RTD Module Common
Data 120 Vac
H
1
A
H
2
H
1
B
H
2
H
1
C
H
2
G
1
G
9
AC Strobe A B C 2
9
120 Vac J3
ACN
MP-3000
23
22
Shield
Common 9
21 Data
25
20
19
Strobe
9
24 18
1
2
17
16 9
3 15
Non-current
4
5
14
13 9
6 12
Carrying Gnd.
7
8
11
9
9
10 9
Optical Fiber for URTD Customer Remote
Communications
to MP-3000
Input Contacts
or Pushbuttons
9
9
(Preferred Method)
9
Trip Curve Chart Motor Starting Profile Time/Current Chart 9
The MP-3000 motor relay When communications
records information on the
most recent four starts. It
are desired, an optional
communication module or
9
records currents, percent of
I2t used, percent unbalance,
PONI (Product Operated
Network Interface) is 9
RTD temperatures and time required. The MP-3000 is
to transition and run. In compatible with an INCOM 9
addition, a motor start profile (IPONI), Modbus RTU
can be downloaded and (MPONI) or Ethernet (EPONI). 9
displayed using Eaton’s Future communication
PowerPort or PowerNet
Software. The starting profile
modules are planned to
interface with other systems
9
shows the motor starting using other protocols. Please
current plotted against the consult factory for availability 9
relay protection curve. This of other communication
provides a quick view of the options. Page V3-T9-198 9
coordination between the shows typical mounting of
protection and actual motor
start current.
MP-3000 with optional PONI
and with URTD module and
9
PONI.
9
When the MP-3000 is
supplied in the optional 9
drawout case, then the
INCOM (IPONI) is the only
communication option
9
available. The communication
option must be selected at 9
the time of order.
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9 Panel Cutout Diagram
9 5.38
(136.7)
2.69
9 (68.3)
9 8.90
(226.1)
9 9.38
(238.3)
9 6.68
(169.7)
9 4.69
4.45
9 (113.0) (119.1)
.06
(1.5) RAD
9 2.23
(56.7)
4 Places
9
2.53
.218
9 (64.3)
5.06 (5.5)
DIA 10 Places
(128.5)
9
MP-3000 Drawout Panel Mounting
9
6.89
9 (175.0)
5.33
(135.4)
9
9
S/N000000
A980000
66D2029G01 S/N123321 BUILT BY
REV. 1 A980810 F.C.
66D2031G01 TESTED BY
BUILT BY REV. 1
F.C. G.K.
TESTED BY
G.K.
9
9
9 +4/20 Output
-4/20 Output
11
13
12
14
Unused
Discrete Source
Unused 15 16
9
Discrete In 1
17 18
VAC 120V or Discrete In 2
Auto 240V
11 Select Neut 19 20
Discrete Com
13
9.51
(241.6)
9
21 22
H1A H2A
49 23 24
H1B H2B
25 26
47 H1C H2C
27 28
G1 G2
45 Unused
29 30
Unused
9
66C2020H01
17
60
9
14
19
16
9
20
18
9
9 Outer Flange
Outer Chassis Inner Chassis
9 Mounting Panel
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Rear View of MP-3000 Drawout Outer Case
5.23 9
(132.8)
9
9
11 12 URTD Strobe 41 42
+4/20 Output
13 14
Unused URTD Data
9
-4/20 Output Discrete Source URTD Common 43 44 URTD Shield
Unused 15 16 Discrete In 1 45 46 9
9
17 18 47 48
VAC 120Vor Discrete In 2 11 12 41 42 Aux 2 Aux 1
Auto 240V 13 14 43 44
Select Neut 19 20 Discrete Com 49 50
9
15 16 45 46
17 18 47 48
19 20 49 50
21 22 51 52
9
H1A H2A
9
21 22 51 52
23 24 53 54
H1B H2B 23 24 53 54 Alarm Trip
25 26 55 56
9
25 26 55 56
H1C H2C
27 28 57 58
27 28 57 58
G1 G2 29 30 59 60 Shield
Unused 29 30 Unused
PONI In
59 60 Earth Gnd
9
66C2020H01 66C2020H02
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
MP-3000 PONI and URTD Mounting
9 4.25 6.26
(108.0) (159.0)
9 with PONI with PONI and RTD Module
3.01 5.07
9 (76.5)
without PONI
(128.8)
9
9
9
9
9
®
®
9
STYLE NUMBER 2D78559
UNIVERSAL RTD MODULE

9 +4/20 +4/20
25
25
OUTPUT OUTPUT
9 -4/20 -4/20
24
24
1A49102H19
OUTPUT OUTPUT
9
ac
1
120 J3
AUX 2
AUX 2
Vac
ACN
2
35
9
34
3
AUX1
PONI 33
VAC AUTO SELECT
VAC AUTO SELECT
120 V or 120 V or 32
Mounting
4
240 V 240 V GND
9
31
EARTH Bracket EARTH 30
5
GROUND GROUND LB2

29
DISCRETE DISCRETE 28
6
9
SOURCE SOURCE
27
LB1
26
7
NEUT NEUT
25
9
DISCRETE DISCRETE
8
IN 1 IN 1 24
MB2
DISCRETE DISCRETE 23
9
COMMON COMMON 22
9 DISCRETE DISCRETE 21
10
10
MB1
IN 2 IN 2 20
RTD Module
9 Mounting
Bracket
9
9 FP-3000 Feeder Protection Relay
Shipping Weight
9 Height Width Depth Lbs (kg)
10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 3.70 (94.0) 7.0 (3.2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
MP-4000
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
Product Description
● Microprocessor-based,
Eaton’s MP-4000 motor It can also be used to provide The MP-4000 motor relay is
9
multi-function motor
protection
multifunctional
protection for a load jam or loss
of load condition.
generally used on a motor
starter or a breaker used for 9
microprocessor-based a motor load. The MP-4000
9
● Intel-I-Trip overload The MP-4000 motor relay
protection based on protective relay for the motor relay provides the
protection of three-phase ac provides start control logic intelligence to protect and
motor data
● Event recording and motors. The MP-4000 motor to protect the motor against
excessive starts or starting
control the motor against 9
operational logging relay may be applied to any abnormal operating conditions.
the motor before it has had
● Motor Start Profile
size motor at any voltage level.
It is most commonly used on
It monitors the currents from
either a 5 A or 1 A secondary of
9
sufficient time to cool down.
● Optional Quick Release large, medium voltage three- a CT circuit. Ground current
Drawout Case phase induction motors. It has
The MP-4000 motor relay may
be applied to either across the may be obtained from either a 9
● Used on AMPGARD also been widely used on line starters or reduced voltage ground CT or from the residual
and medium voltage important low voltage (480 starters. On reduced voltage connection of the phase CTs. 9
assemblies volt) motor applications and starters, the MP-4000 relay can It provides a form C contact
● “Help” menu provides synchronous motors. control the switch from output for controlling the
starter contacts or breaker
9
user operational assistance The MP-4000 motor relay reduced voltage to full voltage
monitors three-phase and based on time and/or motor
transition. The MP-4000 can
operation.
9
ground currents, and three-
phase voltages. It provides protect the starter against
failure to transition to full 9
motor overload, stall, short
voltage through contact
circuit, phase unbalance, single
phasing over/undervoltage, feedback and an incomplete 9
underpower, power factor and sequence function.
ground fault motor protection. 9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9 ● Complete motor protection ● RTD diagnostics reduces Standards and Certifications
and control in a single unnecessary tripping
9 compact case reduces caused by faulty RTD, RTD
The metering functions are: The MP-4000 motor
protection was designed to
panel space requirements wiring or communications ● Metering: meet the industry standards
9 and wiring costs ● Arm/Disarm feature ● Average current for protective relays. It is
● Microprocessor design improves security for ● Amperes: magnitude recognized under UL 1053
9 with self diagnostics critical motor applications and angle in primary Ground Fault Protection
eliminates calibration ● Motor Start profile verifies values Standard.
9 and reduces installation,
commissioning and
protection and motor ● Amperes: positive, ● UL recognized (File No.
starting coordination. This negative and zero E154862)
9 ●
maintenance
Programmable stop
feature can be used to
develop protection settings
sequence ● UL 1053 recognized
● Average voltage (V ave)
UL 508 recognized
9
2–20% of PCT on old motors where data ●
is not available
● Voltage: magnitude and
● Intel-I-Trip overload angle
● ANSI C37.90, C37.90.1
protection develops Optional communication
9
●
● Voltage: positive,
● cUL
customized curve from module and Eaton’s ● CSA
manufacturer’s supplied software simplifies setting, negative and zero
9 motor data configuration, monitoring,
●
sequence
% of full load
● Intel-I-Trip overload commissioning and data
9 protection provides retrieval either locally or
remotely
● % current unbalance
adaptive trip characteristics ● % voltage unbalance
9 based on motor
temperature when motor
● Optional Quick Release
Drawout Case construction
● Power, vars and VA
● Power factor
9 RTDs are connected
through an optional
simplifies relay removal
and replacement
● Frequency
URTD module ● Energy metering with
9 ● Meets UL 1053 ground
The protection functions are
listed below:
time and date stamps
fault protection standards RTD temperatures:
9
●
that eliminates the need ● I2t overload ● Individual winding

for a separate ground relay protection (49/51)
9 Motor bearing
●
saving cost, space, wiring ● Locked rotor (49S/51)
and time ● Load
● Ultimate trip current (51)
9 ● Voltage dip/loss ride
through capability reduces
● Negative sequence phase
● Auxiliary temperatures
unbalance (46) ● Motor conditions:
9 unnecessary trips caused
by poor power quality
● Instantaneous ● Percent of I2t thermal
overcurrent (50) bucket
9 Motor currents,
●
temperatures and
● Ground fault ● Time before start
conditions are monitored protection (50G) ● Remaining starts
9 and displayed either locally ● Undervoltage (27) allowed
or remotely ● Overvoltage (59) ● Oldest start time
9 ● Event log provides motor ● Under power (32)
operating records for the ● Negative sequence voltage
9 most recent 20 Trip or
Alarm events with date
unbalance (47)
● Power factor (55)
9 and time stamping. This
information can improve ● RTD trip and alarm with
troubleshooting and URTD module (49/38)
9 reduce downtime ● Underload trip (37)
● Log book records the most ● Starts per time (66)
9 recent 100 events such as ● Jam or stall (51R)
motor START/STOP and Auto or manual reset (86)
9
●
set point changes to
provide a log of motor
● Fail-safe or non-fail-safe
trip modes
9 operation with date and
time stamping
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Cross-Reference
Westinghouse®/Cutler-Hammer models. The most notable 3000 value packs that include It also provides equivalent
9
Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer MP-
3000 motor relay supersedes
enhancements are UL 1053
ground fault protection
an MP-3000, PONI, URTD
module and fiber optic cable
start control functions. Both
the 369 and 469 offer voltage 9
the Cutler-Hammer (formerly certified, voltage loss ride at competitive prices. protection and metering
Westinghouse) IQ 1000 II through capability, data
GE Multilin has both lower
functions. An Eaton meter 9
motor relay and can replace logging, communications and/or other manufacturers’
the earlier IQ 1000 motor features and the addition of
a clock for date and time
and higher end products.
The MP-3000 can be used in
protective relays may be
needed to satisfy the
9
relay version sold under the place of their 239 motor relay.
Westinghouse name. The
MP-3000 motor relay fits in
stamping of events.
The MP-3000 offers more
customer’s motor protection
requirements. The 469 adds
9
GE Multilin™ capabilities than the 239 for differential protection. This
the same cut out and
provides the protection GE Multilin has several
a slightly higher price. function must be supplied 9
functions of these older product offerings for motor GE Multilin 369 and 469 by others in addition to the
models. The MP-3000 protection. The 269 PLUS is are upgraded end products. MP-3000 motor relay. 9
relay provides numerous the equivalent model to the The MP-3000 relay offers
enhancements and new MP-3000 with optional URTD equivalent overload and 9
features over the superseded module. Eaton offers MP- current protection functions.
Cross-Reference
9
New Eaton’s Series Old Cutler-Hammer (Westinghouse) GE Multilin
9
MP-3000 (URTD module) 1 IQ 1000 II, IQ 1000 269, 269+, 239, base 369
MP-4000 (URTD module) 1 — 369 with voltage option 9
MP-4000 + MP-3000 — 469
Note
9
9
1 If RTD monitoring required.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Product Selection
9
9 MP-4000 MP-4000 Ordering Information
9 MP-4000 drawout, 5 A with RS-232 MP4011

MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP4012
9 MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP4013
MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP4014
9 MP-4000 drawout, 1 A with RS-232 MP4111
9 MP-4000 drawout, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP4112

MP-4000 drawout, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP4113
9 MP-4000 drawout, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP4114

MP-4000 fixed case, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010
9 MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010INCOM
9
MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010MODBUS
MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232 MP4010DEVICEN
9 MP-4000 fixed case, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110

MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110INCOM
9 MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110MODBUS
MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232 MP4110DEVICEN
9 MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 5 A with RS-232, URTD MP4010VPI
9 MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 5 A with RS-232, URTD

MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 5 A with RS-232, URTD
MP4010VPM
MP4010VPD
9 MP-4000 fixed case, INCOM, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP4110VPI

MP-4000 fixed case, Modbus, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP4110VPM
9 MP-4000 fixed case, DeviceNet, 1 A with RS-232, URTD MP4110VPD
9
Options and Accessories
9
Additional Related Products The Universal RTD module The MP-4000 motor protection
9 by Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer Series
The MP-4000 is available in
(URTD) is required when the
motor is equipped with RTDs
is design-ed to operate from
120 Vac or 240 Vac auxiliary
9 either a fixed mount or Quick
Release Drawout Case. Both
that you wish to monitor and
use for protection. The URTD
control power. The MP-4000
motor relay can be used with
mountings use the same can be mounted near the dc control power with the
9 panel cutout. motor to reduce RTD wiring addition of the IQDCPS. The
and costs. IQDCPS is an inverter from
9 DC to AC.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Control Power Analog Output ● Under/overfrequency: Clock
● Nominal rating: ● Rating: ± 4–20 mA Off, 15 to 60 Hz ● Accuracy: ±1 minute/ 9
● 120 Vac or 240 Vac programmable ● Under/overfrequency time month at 77 ºF (25 °C)
● +10%, –25% ● Maximum load: 1K ohm delay: 0 to 60 sec 9
● Power protection: Off, PONI Communications
Operating range: ● Accuracy: 1%
9
●
0.06 to .90 + FLA VT ● Type: two-wire, FSK
● 120 Vac: 90 132 Vac
Motor Overload Protection (I2t) ● Power time delay: 0 to ● Baud rate: 1200 or
240 Vac:180 264 Vac
9
●
● Full load amperes: 1200 sec 9600 baud
● Frequency: 50 or 60 Hz 10–3000 ● Power factor: Off, 0.05 lag ● Protocol: INCOM
● Power use:
● 20 VA maximum
● Locked rotor current: to 0.99 lead ● Functions: 9
300–1200% FLA ● Power factor time delay: ● Read/write set points
● URTD: 6 VA maximum ● Locked rotor time:
1–120 seconds
0 to 60 s ● Read metered values 9
● IPONI: 1 VA maximum ● Read trip/alarms
9
● Ultimate trip current: Alarm Setting Range
● Ride-through time: ● Read events/history
30 cycles from nominal Vac 85–150% FLA ● Ground fault: Off,
2–55% CT ratio ● View starting profile
Current Inputs
● Phase CT ratio:
10–4000 (In) ● Overload I2t: Off, 9
60–99% I2t MPONI Communications
Nominal (In): 1 A or 5 A
9
● ● Ground CT ratio: ● Type: five-wire, 485
● CT rating: 10–4000 (In) ● JAM: Off, 100–1200% FLA
● Baud rate: 1200 or
Underload: Off,
9
●
● 2 x In continuous ● Timing accuracy: ± 2.5% or 9600 baud
±30 ms for I > 1.1x U.T.C. 1–90% FLA
● 50 x In for 1 second ● Protocol: Modbus RTU
Phase unbalance: Off,
9
●
● Burdens: Trip Setting Range 4–40% Ineg/Ipos ● Functions:

● < 0.25 VA at 5 A ● Ground fault (GF): Off, ● Read metered values
Run delay timers:
9
●
● < 0.05 VA at 1 A 2–55% CT ratio 0–240 seconds ● Read trip/alarms

● GF start time delay:
Voltage Inputs 2–60 cycles Start Control Functions DPONI Communications 9
● Nominal: 120 Vac ● GF run time delay: ● Starts per time: 1–10 starts ● Type: J-wire
● Operating range: 69 to 0–60 cycles ● Time for starts per time: ● Baud rate: 500 k, 9
150 Vac ● Timer accuracy: ± 20 ms Off, 1–240 minutes 250 k, 125 k
● Burden: 2 VA ● Instantaneous O.C.: Off, ● Time between starts: ● Protocol: DeviceNet 9
300–1600% FLA Off, 1–240 minutes ● Functions:
Metering Accuracy ● IOC start time delay: ● Number of cold starts: ● Read metered values 9
● Phase current: ±1% of In 2–60 cycles 1–5 starts ● Read trip/alarms
(5–100%) ● Timer accuracy: ±20 ms ● Motor transition current: 9
● Ground current: ±1.5% of In ● JAM trip: Off, 100– 10–300% FLA Logging
(0–55%) 1200% FLA ● Time for transition: ● Log book: 100 events 9
● Underload trip: Off, 0–1200 seconds ● Log event: 20 trips
Discrete Inputs
● Number of inputs: two
1–90% FLA ● Inc. sequence timer: and alarms 9
● Current unbalance trip: Off, 1–240 seconds ● Log start: last four starts
programmable
● Ratings:
Off, 4–40% Ineg/Ipos ● Long acceleration timer: ● Start profile: last four starts 9
● Start delay timers: Off, 1–1200 seconds (communication only)
1.2 VA at 120 Vac
9
●
● 0–120 seconds ● Anti-Backspin timer: ● History records: motor,
● Maximum off = 36 Vac Off, 1–3600 minutes trips, alarms and total
(underload and phase
● Minimum on = 86 Vac unbalance)
RTD Inputs (Requires
records 9
● 0–1200 seconds (jam) URTD module)
Output Contacts
● Number of outputs: four
● Run delay timers: ● Sensor types:
Environmental Conditions
9
0–240 seconds
Form C, programmable. 10 ohm copper –4 ºF to +140 ºF
9
●
● Timer accuracy: ±0.5%
● Momentary: ● 100 ohm nickel (–20 °C to +60 °C)
+100 ms
Make 30 A AC/DC for Storage temperature:
9
● ●
● Voltage unbalance: Off,
● 120 ohm nickel
0.25 seconds ● 100 ohm platinum –49 ºF to +185 ºF
1 to 100 V
Break 0.25 A at 250 Vdc (–45 °C to +85 °C)
9
●
● % V2/V1: 4% + 40%
(Resistive) URTD Module Communications ● Humidity: 0–95%
● Voltage unbalance time noncondensing
● Break 5 A at 120 240 Vac ● Interface:
● Continuous:
delay: 0 to 1200 s
● Electrical (three-wire) 9
● Under/overvoltage time
9
● 5 A at 120/240 Vac delay: Off, 10 to 150 V ● Fiber optic (preferred)
● 5 A at 30 Vdc ● Under/overvoltage time ● Fiber optic cable: Type
9
delay: 0 to 1200 s HBFR-ERS or EUS
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9 MP-4000 Feeder Protection Relay
9 Height Width Depth

Shipping Weight
Lbs (kg)
9 10.25 (260.4) 6.72 (170.7) 3.70 (94.0) 7.0 (3.2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
EMR-3000 Motor Protection Relay 9
Product Description
Eaton’s EMR-3000 motor The zero sequence ground CT using Modbus-RTU. An It can be powered from 19
9
multifunctional
provides greater ground fault
sensitivity than the residual
optional Ethernet port and
protocols are available.
Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to
250 Vac auxiliary power. 9
microprocessor- based connection. The unit is
protective relay for the capable of 60 Hz or 50 Hz The EMR-3000 motor
protection relay has mass
Application Description 9
protection of any size motor operation. Eaton’s EMR-3000 motor
at all voltage levels. It is most
The maintenance mode
a real-time clock with 1 ms
protection relay has been
designed for maximum motor
9
commonly applied on
password protected soft key, time resolution. The relay will
medium voltage or larger
motors. The EMR-3000 relay can be used for arc flash log 300 sequence of event
operation and protection. It
permits running the motor 9
is a current only device that mitigation to change to an records, 20 detailed trip logs, close to its design limits
provides complete and alternate settings group, set minimum/maximum values, while protecting it against 9
reliable motor protection, to have instantaneous load profiles, the 5 latest start excessive heating and
monitoring, and starting elements only. The multiple
setting groups can also be
profiles, motor trending,
breaker wear information and
damaging overload 9
control functions. conditions. The EMR-3000
The EMR-3000 motor
or a digital input. Flash
oscillography data. field-proven protection
algorithms were developed
9
protection relay has memory is used for the The EMR-3000 motor
removable terminal blocks, programming and all settings protection relay has four
discrete inputs and 1 fiber
based on motor designs and
operating parameters for 9
and it has Modbus-RTU are stored in nonvolatile optimum operation and
communications as standard; memory. optic input, 1 Form C, and 2
NO programmable contacts, protection while minimizing 9
and an optional Ethernet nuisance tripping. The EMR-
An integral keypad and 1 Form C healthy contact. It
port for Modbus-TCP
communications. The EMR- display is provided for direct also has an optional 4–20 mA 3000 motor protection relay 9
user programming and analog output or zone utilizes a patented protection
3000 motor protection relay
has three-phase and one retrieval of data without the interlocking card. The relay algorithm and measurement
technique based on proven
9
ground current inputs. It can need of a computer. 14 provides maximum user
be used with either a 5 A or 1 programmable LEDs provide
quick indication of relay
flexibility to configure the I/O.
All inputs and outputs (except
positive and negative
(unbalance) sequence current 9
A CTs. The ground protection sampling and true RMS
can be used with either a zero
sequence ground CT or from
status. the healthy output) are user-
programmable. The unit also calculations. 9
A front port is provided for counts with a test mode to
the residual connection of the
phase CTs.
direct computer connection.
An RS-485 communication
force outputs and simulate 9
currents, to facilitate the
port on the back is standard
for local area networking
commissioning of the unit. 9
Protective Relays

9
Protection Features Metering Features Communication Features Trip Log
9 ● Thermal protection (49/51) ● Amperes: Positive, ● Local HMI The EMR-3000 protection
● Locked rotor protection negative and zero ● Password protected relay will store a maximum of
9 (49S/51) sequence ● Addressable 20 trip records in a FIFO trip
● Phase overcurrent ● Ampere demand log. Each trip record will be
IRIG-B
9
●
elements: ● % THD I date and time stamped to a

● Local communication port. 1 ms resolution. The trip log
● Two instantaneous ● Magnitude THD I
9 RS-232 record will include
●
elements with timers ● Minimum/maximum information on the type of
(50P[1], 50P[2] and
● Remote communication
recording fault, protection elements
9 50P[3]) ● Temperature with remote
port:
● RS-485
that operated, fault location
● Three inverse time URTD module and currents and voltages at
9 overcurrent elements
(51P[1], 51P[2] and ●
● Ethernet port
Protocols:
the time of the fault.
Monitoring Features
9 ●
51P[3])
11 standard curves
● Trip coil monitor ● Modbus-RTU
● Breaker wear primary and ● Modbus-TCP (optional)
9 ● Instantaneous or time
delay reset
secondary (accumulated
● IEC 61850 (optional)
● Configuration software
9 Ground overcurrent
● ● Oscillography ● PowerPort-E
elements: (7200 cycles total)
9 Two instantaneous
● ● Trip Cause displays fault
measured elements recorder data on HMI after Monitoring and Metering
with timers (50X[1] and
9
fault event
50X[2]) ● Fault data logs Sequence of Events Records
● Two instantaneous (up to 20 events)
9 calculated elements ● Sequence of events report
The EMR-3000 protection
relay records a maximum of
with timers (50R[1] and (up to 300 events) 300 events associated with
9 50R[2]) ● Trending (load profile the relay. An event is
● Two inverse time over time) classified as a change of state
9 overcurrent measured
elements (51X[1] and
● Motor history as detected by the relay.
These include relay pickups,
Records the last 5 motor
9
●
51X[2]) dropouts, trips, contact
Two inverse time start profiles
●
closure, alarms, setting
● Motor start trending
9 overcurrent calculated
elements (51R[1] and ● CT supervision
changes and self-diagnostic
failures. Each event is date
51R[2]) and time stamped to a 1 ms
9 Clock (1 ms time stamping)
●
● 11 standard curves resolution. The events are

Instantaneous or time Control Functions stored in a FIFO in
9
●
delay reset ● Transition for reduced chronological order.

Jam or Stall protection voltage starts
9
●
(50J[1], 50J[2]) ● Incomplete sequence

● Phase unbalance negative delay
9 sequence overcurrent ● Permits numbers of cold
(46[1], 46[2]) starts
9 ● Underload protection ● Limits numbers of starts
(37[1], 37[2], 37[3]) per hour
9 ● Temperature protection ● Anti-backspin time delay
with optional URTD (49/38) ● Mechanical load shedding
9 ● Stars per hour (66) ● Zero speed switch for long
● Lockout protection (86) acceleration motors
9 ● Breaker failure (50BF) ● Motor stop inputs
● Zone interlocking for bus ● Remote trip input
9 protection (87B) ● Differential trip input
● Emergency override
9 ● Breaker/Contactor open-
close/stop-start
9 ● Remote open-close
(stop-start)
9 ● Programmable I/O
● Programmable LEDs
9 ● Multiple setting groups
Protective Relays
9.3
Waveform Capture (Quality Manager) Integral User Interface Load Profiling/Trending
The EMR-3000 relay provides The waveform capture is The front panel user interface The EMR-3000 relay 9
oscillographic recording initiated by up to 8 different has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD automatically records
capabilities. The relay will triggers (i.e., trip/alarm display with background selected quantities into non- 9
record all measured signals events) or manually via illumination for wide angle volatile memory every 5, 10,
along with the binary signals communications or the HMI. viewing in all light conditions. 15, 30 or 60 minutes, 9
of pickup, trip, internal logic, PowerPort-E setting software Seven programmable LEDs depending on the trending
and contact inputs. The EMR-
is used to retrieve the
records. Quality Manager is a
provide quick and easy visual
report setting.
9
Programmable I/O
9
cycles of data. The number of separate software program operation, alarm and trip
records is proportional to the downloaded with PowerPort- indication. Soft keys are The EMR-3000 motor
programmed size of each E used for analyzing the provided for operation mode protection relay provides
record; the maximum size per waveform and trending files selection, scrolling through heavy-duty, triprated, 2 9
record is 600 cycles. retrieved from the relay. data and settings. In addition, normally open and 1 Form C
contacts. One isolated inputs 9
can be used for monitoring
protected. the trip circuit. One Form C
9
Starting Profiles
The EMR-3000 records the
relay failure alarm function
and is operated in a normally 9
average current versus time energized (failsafe) mode.
for the last five starting There are 4 eight user- 9
cycles. This information is configurable discrete inputs
available via the that accept a wet contact and 9
communications port can operate through a wide
through PowerPort-E. range of power. Each input
and output is user-
9
Motor Statistics
9
For each motor start, the application flexibility.
EMR-300 stores a motor start
report and add this data to the 9
motor statistics buffer. With
the motor statistics you can 9
track motor start data for the
past eighteen 30-day periods.
For each 30-day interval, the
9
relay records the following
information: 9
● The date the interval began 9
● The total number of starts
in the interval 9
● The averages of the
following quantities:
9
● Motor Start Time
● Start % Rotor Thermal
Capacity Used
9
● Maximum Start Current 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Instantaneous Overcurrent Underload Protection Load Shedding
9 Protection The EMR-3000 motor The user-selectable The EMR-3000 motor
The EMR-3000 motor relay protection relay provides an underload function is used to protection relay provides a
9 features the exclusive Eaton instantaneous phase detect the loss of load on the mechanical load shedding
Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload overcurrent function to trip motor. Coupling failure is a feature that can be used to
9 protection system. Intel-I-Trip
develops custom overload
the motor for high fault
current levels and save the
common cause for loss of
load. Pickup, start, and run
control an upstream process.
The load-shedding function
curves simply from motor
9 nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip
fuses. This function can be
disabled and has an
timers and a second element
for alarm purposes are
closes a contact on an
overload condition to control
protects motors from adjustable time delay on provided. an upstream process from
9 potentially damaging overload starting to avoid nuisance adding more load until the
and abnormal operating tripping on inrush. Reduced Voltage Starting overload condition is gone.
9 conditions. The Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection
The EMR-3000 motor
Phase Unbalance Protection protection relay provides a Emergency Override
9 feature utilizes field proven
measurement techniques and
Motor supply circuits are
often fed through fuses and
transition and incomplete
sequence function for
The EMR-3000 motor
protection relay has a user-
a patented motor thermal
9 protection model. The EMR-
can be run with a single-
phase fuse blown, referred to
reduced voltage starting. The
user can select to transition
programmable feature that
will let the operator reset the
3000 motor relay’s unique as single phasing the motor. based on the current level start inhibitor timers and
9 measurement technique The EMR-3000 motor and/or on time. thermal overload bucket. This
samples the current protection relay measures the function is intended for use in
9 waveforms 36 times per
cycle, providing accurate
current unbalance and can be Antibackspin emergency conditions only,
used to alarm or trip the The stop function is and it may result in motor
9 measurements of the
motor before damage occurs.
Pickup, start and run timers,
programmable from 2–20%. damage or failure.
For certain applications, such
sequence currents. The
9 and a second element for as pumping a fluid up a pipe, Long Acceleration Motors
negative sequence current alarm purposes are provided. Large motors with a high
the motor may be driven
causes a greater heating backward for a period of time inertia may experience
9 effect on the rotor and has a Ground Fault Protection after it stops. The EMR-3000 starting currents that exceed
greater impact on the thermal A separate measuring circuit relay provides an antibackspin the locked rotor current and
9 model in the relay. Intel-I-Trip
utilizes these measurements
is used to measure ground timer to prevent starting the time. The EMR-3000 motor
current. A ground CT is motor while it is spinning in protection relay has logic and
in its motor model to safely
9 protect the motor against the
recommended for more
sensitive protection against
the reverse direction. The
timer begins counting from
provisions for a zero speed
switch input to differentiate
heating effects of these
9 currents.
winding insulation breakdown
to ground. The relay ground
the moment a stop is
declared by the relay.
between a stall and start
condition. If the motor is
circuit can be connected spinning, then the relay will
9 The motor thermal model is
analogous to a bucket that is residually from the three- Start Control Timers not trip on the normal locked
being filled and drained at the phase CTs. The ground fault Motors typically have limits to rotortime allowing the motor
9 same time. The fill rate is protection has pickup and the number of cold starts, to start.
dependent on the motor time delay set points or can starts per hour period, or time
9 currents and the drain is be disabled. between starts that are
permitted without damage.
Remote/Differential Trip
The digital inputs can be
based on motor design
9 principles. The size of the Jam Protection The EMR-3000 motor programmed to accept a
bucket is equivalent to the The user-selectable Jam protection relay incorporates contact input from a separate
thermal capacity associated function protects motors that these timers to prevent differential relay or other
9 with the mass of the motor. are running against a sudden starting the motor beyond its device to trip the motor. This
Intel-I-Trip integrates these mechanical jam or stall capabilities. provides local and remote
9 rates and will issue a trip condition. The common target information and utilizes
when the thermal capacity is application is on motors used the trip contacts of the EMR-
9 filled. on crushers, chippers, or
conveyors. It detects an
3000 motor protection relay.
It will also record and log the
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive
9 trip characteristics that adjust
increase of motor current to a
level above full load. Pickup,
motor information at the time
of the trip.
the trip times based on start, and run timers and a
9 measured motor temperature second element for alarm
when RTDs are used. purposes are provided.
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Breaker Failure or Stuck Maintenance Mode Design Standards
Contactor The Maintenance Mode can ● Generic Standard: 9
The EMR-3000 motor improve safety by providing a ● EN 61000-6-2
breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
simple and reliable method to ● EN 61000-6-3 9
Product Standard:
9
●
function that can be initiated lower incident energy levels
from either an internal or at energized panels. The ● IEC 60255-6
external trip signal. This is an Maintenance Mode allows EN 50178
9
●
independent element that the user to switch to more ● UL 508 (Industrial

can be used to operate a sensitive settings via a
lockout relay or trip an password protected soft key, ●
Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
9
upstream breaker. The timer communication or via a digital
(Industrial Control
must be longer than the
breaker operating time and
Input while maintenance
Equipment) 9
work is being performed at an
● ANSI C37.90
the protective function reset
times.
energized panel or device.
9
provide greater security for
Flexible Phase Rotation maintenance personnel and 9
The EMR-3000 motor helps reduce the possibility of
protection relay can be injury. 9
applied on either an A-B-C or
A-C-B phase rotation. A user
setting permits correct
9
operation and indication of
the actual system 9
configuration.
9
The catalog number
EMR-3000
9
the electrical characteristics (A)–Four digital inputs, four (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
and operation features output relays, 1 4–20 mA
(A)–Without conformal 9
included in the EMR-3000. analog output, URTD
coating
For example, if the catalog interface
9
number is EMR-3000-2A0BA1, (0)–5 A / 1 A phase and ground (1)–Projection panel mount
the following:
CTs, power supply range: 9
19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
9
Motor Relay Removable Terminals
9
EMR-3000-2A 0 B A 1
9
Hardware Option 1 Mounting Options 9
A = 4 DI, 4 outputs, removable terminals, 0 = Standard mount
1 4–20 mA analog output, URTD
interface, IRIG-B small display Communication Options Conformal Coating
1 = Projection panel mount
9
B = 4 DI, 4 outputs, removable terminals, B = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 Options
zone interlocking, URTD interface,
IRIG-B, small display
C = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST
A = None
B = Conformal coated
9
circuit boards
9
9
Hardware Option 2 H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, ground current 5 A / 1 A, I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac over Ethernet RJ-45
1 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, sensitive ground current
K = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic
Ethernet
9
40–250 Vac L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Accessories
9
9 Standard Accessories EMR-3000
9 Description
Catalog
Number
9 UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 48–240 Vac/48–250 Vdc

UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 24–48 Vdc
URTDII-01 1
URTDII-02 1
9 E-SERIES 3000 IQ adapter kit projection mounted 2 ER-IQRETROKIT
Notes
9 1 See URTD section for fiber optic cables required to communicate to the EMR-3000.
2 Retrofitting mounting plate MP-3000 relay, projection panel mount necessary.
9
9
Climatic Environmental Housing Voltage Supply Power Consumption
9 Conditions ● Housing B1: height / width ● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc/ ● Power supply range:
● Storage Temperature: 183 mm (7.205 in)/ 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%) ● 19–300 Vdc:
9 –25 °C up to +70 °C (–13 °F 141.5 mm (5.571 in) ● Buffer time in case of 6 W idle mode/
to +158 °F) ● Housing depth (incl. supply failure: ≥50 ms 8 W max. power
–20 °C up to +60 °C (–4 °F
terminals): 208 mm at minimal aux. voltage ● 40–250 Vac:
(8.189 in) communication is 6 W idle mode/
9 ●
to +140 °F)
● Material, housing: permitted to be interrupted 8 W max. power
aluminum extruded section ● Max. permissible making (For frequencies of
9 Ann. Average: <75% rel.
● Material, front panel:
aluminum/foil front
current:
40–70 Hz)
Real Time Clock

9 Permissible Installation
●
● Mounting position: <0.25 ms
Altitude: <2,000 m Horizontal (±45° around ● 12 A peak value for ● Running reserve of the real
(6,561.67 ft) above sea time clock: 1 year min.
9 level.
the X-axis must be
permitted) ●
<1 ms
The voltage supply must
● If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) Display
9 Weight EMR-3000 housing be protected by a fuse of:
●
altitude applies, a changed B1: Approx. 2.4 kg

classification of the (5.291 lb) LED background
9
operating and test voltages illumination
1/5 in x 0.8 in) according
may be necessary. Plug-in Connector with ● Resolution—graphics
to IEC 60127
9 Degree of Protection
Integrated Short-Circuiter
display: 128 x 64 pixel
EN 60529 fuse 6. 3 x 32 mm (approx.
● LED Type: two colored: red
9 ● HMI front panel with seal:
● Nominal current:
1 A and 5 A
1/4 in x 1 1/4 in) according / green
IP54 to UL 248-14 ● Number of LEDs,
9 Continuous loading
●
housing B1: 8
● Rear side terminals: IP30 capacity: 4 x In/
continuously
9 Routine Test ● Overcurrent withstand:
● Insulation test acc. to
9
● 30 x In/10 s
IEC 60255-5: All tests to be
● 100 x In/1 s
9 250 x In/10 ms
●
circuits. (1 half-wave)
9 Screws: M4, captive type

●
inputs, current measuring acc. to VDEW
inputs, signal relay outputs:
9 Connection cross sections:
●
2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x

● Voltage measuring inputs: AWG 14) with wire end
9 3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz ferrule
● All wire-bound ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x
9 communication AWG 12) with ring cable
interfaces: 1.5 kV DC sleeve or cable sleeve
9 ● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x AWG
10) with ring cable sleeve
9 or cable sleeve
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Digital Inputs Current and Ground Current Binary Output Relays Measuring Accuracy
● Max. input voltage: Measurement ● Continuous current: ● Max. measuring range: Up 9
300 Vdc / 270 Vac ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A 5 A AC/DC to 40 x In (phase currents)
● Input current: <4 mA ● Max. measuring range: ● Switch-on current: ● Up to 25 x In (ground 9
Reaction time: <20 ms ● Up to 40 x In (phase 25 A AC/DC for 4 s current standard)
9
●
● Fallback time: <30 ms currents) ● Max. breaking current: ● Frequency range: 50 Hz /

● Up to 25 x In (ground ● 5 A AC up to 125 V ac 60 Hz ±10%
(Safe state of the digital
9
●
inputs) current standard) ● 5 A DC up to 50 V ● Accuracy: Class 0.5

● Up to 2.5 x In (ground (resistive) ● Amplitude error if I < 1 In:
Switching thresholds:
9
●
Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, current sensitive) ● 0.2 A DC at 300 V ±0.5% of the rated value
60 Vdc, 110 Vac / Vdc, ● Continuous loading Max. Switching Voltage: ● Amplitude error if I > In:
9
●
230 Vac / Vdc capacity: 4 x In/ 250 Vac/300 Vdc ±0.5% of the measured
● Un = 24 Vdc continuously value
● Overcurrent proof: 2000 VA ● Amplitude error if I > 2 In: 9
1 ON: ● 30 x In / 10 s ● Contact type: 1 changeover ±1.0% of the measured
– Switching threshold ● 100 x In / 1 s contact value 9
1 OFF: ● 250 x In / 10 ms ● Terminals: screw-type
● Resolution: 0.01 A
– Min. 19.2 Vdc (1 half-wave) terminals ● Harmonics: Up to 20% 3rd 9
– Max. 9.6 Vdc ● Power consumption: phase harmonic ±2% Up to 20%
● Un = 48 V / 60 Vdc current inputs Front Interface RS-232 5th harmonic ±2% 9
– Switching threshold ● At In = 1 A burden = ● Baud rates: 115200 baud ● Frequency influence:
2 ON: 0.15 MVA ● Handshake: RTS and CTS <±2% / Hz in the range of
±5 Hz of the parametrized
9
– Switching threshold ● At In = 5 A burden = ● Connection: 9-pole D-Sub nominal frequency
2 OFF: 0.15 MVA plug
● Temperature influence: 9
– Min. 42.6 Vdc Ground current input
●
<±1% within the range of
– Max. 21.3 Vdc ● At In = 1 A burden =
RS-485
● Master/slave: slave
0 °C up to +60 °C 9
● Un = 110 / 120 Vac/Vdc 0.35 MVA
– Switching threshold ● At In = 5 A burden =
● Connection: 6 screw-
clamping terminals RM 3.5
9
3 ON: 0.35 MVA
– Switching threshold ● Frequency range: 50 Hz /
mm (138 MIL) (terminating
resistors internal) 9
3 OFF: 60 Hz ±10%
– Min. 88.0 Vdc / 88.0
Vac
● Terminals: screw-type Tolerances of the Real 9
terminals with integrated Time Clock
– Max. 44.0 Vdc / 44.0
Vac
short-circuiters (contacts) ● Resolution: 1 ms 9
● Tolerance: <1 minute /
● Un = 230 / 240 Vac/Vdc
month (+20 °C) 9
4 ON:
9
4 OFF:
– Min. 184 Vdc / 184
9
Vac
– Max. 92 Vdc / 92 Vac 9
Terminals: screw-type
9
●
terminal
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Typical AC Connections—1 A CTs and Ground Current Measured by Zero Sequence CT
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Dimensions
9
Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Projection Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9 Standard Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
EMR-4000 Motor Protection Relay 9
Product Description
Eaton’s EMR-4000 motor inputs. Three of the voltage A front port is provided for The relay will log 300
9
multifunctional
inputs are to be connected to
the three-phase power
sequence of event records,
20 detailed trip logs, 9
microprocessor-based voltage for voltage protection port on the back is standard minimum/maximum values,
protective relay for the and for metering. They can be for local area networking load profiles, the 5 latest start 9
protection of any size motor connected in wye-ground or using Modbus-RTU. An profiles, motor trending,
at all voltage levels. It is most open delta configuration. The optional Ethernet port and breaker/contactor wear 9
commonly applied on fourth voltage is for protocols are available. information and oscillography
medium voltage or larger
motors. The EMR-4000 relay
independent single-phase
undervoltage/overvoltage The EMR-4000 motor
data.
9
is a current and voltage protection. The unit is capable protection relay includes The EMR-4000 motor
device that provides of 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. programmable logic protection relay has eight 9
complete and reliable motor functions. Logic gates and discrete inputs, 1 fiber optic
protection, monitoring, The maintenance mode
password protected soft key,
timers may be defined and
arranged for customized
input, 2 Form C, and 2 NO
output programmable
9
diagnostics, metering and
starting control functions. can be used for arc flash
mitigation to change to an
applications. With the
programmable logic control
contacts, and 1 Form C
healthy contact. It also has 9
The EMR-4000 motor alternate settings group, set functions you can simplify the four 4-20 mA analog outputs
protection relay has to have instantaneous complexity of your starting and one zone interlocking 9
removable terminal blocks, elements only. The multiple schemes by eliminating card. The relay provides
and it has Modbus-RTU setting groups can also be timers and auxiliary relays. maximum user flexibility to 9
communications as standard; changed, via communications Flash memory is used for the configure the I/O. All inputs
and an optional Ethernet port
for Modbus-TCP
memory is used for the
and outputs (except the
healthy output) are user-
9
communications or programming and all settings memory. The relay allows for programmable. The unit also
IEC-61850. are stored in nonvolatile four preprogrammed setting counts with a test mode to 9
memory. groups which can be force outputs and simulate
The EMR-4000 motor
protection relay provides An integral keypad and
activated through software or currents, to facilitate the 9
contact input. commissioning of the unit. It
complete current, voltage,
and frequency protection in a
user programming and The EMR-4000 motor
can be powered from 19 Vdc
to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250
9
single compact case. The retrieval of data without the protection relay has mass
relay has four current inputs need of a computer. 14 memory for data storage and
Vac auxiliary power.
9
rated for either 5 amperes or programmable LEDs provide a real-time clock with 1 ms
1 ampere and four voltage quick indication of relay status. time resolution. 9
Protective Relays
Application Description Features, Benefits and Functions

9 Eaton’s EMR-4000 motor
protection relay has been Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload Instantaneous Overcurrent Underload/Underpower
9 designed for maximum motor Protection The EMR-4000 motor Protection
operation and protection. It The EMR-4000 motor relay protection relay provides an The user selectable
9 permits running the motor features the exclusive Eaton instantaneous phase underload/underpower
close to its design limits Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload overcurrent function to trip function is used to detect the
9 while protecting it against
excessive heating and
protection system. Intel-I-Trip
the motor for high fault
current levels and save the
loss of load on the motor.
Coupling failure is a common
9 damaging overload fuses. This function can be cause for loss of load.
conditions. The EMR-4000 nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip disabled and has an Whenever is possible, it is
field proven protection protects motors from adjustable time delay on better to use underpower to
9 algorithms were developed potentially damaging overload starting to avoid nuisance detect loss of load. Three
based on motor designs and and abnormal operating tripping on inrush. power elements and two
9 operating parameters for conditions. The Intel-I-Trip
intelligent overload protection
underload elements are
provided in the relay for
optimum operation and Phase Unbalance Protection
9 protection while minimizing
nuisance tripping. The EMR-
feature utilizes field proven
often fed through fuses and
tripping and alarm purposes.
Pickup, start, and run timers
a patented motor thermal are provided for each
9 4000 motor protection relay
utilizes a patented protection protection model. The EMR-
can be run with a single-
phase fuse blown, referred to element.
algorithm and measurement 4000 motor relay’s unique as single phasing the motor.
9 technique based on proven measurement technique The EMR-4000 motor Frequency Protection
positive and negative samples the current protection relay measures The frequency elements
9 (unbalance) sequence waveforms 36 times per
the current and voltage provide the ability to detect
current sampling and true unbalance and either can be when the motor is operating
9 RMS calculations. measurements of the
used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs.
at off-nominal frequencies
that can do damage to the
sequence currents. The process or, to signal to
9 negative sequence current
The EMR-4000 has 2 voltage
and 2 current unbalance upstream protections or
causes a greater heating elements. Pickup, start and controls to implement load
9 effect on the rotor and has a run timers are provided for shedding actions.
greater impact on the thermal each element.
9 model in the relay. Intel-I-Trip
utilizes these measurements Ground Fault Protection
Power Factor Protection
This protection is used in
9 protect the motor against the
A separate measuring circuit
is used to measure ground
synchronous motors
applications to detect out-of-
9 currents.
current. A ground CT is
recommended for more
synchronism conditions.
sensitive protection against Undervoltage/Overvoltage

9 The motor thermal model is
analogous to a bucket that is winding insulation breakdown Protection
being filled and drained at the to ground. The relay ground Use the voltage protective
9 same time. The fill rate is circuit can be connected
residually from the three-
functions to detect abnormal
dependent on the motor system voltage conditions
9 currents and the drain is phase CTs. The ground fault
protection has pickup and
potentially hazardous to the
motor.
time delay set points or can
9 principles. The size of the
bucket is equivalent to the
be disabled. Reduced Voltage Starting
thermal capacity associated The EMR-4000 motor
9 with the mass of the motor.
Jam Protection protection relay provides a
Intel-I-Trip integrates these The user-selectable Jam transition and incomplete
9 rates and will issue a trip function protects motors that
are running against a sudden
sequence function for
when the thermal capacity reduced voltage starting. The
9 is filled. mechanical jam or stall
condition. The common
user can select to transition
based on the current level
Intel-I-Trip features adaptive application is on motors used
9 trip characteristics that adjust on crushers, chippers, or
and/or on time.
the trip times based on conveyors. It detects an
9 measured motor temperature increase of motor current to a
when RTDs are used. level above full load. Pickup,
9 start, and run timers and a
second element for alarm
9
purposes are provided.
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Antibackspin Long Acceleration Motors Flexible Phase Rotation Diagnostic Features
The stop function is Large motors with a high The EMR-4000 motor 9
programmable from 2 to inertia may experience protection relay can be Broken Rotor Bar
20%. For certain applications, starting currents that exceed applied on either an A-B-C or The EMR-4000 provides 9
such as pumping a fluid up a the locked rotor current and A-C-B phase rotation. A user advanced motor diagnostics
pipe, the motor may be time. The EMR-4000 motor setting permits correct including a broken rotor bar 9
driven backward for a period protection relay has logic and operation and indication of detection function. The
of time after it stops. The
EMR-4000 relay provides an
provisions for a zero speed
switch input to differentiate
the actual system
configuration.
broken rotor bar detection is a
condition maintenance
9
function that continuously
9
antibackspin timer to prevent between a stall and start
starting the motor while it is condition. If the motor is Maintenance Mode monitors the motor’s health
spinning in the reverse spinning, then the relay will The Maintenance Mode can while in operation. The
direction. The timer begins not trip on the normal locked improve safety by providing a advanced Motor Current 9
counting from the moment a rotor time allowing the motor simple and reliable method to Signature Analysis (MCSA)
stop is declared by the relay. to start. reduce fault clearing time and continuously analyzes the
motor current signature and
9
lower incident energy levels
Start Control Timers
Motors typically have limits to
Remote/differential Trip
The digital inputs can be
Maintenance Mode allows
based on preset algorithms
will determine when a broken 9
rotor bar is present in the
the number of cold starts,
starts per hour period, or time
programmed to accept a
contact input from a separate
the user to switch to more
sensitive settings via a motor. 9
between starts that are differential relay or other password protected soft key,
permitted without damage. device to trip the motor. This communication or via a digital
The broken rotor bar function
will provide early detection of
9
The EMR-4000 motor provides local and remote Input while maintenance any rotor problems and
protection relay incorporates target information and utilizes work is being performed at an advise maintenance 9
these timers to prevent the trip contacts of the EMR- energized panel or device. personnel of the impending
starting the motor beyond its
capabilities.
It will also record and log the
issue allowing for predictive 9
maintenance of the motor
motor information at the time
9
maintenance personnel and and prevention of
Load Shedding of the trip. helps reduce the possibility of catastrophic motor failures.
The EMR-4000 motor injury.
protection relay provides a Breaker Failure or Stuck By providing early indication 9
mechanical load shedding Contactor of potential rotor problems,
feature that can be used to The EMR-4000 motor serious system issues such
as: reduced starting torque,
9
control an upstream process. protection relay includes a
The load-shedding function
breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
function that can be initiated
overloads, torque and speed
oscillation and bearing wear
9
from either an internal or can be avoided. With the
an upstream process from external trip signal. This is an advanced broken rotor bar 9
adding more load until the independent element that detection system, advanced
overload condition is gone. can be used to operate a warning of impending 9
lockout relay or trip an problems reduces
Emergency Override upstream breaker. The timer
catastrophic failures,
maximizing motor life and
9
The EMR-4000 motor
protection relay has a user-
the protective function reset
system uptime.
9
times.
start inhibitor timers and 9
thermal overload bucket. This
function is intended for use in 9
emergency conditions only,
and it may result in motor 9
damage or failure.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Protection Features ● Auxiliary single-phase Monitoring Features Communication Features

9 ● Thermal protection (49/51) under/overvoltage (27A[1], ● Trip coil monitor ● Local HMI
27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])
9 Locked rotor protection Breaker wear primary and Password protected
● ● ●
(49S/51) ● Six frequency elements secondary (accumulated ● Addressable.

Phase overcurrent that can be assigned to: interrupted current)
9
●
over frequency, under
● IRIG-B
elements: ● Oscillography (7200 cycles ● Local communication port.
frequency, rate of change, total)
Two instantaneous
9
●
or vector surge (81[1], ● RS-232
elements with timers 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5],
● Trip Cause displays fault
(50P[1], 50P[2] and recorder data on HMI after
9 50P[3]) ●
81[6])
Apparent and
fault event port:
● Three inverse time ● Fault data logs (up to 20
● RS-485
displacement power factor
9 overcurrent elements (55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], events) ● Ethernet port
(51P[1], 51P[2] and 55D[2]) ● Sequence of events report ● Protocols:
9 51P[3]) ● Forward and reverse Watts (up to 300 events) ● Modbus-RTU (optional)
● 11 standard curves (32[1], 32[2], 32[3]) ● Trending (load profile over ● Modbus-TCP (optional)
delay reset
● Forward and reverse VARs time) ● IEC-61850 (optional)
(32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) ● Motor history ● Configuration software
9 ● Ground overcurrent
elements:
● Lockout protection (86) ● Records the last 5 motor
● Breaker failure (50BF) start profiles
9 ● Two instantaneous
measured elements
● Zone interlocking for bus
● Motor start trending
protection (87B) ● CT supervision
9 with timers (50X[1] and
50X[2])
● VT supervision
Metering Features ● Clock (1 ms time stamping)
9
● Two instantaneous ● Amperes: Positive,
calculated elements
negative and zero Diagnostic Features
with timers (50R[1] and
9 50R[2])
●
sequence
Volts: Positive, negative
● Broken rotor bar
● Two inverse time
9 overcurrent measured
●
and zero sequence
Phase angles
Control Functions
● Transition for reduced
9 51X[2]) ● Volt-amperes and VA
demand ●
voltage starts
Incomplete sequence
9 overcurrent calculated
elements (51R[1] and
●
●
Watts and kW demand
kWh (forward, reverse, ●
delay
Permits numbers of cold
9 51R[2]) net) starts
● 11 standard curves ● VARs and kVAR demand ● Limits numbers of starts
per hour
delay reset
● kVARh (lead, leg and net)
● Anti-backspin time delay
● Power factor
9 Jam or Stall protection Mechanical load shedding
● ●
● Frequency
(50J[1], 50J[2]) ● Zero speed switch for long
● % THD V and I
9 Phase unbalance negative acceleration motors
●
● Magnitude THD V and I ● Motor stop inputs
(46[1], 46[2]) ● Minimum/maximum
9 Remote trip input
●
● Underload protection recording

● Trending (load profile over
● Differential trip input
(37[1], 37[2])
9 ● Temperature protection time) ● Emergency override
with optional URTD (49/38) ● Minimum/maximum ● Breaker/contactor open-
9 ● Stars per hour (66) recording
●
close/stop-start
Remote open-close (stop-
● Switch onto fault
● Temperature with remote
9 protection URTD module
●
start)
Programmable I/O
● Phase voltage unbalance
9 and sequence protection
(47[1], 47[2]) ● Programmable logic
9 ● Main three-phase under/ ● Multiple setting groups
overvoltage (27M[1],
9 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Sequence of Events Records Trip Log Waveform Capture (Quality Manager)
The EMR-4000 protection The EMR-4000 protection The EMR-4000 relay provides waveform capture is initiated 9
relay records a maximum of relay will store a maximum of oscillographic recording by up to 8 different triggers
300 events associated with
20 trip records in a FIFO trip capabilities. The relay will (i.e., trip/alarm events) or 9
log. Each trip record will be record all measured signals manually via communications
classified as a change of state
date and time stamped to a 1
ms resolution. The trip log
or the HMI. PowerPort-E
9
These include relay pickups, record will include and contact inputs. The EMR- retrieve the records. Quality
dropouts, trips, contact information on the type of 4000 can record up to 7200 Manager is a separate 9
closure, alarms, setting fault, protection elements cycles of data. The number of software program downloaded
changes and self-diagnostic that operated, fault location records is proportional to the with PowerPort-E used for 9
failures. Each event is date and currents and voltages at programmed size of each analyzing the waveform and
and time stamped to a 1 ms
the time of the fault. record; the maximum size per
record is 600 cycles. The
trending files retrieved from
the relay.
9
stored in a FIFO in
chronological order.
PowerPort-E
PowerPort-E is the software
9
9
off-line protection setting files
PowerPort-E is also used for 9
viewing measured values of
the relays in real-time,
uploading/downloading
9
event log and waveform 9
records.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Integral User Interface Motor Statistics Programmable I/O Design Standards
9 The front panel user interface For each motor start, the The EMR-4000 motor ● Generic Standard:
has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD EMR-4000 stores a motor protection relay provides ● EN 61000-6-2
9 display with background start report and add this data heavy-duty, trip-rated, 2 ● EN 61000-6-3
illumination for wide angle to the motor statistics buffer. normally open and 1 Form C
Product Standard:
9
●
viewing in all light conditions. With the motor statistics you contacts. One isolated inputs
Seven programmable LEDs can track motor start data for can be used for monitoring ● IEC 60255-6
9 provide quick and easy visual the past eighteen 30-day the trip circuit. One Form C EN 50178
●
display of power on, mode of periods. For each 30-day contact is dedicated to the ● UL 508 (Industrial
operation, alarm and trip interval, the relay records the relay failure alarm function
9 indication. Soft keys are following information: and is operated in a normally ●
Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
provided for operation mode energized (failsafe) mode.
9
● The date the interval began (Industrial Control
selection, scrolling through There are 4 eight user-
● The total number of starts Equipment)
data and settings. In addition, configurable discrete inputs
ANSI C37.90
9
●
the relay settings and test in the interval that accept a wet contact and
functions are password ● The averages of the can operate through a wide
protected. range of power. Each input
9 following quantities:
● Motor start time and output is user-
Starting Profiles programmable for maximum
9 Start % rotor thermal
●
The EMR-4000 records the application flexibility.

capacity used
average current versus time
9 Maximum start current
●
for the last five starting Programmable Logic
cycles. This information is The EMR-4000 motor
Load Profiling/Trending
9 available via the
communications port through The EMR-4000 relay
protection relay provides logic
gates and timers that the
automatically records
9 PowerPort-E
selected quantities into non-
user can customize for
volatile memory every 5, 10, Each gate can be assigned a
9 15, 30, or 60 minutes,
logic function of either AND,
OR, NAND or NOR. Each
9 report setting. gate can have a maximum of
four input signals and each
9 input signal can be required
to be a NOT. Input signals can
be external inputs received
9 via the binary inputs or
internal values associated
9 with the protection, alarm or
metering set points. Each
9 gate has a unique output
assignment and designation
9 that can be used as the input
to another gate. There are 80
9 adjustable pickup and dropout
delay settings.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
The catalog number EMR-4000 9
the electrical characteristics and (A)–Four digital inputs, four (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485) 9
operation features included in output relays, 1 4-20 mA
the EMR-4000. For example, analog output, URTD
interface coating 9
if the catalog number were
EMR-4000-2A0BA1,
(0)–5 A / 1 A phase and (1)–Projection panel mount
9
ground CTs, power supply
the following: range:
19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
9
9
Motor Relay Removable Terminals
9
EMR-4000-2A 0 B A 1 9
A = 8 DI, 5 outputs, 4AO, removable 0 = Standard mount
terminals, zone interlocking, URTD
interface, IRIG-B, small display Communication Options Conformal Coating
Options
9
Hardware Option 2 D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST B = Conformal coated
0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, ground current 5 A / 1 A,
circuit boards
9
9
0.5 A / 0.1 A, power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
40–250 Vac I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
over Ethernet RJ-45
K = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic 9
Ethernet
L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
9
9
Accessories
9
Standard Accessories EMR-4000
Catalog 9
Description Number
UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 48–240 Vac/48–250 Vdc URTDII-01 1 9
UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 24–48 Vdc URTDII-02 1
9
Note
1 See URTD section for fiber optic cables required to communicate to the EMR-3000.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Technical Data and Specifications Plug-in Connector with Voltage and Residual Voltage
9 Integrated Short-Circuiter Measurement
Climatic Environmental Current and Ground Current (Conventional Current Inputs) ● Nominal voltages:100 V/
9 Conditions Measurement ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A 110 V/ 230 V/ 400 V (can be
● Storage temperature: ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A ● Continuous loading configured)
9 –30 °C to +70 °C ● Max. measuring range: Capacity: 4 x In / ● Max. measuring range: 2 x
(–22 °F to +158 °F) ● Up to 40 x In (phase continuously nominal voltage
–20 °C to +60 °C
currents) ● Overcurrent withstand: ● Continuous loading
● Up to 25 x In (ground ● 30 x In / 10 s capacity: 2 x nominal
9 ●
(–4°F to +140 °F)
current standard) ● 100 x In / 1 s voltage (800 Vac)
● Up to 2.5 x In (ground ● 250 x In / 10 ms
● Power Consumption:
9 ann. average:<75% rel. (on
56d up to 95% rel.)
current sensitive) (1 half-wave) ● at Vn = 100 V S = 0.1
MVA
● Continuous loading ● Screws: M4, captive type
9 Permissible Installation
●
capacity: 4 x In/ acc. to VDEW ● at Vn = 110 V S = 0.1
Altitude: <2,000 m continuously MVA
(6,561.67 ft) above sea
● Connection cross sections:
9 level
● Overcurrent proof: ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x
● at Vn = 230 V S = 0.4
MVA
● If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft)
● 30 x In / 10 s AWG 14) with wire end
9 altitude applies, a ● 100 x In / 1 s ferrule ● at Vn = 400 V S = 1.0
MVA
changed classification of ● 250 x In / 10 ms ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x
9 the operating and test
voltages may be
(1 half-wave) AWG 12) with ring cable
sleeve or cable sleeve
● Frequency range: 50 Hz or
60 Hz ±10%
● Power consumption:
9 necessary Terminals: screw-type
●
● Phase current inputs
● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x
AWG 10) with ring cable terminals
At In= 1 A S=0.15 MVA
9 At In= 5 A S=0.15 MVA sleeve or cable sleeve
● HMI front panel with seal: ● The current measuring Frequency Measurement
● Ground Current Input
IP54 board´s terminal blocks ● Nominal Frequencies:
9 ● Rear side terminals: IP20
At In= 1 A S=0.35 MVA
At In= 5 A S=0.35 MVA may be used as with 2 50 Hz / 60 Hz
(double) conductors
9 Routine Test
● Frequency range: 50 Hz /
60 Hz ±10%
AWG 10,12,14 Voltage Supply
● Insulation test acc. to otherwise with single ● Aux. Voltage: 24–270 Vdc /
9 Terminals: screw-type
●
IEC 60255-5: All tests to be conductors only 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%)
carried out against ground terminals with integrated ● Buffer time in case of
short-circuiters (contacts)
9 and other input and output
circuits ● Connection cross sections:
Control Power Supply
● Aux. voltage: 240–270 Vdc /
supply failure:
● ≥50 ms at minimal aux.
9 ● Aux. voltage supply, digital ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%) voltage
inputs, current measuring AWG 14) with wire end ● Buffer time in case of ● Interrupted
ferrule supply failure: ≥50 ms at
9
inputs, signal relay outputs: communication is
2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x minimal aux. voltage permitted.
Voltage measuring Inputs: AWG 12) with ring cable Interrupted communication
9
●
● Max. permissible making
3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz sleeve or cable sleeve is permitted
current:
● All wire-bound ● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x ● Max. permissible making
9 18 A peak value for
●
communication interfaces: AWG 10) with ring cable current:

0.25 ms
1.5 kV DC sleeve or cable sleeve ● 18 A peak value for
9
● 12 A peak value for 1 ms
● The current measuring <0.25 ms
Housing board´s terminal blocks
● 12 A peak value for <1
9 ● Housing B2: height / width
183 mm (7.205 in)/
may be used as with 2
(double) conductors
ms
fuse approx. 5 x 20 mm
9 ●
212.7 mm (8.374 in)
Housing depth (Incl.
AWG 10,12,14
otherwise with single
(0.2 x 0.8 in) according
conductors only
● 2.5 A time-lag miniature to IEC 60127
9 Terminals): 208 mm
(8.189 in)
fuse approx. 1/5 x 0.8 in
(5 x 20 mm) according to
fuse approx. 6.3 x 32
9 Material, housing: IEC 60127
●
mm (0.25 x 1.25 in)
aluminum extruded section ● 3.5 A time-lag miniature according to UL 248-14
9
● Material, front panel: fuse approx. 1/4 x
aluminum/foil front 1 1/4 in (6.3 x 32 mm)
Mounting position: according to UL 248-14
9
●
horizontal (±45° around the

9 ● Weight: approx. 4.2 kg
(9.259 lb)
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Power Consumption Digital Inputs Relay Outputs
● Power supply range: ● Max. input voltage: ● Continuous current: 9
24–270 Vdc 300 Vdc / 259 Vac 5 A AC/DC
● Power consumption ● Input current: <4 mA ● Max. make current: 9
9
● ●
● Maximum power ● Fallback time: <30 ms 30 V for 4 s

consumption—13 W 30 A / 230 Vac according
9
●
● (Safe State of the Digital
● Power supply range: Inputs) to ANSI IEEE Std
48–230 Vac (for C37.90-2005
Four switching thresholds:
9
●
frequencies of 40–70 Hz) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, ● 30 A / 250 Vdc according
● Power consumption 60 Vdc, 110 Vac / Vdc, to ANSI IEEE Std
in idle mode—7 W 230 Vac / Vdc C37.90-2005 9
● Maximum power ● Un = 24 Vdc ● Max. breaking current:
consumption—13 W – Switching threshold ● 5 A AC up to 250 Vac 9
1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc ● 5 A DC up to 30 V
Display
● Display Type: LCD with
– Switching threshold (resistive) 9
1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc ● 0.3 A DC at 300 V
LED background
illumination
● Un = 48 V / 60 Vdc ● Max. switching voltage: 9
– Switching threshold 250 Vac / 250 Vdc
Resolution—graphics
9
●
display: 128 x 64 pixel 2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc ● Switching capacity:

– Switching threshold 1250 VA
LED type: two colored:
9
●
2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc ● Contact Type: Form C or
red/green
● Un = 110 / 120 Vac / Vdc normally open contact
B2: 15 – Switching threshold ● Terminals: screw-type 9
3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc / terminals
Front Interface 88.0 Vac
9
● Baud Rates: 115,200 baud
● Handshake: RTS and CTS
3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc
/ 44.0 Vac
9
● Connection: 9-pole D-Sub Un = 230 / 240 Vac / Vdc
9
●
plug
Real Time Clock 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc /
184 Vac 9
● Running reserve of the real
time clock: 1 year min.
4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc / 9
92 Vac
terminal
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Typical AC Connections, Wye VTs 5 A CTs and Ground Current Measured by Residual Connection
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9
Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 Projection Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Contents
9 EMR-5000 Motor Protection Relay
Description Page
Digitrip 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9

ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay . . . . . . . . V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
Eaton’s EMR-5000 motor The fourth voltage is for A front port is provided for The EMR-5000 motor
9 protection relay is a
multifunctional
undervoltage/overvoltage
An RS-485 and an Ethernet
microprocessor-based protection. The unit is capable ports in the back are optional a real-time clock with 1 ms
9 protective relay for the of 60 Hz or 50 Hz operation. for local area networking time resolution. The relay will
protection of any size motor using. Optional Modbus-RTU, log 300 sequence of event
9 at all voltage levels. It is most The maintenance mode
Modbus-TCP or IEC-61850 records, 20 detailed trip logs,
commonly applied on protocols are supported. minimum/maximum values,
can be used for arc flash
9 medium voltage or larger
motors. The EMR-5000 relay mitigation to change to an The EMR-5000 motor
load profiles, the 5 latest start
profiles, motor trending,
is a current and voltage alternate settings group, set protection relay includes
9
breaker/contactor wear
device with built-in differential to have instantaneous programmable logic information and waveform
protection that provides elements only. The multiple functions. Logic gates and data.
9 complete and reliable motor setting groups can also be
arranged for customized The EMR-5000 has either
protection, monitoring,
9 diagnostics, metering and
starting control functions.
memory is used for the
applications. With the
programmable logic control
eight programmable binary
inputs, two analog inputs,
programming and all settings functions you can simplify the two analog outputs, or
9 The EMR-5000 motor are stored in nonvolatile complexity of your starting 16 programmable binary
protection relay provides memory. schemes by eliminating inputs. It has 2NO and six
9 complete current, voltage,
An integral keypad and
timers and auxiliary relays. Form C heavy-duty outputs
and frequency protection in Flash memory is used for the and one form C signal alarm
9 a single compact case. The
relay has eight current inputs user programming and
relay. The relay provides
maximum user flexibility to
rated for either 5 amperes or retrieval of data without the memory. The relay allows for
9
configure the I/O. All inputs
1 ampere and four voltage need of a computer. Fourteen four preprogrammed setting and outputs (except the
inputs. Three of the voltage programmable LEDs provide groups that can be activated healthy output) are user-
9 inputs are to be connected to quick indication of relay
status.
through software, manually, programmable. The unit also
the three-phase power or contact input. counts with a test mode to
9 voltage for voltage protection
and for metering. They can be
force outputs and simulate
currents, to facilitate the
9 connected in wye-ground or
open delta configuration.
commissioning of the unit. It
can be powered from 19 Vdc
to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac to
9 250 Vac auxiliary power.
Protective Relays
9.3
Eaton’s EMR-5000 motor The motor thermal model is Phase Unbalance Protection Underload/Underpower
9
protection relay has been analogous to a bucket that is Protection
designed for maximum motor being filled and drained at the
often fed through fuses and The user selectable 9
operation and protection. It same time. The fill rate is can be run with a single- underload/underpower
permits running the motor dependent on the motor phase fuse blown, referred to function is used to detect the 9
close to its design limits currents and the drain is as single phasing the motor. loss of load on the motor.
while protecting it against
excessive heating and
principles. The size of the
The EMR-5000 motor Coupling failure is a common
cause for loss of load.
9
protection relay measures the
damaging overload
conditions. The EMR-5000
bucket is equivalent to the
thermal capacity associated
current and voltage
unbalance and either can be
Whenever is possible, it is
better to use underpower to
9
field proven protection with the mass of the motor. detect loss of load. Three
algorithms were developed Intel-I-Trip integrates these
used to alarm or trip the
motor before damage occurs. power elements and two 9
based on motor designs and rates and will issue a trip The EMR-5000 has two underload elements are
operating parameters for when the thermal capacity voltage and two current provided in the relay for 9
optimum operation and is filled. unbalance elements. Pickup, tripping and alarm purposes.
protection while minimizing
nuisance tripping. The EMR- Intel-I-Trip features adaptive start and run timers are Pickup, start and run timers
are provided for each
9
trip characteristics that adjust provided for each element.
9
5000 motor protection relay element.
utilizes a patented protection the trip times based on
Ground Fault Protection
algorithm and measurement measured motor temperature Frequency Protection
technique based on proven when RTDs are used. A separate measuring circuit
is used to measure ground The frequency elements 9
positive and negative current. A ground CT is provide the ability to detect
(unbalance) sequence current
sampling and true RMS
Instantaneous Overcurrent
The EMR-5000 motor recommended for more when the motor is operating 9
sensitive protection against at off-nominal frequencies
protection relay provides an
calculations.
instantaneous phase winding insulation breakdown that can do damage to the
process or, to signal to
9
to ground. The relay ground
Intel-I-Trip (I2t) Overload overcurrent function to trip
Protection the motor for high fault circuit can be connected
residually from the three-
upstream protections or
controls to implement load 9
The EMR-5000 motor relay current levels and save the
shedding actions.
features the exclusive Eaton fuses. This function can be
disabled and has an
phase CTs. The ground fault
protection has pickup and 9
Intel-I-Trip intelligent overload time delay set points or can Power Factor Protection
protection system. Intel-I-Trip
adjustable time delay on
starting to avoid nuisance be disabled. This protection is used in 9
tripping on inrush. synchronous motors
nameplate data. Intel-I-Trip
Jam Protection applications to detect out-of- 9
Differential Protection The user-selectable Jam synchronism conditions.
protects motors from
potentially damaging overload This protection function is function protects motors that
are running against a sudden Undervoltage/Overvoltage 9
and abnormal operating mostly used to protect Protection
conditions. The Intel-I-Trip induction and synchronous mechanical jam or stall
condition. The common Use the voltage protective 9
intelligent overload protection motors against phase-to-
application is on motors used functions to detect abnormal
feature utilizes field proven
phase faults. Differential
protection may be considered on crushers, chippers, or system voltage conditions 9
conveyors. It detects an potentially hazardous to the
the first line of protection for
a patented motor thermal
protection model. The EMR- internal phase to phase or increase of motor current to a motor. 9
phase to ground faults. In the level above full load. Pickup,
5000 motor relay’s unique
measurement technique event of such faults, the start, and run timers and a
second element for alarm
9
samples the current quick response of the
waveforms 36 times per differential element may limit
the damage that may have
purposes are provided.
9
measurements of the
otherwise occurred to the
motor. While this protection 9
sequence currents. The is recommended in all motors
negative sequence current above 1500 hp, it can be used 9
causes a greater heating in smaller motors depending
effect on the rotor and has a primarily in the importance 9
greater impact on the thermal and the cost of the motor.
model in the relay. Intel-I-Trip
utilizes these measurements
9
protect the motor against the 9
currents. 9
9
9
Protective Relays
Reduced Voltage Starting Load Shedding Remote/Differential Trip Flexible Phase Rotation
9 The EMR-5000 motor The EMR-5000 motor The digital inputs can be The EMR-5000 motor
protection relay provides a protection relay provides a programmed to accept a protection relay can be
9 transition and incomplete mechanical load shedding contact input from a separate applied on either an A-B-C or
sequence function for feature that can be used to differential relay or other A-C-B phase rotation. A user
9 reduced voltage starting. The control an upstream process. device to trip the motor. This setting permits correct
user can select to transition The load-shedding function provides local and remote operation and indication of
9 based on the current level
and/or on time.
target information and utilizes
the trip contacts of the EMR-
the actual system
configuration.
9 Antibackspin
an upstream process from
adding more load until the
It will also record and log the Maintenance Mode
The stop function is overload condition is gone. motor information at the time The Maintenance Mode can
9 programmable from 2–20%. of the trip. improve safety by providing a
For certain applications, such Emergency Override simple and reliable method to
9 as pumping a fluid up a pipe, The EMR-5000 motor Breaker Failure or Stuck
Contactor
the motor may be driven protection relay has a user- lower incident energy levels
9 backward for a period of time
after it stops. The EMR-5000
The EMR-5000 motor
9 relay provides an antibackspin start inhibitor timers and breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) the user to switch to more
timer to prevent starting the thermal overload bucket. This function that can be initiated sensitive settings via a
motor while it is spinning in function is intended for use in from either an internal or password protected soft key,
9 the reverse direction. The emergency conditions only, external trip signal. This is an communication or via a digital
timer begins counting from and it may result in motor independent element that Input while maintenance
9 the moment a stop is damage or failure. can be used to operate a
work is being performed at an
declared by the relay. energized panel or device.
9 Start Control Timers
Long Acceleration Motors
Large motors with a high
9 Motors typically have limits to
the number of cold starts,
inertia may experience
starting currents that exceed the protective function reset
starts per hour period, or time the locked rotor current and times. injury.
9 between starts that are time. The EMR-5000 motor
permitted without damage. protection relay has logic and
9 The EMR-5000 motor provisions for a zero speed
protection relay incorporates switch input to differentiate
9 these timers to prevent
starting the motor beyond its
between a stall and start
condition. If the motor is
9 capabilities. spinning, then the relay will
not trip on the normal locked
rotor time allowing the motor
9 to start.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Protection Features ● Six frequency elements ● Sequence of events report Diagnostic Features
● Motor differential that can be assigned to: (up to 300 events) 9
protection (87M) over frequency, under ● Trending (load profile over Broken Rotor Bar
● Thermal protection (49/51) frequency, rate of change,
time) The EMR-5000 provides 9
● Motor history advanced motor diagnostics
● Locked rotor protection (
49S/51)
81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5],
81[6])
● Records the last 5 motor
including a broken rotor bar
detection function. The
9
● Phase overcurrent start profiles
broken rotor bar detection is a
Apparent and
9
●
elements: displacement power
● Motor start trending condition maintenance
● Two instantaneous factor (55A[1], 55A[2], ● CT supervision function that continuously
elements with timers 55D[1], 55D[2]) ● VT supervision monitors the motor’s health 9
(50P[1], 50P[2] and ● Forward and reverse watts ● Clock (1 ms time stamping) while in operation. The
50P[3]) (32[1], 32[2], 32[3]) advanced Motor Current
Signature Analysis (MCSA)
9
● Three inverse time ● Forward and reverse VARs Diagnostic Features
overcurrent elements
(51P[1], 51P[2] and
(32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) ● Broken rotor bar
continuously analyzes the
motor current signature and 9
● Lockout protection (86) based on preset algorithms
9
51P[3]) Control Functions
● 11 standard curves
● Breaker failure (50BF) will determine when a broken
● Transition for reduced rotor bar is present in the
9
●
voltage starts motor.
delay reset protection (87B)
● Incomplete sequence
The broken rotor bar function
Ground overcurrent
9
●
Metering Features delay
elements: ● Permits numbers of cold will provide early detection of
● Amperes: Positive, any rotor problems and
Two instantaneous
9
●
negative and zero starts
measured elements advise maintenance
sequence ● Limits numbers of starts personnel of the impending
with timers (50X[1] and
50X[2])
● Volts: Positive, negative
and zero sequence ●
per hour
Anti-backspin time delay
issue allowing for predictive
maintenance of the motor
9
● Two instantaneous
calculated elements
●
●
Differential current
Volt-amperes and VA
●
●
Mechanical load shedding
Zero speed switch for long
and prevention of
catastrophic motor failures. 9
50R[2])
●
demand
Watts and kW demand ●
acceleration motors
Motor stop inputs
By providing early indication 9
● Two inverse time of potential rotor problems,
overcurrent measured
● kWh (forward, reverse,
net)
● Remote trip input serious system issues such
as: reduced starting torque,
9
● Emergency override
overloads, torque and speed
●
51X[2])
Two inverse time
●
●
VARs and kVAR demand
kVARh (lead, leg and net)
● Breaker/Contactor open-
close/stop-start
oscillation and bearing wear 9
can be avoided. With the
9
overcurrent calculated ● Power factor ● Remote open-close
elements (51R[1] and advanced broken rotor bar
● Frequency (stop-start) detection system, advanced
51R[2])
● 11 standard curves
● % THD V and I ● Programmable I/O warning of impending
problems reduces
9
● Magnitude THD V and I ● Programmable LEDs
● Instantaneous or time
delay reset ● Minimum/maximum ● Programmable Logic catastrophic failures,
maximizing motor life and 9
Jam or Stall protection recording ● Multiple setting groups
●
system uptime.
(50J[1], 50J[2]) ● Trending (load profile over
Communication Features
9
● Phase unbalance negative time)
sequence overcurrent ● Minimum/maximum ● Local HMI
9
(46[1], 46[2])) recording ● Password protected
● Underload protection ● Temperature with remote ● Addressable 9
(37[1], 37[2]) URTD module ● IRIG-B
● Temperature protection
Monitoring Features
● Local communication port: 9
with optional URTD (49/38) ● RS-232
Trip coil monitor
9
●
● Stars per hour (66) ● Remote communication
● Breaker wear primary and port:
● Switch onto fault
protection
● RS-485 9
● Phase voltage unbalance ● Ethernet port
Oscillography (7200 cycles
9
●
and sequence protection ● Protocols:
total)
(47[1], 47[2])
● Trip Cause displays fault ● Modbus-RTU (Optional)
● Main three-phase under/
overvoltage (27M[1],
recorder data on HMI after ● Modbus-TCP (Optional) 9
fault event ● IEC-61850 (Optional)
●
27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2])
Auxiliary single-phase
● Fault data logs (up to 20 ● Configuration software 9
events)
under/overvoltage (27A[1],
27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) 9
Protective Relays

9
9 The EMR-5000 protection the relays in real-time,
9 300 events associated with setting files, and retrieving
9 classified as a change of state
records.

9 dropouts, trips, contact Manager)
closure, alarms, setting The EMR-5000relay provides
9 changes and self-diagnostic oscillographic recording
9 and time stamped to a 1 ms
9 stored in a FIFO in of pickup, trip, internal logic,
chronological order. and contact inputs. The EMR-
9 Trip Log cycles of data. The number of
The EMR-5000 protection records is proportional to the
9 relay will store a maximum of programmed size of each
9 log. Each trip record will be record is 600 cycles.
date and time stamped to a The waveform capture is
9 1 ms resolution. The trip log Waveform Capture (Quality Manager)
record will include triggers (i.e., trip/alarm Integral User Interface Motor Statistics
information on the type of
9 fault, protection elements
communications or the HMI.
The front panel user interface For each motor start, the
that operated, fault location has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD EMR-5000 stores a motor
PowerPort-E setting software
9 and currents and voltages at is used to retrieve the
display with background
illumination for wide angle
start report and add this data
to the motor statistics buffer.
the time of the fault. records. Quality Manager is a
9 PowerPort-E
separate software program
viewing in all light conditions.
Seven programmable LEDs
With the motor statistics you
can track motor start data for
downloaded with PowerPort- provide quick and easy visual the past eighteen 30-day
9 PowerPort-E is the software
waveform and trending files
display of power on, mode of periods. For each 30-day
operation, alarm and trip interval, the relay records the
9
off-line protection setting files retrieved from the relay.
for all E-Series relay models. indication. Soft keys are following information:
PowerPort-E is also used for provided for operation mode
The date the interval began
9
●
selection, scrolling through
data and settings. In addition, ● The total number of starts
in the interval
9 the relay settings and test
functions are password ● The averages of the
protected. following quantities:
9 ● Motor start time
Starting Profiles
Start % rotor thermal
9
●
The EMR-5000 records the capacity used

average current versus time ● Maximum start current
9 for the last five starting
cycles. This information
9 is available via the
communications port
through PowerPort-E.
9
9
9
9 PowerPort-E
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Load Profiling/Trending Approvals
The EMR-5000 relay
Programmable Logic
● UL listed file: E217753 9
automatically records
selected quantities into non- The EMR-5000 motor
protection relay provides logic
Design Standards 9
volatile memory every 5, 10, ● Generic Standard:
15, 30, or 60 minutes,
● EN 61000-6-2 9
special or unique applications. ● EN 61000-6-3
report setting.
Each gate can be assigned a ● Product Standard: 9
Programmable I/O logic function of either AND, ● IEC 60255-6
The EMR-5000 motor OR, NAND or NOR. Each ● EN 50178 9
protection relay provides gate can have a maximum of
● UL 508 (Industrial
heavy-duty, trip-rated, 2 four input signals and each
input signal can be required Control Equipment) 9
normally open and 1 Form C
to be a NOT. Input signals can ● CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
contacts. One isolated inputs
can be used for monitoring be external inputs received (Industrial Control 9
via the binary inputs or Equipment)
the trip circuit. One Form C
contact is dedicated to the internal values associated ● ANSI C37.90 9
relay failure alarm function with the protection, alarm or
and is operated in a normally metering set points. Each
gate has a unique output
9
There are 4 eight user- assignment and designation
that can be used as the input 9
configurable discrete inputs
to another gate.
that accept a wet contact and
can operate through a wide
9
range of power. Each input
and output is user- 9
application flexibility. 9
9
The catalog number EMR-5000 9
the electrical characteristics (A)–Four digital inputs, four
output relays, 1 4–20 mA
(B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485) 9
and operation features (A)–Without conformal
included in the EMR-5000. analog output, URTD
interface coating 9
For example, if the catalog
number is EMR-5000-2A0BA,
(0)–5 A / 1 A phase and ground (1)–Projection panel mount
9
CTs, power supply range:
the following: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
9
EMR-5000 Eaton Motor Relay 9
EMR-5000-2A 0 B A 1 9

9
A = 16 DI, 9 outputs, zone interlocking,
URTD interface, IRIG-B, large display
0 = Standard mount
B = 8 DI, 9 outputs, 2 Al + 2AO, zone Communication Options Conformal Coating
interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B,
large display
Options
9
E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485 circuit boards 9
Hardware Option 2 F = Modbus RTU or DNP3 RTU over fiber optic ST
H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45 9
1 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, sensitive ground current I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
40–250 Vac
over Ethernet RJ-45
9
Ethernet
L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet 9
9
Protective Relays

9
Climatic Environmental Current and Ground Current ● Connection cross sections: ● The voltage supply must
9 Conditions Measurement ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x be protected by a fuse of:
● Storage temperature: Plug-in connector with AWG 14) with wire end ● 2.5 A time-lag miniature
9 –30 °C to +70 °C (–22 °F to integrated short-circuiter ferrule fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx.
158 °F) (Conventional current inputs) ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm2 (2 x 1/5 in x 0.8 in) according
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to
Phase and ground current AWG 12) with ring cable to IEC 60127
inputs: sleeve or cable sleeve ● 3.5 A time-lag miniature
9 ●
140 °F)
Permissible humidity at ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A
● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm2 (2 x fuse 6. 3 x 32 mm
(approx. 1/4 in x
9 ann. average: <75% rel. ● Max. measuring range: sleeve or cable sleeve 1 1/4 in) according
(on 56d up to 95% rel.) ● Up to 40 x In (phase ● The current measuring to UL 248-14
9 Permissible installation currents)

●
board’s terminal blocks
altitude: Power Consumption
● Up to 25 x In (ground may be used as with 2
<2,000 m (6,561.67 ft) (double) conductors ● Power supply range:
9 current standard)
●
above sea level AWG 10,12,14 24–270 Vdc

● Capacity: 4 x In/
If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) continuously otherwise with single ● Power consumption
9
●
altitude applies, a conductors only in idle mode—7 W

● Overcurrent proof:
changed classification of ● Maximum power
9 30 x In / 10 s
●
the operating and test Voltage and Residual Voltage consumption—13 W
● 100 x In / 1 s Measurement
voltages may be ● Power supply range:
9 Nominal voltages: 60–520
●
necessary ● 250 x In / 10 ms 48–230 Vac (for
(1 half-wave) V (can be configured) frequencies of 50–60 Hz)
9 Degree of Protection EN 60529 Max. measuring range: 2 x
●
● Power consumption: ● Power consumption
● HMI front panel with seal: ● Phase current inputs nominal voltage or 800 V in idle mode—7 VA
9
IP54 – At In= 1 A S=0.15
● Continuous loading ● Maximum power
● Rear side terminals: IP20 MVA capacity: 800 Vac consumption—13 VA
Power consumption:
9
●
– At In= 5 A S=0.15
Routine Test MVA ● at Vn= 100 V S=0.1 MVA Display
● Insulation test acc. to Display type: LCD with
9
●
● Ground current inputs ● at Vn= 110 V S=0.1 MVA
IEC60255-5: All tests to be LED background
– At In= 1 A S=0.35 ● at Vn= 230 V S=0.4 MVA
carried out against ground illumination
9 and other input and output
MVA
– At In= 5 A S=0.35 ●
● at Vn= 400 V S=1.0 MVA
Nominal voltages:
● Resolution graphics
circuits display: 128 x 128 pixel
MVA
9 ● Aux. voltage supply, digital
inputs, current measuring
60–520 V (can be
configured)
● LED type: two colored,
Sensitive ground current red/green
9 Frequency range: 50 Hz or
●
inputs, signal relay outputs: inputs:
60 Hz ± 10%
2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A B2: 15
9 Terminals: screw-type
●
● Voltage measuring inputs:
with 50:0:025 core balance terminals
3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz Front Interface RS-232
CT
9 All wire-bound
●
● Max. measuring range: up Frequency Measurement
● Baud rates: 115,200 baud
communication interfaces:
to 2.5 x In ● Nominal Frequencies:
● Handshake: RTS and CTS
1.5 kV DC
9 ● Capacity: 2 x In/ 50 Hz / 60 Hz ● Connection: 9-pole D-Sub
Housing continuously plug
9 ● Housing B2: height / width ● Overcurrent proof: Voltage Supply
Real-Time Clock
183 mm (7.205 in)/ 212.7 ● 10 x In / 10 s ● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc/
9 Running reserve of the
●
mm (8.374 in) ● 25 x In / 1 s 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%)
● Buffer time in case of real-time clock: 1 year min
● Housing depth (incl. ● 100 x In / 10 ms (1 half-
9 terminals): 208 mm
(8.189 in)
wave) supply failure: ≥50 ms
● Power consumption: communication is
9 ● Material, housing:
aluminum extruded section
● At In= 1 A S=0.35 MVA permitted to be interrupted
● At In= 5 A S=0.35 MVA ● Max. permissible making
9 ● Material, front panel:
aluminum/foil front
● Frequency range: 50 Hz / current:
60 Hz ± 10% ● 18 A peak value for
9 Mounting position:
●
horizontal (±45° around the

● Terminals: screw-type <0.25 ms
X-axis must be permitted) terminals with integrated ● 12 A peak value for
9 ● Weight: approx. 4.2 kg
short-circuiters (contacts) <1 ms
(9.259 lb)
● Screws: M4, captive type
9 acc. to VDEW
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Digital Inputs Supervision Contact (SC) ● Current mode RS-485
● Max. Input voltage: ● Continuous current: ● Range: 0–20 mA ● Master/slave: slave 9
300 Vdc / 259 Vac 5 A AC/DC Max. load resistance: Connection: 6 screw-
9
● ●
● Input current: <4 mA ● Max. switch-on current: 1 k ohm clamping terminals RM 3.5
Reaction time: <20 ms 15 A AC / 15 A DC for 4 s Voltage mode range: 0–10 mm (138 MIL) (terminating
9
● ●
● Drop-out time: ● Max. breaking current: V maximum output current resistors internal)
● 5 A AC up to 250 Vac 20 mA
Shorted inputs: <30 ms
9
●
Fiber Optic
● Open inputs: <90 ms ● 5 A DC up to 30 Vdc ● Accuracy 0.5% of the
nominal value 20 mA resp. ● Master/slave: slave
(resistive)
Relay Output Contacts ● 0.25 A at 250 Vdc 10 V ● Connection: ST-Plug 9
Continuous current: (resistive) ● Influence of temperature
9
●
to accuracy: <1% (within URTD-Interface
5 A AC/DC ● Max. switching voltage:
the range of 0 °C to +60 °C ● Connection: versatile link
● Max. make current: 250 Vac / 250 Vdc
● 25 A AC / 25 A DC for ● Switching capacity:
(+32 °F to +140 °F)
Boot Phase 9
1250 VA
● Test voltage of outputs
4s
● 30 A / 230 Vac according ● Contact type: Form C
(one group) against other
electrical groups: 2.5 kV
After switching on the power
supply, the protection will be 9
to ANSI IEEE Std ● Terminals: screw-type available in approximately 19
Test voltage of outputs
9
●
C37.90-2005 terminals (one group) against ground: seconds. After approximately
● 30 A / 250 Vdc according 1.0 kV 165 seconds, the boot phase
to ANSI IEEE Std Analog Outputs is completed (HMI and 9
C37.90-2005 The following technical data Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X communication initialized).
● Max. breaking current: only apply to devices, which
are equipped with analog
● Nominal Input Voltage: 5 V 9
● 5 A AC up to 240 Vac ● Connection: screw-type
● 5 A DC up to 30 V
outputs. Please refer to the
order code of your device. terminals (twisted pair) 9
(resistive)
● Continuous current: The mode of each output can Zone Interlocking 9
5 A AC/DC be individually selected ● Zone Out:
● Contact Type: Form C or between current or voltage
output. Shielded cable for the
● Output voltage (High): 9
normally open contact 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
analog outputs is recommended.
● Terminals: screw-type The terminals of the HF
● Output voltage (Low):
0.0 to +0.5 Vdc
9
terminals shield should be used, when
connecting the shield to the ● Zone In: 9
ground on both sides of the ● Nominal input voltage:
cable is not possible. On one
side of the cable the shield
+5 Vdc 9
● Max. input voltage:
has to be directly connected
to ground. In case of the use ●
+5.5 Vdc
Switching threshold ON:
9
of unshielded twisted pair
cables, the length must not ●
min. 4.0 Vdc
Switching threshold
9
exceed 10 m. All analog
outputs have a common
●
OFF: max. 1.5 Vdc
Galvanic isolation: 2.5 kV
9
potential. Each output has an
own common terminal.
●
AC (to ground and other IO)
Connection: screw-type
9
terminals (twisted pair)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Typical AC Connections—Wye (or Delta) VTs, 5 A CTs, Ground Current Measured by 4th Zero Sequence CT,
and 87 Motor Differential
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9
Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Contents
9 ETR-4000
Description Page
Digitrip 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9

ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
V3-T9-230

9
9
9
9
9 ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
Eaton’s ETR-4000 The maintenance mode The ETR-4000 transformer
9 transformer protection
relay is a multi-functional,
microprocessor-based relay mitigation to change to an a real-time clock with 1 ms
9 for two winding transformers alternate settings group, time resolution. The relay will
of all voltage levels. The set to have instantaneous log 300 sequence of event
9 ETR-4000 provides phase and elements only. records, 20 detailed trip logs,
ground percentage restrained minimum/maximum values,
An integral keypad and
9 differential protection using
a variable dual slope display is provided for direct
load profiles, breaker wear
information and oscillography
characteristic with phase, user programming and
9
data.
negative, residual and neutral retrieval of data without
overcurrent elements for the need of a computer. The ETR-4000 has eight
9 backup protection. It can also Fourteen programmable
LEDs provide quick indication
programmable binary inputs,
4 normally opened and
be used to provide restrained
9 differential protection to large
motors and generators.
of relay status. 4 Form C heavy-duty outputs
and one Form C signal alarm
A front port is provided for relay. It can be powered from
9 The ETR-4000 has eight direct computer connection.
19 Vdc to 300 Vdc or 40 Vac
current inputs rated for either to 250 Vac auxiliary power.
9 5 amperes or 1 ampere to port on the back is standard
monitor both sides of the
using Modbus-RTU. An
9 transformers. The CTs can
be connected in wye in both optional Ethernet port and
sides of the transformer; protocols are available.
9 the relay automatically Flash memory is used for the
compensates for the programming and all settings
9 connection of the transformer are stored in nonvolatile
and CT mismatch errors. memory. The relay allows for
9 four preprogrammed setting
groups that can be activated
9 through software, the display
or a contact input.
9
Protective Relays
9.3
● Flexible phase and ground Features ● Two breaker failure ● Remote communication 9
differential protection for elements (50BF[1] port:
two winding transformers, Protection Features and 50BF[2]) ● RS-232 9
large motors and ● Dual-slope percentage ● Phase transformer RS-485
9
●
generators restrained current overload protection (49)
differential with ● Protocols:
● Complete protection and ● Switch onto fault
control in a single compact magnetizing inrush and
overexcitation blocking protection
●
●
Modbus-RTU
Modbus-TCP (Optional)
9
case to reduce panel ● Cold load pickup
(87R)
space, wiring and costs
● Unrestrained current ● Zone interlocking for bus
● Configuration software 9
● Integral test function protection (87B)
differential (87H) Protection and
reduces maintenance
time and expense ● Restricted ground fault/ Control Functions 9
Metering Features Eaton’s ETR-4000
Ground Differential (87GD)
Zone selective interlocking
9
●
● Amperes: positive, transformer protection
improves coordination and ● Phase overcurrent relay has been designed for
negative and zero
tripping time, and saves (elements can be assigned maximum user flexibility and
money compared to a to either side of the
●
sequence
Ampere demand
simplicity. The ETR-4000 is 9
traditional bus differential transformer): suitable for application on
scheme ● Four instantaneous ● Current phase angles small, medium and large two
winding power transformers.
9
● Reduce troubleshooting elements with timers ● % THD I
time and maintenance (50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3]
and 50P[4])
● Magnitude THD I Multiple current inputs are 9
costs. Trip and event ● Minimum/maximum used to provide primary
recording in non-volatile
memory provides detailed
● Four inverse time
recording protection, control and
back-up protection of 9
● Trending transformers, including
information for analysis
and system restoration.
(51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3]
and 51P[4])
● RTD Temperatures with current differential, restricted
ground differential and
9
6000 cycles of waveform remote URTD
9
● 11 standard curves overcurrent protection.
capture aids in post fault ● Inrush Blocking Monitoring Features
analysis (viewable using Dual-Slope Percent Differential
9
●
PowerPort-E software) ● Trip coil monitor for both Protection
delay reset primary and secondary
● Minimum replacement The primary protective
breakers
Negative sequence phase
9
●
time. Removable terminal element for transformer
blocks ideal for industrial overcurrent (elements can ● Breaker wear primary and protection is the percent
be assigned to either side secondary (accumulated differential element, which
●
environments
Front RS-232 port and
of the transformer): interrupted current) compares the current 9
● Two inverse time ● Oscillography entering the primary and
PowerPort-E software
provides local computer overcurrent elements (7200 cycles total)
leaving the secondary of the
transformer. The ETR-4000
9
access and user-friendly (51Q[1] and 51Q[2]) ● Fault data logs has built in compensation
Windows-based interface ● 11 standard curves (up to 20 events) for the turns-ratio and the 9
for relay settings, ● Instantaneous or time ● Sequence of events report phase shift of the
configuration and delay reset (up to 300 events) transformer, so it's not
necessary to compensate for
9
data retrieval ● Ground overcurrent ● Clock (1 ms time stamping) the transformer connection
● Breaker open/close from
relay faceplate or remotely
(elements can be assigned ● Trip Cause displays fault by the connection of the CTs. 9
to either side of the recorder data on HMI after
●
via communications
Fast an easy
transformer): fault event
The current differential
element looks at the vector 9
● Two instantaneous difference between the
troubleshooting, improved
maintenance procedures
measured elements
with timers (50X[1]
Control Functions current entering and leaving
the zone of protection. If the
9
● Breaker open/close both
and increased device and 50X[2])
security. Provides detailed ● Two instantaneous ●
breakers
Remote open/close
difference exceeds a pre-
determined amount, the 9
traceability for system calculated elements element will operate.
configuration changes with timers (50R[1]
● Programmable I/O
The operating characteristic 9
● Relays self-diagnostics and and 50R[2])
of the percent differential
reporting improves uptime ● Two inverse time
● Multiple setting groups element is a dual-slope 9
and troubleshooting overcurrent measured ● Cold load pickup characteristic to
● Breaker trip circuit
monitoring improves the
elements (51X[1] ● CT supervision
accommodate for CT
saturation and CT errors. 9
and 51X[2])
reliability of the breaker
operation
● Two inverse time Communication Features 9
overcurrent calculated ● Local HMI
elements (51R[1]
and 51R[2])
● Password protected 9
● Addressable
11 standard curves
9
●
● IRIG-B
● Instantaneous or time ● Local communication port
delay reset
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristic 9
Protective Relays
Harmonic Restraints Unrestrained Differential Negative Sequence Overcurrent Maintenance Mode

9 There are certain conditions An unrestrained differential Since this element does The Maintenance Mode can
like energizing one side of the element is provided for fast not respond to balanced improve safety by providing a
9 transformer with the other tripping on heavy internal load or three-phase faults, simple and reliable method to
side de-energized (inrush faults to limit catastrophic the negative-sequence reduce fault clearing time and
9 currents) or the paralleling damage to the transformer overcurrent element may lower incident energy levels
of two transformers and minimize risks to the provide the desired at energized panels. The
9 (sympathetic currents) that
can create false differential
remainder of the power
system.
overcurrent protection. This
is particularly applicable to
9 currents. These differential
currents if not recognized can Restricted Ground Fault
delta-wye grounded
transformers where only
password protected soft
cause a false trip; in the case Ground differential protection 58% of the secondary p.u. key, communications or
9 of inrush conditions or is applied to transformers phase-to-ground fault current via a digital input while
sympathetic currents the having impedance grounded appears in any one primary maintenance work is being
9 differential current is
characterized by a heavy
wye windings. It is intended phase conductor. Backup performed at an energized
to provide sensitive ground protection can be particularly panel or device. The more
9 content of 2nd and 4th
harmonic currents. The
fault detection for low
magnitude fault currents,
difficult when the wye is
impedance grounded. A
sensitive settings provide
greater security for
percentage differential negative-sequence element maintenance personnel and
9 element is desensitize either
which would not be detected
by the main percent can be used in the primary helps reduce the possibility
permanently (stationary differential element. supply to the transformer and of injury.
9 conditions) or temporarily set as sensitively as required
(transient conditions), to protect for secondary
9 whenever the 2nd or 4th
harmonic exceed the value
phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase faults. This element
Sequence of Events Records
The ETR-4000 protection
9 programmed into the relay. should be set to coordinate
with the low-side phase and
relay records a maximum
Another condition that can of 300 events associated with
ground relays for phase-to-
9 create a false differential
current is a sudden change of
ground and phase-to-phase
classified as a change of state
faults. The negative
9 voltage or frequency, that can
put the transformer in an
sequence element must
These include relay pickups,
also be set higher than the
overexcitation state. In this dropouts, trips, contact
9 case there is high content of Restricted Ground Fault
negative-sequence current
due to unbalanced loads.
closure, alarms, setting
5th harmonic currents. The changes and self-diagnostic
9 percentage differential Overcurrent Elements
Breaker Failure
failures. Each event is date
element is also desensitized The ETR-4000 can be used and time stamped to a 1 ms
The ETR-4000 transformer
9 when the 5th harmonic
content exceeds a predefined
to provide backup for
transformer and adjacent
protection relay includes two
stored in a FIFO in
breaker failure (50BF, 62BF) chronological order.
9 value. power system equipment.
Instantaneous overcurrent
elements that can be initiated
from either an internal or Trip Log
elements can be used for fast
9 clearing of severe internal or
external trip signal. These are
independent elements that
external (through) faults. relay will store a maximum of
9 Time overcurrent protection
elements per winding allow log. Each trip record will be
9 coordinating with the
adjacent protection zones and
date and time stamped to a
1 ms resolution. The trip
9
acting as a backup protection. log record will include
the protective function
There are 11 user-selectable information on the type of
reset times.
inverse-time overcurrent fault, protection elements
9 Dynamic Rise of the Operating
curve characteristics. The that operated, fault location
Characteristic user can select from the and currents at the time of
9 ANSI, IEC or thermal curve
families and can select
the fault.
9 instantaneous or time delay

reset characteristics.
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Waveform Capture Programmable I/O Waveform Capture record is 600 cycles. The
The ETR-4000 transformer The ETR-4000 transformer (Quality Manager) waveform capture is initiated 9
protection relay provides protection relay provides The ETR-4000 relay provides by up to 8 different triggers
oscillography-recording heavy-duty, trip-rated, 4 oscillographic recording (i.e., trip/alarm events) or 9
capabilities. The relay will normally open and 4 Form C capabilities. The relay will manually via communications
record all measured signals contacts. Two isolated inputs record all measured signals
or the HMI. PowerPort-E
9
along with the binary signals can be used for monitoring
of pickup, trip, logic and
contact closures. The ETR-
the trip circuits. One Form C
and contact inputs. The ETR-
retrieve the records. Quality
Manager is a separate 9
4000 can record up to 7200 software program downloaded
9
4000 relay can record up to relay failure alarm function
6000 cycles of data. The and is operated in a normally cycles of data. The number of with PowerPort-E used for
number of records is energized (fail-safe) mode. records is proportional to the analyzing the waveform and
proportional to the size of There are eight user- programmed size of each trending files retrieved from 9
each record; the maximum configurable discrete inputs record; the maximum size per the relay.
size per record is 600 cycles.
The waveform capture is
that accept a wet contact
and can operate through a
9
triggers; it can also be
wide range of power. Each
input and output is user- 9
generated manually through programmable for maximum
the display or via application flexibility. 9
communications.
Communication Software 9
Integral User Interface PowerPort-E
The front panel user interface PowerPort-E is the software 9
has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD program used to configure
illumination for wide angle
off-line protection setting files
9
viewing in all light conditions. PowerPort-E is also used for
Fourteen programmable LEDs viewing measured values of 9
provide quick and easy visual the relays in real-time,
display of power on, mode uploading/downloading 9
of operation, alarm and trip setting files, and retrieving
indication. Soft keys are
provided for operation mode
records.
9
selection, scrolling through
data and settings. In addition, 9
functions are password 9
protected.
9
9
Design Standards
● Generic Standard: 9
● EN 61000-6-2
● EN 61000-6-3 9
● Product Standard:
● IEC 60255-6 9
● EN 50178
● UL 508 (Industrial 9
Control Equipment)
● CSA C22.2 No. 14-95 9
(Industrial Control
Equipment) 9
● ANSI C37.90
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9 The catalog number ETR-4000
9 the electrical characteristics (A)–8 Digital Inputs, (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
and operation features 9 Output Relays
(A)–Without Conformal
9 included in the ETR-4000. (0)–5 A / 1 A phase and ground Coating
For example, if the catalog CTs, Power Supply Range:
9 number is ETR-4000-2A0BA1,
the device would have the
19-300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac (1)–Projection Panel Mount
9 following:
9 ETR-4000 Eaton Transformer Protection Relay
9 ETR-4000-2A 0 B A 1
9
9 A = 8 DI, 9 outputs, removable terminals,
2 zone interlocking, URTD interface, IRIG-B,
0 = Standard mount
small display Communication Options Conformal Coating
9 B = 4 DI, 5 outputs, removable terminals,
IRIG-B, small display
Options
9
C = 8 DI, 5 outputs, removable terminals, D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST B = Conformal coated
1 zone interlocking, IRIG-B, small display E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485 circuit boards
9 Hardware Option 2
H = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, ground current 5 A / 1 A, I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
9 power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
over Ethernet RJ-45
0.5 A / 0.1 A, power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, Ethernet
9 40–250 Vac L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
9
9
Climatic Environmental Routine Test Plug-in Connector with Control Power Supply
9 Conditions ● Insulation test according to Integrated Short-Circuiter
● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc/
● Storage temperature: IEC 60255-5: All tests to be 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%)
9 –22 °F to +158 °F
(–30 °C to +70 °C)
● Nominal current: 1 A and
5A
● Buffer time in case of
supply failure: ≥50 ms
–40 °F to +140 °F ●
circuits
Aux. voltage supply, digital
capacity: 4 x In/
interrupted communication
continuously
9 ●
(–40 °C 1 to +60 °C)
Permissible humidity at ●
inputs: 2.5 kV (eff.)/50 Hz
Current measuring inputs, ● Overcurrent withstand: ●
is permitted
Maximum permissible
9 signal relay outputs: 2.5 kV 30 x In/10 s making current:
●
(on 56d up to 95% rel.) (eff.)/50 Hz ● 100 x In/1 s ● 18 A peak value for
● Permissible installation
9
● Voltage measuring inputs: ● 250 x In/10 ms <0.25 ms
altitude: 3.0 kV (eff.)/50 Hz (1 half-wave) ● 12 A peak value for
● 6,561.67 ft (<2000 m) All wire-bound <1 ms
9
●
● Screws: M4, captive type
above sea level communication interfaces: acc. to VDEW ● The voltage supply must
● If 13,123.35 ft (4000 m) 1.5 kV DC be protected by a fuse of:
9 Connection cross sections:
●
altitude applies, a ● 2.5 A time-lag miniature

Housing
● 2 x AWG 14 (1 x or 2 x
changed classification fuse approx. 0.2 x 0.8 in
2.5 mm2) with wire
9 of the operating and test ● Material, housing:
end ferrule (5 x 20 mm) according to
voltages may be Aluminum extruded IEC 60127
2 x AWG 12 (1 x or 2 x
9
●
necessary section
4.0 mm2) with ring cable ● 3.5 A time-lag miniature
● Material, front panel: fuse approx. 0.25 x
Degree of Protection EN 60529 sleeve or cable sleeve
9 ● HMI front panel with ●
Aluminum/foil front
Mounting position:
● 2 x AWG 10 (1 x or 2 x 1.25 in (6.3 x 32 mm)
seal: IP54 6 mm2) with ring cable
9 ● Rear side terminals: IP30
Horizontal (±45° around
the X-axis must be
permitted)
9 Note
1 Display will stop working at –20 °C.
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Power Consumption ● Un = 110/120 Vac/Vdc Relay Outputs Front Interface RS-232
● Power supply range: – Switching threshold ● Continuous current: ● Baud rates: 115,200 baud 9
19–300 Vdc 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc/ 5 A AC/DC Handshake: RTS and CTS
9
●
● Power consumption 88.0 Vac ● Maximum make current: ● Connection: 9-pole

in idle mode—7 W – Switching threshold 25 A AC/25 A DC up to D-Sub plug
9
●
● Maximum power 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc/ 30 V for 4s

consumption—13 W 44.0 Vac RS-485
● 30 A/230 Vac according
● Power supply range:
● Un = 230/240 Vac/Vdc to ANSI IEEE Std. ● Master/slave: slave 9
40–250 Vac (for – Switching threshold C37.90-2005 ● Connection: 6 screw-
frequencies of 40–70 Hz) 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc/ ● 30 A/250 Vdc according clamping terminals RM 138 9
● Power consumption 184 Vac to ANSI IEEE Std. MIL (3.5 mm) (terminating
in idle mode—7 W – Switching threshold
4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc/
C37.90-2005 resistors internal) 9
● Maximum power ● Maximum breaking
consumption—13 W
●
92 Vac
current: Zone Interlocking
● Nominal input level: 5 V
9
● 5 A AC up to 125 Vac
9
Real-Time Clock terminal ● Nominal output level: 5 V
● 5 A DC up to 30 V
● Running reserve of (resistive) ● Connection: Screw-type
Current and Ground
the real-time clock:
1 year minimum
Current Measurement ● 0.3 A DC at 300 V terminals (twisted pair)
9
● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A ● Maximum switching Standards
Display ● Max. measuring range: voltage: 250 Vac/250 Vdc
High Voltage Tests (IEC 60255-6)
9
● Display type: LCD with ● Up to 40 x In (phase ● Switching capacity:
LED background currents) 1250 VA ● High frequency
interference test: 9
illumination ● Up to 25 x In (ground ● Contact type: changeover
IEC 60255-22-1 Class 3
9
●
● Resolution graphics current standard) contact or normally
display: 128 x 64 pixel open contact – Within one circuit—
● Up to 2.5 x In (ground
● LED type: Two colored— current sensitive) ● Terminals: screw-type
terminals
1 kV/2 s
– Circuit to ground—
9
red/green ● Continuous loading
2.5 kV/2 s
● Number of LEDs, housing capacity: 4 x In/
continuously
Supervision Contact (SC) – Circuit to circuit— 9
B2: 15
Continuous current: 5 A at 2.5 kV/2 s
9
●
● Overcurrent proof:
Digital Inputs 120/240 Vac or 30 Vdc ● Insulation voltage test:
● 30 x In/10 s ● Maximum switch-on IEC 60255-5, EN 50178
9
●
● Maximum input voltage: ● 100 x In/1 s
300 Vdc/270 Vac current: 15 A at 120/240 – All circuits to other
● 250 x In/10 ms Vac or 30 Vdc (max. 4 s) circuits and exposed
Input current: <4 mA
9
●
(1 half-wave) ● Maximum breaking conductive parts:
● Reaction time: <20 ms ● Power consumption: current: 2.5 kV (eff.)/50 Hz,
● Fallback time: <30 ms ● Phase current inputs ● 5 A at 120/240 Vac 1 min. 9
(Safe state of the – At In = 1 A or 30 Vdc – Except interfaces:
digital inputs) S = 0.15 MVA ● 0.4 A at 125 Vdc 1.5 kV DC, 1 min. 9
– At In = 5 A ● Contact type: – Voltage measuring
4 switching thresholds:
9
●
S = 0.15 MVA 1 changeover contact input: 3 kV (eff.)/
Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, 50 Hz, 1 min.
60 Vdc, 110 Vac/Vdc,
● Ground current input ● Terminals: screw-type
230 Vac/Vdc – At In = 1 A terminals
● Impulse voltage test:
● IEC 60255-5: 5 kV/0.5J,
9
● Un = 24 Vdc S = 0.35 MVA
– Switching threshold – At In = 5 A
S = 0.35 MVA
Time Synchronization IRIG
● Nominal input voltage: 5 V
1.2/50 μs
9
1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
● Frequency range: 50 Hz/
60 Hz ±10%
● Connection: Screw-type
9
1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc
● Un = 48–60 Vdc
● Terminals: Screw-type
terminals with integrated
9
2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc 9
2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc 9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
EMC Immunity Tests Environmental Tests Mechanical Tests Tolerances

9 ● Fast transient disturbance Classification Test Fc: Vibration response test Tolerances of the Real-
immunity test (burst):
9 ● IEC 60255-22-4: Power
● IEC 60068-1: Climatic—
0/055/56
● IEC 60068-2-6,
IEC 60255-21-1, Class 1:
Time Clock
● Resolution: 1 ms
supply, mains inputs—
9 ±4 kV, 2.5 kHz
● IEC 60721-3-1: ● Displacement: (10 Hz–
59 Hz)—0.0014 in
● Tolerance:
● Classification of ambient ● <1 minute/month
● IEC 61000-4-4 Class 4:
9 Other inputs and conditions (storage)—
1K5/1B1/1C1L/1S1/1M2 ●
(0.035 mm)
Acceleration: (59 Hz– ●
(68 °F [+20 °C])
<±1 ms if synchronized
outputs—
9 ±2 kV, 5 kHz (coupling
network) ●
but min. –13 °F (–25 °C)
IEC 60721-3-2: ●
150 Hz)—0.5 gn
Number of cycles in
via IRIG-B
Tolerances of the Measured

9 ● ANSI C37.90.1: ± 4 kV, Classification of ambient each axis: 1
conditions (transportation) Value Acquisition
2.5 kHz (coupling clamp)
—2K3/2B1/2C1/2S1/2M2 Test Fc: Vibration endurance test Phase and ground current
9 ● Surge Immunity Test:
● IEC 60721-3-3: ● IEC 60068-2-6, measuring
● IEC 61000-4-5 Class 4 Classification of ambient IEC 60255-21-1, Class:
9 Maximum measuring
●
– Within one circuit— conditions (Stationary use ● Acceleration: (10 Hz–
2 kV range:
at weather protected 150 Hz)—1.0 gn Up to 40 x In (phase
9
●
– Circuit to ground— locations)—3K6/3B1/3C1/ ● Number of cycles in
4 kV 3S1/3M2 but min. 32 °F currents)
each axis: 20 ● Up to 25 x In (ground
9 ● Electrical discharge
immunity test:
(0 °C) and 3K8H for 2 h
Test Ea: Shock test
current standard)
Test ad: Cold ● Up to 2.5 x In (earth
9 IEC 60255-22-2: Air
●
● IEC 60068-2-27,
discharge—8 kV ● IEC 60068-2-1: current sensitive)
IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1
Note: The precision does not
9 IEC 61000-4-2 Class 3: Temperature—
● ●
● Shock response test: depend on the nominal value but
Contact discharge—6 kV –4 °F (–20 °C) 5 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses is referenced to 100 mA (with In
9
● Radiated radio frequency ● Test duration—16 h in each direction =1 A) respectively.
electromagnetic field ● Shock resistance test: 500 mA (with In = 5 A)
immunity test Test Bd: Dry heat
15 gn, 11 ms, 3 impulses
9 ● IEC 61000-4-3: 26 MHz – ● IEC 60068-2-2: in each direction
80 MHz—10 V/m 60 Hz ±10%
Temperature—
9
●
● Class X: 80 MHz– 131 °F (55 °C) Test Eb: Shock endurance test ● Accuracy: Class 0.5
1 GHz—35 V/m ● Relative humidity— ● IEC 60068-2-29, ● Amplitude Error if I < 1 In:
9 ● ANSI C37.90.2: 1 GHz– <50% IEC 60255-21-2, Class 1 ±0.5% of the rated value
3 GHz—10 V/m ● Test duration—72 h ● Shock endurance test: ● Amplitude Error if I > In:
9 ● Immunity to conducted
Test cab: Damp heat
10 gn, 16 ms, 1000 ±0.5% of the measured
value
disturbances induced by impulses in each
9 radio frequency fields: (steady state) direction ● Amplitude Error if I > 2 In:
±1.0% of the measured
● IEC 61000-4-6 Class 3: ● IEC 60068-2-78: Test Fe: Earthquake test
9 10 V ● Temperature— ● IEC 60068-3-3, KTA 3503, ●
value
Resolution: 0.01 A
● Power frequency magnetic 104 °F (40 °C) IEC 60255-21-3, Class 2
9 field immunity test: ● Relative humidity—93% ● Single axis earthquake
● Harmonics: Up to 20%
3rd harmonic ±1%
● IEC 61000-4-8: ● Test duration—56d vibration test:
9 Continues—30 A/m
Test Db: Damp heat (cyclic) – 3–7 Hz: horizontal
● Up to 20% 5th harmonic
±1%
● Class 4: 3 sec—300 A/m
0.394 in (10 mm),
9 Frequency influence:
●
● IEC 60068-2-30: 1 cycle each axis
EMC Emission Tests < ±2% / Hz in the range of
● Temperature— – 7–35 Hz: horizontal: ±5 Hz of the parametrized
9 Radio interference
●
131 °F (55 °C) 2 gn, 1 cycle each axis nominal frequency
suppression test: ● Relative humidity—95% ● Temperature influence:
9 IEC/CISPR11—
●
Limit value class B

● Cycles (12 + 12-hour)—2 < ±1% within the range
of +32 °F to +140 °F
9 Radio interference
●
(0 °C to +60 °C)
radiation test:
IEC/CISPR11—
9
●
Limit value class B
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Wiring Diagrams
9
Typical AC Connections Delta-Wye Transformer with Wye CTs and Neutral CT
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9 Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
7.07
9 (179.5)
9
9
9
9 8.16
5.56 (207.3)
9 (141.1) 1.08 6.00
9.72 (27.4) (152.4)
9 (246.9) 4.80
(122.0)
9
9 6.14
(156.0)
8.70 7.12
9 (221.0) (180.8)
3.56
9 (90.4)
9
2.50
9 (63.5)
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
7.07 9
(179.5)
9
9
9
9
7.49
7.75
(197.0)
9
(190.3)
9.72
(246.9)
6.74 0.88
3.88
(98.6) 9
(171.2) (22.3)
9
9
8.70 6.14 4.88
(221.0) (156.0) (124.0)
4.94
(125.5) 9
9
9
0.56
(14.2) 9
9
ETR-4000 Housing B2
Shipping Weight 9
Width Height Depth 1 Lbs (kg)
6.81 (173.0) 8.37 (212.7) 8.19 (208.0) 9.3 (4.2) 9
Note
1 Includes terminals. 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Contents
Description Page
Digitrip 3000. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9

V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
Eaton’s ETR-5000 The ETR-5000 transformer The maintenance mode Flash memory is used for the
9 transformer protection relay
is a multi-functional,
relay provides all required
protection, control,
microprocessor-based relay monitoring and metering for mitigation to change to an memory.
9 for two winding transformers any size two winding alternate settings group, set
The ETR-5000 generator
of all voltage levels. The ETR- transformer in a single, to have instantaneous
9 5000 provides phase and compact case. The relay has elements only. protection relay has mass
ground percentage restrained eight current inputs rated for
An integral keypad and a real-time clock with 1 ms
9 differential protection using a
variable dual slope
either 5 amperes or 1 ampere
and four voltage inputs. The display is provided for direct time resolution. The relay will
characteristic with phase, CTs can be connected in wye user programming and log 300 sequence of event
9 residual, and neutral in both sides of the retrieval of data without the records, 20 detailed trip logs,
directional overcurrent transformer; the relay need of a computer. Fourteen minimum/maximum values,
9 elements for backup automatically compensates programmable LEDs provide
quick indication of relay
information and waveform
protection. Negative for the connection of the
9 sequence overcurrent
elements, three phase over/
transformer, and CT
mismatch errors.
status. data.
A front port is provided for The ETR-5000 has eight
9 under voltage, voltage
unbalance, current unbalance, Three of the voltage inputs direct computer connection.
An RS-485 and an Ethernet
programmable binary inputs,
2 analog inputs, 2 analog
over/under and rate-of- are to be connected to the
9 change frequency, vector three-phase power voltage ports in the back are optional
outputs, 1 zone intelorking
card or eight programmable
surge, directional VARs, for voltage protection and for
using. Optional Modbus-RTU, binary inputs, and 2 zone
9 directional power, and metering. They can be
connected in wye-ground Modbus-TCP, or IEC-61850 interlocking cards. It has 2
overexcitation are standard protocols are supported. normally opened and 6 Form
or open delta configuration.
9 functions.
The fourth voltage is for The ETR-5000 transformer
C heavy-duty outputs and one
independent single-phase Form C signal alarm relay.
9 undervoltage/overvoltage programmable logic
The ETR-5000 can be
powered from 19 Vdc to
protection. functions. Logic gates and
9 timers may be defined and
300 Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac
auxiliary power.
arranged for customized
9 applications. Programmable
logic control functions make
9 the ETR-5000 very flexible.
Protective Relays
9.3
Eaton’s ETR-5000 Harmonic Restraints
9
transformer protection relay
has been designed for
There are certain conditions
like energizing one side of the 9
maximum user flexibility and transformer with the other
simplicity. The ETR-5000 is side de-energized (inrush 9
suitable for application on currents) or the paralleling of
small, medium, and large two
winding power transformers.
two transformers 9
(sympathetic currents) that
Multiple current inputs are
used to provide primary
can create false differential
currents. These differential
9
protection, control and back-
up protection of transformers,
currents if not recognized can
cause a false trip; in the case 9
including current differential, of inrush conditions or
restricted ground differential, sympathetic currents the 9
and overcurrent protection. differential current is
Dual-Slope Percent
characterized by a heavy 9
content of 2nd and 4th
Differential Protection
The primary protective
harmonic currents. The
percentage differential
Dual-Slope Operating Characteristic
9
element for transformer element is desensitize either
protection is the percent permanently (stationary 9
differential element, which conditions) or temporarily
compares the current (transient conditions), 9
entering the primary and whenever the 2nd or 4th
leaving the secondary of the
transformer. The ETR-5000
harmonic exceed the value
programmed into the relay.
9
has built in compensation for
the turns-ratio and the phase Another condition that can 9
shift of the transformer, so create a false differential
it’s not necessary to current is a sudden change of 9
compensate for the voltage or frequency, that can
transformer connection by
the connection of the CTs.
put the transformer in an
overexcitation state. In this
9
case there is high content of
The current differential 5th harmonic currents. The 9
element looks at the vector percentage differential
difference between the element is also desensitized 9
current entering and leaving when the 5th harmonic
the zone of protection. If the
difference exceeds a pre-
content exceeds a predefined
value.
9
determined amount, the Dynamic Rise of the Operating Characteristic.
element will operate. Unrestrained Differential 9
The operating characteristic
of the percent differential
An unrestrained differential
element is provided for fast 9
tripping on heavy internal
element is a dual-slope
characteristic to faults to limit catastrophic 9
accommodate for CT damage to the transformer
saturation and CT errors. and minimize risks to the
remainder of the power
9
system.
9
Restricted Ground Fault
Ground differential protection 9
is applied to transformers
having impedance grounded 9
wye windings. It is intended
to provide sensitive ground 9
fault detection for low
magnitude fault currents,
which would not be detected
9
by the main percent
differential element. 9
Restricted Ground Fault 9
9
Protective Relays
Directional Overcurrent Negative Sequence Overcurrent Voltage Protection Reverse VARs

9 Elements Since this element does not The ETR-5000 transformer Reverse VARs can be used to
The ETR-5000 can be used to respond to balanced load or protection relay has four detect loss of excitation in
9 provide backup for three-phase faults, the voltage-input circuits. There is synchronous machines.
transformer and adjacent negative-sequence a three-phase set designated There are three elements to
9 power system equipment.
Instantaneous overcurrent
overcurrent element may as Main Voltage (M) and a be configured: operate in
provide the desired single-phase voltage circuit forward or reverse; or, under
9 elements can be used for fast
clearing of severe internal or
overcurrent protection. This
is particularly applicable to
designated as Auxiliary
Voltage (A). Both include
or over vars conditions.
external (through) faults. Breaker Failure

9 delta-wye grounded
transformers where only
undervoltage (27) and
overvoltage (59) protection. The ETR-5000 transformer
Time overcurrent protection
58% of the secondary p.u. The three-phase voltage protection relay includes two
9 elements per winding allow
coordinating with the
phase-to-ground fault current protection can be set to breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
appears in any one primary operate on a single-phase, 2 elements that can be initiated
9
adjacent protection zones and
phase conductor. Backup out of 3 phases, or all three- from either an internal or
acting as a backup protection.
protection can be particularly phase logic. The Main VTs external trip signal. These are
9 inverse-time overcurrent
difficult when the wye is
impedance grounded. A
also provide phase voltage
unbalance/reversal (47
independent elements that
curve characteristics. The
negative-sequence element negative sequence)
9 user can select from the
ANSI, IEC or thermal curve
can be used in the primary protection. Each element has
supply to the transformer and an independent threshold set must be longer than the
9 families and can select
instantaneous or time delay
set as sensitively as required point and adjustable time breaker operating time and
to protect for secondary delay. the protective function reset
reset characteristics.
9 phase-to-ground or phase-to-
phase faults. This element Flexible Phase Rotation
times.
Phase direction is a function
9 used to supervise all phase
current elements (50, 51). A
should be set to coordinate
with the low-side phase and
The ETR-5000 distribution
protection relay can be
Maintenance Mode
The Maintenance Mode can
ground relays for phase-to-
9
quadrature voltage is applied on either an A-B-C or improve safety by providing a
compared to a corresponding ground and phase-to-phase A-C-B phase rotation. A user simple and reliable method to
phase current to establish the faults. The negative setting permits correct reduce fault clearing time and
9 direction of the fault. This sequence element must also operation and indication of lower incident energy levels
function is selectable to be set higher than the the actual system at energized panels. The
9 operate in the forward,
reverse or both directions.
negative-sequence current
due to unbalanced loads.
configuration. Maintenance Mode allows
9 Ground direction is used to Overexcitation Protection
Frequency Protection
The ETR-5000 relay provides
supervise ground current Transformer overexcitation
9 elements and is occurs when the ratio of
six frequency elements than
can be used to detect under/
communications or via a
digital input while
accomplished by using voltage versus frequency is over frequency, rate of maintenance work is being
9 ground, negative sequence or
residual currents supervised
too high, and the transformer change, and a vector surge performed at an energized
iron saturates due to high flux (decoupling of two systems) panel or device. The more
9
by zero, negative or positive density. High flux density protection on the Main VT sensitive settings provide
sequence voltages or ground results in stray flux in inputs. Each element has an greater security for
current. This function is
9 selectable to operate in
components not designed to
carry it, which in turn causes
independent threshold set
point and adjustable time
forward, reverse or both overheating and can delay. injury.
9 directions. potentially damage the
Directional elements are transformer. This protection Reverse Power
9 dependant on the location of is provided through a Volts/ Reverse power provides
the VTs (primary or secondary Hertz function with a control for power flowing
9 winding) when voltage is programmable inverse time
characteristic.
through a feeder. There are
used as the polarizing three elements to be
9 quantity. configured: operate in
forward or reverse; or, under
9 or over power conditions.
Reverse power is typically
applied to generator or motor
9 applications while under
power is generally applied to
9 load or generation loss.
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Protection Features ● 11 standard curves Metering Features Control Functions
● Dual-slope percentage ● Instantaneous or time ● Phase differential current ● Breaker open/close both 9
restrained current delay reset ● Ground differential current breakers
differential with ● Directional control (all ● Amperes: positive, ● Remote open/close 9
magnetizing inrush and elements) negative and zero ● Programmable I/O
overexcitation blocking
(87R)
● Two breaker failure sequence ● Programmable Logic 9
elements (50BF[1] and ● Ampere demand ● Programmable LEDs
● Unrestrained current
differential (87H)
50BF[2]) ● Volts: positive, negative ● Multiple setting groups 9
● Phase transformer and zero sequence Cold load pickup
9
●
● Restricted ground fault/ overload protection (49)
Ground Differential (87GD)
● Phase angles ● CT supervision
● Phase unbalance negative ● Volt-amperes and VA
Phase overcurrent
9
●
sequence overcurrent demand
(elements can be assigned (46[1], 46[2])) Communication Features
to either side of the ● Watts and kW demand ● Local HMI
transformer):
● Phase voltage unbalance
and sequence protection
● kWh (forward, reverse, ● Password protected 9
● Four instantaneous net)
9
(47[1], 47[2]) ● Addressable
elements with timers ● Main three-phase under/
● VARs and kVAR demand ● IRIG-B
(50P[1], 50P[2], 50P[3] overvoltage (27M[1], ● kVARh (lead, leg and net) Local communication port:
9
●
and 50P[4]) 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) ● Power factor RS-232
● Four inverse time Auxiliary single-phase
●
Volts/Hertz
9
●
under/overvoltage (27A[1], ● % THD V and I port:
(51P[1], 51P[2], 51P[3] 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2])
Magnitude THD V and I RS-485
9
● ●
and 51P[4])
● Six frequency elements Ethernet port
● 11 standard curves; ● Minimum/maximum ●
that can be assigned to:
9
● Inrush blocking recording ● Protocols:
● Instantaneous or time frequency, rate of change,
● Trending (load profile over ● Modbus-RTU
time)
delay reset
Voltage restraint (all
81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5], ● Temperature with remote
● Modbus-TCP (optional) 9
● ● IEC-61850 (optional)
URTD module
9
elements) 81[6]) ● Configuration software
● Directional control (all ● Forward and reverse watts
(32[1], 32[2], 32[3]). Monitoring Features
●
elements)
Negative sequence phase ● Forward and reverse VARs
● Trip coil monitor for both 9
(32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3]) primary and secondary
overcurrent (elements can
be assigned to either side ● Overexcitation, volts-per-
breakers 9
of the transformer): Hertz (24[1], 24[2])
● Breaker wear primary and
● 2 inverse time ● Lockout (86)
9
overcurrent elements Loss of potential-LOP
9
●
(51Q[1] and 51Q[2])

● Oscillography (7200 cycles
● Zone interlocking for bus total)
● 11 standard curves protection (87B)
● Instantaneous or time ● Switch onto fault
● Trip Cause displays fault
recorder data on HMI after
9
delay reset protection
● Ground overcurrent ● Cold load pickup ●
fault event
Fault data logs (up to 20
9
(elements can be assigned events)
to either side of the
● Sequence of events report 9
transformer):
(up to 300 events)
● Two instantaneous
● Clock (1 ms time stamping) 9
measured elements
with timers
(50X[1] and 50X[2])
9
Two instantaneous
9
●
calculated elements
with timers
(50R[1] and 50R[2]) 9
overcurrent measured 9
elements
(51X[1] and 51X[2]) 9
overcurrent calculated
elements
9
(51R[1] and 51R[2])
9
Protective Relays

9
9 The ETR-5000 protection the relays in real-time,
9 300 events associated with setting files, and retrieving
9 classified as a change of state
records.

9 dropouts, trips, contact Manager)
closure, alarms, setting The ETR-5000 relay provides
9 changes and self-diagnostic oscillographic recording
9 and time stamped to a 1 ms
9 stored in a FIFO in of pickup, trip, internal logic,
chronological order. and contact inputs. The ETR- Waveform Capture (Quality Manager)
9 Trip Log cycles of data. The number of Integral User Interface The ETR-5000 also offers two
records is proportional to the The front panel user interface optional analog inputs and
9 relay will store a maximum of programmed size of each
has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD
two optional analog outputs.
The analog inputs are
20 trip records in a FIFO trip available for providing
9 log. Each trip record will be record is 600 cycles. illumination for wide angle
viewing in all light conditions. protection. The analog inputs
date and time stamped to a The waveform capture is are field programmable to
14 programmable LEDs
9 1 ms resolution. The trip log
record will include
initiated by up to 8 different provide quick and easy visual measure transducer signals
triggers (i.e., trip/alarm display of power on, mode of that operate over a range of 0
information on the type of
9 fault, protection elements
communications or the HMI.
operation, alarm and trip to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to
10V. The two optional analog
that operated, fault location indication. Soft keys are
9
PowerPort-E setting software provided for operation mode
and currents and voltages at is used to retrieve the signaling the value of
the time of the fault. selection, scrolling through
records. Quality Manager is a measured analog quantities
9 PowerPort-E
separate software program
data and settings. In addition,
to external process control
downloaded with PowerPort- devices such as PLCs. They
9 PowerPort-E is the software
protected.
can be programmed to
operate over a 0 to 20 mA,
4–20 mA, or 1 to 10 V range.
9
off-line protection setting files retrieved from the relay. Load Profiling/Trending
for all E-Series relay models. The analog outputs can be
PowerPort-E is also used for The ETR-5000 relay configured to signal a
9 automatically records
selected quantities into non-
representation of most
analog quantities measured
9 volatile memory every 5, 10,
15, 30 or 60 minutes,
by the ETR-5000 including,
current, voltages and RTD
9
temperature.
report setting.
Programmable Logic
9 Programmable I/O The ETR-5000 transformer
The ETR-5000 transformer protection relay provides logic
9 protection relay provides gates and timers that the
heavy-duty, trip-rated, 2NO user can customize for
9 and 6 Form C contacts. Two
isolated inputs can be used
Each gate can be assigned a
for monitoring the trip circuit. logic function of either AND,
9 One Form C contact is OR, NAND or NOR. Each
dedicated to the relay failure gate can have a maximum of
9 alarm function and is four input signals and each
PowerPort-E operated in a normally input signal can be required
9 energized (failsafe) mode.
There are up to 8 user-
to be a NOT. Input signals can
via the binary inputs or
9 configurable discrete inputs
that accept a wet contact and internal values associated
can operate through a wide with the protection, alarm or
9 range of power. Each input metering set points. Each
and output is user- gate has a unique output
9 programmable for maximum assignment and designation
that can be used as the input
application flexibility.
to another gate.
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Approvals
Design Standards 9
● Generic Standard:
● EN 61000-6-2 9
● EN 61000-6-3
● Product Standard: 9
● IEC 60255-6
● EN 50178 9
● UL 508 (Industrial
Control Equipment) 9
● CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
(Industrial Control 9
Equipment)
● ANSI C37.90 9
9
9
9
The catalog number ETR-5000 9
the electrical characteristics
and operation features
(A)–8 Digital Inputs,
9 Output Relays
(B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
9
(A)–Without Conformal
included in the ETR-5000.
For example, if the catalog
(0)–5 A / 1 A phase and
ground CTs, Power Supply
Coating 9
number is ETR-5000-2A0BA1, (1)–Projection Panel Mount
the device would have the
Range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250
Vac 9
following:
9
ETR-5000 Eaton Transformer Protection Relay
9
ETR-5000-2A 0 B A 1
9
A = 8 DI, 9 outputs, removable terminals, 0 = Standard mount
2 zone interlocking, URTD interface
B = 8 DI, 9 outputs, 2 AI, 2AO, removable Communication Options Conformal Coating
9
terminals, 1 zone interlocking, URTD interface B = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 Options
C = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
D = PROFIBUS-DP over fiber optic ST
A = None
B = Conformal coated
9
9
Hardware Option 2 E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485 circuit boards
0 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, W1/W2 ground current 5 A / 1 A, F = Modbus RTU or DNP3 RTU over fiber optic ST
power supply range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac G = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over D-Sub / RS-485
1 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, W1 sensitive ground current
0.5 A 0.1 A, W2 Ground current 5A/1A, power supply
I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP 9
over Ethernet RJ-45
9
range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac
2 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, W1 sensitive ground current K = IEC 61850/Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic
0.5 A 0.1 A, W2 Ground current 5A/1A, power supply Ethernet
9
range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
3 = Phase current 5 A / 1 A, W1 / W2 sensitive ground
current 0.5 A / 0.1 A, power supply range:
19–300 Vdc, 40–250 Vac 9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Climatic Environmental Plug-in Connector with Power Consumption Digital Inputs
9 Conditions Integrated Short-Circuiter ● Power supply range: ● Max. Input Voltage:
● Storage temperature: (Conventional current inputs) 19–300 Vdc 300 Vdc / 270 Vac
9 –30 °C to +70 °C
● Nominal current:
● Power consumption ● Input Current: <4 mA
(–22 °F to +158 °F) in idle mode—7 W
1 A and 5 A ● Reaction Time: <20 ms
–20 °C to +60 °C
● Maximum power ● Fallback Time: <30 ms
capacity: consumption—13 W
9 ●
(–4 °F to +140 °F)
4 x In / continuously ● Power supply range: (Safe state of the digital
Inputs)
● Overcurrent withstand: 40–250 Vac (for
9 ann. average: <75% rel.
(on 56d up to 95% rel.) ● 30 x In / 10 s
frequencies of 40–70 Hz) ● 4 Switching thresholds:
● Power consumption Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc,
● 100 x In / 1 s
9 Permissible installation
●
in idle mode—7 W 60 Vdc, 110 Vac / DC, 230
altitude: ● 250 x In / 10 ms Vac / DC
● Maximum power
<2000 m (6,561.67 ft) (1 half-wave)
9
●
consumption—13 W ● Un = 24 Vdc
above sea level ● Screws: M4, captive type
If 4000 m (13,123.35 ft) acc. to VDEW Real Time Clock
9
●
1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vdc
altitude applies, a ● Connection cross sections: ● Running reserve of the real – Switching threshold
changed classification of ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x time clock: 1 year min.
9 the operating and test AWG 14) with wire end ●
1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc
Un = 48 V / 60 Vdc
voltages may be ferrule Display
9 necessary ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x ● Display type: LCD with
2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc
AWG 12) with ring cable LED background
9 Degree of Protection EN 60529
● HMI front panel with seal:
sleeve or cable sleeve illumination – Switching threshold
2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc
● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x ● Resolution—graphics
9
IP54 ● Un = 110 / 120 Vac / Vdc
AWG 10) with ring cable display: 128 x 64 pixel
● Rear side terminals: IP30 sleeve or cable sleeve – Switching threshold
● LED type: two colored:
3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc /
9 Routine Test Control power supply
red/green
88.0 Vac
● Number of LEDs,
● Insulation test acc. to – Switching threshold
9 Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc /
●
Housing B2: 15
IEC 60255-5: All tests to be 48–230 Vac (–20/+10%) 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc
carried out against ground / 44.0 Vac
9 Buffer time in case of
●
and other input and output ● Un = 230 / 240 Vac / dc
supply failure:
circuits. – Switching threshold
9
● Aux. voltage supply, digital 4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc /
voltage
inputs: 2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz 184 Vac
Interrupted
9
●
● Current measuring inputs, – Switching threshold
communication is
signal relay outputs: 4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc /
permitted
9 ●
2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
● Max. permissible making ●
92 Vac
current:
9 ●
3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
All wire-bound
terminal
<0.25 ms
9
1.5 kV DC ● 12 A peak value for
<1 ms
9 Housing ● The voltage supply must
● Housing B2: height/width: be protected by a fuse of:
9 173 mm (6.811 in / 4 U) / ● 2.5 A time-lag miniature
212.7 mm (8.374 in / 42 hp) fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx.
9 ● Housing depth (incl. 1/5 x 0.8 in) according to
IEC 60127
terminals):
9 208 mm (8.189 in) ● 3.5 A time-lag miniature
fuse 6.3 x 32 mm
● Material, housing:
9 aluminum extruded section (approx. 1/4 x 1 1/4 in)
● Material, front panel: according to UL 248-14
9 ●
aluminum/foil front
Mounting position:
9 horizontal (±45° around the
9 Weight: ETR-5000 housing

●
B2: approx. 9.259 lb

(4.2 kg)
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Current and Ground Current Relay Outputs Time Synchronization IRIG
Measurement ● Continuous current: ● Nominal input voltage: 5 V 9
● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A 5 A AC/DC Connection: screw-type
9
●
● Max. measuring range: ● Maximum make current: terminals (twisted pair)

● Up to 40 x In (phase 25 A AC/25 A DC up to
9
●
currents) 30 V for 4 s Front Interface RS-232

● Up to 25 x In (ground ● 30 A/230 Vac according ● Baud rates: 115,200 baud
current standard) to ANSI IEEE Std. ● Handshake: RTS and CTS 9
● Up to 2.5 x In (ground C37.90-2005 ● Connection: 9-pole D-Sub
current sensitive) ● 30 A/250 Vdc according plug 9
● Continuous loading to ANSI IEEE Std.
capacity: 4 x In/ C37.90-2005 RS-485 9
continuously ● Maximum breaking ● Master/slave: slave
● Overcurrent proof: current: ● Connection: 6 screw- 9
● 30 x In / 10 s ● 5 A AC up to 125 Vac clamping terminals RM 3.5
● 100 x In / 1 s ● 5 A DC up to 30 V mm (138 MIL) (terminating
resistors internal)
9
● 250 x In / 10 ms (resistive)
(1 half-wave) ● 0.3 A DC at 300 V Zone Interlocking 9
● Power consumption: ● Maximum switching Nominal input level: 5 V
9
●
● Phase current inputs voltage: 250 Vac/250 Vdc

● Nominal output level: 5 V
– At In = 1 A burden =
9
●
0.15 MVA 1250 VA

– At In = 5 A burden = ● Contact type: changeover
0.15 MVA contact or NO contact 9
● Ground current input ● Terminals: screw-type
– At In = 1 A burden = terminals 9
0.35 MVA
9
Supervision Contact (SC)
– At In = 5 A burden =
0.35 MVA
● Continuous current:
5 A at 120/240 Vac or
● Frequency range: 50 Hz / 30 Vdc 9
60 Hz ±10%
● Maximum switch-on
current: 15 A 120/240 Vac 9
or 30 Vdc (max. 4 s)
● Maximum breaking 9
current:
● 5 A Vac up to 2120/240 9
Vac
● 5 A Vdc up to 30 Vdc 9
● 0.4 A at 125 Vdc
● Contact type: 9
1 changeover contact
terminals
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Wiring Diagrams
9
9 Typical AC Connections—Delta-Wye Transformer with CTs for Phase Overcurrent and Differential on Primary Side (W2) and
Secondary Side (W1), Neutral CT for Ground Fault Protection and Open-Delta VT on Primary Side (W2)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Dimensions
9
Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Projection Mount Front and Side Views 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9 Standard Mount Front and Side Views
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay
9
9
9
9
EGR-5000 Generation Protection Relay 9
Product Description
Eaton’s EGR-5000 generator The EGR-5000 generator An integral keypad and The EGR-5000 generator
9
protection relay is a multi-
functional, microprocessor-
relay provides all required
protection, control,
user programming and
memory for data storage and 9
based relay for any size monitoring and metering for retrieval of data without the a real-time clock with 1 ms
generators. It may be used as any size generators in a need of a computer. Fourteen time resolution. The relay will 9
a primary or backup single, compact case. The programmable LEDs provide log 300 sequence of event
protection in stand by relay has eight current inputs quick indication of relay records, 20 detailed trip logs, 9
generators, and cogeneration rated for either 5 amperes or status. minimum/ maximum values,
applications. The EGR-5000
generator protection relay
1 ampere and four voltage
inputs. Three of the voltage A front port is provided for
information and waveform
9
provides voltage controlled, inputs are to be connected to direct computer connection.
9
data.
voltage restrained, and the three-phase power An RS-485 and an Ethernet
standard directional three voltage for voltage protection ports in the back are optional The EGR-5000 has either
phase overcurrent protection, and for metering. They can be for local area networking
using. Optional Modbus-RTU,
eight programmable binary
inputs, 2 analog inputs, 2
9
as well as directional phase- connected in wye-ground or
residual and independent
ground overcurrent
open delta configuration. The
fourth voltage is for
Modbus-TCP, or IEC-61850
protocols are supported.
analog outputs, or 16
programmable binary inputs. 9
It has 2 normally opened and
protection, and breaker
failure. Three phase over/
undervoltage/overvoltage
The EGR-5000 generator
6 Form C heavy duty outputs 9
under voltage, voltage protection, or 100% ground and one Form C signal alarm
unbalance, current unbalance, protection for a high
programmable logic
functions. Logic gates and
relay. The EGR-5000 can be 9
over/under and rate-of- resistance grounded powered from 19 Vdc to 300
change frequency, vector generator. arranged for customized
Vdc or 40 Vac to 250 Vac
auxiliary power.
9
surge, power factor, applications. Programmable
The maintenance mode
directional VARs, directional
power, loss of excitation, password protected soft key, logic control functions make 9
can be used for arc flash the EGR-5000 very flexible.
overexcitation, phase
differential, ground mitigation to change to an Flash memory is used for the
9
differential, and synch check alternate settings group, set
functions are standard to have instantaneous
elements only. The multiple
memory. 9
functions.
setting groups can also be
changed, via communications 9
or a digital input.
9
Protective Relays
9 Eaton’s EGR-5000 generator used for either the neutral or Reverse Power Voltage Protection
protection relay has been ground current in a three-
9 designed for maximum user phase, four-wire system.
Reverse power provides
control for power flowing
protection relay has four
flexibility and simplicity. The Each of the phase and ground through a generator. There voltage-input circuits. There is
9 EGR-5000 provides overcurrent elements can be are three elements to be a three-phase set designated
comprehensive protection, selected to operate based on configured: operate in as Main Voltage (M) and a
9 metering, and monitoring for
any size synchronous or
fundamental or RMS current. forward or reverse; or, under single-phase voltage circuit
Phase direction is a function or over power conditions. designated as Auxiliary
9 induction generators
operating at 50 or 60 Hz. used to supervise all phase Reverse power is typically
applied to prevent generator
Voltage (A). Both include
undervoltage (27) and
The base relay includes all current elements (50, 51).
9 the standard protection A quadrature voltage is motoring that can cause
damage to the prime mover;
overvoltage (59) protection.
The three-phase voltage
and metering functions. compared to a corresponding
while under power is protection can be set to
9 Protection features found in phase current to establish the
direction of the fault. This
generally applied to load loss operate on a single-phase,
the EGR-5000 include: and prevent an overspeed two out of three phases, or all
function is selectable to
9 Phase Differential Protection operate in the forward,
condition that could damage three-phase logic. The Main
the prime mover. VTs also provide phase
reverse or both directions.
9 This protection provides a
method for rapidly detecting Ground direction is used to Reverse VARs
voltage unbalance/reversal
(47 negative sequence)
internal generator phase-to- protection. Each element
9 phase or phase-to-ground
supervise ground current
elements and is
Reverse vars can be used to
detect loss of excitation in has an independent threshold
faults. After the detection of accomplished by using synchronous machines. set point and adjustable
9 this fault the generator is ground, negative sequence or There are three elements to time delay.
quickly removed from service residual currents supervised be configured: operate in
9 to limit the extent of the
damage. The EGR-5000 uses
by zero, negative or positive forward or reverse; or, under
sequence voltages or ground or over vars conditions.
9 a dual slope percentage
differential scheme;
current. This function is
selectable to operate in Inverse Time Characteristics
advanced CT saturation forward, reverse or both
9 algorithms maintain immunity directions.
inverse-time overcurrent
against external disturbances curve characteristics.
9 and ensures the fault is Voltage Restrained Overcurrent
internal to the generator Voltage restraint reduces the The user can select from the
9 before triggering it to trip. overcurrent pickup level ANSI, IEC or thermal curve
families and can select
(51P[2], 51P[3]), to protect
Ground Differential Protection
9 the distribution system instantaneous or time delay
In low resistance grounded components against reset characteristics.
generators, ground protection
9 may be provided by the 87GD
excessive damage and to
prevent the generator and its Breaker Failure
differential, depending on the auxiliaries from exceeding The EGR-5000 generator
9 fault level and the differential their thermal limitations. This protection relay includes a
relay sensitivity. Higher modification of the pickup breaker failure (50BF, 62BF)
9 sensitivity and fast operation
for ground faults may be
overcurrent level is compared
to the corresponding phase
function that can be initiated
from either an internal or
9 obtained by an additional
zero-sequence differential.
input voltage. The EGR-5000
uses the simple linear model
external trip signal. This is an
independent element that
below to determine the can be used to operate a
9 Directional Overcurrent effective pickup value. lockout relay or trip an
Protection upstream breaker. The timer
9 The EGR-5000 generation Sync Check must be longer than the
protection relay provides The sync-check function is breaker operating time and
9 complete three-phase and
ground directional
provided for double-ended the protective function
reset times.
power source applications.
9 overcurrent protection There
are 14 independent ground
The sync-check monitors
voltage magnitude, phase
overcurrent elements. The
9
angle and slip frequency
ground elements “X” use the between the bus and line.
independently measured It also incorporates breaker
9 ground (or neutral) current close time, dead bus dead
from a separate current- line, dead bus live line and
9 sensing input. The ground
elements “R” uses a
live bus live line features.
calculated 3Io residual current
9 obtained from the sum of the
three-phase currents. This
9 calculated current could be
Protective Relays
9.3
100% Ground Stator Protection Frequency Protection Overexcitation Protection Maintenance Mode
In high impedance grounded Operation of generators at Generator overexcitation The Maintenance Mode can 9
generators, ground fault off-nominal frequencies can occurs when the ratio of improve safety by providing a
protection is provided by the have extremely detrimental voltage versus frequency is simple and reliable method to 9
detection of voltage in the effects on both the generator too high, and the rotor iron reduce fault clearing time and
neutral of the generator by an itself and the associated saturates due to high flux lower incident energy levels 9
overvoltage element (59N) prime mover, in particular density. High flux density at energized panels. The
of the distribution grounding
with steam turbine
generators operating below
results in stray flux in
components not designed to
9
9
transformer, this overvoltage normal frequency. The EGR- carry it, which in turn causes sensitive settings via a
element has to be 5000 relay provides six overheating and can password protected soft key,
desensitized for 3rd harmonic frequency elements than can potentially damage the communication or via a digital
voltages normally present in be used to detect under/over generator. This protection is Input while maintenance 9
the generator. Under normal frequency, rate of change, provided through a Volts/ work is being performed at an
conditions there is no voltage
across the secondary of the
and a vector surge
(decoupling of two systems)
Hertz function with a energized panel or device.
9
programmable inverse time
grounded transformer, when
one of the phases goes to
protection on the Main VT
inputs. Each element has an
characteristic. provide greater security for
maintenance personnel and 9
ground, voltage appears independent threshold set Loss of Excitation helps reduce the possibility of
across the resistor and the point and adjustable time Loss of field protection or injury. 9
overvoltage element delay. loss of excitation is used to
operates, indicating a ground avoid unstable operation, 9
conductor. However, the Inadvertent Energization potential loss of synchronism,
overvoltage element
technique described above
If a generator is inadvertently and possible damage to 9
brought on line with the synchronous generators.
will protect around 90 percent
to 95 percent of the winding.
power system, without being
up to speed and
When a synchronous
generator loses its field, the
9
The last 5–10 percent is synchronized, or it is at generator can continue to
protected by detecting the standstill when the breaker is generate power as an 9
decayed of the 3rd harmonic closed severe damage could induction generator, provided
voltage using a undervoltage occur. The generator will act that it can obtain its excitation 9
element (27TN) tuned to the as an induction motor and from the other machines on
3rd harmonic voltage. In the
EGR-5000 we can provide
very high currents will be
induced in the stator and
the system. During this
condition, the rotor will
9
100% stator ground
protection by measuring the
rotor components, resulting
in rapid overheating and
quickly overheat due to the
slip frequency currents 9
zero sequence voltage damage. induced in it. Loss of
through the 4th voltage input, excitation in one machine 9
and combining the 59N and Negative Sequence Protection could jeopardize the
27A elements. The 27A
element has to be
Negative sequence operation of other machines 9
overcurrent protection beyond their capability, and
programmed to operate for
3rd harmonic zero sequence
prevents the generators from also the stability of the entire
system. The EGR-5000
9
rotor overheating damage.
voltages. Unbalanced loads, fault
conditions or open phasing
supports the two typical
distance relaying schemes 9
Flexible Phase Rotation will produce a negative used for detecting the loss
The EGR-5000 generator sequence current to flow. excitation. The two schemes 9
protection relay can be The unbalanced currents differ mainly in that scheme 1
applied on either an A-B-C or induce double system uses a negative offset mho 9
A-C-B phase rotation. A user frequency currents in the element and scheme 2 uses
setting permits correct
operation and indication of
rotor, which quickly causes
rotor overheating. Serious
a positive offset mho element
with directional unit
9
the actual system supervision.
configuration.
damage will occur to the
generator if the unbalance is 9
allowed to persist. The EGR-
5000 provides a negative 9
sequence definite time
overcurrent element and a 9
negative sequence timed
over current tripping element
to ensure the generator stays
9
within it’s short time and
continuous negative 9
sequence current rated limits.
9
9
Protective Relays

9
Protection Features ● Main three-phase under/ ● VARs and kVAR demand Monitoring and Metering
9 ● Dual-slope percentage overvoltage (27M[1], ● kVARh (lead, leg and net)
restrained phase current 27M[2], 59M[1], 59M[2]) Sequence of Events Records
● Power factor
9 differential (87) ● Auxiliary single-phase ● Frequency
● Unrestrained phase current under/overvoltage (27A[1], protection relay records a
Volts/Hertz
9
●
differential (87H) 27A[2], 59A[1], 59A[2]) maximum of 300 events
● Ground fault overvoltage
● 3rd Harmonic Voltage associated with the relay.
● Restricted ground fault/
9 % THD V and I An event is classified as a
●
Ground Differential (87GD) relay (59N[1], 59N[2])
● Magnitude THD V and I change of state as detected
● Unrestrained Restricted ● Six frequency elements
by the relay. These include
9 ground fault/Ground
Differential (87GDH)
that can be assigned to:
● Minimum/maximum
recording
relay pickups, dropouts, trips,
contact closure, alarms,
frequency, rate of change,
9 ● Thermal protection (49/51)
●
●
Sync values
Trending (load profile over
setting changes and self-
diagnostic failures. Each
● Phase overcurrent 81[2], 81[3], 81[4], 81[5],
9 elements: 81[6])
●
time)
Temperature with remote
event is date and time
stamped to a 1 ms resolution.
● Three instantaneous ● Apparent and The events are stored in a
9 elements with timers
(50P[1], 50P[2] and
displacement power factor
URTD module
FIFO log in chronological
(55A[1], 55A[2], 55D[1], Monitoring Features order.
50P[3])
9 ● Three inverse time
55D[2])
● Trip coil monitor
● Forward and reverse watts Trip Log
overcurrent elements ● Breaker wear
9 (51P[1], 51P[2] and
(32[1], 32[2], 32[3])
Forward and reverse VARs
● Oscillography (7200 cycles
The EGR-5000 protection
51P[3])
●
relay will store a maximum of
total)
9 ● 11 standard curves ●
(32V[1], 32V[2], 32V[3])
Overexcitation, volts-per-
● Trip cause displays fault
log. Each trip record will be
● Instantaneous or time recorder data on HMI after
9 hertz (24[1], 24[2]) date and time stamped to a 1
delay reset fault event ms resolution. The trip log
● 64S, 100% stator ground
● Voltage restraint (51P[2] ● Fault data logs (up to 20 record will include
9 and 51P[3]) ●
fault (27TN/ 59N)
Generator unbalance
events) information on the type of
● Directional control (all ● Sequence of events report fault, protection elements
9 elements) ●
(46G[1], 46G[2])
Loss of excitation
(up to 300 events) that operated, fault location
and currents and voltages at
● Ground overcurrent (40[1],40[2])
● Clock (1 ms time stamping)
9 elements: ● Sync check (25)
the time of the fault.
● Two instantaneous Control Functions
9 Inadvertent energization
●
measured elements ● Breaker open/close
with timers (50X[1] and (50/27) ● Remote open/close
9 Lockout (86)
●
50X[2]) ● Programmable I/O
● Two instantaneous ● Loss of Potential-LOP ● Programmable Logic
9 calculated elements
protection (87B)
50R[2]) ● Multiple setting groups
9 Switch onto fault
●
● Two inverse time protection ● Cold load pickup

overcurrent measured ● CT supervision
9 Cold load pickup
●

51X[2]) Metering Features Communication Features
9 ● Two inverse time ● Generator hours of ● Local HMI
overcurrent calculated operation ● Password protected
9 elements (51R[1] and ● Phase Differential ● Addressable
51R[2]) Current ● IRIG-B
9 ● 11 standard curves ● Ground Differential ● Local communication port:
● Instantaneous or time Current RS-232
9
●
delay reset ● Amperes: positive,
● Directional control (all
negative and zero port:
9 elements) sequence
● RS-485
● Breaker failure (50BF) ● Ampere demand
9 Ethernet port
●
● Phase unbalance negative ● Volts: positive, negative
sequence overcurrent and zero sequence
● Protocols:
9 ●
(46[1], 46[2]))
Phase voltage unbalance
● Phase angles
●
●
Modbus-RTU (optional)
Modbus-TCP (optional)
● Volt-amperes and VA
9 and sequence protection
(47[1], 47[2])
demand ● IEC-61850 (optional)
● Watts and kW demand ● Configuration software
9 ● kWh (forward, reverse, net)
Protective Relays
9.3
PowerPort-E Integral User Interface They can be programmed to
PowerPort-E is the software the relays in real-time, The front panel user interface operate over a 0 to 20 mA, 9
program used to configure uploading/downloading has a 128 x 64 pixel LCD 4–20 mA, or 1 to 10 V range.
off-line protection setting files setting files, and retrieving display with background The analog outputs can be 9
for all E-Series relay models. event log and waveform illumination for wide angle configured to signal a
PowerPort-E is also used for records. viewing in all light conditions. representation of most
analog quantities measured
9
viewing measured values of 17 programmable LEDs
provide quick and easy visual
by the EGR-5000 including,
current, voltages, and RTD 9
temperature.
operation, alarm and trip
indication. Soft keys are 9
provided for operation mode Programmable Logic
selection, scrolling through The EGR-5000 generator 9
data and settings. In addition, protection relay provides logic
9
protected. special or unique applications.
Each gate can be assigned a 9
Load Profiling/Trending logic function of either AND,
The EGR-5000 relay OR, NAND or NOR. Each 9
automatically records gate can have a maximum of
selected quantities into non- four input signals and each 9
volatile memory every 5, 10, input signal can be required
15, 30 or 60 minutes, to be a NOT. Input signals can
9
report setting. via the binary inputs or
internal values associated 9
Programmable I/O with the protection, alarm or
Waveform Capture (Quality Manager)
The EGR-5000 generator metering set points. Each 9
The EGR-5000 relay provides The waveform capture is gate has a unique output
oscillographic recording
capabilities. The relay will
triggers (i.e., trip/alarm events)
heavy-duty, triprated, 2NO assignment and designation 9
and 6 Form C contacts. Two that can be used as the input
or manually via communications
or the HMI. PowerPort-E setting
isolated inputs can be used to another gate. There are 24
9
for monitoring the trip circuit.
of pickup, trip, internal logic, software is used to retrieve the adjustable pickup and dropout
and contact inputs. The EGR- records. Quality Manager is a
One Form C contact is
dedicated to the relay failure delay settings. 9
5000 can record up to 7200 separate software program
cycles of data. The number of downloaded with PowerPort-E
alarm function and is
operated in a normally Standards and Certifications
9
records is proportional to the used for analyzing the
programmed size of each
retrieved from the relay.
There are up to 16 user- Approvals 9
configurable discrete inputs
record is 600 cycles. UL listed file: E217753
9
●
that accept a wet contact and
can operate through a wide
Design Standards
range of power. Each input
and output is user-
● Generic Standard: 9
programmable for maximum ● EN 61000-6-2
application flexibility. ● EN 61000-6-3 9
Product Standard:
9
●
The EGR-5000 also offers
two optional analog inputs ● IEC 60255-6
and two optional analog
outputs. The analog inputs
●
●
EN 50178
UL 508 (Industrial
9
are available for providing
protection and monitoring of ●
Control Equipment)
CSA C22.2 No. 14-95
9
generator bearing vibration.
The analog inputs are field (Industrial Control
Equipment) 9
programmable to measure
9
transducer signals that ● ANSI C37.90
operate over a range of 0 to
20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, or 1 to
10 V. The two optional analog 9
signaling the value of 9
measured analog quantities
to external process control
devices such as PLCs.
9
9
Protective Relays

9 The catalog number EGR-5000
9 the electrical characteristics (A)–16 DI, 9 Outputs, (B)–Modbus-RTU (RS-485)
and operation features Removable Terminals, Zone
9 included in the EGR-5000. For Interlocking, URTD Interface
coating
example, if the catalog number (0)–5 A / 1 A Phase and
9 is EGR-5000-2A0BA1,
Ground CTs, Power Supply (1)–Projection panel mount
Range: 19–300 Vdc, 40–250
9 the following: Vac
9
EGR-5000 Eaton Motor Relay
9 EGR-5000-2A 0 B A 1
9
9 Hardware Option 1
A = 16 DI, 9 outputs, removable terminals,
Mounting Options
0 = Standard mount
zone interlocking, URTD interface 1 = Projection panel mount
9 B = 8 DI, 9 outputs, 2AI, 2AO, removable
terminals, zone interlocking, URTD
Communication Options
Conformal Coating
Options
A = None
9
interface C = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over Ethernet RJ-45
E = PROFIBUS-DP over D-Sub / RS-485 circuit boards
9 Hardware Option 2
9
I = Modbus/DNP3 RTU over RS-485 or Modbus/DNP3 TCP
over Ethernet RJ-45
9 40–250 Vac
Ethernet
L = Modbus/DNP3 TCP over LC duplex fiber optic Ethernet
9
9 Accessories
9 Standard Accessories EGR-5000

Catalog
9 Description Number
UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 48–240 Vac/48–250 Vdc URTDII-01 1
9 UNVL RTD Mod with Modbus-RTU 24–48 Vdc URTDII-02 1
E-Series RS-232 Null Modem Cable 66B2214G01
9 E-Series USB to RS-232 Converter 66B2214G02
9 E-Series RS-232 Cable and USB to RS-232 Converter 66B2214G03
Note
9 1 See URTD section for fiber optic cables required to communicate to the EGR-5000.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
Climatic Environmental Housing ● Connection cross sections: Voltage and Residual Voltage
Conditions ● Housing B2: height / width ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x Measurement 9
● Storage temperature: 183 mm (7.205 in) / 212.7 AWG 14) with wire end ● Nominal voltages: 100 V /
–30 °C to +70 °C (–22 °F to
+158 °F)
mm (8.374 in) ferrule 110 V / 230 V / 400 V
(can be configured)
9
● Housing depth (incl. ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x
–20 °C to +60 °C (–4 °F to
terminals): AWG 12) with ring cable ● Max. measuring range: 2 x
nominal voltage
9
208 mm (8.189 in) sleeve or cable sleeve
●
+140 °F)
● Material, housing:
aluminum extruded section
● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x
capacity: 2 x nominal
9
● Material, front panel:
aluminum/foil front ●
The current measuring ●
voltage (800 Vac)
Power consumption:
9
Permissible installation
9
●
● Mounting position: board´s terminal blocks ● at Vn = 100 V S = 0.1
altitude: horizontal (±45° around the may be used as with 2 MVA
<2,000 m (6,561.67 ft) (double) conductors
9
●
X-axis must be permitted) ● at Vn = 110 V S = 0.1
above sea level ● Weight: Approx. 4.2 kg AWG 10,12,14 MVA
● If 4,000 m (13,123.35 ft) otherwise with single
9
(9.259 lb) ● at Vn = 230 V S = 0.4
altitude applies, a conductors only
MVA
changed classification of Current and Ground Current at Vn = 400 V S = 1.0
9
●
the operating and test Measurement Plug-in Connector with
Integrated Short-Circuiter MVA
voltages may be ● Nominal currents: 1 A / 5 A (Conventional Current Inputs) Frequency range:
9
●
necessary ● Max. measuring range: ● Nominal Current: 50 Hz or 60 Hz ±10%
● Up to 40 x In (phase 1 A and 5 A ● Terminals: screw-type
● HMI front panel with seal:
currents) ● Continuous loading terminals 9
IP54
● Up to 25 x In (ground capacity: 4 x In /
● Rear side terminals: IP20
current standard) continuously Frequency Measurement 9
● Up to 2.5 x In (ground ● Overcurrent withstand: ● Nominal frequencies:
Routine Test current sensitive) ● 30 x In / 10 s 50 Hz / 60 Hz 9
● Insulation test acc. to
● Continuous loading ● 100 x In / 1 s
IEC 60255-5: All tests to be capacity: 4 x In /
continuously
● 250 x In / 10 ms
Voltage Supply
● Aux. voltage: 24–270 Vdc /
9
carried out against ground (1 half-wave)
and other input and output ● Overcurrent proof: ● Screws: M4, captive type ●
48–230 Vac (–20/+10%)
Buffer time in case of
9
circuits ● 30 x In / 10 s acc. to VDEW
inputs, current
● 100 x In / 1 s ● Connection cross sections:
supply failure:
9
● 250 x In / 10 ms ● 1 x or 2 x 2.5 mm² (2 x
9
● Measuring inputs, signal voltage
(1 half-wave) AWG 14) with wire end
relay outputs: ● Interrupted
● Power consumption: ferrule
communication is
●
– 2.5 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
● Phase current inputs ● 1 x or 2 x 4.0 mm² (2 x permitted 9
– At In = 1 A S = 0.15 AWG 12) with ring cable ● Max. permissible making
●
3.0 kV (eff.) / 50 Hz
All wire-bound
MVA sleeve or cable sleeve
current: 9
– At In = 5 A S = 0.15 ● 1 x or 2 x 6 mm² (2 x ● 18 A peak value for
1.5 kV DC
MVA AWG 10) with ring cable
<0.25 ms 9
● Ground current input ● 12 A peak value for
Insulation test acc to
9
●
– At In = 1 A S = 0.35 ● The current measuring
IEC60255-5: All tests to be <1 ms
MVA board´s terminal blocks
carried out against ground ● The voltage supply must
9
– At In = 5 A S = 0.35 may be used as with 2
and other input and output (double) conductors be protected by a fuse of:
circuits MVA
AWG 10,12,14 ● 2.5 A time-lag miniature
60 Hz ±10%
otherwise with single fuse 5 x 20 mm (approx. 9
conductors only 0.2 x 0.8 in) according to
IEC 60127 9
short-circuiters (contacts) fuse 6.3 x 32 mm
(approx. 0.25 x 1.25 in)
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Power Consumption Digital Inputs Relay Outputs Time Synchronization IRIG-B00X

9 ● Power supply range: ● Max. input voltage: ● Continuous current: ● Nominal input voltage: 5 V
24–270 Vdc 300 Vdc / 259 Vac 5 A AC/DC
9 Connection: screw-type
●
● Power consumption ● Input current: <4 mA ● Max. make current: terminals (twisted pair)
9
● ●
● Maximum power 30 V for 4 s Zone interlocking

● Fallback time: <30 ms
consumption—13 W 30 A / 230 Vac according Note: Only for zone interlock
9
●
(Safe state of the tripping outputs (zone interlock,
● Power supply range: digital inputs) to ANSI IEEE Std
semiconductor output):
48–230 Vac (for Switching thresholds: C37.90-2005
9
● 5 Vdc, <2 mA for connection to
frequencies of 40–70 Hz) Un = 24 Vdc, 48 Vdc, ● 30 A / 250 Vdc according electronic inputs only.
● Power consumption 60 Vdc, 110 Vac / Vdc, to ANSI IEEE Std
9 in idle mode—7 VA 230 Vac / Vdc C37.90-2005 ● Zone Out:
● Maximum power ● Un = 24 Vdc ● Max. breaking current: ● Output voltage (high)
9 consumption—13 VA – Switching threshold ● 5 A AC up to 250 Vac 4.75 to 5.25 Vdc
1 ON: Min. 19.2 Vd ● 5 A DC up to 30 V ● Output voltage (low) 0.0
9 Display
– Switching threshold (resistive) to +0.5 Vdc
1 OFF: Max. 9.6 Vdc ● 0.3 A DC at 300 V ● Zone In:
9 LED background
illumination
● Un = 48 V / 60 Vdc ● Max. switching voltage: ● Nominal input voltage
– Switching threshold 250 Vac / 250 Vdc +5 Vdc
9 Resolution—graphics
●
2 ON: Min. 42.6 Vdc ● Switching capacity: ● Max. input voltage +5.5
display: 128 x 64 pixel Vdc
– Switching threshold 1250 VA
9 LED 2 OFF: Max. 21.3 Vdc ● Contact type: Form C or ● Switching threshold ON
min. 4.0 Vdc
● LED type: two colored:
● Un = 110 / 120 Vac / Vdc normally open contact
9 red/green – Switching threshold ● Terminals: screw-type ● Switching threshold OFF
max. 1.5 Vdc
● Number of LEDs, Housing 3 ON: Min. 88.0 Vdc / terminals
9 B2: 15 88.0 Vac
– Switching threshold Supervision Contact (SC)
● Galvanic isolation 2.5 kV
AC (to ground and other
9 Front Interface RS-232 3 OFF: Max. 44.0 Vdc
/ 44.0 Vac
● Continuous current:
5 A AC/DC ●
IO)
● Baud rates: 115,200 baud
9 Un = 230 / 240 Vac / Vdc
●
● Handshake: RTS and CTS ● Max. switch-on current:
– Switching threshold 15 A AC / 15 A DC up to
● Connection: 9-pole D-Sub RS-485
4 ON: Min. 184 Vdc / 30 V for 4 s
9 plug
184 Vac ● Max. breaking current: ● Master/slave: slave
– Switching threshold ● Connection: six screw-
9 Real Time Clock 5 A AC up to 250 Vac
●
4 OFF: Max. 92 Vdc / clamping terminals RM 3.5

● Running reserve of the real ● 5 A DC up to 30 Vdc
92 Vac mm (138 MIL) (terminating
9
time clock: 1 year min. ● 0.4 A at 125 Vdc
● Terminals: screw-type resistors internal)
terminal
● Contact type: 1 Form C Note: The RS-485 interface is
9 ●
contact
realized via terminals. The
communication cable has to be
shielded. The shielding has to be
9 terminals
fixed at the screw that is marked
with the ground symbol (rear side
9 of the device).
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Wiring Diagrams
9
Typical AC Connections—High Impedance Grounded Generator with Phase Differential Protection, Wye VTs, Zero Sequence
Ground Protection, and Either Synch-check or 100% Stator Ground Fault Protection
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays

9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9
Drilling Plan
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Contents
9 Ground Fault Relay
Description Page
9 Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9 EDR-3000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159
9 FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181
9

V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
Product Description Standards and Certifications
9 A Type GFR ground fault A basic Type GFR ground Eaton’s GFR ground fault
9
protection system, when fault protection system relays, current sensors, test
properly installed on a consists of a ground fault panels and accessory devices
grounded electrical system, relay, a ground fault current are UL listed by Underwriters
9 will sense phase-to-ground sensor and a disconnect Laboratories in accordance
fault currents. When the level device equipped with a shunt with their standard for
9 of fault current is in excess
of the pre-selected current
trip device. This disconnect
device can be a molded case
Ground Fault Sensing and
Relaying Equipment, UL 1053,
9 pickup and time delay
settings, the GFR relay will
circuit breaker, a power
circuit breaker, a bolted
under File No. E48381.
Note: Relays are also listed with
initiate a trip action of a pressure switch or other
9 disconnect device, which will fusible disconnect device,
CSA under File No. 43357.
open the faulted circuit and suitable for application with
9 clear the fault. UL Class 1 Ground Fault
Sensing and Relaying
9
The GFR devices are UL equipment.
Class 1 devices designed to
protect electrical equipment
9 against extensive damage
from arcing ground faults.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Product Selection
Each installation requires: 9
● One relay unit (select trip 9
ampere as required)
● One current sensor (select
configuration required)
9
● One circuit breaker or
disconnect device with
9
shunt trip, or a shunt trip
attachment for mounting 9
in existing breaker
● Test panel (optional) 9
GFR Relay GFR Relay 9
Ground Fault Pickup Amperes
1–12 5–60 100–1200 9
GFR Relay Catalog Catalog Catalog
Types Number 1 Number 1 Number 1 9
For 120 Volt 50/60 Hz Control
Electrical reset with zone interlocking GFR12EI GFR60EI GFR1200EI
9
Electrical reset without zone interlocking
Mechanical reset with zone interlocking
GFR12E
GFR12MI
GFR60E
GFR60MI
GFR1200E
GFR1200MI
9
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking GFR12M GFR60M GFR1200M 9
For 120 Vdc Control
Mechanical reset without zone interlocking — — GFR1200MD 9
Current Sensor 9
Description—Window Size in Inches (mm)
Catalog
Number 9
9
Used with Relays Rated 1–12 Amperes
5.50 (139.7) inside diameter 1283C45G01
9
5.50 (139.7) inside diameter 1256C13G01 9
7.81 x 11.00 (198.4 x 279.4) rectangular 1 1257C88G04
3.31 x 24.94 (84.1 x 760.5) rectangular 1 1257C92G03 9
9
5.50 (139.7) inside diameter 1256C13G02 9
9
9
9
Note
1 Suitable for either surface or semi-flush mounting.
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Options and Accessories

9
Test Panel (120 Vac) Shunt Trip Attachments Optional Test Panel
9 Used to test the ground fault Use 120 Vac shunt trips. Catalog
system, to give an indication Control Test Number
9 the relay has tripped the Face Plate 120 volt 50/60 Hz 120 volt 50/60 Hz GFRTP
breaker, and to reset the relay Recommended when
9 after tripping. These functions
may be separately mounted
these relays are semi-flush
Ground Fault Warning Indicator
mounted, to close the door
9 pilot devices. cutout opening.
Description
Catalog
Number
Note: When a mechanically reset
Options
9 relay is used with a test panel,
both the relay and test panel Additional optional equipment
Manual reset 1234C67G01
Self-resetting 1234C67G02
must be reset following either a can be added to the protection
9 simulated ground fault test or system to meet the
actual ground fault. Not UL listed. requirements of the specifying
9
Ammeter Kit
engineer, including:
Ground Fault Warning Indicator GFR System Kit Catalog
Ground fault test panel Used with Number
9
●
This is an accessory item for
use with GFR relays with ● Ground fault warning 1–12 amperes 752B820G01
interlocking circuitry. At indicator relay
9 approximately 30–50% of ● Ground fault indicating
5–60 amperes 752B820G02
the relay pickup setting, the 100–1200 amperes 752B820G03

ammeter
9 indicator switches separate
GFR relays are available with
120 Vac control power to a
Face Plate
9 lamp or relay (not included) to
give an indication of a ground
zone selective interlocking
circuitry to interlock several Catalog
relays within the same system. Description Number
9 fault. The indicator is rated
110/120 Vac 50/60 Hz for a This allows the relay, Face plate 752B410G01
maximum indicator load of which detects a ground
9 0.5 amperes. fault, to instantly clear
the fault by tripping the
9 Indicating Ammeter disconnect device. The relay
simultaneously sends a signal
The optional indicating
GFR Relay
9 ammeter connects to the
sensor terminals through
to relay units “upstream” from
the fault to time delay or ● Ground fault detection ranges:
to block their operation
9 a momentary contact ● 1–12 amperes
pushbutton, and will indicate completely. Current sensors ● 5–60 amperes
(in amperes) any ground fault in various designs provide a
9 100–1200 amperes
●
current flowing through the range of “window” sizes to

accommodate standard bus ● Output contacts:
sensor. Kit includes the
9 ammeter and pushbutton. and cable arrangements. ● 240 Vac, 50/60 Hz: 3 amperes
Shunt trip attachments may be
● 120 Vac, 50/60 Hz: 6 amperes
9
Not UL listed.
ordered for field mounting in ● 28 Vdc: 3 amperes
Eaton’s molded case circuit ● 125 Vdc: 0.5 amperes
9 breakers, or may be ordered
factory installed in the breaker.
● Control power requirements:
120 V, 50/60 Hz: 0.125 amperes, or 125 Vdc (optional)
9
●
Current Sensor
9 ● 600 V, 50/60 Hz maximum system voltage
9 Note
9
1 One end removable for installation.
Instruction Leaflet 15321 available as a PDF at www.eaton.com

(Go to Advanced Search and enter 15321).
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Contents
Universal RTD Module
Description Page
9
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149
9
V3-T9-230
V3-T9-242
9
9
9
9
9
Universal RTD Module 9
● Electronic Resistance URTD can be used with MP- Both electrical and fiber optic
Features, Benefits
and Functions 9
Temperature Detector 3000, MP-4000, EMR-3000, interface ports are provided Universal design works
9
●
(RTD) provides motor EMR-4000, EMR-5000, ETR- to communicate temperature with any RTD type,
temperature interface 4000, ETR-5000, and EGR- information to the MP-3000 simplifying installation and
for the MP-3000 Motor 5000. relay. The electrical interface operation and reducing 9
Protection Relay can transmit information inventory
● Monitors up to 11 RTDs
Eaton’s URTD Module is
most commonly used to
using a three-conductor ● Standalone design permits 9
consisting of six motor shielded cable with a mounting the module close
provide motor temperature
windings, two motor
bearings, two load
information to the MP-3000
maximum cable distance of
500 feet (152 m). The fiber
to the motor, reducing RTD 9
Motor Protection Relay. The wiring costs
optic link has a maximum
●
bearings and one auxiliary
Works with 10 ohm copper,
MP-3000 Motor Protection distance of 400 feet (122 m).
● RTD diagnostics detects 9
uses this information for faulty RTDs and wiring,
100 ohm platinum, 100 ohm
nickel and 120 ohm nickel
monitoring, tripping and
alarming. The MP-3000 Intel-
The URTD Module may be
used with the IQ-1000 and
reducing unnecessary
tripping and alarming
9
type RTDs IQ-1000 II motor relays. It
● Include fiber optic and
I-Trip overload algorithm will
adjust its trip characteristics may also be applied as a 9
electrical communication based on the actual motor standalone temperature
interfaces to the MP-3000 temperature reported by the monitoring device 9
Motor Protection Relay URTD Module. This improves communicating, for example,
the protection by using an transformer temperature 9
actual temperature value information back to a remote
instead of the assumed
NEMA Standard Ambient
computer or PLC. An optional
PONI (Product Operated
9
Temperature. Network Interface) is required
for standalone applications. 9
The URTD Module may be
mounted close to the motor
or at the protective relay.
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Product Selection Options and Accessories

9
Additional Related Products
9 Universal RTD Module Universal RTD Module from Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer
Series
Catalog
9 Description Number Eaton provides fiber optic
cables for connecting to the
Universal RTD Module URTD
MP-3000 or IQ-1000 II Motor
9 48-240 Vac/48-250 Vdc power supply and URTDII-01
Protection Relays.
Modbus-RTU communications
9 24-48 Vdc and Modbus-RTU communications URRDII-02
Fiber Optic Cables:
9 Length
Catalog
Number
1 MPF0-1
9 5 MPF0-5
9 10 MPF0-10
25 MPF0-25
9 50 MPF0-50
75 MPF0-75
9 100 MPF0-100
9
9 Universal RTD Module

Specifications URTDII-01 URTDII-02
9 Input power requirements 48–240 Vac / 48–250 Vdc 24–48 Vdc
9 Frequency 50/60 Hz or DC DC
Power consumption 3.5 W 1W
9 Operating temperature –20° to +55 °C (–4° to +131 °F) –20° to +55 °C (–4° to +131 °F)
Storage temperature –40° to +85 °C (–40° to +185° F) –40° to +85 °C (–40° to +185 °F)
9 Humidity 0 to 95% R.H. noncondensing 0 to 95% R.H. noncondensing
9 Altitude
Pollution degree
2000 m
2
2000 m
2
9 Installation category I I
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
9.3
Wiring Diagram
9
RTD Wiring (Three-Lead Type) 9
Universal
RTD Module II
9
NC
9
RTD 1 - C 21
9
2 + + 20
3 C - 19 RTD
Shield/Drain
Wire 4 S Auxiliary S 18 Shield/Drain
Wire
9
RTD 5 - C 17
6 + + 16 9
7 C - 15 RTD
RTD 8 - C 14 9
9 + + 13
10 C - 12 RTD
9
J10B
Shield/Drain Load Motor Shield/Drain
J2
Wire 11 S Bearings Windings S 11 Wire
RTD 12 - C 10
13 + + 9 9
14 C - 8 RTD
RTD 15 - C 7 9
16 + + 6
Shield/Drain
17 C
Motor - 5 Shield/Drain
RTD 9
Wire 18 S Bearings S 4 Wire
RTD 19 - C 3
9
20 + + 2
21 C - 1 RTD
9
Motor
Terminals
DO NOT CONNECT CABLE'S SHIELD WIRE AT THIS END!
Motor
Terminals 9
9
USE TAPE TO INSULATE
9
Note:
1. Each shielded cable conductor must be connected on the URTDII as shown.
9
2. Use of three-lead RTDs is recommended. 9
3. RTDs must not be grounded at the motor, and no common connections between RTDs
should be made at the motor. 9
4. A suitable earth ground should be connected to J10B-4, J10B-11, J-10B-18, J2-4, J2-11, or 9
J2-18. It is recommended that a ground connection is made to both sides of the unit.
Note 9
9
Showing a typical three-lead type RTD wiring connection.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Protective Relays
Dimensions
9 Universal URTD Module
9 MTG
Serial No.: XXXX-MMYY
H.W.: X.XX F.W.: X.XX
Style No.: 66D2235GXX
Cat No.: URTDII-XX
9
9
Universal RTD Module II
9
9
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
1
9 2
9 1
2
9 3
7.40 [187.96]
7.77 [197.36]
0N
12
9
5
6
UNIVERSAL RTD MODULE
S1
9
7
URTD-II
J10A
1 PWR IN 1
8 2 PWR IN 2
1
9 1 RTD12-/AUX2- RTD6C/MW6C 21
9 10 2
3
RTD12+/AUX2+
RTD12C/AUX2C
RTD6+/MW6+
RTD6-/MW6-
20
19
11 4 Shield Shield 18
9
5 RTD11-/AUX1- RTD5C/MW5C 17
12 6 RTD11+/AUX1+ RTD5+/MW5+ 16
13 7 RTD11C/AUX1C RTD5-/MW5- 15
8 RTD10-/LB2- RTD4C/MW4/C 14
9 14 9
10
RTD10+/LB2+
RTD10C/LB2C
RTD4+/MW4+
RTD4-/MW4-
13
12
J10B
15
J2
11 Shield Shield 11
12 RTD9-/LB1- RTD3C/MW3C 10
9
16
13 RTD9+/LB1+ RTD3+/MW3+ 9
17 14 RTD9C/LB1C RTD3-/MW3- 8
15 RTD8-/MB2- RTD2C/MW2C 7
18
9
.20 [5.08]
16 RTD8+/MB2+ RTD2+/MW2+ 6
19 17 RTD8C/MB2C RTD2-/MW2- 5
18 Shield RS-485 Shield 4
20 19 RTD7-/MB1- MODBUS RTD1C/MW1C 3
9 21
20
21
RTD7+/MB1+
RTD7C/MB1C S2
J11 RTD1+/MW1+
RTD1-/MW1-
2
1
Shield
COM
0N
9 MTG
B
A
FIBER
1 8 1 2 3 4 OPTIC
9
9 .20 [5.08] 3.20 [81.28]
2.00 [50.80]
9 3.60 [91.44]
9 4.35 [110.39]
9 Note
Showing the URTD Module dimensions and terminal designations.
9
9
9
9
9
9
Connectivity Options
9.4
Contents
Power Xpert Gateway
Description Page
9
Power Xpert Gateway 9
Product Selection Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-289
Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-288 9
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-291 9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-295 9
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-296
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300 9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303 9
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305 9
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-307
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309 9
9
9
9
9
Product Overview 9
● Open communication ● Flexible and expandable ● Information at a glance
architecture solutions ● Using a standard Web 9
● Connects to both Eaton ● Stand-alone or small browser, view the PXG’s
and third-party
electrical equipment;
systems benefit from
comprehensive, on-
Web interfaces that
include a Network tab,
9
communicates to
INCOM™ and Modbus®
board Web pages; no
additional programming
Alarms tab, individual
device detail pop-outs 9
RTU devices or software is necessary and One Line graphics tab
● Modbus TCP and for virtually out-of-the- ● Comprehensive, well- 9
BACnet/IP support box, plug-and-play organized device Web
facilitates integration functionality pages present 9
with third-party ● Larger systems, such as measured parameters
monitoring solutions campus installations or
power systems with
such as current, voltage,
power, energy,
9
● Ethernet/Web-based
support uses your
existing network
remote locations can
view multiple PXGs via
frequency, power factor
and voltage THD, just to 9
Power Xpert Insight™ or name a few
infrastructure,
reducing costs a third-party monitoring ● Combine with Power 9
system Xpert Insight for viewing
● Existing equipment can multiple gateways and 9
be connected to the other power system
PXG to reap the benefits equipment for more 9
of Power Xpert extensive energy
Architecture at minimal
cost, without the need
monitoring and capacity
analysis
9
9
to upgrade
9
9
9

9 Through standard on-board The Power Xpert® Gateway Power Xpert Gateway Screenshots
Web pages, Power Xpert 900 (PXG 900) has been
9 Insight, or third-party designed to be installed in
software, Eaton’s Power electrical assemblies or
9 Xpert Gateway (PXG) 900 systems—low and medium
allows you to closely monitor voltage switchgear,
9 the performance of your
power and energy efficiency
switchboards panelboards,
transfer switches, and motor
9 with easily accessed, real-
time, Web-enabled data.
control centers to acquire and
consolidate data available Network Tab Device Details
Eaton’s PXG 900 provides a from components such as trip
9 central point to connect units, meters, relays, drives
devices to an Ethernet and I/O.
9 network. The gateway may
be used as a standalone
9 device to view one system or
location, or it can be easily
9 integrated into a large, multi-
location system.
Alarms Tab Trend Viewer
9 The PXG is our configurable
data acquisition solution for
9 facility equipment like
switchgear, switchboards,
motor control centers, etc.
9 Power and energy data from
the downstream devices are
9 time stamped and stored in
non-volatile memory. This
9 interval data can be stored or
updated to a destination of
One-Lines Tab
9 the user’s choice through

CSV. Data can also be
accessed through any Web
9 browser directly on the PXG.
Users can move data into
9 Power Xpert Insight v. 3.2 or
higher, BMS, BAS, building
9 dashboards, custom software
applications, or virtually any
Web interface.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9.4
Product Selection Guide
9
Data acquisition and Integration Table for Supported Devices
9
Supported Devices 9
Protocol
HTTP Power Modbus TCP Pass-through SMTP File Export File export 9
(Web Xpert (BMS and INCOM (Email (CSV File (COMTRADE
Family Model Browser) Insight SCADA) (PowerNet) Client) Format) File Format) BACnet/IP
9
INCOM
Accessory BIM II ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
I/O DIM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
I/O DIM-KYZ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
9
Meter IQ 220 / IQ 320 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ 230 / IQ 330 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ Analyzer (6000/6200) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Meter IQ Analyzer (6400/6600) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ Data Plus II ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Meter IQ DP-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ Energy Sentinel ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Meter
Meter
IQ Power Sentinel
IQMESII
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9
Meter PM3 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection Digitrip 520MC ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection Digitrip 810 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Protection Digitrip 910
Protection Digitrip 1150/DT1150V ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection Digitrip 3000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Protection Digitrip 3200 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection Digitrip MV ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection Digitrip OPTIM 550 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection Digitrip OPTIM 750 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Protection Digitrip OPTIM 1050
Protection FP-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection FP-5000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Protection FP-6000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection IQ 500 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection MP-3000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection MP-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection
Protection
MPCV Relay
NRX520I
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9
Protection NRX1150I ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection TC50 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection TC100 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 9
Protection Universal RTD ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Transfer switch ATC-400 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
9
9
9
9
Supported Devices, continued

9 Protocol
9 HTTP
(Web
Power
Xpert
Modbus TCP
(BMS and
Pass-through
INCOM
SMTP
(Email
File Export
(CSV File
File export
(COMTRADE
Family Model Browser) Insight SCADA) (PowerNet) Client) Format) File Format) BACnet/IP
9 Modbus
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Drive H-Max
Drive M-Max ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Drive MVX9000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Drive SVX9000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter E30/E31A042 1 phase BCM ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Meter EM19_M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter ION 7350 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter
Meter
ION 7550
ION 7650
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 Meter IQ 130 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ 140 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter IQ 150 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter IQ 230M / IQ 330M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter IQ 250 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter
Meter
IQ 260
IQ35MA1
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 Meter IQ35MA2 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Meter Nexus 1200 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter PM3_Modbus ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Meter SQD CM3000 Series
Meter SQD CM4000 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Meter SQD PM700 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Meter SQD PM800 Series ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection ABB TPU 2000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Protection C440 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection C441 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection
Protection
EDR-3000
EDR-5000
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 Protection EGR-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection EGR-5000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection EMR-3000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Protection EMR-4000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection EMR-5000 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection
Protection
ETR-4000
ETR-5000
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
9 Protection GE 369 Motor Relay ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Protection GE 469 Motor Relay ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection InsulGard ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
Protection NRX520M
Protection NRX1150M ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Protection Qualitrol 118 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Starter S611 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Starter S811 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
Transfer switch ATC-300 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9 Transfer switch ATC-900 ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
9
9.4
9
9
DHCP
Bridge NTP
Power Com2 Com1 INCOM Status Web
9
9
USB connection for 9
capability
9
24 Vdc input power
RS-485
connections
RJ-45 connections with link speed
and activity indicators 9
PXG Daisy Chain Application 9
Ethernet LAN 9
LAN Connection 9
9
Cat-5 Patch Cables 9
9
295 ft (90 m)
PXM2000
9
Note: In this configuration, if any of the PXG units go offline or lose power, the
communication to the downstream Ethernet devices will lose connection to the LAN.
9
9
● UL® 508, Standard for
Programmable Controller
● EN 61000-6-2:2001
Electromagnetic
9
Equipment Compatibility (EMC)
● FCC, Class A, Part 15, Party 6-2: Immunity for 9
Subpart B, Sections Industrial Environments
15.107b and 15.109b 9
● EN55022: 1994 Class A,
Information Technology 9
Equipment
9
Product Selection 9
PXG Part Numbers 9
Style Catalog
Description Number Number 9
PXG900 Power Xpert Gateway 900 66D2325G01 PXG900
9
9
9
PXG900-2A Enclosed version — PXG900-2A
Cost-effective solution to add communications to new or existing equipment
that has no physical space to install the PXG in the equipment structure. 9
NEMA 12 enclosure rating.
Prewired with a PSG60N24RP power supply and terminal blocks for ease of wiring of
incoming power and connected devices.
9
Power supply—24 Vdc PSG60N24RP-A1 PSG60N24RP
9

9
PXG part numbers Supported Devices and Performance
9 Description Style Number Catalog Number PXG performance will vary depending upon the number and type
of connected devices. This is driven by the following:
9 Power Xpert Gateway 900
Power supply—24 Vdc
66D2325G01
PSG60N24RP-A1
PXG900
PSG60N24RP ● Each supported device has a distinct number of channels to
report back to the PXG, ranging from as few as 4 to over 900
9 Memory ● The channels are prioritized
9 Flash: 2 GB Device protocol, Modbus or INCOM

● ●
● RAM: 1 GB ● Baud rate setting

9 Communication Ports For this reason, a PXG performance tool has been developed to
assist in understanding the expected performance for a given
● Network ports: Two 10/100Base-T RJ-45 connectors
9 ● Serial ports
application since all systems are unique. This tool can be found
at www.eaton.com/pxg. For a high level performance
9 Two RS-485 ports for connection to Modbus RTU devices
●
comparison, see the table below for three examples.
● One dedicated RS-485 port for INCOM devices
9 ● Configuration port: One USB port
For This Combination of Devices
(All Times in Seconds)
Network Protocols Supported
9 ● Modbus TCP/IP: Supports data access from Modbus TCP How Long Does It Take
64 INCOM /
32 Modbus
15 INCOM /
15 Modbus 5 INCOM
clients
9 ● Web server: Supports data access from Web browsers (HTTP
Between value change in the UI
(INCOM 9600)—Priority 1
21.9 3.7 1.4
and HTTPS)
9 ● DHCP: Supports automatic IP address assignments,
(Modbus 57600)—Priority 1
3.5 1.6 —
if enabled
9 ● NTP: Supports time synchronization via a network time server
(INCOM 9600)—Priority 2
44.3 7.4 2.6
for PXG synchronization

9 ● SMTP: Supports mail server for email notification
(Modbus 57600)—Priority 2
7.0 3.1 —
● BACnet/IP: Supports data access from BACnet clients

9 Modbus server pass-through response time
(57600) (local connection)
0.061 0.059 —
Serial Protocols Supported

9
For the UI to show an alarm 17.0 3.0 3.0
● INCOM (INCOM device)
● Modbus RTU To boot up (all devices communicating) 399.0 85.0 51.0
9
Web Browsers Recommended Note: Features and specifications listed in this document are subject
9 ● Internet Explorer versions 10 and 11 to change without notice and represent the maximum capabilities of the
product with all options installed. Although every attempt has been made
● Google Chrome to ensure the accuracy of information contained within, Eaton makes no
9 Power Input
representation about the completeness, correctness, or accuracy and
assumes no responsibility for any errors or omissions. Features and
9 ● Input voltage, nominal: 24 Vdc; 0.3 A minimum functionality may vary depending on selected options.
● Input voltage range: ±10% nominal
9 Power Consumption
9 8 W maximum
●
Operating Temperature
9 ● 32 to 140 °F (0 to 60 °C)
9 Ambient Storage Temperature

● –40 to +185 °F (–40 to +85 °C)
9
Relative Humidity
9 ● 5 to 95% noncondensing at 122 °F (50 °C)
9 Size (H x D x L) in Inches
● 2.00 x 4.50 x 6.00
9 Weight
1.7 pounds
9
●
9
9.4
General Wiring Guidelines—RS-485 Network
When communicating over Rule 3: System Topology, Rule 5: Cable Shielding ground path will be required since 9
RS-485 networks to Eaton Size and Capacity the effectiveness of this shield
products, the following
● Strict daisy chain must be
The cable shielding and outer
jacket should not be stripped
earth ground connection will
affect the integrity of data
9
General Wiring Guidelines
should be used. adhered to. A strict daisy
chain configuration is one
back beyond 1-1/2 inches.
Three-pole terminal blocks
transferred over the cable.
9
Rule 1: Cable Selection— where the transmission are used to ensure a Rule 7: Cable Termination
Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP) line connects from one continuous metallic shield End of Line Resistors (EOLR)
9
RS-485 receiver to the ground path. To ensure a
Note: Cables specifically
designed for RS-485 applications
next. The transmission line secure electrical connection
are necessary to maintain
signal strength and minimize 9
are highly recommended. appears as one continuous when daisy chaining devices reflections. EOLR must
line to the RS-485 driver that have built-in two-pole
terminal blocks, mechanically
match the impedance of the 9
The RS-485 bus is a length of ● Maximum 32 devices TSP. Two EOLR are needed
Twisted Shielded Pair (TSP)
that includes a third
● Line termination: crimp sleeves onto the two
shield path drain wires.
and should be located at both 9
Maximum cable lengths of ends of the RS-485 bus. If
conductor (used for the
common wire), a braided
4000 feet (1219m); longer
bus lengths will slow the
Rule 6: Cable Grounding there is only one device
connected to the Modbus
9
shield accompanied by a drain data rate Ground the communication master, it is considered the
wire, and nominal impedance network at only one point in last device in the network and 9
of 120 ohms. Rule 4: Cable Splicing the network, preferably by should be terminated with a
● Belden Wire and Cable The prime goal is to create a terminating the drain wire 120 ohm 1/4 watt terminating 9
secure electrical connection to ground at the EOL node resistor.
Company Part Number
3106A or equivalent while minimizing exposure to (same location as the EOLR).
A solid earth ground is Rule 8: Device Addressing 9
electrical transients. Ferrules
accomplished by connecting
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing are used to dress cable ends.
Most devices have built-in the shield ground path’s drain
● Each device must have a
unique slave address
9
Any cable in the Belden wire to a #14 AWG or larger
3106A family can be
terminal blocks that can be
used for splicing. Additionally, multi-stranded wire that has
● No two devices on the
same RS-485 network can
9
intermixed with each other an impedance path of 1 ohm
terminal blocks should be
in the Modbus network.
utilized when splicing or less to a known earth
ground.
have the same slave
address 9
elsewhere in the gear or
facility to ensure a secure Note: The building electrical Ethernet Cable Specifications 9
electrical connection. ground may not be effective since For complete specifications,
it may travel through many
connections and considerable
refer to the IEEE 802.3 9
distances before reaching earth Ethernet specification.
ground. In such cases, a new 9
RS-485 Wiring Guide—Three Terminal Devices 9
A B Common XCVR Data
Device Name (– Wire) (+ Wire) Wire Common 1 Bias 9
IQ 230M 12 (MOD2) 11 (MOD1) 10 (INCOM 3) I 26V None
IQ 250 (–) (+) SH I None 9
Older Models are Marked Older Models are Marked
B (–) A (–) or A(+)
9
IQ 260 (–) (+) SH I None
Older Models are Marked
B (–)
Older Models are Marked
A (–) or A (+) 9
IQ 330M
NETLINK
12 (MOD2)
1 (DATA–)
11 (MOD1)
2 (DATA+)
10 (INCOM 3)
5 (GND)
I 26V
E
None
None
9
InsulGard 2 B A None Floating None 9
Bushing Gard 2 B A None Floating None
(InsulGard G3 2)
9
Power Xpert Meter Data A Data B Shield I 300V 750 Ohm
4000/6000/8000 750B-S 750B-S (COM) Switch Sel
9
Power Xpert Gateway A(–) B(+) COM I —
400//600
9
Notes
1 Transceiver (XCVR) Common Connected to:
I = Isolated
9
9
NI = Non Isolated
E = Earth Ground
2 Center terminal on InsulGard (marked with Ground symbol) is for shield splicing only and is electrically floating.
9
INCOM Network ● Supports up to 1000 must be ensured by other A solid earth ground is
9 INCOM was specifically devices on a single means. Additional terminal accomplished by connecting
designed with the intention of network segment strips should be utilized when the shield ground path’s drain
9 delivering a comprehensive ● Supports sub-network splicing elsewhere in the wire to a #14 AWG or larger
and powerful energy master devices and electrical enclosure or facility multi-stranded wire that has
9 management solution for associated sub-networks to ensure secure electrical
connections. All devices, End
an impedance path of 1 ohm
or less to the building’s
use in electrical distribution ● Supports 1200 or
9 environments while ensuring
affordability, flexibility,
9600 baud rate of Line Termination Resistors
and Taps should be wired in
grounding electrode
conductor.
● Attenuation: parallel across the cable.
9 simplicity and noise immunity.
An INCOM network installed
● Total system capacity:
Rule 5: Cable Shielding
Rule 7: Cable Termination
per the following rules will 25 dB Each network segment
9 allow the user to fully realize ● Attenuation per device: The cable shielding and outer requires a minimum of two
all of the above advantages. 0.01 dB jacket should not be stripped End of Line Termination
9 (Refer to Eaton document
TD17513 for specific system
● Attenuation for approved back beyond 1.5 inches Resistors (EOLTRs). The
wire types, see tables (38 mm). Terminal blocks are EOLTRs maintain signal
9 layout recommendations
and details.)
below used at tap points to ensure a
continuous metallic shield
strength and minimize
reflections. The EOLTRs
ground path. To ensure a should be 1/2 watt 100 ohm
9 Rule 1: Cable Selection— Cable Attenuation
secure electrical connection non-inductive resistors, such
Twisted Shielded Pair Cable Attenuation/
when daisy-chaining INCOM as carbon composition or
9 Approved cable types:
Type 1000 Feet (305m)
devices that have built-in metal film. Wire-wound
IMPCABLE 1.6 dB two-pole terminal blocks, use resistors are not acceptable.
9 ● Any of the cables in the
Belden 9463 family
Belden 9463 family 2.0 dB crimp sleeves to join the two
shield drain wires. The cable
Taps on network segments
should not be terminated.
9 ●
●
Quabbin 6205
CommScope 9022
Attenuation at Star
shield ground path for a main
network and sub-network
Some INCOM devices have
the EOLTR permanently
Number of must not be joined. Each installed and must be located
9 ● Manhattan Electric M4154 Long Lines Attenuation should have a separate at the end of a main run.
● IMPCABLE—a 600V rated 3 3.5 dB connection to earth ground Other INCOM devices have
9 cable custom designed for
INCOM— 4 6 dB
reference. an EOLTR that can be
switched to optionally
Rule 6: Cable Grounding
9 Style # 2A95705G01 5 8 dB terminate the network
segment at the device. Care
Rule 2: Cable Intermixing ● Definitions: The shield should be
9 Due to impedance ● Daisy chain: point-to- continuous across a network
segment and connected to
must be exercised when
installing devices containing
differences between point wiring between termination resistors
9 IMPCABLE and the Belden devices or clusters of
devices
the building’s electrical
system grounding electrode that the switches are set
9463 family, the main cable conductor. The 2005 NEC appropriately. A minimum of
9 run(s) should be entirely
for the 9463 family OR
● Star: single point with a
number of long lines
provides the following two, up to a maximum of five
guidance on grounding EOLTRs must be installed on
9 IMPCABLE: do not alternate
between these types. The ●
emanating from it
Long line: >200-foot
communication cables: each network segment as
dictated by network topology.
cable used for taps can be 1. When a communication
9 different from the main run. ●
(61m) wire run
Simple tap: <200-foot cable enters a building, a Rule 8: Device Address
primary protector is required In order to avoid the
9 Rule 3: System Topology, (61m) connection to
cluster of devices and must be grounded as possibility of devices in a
Size and Capacity described in Section 800 IV. Main Network having the
9 Supports daisy chain, star Rule 4: Cable Splicing Specifically, Paragraphs
800.93 and 800.100 define
same addresses as those
and multi-level network The goal is to create a secure in Subnetworks, set Main
9 segment topologies. electrical connection while
grounding requirements for
the primary protector.
Network device addresses
at 100 or higher excluding
Note: Star Segment Topology is minimizing exposure to
9 not recommended for new
designs.
electrical transients. Ferrules
are used to dress cable ends
2. Grounding systems are
generally covered by Section
addresses 901 to 908.
9 See Page V3-T9-295. Surge

in order to avoid problems
associated with frayed and
250 III. The grounding
electrode conductor is
protection is required for loose wires. Besides specifically covered by
9 FSK networks that leave a facilitating cable installation, Paragraphs 250.62, 250.64,
building at the egress/ingress subsequent data line 250.66, 250.68 and 250.70.
9 of the building. troubleshooting and
3. Bonding requirements
downtime are minimized.
● Supports distances up to between communication
9 10,000 ft (3048m) per
Most INCOM devices have
built-in three-pole terminal systems and the power
segment when designed distribution system is
9 within the specifications of
blocks for data lines and
shield. For older INCOM specified by Paragraph
this guideline 250.94.
devices that have only two
9 terminals, shield continuity
9.4
Dimensions
Power Xpert Gateway 900 with Standard Panel Mounting (Brackets Included) 9
5.63 (142.8) 9
9
2.00
1.63
(50.8)
9
(41.4)
9
9
6.00 (152.4) 4.50 (114.3)
Front View Side View
9
9
Power Xpert Gateway 900 with DIN Rail Mounting Power Xpert Gateway 900
Shipping
9
Width Height Depth Weight Lbs (kg)
6.00 (152.4) 2.00 (50.8) 4.50 (114.3) 1.70 (0.8)
9
9
2.56 (65.0)
5.04 (128.0)
Top View 9
Remove and then reattach these
screws to rotate for vertical mounting 9
9
9
2.02 1.97
(51.3) (50.0)
9
0.56
6.00 (152.4)
(14.2) 9
Front View Side View
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Contents
9 Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Description Page
9 Power Xpert Gateway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
9 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-299
9 mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300
9
IPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
9 MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-304
V3-T9-305
9 Convenient Network Expansion Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-307
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309
9
9
9
9
9
9 Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Product Description Features Standards and Certifications
9 Eaton’s Power Xpert
● Simultaneous, full-duplex, PXES 6-Port Switch—10/100 Mb ● UL Listed (UL 60950)
high-speed communication with Optional 100 Mb Fiber
cUL
9
●
Ethernet Switches are ideal
on all ports—no network This compact switch provides
for extending Ethernet ● CE
performance bottlenecks six Ethernet ports, with
networks via CAT5 wiring
9 Emissions meet FCC Part
●
● Hardened for factory flexible configurations. The
or fiber in harsh, industrial 15, Class A
floor—ideal for both base models have one of
environments. Built with
9 high-grade components and industrial or data center
applications
three options:
constructed using special ● Two 100 Mb fiber and
9 thermal techniques, PXE
Switches can withstand the
● Unmanaged, plug-and-play
implementation—no
four 10/100 copper ports
● One fiber and five
9 unpredictable conditions of
such environments.
software or additional
hardware required for
copper ports
● Six copper ports
configuration
9 ● Seamlessly integrates into PXES 4-Port Switch—10/100 Mb
Eaton’s Power Xpert
9 Architecture—quality
For smaller applications
requiring fewer connection
and reliability of Eaton
points and no fiber, the 4-port
9 guaranteed
Power Xpert Ethernet Switch
● Mounting options include is a versatile option. It
9 standalone panel-
mounting, DIN rail
provides edge access
Ethernet ports in a convenient
9 mounting, or 19-inch
standard rack mounting
and compact package.
9
9
9
9
9
9.4
Product Selection
9
Ethernet Switch Power Xpert Ethernet Switches 9
Description
Catalog
Number 9
4-port Ethernet switch—copper only
6-port Ethernet switch—copper only
PXES4P24V
PXES6P24V
9
6-port Ethernet switch—5 copper/1 fiber (ST connector) PXES6P24V1ST 9
6-port Ethernet switch—4 copper/2 fiber (ST connector) PXES6P24V2ST
Accessories
9
9
Ethernet Switch Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Catalog
9
9
Description Number
Power supply (preferred)—100–240 Vac input ELC-PS02
9
DIN rail mount with screw—24 Vdc output terminals
Power supply (alternate)—120 Vac input PXESPS12V
Wall plug-in type with 6 ft cord—12 Vdc output
DIN rail mounting bracket PXESDINRL
9
19-inch rack mount tray PXESTRAY
9
9
Operating Environment
9
Description Specifications 9
Ambient temperature ratings –25°C to 60°C long-term per independent agency tests (UL), or –40°C to 85°C short-term per IEC type tests
Storage temperature –40° to 185°F (–40°C to 85°C) 9
9
Cold start to –20°C
Ambient relative humidity 5%–95% (noncondensing)
Altitude –200 to 50,000 ft (–60 to 15,000m)
9
MTBF > 15 years
9
Network Standards
Description 9
9
Ethernet IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.3u; IEEE 802.1p, 100Base-TX, 10Base-T, 100Base-FX
Power Consumption
Description
9
7.0 watts typical—9 watts maximum 9
Packaging 9
Enclosure Robust sheet metal (steel)
9
Cooling method Case used as a heat sink
9
Mounting 9
Metal panel mounting clips Included 9
9
DIN rail mounting Optional
19-inch rack mount Optional
9
Copper Ethernet Cable ● When using conduit or a ● For Ethernet cable run near ● Ethernet connectors used
9 Wiring Guidelines metal cable tray, each conductors with potentially in harsh environments
The following information can section of the conduit or noisy power conductors must be robust enough
9 be used as a guide when tray must be bonded to carrying currents of greater to withstand vibration,
designing an Ethernet system each adjacent section and than 20A or voltages multiple connection cycles,
9 using Copper Ethernet Cable. the conduit or tray needs
to be bonded to earth
greater than 400V, maintain
the following distances.
temperature changes,
and provide a proper
● Cables should not be
9 routed near equipment that
ground. Do not allow the
shields to touch the
STP cable is recommended
● Conductors of less than
seal to protect against
moisture, dust/dirt and
generates strong electric conduit or metal tray at chemical attack
9 or magnetic fields such as any point ●
20A = 6 inches
Conductors of 20A ● Different cable media
motors, drive controllers, ● Only shielded (STP) or more and up to support different
9 ●
arc welders and conduit
Ethernet cable insulation
Ethernet cables should be 100 kVA = 12 inches bandwidth capabilities.
placed into metal conduit. ● Conductors greater than When installing cable in a
9 has a voltage rating of
300 Vac. Use of barriers,
Some UTP cables may not
function properly when
100 kVA = 24 inches network, care should be
taken to install the cable
cable trays or high voltage ● Route Ethernet cable at
9 sheathing with STP
installed in conduit, as the
metal conduit can affect the least 5 feet (1.5m) from
that will fill current network
loading requirements and
Ethernet cable may be electrical properties of an sources of rf/microwave future expansion needs. In
9 required in installations unshielded cable. Consult radiation. STP cable is general, fiber optic cable
with cables carrying the cable manufacturer required can support the greatest
9 voltages greater than
300 Vac. This may
when installing UTP cables ● Do not cascade more than bandwidth (upward of
in conduit four Ethernet repeaters 25,000 gigabits) and UTP
9 also be necessary in
order to comply with
● As a general rule for noise (router, switch or hub)
within a network segment
has the lowest. CAT5e
cabling is designed to
protection, Ethernet Cable
UL requirements. In
9 Environmentally sealed operate a bit rates up to
●
should maintain a minimum
installations where the connectors should be 1000 Mb and CAT6 cable
distance of 3 inches (8 cm)
cable cannot be physically specified for cables used up to 2000 Mb
9 separated from the power
from electric power
conductors for up to in outdoor installations ● Operating your cable at
cables (where a physical
100 volts and 1 inch (3 cm) ● Avoid pinching the cable maximum speed reduces
9 barrier is not practical) fiber
optic cable should be used
for each additional 100 volts when using cable ties the distance between
up to 400 volts. STP cable is ● Total distance between an network segments. Check
9 ● When crossing power
conductors with Ethernet
recommended Ethernet Transmitter and with your cable supplier for
● For Ethernet cable run Receiver at the end points specifications regarding
cable, cross at right angles
9 ● Shielded Twisted Pair (STP)
within conduit, but near
conductors with potentially
of the network should not
exceed 328 feet (100m)
segment distance vs.
speed
Ethernet cable should be
9 noisy power conductors Cable with 5% impedance
●
● Total distance from a patch
specified for use in high carrying currents of greater mismatch or return
panel to a wall jack (using
noise environments. than 20A or voltages loss of 27 to 32 dB is
9 Shielded shrouded greater than 400V, maintain
solid cable) shall not
exceed 295 feet (90m). recommended. Ethernet
connectors must be used the following distances. cable impedance can vary
Splices are not permitted
9 and the shield must be
connected at both ends of
STP cable is required. ● Patch cords used as cross-
by as much as 15%
● Conductors of less than (85 to 115 ohms). Average
connect jumpers in a patch
9 the wire. The mating plug
must have a shielded
20A = 3 inches panel should not exceed
Ethernet cable with 15%
impedance variation
shroud that is terminated
● Conductors of 20A or 20 feet (6m)
9 to ground at both ends. more and up to 100 kVA ● Patch cords from a wall
can have up to 10 dB
additional return loss.
Where there is a possibility = 6 inches jack to the work area PC This discontinuity is
9 of a difference in ground ● Conductors greater than
100 kVA = 12 inches
(or device) shall not exceed
16 feet (5m)
referred to as return loss,
potential (common mode) since it causes some of the
9 voltages between the
two terminated ends,
● Ethernet cable used in
harsh environments
signal to be reflected back
down the cable instead of
fiber optic cable is
9 recommended
must be selected to
withstand the following
propagating forward. It
is measured in decibels or
conditions: vibration, ratio of transmitted versus
9 air born contaminants, reflected signal
chemicals, temperature,
9 electromagnetic
interference, combustible
9 atmospheres and local
regulatory standards such
9 as UL and NEMA
9
9
9.4
Fiber Optic Technology up of three parts. The center ● Fiber optic cable is ● Multi-Mode Graded-Index
The use of fiber optics in core is composed of very available in various Fiber Cable is used for 9
telecommunications and wide pure glass. Core dimensions operating temperature communication over
area networking has been are usually in the range ranges. Care should be shorter distances of up 9
common for many years, but of 50 to 125 um for multi- taken to match the to 2 km
more recently fiber optics mode cables and 8-9 um for
single-mode cables. The
temperature rating of the
fiber to the environment it
● Fiber cable is composed of 9
have become increasingly glass and is not well suited
prevalent in industrial data
communications systems
surrounding glass, called
cladding, is a slightly less
will be exposed to. The
temperature specification
for applications requiring
tight bend radiuses. Cable
9
pure glass. The diameter of for fiber may be narrower radius dimensions vary per
9
as well. High data rate
capabilities, noise rejection the core and cladding than copper cable. Consult manufacturer. If the
and electrical isolation are together is in the range of the cable manufacturer for manufacturer does not
just a few of the important 125 to 440 um. temperature specifications provide a bend radius, a 9
characteristics that make of your cable type typical rule of thumb is a
Surrounding the cladding is a
fiber optic technology ideal
for use in industrial and
protective layer of flexible
● Sealed fiber connectors are
available for use in harsh
radius not less than 15x the
cable diameter
9
silicone called the sheath.
commercial systems. environments to prevent
contamination from
● Fiber cable to connector
terminations can be
9
Although often used for point- Fiber Optic Cable
entering the connector and
to-point connections, fiber Wiring Guidelines
The following information
fiber. The type of seal
performed in the field
using special equipment. 9
optic links are being used to required will be application This method is not
extend the distance
limitations of RS-232, RS-422/
can be used as a guide
when designing an Ethernet
dependant and can vary recommended 9
from dust- and moisture- Tier One testing is
485 and Ethernet systems system using Fiber Optic ●
while ensuring high data rates Ethernet Cable:

proof to water-tight recommended when 9
and minimizing electrical
● Mixing fiber cable types is diagnosing system
Select a fiber cable that is
9
●
interference. not permitted. The same irregularities and should
suited for the application, core dimensions and mode be performed in all new
e.g., outdoor, aerial, duct,
9
Conventional electrical data must be used within installations
signals are converted into intra-building, risers, cable segments ● Tier Two testing is
a modulated light beam, general building and Care should be taken when
9
●
recommended to certify
introduced into the fiber and plenum applications purchasing connectors to that a system complies
transported via a very small ● Fiber optic cable is useful in include strain relief, which with standards set forth
diameter glass or plastic applications where the reduces mechanical strain by the owner/installer 9
fiber to a receiver that environment is combustible, (vibration) within the cable,
converts the light back into
electrical signals.
electrically noisy, the cable
must be bundles with high
as well as the connector.
Strain relief also provides
9
Optical fibers allow data
voltage wires or where
common mode voltages
support to the cable
to ensure proper bend 9
signals to propagate through may exist between the radius at the connector
them by ensuring that the
light signal enters the fiber
earth ground points of the ● Single-Mode Fiber is 9
terminating connectors used for long distance
at an angle greater than the
critical angle of the interface transmission of up to 9
between two types of glass. 120 km. Distance may vary
Optical fiber is actually made depending on speed and 9
type of converter used
9
Dimensions 9
Packaging 9
Dimensions of PXES4P series 3.5 in H x 3.0 in W x 1.0 in D (8.9 cm x 7.6 cm x 2.5 cm) 9
Weight of PXES4P series 8.6 oz. (243g)
Dimensions of PXES6P series 3.6 in H x 3.0 in W x 1.7 in D (9.2 cm x 7.6 cm x 4.3 cm) 9
Weight of PXES6P series 13 oz. (370g)
9
9
9
9
9
Contents
9 mMINT Module
Description Page
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-296
9 mMINT
9 IPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
9 MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
9
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) . . . . . . . . . . .
9 V3-T9-309
9
9
9
9
9
9
9 mMINT
The mMINT (Modbus Master
Features
The mMINT module is a ● Up to 32 products
● UL
9 INCOM Network Translator)
Module is an Eaton accessory
slave device on the Modbus
network and as such requires
connected to INCOM
network port (246 unique
●
●
CSA
CE mark
product that provides a master that will exchange addresses maximum)
9 communication between register objects with the ● Flashing Status LED to
a Modbus RTU network mMINT module. indicate an active module
9 and an INCOM (INdustrial
● Handles generic pass- ● LED indicators for INCOM
COMmunications) network transmit and receive
through commands
9 (see Page V3-T9-301). This
module is transparent to the (Modbus/INCOM/Modbus) communications
Product Selection
● Capable of passing exchanges
Modbus network. It
9 communicates to a master on Modbus register objects ● LED indicators for Modbus
The catalog number of this
product is mMINT.
the Modbus network using from Eaton’s existing RS-485 transmit and
9 the Modbus RTU (Remote products and newer PnP receive communications
exchanges
Terminal Unit) protocol. It (Plug-n-Play) products to a
9 communicates to slave
devices on the INCOM ●
Modbus RTU master
Data in IEEE Floating Point
● Input power for the module
from either 120 Vac or 24
9 network using the IMPACC format and fixed point to 125 Vdc
(Integrated Monitoring, ● Modbus RTU ● DIN rail mount package
Protection, And Control
9 communications data 0ºC to 60ºC ambient
●
Communication) protocol. transfer rates of 1200, operation

9600 or 19,200 baud with
9 one start bit, eight data
bits, no parity, and either
9 one or two stop bits
9
9
9
9
9.4
9
Module Mounting ● Recommended INCOM Modbus RS-485 Network
9
RS-485
Modbus
When mounting the cable styles are Belden A B COM SHD
9463 or C-H style The following simplified rules
mMINT, verify that an
11 mm H x 28 mm W 2A957805G01 apply to a given system
consisting of a cable link J3
9
DIN rail is used and that it is ● The maximum system between master and slave
within an enclosed space. capacity is 10,000 feet of
communications cable and
devices (see below). For 9
more complex configurations, 4.25
Simplified Wiring Rules
INCOM Network
32 slave devices on the
INCOM network under
please refer to standard
Modbus RTU wiring
(108.0)
9
the mMINT
The following simplified rules ● Non-terminated taps, up to
specification rules for
the RS-485 network.
9
apply to a given system 200 feet in length, off the
J1 J2
consisting of a single daisy-
chained main cable link
main link are permitted, ● The recommended 9
but add to the total Modbus cable has twisted-
between master and slave
9
24 – 125 Vdc Shield INCOM
cable length pair wires (24 AWG 120 Vac
devices (see below). For stranded 7x32 conductors
3.54
more complex considerations

● Make sure that there is (89.9)
9
twisted-pair wire that is with PVC insulation) having
including star configurations, mMINT Module Dimensions
recommended for IMPACC an aluminum/mylar foil
please refer to the IMPACC shield with drain wire
9
network use. Use shielded Burden
wiring specification
twisted-pair wire to ● The maximum system ● 24 Vac/dc 3 VA
T.D. 17513.
connect each slave to the capacity is 4000 feet of
Modbus RTU Serial Network
INCOM network, daisy- communications cable and Communications Speed 9
chain style. The polarity 247 devices on the ■ INCOM: 1200, 9600 baud
of the twisted pair is Modbus RTU network
● N2 Bus: 9600 baud 9
not important ● Make sure that there is
(Slave)
Modbus
Modbus
Master
twisted-pair wire that is
recommended for Modbus
Note: Contact Eaton for
availability and support for the
9
mMINT N2 Gateway.
(Master)
RTU network use. Use
shielded twisted-pair wire 9
to connect each slave to
9
INCOM Network
the Modbus RTU network,
daisy-chain style. The
INCOM
polarity of the twisted pair 9
Slaves is critically important
mMINT in a Communications Network 9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Contents
9 IPONI Communication Module
Description Page
9 Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287
9 mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300
IPONI
9 DPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
9 I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305
9 Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II). . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309
9
9
9
9
9 IPONI
9 Product Selection Guide Product Description Technical Data and
The INCOM Product Specifications
9 IPONI Selection Chart Operated Network Interface
Temperature
INCOM card, or IPONI card, adds
9 Description IPONI on Product MPONI communication capability to
various Eaton products. Each
● –20°C to 70°C
IQ Analyzer ■ — ■
9 IQ DP-4000 ■ — ■
IPONI has three 16-digit
address switches to uniquely
Humidity
● 5%–95% noncondensing
■ identify each device on the
9
IQ 200 — —
network. IPONIs are Power
IQ Multipoint Energy Submeter II — ■ —
designed to be daisy-chained ● 20–30 Vdc maximum,
9 Energy Sentinel — ■ — throughout a unit substation
or equipment room to a
50 mA nominal,
Power Sentinel — ■ — 100 mA maximum
9 IQ Generator ■ — —
master device such as a
mMINT, MINTII or Power Speed
IQ Data ■ — — Xpert Gateway. From the
9 IQ Data Plus II — — — master computer, information
● 1200 and 9600 baud
is distributed through the
9 IQ 500
IQ Transfer
—
■
—
—
—
—
facility’s TCP/IP Ethernet
Communications
● Three-position removable
network. A twisted shielded
9 AEMII ■ — — pair network connecting
IPONIs may extend up to
terminal block for twisted
shielded pair INCOM
BIM II ■ — —
9 CMU ■ — —
10,000 feet (3048m) before
terminating a master device.
■ The IPONI comes with
9
CED — —
MP-3000 ■ — ■ mounting hardware and
attaches to the back of its
9 Digitrip 3000 — ■ — associated device.
FP-5000 — ■ —
9
Product Selection
9
PONI Communication Modules
9 IPONI Card
Catalog
Description Number
9 INCOM PONI IPONI
9
9
9.4
Contents
Description Page
9
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287 9
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300 9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI 9
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
9
9
9
9
DPONI 9
The DeviceNet Product Eaton’s DPONI
Operated Network 9
Interface (DPONI) enables DeviceNet
communication between a
DeviceNet network master DeviceNet
Status
9
Network DEVICE
station and a host device in a
9
MOUNTING
Connection
Master/Slave format over a (5 point plug)
T
DeviceNet network. The
DPONI is compatible with the Data 9
MP-3000 and the MP-4000. Code
The DPONI is powered both
by the host product to which Earth
9
GND
it is attached and by the
DeviceNet network. The
9
DPONI uses opto-couplers
to isolate the two power 9
systems.
The DPONI communicates
R
9
at 125, 250 or 500 Kbps
selected via a front panel INCOM
IQ Host
Device 9
DIP switch. All products on Status Connection
the DeviceNet network 9
must be set at the same Product Selection
communication rate. 9
DPONI
The DPONI has a bi-color
network/module status
Description
Catalog
Number
9
LED that functions in
accordance with the
DeviceNet specification.
The DeviceNet Product Operated Network Interface DPONI 9
An additional monocolor
LED flashes while the DPONI 9
is receiving a message from Technical Data and Specifications
the host device.
Temperature Power Communications
9
● –20ºC to 70ºC ● 11–27 Vdc, 40 mA maximum ● Standard five-wire
CAN connection
9
Humidity Speed
● 5%–90% noncondensing ● 125, 250 or 500 Kbps 9
9
Contents
9 Description Page
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-296
9 mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300
IPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
9 DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
MPONI
9 I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305
9 Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309
9
9
9
9
9 MPONI
9 Product Description Features
The MPONI Product Operated
9 Network Interface card, or
MPONI
MPONI card, enables Modbus Network Connection Address Function
9 communication capability to
various Eaton products. Each
(Green Phoenix
Connection) LED
Selector Selector
Switches Switch
9 MPONI contains two rotary

address switches to uniquely
TX
identify each device on the

9
RS-485 RX
network and a baud rate DIP NETWORK

1=A
switch. A 5-pin connector is
9
2=G
provided for wiring to the 3 = COMMON

STATUS
RS-485 network. Various 4 = SHIELD
9
5 = CHASSIS
baud rates are available for RS-485 IQ Host
networking flexibility, and P roduct Device
O perated Connection
9 onboard LEDs indicate
operation, error and N etwork
I nterface
communication status.
9 The MPONI is applied where LED
a device network exists
9 connected by a dedicated Recommended
18 gauge twisted pair IMPCABLE or
shielded twisted pair 20 gauge Belden 9463 class
9 conductor. Modbus RS-485
allows a single device or
multiple units in a daisy-chain Product Selection
9 configuration to communicate
with another local or remote MPONI
9 device and may extend up to Catalog
4000 feet (1219m) without a Description Number
9 repeater. The MPONI comes
with mounting hardware and
Modbus Product Operated Network Interface Card MPONI
9 attaches to the back of its

associated device.
9 Note: Please see IL for detailed

register support information for
9
each supported product. Not all
device functionality is supported
with the RS-485 PONI over the
9 Modbus Protocol.
9
9.4
Contents
Digital Input Module (DIM)
Description Page
9
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300 9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303 9
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) 9
9
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-306
V3-T9-307
9
9
9
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) 9
Product Description Features, Benefits and Standards and Certifications 9
Eaton’s Digital Input Module Functions ● UL 873
is a device that interfaces ● Reads four separate KYZ ● CE mark (48 Vdc operation) 9
with up to four standard utility equipped utility meters ● FCC Part 15, Class A
(electric, gas, water) meters
or monitors eight digital
● Pulse counts stored in non- ● IEC 1000-4-x 9
volatile memory ● CISPR 22, Class A
inputs. It translates KYZ
pulses from meters into a
● Each channel ● IEC 1000-4-2; 1995, Electro 9
independently monitors
register count that is Static Discharge
maintained and compiled
KYZ counts, pulse counts,
or digital indications ● IEC 1000-4-3; 1995, 9
within the DIM module in Radiated RF Immunity
non-volatile memory. The
pulse count can be accessed
● Monitors a maximum of
eight individual digital ● IEC 1000-4-6; 1996, 9
inputs Conducted RF Immunity
from the DIM module
remotely using Eaton Power ● Input channels are isolated ● FCC Part 15 Class A 9
Management Software, (10 meters) Radiated
Isolated 24 Vdc power
9
●
including the Energy Billing Emissions

is provided on the I/O
application. connector ● CISPR 22, Class A
The DIM can also be used to ● LED indicators on the input
(30 meters); 1991, 9
Radiated Emissions
channels indicate when the
monitor eight digital inputs
from switch closures. unit is counting ● CISPR 22, Class A; 1991, 9
Conducted Emissions
● 10 LED status indicators,
100 ohm termination DIP
(PowerPort)
9
switch, address selector
switches 9
● DIN rail mounting
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Product Selection Dimensions

9 DIM Ordering Information

KYZ Input Module
Catalog
9
Description Number
Digital Input Module DIM
9
9
9 Specifications
9
Description Rating
Operating temperature –20°C to 60°C
9 Storage temperature –20°C to 70°C

Operating Humidity 5 to 90% maximum noncondensing
9 Altitude 10,000 ft. (3048m)
Environment Indoor use only
9 Transient overvoltage Category 2 KYZ Input Module
9 Pollution
Equipment
1°
Class 1
Width Height Depth
3.54 (89.9) 4.25 (107.9) 3.50 (88.9) 1
9 Frequency Range Mounting Information Note
9
1 Does include DIN rail.
● 50/60 Hz The DIM module is designed
to be DIN rail mountable.
Power DIN rail must be 1/3 inches
9 ● 85 to 138 Vac (120 Vac H x 1-3/8 inches W (8.5 mm
nominal) 50/60 Hz; 100 mA H x 34.9 mm W).
9 ● 48–128 Vdc (48 Vdc
nominal); 100 mA Communications
9 ● Brownout operation at The DIM is a fully compatible
50% and 80% of nominal Power Management Software
9 AC and DC ratings communicating device
with built-in INCOM
● Power input is provided communications. The DIM
9 from a limited source, comes complete with a
isolated from the mains 3-pin connector to receive
9 by double isolation the shielded twisted pair
● Power for all inputs is conductor.
9 supplied from an internal,
isolated 24 Vdc power All wiring must be complete
source as per Instruction Leaflet
9 TD17513, Wiring
Specification Base Rules.
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9.4
Contents
Addressable Relay II
Description Page
9
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300 9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303 9
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
9
Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .
Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-308
V3-T9-308
9
9
9
Addressable Relay II 9
Product Description Features, Benefits and 9
The Addressable Relay II is Functions
designed for use where Each Addressable Relay II The Addressable Relay II Monitored Parameters 9
information or control of non- includes two status indicating includes a feature called ● Output relay energized/
communicating devices is
required remotely. The relays
circuits (IN1 and IN2) that can
be used to transmit the
the “communications
watchdog.” The
de-energized 9
● Input 1 status
communicate at 9600/1200
baud on the INCOM network.
contact status of devices
external to the Addressable
communications watchdog
monitors communications
● Input 2 status 9
Devices are assigned a three- Relay II. Each input is isolated between the Addressable ● Breaker status open/closed
digit address to uniquely with its own return. A typical Relay II and the computer ● Protective relay status 9
identify them on the daisy- installation using these report- control station. If normal/tripped
chained twisted shielded pair
network.
back inputs to the Eaton communications are lost, the 9
PowerNet system is shown in communications watchdog Communications
The Addressable Relay II is a
the wiring example. Terminals
4 and 5 connect to the status
will reset the relay to the de-
energized (OFF) state. The
● Built-in INCOM 9
Form C relay on terminals 1, 2 communications for
Addressable Relay II must be
and 3, with output contact
input 1 circuit (IN1) and
terminals 6 and 7 connect to updated every 10 seconds
monitoring in Eaton’s
PowerNet system
9
ratings as shown in the
the status input 2 circuit (IN2). when the communications The Addressable Relay II also
Contact Ratings table. The
Addressable Relay II may be
These status indicating watchdog is enabled or else includes a feature called 9
circuits operate with input communications are “relay pulse.” The relay pulse
powered by 48–120 Vac or
48–125 Vdc through
voltages of 48–120 Vac or assumed to be lost. The feature sets the Addressable 9
48–125 Vdc circuits. communications watchdog Relay II to a pulse mode
terminals 11 and 12 of the
terminal block. DC polarity is
is enabled when DIP switch 3
is set to the ON position.
where the relay is energized 9
not significant. (ON) for 10 seconds and then
When the communications
Application Description watchdog is not enabled, the
is de-energized (OFF). The
relay pulse is enabled when
9
relay will remain in the state
Enables remote control of DIP switch 2 is set to the ON
9
●
set by the last command position and disabled when
non-communication
issued. See V3-T9-312 for DIP switch 2 is set to the OFF
capable devices on Eaton’s
PowerNet system
DIP switch configuration. position. If this feature is not 9
● Monitors two digital status enabled, the relay will remain
inputs on the PowerNet in the state set by the last 9
system command.
9
9
9
9
Product Selection Dimensions

9 Addressable Relay II Addressable Relay

Catalog Mounting
9
Description Number
Addressable Relay II ARII 1.00
(25.4)
9 .50
(12.7)
9
Insert (3)
9 Power: 48–120 Vac; 48–125 Vdc
●
#8 Screws
● Operating temperature range: 32°–158°F (0°–70°C) for
9 Contact Ratings
Mounting 2.82
(71.6)
9 Contact
Ratings Make Break
9 120–240 Vac 4960 VA 828 VA

24–120 Vac 43A 7.2A
9 30 Vdc 10A 10A
Back View
9
Wiring Diagram Addressable Relay
9 Power Bus Width Height Depth
9
L1 L2 L3
1.75 (44.5) 3.00 (76.2) 4.00 (101.6)
INCOM
Network
9
9
9
Cpt
M1 M2 M3
9 OL OL OL
FL
9
T1 T2 T3
9
Hand
Communication and
Controlled Output Relay OL
Off M
9 1 Auto
2
9
OL
3
M OL
9
AUX 5
Input 1
7 MA
6
Input 2
9
8 INCOM
9 Communications
12
Power
9
11
Addressable Relay
9 DIP Switch Functions
9
N
O 1 2 3
OFF ON
Baud Rate 9600 1200
D O O
9 Relay Pulse Disabled

Communications Watchdog
Enabled
Disabled Enabled
9
9
9.4
Contents
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II)
Description Page
9
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300 9
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303 9
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
V3-T9-307
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II)
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . .
Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
V3-T9-310
V3-T9-311
9
9
9
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II) 9
Test OPTIM Trip Unit
9
●
Performance:
Eaton’s Breaker Interface
● 810, 910, 750, 1050, 550,
Phase and ground
9
●
Module is a panel-mounted 1150, 520MC, IQ Energy

Sentinels and Power ● Trip/no trip
device that displays the
Sentinels
following parameters.
● Event logging
● Expanded Energy 9
Monitoring:
● Phase current Alarming
9
●
● Set addresses for group
● Energy ● High load indication energy monitoring
● Present demand watts
● Peak demand watts
●
●
Peak exceeded alarm
Grouping of meters
● Group energy readings 9
● Local and Remote
Average demand current
9
●
An operator can use the Indication:
● Cause and magnitude Breaker Interface Module to:
of trip ● Remote indication/
● Trip history
● Complete Initial System alarming 9
Setup: ● Breaker status LED
% Total Harmonic
9
●
● Select system indication
Distortion (THD) for
each phase frequency (50/60 Hz)
Expanded
9
●
● % Harmonic Content for

● Set password Communications:
each phase (1st–27th Communicate with:
9
● Configure OPTIM ●
harmonic) Protective Settings. – OPTIM Trip Units

● Custom circuit description Select protection
9
●
– Digitrip RMS 810, 910
Note: The Breaker Interface options and 1150 Trip Units
● Select alarm levels – IQ Energy Sentinels
9
Module displays only a portion of
the information it receives from and Universal IQ
the Digitrip RMS 910, 1150 and ● Display Information: Energy Sentinels
Power Sentinels. The balance of
the information (such as
● Metered values – A total of 50 devices 9
● Trip event information
Waveform Analysis and Power
Factor) can be passed through the ● Breaker information 9
unit to a master computer, where ● Time-current set points
it can be viewed.
9
9
9
9
9

9 ● Monitors and displays Communications Password Protection Rear Access Area
parameters from any
9 combination of Digitrip
Depending upon the type of
communication protocol used
A user-defined password is
included for added security
All wiring connections to the
Breaker Interface Module
RMS 810, 910, 1150 and by the main network, an when changing settings or are made at the chassis’ rear
9 Digitrip OPTIM Trip Units, appropriate PONI module can performing breaker tests. and include:
F-/J-/K-Frame Energy be easily field-mounted to the
9 Sentinels, and Universal
Energy Sentinels,
back of the Breaker Interface Non-Volatile Memory
● Relay connection for
“alarm” condition, “high
Module, enabling the unit to The programmed functions,
load” condition, “peak
9 supporting as many as
50 of these devices up to
pass the information from its
subnetwork to a remote
addresses and circuit
exceed” for device or
descriptions are stored in
10,000 feet (3048m) away group, and watthour pulse
9 ● Communicates the
master control unit up to
10,000 feet (3048m) away.
non-volatile memory.
● Initiator
information from these No reprogramming of the External Power ● 24 Vdc input—BIM II
9 protective and energy unit is required when the A 24 Vdc supply is required ● 120 or 240 Vac input—
monitoring devices over PONI is added. for the BIM II. (No external BIMPS
9 Eaton INCOM network
The Breaker Interface Module power supply is required for ● DIP switches for selecting
to a computer or PLC the PONI Card.) A 120 or
can be mounted directly on an operating mode
9 ● Continuously monitors
breakers recording and
the assembly or at a remote 240 Vac supply is required ● Three-contact connector
location and can be used to for the BIMPS. with subnetwork
9 time-stamping trip events
along with approximate
access and configure and ● Connector for PONI
display information from card for remote
fault currents. Events are
9 logged into non-volatile
OPTIM Trip Units. communications Local
RAM Display Units
9
Physical Characteristics
9 ● Graphical, glass plasma
display
9 ● Up to seven lines of
information
9 ● Membrane faceplate
NEMA 3R and 12 rated
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9.4
Product Selection
9
Breaker Interface Breaker Interface Module 9
Module II (BIM II)
Description
Catalog
Number 9
Breaker Interface Module BIMII
9
BIMPSII 9
9
Technical Data and Specifications 9
Power Requirement Humidity 9
● 15 VA maximum ● 5% to 95% R.H.
Input Voltage
(noncondensing) 9
● 24 Vdc ±5%—BIM II Alarm Contact Ratings
● 10A at 277 Vac (resistive)
9
● 120 or 240 Vac ±10%—
BIMPS ● 10A at 30 Vdc (resistive) 9
● 1/3 hp at 125, 250 Vac
9
Operating Temperature
● 0°C to 70°C
(32°C to 158°F)
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Dimensions
9
Connections and DIP Switch Rear Label Diagram
9 5.56
Sub (141.2)
PONI
9 Network
Interface
Shield
1 10
PONI Power
WH Pulse
Initiator
Alarm
Learn/Run
2 11
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
3 12 .38
9
CATALOG # BIMPS
STYLE # 7801C61G02 (9.7)
4 13 Typical
Impulse
Sync.
Pulse
High Load
9 5 14
3.38 Customer Satisfaction
We have established a toll-free
.19 (85.9) 6 line for problems Unused 15
(4.8)
9
Call 1-800-809-2772
PONI On
.11
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
7 Ground 16
(2.8) .19 5.06
Run
Exceeded
Peak
(4.8) (128.6) 8 24-30 Vac 17
9
.10 Typical
Learn
(2.5) 5 Places 9 18
Off
Sub PONI Common
Network Interface
.87
9 (22.1)
Sub PONI
Network Interface
9
2.04 1.69
Shield
PONI Power
Learn/Run
(51.8) (42.9)
Unused
Unused
Unused
Unused
H02
9 Expanded View
1.03 1.03
9 (26.2) (26.2)
General Layout and Dimensions
9
Breaker Interface Module
9 Height Width Depth
9
Without Communications Card
6.72 (170.7) 10.25 (260.4) 2.60 (66.0)
9 With Communications Card

6.72 (170.7) 10.25 (260.4) 3.85 (97.8)
9
Drilling Pattern
9
5.38
9
(136.7)
2.69
(68.3)
9 8.90
(226.1)
9 9.38
(238.3)
6.68
9 (169.7)
9 4.45
(113.0)
4.69
(119.1)
9
.06
(1.5) RAD
2.23 4 Places
(56.7)
9
2.53
9 (64.3)
5.06
(128.5)
9 .218 (5.5) DIA 10 Places
9
9
Power System Studies, Field Services
and Conversions
Full Service Providers 10.1 Overview of Services
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-2
10
Asset Optimization, Knowledge Management and
Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
10
Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8 10
Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-11 10
10.2 Power System Studies 10
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-12
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-15
10
Harmonic Analysis Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17
10
Advanced Analysis and Design Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19
10.3 Field Engineering Services

10
Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-23 10
10.4 Predictive Diagnostic
10
Partial Discharge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-29
Medium and High Voltage Predictive Diagnostics Online Monitoring 10
and Partial Discharge Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-32
10.5 Retrofit Services

10
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34 10
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-39
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41 10
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ Conversions . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-46
10
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement . . . . . . . V3-T10-50 10
MCC Replacement Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
10
10.6 Performance-Based Maintenance Services
General Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-55 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.1 Power System Studies, Field Services and Conversions
Overview of Services
Experienced Professional Engineers Contents

10 Description Page
10 Overview of Services
Overview
10 Asset Optimization, Knowledge Management
and Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
10 Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8
Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10
10 Customized High Resistance Grounding Units V3-T10-11
10
10
10
10
10
10 Overview
Eaton’s Electrical Services & Also provided is a full In addition to the local service Turnkey Project Management
10 Systems (EESS) provides complement of services to centers, aftermarket centers
intelligent PowerChain™ maintain and modernize of excellence can furnish the
10 solutions for existing, electrical power distribution, full complement of circuit
evolving, unexpected service and process control systems. breaker specialized services.
10 needs. The solutions can
End-users include industrials, Division-wide safety and
improve electrical system
commercial facilities, quality programs ensure
10 reliability, reduce downtime,
extend the useful life of utilities, municipalities, customer satisfaction,
the power distribution institutions, government while maintaining safety
10 system, and minimize and military locations. as a first priority.
electrical operating and Service capabilities include: Experienced professional
10 maintenance costs. engineers, graduate
● Turnkey project engineers, field engineers
10 General Description management Project Team
and technicians are trained
This organization supports ● System integration on both Eaton products and The following is a detailed
consultants and end-users on
10 new construction, integrated
● Training competitive electrical power listing of engineering
service offerings.
● Startup and commissioning distribution products. This
engineering solutions and cross-OEM experience allows
10 facility expansion projects. ● Predictive and preventive
for the application
● Substation design,
maintenance management and
of new products and services
10 EESS can package a
complete power distribution
● Electrical system to all manufacturer’s
construction
modernization electrical equipment.
● Electrical, mechanical and
system with Eaton
10 manufactured products,
● Circuit breaker instrumentation services
supplemented by other specialized services ● Power system studies:
10 OEM components to best Division-wide capabilities
● Short-circuit
satisfy the end-user support regional service ● Coordination
10 requirements. EESS can centers located throughout ● Arc flash
provide optimization of the U.S. and Canada. Service ● Load flow, etc.
owner’s electrical power
10 assets with guarantees
centers are equipped with the
most technologically
● Power quality and
and savings. harmonic studies
advanced test and diagnostic
10 equipment. The Power
● Renewable energy design
Systems Engineering Group and interconnection
10 uses industry standard analysis
software with advanced ● Failure/root-cause analysis
10 system modeling and ● CAD services
analysis capabilities. ● Equipment relocation
10 ● Turnkey transformer and
capacitor replacements
10
Power System Studies, Field Services and Conversions
10.1
System Integration and Training Predictive Diagnostics Services are implemented Startup, Commissioning
through the network of EESS and Maintenance 10
field locations.
● Medium voltage generator 10
and medium voltage motor
partial discharge (PD) 10
detection using existing
RTDs with temporary or
permanent sensors
10
● Medium voltage 10
switchgear PD detection
using temporary or
permanent sensors. 10
Permanent sensors
Computer Diagnostics Field Data Collection differentiate cable-related
Field Startup
10
PD to switchgear PD
● Plant monitoring, Eaton’s predictive diagnostics Installation support
protection and control: leads the industry in
● Transformers (34.5 kV
●
and supervision
10
predictive diagnostic tools primary and above) PD
● Digitrip™/Advantage™ Acceptance testing
● PowerNet™/
and services. With the detection using permanent
sensors connected to
●
● Commissioning and
10
growing demand for reduced
Power Xpert® bushing capacitive taps energizing
● DeviceNet/PLC interface
outages and increased
● Transformer (34.5 kV ● Startup, training and
10
uptime, online monitoring of
● Energy management/ electrical insulation systems primary and above) warranty support
load shedding is becoming an integral part bushing monitoring, with ● Exclusive Eaton products
10
● Distributed generation of efficient plant maintenance permanent sensors, of any 2-year warranty
● Generator/emergency in the utility, industrial and change in power factor and ● Ground fault certifications
10
commercial markets. Eaton bushing capacitance
power systems ● Ground grid testing
● PLC/PC control and open
predictive diagnostics
● Cable testing and fault
10
provides online monitoring
automation systems identification
● Drive and MCC systems
services of insulation
● Relay testing and
10
systems via the effective
training (scheduled and measurement and analysis of calibration
on-site): partial discharges. This allows ● PM program design and
10
● Distribution systems for detection of traditional implementation
analysis corona damage, or surface ● Thermograph surveys
10
● Power quality and tracking, prior to equipment ● Predictive, preventive
grounding failure. This advanced
maintenance and 10
● Electrical equipment technology is applied to
troubleshooting
maintenance medium voltage systems
such as: generators, motors,
● Transformers and 10
● PLCs and drive systems switchgear, transformers and tap changers
● Customized training cable systems. ● High voltage systems 10
programs ● Substations medium
and low voltage 10
● Relay systems
● Automatic transfer 10
schemes
● Battery systems 10
● Low/medium
voltage breakers 10
● Motors
● SF6, OCB, WLI 10
components
● Network protectors 10
● Motor control centers
and molded case 10
breakers
● Drive systems 10
● PLC/control and open
automation systems 10
● Nuclear Class 1E safety-
related field service 10
10
Electrical System Modernization ● Distribution and substation Circuit Breaker

10 automation systems Specialized Services
● Power factor control and ● Low and medium voltage
10 correction (filtered) replacement breakers
● Ground fault detection ● Low voltage retrofits (all
10 systems OEMs: Digitrip RMS kits)
● Surge/lightning ● Medium voltage vacuum
10 protection systems roll-in breakers (all OEMs)
● Automatic transfer ● Low and medium
10 scheme upgrades voltage recondition and
● Network protector service/ remanufacture
10 relaying systems ● MCC recondition
and remanufacture
● High resistance grounding
10 Equipment Inspection
and detection ● Network protector service
● Generator voltage ● Navy shipboard breakers
● Switchgear bus
10 MVA upgrading
regulation ● Nuclear Class 1E safety-
● Generator static related circuit breakers
● Bus insulation systems
10 ● Medium voltage
excitation systems
Manufacturer’s Brand
● Cogeneration switchgear
vacuum breaker roll-in Equipment Serviced
10 replacements
interface relaying
● Cutler-Hammer®
● Reduced voltage/
● Low voltage breaker soft starters ● Westinghouse®
10 replacement
● Drive/PLC system ● Square D®
● Low and medium voltage upgrades ● General Electric®
10 motor starting upgrades
● Synchronous field ● ITE®/BBC/ABB®
● Low voltage breaker application upgrades
10 (all OEMs) trip system
● Allis Chalmers/Siemens®
upgrades—Digitrip ● Federal Pacific®
10 ● Low and medium voltage ● Challenger®
cell retrofits ● Obsolete equipment
10 ● Molded case breaker
References
upgrades
Electrical System
10 ● Motor control center
Modernization uses advanced
buckets upgrades
Eaton products.
10 ● Protection, metering,
and communications:
10 ● Low voltage breakers:
Digitrip/PowerNet
10 ● Overload protection
● Metering systems:
IQ family Trip Unit Upgrade
10 ● PowerNet
implementation
10 ● Harmonic
measurements
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.1
Eaton’s Electrical Services & Systems (EESS) Contents
Description Page
10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-2 10
Product Life Extension 10
Elements of a Performance-Based
Maintenance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-6 10
Asset Optimization Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-6
Knowledge Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-7 10
Power Systems Engineering Solutions. . . . . . . V3-T10-7
Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8 10
Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units . . V3-T10-11 10
10
10
10
Asset Optimization, Knowledge Management and Product Life Extension 10
General Description 10
A company’s facilities exist Eaton knows that a Performance-Based 1. Planned Maintenance
for a single purpose: to successful maintenance Maintenance (PBM) Program Module: addressing 10
support the mission and program has the following Eaton offers centrally operational performance,
objectives of the company’s characteristics: as-left conditions,
business. It is essential that
coordinated management of
all procurement, installation, environmental
10
the power distribution
● Enables you to schedule considerations, and
startup and systems required
equipment and energy assets maintenance based on
to implement powerful testing and calibration 10
that sustain production and actual device operation results.
solutions. Whether you have
services are working as history
a single site or multiple sites,
2. Predictive Diagnostic
10
efficiently and effectively ● Eliminates unnecessary Eaton has the solutions that
maintenance work and Module: focusing on
as possible.
related production outages
fit various project needs.
visual observations, 10
The core business of Eaton’s Reduction of spare parts The PBM Program offers a environmental and
Electrical Services & Systems
●
requirements due to definitive result and at a thermal conditions, 10

(EESS) centers on power increased accuracy of guaranteed price. We and predictive indicator
distribution and energy equipment history integrate four proven results. 10
management. maintenance programs to
● Reduction of overall 3. Reliability-Centered
1. We offer Powerchain maintenance costs
positively impact your key
business drivers and give you
Maintenance Module: 10
Management solutions concentrating on the
high returns on investment.
and we take care of your potential for injuries, 10
systems so you can take environmental hazards
care of your business. and product losses or
process interruptions.
10
2. One area of the
PowerChain™ is 4. Periodic Observations 10
maintenance solutions. Module: centering on
equipment loading, and
visual and environmental
10
observations.
10
10
10
10
10
10
Getting a Performance- Elements of a Performance- Asset Optimization Services

10 Based Maintenance Based Maintenance Program The Electrical Distribution With a reputation as the
Program Started ● Site audit and maintenance System (EDS) not only best-in-class power solution
10 Getting started with a needs assessment represents a significant strategists, it is obvious why
PBM Program is easy. Highly ● Condition-based capital investment, it is more and more industry
10 qualified EESS engineers maintenance essential to maintaining leaders are turning to Eaton
visit your facility and perform production and critical for uncompromising safe
● Reliability centered
10 a comprehensive site audit maintenance (RCM)
processes. In order to ensure
the maximum possible return
and reliable electrical power
distribution systems, in the
and needs assessment. ● Predictive diagnostics on this investment and PowerChain.
10 While implementing
electrical system testing ● Efficient algorithms to ensure that power to critical
integrate equipment processes is maintained, By providing the right
and maintenance, EESS
10 engineers review both condition results, EESS offers a suite of asset technology and intellectual
RCM input, predictive optimization services. This resources through
the “condition” and the outsourcing the ownership,
10 “criticality” of each diagnostics and periodic is not just a maintenance
operation and maintenance
component with plant observations program—we combine years
of EDS experience, as well as of the plant electrical
10 personnel. ● Recommendations
for immediate action, power system engineering distribution system, value
The condition is determined and power quality expertise, can be realized in three areas:
automation, remote
10 via traditional preventive monitoring, life extension, with the latest in predictive 1. Capital funds previously
maintenance procedures spare parts or upgrading diagnostic and remote spent on non-core assets
10 (industry-standard, time- ● Periodic observations while monitoring, and knowledge are made available to
based) combined with management technology, invest in core processes
energized and operating
10 predictive diagnostic
technologies. The criticality ● Maintenance implemented
to deliver a comprehensive and/or increase
program designed to optimize shareholder value.
rating of each component based on equipment EDS assets. This means
10 is established though condition and criticality lower operating and 2. Operation and
application of a reliability- ● Root-cause failure analysis maintenance costs and maintenance costs
10 centered maintenance ● Periodic scorecard and improved system reliability (salary/benefits; risk
approach, taking into customized reporting and uptime. By outsourcing and insurance related
10 account its potential impact of results responsibility for the electrical to NFPA and OSHA;
on critical processes, safety ● Continuous improvement distribution system assets training; engineering and
and the environment. purchasing/procurement;
10 ● Optional ensured to EESS, owners can focus
on their core business while test equipment; tools;
Then, EESS recommends a performance improvements
we deliver maximum return safety equipment; and
10 maintenance interval (short-, and ensured savings—
on your investment via parts inventory) are
mid- or long-term) for each typically, 15% savings over
increased uptime and significantly reduced or
two performance cycles
10 component, as well as work
scopes and periodic
decreased operation and eliminated completely.
maintenance costs. Energy
observation frequency. 3. Performance guarantees
10 management services and
and service level
Cost savings are realized performance contracts are
agreements related
10 when the long-term also available by which we
to uptime, energy,
maintenance interval is will guarantee specific
and operating and
lengthened or by the measurable results related
10 scope of maintenance to energy savings, system
maintenance costs
are realized.
work during scheduled uptime, equipment
10 outages is reduced. Uptime reliability, and operation and
and reliability improve when maintenance cost reductions.
10 preventive maintenance is
performed more frequently PBM Program Flowchart
10 on components with the
short-term designation. Continuous Periodic
Improvement Scorecard
Additional reliability
10 improvements can result Periodic Observations while
from redirecting some of Energized & Operating
10 the savings to performing Site Audit

& Needs Reliability-Centered Maintenance
Ensured
Savings
additional predictive Assessment nance
Condition-Based Maintenance
inte
Ma
10 diagnostics and equipment Predictive Diagnostics
Inte
grated
modernization. Traditional-Planned Maintenance
10 EESS delivers a periodic Continuous

Improvement
Root-Cause
Failure Analysis
scorecard to plant
10 personnel, summarizing
the recommendations,
10 performance and results
of the program.
10
10.1
Knowledge Management Power Systems
Eaton has the expertise for Engineering Solutions 10
electrical distribution systems Not only do we have one
with a variety of technologies of the largest teams of 10
and expert analytical services power systems engineers
through our Instant Response strategically located 10
CenterSM. We aggregate data throughout the world, but
gathered from your system
and use the information to
many of these professionals
have influenced industry
10
predict equipment failure and standards and are sought
identify energy cost reduction after because of their
10
opportunities. expertise. With an emphasis
Our practices can help you:
on precision and accuracy, 10
Eaton’s highly trained
● Increase uptime: engineers provide the most 10
● Avoid outages by focused and systematic
predicting equipment approach available to
enhance your system’s
10
failure or system
performance. Your system
problems
can save you money and 10
● Decrease duration increase productivity while
of outages (remote
troubleshooting 24/7)
meeting the growing and 10
changing demands of
● Reduce operating and
maintenance costs:
your business. 10
Service equipment Through surveys, studies,
●
based on real-time predictive maintenance 10

information rather than solutions, energy
traditional time-based management, monitoring 10
maintenance and evaluation Eaton will
● Better maintenance
help you: 10
with less man-hours ● Maintain IEEE
● Reduce energy costs: recommended power 10
● Optimize utility rate quality levels, including
structure proper operating voltages 10
● Automated demand
● Reduce costly system
management disturbances 10
● Energy usage
● Minimize harmonic
accountability disturbances created
by nonlinear loads
10
Provide arc flash levels
●
and personal protective

10
equipment to develop
customer safety programs 10
● With virtually all types of
software packages 10
We offer more than 15
standard and specialized
10
power system studies to
precisely target and help 10
correct your specific power
issues, utilizing a variety of 10
measurement instruments
and specialized software
packages.
10
10
10
10
10
10
PSA Group Contents

10 Description Page
10 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-2
10 Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
Power Systems Automation Group
10 General Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-9
Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10
10 Customized High Resistance Grounding Units . . V3-T10-11
10
10
10
10
10
10 Power Systems Automation Group
10 General Description Power Systems Automation
The Power Systems ● Bringing a wide range of ● Power monitoring,
10 Automation (PSA) group Eaton resources into a management and control
is a full-service systems project to address systems
integrator. Eaton ensures geographic and technical
10 your hardware, software and challenges, and managing
● Eaton’s Power Xpert,
Foreseer and PowerNet
communication networks subcontractors and
10 perform as a seamless manufacturers to handle
Systems including Power
Xpert Reporting
system. PSA provides a products and services
10 unique alternative to not provided directly by
● Energy cost allocation
conventional manufacturer- Eaton’s Electrical Services ● Lighting management
10 integrator-contractor & Systems systems (Eaton Pow-R-
teams by: Command™)
PSA provides turnkey Load management
10 ● Offering project systems integration projects
●
systems
management and single- including system design,
● Load shed and load
10 point responsibility direct programming, panel building,
transfer schemes
from a major manufacturer installation, project
of power management and management, startup, ● Generator paralleling
10 control systems customer training and systems
● Providing unsurpassed complete documentation— ● Backup and emergency
10 expertise in power integrating Eaton’s and all generation systems
management and power major OEM’s hardware, ● Demand management
10 system control applications software and systems. systems
across a broad range of The following is a summary ● Generator and ATS system
10 industries and end users of services.
monitoring control and
● Focusing on applying remote testing
10 new products effectively ● Utility rate plan
and appropriately, and optimization
10 integrating seamlessly with
all major manufacturers’
● Health care emergency
power supply systems
equipment, new or existing
10 monitoring
● Web-based monitoring
10 services
10 Example of a Fully Automated

Generator Paralleling and Emergency
10 Power Transfer Scheme for a
Mission-Critical Application
10
10.1
General Capabilities
● Power Xpert ● Full service custom 10
● Foreseer panel shop:
● System design—functional ● UL® listing for industrial 10
specification control panels
● System network ● Motor starter panels 10
architecture ● PLC enclosures and
● CAD drawings operator consoles 10
● PC control and open ● Design and testing
automation ● Turnkey capabilities 10
● DeviceNet™ applications ● Project management—
● Open protocol systems contractors, systems 10
● PLC design and integrators, other
programming: OEMs, etc. 10
● Eaton
● Installation
● Allen-Bradley®
● Startup and 10
commissioning
● Modicon®
● GE Fanuc®
● Instruction manuals 10
● Customized training
● Siemens ● Complete 10
● Human machine interface/ documentation
graphical user interface
design and configuration:
● Service contracts 10
and maintenance
● Eaton PanelMate® and
PanelMate PC
agreements 10
● Single-point
● ICONICS GENESIS®
and WebHMI®
responsibility 10
● Wonderware®
● Intellution
10
PanelView™ and
●
RSView™
10
● Citect
● CIMPLICITY
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Eaton’s Instant Response Center Contents

10 Description Page
10 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-2
10 Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8
10 Instant Response Center Services
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units . . V3-T10-11
10
10
10
10
10
10
10 Instant Response Center Services
10 General Description
Eaton’s Instant Response System outages can be The Instant Response Center Using the latest
10 CenterSM (IRC) is staffed by prevented or mitigated, is the vanguard of Eaton’s communications
power systems engineering equipment life extended, Knowledge Management technologies, such as
and power quality experts, and operating, maintenance Services. Knowledge wireless videography, it is
10 monitoring your electrical and energy costs reduced management is a broad term also possible to extend this
distribution system in real- by monitoring key system that describes the application high-end expertise to field
10 time. The IRC continuously wellness parameters such as: of a variety of related technicians or customer
monitors power distribution technologies and expert personnel to guide them
10 equipment for changes in
● Current, voltage
and energy
analytical services that through sophisticated
performance or other transform data into problem diagnosis,
10 conditions that could signal ● Power quality and information, and information troubleshooting or repairs.
an impending power failure. harmonic content into knowledge. Data is
When changes exceed Partial discharge collected by remotely Benefits of IRC:
10 predetermined thresholds,
●
● Vibration monitoring customers’ ● Experts are readily

the IRC issues alerts to electrical distribution and available
10 service personnel via Internet
● Temperature
related systems via the ● Eliminates the cost of
e-mail or wireless page.
● Environmental (such as Internet, and trending key bringing experts on site
10 Eaton power systems
presence of water) parameters related to energy ● Event analysis
● Power factor and utilities, power quality,
experts can then remotely (transformer bushings) ● No employee turnover
10 and securely access real-time
predictive diagnostics,
environment and key events.
● Key events (oscilligraphy)
data from the subscriber’s This data is converted to
10 system, often correcting a
● Energy monitoring
information through expert
problem before electrical ● Inverter monitoring
analysis by power systems
10 service is impacted,
delivering to customers
● Environmental condition engineering, power quality
monitoring and energy management
a quantifiable return on
10 investment based on
experts. This information
is then transformed into
maximum uptime, extended knowledge using data
10 equipment lifetime, and mining techniques and the
reduced energy costs. application of predictive
10 algorithms to extract trends
and patterns that will predict
10 equipment failure and identify
energy cost reduction
10 opportunities.
10
10
10.1
Oil Field HRG-3 Contents
Description Page
10
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-2 10
Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5 10
Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8
Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10 10
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units
10
10
10
10
10
10
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units 10
Eaton’s Electrical Services & ● Oil field wells—electrical
Systems builds custom submersible pumps used
10
medium voltage High in oil well applications
Resistance Grounding Units traditionally have been 10
(HRGUs). They eliminate designed to operate
the possibility of excessive ungrounded with the 10
transient overvoltages due expected history of
to arcing ground faults on
ungrounded systems. There
insulation type failures
due to arcing ground faults
10
are three categories: on ungrounded systems.
These HRGU versions are 10
● General industry—these custom designed to match
HRGUs typically are
freestanding and come
the unique voltages, size 10
and locations (land or
with a pulsing contactor
design to aid in finding
platforms) for the oil field 10
industry and supply the
the ground fault proven service continuity
● Medium voltage and safety high resistance
10
generators—new IEEE grounding provides
research has proven high 10
risk for low resistance
grounded generators with 10
internal ground faults.
These systems require low 10
resistance grounding for
the system, but when an
internal generator ground 10
fault occurs, massive
damage can result. Eaton’s 10
Electrical Services &
Systems has developed 10
a hybrid high resistance
grounding unit (HHRG) that
allows the system to be
10
low resistance grounded
for external ground faults 10
but quickly reverts to high
resistance grounded only 10
for internal ground faults
10
10
Power System Studies
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies Contents

10 Description Page
10 Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies
Arc Flash Analysis Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-14
10 Protective Device Coordination Study . . . . . . . V3-T10-13
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study . . . . . . V3-T10-15
10 Harmonic Analysis Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17
Advanced Analysis and Design Services . . . . . . . V3-T10-19
10
10
10
10
10
10
10 Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies
10 General Description
Eaton’s Electrical Services & ● IEEE 1584, Methods ● The National Fire Protection Following the completion
10 Systems (EESS) can perform for calculating flash Association 70E, National of all studies, acceptance
short-circuit and coordination protection boundary Electrical Code®, latest testing and startup by EESS,
studies per the following distance and incident edition. Use methods to a 2-year warranty will be
10 standards, and others. energy values. calculate flash protection provided on all components
Determine hazard boundary distance and manufactured by Eaton.
10 ● Institute of Electrical and risk category. Select incident energy values
Electronics Engineers, Inc. protective clothing Sequencing and Scheduling
10 (IEEE): and PPE (Personal Eaton Quality Assurance The short-circuit and
● IEEE 141, Protective Equipment) The short-circuit and protective device
10 Recommended Practice ● American National coordination studies will coordination studies will
for Electric Power Standards Institute (ANSI): be conducted under the be submitted to the design
Distribution for
10 Industrial Plants
● ANSI C57.12.00: supervision and approval
of a registered professional
engineer prior to receiving
final approval of the
Standard General
● IEEE 242, electrical engineer skilled in distribution equipment
10 Recommended Practice
Requirements for Liquid-
Immersed Distribution, performing and interpreting shop drawings and/or prior
for Protection and Power, and Regulating the power system studies. to release of equipment
10 Coordination of Transformers The registered professional drawings for manufacturing.
Industrial and electrical engineer will be a If formal completion of the
● ANSI C37.13: Standard
10 Commercial
Power Systems for Low Voltage AC
full-time employee of EESS. studies may cause delay in
equipment manufacturing,
Power Circuit Breakers The field engineering service approval from the engineer
10 ● IEEE 399,
Recommended Practice
Used in Enclosures division can administer the may be requested for
● ANSI C37.010: Standard power system studies, preliminary submittal of
for Industrial and
10 Commercial Power Application Guide for including acceptance and sufficient study data to
AC High Voltage Circuit startup testing. Equipment ensure that the selection
System Analysis
10 ● IEEE 241,
Breakers Rated on
a Symmetrical
and component titles used in
the studies shall be identical
of device ratings and
Recommended characteristics will be
Current Basis to the equipment and
10 Practice for Electric ● ANSI C37.41: Standard component titles shown on
satisfactory.
Power Systems in the customer’s one-line
Design Tests for
10 Commercial Buildings
High Voltage Fuses, drawings. The power system
● IEEE 1015, Distribution Enclosed studies will be performed
10 Recommended Practice
for Applying Low Voltage
Single-Pole Air Switches, with the aid of a digital
Fuse Disconnecting computer program and will be
Circuit Breakers Used in in accordance with the latest
10 Industrial and
Switches and
applicable IEEE and ANSI
Accessories
Commercial Power standards.
10 Systems
10
10.2
Data Collection Short-Circuit and Protective Protective Device Evaluation
The owner’s contractor, Device Evaluation Study Details The protective device The following characteristics 10
under the direction of the Typical conductor evaluation portion of the will be plotted on the curves,
equipment manufacturer, impedances based on IEEE study will: where applicable: 10
shall furnish all data as Std. 141-1993 are utilized.
● Evaluate equipment and ● Electric utility’s
required by the power
Transformer design protective devices short- protective device 10
system studies. The engineer
impedances are used circuit ratings and compare ● Medium voltage
performing the short-circuit
and coordination studies will
when test impedances to calculated available equipment relays 10
are not available. fault current
furnish the equipment ● Medium and low
manufacturer and contractor The following is included
● Determine the adequacy of voltage fuses, including 10
with a listing of required data as part of the study: switchgear, motor control manufacturer’s minimum
after award of the contract. centers, and panelboard melt, total clearing, 10
The contractor should ● Calculation methods bus bars to withstand tolerance and damage
and assumptions short-circuit stresses
expedite collection
of the data to ensure Selected base per
bands 10
● ● Determine the adequacy ● Low voltage equipment
completion of the studies as unit quantities of transformer windings
required for final approval of ● One-line diagram of the to withstand short-circuit
circuit breaker trip devices,
including manufacturer’s
10
the distribution equipment system being evaluated stresses tolerance bands
shop drawings and/or prior to ● Source impedance data, ● Determine the adequacy ● Transformer full-load
10
the release of the equipment including electric utility of cable and busway sizes current, magnetizing
for manufacturing. Provisions system and motor fault to withstand short-circuit inrush current and ANSI 10
shall be included by the contribution characteristics heating transformer withstand
contractor to obtain the
services of the equipment
● Tabulations of calculated ● Notify owner in writing, of parameters 10
quantities existing circuit protective ● Conductor damage curves
manufacturer to support
the proper data collection. ● Results, conclusions devices improperly rated ● Ground fault protective 10
and recommendations for the calculated available devices, as applicable
fault current
Fault contribution of
existing motors is included A calculation of short-circuit
● Pertinent motor starting 10
momentary and interrupting Protective Device characteristics and motor
in the study, with motors
<100 horsepower typically duties for a three-phase Coordination Study damage points 10
grouped together. The bolted fault is made for the ● Proposed protective device ● Pertinent generator
contractor shall obtain following locations: coordination time-current short-circuit decrement 10
required existing equipment curves will be displayed curve and generator
● Electric utility’s supply damage point
data, if necessary, to satisfy
termination point
on log-log 10
the study requirements. ● Included on each curve ● Other system load
● Incoming switchgear protective devices for the
● Unit substation primary
sheet will be a complete
title and one-line diagram largest branch circuit and
10
and secondary terminals with legend identifying the the largest feeder circuit
● Low voltage switchgear specific portion of the breaker in each motor 10
● Motor control centers system covered control center
● Standby generators and ● The device characteristic Where possible, adequate
10
automatic transfer curves will be terminated time margins will be provided
switches at a point reflecting between device characteristics 10
● Branch circuit panelboards maximum symmetrical or such that selective operation
● Other significant locations
asymmetrical fault current is provided, while providing 10
to which device is exposed proper protection.
throughout the system ● Identification of the device 10
For grounded systems, a associated with each curve
bolted line-to-ground fault by manufacturer type and
current study for areas as function, and generated
10
defined for the three-phase using a commercially
bolted fault short-circuit study available software program 10
will be provided.
10
10
10
10
10
10
Arc Flash Analysis Details Short-Circuit Data

10
Background
● Source fault impedance ● Tabulations of circuit
and generator breaker, fuse and other
10 NFPA 70E Standard, the worker from a potential contributions protective device ratings
Article 110.7 (F), states that arc flash hazard and the versus calculated short-
● X to R ratios
10 an electrical safety program equipment enclosure should
● Asymmetry factors circuit duties
shall identify a hazard/risk not be opened unless the ● Protective device time
10 evaluation procedure to be
used before work is started
equipment is de-energized,
tagged-out and locked-out.
● Motor contributions
versus current coordination
● Short-circuit kVA curves, tabulations of relay
on or near live parts. Article
10 130.7 (A) states that The arc flash analysis ● Symmetrical and and circuit breaker trip unit
considers each medium and asymmetrical fault currents settings, fuse selection
employees working in areas
10 where electrical hazards are low voltage system location
within the scope of the work.
Recommended Protective ● Fault current calculations
present shall be provided Device Settings including a definition of
IEEE Std. 1584™-2002 states terms and guide for
10 with, and shall use, protective
that equipment below 240V ● Phase and ground relays: interpretation of the
equipment that is designed
and constructed for the need not be considered ● Current transformer ratio computer printout
10 specific part of the body to unless it involves at least one ● Current setting ● Arc flash analysis
be protected and for the work 125 kVA or larger low- calculations including a
Time setting
10 to be performed. impedance transformer in
●
definition of terms and

its immediate power supply. ● Instantaneous setting
guide for interpretation
10 Procedure Therefore, no detailed
calculations will be performed
● Specialty non-
overcurrent
of calculated values
In accordance with NFPA 70E ● Recommendations for
for 120/208V locations device settings
10 and IEEE 1584, commercially
supplied by a transformer ● Recommendations
system improvements,
available software packages where needed
smaller than 125 kVA, on improved relaying
10 provide the calculation of ● Executive summary
however, labels will be systems, if applicable
incident energy and flash
provided for these locations In addition to the report, EESS
protection boundary. The ● Circuit breakers:
10 equations used in these
and will be labeled as hazard
● Adjustable pickups and can provide field services
risk category zero. For the (at additional cost) to:
calculations are based on time delays (long time,
detailed calculations, the
10 actual test values. These
software determines the short time, ground) ● Adjust relay and protective
tests measured the calories Adjustable time-current
available fault currents for ●
device settings according
10 per square centimeter
each location and the clearing characteristic to the recommended
(cal/cm2) radiating from
time of the device protecting ● Adjustable settings table provided
a simulated arcing fault.
10 The measurements were
the same location. From instantaneous pickup by the coordination
these determinations, the study. Field adjustments
performed at a theorized Arc Flash Results
10 working distance of
potential incident energy is
calculated for each location.
to be completed by the
engineering service
18.00 inches (457.2 mm). ● Arcing fault magnitude
Arc flash computations division of the equipment
10 The intent of the NFPA 70E shall include both line and
● Device clearing time manufacturer under the
and IEEE 1584 guidelines load side of main breaker ● Duration of arc startup and acceptance
10 is to establish standard calculations, where necessary. ● Arc flash boundary testing contract portion
calculations to determine an ● Working distance ● Make minor modifications
10 Approach Boundary and an Tabulations ● Incident energy to equipment as required to
associated PPE Hazard Level The following tabulations accomplish conformance
● Recommendations for new
10 that will limit the injury to the will be provided as part of
equipment and/or system with the short-circuit and
onset of a second-degree the study: protective device
changes to reduce the
burn to the face and the torso coordination studies
10 of the worker. An incident Input Data calculated arc flash energy
level below 40 cal/cm2 ● Notify owner in writing
energy of 1.2 cal/cm2 ● Short-circuit reactance of any required major
10 represents the onset of a of rotating machines
where possible
equipment modifications
second-degree burn. The ● Cable and conduit Submittals ● Provide arc flash solution
10 various PPE Hazard Levels
materials The results of the short- engineering and
are described in the NFPA
● Bus ducts circuit, coordination and recommendations to lower
10 70E standard on a scale of
0 to 4. An incident energy ● Transformers arc flash study will be the incident energy at
summarized in a final report. specific locations where
greater than 40 cal/cm2 will ● Reactors
10 be described in this study as ● Aerial lines The report will include the
the hazard is unacceptable
“Dangerous” and no Hazard following sections:
10 Level can be applied. Thus,
● Circuit resistance and
reactance values
no PPE is approved to protect ● One-line diagram
10 ● Descriptions, purpose,
basis and scope of
10 the study
10
10.2
Contents
Description Page
10
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies. V3-T10-12 10
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study
Harmonic Analysis Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17 10
Advanced Analysis and Design Services. . . . . . . . V3-T10-19
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study 10
Background Study Procedure 10
The primary function of Study results include real Investigate the system The study for the electrical
the electrical power (kW) and reactive (kVAR) loading conditions for the system is based on both
distribution system is to power flow through normal and contingent present and future loading
10
provide real and reactive transformers and cables, operating conditions. All considerations and switching
powers demanded by the voltage levels at system system loads (kW and kVAR configurations. A maximum 10
various loads connected to buses, power factor and components) and power of three load flow study
the system. Simultaneously, system losses. These values sources are included in cases are performed to 10
the frequency and various allow the power system the analysis. analyze power flow, voltage
bus voltages must be kept
within specified tolerances,
engineer to identify
overloaded transformers The study is processed using
regulation, power factor,
transformer tap settings and
10
even though the load and cables, provide state-of-the-art software, other load considerations.
demands may undergo large recommendations for proper which utilizes an iterative 10
and unpredictable changes. transformer tap settings, and technique to calculate real An evaluation of the existing
determine the need for and reactive power flows, utility billing contract will 10
The Load Flow Study is an power factor correction and bus voltage levels determine whether power
analysis of the system throughout the system. factor correction should be
capability to supply the
capacitors.
incorporated in the power
10
connected load under steady- The Load Flow Study is a The data base for the load system. If power factor
state conditions. Optimal prerequisite to developing flow analysis is established correction is needed, the 10
management of the power optimum generating strategies from existing design or appropriate hardware is
system can be achieved and systems controls. nameplate load data or by
monitoring the existing
recommended and located to 10
through the use of this maintain desired power factor
feeders with a digital power
analytical tool. Necessary in
the planning or expansion of monitor. Each feeder is
at the metering point. The
study also indicates any
10
electrical power systems, a monitored for a minimum switching of power factor
load flow study demonstrates of two hours, during typical correction equipment that 10
the distribution of power and operating periods. The may be necessary to maintain
voltage levels throughout the following system data is proper voltage levels. 10
system for selected operating utilized as input to the load
flow program: If the study results indicate
scenarios. These scenarios
that power factor correction
10
may include normal and ● Current and voltage equipment is necessary,
emergency operating modes,
present and future circuit
● kW, kVAR and kVA the approximate payback 10
arrangements, and alternative
● Power factor period will be calculated
designs and equipment for equipment purchase 10
components. and installation.
10
10
Results Data Requirements

10 The Load Flow Study includes In addition to the data
the following for each circuit required for the short-circuit
10 condition analyzed: study, the following data is
required to complete the load
● Bus voltages, line
10 currents, power factor
flow study:
and transformer loading ● Design, nameplate or
10 in actual quantities and in measured load data
percent of the device ● Ratings and connections
10 base values of all power factor
● Recommended correction capacitors
10 transformer tap settings ● Reactor impedance
● Recommended generator and ratings
10 dispatch schedules ● Power flow measurements
● Complete set of capacitor (when available) at
10 recommendations,
including calculated
utilization transformers
payback period based

10 upon energy savings,
if additional shunt
10 compensation is
required for power
10 factor improvement or
voltage support
10 ● Recommended equipment
upgrades or circuit
10 reconfigurations to
optimize the power
flow from the source
10 to the loads
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.2
Harmonic Analysis Study Contents
Description Page
10
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies . V3-T10-12 10
Harmonic Analysis Study 10
Advanced Analysis and Design Services . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Harmonic Analysis Study 10
Background 10
The operation of nonlinear Harmonic studies can provide Power factor correction A serious condition, with
loads and in particular variable calculation of the current capacitor banks are potential for substantial
frequency drives (VFDs) in a and voltage harmonics particularly vulnerable to the damage, occurs as a result of
10
power distribution system throughout the electrical detrimental effects of power harmonic parallel resonance.
creates harmonic currents distribution system when system harmonics. Most As frequency increases, 10
that flow throughout the the generated harmonic capacitors are designed to capacitive reactance
power system. When current magnitudes and the operate at a maximum of decreases and inductive 10
considering VFDs, the system 60 Hz impedances 110% of rated voltage and reactance increases.
frequencies and magnitudes
of the harmonic currents are
are known. 135% of rated kVAR. Large
magnitudes of voltage and
Harmonic resonance occurs
at the frequency when the
10
functions of the number Significant harmonic current current harmonics can inductive reactance of the
of drive rectifier pulses, and voltage magnitudes can exceed these design limits, source-side circuit equals the 10
as well as the AC system have adverse effects on and cause severe capacitor capacitive reactance of the
impedances. Harmonic system components and bank damage. Since power factor correction 10
voltages result from the overall system operation. capacitive reactance is capacitor. Looking back into
Harmonic currents cause
harmonic current flowing
increased power losses in
inversely proportional to the circuit from the harmonic 10
back into the harmonic frequency, capacitor banks source, the capacitor is in
transformers, motors and
impedances of the
distribution system. The cables. The higher power
act as sinks for current
harmonics in the system. This
parallel with the substation
transformer. The circuit total
10
order of the harmonic losses increase equipment- often causes capacitor fuses impedance (including the
currents generated is np ± 1, operating temperatures, to open or capacitor damage capacitor) is very high at the 10
where n is any integer and p increasing the possibility of when fuses are not present resonance frequency. If the
is the number of drive pulses. overload, increasing thermal
stress on insulation, and
or improperly sized. VFDs generate harmonic 10
Therefore, for 6-pulse drive, current at the resonance
reducing overall system
the order of harmonics is 5th,
efficiency.
frequency, large harmonic 10
7th, 11th, 13th, 17th, 19th, voltages will be developed at
etc. For 12-pulse drive, the the capacitor and transformer
order of harmonics is 11th, bus, and serious equipment
10
13th, 23rd, 25th, 35th, damage can occur.
37th, etc. 10
IEEE Std. 519-1992
establishes recommended
limits for harmonic voltages
10
and currents in power
systems. 10
10
10
Study Procedure Results Data Requirements

10 Harmonic analysis of the In addition, the drive’s At the conclusion of the In addition to the data
electrical distribution system harmonic generation based Harmonic Analysis, the required for a load flow
10 for the circuit conditions upon the drive’s loading and following will be submitted analysis, the following data
listed below. characteristics is calculated. If for each circuit condition is also required:
10 ● Existing system
specified, field measurement analyzed:
● Complete text report of
of the VFD current harmonic
configuration generation during the process
● Description, purpose, basis each measurement
10 ● System with new VFDs or operation can be made. Each and scope of the harmonic location sorted by voltage
other nonlinear harmonic harmonic component is then study and a single-line and current, and listing
10 creating loads in operation successively injected into the diagram of the portion of the individual harmonic
simulated system, and the the power system that is component and the total
The power system is
10 modeled for the fundamental
resulting harmonic currents included within the scope
of the study
harmonic distortion (THD)
and voltages are computed ● Waveforms of each
frequency and appropriate Tables listing the individual measurement sample
10 harmonic frequencies.
throughout the system. ●
harmonic voltages and

System impedances are
● Detailed harmonic
If the calculated magnitudes currents and total harmonic spectrums of the harmonic
10 calculated for the of harmonic voltages and/or distortions (THDs) for all generating loads
fundamental frequency as currents are excessive, the major buses within the
10 well as for each appropriate
harmonic frequency.
optimal corrective solution will electrical distribution
be determined to reduce the system. Waveforms for all
harmonic quantities to within
10 The following is calculated for
acceptable limits.
of the calculated harmonic
each study: voltages and currents will
be displayed
10 ● System harmonic voltages
When a harmonic filter is
● Plots of frequency versus
recommended, a complete
in rms and % THD impedance (harmonic
10 ● System harmonic currents
equipment specification will
be provided. A final study resonance scans) for all
in rms and % THD case is conducted to verify shunt capacitor locations
10 ● An IEEE 519 analysis at the that the harmonic filtering ● Complete
point of common coupling equipment will reduce recommendations for
10 with incoming utility harmonic levels to within harmonic filters, shunt
● Capacitor bank evaluations acceptable standards. capacitors and series
10 on the basis of voltage, reactors, required for
current and kVA harmonic suppression
10 ● The payback period of the ● All computer output and
an interpretation guide
total cost (filter equipment,
10 installation and/or
relocation) for the three
most feasible filter options
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.2
Contents
Description Page
10
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies . V3-T10-12 10
Harmonic Analysis Study. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17 10
Advanced Analysis and Design Services
Transient Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19 10
Switching Transient Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-20
Transient Motor Starting Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-21 10
Ground Grid Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-21
Electrical Design Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-22
10
10
10
10
10
Advanced Analysis and Design Services 10
Transient Stability 10
Background Study Procedure 10
Power system stability is a The Transient Stability Study engineers will analyze and angle. These are
condition where the various Study provides an analysis system disturbance scenarios summarized for each
synchronous machines of a of the transient response using state-of-the-art machine in time
10
system remain in synchronism, of the system and rotating software. Protective device increments over the
or in step, with one another. machines following system fault clearing times will be nominal transient time 10
Instability is the condition disturbances, and the behavior included in the computer interval of one or two
when one or more of the of the system in relation to simulations and the seconds. For the load 10
machines fall out of step. the power company tie. generator, motor, and tie-line shedding study analysis,
With a sudden increment Data from the study can be
protection and coordination
will be evaluated from a
the time interval would be
extended to five seconds
10
in load, there is a definite used to determine the effect system stability perspective. or longer
upper limit to the load that a of generator and/or motor ● Plotted swing curves of
10
machine will carry without performance, system voltage Load-shedding schemes will
power angle over the
pulling out of step. This is and frequency, all as a be evaluated or developed,
transient time period for 10
defined as the transient function of time. Generator based upon the operating
stability limit of the system and motor performance are requirements of the each machine
for the given condition. affected by: customer facility. ● The magnitude and angle 10
The transient stability limit of voltage and frequency
may have different values
● Abrupt changes in load Results deviation for any bus in 10
for the same system, and including the starting the system
At the conclusion of the
depending upon the nature and accelerating effect of ● Summary of line currents, 10
Transient Stability Analysis,
and magnitude of the large motors power flows and apparent
Eaton will submit the
Short Circuits, from which
disturbance. Disturbance
types include a sudden
●
effect the critical operating

following: impedance on any line 10
● If required, details of the
increase in load, by the time for protective relays ● Machine variables,
disconnection of a parallel line can be determined including turbine input
load shedding scheme,
including the sequence
10
or disconnection of the utility ● Partial loss of generation or and generator output of load separation, critical
source. The most severe loss of power company tie, power, accelerating power, clearing time and type 10
disturbance subjected to the and the corrective effect of frequency deviation, rotor of relay
electrical distribution system a load shedding scheme angle, field voltage and
current, terminal voltage
10
is a short circuit.
magnitude and angle,
All transient stability
studies should include and generator current 10
computer simulations that
determine the effects of 10
short circuits upon the
system transient stability. 10
10
Switching Transient Analysis

10
Background Study Procedure Results
10 A transient is initiated Eaton engineers will discuss At the conclusion of the
whenever there is a sudden with customer personnel all Switching Transient Analysis,
10 change of circuit conditions. aspects of the disturbance Eaton will submit the
This most often occurs when that is being investigated. The following:
10 a switching operation occurs,
such as capacitor switching,
circuit configuration
and system loading prior
● Detailed description of the
transformer energizing and to the disturbance and any sequence of events that
10 fault current interruption. subsequent equipment preceded the switching
Some of the most severe damage incurred will transient that disrupted the
10 and damaging transients are be examined. electrical system operation
and caused equipment
produced by lightning strikes.
Engineers will develop a damage
10 Voltage transients will result
computer model of the ● Magnitudes and
when loads on an electrical
distribution system are electrical circuit with EMTP, waveforms of transient
10 switched. Industrial and Electromagnetic Transients voltages and currents
commercial power systems Program. All circuit calculated by the
10 comprise capacitive and components, including surge computer simulations
inductive components. The capacitors, equipment ● Recommendations for
10 transient disturbance occurs capacitance, bushing
capacitance, CT and PT
surge protection, such
because the currents and as surge arresters, surge
capacitance, and transformer
10 voltages do not reach their
final value instantaneously. saturation characteristics will
capacitors, RC suppression,
damping resistors or
be modeled in detail. TVSSs, for all affected
10 The severity of a voltage
The suspect switching equipment
transient is a function of the
operations, including all ● Results of the insulation
10 relative power level of the
reasonable perturbations such coordination study to
load being switched, and
the available fault current as current chopping, circuit evaluate the degree of
10 magnitude in the supply breaker restrike and prestrike, protection afforded by
circuit where the switching will be simulated with the the recommended surge
10 takes place. Some circuit computer. Voltage and protection system
components such as motors current transient magnitudes ● Appendix, including one-
10 and transformers are will be calculated, and the
waveforms will be displayed
line diagrams, computer
adversely affected by the program output sheets
for all of the transients caused and all other pertinent
10 speed (frequency) of the
voltage transient as well by the switching operation. supporting documentation
as its magnitude. Voltage
10 transient magnitudes
If excessive transient
voltages or currents are
should not exceed twice observed, the study engineer
10 the system voltage when will propose corrective
they occur from normal measures, which may
10 switching operations. include surge protection,
Properly rated equipment damping resistors or modified
10 BIL provides adequate
transient or surge protection
switching procedures. These
measures will be analyzed
for these instances.
10 with additional simulations
to ensure that excessive
Complex voltage transients
switching transients are
10 result from abnormal
switching operations and avoided or reduced to
current chopping, prestrikes acceptable levels.
10 and restrikes cause these Finally, an insulation
disturbances. Voltage coordination study, which
10 magnitudes may approach compares surge arrester
ten times the system voltage ratings with equipment BIL,
10 and must be controlled by will be completed to confirm
surge arresters, surge the recommended surge
10 capacitors and/or resistors.
These surges can damage
protection system for the
circuit being investigated.
the most rugged system
10 components.
10
10
10.2
Transient Motor Starting Analysis Ground Grid Analysis
10
Background Study Procedure Background
A motor starting study is A Motor Starting Study will A Ground Grid Analysis ● Substation ground grid 10
conducted to evaluate the determine the system effects ensures that the ground grid layout design, ground grid
motor’s impact on the power of starting and accelerating design provides adequate equipment specifications, 10
system and the power the motor and associated safety for personnel during bills-of-materials,
system’s impact on the load from time zero to full ground fault conditions. requirements to meet 10
motor. Motor starting studies speed. The study will When fault current flows IEEE Std. 80
are usually performed for calculate the terminal through the earth from the Recommendations for
new motor installations voltages of the motor and ground grid of the plant
●
improving existing grids

10
to ensure system reliability, other buses when the motor substation, the potential of
provide data for motor and load is started. the plant substation ground is Results 10
protection, and to identify any elevated. Voltage potentials At the conclusion of the
Eaton will develop the circuit
system modifications that
model on the digital computer.
along the ground surface Ground Grid Analysis, Eaton 10
may be necessary to avoid may be severe enough to will submit the following:
starting problems. The procedure requires endanger a person walking on
a Load Flow analysis to the surface, and dangerous ● Executive summary,
10
Starting a large motor on a be completed initially to potential differences may including findings and
distribution grid with limited determine system conditions exist between grounded recommendations 10
capacity may cause severe prior to motor starting. apparatus, structures,
voltage reduction and not
● Study procedures
produce enough motor Computer simulations of fences and nearby earth. ● Calculation results, 10
torque to accelerate the various motor starting including GPR and Step
motor. One of the most methods, motor starting Study Procedure
and Touch Potentials 10
noticeable effects is light sequences and circuit Eaton engineers will evaluate ● Data summary, including
flicker during motor starting. configurations will follow. your switchyard or substation 10
computer report output
Voltage dips may cause From these results, Eaton ground grid to ensure that the
will recommend the best performance of the grid
● Appendix, including one-
problems with voltage
means of starting motors adheres to IEEE Standard 80, line diagrams, computer 10
sensitive electronic program output sheets,
equipment to such as at that circuit location. “Guide for Safety in AC
computers and Substation Grounding.” and all other pertinent
supporting documentation
10
microprocessors. Results This will involve utilizing a
At the conclusion of the computer software program 10
The study will recommend Motor Starting Study, Eaton that models the ground grid
solutions to any problem under fault conditions. All
discovered. One possible
will submit the following for
each method analyzed: voltages at the surface are
10
solution may be to install a calculated, allowing
reduced voltage starter to ● Tables listing voltages at evaluation of Step and Touch 10
decrease the motor inrush the motor terminals and at potentials, to ensure the
current and minimize the other significant locations safety of plant personnel. 10
voltage drop. A system within the electrical The Ground Potential Rise
distribution system
balance must be maintained
Plots of motor speed,
is also calculated to evaluate
the potential of damage to
10
to minimize impact on the ●
system and allow sufficient motor current, motor interconnected equipment.

motor torque to perform torque, load torque, The following services are 10
its function. accelerating torque, available and are an integral
accelerating time, power part of doing a complete 10
Eaton will investigate various factor, and voltages at evaluation:
methods for minimizing the motor terminals and 10
system disturbances when other significant locations
● Inspection and evaluation
starting of motors. These of existing grid conductors
methods include:
in the system
and connectors and 10
● Recommendations of continuity
● Reduced voltage starting various options to correct 10
any problems found in
● Soil resistive
methods such as: auto-
starting and accelerating measurements and
transformer, reactor,
wye-delta, primary the motor and load interpretation 10
resistor, part winding
● Measurement of ground
and solid state grid impedance 10
● System modifications,
● Safety assessments—step
including paralleling and touch voltage criteria 10
circuits, addition of shunt
capacitors, adjusting 10
transformer taps and
relocating loads
10
10
Electrical Design Services

10 Eaton’s electrical design Typical construction drawings
services can extend from and documentation for design
10 the point of utility connect projects include:
to the equipment. Design
10 services are integrated with
● Demolition plans for the
analysis services, resulting existing equipment and
building (if applicable)
10 in a complete engineered
solution. The level of design ● New proposed switchgear
detail can be customized arrangement plans and
10 from minimal design elevation views
consultation and advice ● Specifications for all
10 to a complete design new AC and DC
package with specifications distribution equipment
10 and drawings. ● All necessary engineering
Typical design services calculations (load flow,
10 include: short-circuit, etc.)
● Single line diagrams for
Distribution System
10 ●
Design—Design and
the AC and DC distribution
and auxiliary equipment
specification of the
10 electrical distribution
● Arrangement plans and
details for new structures,
system from the point bus systems, auxiliary and
10 of utility interconnection DC equipment
to the downstream
● Conduit raceway drawings
10 utilization equipment
and schedules
● Substation Design—
● Control panel and terminal
10 Complete substation
design service is available, board panel design
including ground grid drawings
10 analysis and design, ● Lighting and grounding
substation layout, modifications for the
10 equipment specification, new installation
protection and control ● Building modification
10 ● Protection and Control— for garage doors,
Design of advanced air ventilation, etc.
10 electrical protection
and control, including
transmission line
10 protection, system
automation and
10 advanced metering
● Renewable energy
10 design, including the
AC and DC distribution
10 systems, collector
substation and utility
10 interconnection design
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Field Engineering Services
10.3
Field Engineering Services Contents
Description
10
Field Engineering Services 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Selection Guide 10
The following tables present the relationship between Eaton’s Electrical Sector capabilities and the user’s needs:
10
Consulting and Turnkey Project Management
10
Engineering Services New Construction Improved Reliability Life Extension
Capabilities and Facility Growth and Reduced Downtime and Cost Reductions
10
New substation design, Support consultant or end-user by offering one-stop — Design and construction costs are reduced by a
management and construction shopping and an exclusive 2-year warranty on all single-source contract. In addition, end-user internal
Eaton products supplied. engineering resources can be applied to core-business 10
process improvements, rather than the electrical
Electrical, mechanical and Through networking the experiences of our —
instrumentation services many service locations, we can add mechanical
distribution system.
10
and instrumentation services to our
construction capabilities.
10
Power system studies New construction requires the proper set of A short-circuit study is required for protection of Extending the life of an electrical distribution system
Short circuit power system studies. We can review your current personnel and equipment. In addition, coordination should include an updated single-line diagram and the
Device evaluation and future power needs: reliability, loading profiles, studies reduce downtime by limiting the power loss to proper complement of Power System Studies to 10
Coordination emergency power requirements, etc., and determine only the faulted feeder. Power quality studies are address your current and future needs.
Load flow
Power factor
the necessary studies. necessary due to the many new nonlinear loads and
their potential effect on critical equipment.
10
Harmonics
Power quality
Grounding
10
Reliability
Switching transient 10
Others
Failure/root-cause analysis — Electrical outages can result in extensive downtime An investigation of critical outages can result in long- 10
and loss production. Critical systems should be range cost reductions by preventing the repeat of such
investigated to determine the cause of such outages, occurrences, and allowing system improvements
and corrective actions planned and implemented. while funding is available. 10
Equipment relocation Changing production needs can be satisfied by — Costs can be reduced for new production projects
the relocation of power distribution components, by the allocation of existing equipment, thereby 10
either by use of internal or sister-plant equipment. eliminating the need for new purchases.
10
10
10
10
10
10
System Integration
10 Engineering Services New Construction Improved Reliability Life Extension
10 Plant monitoring, protection Plant-wide electrical power distribution system Real-time monitoring, and remote control of circuit Plant electrical distribution systems are being
and control monitoring and control can be cost-effectively breakers can greatly improve reliability by providing subjected to higher loads, and greater harmonics.
10 Digitrip
PowerNet
implemented during new construction. New
Eaton electrical products allow for communications
immediate indication of a problem, allowing for a
quick resolution; and if necessary, remote control
Plant-wide monitoring can help identify these areas
of rapid deterioration, and implement corrective
Advantage starters through all levels of the power distribution network. of power distribution equipment. actions to extend the life of the electrical system.
10 DeviceNet Eaton’s PowerNet system allows for plant-wide Taking such action will also prevent costly outages
PLC interface monitoring and control from a single workstation and the resultant downtime. In addition, with the
10 or from any number of workstations connected to a
plant LAN, company, intranet or Internet.
advent of utility deregulation, having accurate power
usage values will allow for improved negotiating on
power purchases.
10 PLC/PC control and open New process and discrete control systems The real-time, self-diagnostic information PC control/open automation systems provide the
automation systems currently employ PLCs for control and monitoring. available with a PC control/open automation greatest level of flexibility when implementing a
10 Eaton PC control and open automation products
can be applied for many of these systems with full
system significantly reduces system downtime
by allowing the operator to proactively respond to
control system. The open automation concept allows
the user to select the “best in class” components
integration into plant-wide control and information system problems before a shutdown occurs. without being tied to a single OEM. PC control systems
10 management systems. Integration to other OEM’s can provide a wealth of information that
equipment is also available. can be easily integrated into manufacturing and
enterprise systems allowing the user to optimize
10 process efficiency.
Drive systems motor control Eaton drive systems, as well as modernized Modern drive systems and motor control will The electrical portion of the process-line can have
10 motor control, provide critical hardware for greatly improve system reliability by the application extended life, and develop a lower cost of production.
new efficient process system construction. of new technology, and allowing for plant-wide This can be combined with the life extension of the
10 communications and control. mechanical components.
Energy management Eaton maintains application expertise and a full — With the advent of utility deregulation, in-house
load shedding line of products to support energy management power generation and load shedding capabilities
10 systems. Our energy management experts can can aid your negotiations for reduced electric rates.
design and implement an energy management In-house generation voltage regulation and excitation
10 program including financial analysis and justification. systems can also add to system life.
Generator/emergency New power reliability needs may require modern Reliability can be improved for critical processes
10 power systems emergency power systems. with improved standby power systems.
10 Training
10 Engineering Services
Capabilities
New Construction
and Facility Growth
Improved Reliability
and Reduced Downtime
Life Extension
and Cost Reductions
10 New product training

Electrical power equipment
Training is offered on all new products supplied
by Eaton’s Electrical Sector. The construction
— —
Drive systems phase is a beneficial time to incorporate training,

10 PLC systems from equipment and a funding standpoint.
Distribution systems — Plant engineers require an understanding of the Life extension of the power distribution system
10 analysis training dynamics of electrical power distribution systems.
This training addresses topics to improve existing
requires a proper analysis by the plant electrical
engineer. Appropriate investigations can be completed
electrical systems, as well as plan for future and recommendations planned for implementation.
10 expansions.
Power quality and — Power quality and grounding issues are affecting —
10 grounding training new sensitive process equipment. This training
can provide short- and long-term solutions, as well
as recommending methods to accurately measure
10 power quality.
Electrical equipment — Completing proper and timely maintenance on Proper equipment maintenance will result in system
10 maintenance training electrical equipment will improve reliability and life extension, indirectly by reducing failures. In
reduce downtime. This training shall identify simple, addition, training in-house personnel to complete
10 yet effective, maintenance tasks, which can be
completed by plant personnel.
several maintenance duties can reduce costs.
Customized training In conjunction with new construction, training can A plant-wide custom training program can Cost reductions can be achieved by providing
10 Scheduled also be integrated to include existing electrical address specific reliability needs, as well as maintenance training to operation personnel, thereby
On-site components, regardless of manufacturer. This allows goals for reduced downtime. possibly combining operating and maintenance duties.
10 for effective one-time training, on-site if desired, and
incorporated into the construction project. A site review
This training will also provide operators with a
better understanding of the needs of electrical
would be conducted to identify the training needs, and equipment, thereby resulting in life extension
10 associated equipment. through reduced fatigue.
10
10
10
10.3
Startup and Commissioning
10
Installation support Electrical construction of sophisticated power Proper installation techniques have been proven Proper installation will result in an extended life,
10
and supervision distribution equipment requires support and/or to reduce short-term operation problems and the through the proper application of stress and
supervision by factory trained personnel. resultant downtime. tensions on various electrical components. 10
Acceptance testing Startup testing should be completed by an Proper acceptance testing provides baseline Proper acceptance testing will identify any areas
Electrical power
equipment:
independent division of a major electrical
equipment manufacturer. Eaton provides an exclusive
data for future maintenance. This allows the
development of predictive maintenance programs,
requiring corrective action, thereby resulting in a
system with the longest life expectancy.
10
Switchgear 2-year warranty on all Cutler-Hammer brand products thereby anticipating outages, and identifying
Outdoor units supplied, when EESS completes engineering studies, correction actions. EESS offers comprehensive 10
Circuit breakers startup and acceptance testing. ongoing predictive and preventive maintenance
PowerNet, etc. programs.
Starters 10
Motor control
Transformers
Tap changers
10
Network protection
Drive systems 10
PLC systems
Nuclear safety related 1E
Startup, training and Trained individuals should complete equipment Long-term reliability is ensured by the proper Allowing the training cycle to commence
10
warranty support startup. Voltage levels, phasing and proper startup, training and warranty support, all of immediately following, or during, the startup
grounding requires attention to ensure a safe which are provided by EESS. of the equipment can reduce training costs. 10
startup. Specific equipment testing and adjustments Travel and setup costs are minimized, and
are also necessary to ensure all electrical safety plant personnel witness the operation of all
interlocks are operational and ready for long-term associated electrical equipment, as part of the 10
service. Training can be provided immediately training session.
following, or during the startup process. Warranty
issues can be quickly identified and corrected by
10
factory trained personnel.
Exclusive 2-year warranty Eaton has identified that warranty-related costs may be associated with improper startup and acceptance Startup costs are reduced by allowing EESS to
10
testing by groups that are not factory trained. This results in construction delays, as well as possible complete all functions since the required OEM
long-term reliability issues. Eaton offers an exclusive 2-year warranty on Cutler-Hammer
brand products, when all engineering studies, startup and acceptance testing is completed by EESS.
presence for equipment installation support can
be incorporated into the acceptance testing.
10
10
Predictive and Preventive Maintenance
10
10
PM program design and Following construction, EESS can develop a Predictive maintenance involves identifying A properly designed program will take advantage
implementation long-term predictive/preventive maintenance measurable parameters, which when trended, of in-house personnel, thereby providing a cost-
Electrical power equipment: program. This allows for recording of the necessary provide an indication of the reliability and the life effective plan. Program implementation and 10
Switchgear baseline data required for effective predictive expectancy of the subject equipment. required corrective actions will result in the
Outdoor units
Circuit breakers
maintenance programs.
Preventive maintenance includes specific
longest life expectancy possible. 10
PowerNet, etc. Partial discharge sensors installed in new medium maintenance tasks that extend the useful life EESS can provide a complete short- and long-
Starters voltage switchgear provide years of predictive of the subject equipment. range PM program to satisfy your life extension 10
Motor control diagnostics. and cost reduction needs.
Transformers A comprehensive program can be developed,
Tap changers whereby plant personnel complete portions, Partial discharge detection identifies insulation 10
Network protection supplemented by EESS personnel. Plant personnel deterioration prior to permanent damage and
Medium voltage generators
Medium voltage motors
would perform observations, minor maintenance
and data recording. Tasks would be developed to
ultimate failure. Efficient outage correction
actions can be implemented.
10
Drive systems complement plant personnel’s existing daily duties.
PLC systems
Nuclear safety related Periodic reports would be issued addressing
10
1E equipment all trends. Immediate corrective actions would
be identified, as well as long-term predictive 10
maintenance requirements.
Reliability is improved and downtime reduced 10

by the proper and regular implementation
of predictive and preventive maintenance programs. 10
10
10
10
10
Electrical System Modernization

10 Switchgear bus Existing switchgear and bus duct can be With possibly greater utility fault currents, new in-house cogeneration and additional motor loads
MVA upgrading retrofitted with partial discharge sensors, available, existing bus MVA ratings may be exceeded. Engineering inspection, testing and analysis are
10 therefore allowing for online predictive
diagnostics.
employed by experienced engineers to determine corrective measures to improve bus MVA ratings. Life
extension is achieved for the entire switchgear lineup when combined with breaker MVA upgrading by
vacuum replacements.
10 Bus insulation systems Existing switchgear and bus duct can be Replacement fluidized insulated bus systems are supplied to improve the reliability and extend the
retrofitted with partial discharge sensors, life expectancy of the switchgear bus system. During the preliminary inspection, the sources of
10 therefore allowing for online predictive bus contamination, or environmental factors, are reviewed and long-term system corrections are
diagnostics. also implemented.
10 Medium voltage vacuum — As presented in Circuit Breaker Specialized Services, medium voltage vacuum replacements improve the
retrofit and low voltage reliability and life expectancy of medium voltage breakers; as well as low voltage Digitrip RMS retrofits do the
Digitrip RMS retrofits same for low voltage breakers.
10 Low and medium voltage — Eaton’s Cutler-Hammer aftermarket products Life extension is achieved for medium and low voltage
motor starting upgrades include AMPGARD® retrofit kits with air to motor control centers by replacing the worn
10 vacuum replacements. In addition, for low voltage components with new production units. In addition,
motor control and DS switchgear, replacement improved motor protection and communications can be
units are manufactured as direct replacements for incorporated into the upgrade package.
10 Westinghouse and other OEM’s MCC buckets.
Reliability is improved by the replacement of the
10 operating coils and associated contact assemblies.
Low and medium voltage — To assist in improving reliability of individual Costs are reduced in comparison to modernizing
10 cell retrofit feeder cubicles, Eaton can supply a complete
circuit breaker and supporting cell for installation
the entire switchgear lineup. Life extension is
achieved for a single cubicle feeder only.
into existing switchgear. The result is a new
10 production unit, custom installed into an existing
older vintage switchgear lineup. A site inspection
is required to determine the best breaker/cell
10 combination to satisfy the system requirement.
Molded case circuit — Older style molded case breakers can be replaced Life extension is achieved for the entire lineup by
10 breaker upgrades with new Eaton standard or the high interrupting application of new production units into the existing
Series C® class of molded case breakers. switchboard lineup.
Long-term reliability is improved.
10 Plant monitoring, protection — Real-time monitoring and remote control of Plant electrical system life extension can be achieved
and control circuit breakers can greatly improve reliability by improving the monitoring, protection and control
10 Digitrip by providing immediate indication of a problem, of the individual components in a planned and unified
PowerNet allowing for a quick resolution; and if necessary, manner. Plant electrical distribution systems are being
10 Advantage starters
DeviceNet
remote control of power distribution equipment. subjected to higher loads and greater harmonics.
Plantwide monitoring can help identify these areas of
PLC interface rapid deterioration, and implement corrective actions
10 to extend the life of the electrical system. In addition,
with the advent of utility deregulation, having accurate
power usage values will allow for improved
10 negotiating on power purchases.
Power factor control — — Utility rates, as well as internal electrical system
10 and correction losses, are related to power factor. Cost reductions
are achieved through proper power factor control
and correction. For systems with harmonics, filtered
10 power factor capacitor banks should be designed
and installed.
10 Ground fault detection — Improved system reliability and personnel safety Costly outages, and faults related to repeated arcing
systems are achieved by a properly applied ground fault grounds, can be eliminated, as well as providing an
detection system. Systems can be applied at MV, improved environment for personnel safety.
10 or low voltage levels by the use of Eaton products.
High resistance grounding — High resistance grounding systems can be Costs are reduced by limiting the damaging
10 and detection installed on ungrounded systems. These systems effects of ground fault current and reducing the
will limit the ground fault current, thereby reducing troubleshooting time to locate grounds. Ground
10 ground fault damage. The advantages of an
ungrounded system are maintained with the
fault pulsing allows for locating the ground,
with portable hand-held sensing devices, during
added feature of ground detection and correction online operation.
10 while maintaining system operation.
Surge/lightning — Outages can be prevented, related to surges Costly equipment damage can be eliminated.
10 protection systems or lightning by the proper application of
protective devices.
10 Automatic transfer
scheme upgrades
— Older automatic transfer schemes employ
old relay systems. The relay coils may be at
Cost reductions related to downtime are eliminated,
by a review and upgrade of older transfer schemes,
the end of their useful life, and operation can before the first failed automatic transfer operation
10 not be assured for the next required automatic
transfer. Unfortunately, most defective transfer
occurs.
schemes are not detected until a failed operation

10 has occurred.
10.3
Electrical System Modernization, continued
10
Network protector — Network protector relaying systems require Life extension is achieved by proper servicing,
10
service/relaying systems service and testing to ensure continued proper and/or upgrading of network protector components.
operation. Older relaying systems can be upgraded,
and complete network protector service is
Complete network protector reconditioning is also
available from Eaton.
10
available to improve reliability.
Generator voltage regulation — Many older in-house cogeneration units have With the advent of utility deregulation, in-house
10
and static excitation systems antiquated voltage regulation and excitation cogeneration has become a critical source of
systems. These older systems can not function supplemental electrical power, for peak-shaving 10
with the precision of modern replacements, and and negotiating competitive power usage rates.
often require extensive maintenance. Eaton offers With the associated maintenance of the mechanical
a complete range of products to apply to these and rotating components, the life expectancy can be 10
older systems, thereby improving overall system extended with the inclusion of a modern electrical
reliability and reducing downtime. control system. 10
Reduced voltage and — Application of current production starters will Starter retrofits can be easily justified based on
soft starters improve reliability due to the new components
installed.
energy cost savings, and reduced wear-and-tear
on the process line during starting.
10
Synchronous motor — Many older synchronous motors employ field Life extension can be achieved for the synchronous
field application application panels that are obsolete, with parts motor field application system by applying new 10
support no longer available. Applying a new Eaton Eaton products.
field application package will improve reliability
and reduce future downtime.
10
Drive systems PLC
process systems
— Retrofitting older drive and relay-logic process
systems with new drives and PLCs provides for
Process cost reductions will be realized by drive
system PLC improvements due to greater control
10
greater reliability and reduced downtime. Older of production parameters. Eaton sensors, in
devices are eliminated, thereby eliminating
nuisance control problems.
conjunction with drive and PLCs, can provide a
complete modernized production system.
10
All OEMs upgraded
Westinghouse/GE/ITE
— Field personnel are experienced in Eaton equipment, as well as other manufacturer’s equipment.
This cross-OEM experience allows the application of singular new products to satisfy many OEM
10
BBC/ABB/Square D upgrading needs and provide uniformity across the various OEM’s equipment.
Allis Chalmers/Siemens/ 10
Federal Pacific/Roller Smith
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Circuit Breaker Specialized Services

10 Low and medium voltage Spare cubicles, part of new construction with Downtime can be substantially reduced by Aging circuit breakers can be replaced with direct
replacement circuit breakers a planned expansion, can be equipped with low allowing our Aftermarket Centers of Excellence roll-in replacements, thereby extending the life of
10 voltage and medium voltage replacement breakers.
Eaton circuit breakers and other OEM circuit
to provide spare replacement breakers. the entire switchgear assembly.
breakers can be supplied.

10 AR-Series low voltage — Eaton’s AR-Series low voltage replacement Life extension is achieved by upgrading existing
replacement breakers breakers provide a solution tailored to meet breakers to the most current breaker technology. The
10 Westinghouse safety and reliability concerns while eliminating AR-Series solution will result in a number of reduced
Allis-Chalmers the need for new switchgear. AR-Series breakers costs associated with maintaining or replacing vintage
Federal Pacific are 100% new and are designed to be electrical equipment. These cost reductions include: reduced
10 and others and mechanical equivalents of the vintage maintenance time, decreased outages due to readily
breakers they replace. They are not “retrofits” available parts, elimination of field engineering costs,
10 and do not reuse any parts from the original breaker.
The same safety, reliability and maintainability of
reduced spare parts investment increase safety.
new switchgear are obtained for a fraction of the

10 total installed cost.
Low voltage retrofits — Eaton Digitrip RMS kits have been widely used Life extension is achieved by upgrading the critical trip
10 Digitrip RMS kits
Westinghouse
to modernized low voltage circuit breakers. They
offer advanced RMS sensing, digital display of
system on low voltage circuit breakers. In addition,
future testing costs are reduced, and in-house testing
Cutler-Hammer current, improved protection, fault indication, can be applied by the purchase of a portable test set.
10 GE self-testing and communications to Eaton’s
ITE/BBC/ABB PowerNet system. Retrofits greatly improve
10 Allis-Chalmers
Siemens
reliability by applying the latest technology to
existing circuit breakers.
Federal Pacific
10 Square D
Roller Smith
10 Medium voltage vacuum roll-in —

circuit breakers
Older air circuit breaker contacts, arc chutes,
mechanisms, secondary disconnects, etc.,
Life extension of medium voltage switchgear
assemblies can be accomplished by the replacement
Eaton new production are replaced with current production vacuum of existing air circuit breakers with new vacuum
10 breaker element
Full ANSI design testing
breakers, incorporating all of the above into a
single, fully ANSI tested device. Long-term
breakers. Eaton’s Electrical Sector manufactures
widely used vacuum breaker elements for this
Increased MVA reliability is improved. purpose.
10 ratings available
Field installation and startup
10 Low and medium voltage — All components are refurbished, or replaced, The low and medium voltage breaker life is
recondition depending on the extent of service contracted. substantially extended. In addition, the service can
Aftermarket centers of Spares are available for interchanging units during include the application of modernized rms sensing trip
10 excellence (ACE) scheduled outages, resulting in long-term reliability systems. Specialized Navy, or Nuclear Safety Related
gains without costly unexpected outages. 1E units are also serviced.
10 MCC motor starter buckets — Replacements provide all new components and Spares are available to provide extended life,
added reliability. during schedule outages.
10 MCC replacement buckets Add buckets or increase starter sizes in Replacement units are newly manufactured Many designs of vintage MCC are no longer
for other manufacturers existing equipment. including stabs and all breaker and control supported. Eaton’s replacement units offer a cost-
components. They utilize state-of-the-art effective means to extend the life or modernize
10 technology increasingly reliability and uptime. existing equipment without the need to replace the
original MCC.
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Predictive Diagnostic
10.4
Partial Discharge Testing Contents
Description Page
10
Predictive Diagnostic 10
Partial Discharge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-29
Medium and High Voltage Predictive 10
Diagnostics Online Monitoring and
Partial Discharge Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-32 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Partial Discharge Testing 10
Application Functionality PD Analysis Instrumentation 10
Eaton’s Electrical Services & PD sensors detect partial Eaton provides a PD sensor (for use during periodic
Systems has developed discharges, which are the for each cubicle within the PD measurements)
state-of-the-art technology initial indicators of corona switchgear lineup. Sensing Eaton measurement and 10
to allow for the long-term or surface tracking. Corona for PD at the ends of the analysis instrumentation is
predictive diagnostics of and surface tracking are switchgear lineups only is capable of periodically 10
medium voltage equipment. the primary root-causes of not acceptable due to the detecting partial discharges
New or existing medium insulation deterioration in signal attenuation of PD. The related to medium voltage 10
voltage switchgear lineups medium voltage electrical sensing must occur in each switchgear, medium voltage
motors and generators,
are equipped with partial
discharge (PD) sensors to
equipment. The sensitivity
of PD sensors and
individual cubicle to ensure
maximum sensitivity and medium voltage cables,
10
measure PD within the measurement technology predictive value of the transformers and other
cubicles. The sensing is sufficient to detect measurements. medium voltage electrical 10
technology provides early stages of defect equipment. It completes
measurement of all development by measuring Calibration and Baseline concurrent sampling of a 10
discharges through PD of low levels (less than Measurements minimum of four channels,
noninvasive sensing of 50 pico-coulombs). PD New switchgear can be able to effectively suppress
electrical noise, eliminate
10
the electrical power signal. occurring within the cubicles monitored at the factory
cross-coupling of measured
Measurements are performed
online, while switchgear
as well as PD emanated
by external sources (cable
prior to shipment, and a
baseline signature of PD is PD signals, maintain a 10
equipment is energized under terminations, cables, provided with the switchgear. detection sensitivity of 50 pC
normal operational conditions, bus ducts, connected Field startup service includes or better, and disseminate 10
using measurement transformers, motors, etc.) obtaining a post-installation the type of discharge
equipment specifically within a limited distance is signature of the PD. In-service measured. Immediate 10
designed for this purpose. identified. Sensors allow for medium voltage switchgear, report documentation is
periodic partial discharge which is retrofitted with PD incorporated within the
instrumentation software,
10
sensing from the front of sensors, will have an initial
each switchgear cubicle baseline measurement with analysis and
without the need to open obtained, whereas our recommendations included 10
cubicle doors, using database of switchgear PD in the final report.
measurement equipment measurements does allow 10
specifically for this purpose. us to provide immediate
results concerning the 10
insulation condition.
10
10
10
Transformer Transformer Bushing Monitoring System

10 Predictive Diagnostics Eaton’s system monitors Instrumentation Calibration, Manuals and
the changes in the bushing Eaton’s predictive analysis Baseline Measurements
10 (Bushing Power Factor, Partial insulation, for the set of instrumentation is capable Eaton provides full field
Discharge and Vibro-Acoustics) three bushings in a group, calibration and startup. A
of precise continuous
10 Transformers, with a primary based on changes in bushing measurement of the separate independent PF
voltage at or above 68 kV, capacitance or bushing capacitive current through test is performed of each
10 and containing capacitive
taps on the primary bushing,
power factor. the bushing insulation while bushing as part of the startup
the transformer is energized. and calibration process.
should be equipped with The system detects changes
Transformer bushings are
10 a continuous monitoring of the power frequency The minimum detectable
change in current is 0.1% calibrated and baseline
system to allow for pre- and current through the bushing
of the initial current. The measurements obtained.
10 post-shipment measurement insulation. If the transformer
temperature deviation of Part of the field startup
of bushing power factor and has 6 or 9 bushings (two or
the signal is the same order. service includes obtaining a
three windings), additional
10 internal PD. In addition,
systems can be installed The display is available from post-installation baseline
vibro-acoustics testing can the bushing monitoring measurements to ensure
be completed both prior to as required. The measured
10 shipment and after final current through the bushing instrumentation for one no detects have resulted
during bushing installation
insulation can not be less complex PF signal per
installation. Vibro-acoustics bushing group, which will and/or transformer
10 testing will indicate any initial than 2 mA. The system
include the display of the transportation, installation
internal winding or core also provides provisions
current PF value. The and startup. A report with
10 looseness prior to shipment, for the connection of
instrumentation for periodical following output signals any recommendations is
and confirm that no additional can also be provided as also provided. A complete
PD measurements using
10 internal stress has occurred
during shipment and portable equipment without required: Two alarm signals manual is supplied for
(dry contacts) for a local both the instrumentation
installation. This additional requiring a transformer
10 field-testing provides for outage, or any modifications alarm system, and
additionally 4–20 mA DC
and the software describing
the operation of the
immediate indication of any to the sensing circuit.
output for an analog re- instrumentation, calibration
10 problem related to the transmitting or serial interface and troubleshooting.
manufacturer, transportation, Sensors
for digital re-transmitting.
10 installation and startup. Vibro- The power factor (PF)
sensors are connected to the
Instrumentation is completely Remote Monitoring
acoustics also provides isolated from high voltages Eaton can monitor any asset
bushing capacitance taps. All
10 indication of internal
looseness related to over- sensors are designed for
and feature immunity to using partial discharge
high voltage transients. equipment by several secure
drying out of insulation during outdoor installation within the
10 oil processing, and ambient temperature minus
Full field calibration
procedures are supplied
methods including cellular,
Ethernet or dial-in. Eaton has a
can provide diagnostic 50°C to plus 50°C. Insulation with the instrument’s secure APN that enables the
10 information in preparation level (withstand 1 minute operation manual. All most secure connections
for a transformer internal AC voltage) between primary necessary connections for available and can provide
10 inspection. In addition, these and secondary circuits is:
bushing sensor 1.5 kV plus
the selected options are monthly reporting, alarms
systems provide a method supplied with startup and and product support.
to complete future predictive overvoltage protection;
10 diagnostics, online, without neutral sensor 15 kV;
baseline calibration.
any equipment outage, tank, core or cable shield Software (Digital Option)
10 therefore providing grounding 2.5 kV; and
Eaton’s monitoring software
extended life and increased 5 sheath 1.5 kV. The sensor
is compatible with Microsoft®
10 equipment uptime. system also includes
Windows® 95 or high O/S
overvoltage protection to
suppress all overvoltages, based systems with the
10 arising during transformer following features: display
operation, below this level. of the PF value for the group
10 Temperature sensor, if used of three bushings (up to three
with a digital device, is of a groups), storage and trending
of the PF value for all
10 standard RTD type. Sensors
monitored groups (up to
also provide provisions for
three), trending PF readings
10 periodic PD measurements
online, using separate versus temperature, alarm
instrumentation designed threshold setting, alarming
10 for this purpose. upon PF reaching the preset
thresholds, printing and
10 plotting of the historical data.
10
10
10
10.4
Online Transformer Partial Discharge Monitoring
Eaton also installs PD Part of the field startup Periodic Partial Discharge After the unit is loaded to
10
sensors to allow for online service includes obtaining Analysis Software approximately 50%, or greater,
PD measurements within post-installation baseline Eaton’s expert monitoring a second set of measurements 10
a transformer. PD measurements to ensure no system applies analysis shall be obtained. Two
measurement can be defects have resulted during software, during periodic subsequent measurements, 10
periodically obtained while bushing installation and/or measurements, with the at 6 and 12 months, following
the transformer is online and
in normal operation, using
transformer transportation,
installation and startup.
following features: display continuous online operation,
are recommended. Further
10
of PD data, statistical
separate instrumentation A report with any processing of the PD data, follow-up measurements will
designed for this purpose. recommendations is data storage and editing, be on an as-determined basis. 10
The measurement system also provided. and instrumentation control. Measurements are made at
can assess the insulation All data from the test is 12 locations on the transformer 10
condition based on PD Measurement Parameters automatically saved to a hard tank, 6 on the HV side of the
measurement of the Eaton’s instrumentation disk in a database format. transformer tank and 6 on the 10
bushings and the transformer measures the following: The stored data format is LV side (the HV side indicates
windings insulation. The the side with HV bushings, and
system is also capable of
apparent PD magnitude of
each impulse, number of
compatible with Microsoft
Windows applications Word®, the LV side indicates the side
10
detecting sparking in the impulses per cycle, phase Excel®, Access® and others. with the LV bushings).
core, sparking associated position of each discharge All standard “Microsoft 10
with connections, and impulse, impulse repetition Windows” control functions Traditional Transformer Startup
sparking associated with the rate, impulse discharge power, such as printing, and cut and and Acceptance Testing 10
static electrical discharges. and peak discharge magnitude paste operations are available The above transformer
Sensors and Instrumentation

of the impulses. The following within the software. Upon predictive diagnostic 10
quantities are plotted and initiation, the software systems and field startup
performs self-diagnostic testing is completed by
Sensors are noninvasive and
have no connection to the
displayed in a report format:
apparent discharge magnitude procedures to ensure all Eaton in addition to traditional
10
energized components. of each impulse, number of components are operating transformer factory and
Sensors are designed for impulses per cycle, phase correctly. field acceptance testing in 10
outdoor installation within the position of each discharge accordance with ANSI, IEEE,
ambient installation within impulse, impulse repletion Calibration, Manuals and and other applicable testing 10
the ambient temperature rate, impulse discharge power, Baseline Measurements standards. For example, a
–50ºC to +50ºC. Sensors are peak discharge magnitude of Part of the field startup separate independent power
factor test is required of each
10
connected, as required based the impulses, impulse count service includes obtaining
on the field conditions, to the and PD magnitude vs. phase post-installation baseline bushing as part of the startup
following locations: bushing position representation and measurements to ensure no and calibration process. 10
capacitor taps, transformer impulse PD power. The above defects have resulted during These additional tests provide
neutral connection, tank information is provided to bushing installation and/or for immediate indication 10
grounding, core grounding, support the findings and transformer transportation, of any problem related to
electrostatic shield recommendations, which are installation and startup. A report manufacturer, transportation, 10
grounding, surge arresters, contained in a field report. with recommendations is also installation and startup. In
isophase bus enclosure
bonds and grounds. The Vibro-Acoustic Analysis
provided. addition, Eaton’s predictive
diagnostics provides a
10
sensor frequency range of Transformers Measurements method to complete future
of operation is 500 kHz to Eaton can perform vibro- Vibro-acoustics is based on predictive diagnostics, online, 10
50 MHz. Insulation level acoustics testing prior to collecting steady-state vibro- without any equipment
(withstand 1 minute AC shipment and after final acoustic data from the outside outage, therefore providing 10
voltage) between primary installation. Vibro-acoustics of the transformer tank under extended life and increased
and secondary circuits is: testing indicates any initial two load conditions and equipment uptime. 10
bushing sensor 1.5 kV plus internal winding or core subsequent automated
overvoltage protection;
neutral sensor 15 kV; tank,
looseness prior to shipment,
and confirms that no
analysis of the energy 10
distribution among different
core or cable shield grounding additional internal stress frequencies in this vibration
2.5 kV; and isophase sheath has occurred during shipment data. The first measurement
10
1.5 kV. The sensor system and installation. at no-load will be obtained prior
also includes overvoltage to shipment. A subsequent, 10
protection to suppress all post-installation, no-load, vibro-
overvoltages, arising during acoustic measurement is also 10
transformer operation, below completed on-site to verify
this level. no internal stresses resulted
during shipment or installation.
10
10
10
10
InsulGard Predictive Relay Contents

10 Description Page
10 Partial Discharge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-29
Medium and High Voltage Predictive Diagnostics
10 Online Monitoring and Partial Discharge Analysis
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10 Medium and High Voltage Predictive Diagnostics Online Monitoring and Partial Discharge Analysis
10 General Description Application Description
Eaton’s predictive diagnostics Certainly, a well-designed,
10 offers predictive diagnostic time-based preventive InsulGard Predictive Relay for
equipment and systems for maintenance program will Continuous Monitoring and
Analysis of PD
medium and high voltage have a profound positive
10 equipment. Much of Eaton’s effect on failure rates, but Applications of the InsulGard
technology is based on the they are generally invasive system are available for
10 measurement and analysis in nature. This invasiveness equipment that are rated
of partial discharges (PD). has a tendency to increase for 4000V to 38,000V
10 PD is a well-known and an failure rates due to the and include:
industry-accepted indicator of introduction of new defects, ● Motors/generators (RTDs
10 insulation deterioration that
leads to equipment failure.
resulting in infant-mortality are also used as sensors)
failure patterns. ● Switchgear systems
10 Studies have shown that With industry moving toward ● Bus ducts
approximately 80 percent of fewer and shorter outages, ● Power center transformers
10 all equipment failures occur companies are looking for ● Gas insulated substations
on a random basis and are not alternative and predictive
age related. The statistic technologies to protect ● Splices and terminations
10 indicates that whatever we their investment, lower of cables
are doing today in terms of maintenance costs and
10 preventive maintenance is increase system reliability.
not overly effective and that Use of the technologies
10 there are opportunities for provided by Eaton will do
major improvements. just that.
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.4
10
InsulGard—Transformer Benefits of Using the Benefits of Remote Monitoring
Monitoring System InsulGard System ● Relieves the burden 10
Data gathered from Doble ● Saves money of data analysis
conferences and other
scientific papers indicate
● No labor is required to ● Experts are readily 10
conduct test available
that bushing failures are
responsible for up to
● More efficient deployment ● Safe, secure and reliable 10
of personnel. Labor can be data collection
35 percent of all large
power transformer failures.
reallocated to fix problems
(instead of look for them)
● Cost-effective—eliminates 10
This data also states that cost of expert traveling
and take care of other
52 percent of bushing failures important matters
to site 10
are violent in nature, which ● Automatic, easy to
● Tests are performed online
presents safety concerns, as
well as concerns related to ● No loss of asset
understand reports 10
environmental damage. productivity
● More accurate data as 10
Among Eaton’s capabilities tests are conducted under
is the ability to continuously
monitor the changes in the
actual operating conditions 10
C1 capacitance, as well as
● No infant-mortality patterns
any changes in the dielectric that are commonly 10
losses of the bushing (bushing introduced
power factor). It’s like having via invasive testing 10
a continuous online Doble procedures
test of the bushings under ● Tests are continuous 10
true electrical stress and ● Finding a problem is not
temperature. We also have
the ability to test the bushings
left to chance (like interval
testing). You will know
10
and the power transformer when a problem started
windings for PD on a periodic and how rapidly it is 10
basis, while the equipment progressing
is in operation. ● No surprises and no 10
Eaton’s comprehensive forced outages. Increased
transformer monitoring safety—you will always be 10
system incorporates aware of conditions/
permanent PD sensors to problems 10
timely detect a wide range ● Allows trending of other
of electrical problems (PDs, variables that affect PD
activity such as load,
10
surface tracking, arcing,
temperature and humidity
sparking) in bushings,
winding insulation, core, ● Unnecessary maintenance
10
laminations, tap changer is reduced because you are
connections, ground constantly testing and have 10
connections, pressboard more accurate data on
barriers, etc. Ideal system which to base decisions 10
for critical transformers or ● You have achieved
to keep your troublesome predictive/conditioned- 10
unit out of trouble! based maintenance
Implementation of Eaton’s
predictive diagnostics
versus interval/chance 10
maintenance
provides an analysis of
your critical equipment to
● You can prioritize which
equipment receives
10
reduce the risk of failure and
service first—a true
increase uptime.
maintenance planning tool
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
VR-Series Breakers Contents

10 Description Page
10 Retrofit Services
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers
10 AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers . V3-T10-39
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker
10 Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™
10 Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . V3-T10-46
10 Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum
Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
10 MCC Replacement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
10
10
10
10 Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers
Eaton’s vacuum replacement
10 History and Technology (VR) circuit breakers are fully
Most medium voltage air The market responded by engineered and tested to
magnetic power circuit offering “retrofits” that provide the user with a means
10 breakers have been in service utilized the existing breaker of modernizing electrical
for 25 years and some for as trucks (frames) and vacuum power distribution systems,
10 long as 60 years. They were circuit breaker modules. and in most cases, extending
reliable and for many years These alternatives provided the life of the equipment while
10 maintainable. Increased extended life for electrical improving performance and
short-circuit capabilities in equipment, reduced system reliability.
10 utility and industrial power
systems have created “over-
maintenance, and allowed
increased capabilities for Medium voltage Type VR
duty” situations with many many distribution systems. circuit breakers are available
10 of these breakers. Parts IEEE/ANSI established for 5 kV through 15 kV
availability has also increased a standard for retrofits distribution systems.
10 the cost of maintaining the (IEEE/ANSI C37.59) in 1991
breakers in peak condition. that put consistency in the
10 In the mid 1970s, circuit
retrofit process. However,
retrofits were costly, caused
breaker manufacturers
10 began introducing vacuum
inconvenience for users,
required months to complete,
technology for medium and the lack of configuration
10 voltage power circuit control made it difficult to
breakers. It was desirable standardize designs.
10 and feasible to incorporate
the advantages of vacuum Eaton now offers new VR
technology into replacement circuit breakers that can be
10 breakers that would directly supplied in place of the old
interchange with the existing retrofit technology. Unlike
10 medium voltage air magnetic retrofits, VR power circuit
power circuit breakers to breakers are new from the
10 extend the useful life of their ground up and offer improved
existing switchgear. Most performance, maintainability
10 users wanted a replacement
that was functionally
and convenience over
retrofits. They can be
interchangeable, both supplied in large quantities to
10 electrically and mechanically, facilitate complete substation
with their existing medium upgrades in a single outage.
10 voltage air magnetic power System upgrades to handle
circuit breakers. higher short-circuit levels
10 are available.
Retrofit Services
10.5
Features, Benefits and Functions Detailed Requirements
Eaton is a world leader in Service Life
10
circuit breaker technology. General MVA Ratings
Most medium voltage air
The same reliable vacuum magnetic circuit breakers This section covers the The available MVA rating of 10
technology is used have been in service for design, testing and the VR circuit breakers are
in our VR circuit breakers. 25 to 60 years. As long manufacturing requirements as follows: 10
Eaton’s vacuum interrupter is as the bus structures, for new vacuum replacement
All Eaton switchgear
used in many manufacturers’
switchgear breakers
insulation systems and (VR) circuit breakers for use
in medium voltage metal-clad structures designated for 10
general mechanical condition VR circuit breakers with
worldwide. Many of the switchgear. The VR circuit
components and sub-
of the switchgear cells/
structures are maintained in breakers will be functional increased MVA levels will 10
assemblies in Eaton medium replacements (both have the existing bus bracing
good condition, equipment
voltage VacClad-W metal-clad life can easily be prolonged mechanically and electrically) analyzed. EESS will determine
if bus bracing is capable of
10
switchgear are the same as with the addition of VR for the air magnetic circuit
withstanding the maximum
those used to manufacture circuit breakers. breakers they replace. The
(peak) momentary ratings 10
the VR product line. This helps VR circuit breakers will be
reduce spare parts inventories interchangeable (within per ANSI C37.09 and
and the amount of required
Availability
the limits of the original ANSI C37.20.2 capabilities 10
VR breakers are available in of the new VR circuit
maintenance training. switchgear) between
a wide range of ratings and
models to replace medium different types of cells breakers. EESS will provide 10
Eaton vacuum technology (structures) of the same documentation to verify
voltage, air magnetic circuit
reduces maintenance since
the contacts are sealed breakers originally voltage, MVA and ampere that the switchgear bus is
sufficiently braced to handle
10
manufactured by: class without cell (structure)
from contaminants in the the new ratings or supply the
environment, no adjustments ● Westinghouse
modifications.
cost as a separate item to 10
or cleaning of the main Note: Retrofits, as defined by increase the bus bracing of
contacts are required, and
● General Electric IEEE/ANSI C37.59-1996 6.1.4.2 all designated switchgear 10
the main contacts require ● Allis-Chalmers/Siemens are not covered and will not be structures in the lineup to
considered as an alternative or
no special gauges or devices ● Federal Pacific Electric
substitute for new VR circuit
comply with the increased 10
to measure wear or contact ● ITE/ABB breakers. MVA ratings. Following the
pressure. Annual lubrication study and/or the bracing
and testing can be performed
● McGraw-Edison
modifications, Eaton’s
10
Scope of Work
in a fraction of the time service engineer will affix
required for air magnetic
Required Information Eaton’s Electrical Sector
a nameplate to each 10
In order to obtain the correct will provide all project
circuit breakers. switchgear structure stating
VR circuit breaker, the management, factory and
Eaton’s non-sliding current following information should field engineering, short-circuit
the new MVA rating, the 10
manufacturer’s name and
transfer system eliminates be provided to Eaton: and coordination studies (if
the need to check and tighten required and at an additional
the date of verification
or upgrade.
10
connections between the
● Original switchgear charge), supervision, labor,
vacuum interrupter stem manufacturer material, tools, rental, test
VR Ratings
10
and the main conductors ● Original breaker equipment and transportation
or the circuit breaker. The manufacturer as defined for a complete VR Volts Original New 10
connection is permanent and ● Breaker type or circuit breaker replacement of kV MVA 1 MVA
provides high conductivity catalog number the required existing medium
without creating hotspots and ● Maximum voltage rating voltage switchgear circuit
4.76 100–250 2 250 10
4.77 100–250 2 350
Holm effect as found in half- continuous current rating breakers. The VR circuit
clamp connections. and maximum short-circuit breakers will be designed for 8.25 150–500 500 10
or MVA rating maximum voltages of either 15 150–500 500
SURE CLOSE MOC operators
are available to provide ● Control voltages
4.76 kV, 8.25 kV or 15 kV
150–500 750
10
as required.
dependable MOC operation ● List of options and/or 150–500 1000
that is decoupled from the modifications 10
750 1000
main closing function of ● Copy of schematic and
the VR circuit breaker wiring diagram 150–1000 1500 10
mechanism. This prevents ● Year of manufacture of Notes
the VR circuit breaker from original breaker and 1 MVA is obsolete switchgear terminology 10
stalling or failing to latch switchgear and is used for reference only in this
during the closing operation.
SURE CLOSE mechanisms
● MOC requirement
document.
2 26-inch (660.4 mm) wide cells only.
10
also have adjustable stop For site-specific
positions to control over- specifications, contact your
10
travel of MOC switch local General Field Sales
operators. Force office, or your local 10
Engineering Services center.
10
10
Retrofit Services
Cubicle Modifications Manufacturer’s Qualifications Common Pole Shaft Manual Trip and Close
10 The VR circuit breakers Eaton is currently engaged in The circuit breaker The mechanism has front
are designed to be the design and manufacturing mechanism will open and accessible manual close and
10 interchangeable with of medium voltage vacuum close all three phases and trip operators that are directly
existing breakers of the circuit breakers and any auxiliary devices via a connected to the breaker
10 same continuous current switchgear structures. Eaton common operating shaft operating mechanism and
and MVA ratings without has a minimum of 50 years to ensure consistent and are an integral part of the
required modifications to experience in switchgear simultaneous operation of
10 the existing cubicles in most manufacturing, is a member the main contacts. The
electrical close and trip coils.
cases. Any required cell of the National Electrical shaft will be supported at Operations Counter
10 modifications are designed Manufacturers Association the ends and along its Each VR circuit breaker
to be reversible. Existing cell (NEMA), and has representation length with bearings. The mechanism has a five digit
10 coding systems are retained on IEEE C37 Switchgear main drive shaft will be non-resetting mechanical
where possible. Working and Balloting connected to the individual operations counter connected
10 VR circuit breakers with
Groups, and owns and
operates an engineering
vacuum interrupters via to the operating shaft.
insulated drive links.
upgraded/increased MVA services organization.
10 or continuous current ratings Insulated Drive Links
Spring Charged Indicator
do require modifications to Each operating mechanism
Eaton’s Electrical Services The mechanism drive shaft will be equipped with a
10 the cubicle coding system & Systems (EESS) will be connected to each visible indicator to show the
to prevent the insertion of ● Experienced, factory- moving contact via an state of the stored energy
breakers that do not have the
10 same ratings as the upgraded
trained field engineers and insulated drive link made of mechanism. The indicator will
technicians familiar with glass-reinforced polyester for show when the spring is fully
VR circuit breakers.
10 the installation and startup
of medium voltage VR
element types VCP-18WR, charged or discharged.
Applicable Standards VCP-20WR and VCP-29WR
circuit breakers and cycloaliphatic epoxy for
10 All VR breakers will be ● A minimum of 30 field the VCP-29WRSE. The
Auxiliary Contacts
designed, manufactured and The breaker will have a
service locations staffed insulated link material is non-
10 tested in accordance with the
with engineers that are hydroscopic and meets the
low inertia, rotary operated
auxiliary switch connected
applicable sections of: flame-retardant requirements
available on a 24-hour basis to the main pole shaft
10 ● IEEE C37.59-2007 for emergency service as set forth in IEEE C37.20.2. assembly. Connections
(cell interface and ● Capabilities of on-site cell The drive links are easily will be made via insulated
10 testing criteria) alignment, breaker levering removable with single clevis
pins at each end and spring
ring-tongue terminals.
● IEEE C37.04 system repairs and control
retaining clips.
10 ● IEEE C37.06 system modifications Vacuum Bottle Assembly
IEEE C37.09
● Capabilities to perform The vacuum bottle assembly
●
Shock Absorber System
10 ● IEEE C37.20.2
computer-generated short-
circuit, coordination and The mechanism will contain
will be constructed from
virgin materials and
● IEEE C37.100 load flow studies for final a shock absorber system to manufactured by Eaton. The
10 ● IEEE C37.100.1 breaker trip settings. All dampen the opening force contacts will be principally
studies will be conducted of the circuit breaker. The composed of powdered
● IEEE STD 4-1995
10 under the supervision and shock absorber has sufficient metal, chromium-copper
approval of a registered resilience to prevent contact contact material. The
Materials
bounce that could cause a
10 All materials used in the professional electrical
restrike of the main contacts
powdered metal is fused
manufacturing of the new engineer skilled in under high pressure to form
during the opening of the a consistent contact material.
10 VR circuit breakers will be interpreting studies and
test results regarding circuit breaker or during The contacts are machined to
new and unused. No parts a spring discharge. The
medium voltage VR circuit form spiral petal contacts to
10 or materials from the original
air-magnetic circuit breakers breakers. The Registered VCP-20WR, VCP-29WR assist in the swirling of the
Professional Electrical and VCP-29WRSE vacuum arc during interruption.
will be reconditioned and
10 reused in the manufacture of Engineer is a full-time conversion element’s
mechanism consists of a The edges of the ceramic
the new VR circuit breakers. employee of EESS
series of parallel steel plates components will be
10 All components used in the
Vacuum Circuit Breaker with spring separators that “metallized” and fired
manufacturing of the new spread the plates during prior to assembly. The
Module Features
10 VR circuit breakers including,
The VR circuit breakers will breaker opening. The shock components are inspected
mechanism, vacuum absorber has a design life of and assembled in a Class
utilize vacuum circuit breaker
10 interrupters and frame
components will all be modules manufactured by 10,000 breaker opening and 1000 clean room prior to
closing cycles without the sealing the components. The
manufactured by Eaton Eaton. Acceptable conversion
components are inserted into
10 to ensure single-source modules are the VCP-18WR, need for repair, replacement
or adjustment. The VCP- a vacuum heat chamber and
reliability and responsibility. VCP-20WR, VCP-29WR and
18WR has a sealed sealed under vacuum. No
10 the VCP-29WRSE.
replaceable shock absorber “pinch tubes” are used.
and is capable of being
10 adjusted if replaced or during
initial mechanism assembly.
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
A stainless steel corrugated Mechanical Status Indicator Insulation Systems Control Circuit Wiring
bellow achieves isolation Each new VR circuit breaker All bushings utilize either Control wiring is SIS 10
of the ambient air and the has a mechanical status glass-reinforced polyester cross-linked polyethylene,
vacuum. The moving indicator with the word or molded cycloaliphatic epoxy #14 AWG minimum except 10
contact stem of the vacuum “CLOSED” on a red insulation systems or engineer for short runs such as coil and
interrupter has a machined
groove to prevent rotation
background when the approved equal. Fluidized motor leads. Insulated ring 10
breakers are closed and the epoxy coatings are used to tongue terminals are used.
of the contact within the word “OPEN” on a green insulate interface conductors Solder or “fast-on” type
vacuum chamber. background when the when necessary. connections are not used.
10
breakers are open. Upfront, easy access
The vacuum interrupter has a
visual method of identifying
Phase barriers are terminal blocks are provided 10
Breaker Truck/Frame Assembly manufactured from GPO-3 for maintenance and
contact wear without the use
of gauges or other devices.
glass-reinforced polyester or
equivalent and designed to
troubleshooting. 10
Frame Materials and Plating
In addition, a separate visual isolate individual phase
“T-cutout” is used to verify The frame is constructed
from steel, utilizing a conductors. Openings are
Stored Energy Discharge 10
that the mechanism is The replacement breaker
combination of bolting and minimized to reduce the
applying adequate spring
welding to assemble the possibility of ionized gas
incorporates a manual and
an automatic system to
10
pressure to the contacts propagation between phases.
when the breaker is in the frames. All frames are completely discharge all
closed position. zinc-plated. stored energy before the 10
Corona Shields
circuit breaker is fully
The contacts are self- Wheels and Casters All 8.25 kV and 15 kV class
breakers have internal corona
withdrawn from the 10
aligning and do not require for Transport switchgear housing.
shields when bushings are
adjustments for the life of the
vacuum interrupter assembly.
VR circuit breakers are
supplied with a transport mounted on metallic back
The system will never 10
intentionally discharge the
The contacts also have system that is a functional planes. The corona shields stored energy while in the
a spring system to apply replacement of the are permanently grounded. connected position.
10
proper contact pressure. transport system of the Bushings mounted on
The operation of the contacts original design. The transport nonmetallic back planes Passive Interlocks 10
cause a wiping action to clean system conforms to the do not have internal
The mechanism will have
the contact surfaces. requirements of the original corona shields. 10
a passive interlock to block
design. the insertion or removal of a
Insulated Pole Assemblies Primary Connections
Pole assemblies are insulated Hardware Primary connections
closed breaker. The system 10
also prevents the insertion
from ground with non- All hardware is a minimum (finger clusters) are new of the levering tool at any
hydroscopic insulating grade five, zinc-plated with a and designed to carry the time the breaker is in the
10
materials manufactured from yellow dichromate finish or full nameplate rating of the closed position.
glass-reinforced polyester. black oxide. replacement breaker without 10
exceeding the allowable Active Interlocks
Current Transfer System Bushing and Interface temperature rise as stated
in ANSI C37.04.5.4.2-1979.
Each breaker has an active 10
The current transfer from the Conductor Material interlock system. The system
In addition, the primary
conductor stem to the primary Primary and power frequency
interface conductors are connections are capable
is operated by the insertion or 10
bushing assemblies is via a removal of the VR circuit
non-sliding current transfer constructed of 100% IACS of withstanding the full
system consisting of a fused electrical grade conductive momentary/close and latch
breaker. In the event the
passive interlock is defeated,
10
stem assembly and a V-Flex™ copper. Conductors are rating as well as the K*I
active interlock system will
silver-plated copper leaf either silver- or tin-plated to current rating for two
trip and open a connected, 10
conductor or folded leaf a thickness of 0.0001–0.0002 seconds without melting,
closed breaker if an attempt
arcing or pitting the
copper shunts. The stems for non-sliding surfaces and
contact surface.
is made to remove it from 10
have the adjoining conductors 0.001–0.002 for sliding the connected position.
mechanically fused with the
stem material. This junction
surfaces. The power
frequency conductors are Ground Contacts The system also holds the 10
breaker in the “trip-free”
forms a solid current transfer. sized to carry the full load A metal-plated, self-coupling, position at all times between
ampacity of the circuit separable grounding contact the test and fully connected
10
Trip-Free Operation breaker without exceeding shall be supplied. positions.
The new VR circuit breaker the temperature rise 10
operation mechanism is a established in IEEE C37.09.
“true Trip-Free” design. 10
When the trip function is
mechanically engaged and 10
held, and the close function
is initiated either electrically
or mechanically, the contacts
10
do not close. The contacts
are restricted to 10% of the 10
total travel.
10
Retrofit Services
Locking Means Design and Certification This test is to prove the Technical Data
10 Locking means is provided (Type) Testing mechanical strength and and Specifications
to lock the circuit breaker Each new VR circuit breaker integrity of the conductor
10 while in the fully connected supplied will have type tests and frame assembly of the Ratings
or disconnected positions. performed on its base design complete new vacuum ● Maximum voltages:
10 The lock prevents the to certify it to IEEE/ANSI
standards. All Certification
replacement breaker.
This test is performed in a
4.76 kV, 8.25 kV and 15 kV
insertion or removal of the ● Interrupting ratings:
breaker. The lock will not (Type) shall be performed in switchgear cell designed
10 prevent the breaker from a switchgear cell/structure to accommodate the circuit
4.76 kV: 250 MVA (29 kA)
4.77 kV: 350 MVA (41 kA)
being operated while in the when required or an breaker being tested. Anti-
10 fully connected position. equivalent structure where rotation devices may be added
8.25 kV: 500 MVA (33 kA)
15 kV: 500 MVA (18 kA)
permitted by ANSI C37.09. to the cell if required
750 MVA (28 kA)
10 Secondary Contact Block Written test reports, data logs to prevent rotation. If anti-
1000 MVA (37 kA)
Control wiring connections and digital reproductions of rotation devices are used in
1500 MVA (63 kA)
10 between stationary structure the pulse used to perform the the test breaker, then they
BIL test will be on hand for will be installed in all the ● Continuous current:
and the removable breaker 1200A, 2000A, 3000A
review by the buyer. switchgear cells intended
10 are provided with automatic,
self-coupling contacts. The to accommodate the (5–15 kV)
BIL—60 kV for 4.76 kV new breakers. 4000A forced cooled
secondary blocks will be mold
10 cycloaliphatic epoxy
applications, 95 kV for
8.25 and 15 kV applications Short time current tests for
(5–15 kV)
insulation. The pins are as a minimum> crest with three seconds at K*I current
10 drilled and tapped to accept 1.2 μsec x 50 μsec x 50% will be performed to confirm
standard 8-32 screws for wave shape per IEEE C37.09. the breakers I2t capability.
10 ease of maintenance The tests will be conducted The test will be performed in
and wiring changes. The per IEEE STD 4-1995. This a switchgear cell.
secondary contact block is
10 made of cycloaliphatic epoxy.
test shall be performed in a
Continuous rated current
breaker cell or cell equivalent
testing per ANSI C37.04-1979
10 MOC Operator
with controlled humidity
levels. Corrections for
without exceeding 65°C
All breakers will be furnished hotspot rise with a maximum
barometric pressure and
10 with MOC operators unless ambient temperature will
ambient not to exceed 40°C.
specified. The MOC operator This test is performed in a
be applied to the test
10 will have sufficient power to parameters. The breaker
breaker cell or a cell structure
of the same equivalent
operate the largest MOC must pass a total of 54 shots.
volume, dimensions and
10 switch or combination of
switches in the switchgear Mechanical operations ventilation as the original
lineup without affecting the tests of each breaker switchgear structure.
10 breaker’s ability to completely design are performed in
Low Frequency Withstand—
close and latch. The MOC a switchgear cell designed
19 kV rms for 4.76 kV
10 driver is completely to accommodate MOC
applications, 36 kV rms
“decoupled” from the main switches. The maximum
for 8.25 kV and 15 kV
10 breaker operating shaft and number of auxiliary MOC
devices or their equivalent
applications—per
shall be powered by separate IEEE C37.09.
operating springs. The force will be applied during
10 system is SURE CLOSE as the test to ensure that the Interlock functional test per
manufactured by Eaton’s vacuum breaker has IEEE C37.20.2.
10 Electrical Sector. sufficient power to operate
the auxiliary devices, All production tests as stated
10 Cell Coding System successfully closes and in IEEE C37.09. Timing values
per pole will be provided for
Eaton will supply or interface latches during each
operation, and that no the vacuum element in msec.
10 with the cell coding system
fatigue or failure occurs.
to prevent the accidental Execution
insertion of a breaker into Consideration is given to
10 a cell of a different voltage, designing a system that Eaton’s factory trained
current, interrupting capacity will not damage the MOC and certified field service
10 or physical arrangement switch in the switchgear engineer(s) can perform the
than the type intended for cell structure. commissioning of each
10 the switchgear cell receiving Momentary tests per IEEE
breaker at the customer’s
site. The field engineer will
the breaker. C37.20.2 will be performed be familiar with the VR circuit
10 of the completed vacuum breaker to the point that he/
replacement breaker including she can offer initial training to
10 the vacuum breaker element, the owner’s on-site operators
bushings, primary disconnects and maintenance personnel
(finger clusters), all bus in the
10 breaker unit, and all insulators
while performing the
commissioning.
and braces per IEEE C37.09.
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers Contents
Description Page
10
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement 10
Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers 10
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-40
Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41 10
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45 10
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . V3-T10-46
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum 10
FP-25 Original Magnetic FP25-AR Air Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
Circuit Breaker Replacement Breaker
MCC Replacement Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52 10
10
10
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers 10
Product Description 10
Application Reduce Maintenance Cost Increase Interruption Rating Increase Continuous 10
Maximum life extension. All and Downtime with Reliable Dynamic changes resulting Current Rating
AR-Series breakers are brand Magnum™ DS Breaker from larger transformers, Changes to industrial and
new from the ground up. They
Technology
bus ties, parallel generation, commercial facilities, such 10
are designed to be electrical Maintenance procedures and new sources of incoming as increased manufacturing
and mechanical equivalents commonly associated with power can drastically operations, will typically 10
of the breakers they replace. vintage air magnetic circuit increase the level of available increase the demand for
Cell modifications, if required, breakers take 8–12 hours
on average per breaker.
short-circuit current in low electrical power within the 10
are kept to a minimum. They voltage power distribution facility. Often, an increase
Eaton’s Magnum DS breaker
are not “Retrofits” and no
parts are reused from the technology reduces normal
systems. The bus system’s
momentary capability can
in electrical demand can
cause the load on a circuit to
10
original breakers. This reduces maintenance to 2–6 hours per be increased and the entire exceed the circuit breaker’s
out-of-service time, yielding breaker. The arc chutes, switchgear structure can continuous current rating. 10
consistent product designs, contacts, mechanism and be re-certified to the new Eaton’s factory qualified
while reducing initial control components can be higher levels by Eaton’s service engineers can inspect 10
installation costs. AR-Series easily inspected and minor factory qualified service existing low voltage metal-
breakers correctly interface maintenance (such as engineers. Many of the enclosed switchgear, 10
with compartment cell lubricating the mechanism) AR-Series breakers are including the existing breaker
can be easily accomplished. cubicles, line and load power
switches, and safety
interlocks are maintained Arc chutes can easily be
available to increase
interrupting capabilities stabs, load cables, and
10
or improved. removed with two bolts and while still maintaining the bus system to verify the
visually inspected or replaced. original circuit breaker application for a circuit 10
Solve Parts Availability By removing the arc chutes, dimensions. This provides breaker ampacity upgrade.
Problems for Old Breakers viewing the main contacts
along with their contact wear
a savings versus the cost Many of the AR-Series 10
Replacement parts for of replacing the switchgear. breakers are available
indicator results in a quick and
old breakers are becoming
simple decision to replace if
Cell-to-breaker coding with increased continuous
current ratings.
10
harder and harder to find systems are maintained or
as technology continually necessary. Spare parts corrected to comply with
advances. Parts availability inventory is considerably IEEE/ANSI standards.
10
issues are basically reduced because AR-Series
eliminated with AR-Series breakers use common parts 10
breakers. Mechanism parts throughout the entire product
and control components are line, including new Magnum
DS Switchgear assemblies.
10
current production items and
are in stock. Additionally,
AR-Series breakers use
For more information 10
on Magnum DS breaker
common components
across the product line.
elements, see
Volume 3, Tab 4.
10
This can save in future spare
parts investment. 10
Retrofit Services
Features Standards and Certifications

10 ● AR replacement breakers ● Installation savings and All AR-Series low voltage
are 100% rated, UL listed robust interface reduce power air circuit breakers are
10 (check factory), and built installation and designed and tested to meet
and tested in an ISO 9001 commissioning time with or exceed IEEE/ANSI C37.59-
10 and 14001 certified facility our unique design concept. 2002 standards. This ensures
● Safety: the cell door can No modifications required compatibility with existing
10 remain closed with the to the original line/load
power stabs or secondary
installations and IEEE/ANSI
application guidelines.
breaker in connect, test
disconnect contacts. IEEE/ANSI certification and
10 or disconnect position.
Simultaneously, the trip Modifications to the certified factory production
unit, open-close controls, original cubicle are often test reports are available.
10 and breaker nameplate eliminated with an easy-to-
data are all readily visible install cubicle adapter
10 ● Designed for easy access, (cassette). The cassette
inspection and minimal includes new extension
10 maintenance. The stored rails and levering-in
energy mechanism, control adapters, resulting in a
more robust breaker-to-
10 devices, accessories and
secondary contacts are cubicle interface. We also
easily accessible by provide a new door to
10 removing the front cover. match the replacement
The contact wear indicator breaker
10 eliminates the need for
Availability
elaborate testing to
10 determine if the contact Designs available for:
assembly needs replacing. ● Westinghouse
10 The arc chutes can also
be easily removed and
● General Electric
inspected ● Allis-Chalmers
10 ● Federal Pacific
● ITE/ABB
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Reconditioning Contents
Description Page
10
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit 10
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers. . . V3-T10-39 10
Reconditioning 10
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ 10
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . V3-T10-46 10
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum
Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50 10
MCC Replacement Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
10
10
10
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Reconditioning 10
Low voltage power circuit These breakers contain Additional common options Class 1 reconditioning of the
breakers are designed to insulation systems (600 Vac to low voltage power circuit low voltage power circuit 10
be serviceable devices over normal three-phase voltage or breakers include electric breaker is a cost-effective
a long service life. These less), conductors (from 225 to operation of the mechanism,
breakers and the associated over 5000A continuous), shunt trip and close coils for
method to restore all of the
breaker’s subsystems to full
10
switchgear have been a mechanism to open and remote operation of the functionality and prolong the
available in the industry for close the breaker, a trip breaker, undervoltage trip life of the breaker for many 10
over 50 years, and a large system to provide protection systems, and additional additional years.
installed base of equipment of the circuit and the circuit auxiliary switches for 10
by many manufacturers breaker, and an interruption annunciation and control Manufacturers
exists throughout the
United States and Canada.
system (arc chutes and schemes. Class 1 reconditioning is 10
contact structures) that can available for all major
handle fault currents as high Factors that affect the life
The low voltage switchgear is as 100,000A. of these circuit breaker
manufacturers’ low voltage
power circuit breakers that
10
essentially static. It consists subsystems include time,
have been produced over the
of structures, buswork, While some breakers are ambient temperature,
last 50 years. These breakers 10
control wiring and metering fixed mounted (bolted into the humidity, cleanliness of the
components. If periodically are rated at 600 Vac, 225 to
switchgear), the vast majority environment (contamination 10
cleaned, it will last almost 5000A continuous, 15,000 to
are drawout for ease of and corrosive elements),
indefinitely. 100,000A interrupting. The
inspection and maintenance number of normal load
of the breaker, as well as to operations, number of fault
manufacturers include, but 10
The low voltage power are not limited to:
provide maximum isolation current interruptions, load
breakers are the essential
elements of the switchgear.
of the load. These drawout current magnitude, and ● Westinghouse 10
breakers include primary maintenance cycle. ● Cutler-Hammer
They are required to properly
conduct the normal load
disconnects (for the three-
phase conductors), secondary While periodic maintenance, ● General Electric 10
current for the vast majority disconnects (for breaker cleaning, lubrication and ● ITE
of time, and still provide the control wiring), a levering-in testing of the circuit breaker ● ABB 10
means of interrupting an mechanism (to assist in the can and will prolong its life, ● Allis-Chalmers
overload or fault current insertion and withdrawal of at some point, the circuit
● Siemens
10
whenever it may occur. the breaker) and an interlock breaker must either be
completely reconditioned Square D
system (to ensure that a
or replaced. Failure or mis-
●
10
closed breaker cannot be ● Federal Pacific
operation of any of the
inserted or withdrawn from
the connected position). breaker’s subsystems will
● Federal Pioneer 10
render it to be ineffective
for its intended purpose and 10
dangerous for personnel or
downstream equipment. 10
10
Retrofit Services
Advantages Quality Control and Preliminary Testing Centralized Database

10 Eaton’s Electrical Sector National Standards and Inspection The results of all the above
is the world leader in low All reconditioning will be The breaker will be manually tests and measurements shall
10 voltage power circuit conducted under the and/or electrically operated. be entered into the Eaton
breaker and trip systems direction of a quality control The following tests will be centralized database.
10 technology. EESS is uniquely and reconditioning standard,
pursuant to ISO® 9001
performed.
positioned to provide Class 1 Breaker Disassembly, Cleaning
certification. A quality
● All breakers: and Preparation
reconditioning of low voltage
10 power circuit breakers. certificate will document the ● Each primary pole ● The circuit breaker will be
progress of each breaker insulator will be tested completely disassembled
10 All Class 1 reconditioning is through the reconditioning for dielectric integrity to its component parts. All
done at facilities dedicated process. Eaton has multiple by applying 1000 Vdc parts will be inspected for
10 to the purpose. These are
known as Aftermarket
locations (minimum of five) between each
conductor and ground
wear and physical damage
strategically located ● All heavily carbonized
Centers of Excellence (ACEs). and between line
10 These facilities utilize state-
throughout North America
that share best practices of and load
components will be
of-the-art equipment in cleaned and degreased in a
reconditioning and work to a ● With the breaker closed,
10 cleaning, plating, assembly consistent national standard. the contact resistance
Vaque® Wet Blast System
to produce a smooth finish
and testing of the breakers. They utilize the same task- using a 10 ampere without degrading the
10 Each facility utilizes identical specific equipment for conductor will be component’s surface
standards and procedures in cleaning and testing at all measured
the reconditioning process. ● All current carrying parts,
10 The reconditioned breakers
locations to ensure the quality ● Measure the trip bar main/arcing contacts,
of the product. force using a force
are tested to the same ground contacts and
10 standards as new production Receiving and Data Collection
gauge primary disconnects will
breakers. The breaker test ● Measure the trip button/ be cleaned, burnished
Upon receipt at the
10 results are stored in a North reconditioning center, the
actuator device force
using a force gauge
and polished in a TOREX®
American database (Pow-R vibratory system loaded
following process will be with a medium specifically
10 Test), facilitating predictive
maintenance and trending.
performed on each breaker.
● Verify continuity of
current limiting fuses (if designed to clean silver
All manufacturers’ breaker Assign a unique job and equipped) and measure plating. Dry blasting or
10 information is stored in our
●
breaker identification the resistance using a 10 other abrasive cleaning

Pow-R Master Database number ampere conductor; systems that can remove
10 and available to every ACE ● Record all nameplate data, check blown fuse silver plating or distort the
performing the work. Breaker customer identification, indicators’ integrity contacts’ surfaces will not
10 trip systems are upgraded to existing trip settings, and ● Verify overcurrent trip be used
the latest Digitrip technology, all numbers unique to each device operation via ● All pole piece moldings and
10 the same trip system used
in new production DS and
breaker by direct entry into primary injection (not insulating components will
be cleaned in a Giant™
a national computer required if a trip unit
SPB breakers. Original retrofit is to be installed) ceramic polisher that
10 OEM replacement parts are
database archive for future
use and retrieval ● Additional tests for cleans and polishes the
exclusively used to replace Electrically Operated components surface
If electrically operated,
10 broken, out of specification
●
record all accessories Breakers: without scratching

or missing components.
included on the circuit ● Charge the breaker;
10 breaker, as well as the close and trip electrically
close, trip and charge volts. ● Verify undervoltage,
10 The latest copy of the pickup and dropout (if
customer’s control equipped)
10 schematic will be obtained
prior to disassembly and/or
● Check auxiliary switch
operation and condition
test. Eaton will have the
10 capability of retrieving
control schematics for the
10 breakers it manufactured
● The circuit breaker will be
10 inspected for physical
damage. Parts that need to
10 be replaced will be
recorded. A quotation will
10 be issued to the customer
for replacement of the
defective part(s)
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
● After cleaning, each ● Arc chutes will be hand- Circuit Breaker Reassembly ● Install all electrical
component shall be dried wiped and cleaned with a and Adjustment will Include: components and secure 10
to obtain 1000 megohms clean dry cloth. They will ● The circuit breaker frame wiring harness (if
when megger tested at be megger tested at 1000 will be reassembled using applicable) 10
1000 Vdc. They will be Vdc. If the megger value is new yellow zinc dichromate ● Align the contacts for
sealed with a dielectric
grade sealant
less than 1000 megohms,
the arc chute assembly will
plated hardware proper surface wipe and 10
● A database of instruction mating. Perform a contact
All heavily soiled and/or be dried and retested. If the wipe test. Verify that the
●
greasy items including retest value is greater than

books that list the original
manufacturer’s information percent contact wipe and
10
mechanisms will be initially 1000 megohms, then arc on recommended the wipe width are per the
cleaned in a non-abrasive chute surface will be sealed lubricants. When the original manufacturer’s 10
agitator filled with a with the manufacturer’s recommended lubricants information
biodegradable cleaning recommended dielectric are no longer available or ● Adjust the main contacts 10
solution capable of grade clear sealant. If the have been changed, the for proper gap, pressure
retest value is still less
degreasing, de-scaling
and de-burring without than 1000 megohms,
reconditioner’s new and contact resistance, 10
breaker design group may and adjust arcing contacts
degrading the components then the arc chute will analyze and recommend
surface and without the be replaced newer, high technology
for proper gap per the
original manufacturer’s
10
introduction or embedding ● Charging motor (if so lubricants as a substitute information
of grit or other abrasive equipped) will be removed. ● The operating mechanism ● Install new Eaton Digitrip
10
materials The drive shaft bushings will be reassembled, microprocessor trip system
● All frames will be stripped will be inspected and lubricated and reinstalled where specified 10
to bare metal in replaced if worn. The on the circuit breaker ● When a new trip device is
preparation for plating motor will be cleaned and
reconditioned. All ratchet
frame added to the breaker or 10
● After cleaning, all ferrous ● Reassemble and install the when changes are made to
pawls and springs will be
metal frames, mechanism
inspected and replaced or
main and arcing contact the original mechanism or 10
parts and linkages will be components, and lubricate arc interruption system, an
yellow zinc dichromate repaired if necessary.
plated to provide superior ● Gearbox (if equipped) will
as recommended by the
original manufacturer’s
additional nameplate shall
be installed in accordance
10
rust resistance to exposed be removed, disassembled information with IEEE/ANSI C37.59-
and hidden surfaces. and fully inspected. Any ● Reassemble, lubricate, 1996 Section 8.3 and shall 10
Painting of covers, handles defective or leaking include the unique serial/
install and align the racking
and indicators will be done components will be
repaired and cleaned
mechanism and the identification number 10
● A detailed inspection will electrical and/or
be performed of all mechanical charging 10
mechanism components mechanism (if applicable)
and linkages to detect
stress fractures and
10
excessive wear that can
cause premature failure. 10
Magnification will be used
on small components if 10
necessary
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services

10 The retrofitted breaker will direct output of the test 3. 1000 Vac for new or Interlock and Cell Interface
be designed, manufactured, results to a printer or storage reconditioned motors. Verify the functional
10 applied, installed and device. The applicable tests operation of all circuit breaker
certification tested in will be performed. 4. 500 Vac momentary
for control devices and interlocks and cell interfaces
10 accordance with the latest
● Long-time-delay-element circuitry operating at in a cell structure, preferably
applicable sections of: a cell in the reconditioner’s
pickup 80 Vac rms (110 Vdc)
10 ● IEEE/ANSI C37.13 ● Short-time-delay-element or less that are not facility.
● IEEE/ANSI C37.16 pickup connected directly to the
Test Position Dielectric
10 ● IEEE/ANSI C37.17 ● Instantaneous-element primary circuit or external, Withstand (UL Listed
pickup secondary control circuits. Breakers Only)
● IEEE/ANSI C37.50
10 ● IEEE/ANSI C37.59-1996 ● Time delay of long-time- 5. Twice rated voltage Original UL listed breakers
delay-element plus 1000 Vac for will have their dielectric
IEEE/ANSI C37.100
10 ●
● UL 1066 (For originally UL

● Time delay of short-time- undervoltage trip devices withstand verified by placing
delay-element operating at a voltage the breaker in the test
listed and labeled designs)
10 ● Ground-element pickup above 250 Vac. position, closing the breaker,
and applying 2200 Vac across
Test Procedures ● Time delay of the ground No-Load Operation Test the cell’s primary conductors
10 General Production Testing
element
Perform no-load operation for 1 minute. No dielectric
test per IEEE/ANSI breakdown shall occur.
10 Each reconditioned low
voltage power circuit breaker
Control, Secondary Wiring
C37.50.6.5.1 (for electrically
and Devices Check Test Open-Fuse Trip Device
will be tested to the applicable operated breakers).
10 sections of IEEE/ANSI C37.50
Perform control, secondary
wiring and devices checks
(If Included)
● Five closing and five Test the trip device
Section 6 and UL 1066 if the per IEEE/ANSI C37.50.6.3 opening operations at
10 breaker was originally UL to verify that all connections minimum control voltage
mechanically or by application
of proper voltage to the device
labeled. The testing will are correct per the wiring ● Five closing, five opening to establish positive tripping of
10 include, but not be limited to: diagram. Those circuits for and five trip-free operations the fused circuit breaker.
● Measuring and recording which operation or testing is at maximum control voltage
10 trip bar force not feasible will be checked ● Two operations to check Undervoltage Test
for continuity. The undervoltage device
● Setting of the antipumping, which will be
10 microprocessor trip
Dielectric Withstand Tests performed in the following will be tested for pickup and
● Performing control and manner: dropout voltages.
Perform dielectric withstand
10 secondary wiring and
tests per IEEE/ANSI
● Apply uninterrupted
Breaker Data History
device check tests control power to the
C37.50.6.4. The applied test
10 ● Performing dielectric voltages will be essentially closing circuit of the All breaker information,
unique identification number,
withstand tests sinusoidal (within 20% of the open circuit breaker
as the closing signal and Eaton test results
10 ● Performing no-load rated frequency of the circuit
● Trip the circuit breaker; shall be recorded on the
operations tests breaker being tested) and
the circuit to remain reconditioner test form
10 ● Verifying interlock and will have a minimum crest
value equal to 1.414 times open until closing and in the Eaton centralized
cell interface database to track each breaker
the specified test voltage circuit power has
10 ● Test position dielectric
potentials. The potential been interrupted and for predictive maintenance. A
withstand (original UL then restored copy of the test form, with
labeled breakers only) will be increased gradually the test results and a quality
10 from zero so as to reach the ● Check all other devices, certificate, shall be delivered
Trip Bar Force Measurement required test value in 5 to both electrical and with each circuit breaker.
10 Measure and record the circuit
10 seconds, and will be held mechanical, for proper
at that value for 1 minute, operation Warranty
breaker’s trip bar force.
10 except for the momentary
control voltages (listed in Perform no-load operation Each Class 1 reconditioned
Microprocessor Trip tests per IEEE/ANSI low voltage power circuit
number 4 below). The
10 Device Setting
following test values C37.50.6.5.2 (for manually breaker will include Eaton’s
Direct-acting trip devices are applied to Class 1 operated breakers): 2-year warranty.
10 will be tested/calibrated to
determine their conformance
reconditioned low voltage ● Five closing and five
power circuit breakers. opening operations
to published trip characteristic
10 curves. Each breaker will be 1. 2200 Vac for the primary ● When shunt trip is used, a
primary injection tested using circuit of a completely minimum of five openings
10 a sinusoidal-wave-shape, assembled circuit breaker. using the shunt trip at the
single-phase 60 Hz current minimum control voltage
2. 1500 Vac for secondary
10 at a convenient voltage. The
control wiring and control
specified for the coil
primary injection test device ● Five trip-free operations
will be computer controlled to devices, including
10 ensure accuracy in the applied current sensors and
● Check all other devices
magnetic latch, except for proper mechanical
currents. The primary injection operation
10 test device will be capable of (3), (4) and (5).
Retrofit Services
10.5
ARMS Conversions Contents
Description Page
10
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit 10
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers. . . V3-T10-39 10
Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41 10
Conversions 10
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . . V3-T10-46
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum 10
Starter Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
MCC Replacement Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52 10
10
10
10
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System™ Conversions 10
Product Description Features, Benefits 10
A circuit breaker equipped and Functions
with an Arcflash Reduction ● Increases worker safety 10
Maintenance System retrofit by limiting exposure to
can improve safety by
providing the worker with a
arc flash energy 10
● Extremely easy to use
simple and reliable method to
reduce fault clearing time. A
● Enabled with the circuit 10
breaker door closed by a
lockable switch that can be
door-mounted lockable
incorporated into a Lock Out
switch (no special
10
Tag Out (LOTO) procedure
PPE required)
controls the Arcflash
Reduction Maintenance ● Used only for the time
10
System. Workers can easily required to perform the
create and control fast work and is not enabled 10
tripping time at the work continuously
location by using this new ● Preserves overcurrent 10
solution. Work locations coordination under
downstream of a circuit normal conditions 10
breaker with this retrofit ● Reduces the arc flash
can have a significantly
lower incident energy level.
hazard level for the time 10
to perform the work task
The Arcflash Reduction
Maintenance System can
● Improves worker comfort
and mobility via reduction
10
be applied to any retrofitted in incident energy levels
low voltage power breaker that may permit reduced
10
by modifying an existing levels of PPE
Digitrip trip unit or retrofitting 10
a breaker with a Digitrip
retrofit kit.
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
Retrofit Kits Contents

10 Description Page
10 Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
10 AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers . . V3-T10-39
10 Reconditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41
10 Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits
10 Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-47
Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-49
10 Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-49
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum
10 Starter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
MCC Replacement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
10
10
10 Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits
10 Application Ratings
Eaton’s Digitrip RMS retrofit Digitrip RMS retrofit kits are EM trip units were initially used conditions. They caused
kits are fully engineered, field available for a wide variety of in the early 1950s and phased nuisance tripping and
10 installable retrofit kits that both Eaton and non-Eaton out by all manufacturers in the unnecessary downtime.
enable the user to completely low voltage power breaker mid-1970s. EM trip units were
10 replace an existing tripping frames. Ratings range from composed of a solenoid, True rms trip units enable
system. They are applicable 100 to 4000A. Digitrip retrofit springs, a diaphragm, seals and the measuring of current
10 to (600 Vac) low voltage kits provide the user with air venting apertures. Three rather than the sensing
of current. Since they are
power breakers and are adaptive flexibility due to trip units were required per
microprocessor-based digital
10 designed for application
on both Eaton power
multi-tapped current sensors
and interchangeable rating
breaker. Due to age or harsh
environments, these devices devices, they are capable of
breakers and non-Eaton plugs and programmable would fail or lose calibration. taking discrete samples of
10 power breakers. pickup and time delay They required a great deal of the current waveform in
settings. preventive maintenance. each phase. By applying a
10 Digitrip RMS retrofit kits mathematical algorithm,
provide true rms sensing, the History and Technology Peak sensing trip units the current is accurately
most accurate and current were an improvement and mapped out and measured.
10 state-of-the-art technology for
In the past, there have been
provided improved reliability This method of measurement
three types of automatic
measuring amperage loads. and accuracy. Only one provides the ability to adapt
10 True rms sensing removes the
control for low voltage power
trip unit was required per to a changing harmonic
breakers. Electromechanical
possibility of false tripping due breaker; however, peak content while providing
(EM) trip units, solid-state
10 to harmonic distortion of the
peak sensing trip units, and
sensing trip units were not repeatable and reliable
power waveform and enables able to handle harmonic protection.
state-of-the-art true rms
10 greater accuracy in selective
coordination of the power
sensing trip units.
distribution system. The
10 microprocessor-based Digitrip
trip unit also allows
10 communications for remote
monitoring to a host computer
10 or local AEM via the
PowerNet communication
10 system.
10
10
Kit Components
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
Features
Digitrip retrofit kits come Trip Functions Application and Availability
10
in several different model All Digitrip RMS retrofit kit Service Condition Digitrip retrofit kits are
types. Among these types, types are available with the In order to ensure that currently available for select 10
they provide a variety of necessary combinations of Digitrip RMS retrofit kits breaker frames for the
accommodating features long, short, instantaneous are successfully applied, following manufacturers: 10
(see Kit Type table on and ground fault (LSIG) installation must only be
● Eaton
Page V3-T10-48). modes of protection as done by a qualified individual.
Appropriate testing must ● Westinghouse
10
True rms measurement depicted and deemed
necessary by industry be performed to qualify the
and protection. Extremely
standards. retrofitted breaker prior to
● General Electric 10
accurate and able to ● ITE
placing the breaker in service.
accommodate harmonic
content and disturbances.
The combinations of modes Digitrip RMS retrofit kits
● Allis-Chalmers 10
of protection are: will provide protection in ● Federal Pacific
Ground fault protection ● LI accordance with their ● Roller Smith 10
may be added to an existing published time-current ● Siemens-Allis
● LS
power breaker. Ground
● LSI
characteristic curves and in
accordance with the original
10
fault protection is offered Additional Offerings
in a three-wire and a four- ● LIG breaker manufacturers
wire version. ● LSG specifications on breakers
● Retrofit kits using
OPTIM™ 750 and 1050 trip
10
LSIG that have been properly units are available for use
Zone interlocking is available
●
maintained and operate in on DS breakers
10
on the short time and ground accordance with the original
The Packaged Kit
fault modes of protection.
This enables enhanced Each Digitrip RMS retrofit
manufacturer’s operating 10
instructions.
selectivity for high fault and kit includes a Digitrip trip unit,
ground fault coordination an auxiliary CT module, a Service Life
10
between the main and feeder Direct Trip Actuator (DTA),
The physical structure, the
breakers. quantity (three or four)
bus assemblies and control 10
current sensors, a rating
Local monitoring via a plug, interconnecting wiring wiring of switchgear are
display. A red LED display harnesses, mounting normally in good condition. 10
enables the user to step brackets, copper connectors The replacement of the trip
through and read currents (when required), hardware system coupled along with 10
and energy readings for and installation instructions. either refurbishment or
each phase and ground. Digitrip RMS retrofit kits are reconditioning of the breaker
will prolong the life of the
10
complete tripping systems
Communications via switchgear and provide
the PowerNet system.
specifically engineered for
modern state-of-the-art 10
each breaker type and frame
This allows all pertinent protection.
rating. All kits are designed
information, regarding static
for field installation.
10
and dynamic operation of
the breaker, to be remotely
monitored either by a host
10
computer or local display
monitor. This facilitates 10
energy management and
power management. 10
Remember: “If you can't
measure it, you can't 10
manage it.”
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Breaker 10
10
Retrofit Services
Kit Type
10 RMS RMS RMS RMS RMS
Digitrip Kit Features 510 510 Zone 610 810 910
10 Cause of trip LED indicators ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
■ ■ ■ ■ ■
10 Integral self test
Trip reset button ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
10 Thermal memory hardware driven — — — — —
Thermal memory software driven selectable (on/off) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
10 Discriminator circuit on LS and LSG protection modes — — — — —
Discriminator circuit on LS and LSG protection modes selectable (on/off) ■ ■ ■ ■ ■
10 Zone protective interlocking for short-time and ground fault modes of protection — ■ ■ ■ ■
10 Auxiliary contact for long time, short-circuit and ground fault functions — ■ ■ ■ ■
Local display of phase currents — — ■ ■ ■
10 Local display of ground currents — — ■ ■ ■
Local display of cause of trip — — ■ ■ ■
10 ■ ■
Local display of energy (MWh) — — —
10 Local display of peak demand (MW) — — — ■ ■
Local display of present demand (MW) — — — ■ ■
10 Communication with PowerNet communicated data includes: — — — ■ ■
All display values
10 Trip unit status
High load alarm
Cause of trip
10 Rating plug status
Breaker status
Reason for breaker status
10 Trip settings — — — ■ ■
10 Power factor — — — ■ ■
Control via the PowerNet system (open/close) — — — ■ ■
10 Voltage phase-to-phase, displayed on trip unit and communicated via PowerNet communication — — — — ■
Total current harmonic distortion (THD); phase A, B, C. Displayed on trip unit and communicated via — — — — ■
10 PowerNet communication
Total current harmonic distortion per harmonic from the 2nd through the 27th harmonic displayed on trip — — — — ■
10 unit and communicated via PowerNet communication
System power factor. Displayed on trip unit and communicated via PowerNet communication — — — — ■
10 Waveform analysis data to PowerNet computer — — — — ■
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
Reference Information Product Selection
Sales Brochure for 10
Digitrip RMS Retrofit Customer Required Information
Kits: B.22D.01.S.E In order to obtain the proper 10
kit, the following information
Instructions for the
Application of Digitrip RMS
should be provided to Eaton: 10
Retrofit Kits on Power Circuit ● Breaker nameplate
Breakers: AD 33-855- 4 information: 10
● Manufacturer
Digitrip RMS 510
Trip Unit: IL 29-885-B ● Breaker type 10
● Ampere frame size
Digitrip RMS 610 ● Manually or electrically
10
Trip Unit: IL 29-886-A
operated
Digitrip RMS 810 ● Drawout or fixed mounting 10
Trip Unit: IL 29-888-A ● Fused or non-fused
Digitrip RMS 910 ● Digitrip trip unit type
10
Trip Unit: IL 29-889-A required: 510, 610, 810, 910
● Protective functions
10
Time Current Curves
required: LI, LSI, LS, LIG,
for DS and DSL Circuit
LSG, LSIG 10
Breakers: AD 32-870
● Continuous current rating
Retrofit Kit Product Guide required (trip rating of 10
call 1-800-937-5487: breaker)
Doc. #9375487 ● Three-wire or four-wire 10
Illustrates catalog number system (determines
system for each engineered number of sensors 10
kit: Volume 12, Aftermarket, required)
Renewal Parts and Life To properly select options, 10
Extension Solutions. the following questions need
to be answered: 10
● Will customer supply
120 Vac control power or 10
is breaker-mounted CPT
needed? Applies only to 10
Digitrip 610, 810 and 910
● Are zone interlocks 10
required?
● Does the application 10
require relay outputs from
the Digitrip 610, 810 or 910
for remote indication?
10
Does the breaker have an
●
existing Amptector or
10
Digitrip trip unit installed?
If so, what is it? 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
DB-25 LV-VSR Contents

10 Description Page
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
10 Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . V3-T10-46
10 Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter
Replacement
10 Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-51
MCC Replacement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
10
10
10
10 Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement
10 General Description Features
Eaton’s low voltage VSR
10 is a self-contained vacuum Advantages Series Current Limiting Fuses
starter replacement for a low The use of an LV-VSR The integral, solid-state, trip Class J current limiting fuses
voltage drawout air circuit vacuum starter can prolong units used on the air circuit provide short-circuit
10 breaker used for motor device life and significantly breakers are designed protection and allow a
starting applications. reduce maintenance repair primarily for cable and combination rating of
10 and downtime. transformer protection. 100 kA at 480 or 600V.
In some cases, LV air circuit Motors require more precisely
10 breakers are used for motor
starting applications. Air
A low voltage air circuit
breaker has an effective life
set overcurrent devices that C440 Electronic Overload Relay
prevent motor damage as well Eaton’s C440 multi-function
circuit breakers are not of 4000 operations while an
10 designed to withstand the LV-VSR vacuum starter has
as avoiding nuisance tripping.
A solid-state relay, Eaton
electronic, motor protection
relay provides the following
frequent switching service an effective life of 1,000,000 Type C440, provides
10 and mechanical stresses operations. For example, a overload protection and
features:
associated with repetitive motor starting application that phase unbalance protection. ● Overload protection,
10 motor starting duty. This is required two starts per hour This relay was exclusively Class 10A, 10, 20 or 30
due to the breaker mechanism on continuous duty would designed for motor protection. ● Phase unbalance
that must be designed to require a major rebuild of
10 close and latch against a the LV breaker within three
protection, selectable
Motor Starter (ON/OFF)
fault. In order to meet these months. The expected life of
10 requirements, the mechanism an LV-VSR vacuum starter
The LV-VSR consists of ● Ground fault selectable
an Eaton V201 vacuum (ON/OFF)
must close at high speeds would be over 50 years.
contactor, Class J current
10 with a great deal of force.
The LV-VSR vacuum starter limiting fuses, multi-function
● Remote reset
Frequent closing operations ● Alarm relay output contact
uses state-of-the-art Eaton motor protective relay,
10 stress and deteriorate the
breaker mechanisms. vacuum interrupters. The three current transformers
● LED status indication
interrupters employ the and an integral control ● Communication modules
10 Eaton’s LV-VSR is a self- latest vacuum technology power transformer. ● Modbus RTU RS-485
contained replacement with long life, resistance to ● DeviceNet with IO
10 vacuum starter for an LV environmental contaminants, Vacuum Contactor ● PROFIBUS with IO
drawout air circuit breaker. and positive contact wear Eaton’s V201 vacuum
The LV-VSR is interchangeable indicators. contactor is designed for
10 with the drawout breaker starting and controlling
element and requires no three-phase, 50/60 Hz AC
10 cell modifications. motors. Current interruption
is contained within the
10 vacuum bottles and no arc
byproducts are vented to
10 the outside environment.
Contact condition is given
by wear indicators.
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
VSR Designs Safety Features LV-VSR Control Features Technical Data and
● Westinghouse DS The LV-VSR vacuum starter LV-VSR vacuum starter offers Specifications 10
● GE retains all the safety features the following standard control
● ITE of the LV switchgear including: features. Other devices can Ratings 10
be supplied on request. The LV-VSR vacuum starter is
● and others ● Racking the LV-VSR
vacuum starter is ● Start-stop pushbuttons
rated as follows: 10
Contact EESS at 877-276-9379 prevented while the and run pilot light ● Maximum continuous
for more details. contactor is in the closed ● Eaton C440 electronic current—425A 10
position. Closing the overload relay ● Maximum voltage
Life
Exceptional electrical and
LV-VSR vacuum starter is ● 2A/2B auxiliary contact rating—600V 10
prevented while racking
mechanical life is offered ● 1A/1B trip contact ● Short-circuit rating at
by the V201 contactor—
● Breaker position indication (overload or short circuit) 240–600V 200 kA 10
is provided (connected,
up to 1,000,000 electrical test, disconnect, remove)
● Provision for remote ● Maximum motor hp at
operations and 2,500,000 control operation 480V 235 hp 10
mechanical operations, even
● The LV-VSR vacuum starter
is padlockable (optional) in
● Integral control power ● Maximum motor hp at
under harsh conditions.
either the connect, test or transformer 240V 117 hp 10
disconnect positions ● Custom designed wiring ● Maximum motor hp at
Drawout Capability
The LV-VSR is mounted on a
● Positive ground connection schemes 600V 294 hp 10
drawout frame and maintains is maintained
the safety interlocking ● Closed door tripping
Ease of Maintenance 10
The LV-VSR control
system of the LV switchgear. ● Closed-door control, if
existing, can be maintained
components are front
mounted for easy access.
10
Ease of Installation
The LV-VSR may be inserted The LV-VSR uses the 10
into a standard breaker same line and load finger
compartment without clusters, secondary contact 10
modification to the assemblies and drawout
compartment. The primary mechanism as the original
and secondary contact circuit breaker. Renewal
10
structures and drawout parts are readily available.
mechanism are identical. 10
The LV-VSR control scheme
will interface with standard 10
switchgear wiring with no cell
modifications and remote
control schemes, if existing,
10
are maintained.
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
ITE 5600 Series Motor Control Center Replacement Unit Contents

10 Description Page
Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
10 Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits . . . V3-T10-46
10 Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum
Starter Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
10 MCC Replacement Units
10 Product Selection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-54
10
10
10 MCC Replacement Units
10 General Description Features
Eaton’s motor control center Complete replacement
10 (MCC) replacement units of the MCC involves costly Brand New Replacement Unit— Solve Parts Availability
are newly manufactured, demolition, removal and Not a Retrofit Problems for Old
All motor control units, Unsupported Products
UL labeled units designed for re-installation. Downtime
10 easy installation into existing is extensive. The MCC removable or fixed mounted, We can also provide
MCCs. We manufacture units assembly often is in good are assembled with Eaton additional inventory reduction
10 to fit into Westinghouse, condition since there is very components of proven for the customer by using
Cutler-Hammer and other little deterioration of the safety, quality and reliability. components, such as
10 manufacturers such as GE, enclosure, the bus or the All components are wired in starters, which are currently
Square D and ITE. control wiring with normal accordance with NEMA and being used in other Eaton
UL 845 standards. MCCs. Unit starter types
10 Replacement units allow
maintenance and proper
include many options
installation.
new starters and feeders Eaton has specifically including: Freedom, A200
10 to be added to existing Replacement units are designed bus stabs to form and Soft Start. Additional
motor control centers to newly manufactured and a standardization plug-in cell modifications include solid-
10 replace defective units or have no used or fatigued that meets the highest safety
standards. These units fit into
state overloads,
to upgrade units. parts. Because they can be communication possibilities
manufactured to existing the existing space of the
10 Advantages wiring diagrams, the customer’s original MCC.
and several cover control
options.
Motor starters are used in installation time is minimal.
10 applications where continuous Only the power connections HMCP, HFD, HJD, HKD
operation and frequent and those wiring terminations breakers and 10250T series
10 opening and closing are external to the MCC are pilot devices will provide
required. These conditions required to be disconnected the customer with standard
features and current product
10 lead to eventual mechanical and reconnected. The
replacement unit to adequately maintain their
failure of contactors despite
interchanges with the MCCs for many years
10 best maintenance efforts.
existing unit without field to come.
Replacement MCC units are modifications. Downtime is For additional information,
10 the most time-efficient and significantly reduced. contact 1-800-OLD-UNIT
cost-effective way to restore
or your local Eaton
10 the original assembly to
operational condition. Service Center.
10
10
10
10
Retrofit Services
10.5
New Stab Design
● Tin-plated clip surface 10
● Spring clip for extra
pressure 10
● Sufficient insulating surface
10
10
Eaton FlashGard® F2100 Replacement Starter Unit Advantage Replacement Starter Unit
(2008 to Present) (1995 to Present) (1992 to Present) 10
Eaton Designed Stabs
10
Unit Features
● Holes for top and bottom 10
incoming line
● Self-aligning stab to bus 10
● Door device panel
● Knockout for terminal blocks 10
F-10 Unitrol Replacement Starter Unit Freedom Unitrol Replacement Starter 9800 Unitrol Replacement Starter Unit
(1972 to 1989) Unit (1988 to 1994) (1956 to 1974) 10
10
10
10
10
11-300 Replacement Starter Unit Type W Replacement Starter Unit 5-Star/Series 2100 Replacement
Side Item Stab
(1935 to 1965) (1965 to 1975) Starter Unit (1975 to 1995) 10
Door Features
● Door latch—1/4 turn 10
● Door hinge opens farther UL 845 Eaton MCC Aftermarket Units
Name Brand MCC Vintage Type 10
Westinghouse 11-300 1935 to 1965
Cutler-Hammer 9800 Unitrol 1956 to 1974
10
ITE 5600 Series 1957 to 1976
10
Gould 5600 Series 1957 to 1976
Telemecanique 5600 Series 1957 to 1976 10
Door Latch Closed Westinghouse Type W 1965 to 1975
Unit Features Cutler-Hammer F10 Unitrol 1972 to 1989 10
● Easy lock-out handle Westinghouse 5 Star 1975 to 1986
mechanism Cutler-Hammer Freedom Unitrol 1989 to 1994
10
● Easy lock-in bucket tabs
● HMCP/HFD breakers
Westinghouse 2100 Series 1 1986 to 1995 10
Westinghouse Advantage™ 1 1991 to present
65k rated
● Additional ground clip Cutler-Hammer Freedom 2100 1 1995 to present 10
● 10250T series cover Cutler-Hammer IT. MCC 2002 to present
controls GE 7700/8000 1975 to present 10
Allen-Bradley Centerline 1971 to present
Square D Model 6 1992 to present
10
Siemens/Furnas 89 Series 89 1979 to 2001 10
Eaton IT. FlashGard 2006 to present
Eaton Freedom FlashGard 2007 to present 10
Note
1 FlashGard replacement units available.
10
10
Retrofit Services

10
Designed and Tested to
10 NEMA/UL Standards
Eaton MCC replacement
10 units have passed all UL
required short-circuit and
heat tests. This high standard
10 of testing is important to
provide confidence to our
10 customers that UL 845 units
mean something for the
10 upkeep of their equipment.
10
10
10 Product Selection
Availability Communication Capability
10 Replacement units are Eaton’s MCC communication
available for all MCCs solutions include DeviceNet,
10 manufactured by Eaton, EtherNet/IP, Modbus RTU,
Cutler-Hammer or Modbus TCP, PROFIBUS,
10 Westinghouse. Units are and Web interface using
available as follows: Eaton’s Power Xpert®
10 Eaton:
Architecture.
Information Required
10 ● F2100: 1995 to present
In order to obtain the
● Freedom Unitro:
proper replacement unit,
10 1988 to 1994
the following information
● F-10 Unitrol: 1972 to 1989
should be provided to Eaton:
10 ● 9800 Unitrol: 1956 to 1974
● MCC manufacturer
Westinghouse:
10 ● MCC type
● Advantage: 1992 to present ● Required starter hp rating
10 ● Series 2100: 1987 to 1995 ● Type of starter (i.e., FVNR,
● 5 Star: 1975 to 1987 FVR, 2S2W, etc.)
10 ● Type W: 1965 to 1975 ● Desired protective features
● 11-300: 1935 to 1965 ● Desired control devices
10 All replacement units utilize ● Desired control scheme
Eaton HMCP motor circuit
10 protectors allowing the units
to be UL 508 combination
rated 65 kA. The units can
10 be supplied with either
Freedom, Advantage,
10 A200 or Citation starters.
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Performance-Based Maintenance Services
10.6
Contents
Description
10
Performance-Based Maintenance Services 10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Performance-Based Maintenance Services 10
General Description Performance-Based Maintenance (PBM) Program 10
Approximately 80 percent of Under pressure to deliver Eaton offers Performance- It is easy to get started
all equipment failures occur on ever higher levels of Based Maintenance (PBM) on Performance-Based 10
a random basis and are not availability, facilities solutions that fit various Maintenance program.
age-related. Certainly, a well- managers are looking for a project needs, for single sites EESS engineers visit your
designed, time-based better way. An optimal or multiple sites, and a full facility and perform a
10
preventive maintenance maintenance program would: range of equipment types. comprehensive site audit
program can reduce failure This maintenance strategy and needs assessment. 10
rates, but what about these
● Enable you to schedule actually integrates four While implementing
80 percent of equipment maintenance based on
actual device operation
proven maintenance electrical system testing 10
failures that occur on no programs to deliver and maintenance, EESS
history, rather than
timetable? You could increase
the rate of preventive arbitrary calendar dates
quantifiable results at a
guaranteed price:
engineers review both the
“condition” and “criticality”
10
maintenance activities, but ● Eliminate unnecessary of each component with plant
that is no panacea. These maintenance work and ● The Planned personnel. The condition is
10
maintenance activities tend to related production outages Maintenance Module determined via traditional
be invasive, introducing new ● Reduce spare parts addresses operational preventive maintenance 10
defects that can actually requirements due to performance, as-left procedures (industry-
conditions, environmental
increase failure rates. increased accuracy of
considerations, and testing
standard, time-based) 10
equipment history combined with predictive
and calibration results
● Reduce overall ● The Predictive Diagnostic
diagnostic technologies. The
criticality rating of each
10
maintenance costs
Module focuses on visual component is established
You can achieve these results observations, through application of a 10
by having Eaton apply environmental and thermal reliability-centered
predictive analytic conditions, and predictive 10
maintenance approach, taking
technologies to the indicator results into account its potential
maintenance program. The
result is a strategy that Eaton
● The Reliability-Centered impact on critical processes, 10
Maintenance Module safety and the environment.
calls “Performance-Based
Then, EESS engineers
Maintenance.” Services are concentrates on the
potential for injuries, recommend a maintenance
10
scheduled and performed
environmental hazards and interval (short-, mid- or long-
based on actual device
product losses or process term) for each component, as 10
operating history, not on
interruptions well as work scopes and
arbitrary calendar dates. This
knowledge-based approach ● The Periodic periodic observation 10
Observations Module frequency.
reduces maintenance time,
cost and spare parts centers on equipment 10
requirements. loading, and visual and
environmental
observations
10
10
Performance-Based Maintenance Services
You save money when this Elements of a Performance- Our knowledge management
10 analysis reveals an Based Maintenance Program practices—when applied to
opportunity to lengthen ● Site audit and maintenance optimize the maintenance
10 maintenance interviews or needs assessment program—reduce the
reduce the scope of ● Condition-based potential for outages by
10 maintenance work performed
during scheduled outages.
maintenance predicting equipment failure
or system problems,
● Reliability-centered
You improve uptime and decrease the duration of
10 reliability when this analysis
maintenance (RCM)
outages by providing 24/7
reveals components on ● Predictive diagnostics remote troubleshooting, and
10 which preventive ● Efficient algorithms to reduce operating and
maintenance should be integrate equipment maintenance costs by basing
10 performed more frequently. condition results, RCM
input, predictive
service on real-time
You can increase reliability equipment information rather
even more by redirecting diagnostics and periodic than arbitrary timelines. The
10 some of your cost savings observations bottom-line is more effective
into additional predictive ● Recommendations for maintenance service at
10 diagnostics and equipment immediate action, lower cost.
modernization. EESS delivers automation, remote
10 a periodic scorecard to plant monitoring, life extension,
personnel, summarizing spare parts or upgrading
10 the recommendations,
performance and results
● Periodic observations while
energized and operating
of the program.
10 ● Maintenance implemented
based on equipment
10 condition and criticality
● Root-cause failure analysis
10 ● Periodic scorecard and
customized reporting
10 of results
● Continuous improvement
10 ● Optional ensured
performance
improvements and
10 ensured savings—typically,
15 percent savings over
10 two performance cycles
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Power System Analysis Software
10.7
Contents
Description Page
10
Power System Analysis Software 10
Features, Benefits and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-58
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Power System Analysis Software 10
Overview General Description 10
The extensive line of Eaton’s An extensive line of software Data integration is also
CYME Power Engineering is offered to help engineers offered to allow combining 10
Software features detailed model power systems, information from various
network modeling, advanced manage network assets, enterprise systems (GIS,
analysis and specialized improve system reliability and SCADA, MDM/AMI/CIS,
10
calculations for transmission, power quality, and optimize OMS, DMS) into a single
distribution and industrial network designs and complete network model 10
power systems. From design operations to consequently within the CYME Power
to planning to contingency yield an efficient and reliable Engineering Software, 10
scenario management, the network. The software providing high accuracy for
software allows system
operators and engineers to
offered includes: reliable network simulation.
Software solutions can also
10
quickly respond to changing
● CYME Power Engineering be integrated within different
network conditions and Software—transmission, IT environments.
10
threats. distribution and industrial
power network modeling 10
The evolution of the CYME and system analysis
software is highly driven by
the specific needs of the
● CYMCAP—ampacity and 10
temperature rise
utilities and electric industries calculations for power
to provide the cutting-edge cable installations
10
solution that tackles everyday ● CYMTCC—time
challenges and solves overcurrent protection 10
emerging issues.
● CYMGRD—substation
grounding grid design and 10
optimization
10
10
10
10
10
10
10

10
CYME Power Engineering Software
10 This flagship software is Transmission System Distribution System Industrial System Analysis
renowned for its analytical Analysis Analysis
10 capabilities on power
systems studies, user-
10 friendly interface and
extensive customization.
From detailed network
10 modeling to power flow, the
CYME Power Engineering ● Detailed modeling of
10 Software meets all analysis ● Detailed modeling of on- motors, variable frequency
needs for transmission, site generation: gas, hydro, ● Modeling of medium and drives
10 distribution and industrial steam, PV, diesel, wind, low voltage distribution ● Equipment sizing through
power systems. etc. feeders/circuits and short-circuit level and
10 ● Modeling of transmission associated equipment machine fault contribution
lines, DC line, static VAR ● Secondary network evaluation
10 compensators, FACTS,
STATCOM, UPFC
analysis and operation of ● Protective device analysis
network protectors and coordination
Load flow contingency
10 ●
analysis to establish
● Distribution capacity ● Motor starting analysis and
planning studies drive system specifications
optimal network operation
10 ● Transient stability analysis
● Distributed Energy ● Power quality assessment
Resources (DER) impact and filter design
to simulate studies
10 electromechanical ● Contingency scenario
● Arc flash hazard study for
transients in electrical risk level assessment
simulations and restoration
10 power systems
● Network optimization
● DC system modeling and
● System voltage stability analysis
through capacitor
10 assessment
placement, voltage
● Sizing of generation
facilities for islanding
● Optimal power flow regulator placement, operation
10 analysis for system recloser placement,
performance optimization network configuration
10 ● System reliability through
distance protection
through switching, load
balancing
10 ● Network-wide protection
analysis
10 ● Reliability assessment
through reliability indices,
fault analyses, arc flash
10 hazards calculations
● Leveraging AMI/AMR data
10 using the Steady-State
Analysis with load profiles
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10.7
CYMCAP Cable Ampacity Calculation Software CYMTCC Protective Device CYMGRD Grounding Grid Design
● Detailed cable modeling of Coordination Software and Analysis Software 10
any type of power cable:
single-core, three-core, 10
belted, pipe-type,
sheathed, armored, etc. 10
Both DC and AC circuits
are supported
● Support of various bonding
10
arrangements: single-point
The CYMCAP software is bonded, bonded at both
10
dedicated to rating ends (transposed or not), The CYMGRD software is a
underground power cables, in cross-bonded, etc.
The CYMTCC software
addresses time overcurrent substation grounding grid 10
order to determine the ● Modeling of standard and protection. With more than design and analysis program
maximum current that power non-standard installations: 15,000 protective devices specially developed to help 10
cables can carry without the duct bank, backfill, direct from more than 100 engineers optimize the
risk of damaging their
insulation throughout their in-
buried, buried in ducts, in manufacturers, this software design of new grids and 10
air, on riser poles, tunnels, is equipped with tools and reinforce existing grids.
service life. Therefore, the troughs (filled and unfilled),
software can help by multiple casings, etc.
analysis to help engineers ● Design of new grids and 10
validate protection schemes. modifications to existing
selecting the proper cable Calculation of the steady-
size and type required for a
●
state, cyclic, emergency

● Time-current curve plots, grids 10
particular application and and short-circuit current device settings report ● Finite element analysis
assessing the ratings of rating and operating ● Protective device library of ● Compliant with IEEE 80- 10
existing cables. CYMCAP is a temperatures of cables more than 15,000 devices 2000
key tool to optimize the
management of existing
● Compliance with IEC 287© from more than 100 ● Calculation of current split 10
and IEC-853© International different manufacturers factor
cable installations and to
design new ones, resulting in standards, Neher-McGrath ● IEEE/ANSI and IEC ● Uniform or two-layer soil 10
and IEEE© standards standards model
significant savings in the large
capital costs associated with ● Additional analysis such as ● Cable and conductor
damage curves, motor
● Sizing of grid conductors 10
cable installations. cable rating optimization and electrodes
for cables in duct bank, starting, transformer
sequence impedance withstand curves
● Computation of grid 10
resistance and ground
calculation, ● Coordination, loading,
electromagnetic field protective reach
potential rise 10
● Safety assessment for
computation and circuits ● Arc flash touch and step voltages
crossing analysis
● Potential contour and
10
● Modeling of heat sources/
profile plots
sinks, moisture migration 10
phenomenon (soil dry-out)
● Real-time thermal rating of 10
cables under temperature
monitoring (with
Distributed Temperature
10
Sensing (DTS) systems,
thermocouples, etc.) 10
● Evaluation of cables
operating temperature 10
history, which can help in
assessing their remaining 10
in-service life
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions
Effective Date: November 1, 2008
Eaton Terms & Conditions Contents

Description Page
Terms and Conditions of Sale. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-A1-1
Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-A1-2
Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-A1-3
Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-A1-3
Selling Policy (Supersedes Selling Policy 25-000, dated February 20, 2006)
Terms and Conditions of Sale
The Terms and Conditions of THE CONTRACT FOR SALE Quotations Termination and Cancellation
Sale set forth herein, and any OF THE PRODUCTS OR Written quotations are valid Any order may be terminated
supplements which may be SERVICES IS EXPRESSLY for 30 days from its date by the Buyer only by written
attached hereto, constitute LIMITED TO THE TERMS unless otherwise stated in notice and upon payment
the full and final expression AND CONDITIONS OF SALE the quotation or terminated of reasonable termination
of the contract for the sale STATED HEREIN. ANY sooner by notice. charges, including all costs
of products or services ADDITIONAL OR DIFFERENT plus profit.
(hereinafter referred to as TERMS PROPOSED BY Verbal quotations, unless
Product(s) or Services by BUYER ARE REJECTED accepted, expire the same Seller shall have the right to
Eaton Corporation UNLESS EXPRESSLY day they are made. cancel any order at any time
(hereinafter referred to as AGREED TO IN WRITING BY by written notice if Buyer
A complete signed order breaches any of the terms
Seller) to the Buyer, and SELLER. No contract shall
must be received by Seller hereof, becomes the subject
supersedes all prior exist except as herein
within 20 calendar days of of any proceeding under state
quotations, purchase orders, provided.
notification of award, or federal law for the relief
correspondence or otherwise the price and
communications whether Complete Agreement of debtors, or otherwise
shipment will be subject to becomes insolvent or
written or oral between the No amendment or re-negotiation.
Seller and the Buyer. modification hereto nor any bankrupt, generally does not
Notwithstanding any contrary statement, representation or pay its debts as they become
language in the Buyer’s warranty not contained herein due or makes an assignment
purchase order, shall be binding on the Seller for the benefit of creditors.
correspondence or other unless made in writing by an
form of acknowledgment, authorized representative of
Buyer shall be bound by the Seller. Prior dealings,
these Terms and Conditions usage of the trade or a course
of Sale when it sends a of performance shall not be
purchase order or otherwise relevant to determine the
indicates acceptance of this meaning of this contract even
contract, or when it accepts though the accepting or
delivery from Seller of the acquiescing party had
Products or Services. knowledge of the nature
of the performance and
opportunity for objection.
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100002E—December 2011 www.eaton.com V3-A1-1
Prices If the Buyer initiates or in Terms of Payment

All prices are subject to any way causes delays Products Except for work performed (i)
change without notice. In the in shipment, provision of under a firm fixed price basis
Services or return of approval Acceptance of all orders is
event of a price change, the subject to the Buyer meeting or (ii) pursuant to terms of a
effective date of the change drawings beyond the periods previously priced existing
stated above, the price of the Seller’s credit requirements.
will be the date of the new Terms of payment are subject contract between Seller and
price or discount sheet, letter Products or Services will be Buyer, invoices for work
increased 1% per month to change for failure to meet
or telegram. All quotations such requirements. Seller performed by Seller shall
made or orders accepted or fraction thereof up to a have added and noted on
maximum of 18 months from reserves the right at any time
after the effective date will be to demand full or partial each invoice a charge of 3%
on the new basis. For existing the date of the Buyer’s order. (over and above the price of
For delays resulting in payment before proceeding
orders, the price of the with a contract of sale as a the work) which is related
unshipped portion of an order shipment or provision of to Seller compliance with
Services beyond 18 months result of changes in the
will be the price in effect at financial condition of the present and proposed
time of shipment. from the date of the Buyer’s environmental, health, and
order, the price must be Buyer. Terms of Payment are
either Net 30 days from the safety regulations associated
Price Policy—Products and renegotiated. with prescribed requirements
Services date of invoice of each
shipment or carry a cash covering hazardous materials
When prices are quoted as Price Policy—BLS management and employee
discount based on Product
firm for quoted shipment, they Refer to Price Policy 25-050. training, communications,
type. Specific payment terms
are firm provided the following for Products are outlined in personal protective
conditions are met: Minimum Billing equipment, documentation
the applicable Product
Orders less than $1,000 will discount schedules. and record keeping
1. The order is released be assessed a shipping and associated therewith.
with complete handling charge of 5% of the
engineering details. Services
price of the order, with a Adequate Assurances
Terms of payment are net
2. Shipment of Products are minimum charge of $25.00 If, in the judgment of Seller,
within 30 days from date of
made, and Services unless noted differently on the financial condition of the
invoice for orders amounting
purchased are provided Product discount sheets. Buyer, at any time during the
to less than $50,000.00.
within the quoted period of the contract, does
lead time. Taxes Terms of payment for orders not justify the terms of
The price does not include exceeding $50,000.00 shall payment specified, Seller
3. When drawings for any taxes. Buyer shall be be made according to the may require full or partial
approval are required responsible for the payment following: payment in advance.
for any Products, the of all taxes applicable to, or
drawings applicable to arising from the transaction, 1. Twenty percent (20%) of Delayed Payment
those Products must be the Products, its sale, value, order value with the
purchase order payable If payments are not made in
returned within 30* or use, or any Services
30 days from date of accordance with these terms,
calendar days from the performed in connection
invoice. a service charge will, without
date of the original therewith regardless of prejudice to the right of Seller
mailing of the drawings the person or entity 2. Eighty percent (80%) of to immediate payment, be
by Seller. The return actually taxed. order value in equal added in an amount equal to
drawings must be
monthly payments over the lower of 1.5% per month
released for manufacture
the performance period or fraction thereof or the
and shipment and must
payable 30 days from highest legal rate on the
be marked “APPROVED”
date of invoice. unpaid balance.
or “APPROVED AS
NOTED.” Drawing
re-submittals which are
required for any other
reason than to correct
Seller errors will not
extend the 30-day period.
* 60 days for orders
through contractors
to allow time for their
review and approval
before and after
transmitting them
to their customers.
V3-A1-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100002E—December 2011 www.eaton.com
Freight Warranty
Freight policy will be listed on Risk of Loss Held Orders Warranty for Products
the Product discount sheets, Risk of loss or damage to the For any order held, delayed Seller warrants that the
or at option of Seller one of Products shall pass to Buyer or rescheduled at the request Products manufactured by
the following freight terms at the F.O.B. point. of the Buyer, Seller may, at it will conform to Seller’s
will be quoted. its sole option (1) require applicable specifications and
Concealed Damage payment to be based on any be free from failure due to
F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. and Except in the event of F.O.B. reasonable basis, including defects in workmanship and
Invoiced but not limited to the contract
destination shipments, Seller material for one (1) year from
Products are sold F.O.B. point will not participate in any price, and any additional the date of installation of
of shipment freight prepaid settlement of claims for expenses, or cost resulting the Product or eighteen (18)
and invoiced to the Buyer. concealed damage. from such a delay; (2) store months from the date of
Products at the sole cost and shipment of the Product,
F.O.B.—P/S—Frt./Ppd. When shipment has been risk of loss of the Buyer; and/ whichever occurs first.
and Allowed made on an F.O.B. destination or (3) charge to the Buyer
Products sold are delivered basis, the Buyer must unpack those prices under the In the event any Product fails
F.O.B. point of shipment, immediately and, if damage is applicable price policy. to comply with the foregoing
freight prepaid and included discovered must: Payment for such price, warranty Seller will, at its
in the price. expenses and costs, in any option, either (a) repair or
1. Not move the Products replace the defective
from the point of such event, shall be due by
F.O.B. Destination—Frt./Ppd. Buyer within thirty (30) days Product, or defective part or
and Allowed examination. component thereof, F.O.B.
from date of Seller’s invoice.
At Buyer’s option, Seller will 2. Retain shipping container Any order so held delayed or Seller’s facility freight
deliver the Products F.O.B. and packing material. rescheduled beyond six (6) prepaid, or (b) credit Buyer
destination freight prepaid months will be treated as a for the purchase price of the
and 2% will be added to the 3. Notify the carrier in Buyer termination. Product. All warranty claims
net price. writing of any apparent shall be made in writing.
damage. Drawing Approval
The term “freight prepaid” Seller requires all non-
means that freight charges 4. Notify Seller Seller will design the conforming Products be
will be prepaid to the representative within Products in line with, in returned at Seller’s expense
accessible common carrier 72 hours of delivery. Seller’s judgment, good for evaluation unless
delivery point nearest the commercial practice. If at specifically stated otherwise
5. Send Seller a copy of drawing approval Buyer in writing by Seller.
destination for shipments the carrier’s inspection
within the United States and makes changes outside of
report. the design as covered in their This warranty does not
Puerto Rico unless noted cover failure or damage
differently on the Product specifications, Seller will then
Witness Tests/Customer be paid reasonable charges due to storage, installation,
discount sheets. For any Inspection operation or maintenance not
other destination contact and allowed a commensurate
Standard factory tests may be delay in shipping date based in conformance with Seller’s
Seller’s representative. witnessed by the Buyer recommendations and
on the changes made.
at Seller’s factory for an industry standard practice
Shipment and Routing
additional charge calculated Drawing Re-Submittal or due to accident, misuse,
Seller shall select the point of at the rate of $2,500 per day abuse or negligence. This
origin of shipment, the When Seller agrees to do so
(not to exceed eight (8) hours) in its quotation, Seller shall warranty does not cover
method of transportation, the per Product type. Buyer may reimbursement for labor,
type of carrier equipment and provide Buyer with the first
final inspect Products at the set of factory customer gaining access, removal,
the routing of the shipment. Seller’s factory for $500 per installation, temporary power
approval drawing(s) at Seller’s
If the Buyer specifies a day per Product type. expense. The customer or any other expenses, which
special method of approval drawing(s) will be may be incurred in connection
Witness tests will add one (1) with repair or replacement.
transportation, type of carrier week to the scheduled delivered at the quoted
equipment, routing, or shipping date. Seller will delivery date. If Buyer This warranty does not
delivery requirement, Buyer notify Buyer fourteen (14) requests drawing changes apply to equipment not
shall pay all special freight calendar days prior to or additions after the initial manufactured by Seller.
and handling charges. scheduled witness testing factory customer approval Seller limits itself to
or inspection. In the event drawing(s) have been extending the same warranty
When freight is included in submitted by Seller, the
the price, no allowance will Buyer is unable to attend, the it receives from the supplier.
Parties shall mutually agree Seller, at its option, may
be made in lieu of assess Buyer drawing
transportation if the Buyer on a rescheduled date.
However, Seller reserves charges. Factory customer
accepts shipment at factory, approval drawing changes
warehouse, or freight station the right to deem the witness
tests waived with the right to required due to
or otherwise supplies its own misinterpretation by Seller
transportation. ship and invoice Products.
will be at Seller’s expense.
Approval drawings generated
by Bid Manager are excluded
from this provision.
Extended Warranty for Products Warranty for Services Warranty for Power Systems Asbestos
If requested by the Buyer and Seller warrants that the Studies Federal Law requires that
specifically accepted in Services performed by it Seller warrants that any building or facility owners
writing by Seller, the hereunder will be performed power systems studies identify the presence,
foregoing standard warranty in accordance with generally performed by it will conform location and quantity of
for Products will be extended accepted professional to generally accepted asbestos containing material
from the date of shipment for standards. professional standards. Any (hereinafter “ACM”) at work
the period and price indicated portion of the study, which sites. Seller is not licensed to
below: The Services, which do not does not so conform, shall abate ACM. Accordingly, for
so conform, shall be be corrected by Seller upon any contract which includes
● 24 months—2% of corrected by Seller upon notification in writing by the the provision of Services,
Contract Price notification in writing by the Buyer within six (6) months prior to (i) commencement of
● 30 months—3% of Buyer within one (1) year after completion of the study. work at any site under a
Contract Price after completion of the All warranty work shall be specific Purchase Order, (ii) a
● 36 months—4% of Services. performed in a single shift change in the work scope of
Contract Price Unless otherwise agreed to in straight time basis Monday any Purchase Order, the
writing by Seller, Seller through Friday. In the event Buyer will certify that the
Special Warranty (In and Out) assumes no responsibility that the study requires work area associated with the
for Products with respect to the suitability correction of warranty items Seller’s scope of work
If requested by the Buyer of the Buyer’s, or its on an overtime schedule, includes the handling of Class
and specifically accepted in customer’s, equipment or the premium portion of such II ACM, including but not
writing by Seller, Seller will, with respect to any latent overtime shall be for the limited to generator wedges
during the warranty period defects in equipment not Buyer’s account. and high temperature gaskets
for Products, at an additional supplied by Seller. This which include asbestos
cost of 2% of the contract warranty does not cover Limitation on Warranties for materials. The Buyer shall, at
price, be responsible for the Products, Services and Power its expense, conduct
damage to Buyer’s, or its Systems Studies
direct cost of: customer’s, equipment, abatement should the
components or parts THE FOREGOING removal, handling,
1. Removing the Product WARRANTIES ARE modification or reinstallation,
resulting in whole or in part
from the installed EXCLUSIVE EXCEPT FOR or some or all of them, of said
from improper maintenance
location. WARRANTY OF TITLE. Class II ACM be likely to
or operation or from their
deteriorated condition. Buyer SELLER DISCLAIMS ALL generate airborne asbestos
2. Transportation to the
will, at its cost, provide Seller OTHER WARRANTIES fibers; and should such
repair facility and return
with unobstructed access INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED abatement affect the cost
to the site.
to the defective Services, WARRANTIES OF of or time of performance
3. Reinstallation on site. as well as adequate free MERCHANTABILITY of the work then Seller shall
working space in the AND FITNESS FOR A be entitled to an equitable
The total liability of Seller for PARTICULAR PURPOSE. adjustment in the schedule,
this Special Warranty for immediate vicinity of the
defective Services and such price and other pertinent
Products is limited to 50% CORRECTION OF NON-
facilities and systems, affected provisions of
of the contract price of the CONFORMITIES IN THE
including, without limitation, the contract.
particular Product being MANNER AND FOR THE
repaired and excludes docks, cranes and utility PERIOD OF TIME PROVIDED
disconnects and connects, Compliance with Nuclear
expenses for removing ABOVE SHALL CONSTITUTE Regulation
adjacent apparatus, walls, as may be necessary in order SELLER’S SOLE LIABILITY
that Seller may perform its Seller’s Products are sold as
piping, structures, temporary AND BUYER’S EXCLUSIVE
warranty obligations. The commercial grade Products
service, etc. REMEDY FOR FAILURE OF
conducting of any tests shall SELLER TO MEET ITS not intended for application in
be mutually agreed upon and facilities or activities licensed
WARRANTY OBLIGATIONS,
Seller shall be notified of, and by the United States Nuclear
WHETHER CLAIMS OF
may be present at, all tests THE BUYER ARE BASED Regulatory Commission for
that may be made. atomic purposes. Further
IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
certification will be required
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
OR STRICT LIABILITY), OR for use of the Products in any
OTHERWISE. safety-related application in
any nuclear facility licensed
by the U.S. Nuclear
Regulatory Commission.
V3-A1-4 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100002E—December 2011 www.eaton.com
Returning Products Patent Infringement Limitation of Liability

Authorization and shipping Seller will defend or, at its The preceding paragraph THE REMEDIES OF THE
instructions for the return option, settle any suit or does not apply to any claim of BUYER SET FORTH IN THIS
of any Products must be proceeding brought against infringement based upon: (a) CONTRACT ARE EXCLUSIVE
obtained from Seller before Buyer, or Buyer’s customers, any modification made to a AND ARE ITS SOLE
returning the Products. to the extent it is based upon Product other than by Seller; REMEDIES FOR ANY
a claim that any Product or (b) any design and/or FAILURE OF SELLER
When return is occasioned part thereof, manufactured by specifications of Buyer to TO COMPLY WITH ITS
due to Seller error, full credit Seller or its subsidiaries and which a Product was OBLIGATIONS HEREUNDER.
including all transportation furnished hereunder, manufactured; or (c) the use
charges will be allowed. infringes any United States or combination of Product NOTWITHSTANDING
patent, other than a claim of with other products where ANY PROVISION IN THIS
Product Notices infringement based upon use CONTRACT TO THE
the Product does not itself
Buyer shall provide the user of a Product or part thereof in infringe. As to the above- CONTRARY, IN NO EVENT
(including its employees) of a process, provided Seller is identified claim situations SHALL SELLER BE LIABLE
the Products with all Seller notified in reasonable time where the preceding IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
supplied Product notices, and given authority, paragraph does not apply, (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
warnings, instructions, information and assistance Buyer shall defend and hold OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR
recommendations, and (at Seller’s expense) for the Seller harmless in the same OTHERWISE FOR DAMAGE
similar materials. defense of same. Seller shall manner and to the extent as TO PROPERTY OR
pay all legal and court costs Seller’s obligations described EQUIPMENT OTHER THAN
Force Majeure and expenses and court- in the preceding paragraph. PRODUCTS SOLD
Seller shall not be liable for assessed damages awarded Buyer shall be responsible for HEREUNDER, LOSS OF
failure to perform or delay therein against Buyer obtaining (at Buyer’s PROFITS OR REVENUE,
in performance due to fire, resulting from or incident to expense) all license rights LOSS OF USE OF
flood, strike or other labor such suit or proceeding. In required for Seller to be able PRODUCTS, COST OF
difficulty, act of God, act of addition to the foregoing, if at to use software products in CAPITAL, CLAIMS OF
any governmental authority or any time Seller determines the possession of Buyer CUSTOMERS OF THE
of the Buyer, riot, embargo, there is a substantial question where such use is required in BUYER OR ANY SPECIAL,
fuel or energy shortage, car of infringement of any United order to perform any Service INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR
shortage, wrecks or delays in States patent, and the use of for Buyer. CONSEQUENTIAL
transportation, or due to any such Product is or may be DAMAGES WHATSOEVER,
other cause beyond Seller’s enjoined, Seller may, at its With respect to a Product or
part thereof not manufactured REGARDLESS OF WHETHER
reasonable control. In the option and expense: either (a) SUCH POTENTIAL
event of delay in performance procure for Buyer the right to by Seller or its subsidiaries,
Seller will attempt to obtain DAMAGES ARE
due to any such cause, the continue using and selling the FORESEEABLE OR IF
date of delivery or time for Product; (b) replace the for Buyer, from the supplier(s),
the patent indemnification SELLER HAS BEEN ADVISED
completion will be extended Product with non-infringing OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
by a period of time reasonably apparatus; (c) modify the protection normally provided
by the supplier(s) to SUCH DAMAGES.
necessary to overcome the Product so it becomes non-
effect of such delay. infringing; or (d) as a last customers. THE TOTAL CUMULATIVE
resort, remove the Product LIABILITY OF SELLER
Liquidated Damages and refund the purchase ARISING FROM OR
Contracts which include price, equitably adjusted for RELATED TO THIS
liquidated damage clauses for use and obsolescence. In no CONTRACT WHETHER
failure to meet shipping or job case does Seller agree to pay THE CLAIMS ARE BASED
completion promises are not any recovery based upon its IN CONTRACT, IN TORT
acceptable or binding on Buyer’s savings or profit (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE
Seller, unless such clauses through use of Seller’s OR STRICT LIABILITY) OR
are specifically accepted in Products whether the use be OTHERWISE, SHALL NOT
writing by an authorized special or ordinary. The EXCEED THE PRICE OF THE
representative of the Seller at foregoing states the entire PRODUCT OR SERVICES
its headquarters office. liability of Seller for patent ON WHICH SUCH LIABILITY
infringement. IS BASED.
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index
A PSG6 . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-291
ARII . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-308 PXD . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
PXE . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
B PXG9 . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-291
BIM . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-311 PXI . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-4
BLR . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-5 PXM . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
PXM2 . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40, V3-T9-47
D PX-P . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
DIM . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-306
DPONI . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303
Q
DP4 . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-74 Q250 . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
DT3 . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-152
S
E SP0 . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
ELC-P . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297 SP1 . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-26, V3-T5-5
SP2 . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-28
ER-IQ. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-210
S02. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-108
S05. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-108
G
S06. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-108
GFR . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281, V3-T9-282
S08. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-108
S09. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-108
H
S21. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-5
HCU2. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-84
S61. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-5
HMURFY . . . . . . . V3-T2-57
HURF. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-56
T
T100. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-45, V3-T2-46
I
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74, V3-T9-302
U
IQA . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74, V3-T9-117
URT . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-210, V3-T9-223, V3-T9-272
IQD . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-74
URTD . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-284
IQES . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-101
IQF . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74, V3-T9-119
Numerics
IQM . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74
100M . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
IQ2 . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-80
100T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
IQ25 . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40, V3-T9-47, V3-T9-52
1000T. . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
IQ3 . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-62
1100T. . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
1200T. . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69
J
1234. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
JMR. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-50 125M . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
125T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69
M 1255. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281
MP. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74 1256. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281
MPF. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-284 1257. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281
MPONI . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68, V3-T9-74, V3-T9-304 1283. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281
MP3. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-191 150T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
MP4. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-202 179C . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-281
M00. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-109 200T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
M03. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-110 25M . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
M04. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-110 250T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
M05. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-109 300T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
M06. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-110 350T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
M08. . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-110 400T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
450T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
P 50M . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63
PCRMA . . . . . . . . V3-T2-48 500T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
PCRMB . . . . . . . . V3-T2-48 550T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
PHRMB . . . . . . . . V3-T2-48 600T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
PMURF . . . . . . . . V3-T2-54, V3-T2-55 66B . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-272
Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—March 2016 www.eaton.com V3-A2-1
Appendix 2—Catalog Parent Number Index
660T . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68 752B . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282

700T . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75 800T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
720T . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68
75M . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-63 900T. . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69, V3-T2-70, V3-T2-75
75T . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-68, V3-T2-69
V3-A2-2 Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—March 2016 www.eaton.com
Appendix 3—Alphabetical Product Index
A F10 Unitrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3

Freedom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
Freedom Unitrol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard) . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
IT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Connectivity Options, Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
DIN Rail Mounting Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297 Series 2100/5 Star . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297 Type W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Rack Mount Tray, 19-inch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297 XT and XT FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Control and Distribution Equipment Packaging. . . . . . . V3-T3-7 Ammeter Kit
FlashGard Locking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7 Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
FlashGard Remote Racking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Ground and Test Device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies . . V3-T5-2–V3-T5-6
Optional . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6 AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers
Supplemental Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6 Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-39
Metering Devices, IQ 130/140/150 Series Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies
Panel Mounting Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-52 Power System Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-12
Metering Devices, IQ 250/260 Meter
Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System Conversions
Panel Mounting Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47
Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
PXM 2000 Gateway Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47
Metering Devices, IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series Arc-Resistant AMPGARD
IQ Auxiliary Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68 AMPGARD Motor Control
Metering Devices, IQ DP-4000 Series Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies. . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
I/O Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-74 Asset Optimization, Knowledge Management and Product
Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series Life Extension
Panel Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40 Power System Studies, Field Services and
PXM 2000 Gateway Upgrade Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40 Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Automatic Insulation Tester (Motorguard) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
Communication Expansion Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
AUTOVAR 300
Digital I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-61
Graphic Display Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
Panel Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28 AUTOVAR 600
Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 License Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-65
Upgrade Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28 AUTOVAR Filter
Protective Relays, Digitrip 3000 Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-72
Drawout Case. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-152
Dual-Source Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-152
B
Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
Ammeter Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282 Bid Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-2
Face Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282 Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II)
Ground Fault Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282 Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity . . . V3-T9-309
Shunt Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Busway Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-1–V3-T1-7
Test Panel (120 Vac). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Medium Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2–V3-T1-7
Protective Relays, MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . V3-T9-191
Medium Voltage Busway—Nonsegregated
Protective Relays, MP-4000 Motor Protection . . . . . V3-T9-202
Phase Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2–V3-T1-7
Protective Relays, Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . V3-T9-284
Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision). . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
C
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-307 C-HRG Free-Standing NEMA 1 Unit
High Resistance Grounding System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
Advanced Analysis and Design Services
Power System Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19 Circuit Breaker Specialized Services
Field Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-28
Advantage
Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3 Clamp-On Current Transformers
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
AEGIS Powerline Filters
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-29 CM52
Aftermarket Products Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2
11-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3 Commercial and Light Industrial Surge Protection
9800 Unitrol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3 PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
Advantage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Communication Expansion Card Limitation of Liability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-5

Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Terms and Conditions of Sale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-1
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28 Terms of Payment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2
Connectivity Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287–V3-T9-312 Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity EDR-3000 Feeder Protection

Addressable Relay II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-307 Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159
Breaker Interface Module II (BIM II). . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-309 Electrical System Modernization
DPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-303 Field Engineering Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-26
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM) . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-305 Electronic Self-Enclosed Meters
IPONI. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-302 IQ 150S/250S. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-56
mMINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-300
Electronic Voltage Regulator
MPONI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-304
Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-38
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-296
Power Xpert Gateway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287 Enclosed Meters
Consulting and Turnkey Project Management
Field Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-23 Energy and Power Monitoring Software . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-2–V3-T9-5
Control and Distribution Equipment Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7 ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-242
Critical Load Protection
PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
F
F10 Unitrol
Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Customer Manufacturing and Solutions Centers . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-2
Face Plate
Customized High Resistance Grounding Units Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
Power System Studies, Field Services and Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-11
Field Engineering Services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-23–V3-T10-28
CVL Surge Protective Device
Circuit Breaker Specialized Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-28
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
Consulting and Turnkey Project Management. . . . . . V3-T10-23
CVX050/100 Electrical System Modernization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-26
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-22 Predictive and Preventive Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-25
Startup and Commissioning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-25
D System Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-24
Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-24
Digital I/O Card
Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 FlashGard Locking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28 FlashGard Remote Racking Accessory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
Digitrip 3000 FP-5000 Feeder Protection
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149 Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits Freedom
Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-46 Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
DIN Rail Mounting Bracket Freedom Unitrol
Connectivity Options, Power Xpert Ethernet Switches Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant and Freedom FlashGard
DPONI Motor Control Centers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-8
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-303
Drawout Air Circuit Breaker Design G
Network Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2, V3-T8-3 Graphic Display Module
Drawout Case Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Protective Relays, Digitrip 3000 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-152 Ground and Test Device
Dual-Source Power Supply Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear
Protective Relays, Digitrip 3000 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-152 Ground Fault Relay
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-280
E Ground Fault Warning Indicator
Eaton Terms & Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-1 Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
Freight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-3 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
H Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-1–V3-T4-8

Magnum DS Metal-Enclosed. . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2–V3-T4-6
Harmonic Analysis Study
Primary Unit Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-7, V3-T4-8
Power System Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17
Secondary Unit Substations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-7, V3-T4-8
HCU2 Active-Harmonic Filter-Harmonic Correction Unit—NEMA 1
Enclosure
M
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-2–V3-T4-6
C-HRG Free-Standing NEMA 1 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17–V3-T7-25 Main Breaker AMPGARD
I Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies. . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
MCC Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-2
I/O Devices Digital Input Module (DIM)
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-305 MCC Replacement Units
Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
I/O Module
Metering Devices, IQ DP-4000 Series Medium and High Voltage Predictive Diagnostics
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-74 Online Monitoring and Partial Discharge Analysis
Predictive Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-32
Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection
PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2 Medium Voltage Busway. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-1–V3-T1-7
Power-Suppress 100. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-44 Nonsegregated Phase Bus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2
Power-Sure 800 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 Medium Voltage Busway—Nonsegregated Phase Bus
Instant Response Center Services Busway Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2–V3-T1-7
Power System Studies, Field Services and Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. . . . . . V3-T6-1–V3-T6-12
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10 Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB . V3-T6-5, V3-T6-6
IPONI Medium Voltage Switch—MVS . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-3, V3-T6-4
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-302 Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-7, V3-T6-8
OEM Medium Voltage Switch Components—
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters
MVS-C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-11, V3-T6-12
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-51
Unitized Power Centers—UPC . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T6-9, V3-T6-10
IQ 210/220/230 Meters
Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies . . . . . . V3-T5-1–V3-T5-6
AMPGARD Motor Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-2–V3-T5-6
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters Arc-Resistant AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-45 Main Breaker AMPGARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
IQ 35M Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starters . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61 SC 9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T5-2
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series Medium Voltage Switch and Breaker—MSB

Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-64 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. . . V3-T6-5, V3-T6-6
IQ Auxiliary Power Supply Medium Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-1–V3-T7-25

Metering Devices, IQ Analyzer High Resistance Grounding System . . . . . . V3-T7-17–V3-T7-25
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-68 4200V Delta Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
4200V Wye Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
IQ DP-4000 Series
Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-4–V3-T7-16
26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear . . . V3-T7-7
IQ Energy Sentinel Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
IQ Flange Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. . . V3-T6-3, V3-T6-4
Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement Circuit Breakers
IT. Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
L 26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear . . . V3-T7-7
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear, VCP-W
Power System Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-15 Accessories
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter Replacement Ground and Test Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50 Medium Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-4–V3-T7-16
Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Reconditioning Metal-Enclosed Breaker—MEB
Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-41 Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. . . V3-T6-7, V3-T6-8
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-6–V3-T9-142 O

Clamp-On Current Transformers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-116
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches. V3-T6-11, V3-T6-12
Enclosed Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-121
IQ 130/140/150 Series Electronic Power Meters . . . . V3-T9-51
P
IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-56
IQ 210/220/230 Meters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-78 Panel Mounting Adapter
IQ 250/260 Series Electronic Power Meters. . . . . . . . V3-T9-45 Metering Devices, IQ 130/140/150 Series
IQ 35M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-61 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-52
IQ Analyzer 6400/6600 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-64 Metering Devices, IQ 250/260 Meter
IQ DP-4000 Series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-72 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47
IQ Energy Sentinel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-97 Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series and
IQ Flange. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-119 PXM 2000 Meters
Panel Mounting Adapter Kit for IQ 100/200 Series Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120
and PXM 2000 Meters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-120 Panel Mounting Bracket
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-15 Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-34 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85 Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-7 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
Metering Devices, Protective Relays, Software and Partial Discharge Testing
Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-1–V3-T9-312 Predictive Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-29
Connectivity Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-287
PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters
Energy and Power Monitoring Software. . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-2
Commercial and Light Industrial Surge Protection . . . . V3-T2-2
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-6
Critical Load Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143
Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2
mMINT Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-3
PM3 Monitoring and Metering Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-106
Monitoring Software and Reporting
Power Conditioning
Power Xpert Insight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-2 Electronic Voltage Regulator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-38
Motor Control Centers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-1–V3-T3-27 PF Capacitors and Harmonic Filters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-3
Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3 Sag Ride-Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-34
Freedom, Freedom Arc-Resistant and Freedom Power Factor Correction and Harmonic Filtering
FlashGard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-8
SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and
MP-3000 Motor Protection Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-47–V3-T2-84
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-189 Power Factor Correction Capacitors
MP-4000 Motor Protection AUTOVAR 300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-61
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-199 AUTOVAR 600 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-65
MPCV AUTOVAR Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-72
Network Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4 HCU2 Active-Harmonic Filter-Harmonic
Correction Unit—NEMA 1 Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-81
MPONI Transient-Free Static Switching Power Factor
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-304 Correction Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-79
UNIPAK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-52
N UNIPUMP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-49
NEMA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17 Power Supply
Network Protector Aftermarket Connectivity Options, Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Rebuild and Parts Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
Power System Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19–V3-T10-22
Network Protectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-1–V3-T8-5
Advanced Analysis and Design Services . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-19
CM52 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2
Arc Flash, Short-Circuit and Coordination Studies . . . V3-T10-12
Drawout Air Circuit Breaker Design . . . . . . . . V3-T8-2, V3-T8-3
Harmonic Analysis Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-17
Network Protector Aftermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5
Load Flow/Power Factor Correction Study . . . . . . . . V3-T10-15
Network Relay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4
Power System Studies, Field Services and
Network Relay
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-1–V3-T10-54
MPCV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4
Network Protectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-4 Product Life Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-5
Nonsegregated Phase Bus Customized High Resistance Grounding Units . . . . . V3-T10-11
Medium Voltage Busway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-2 Instant Response Center Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10
Overview of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-10 Reduced Voltage Solid-State Starters

Power Systems Automation Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8 AMPGARD Motor Control
Power Systems Automation Group Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies. . . . . . . . V3-T5-3
Power System Studies, Field Services and Renewal Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-8 Retrofit Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34–V3-T10-54
Power Xpert 4000/6000/8000 Series AR Series Low Voltage Replacement Breakers . . . . V3-T10-39
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-15 Arcflash Reduction Maintenance System
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-45
Power Xpert Ethernet Switches
Digitrip Microprocessor Trip Unit Retrofit Kits. . . . . . V3-T10-46
Low Voltage Breaker Drawout Vacuum Starter
Power Xpert Gateway Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-50
Connectivity Options, Software and Connectivity. . . V3-T9-287 Low Voltage Power Circuit Breaker Reconditioning . V3-T10-41
Power Xpert Insight MCC Replacement Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-52
Monitoring Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-2 Medium Voltage Vacuum Replacement
Circuit Breakers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-34
Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-34 S
Power Xpert Meter 4000 to 6000 License Upgrade Key
Sag Ride-Through
Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 4000/6000/8000 Power Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-34
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-28
SC 9000 Adjustable Frequency Drive
Power Xpert Multi-Point Meter AMPGARD Motor Control
Metering Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-85 Medium Voltage Motor Control Assemblies. . . . . . . . V3-T5-2
Power-Suppress 100 Secondary Unit Substations
Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection. . . . . . . . V3-T2-44 Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-7, V3-T4-8
Power-Sure 800 Seismic Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-2
Industrial and Commercial Surge Protection. . . . . . . . V3-T2-40 Self-Enclosed Electronic Meters
Predictive and Preventive Maintenance IQ 150S/250S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-56
Field Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-25 Series 2100/5 Star
Predictive Diagnostic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-32–V3-T10-33 Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Medium and High Voltage Predictive Diagnostics Shunt Trip
Online Monitoring and Partial Discharge Analysis . V3-T10-32 Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
Partial Discharge Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-29 Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Primary Unit Substations SP1 Surge Protective Device
Low Voltage Switchgear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T4-7, V3-T4-8 Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-25
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143–V3-T9-286 SP2 Surge Protective Device
Digitrip 3000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-149 Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27
EDR-3000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-159 SPD MAX Series Surge Protection
ETR-4000 Transformer Protection Relay. . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-242 Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-16
FP-5000 Feeder Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-181
SPD Series Integrated Units
Ground Fault Relay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-280
Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-7
MP-3000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-189
MP-4000 Motor Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-199 SPD Series Sidemount Units
Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-143 Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-11
Universal RTD Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283 SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and
Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-1–V3-T2-84
PXM 2000 Gateway Upgrade Kit
Power Factor Correction and Harmonic
Metering Devices, IQ 250/260 Meter Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-47–V3-T2-84
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-47 Surge Protection and Power Conditioning. . . V3-T2-2–V3-T2-46
Metering Devices, Power Xpert Meter 2000 Series Surge Protective Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-5–V3-T2-26
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-40
Startup and Commissioning
R
Supplemental Devices
Rack Mount Tray, 19-inch Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear
Connectivity Options, Power Xpert Ethernet Switches Accessories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-6
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-297
Rebuild and Parts Program SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and
Network Protector Aftermarket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T8-5 Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-2–V3-T2-46
Surge Protective Devices Numerics

AEGIS Powerline Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-29
11-300
CVL Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-20
CVX050/100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-22
SP1 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-25 26-Inch Wide, 5 kV, 250 MVA, 1200A Switchgear
SP2 Surge Protective Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-27 Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear
SPD MAX Series Surge Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-16 Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-7
SPD Series Integrated Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-7 4200V Delta Systems
SPD Series Sidemount Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-11 High Resistance Grounding System
SPD, Power Conditioning, PF Capacitors and Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
Harmonic Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T2-5–V3-T2-26 4200V Wye Systems
System Integration High Resistance Grounding System
Field Engineering Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T10-24 Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-17
9800 Unitrol
T Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3
Test Panel (120 Vac)
Protective Relays, Ground Fault Relay
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-282
Training
Transient-Free Static Switching Power Factor Correction Units
Type W
U
UNIPAK
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . V3-T2-52–V3-T2-60
UNIPUMP
Power Factor Correction Capacitors . . . . . . V3-T2-49–V3-T2-51
Medium Voltage Metal-Enclosed Switches . V3-T6-9, V3-T6-10
Protective Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T9-283
V
VCP-W, Metal-Clad Vacuum Switchgear
Medium Voltage Switchgear. . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T7-4–V3-T7-16
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T1-1
Voltage Presence Indicator (VoltageVision) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-7
X
XT
XT and XT FlashGard
Aftermarket Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V3-T3-3

Eaton PDF

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Titolo originale

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Eaton PDF

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 3 Power Distribution and Control Assemblies

© 2010 Eaton Corporation

Dimensions, Weights and Ratings

Terms and Conditions

Technical and Descriptive Publications

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21

Copyright ©2016 Eaton, All Rights Reserved.

Eaton is a global leader in power distribution, power quality,

Using the Eaton Catalog Library

Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—April 2014 www.eaton.com i

ii Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies CA08100004E—April 2014 www.eaton.com

1.1 Medium Voltage Busway—Nonsegregated Phase Bus

nonsegregated phase bus A variety of terminations is

Medium Voltage Nonsegregated Phase Bus—Standard Configurations

1 Optional CL Optional CL Optional CL

1 Steel Enclosures (Steel, Stainless Steel and Galvanized Steel)

For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.

27 kV/38 kV Nonsegregated Phase Bus—–Standard Configurations

1 27 kV Bus Rated up to 108 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second

1 38 kV Bus Rated up to 104 kA Peak Momentary, 40 kA rms Symmetrical 2 Second

For dimensions in mm, multiply inches by 25.4.

within Eaton’s electrical protection filtering, Form C contacts

2 Application Type Eaton’s Surge Product Features and Competitive Advantages

2 Including: SPD Series integrated units in panelboards, switchboards,

2 WWTP SPD Series sidemount units

2 AEGIS units for critical load applications such as PLCs,

2 Any OEM customer including:

2 Medical equipment CVX units

2 Automation and control SP1 units

2 AEGIS units for critical load applications

Standards and Certifications

2 SPD Series Units Mounted Internal to Electrical Distribution Equipment

2 SPD 250 480D 2 J

FORM “C” CONTACTS

2 2.52 3.42 0.22

2 (86.9) 3.42 CAUTION 5.40

4.85 Terminals 0.22

5.78 9.50 4x #10–32 x 0.38 DP

protective devices are the oxide varistor (MOV) ● Canadian Standards

Catalog Number Selection

2 SPD 250 480D 2 K

2 240H = 240 high-leg delta (4W+G) on ‘B’ phase 1 1 = Basic

2 250–400 kA Units in a NEMA 1 Rated Enclosure,

0.76 3.36 10.18 Ø0.33

Technical Data and Specifications

2 Nominal discharge current (In) 20 kA

2 Circuit breaker—30 A Eaton catalog number: FDC3030L

2 Standard split-phase voltages available 120/240

2 Input power frequency 50/60 Hz

2 Form C relay contact ratings Maximum 0.46 A, 150 Vac, 1 A, 30 Vdc

Technical Data and Specifications

2 Peak surge current capacity ratings available

2 Short-circuit current rating (SCCR) 200 kA

2 Protection modes Single-phase: L-N, N-G, L-G

2 415Y and 480Y

2 240D 320 L-G, 300 L-L

2 Enclosure rating NEMA 4X enclosure 1

2 EMI/RFI filtering attenuation Up to 40 dB from 10 kHz to 100 MHz

2 SPC voltage configurations per enclosure size

2 240S = 50–100 kA 208Y/415Y/480Y/600Y = 120–200 kA

CVX050/100 Voltage Ratings

2 125DC Direct current 125 Vdc 2 288 — 144 — — — — —